SEIS le

AMERICAN IN TITUTE
OF
STEEL CONST UCTION
INe.

STRUCTURALSTEEL
EDUCATIONAL OUNCIL

¡
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !NC.
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CON TRUCTION, !Nc.
viii
1-1

PART1
GENERAL DESIGN CO SIDERATIONS

SEISMIC DESIGN OVERVIEW .............. . ........................ 1-2

Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ......................... 1-2
Earthquake Ground Motion and Structure Respon Spectra .................. 1-2
Seismic Use Groups, Maximum Considered Earth uake,
and Design Earthquake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ......................... 1-4
Seismic Design Category .................. . ........................ 1-5
ANALYSIS PROCEDURES ........................................... 1-5
Equivalent Lateral Force Method ............ ......................... 1-6
Response Modification Coefficient (R-factor) . .. . ........................ 1-6
R Equal to 3 Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ......................... 1-7
R Greater Than 3 Applications .............. ......................... 1-8
Redundancy Factors .....' .......... l. • • • • •• • ••••••••••••••• , ••••••• 1-10
Overstrength Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ....................... 1-10
LOAD COMBINATIONS USED IN DESIGN EXA LES ................... 1-10
Structural Deflection and Story Drift ......... . ....................... 1-11
Stability Coefficient ............... :....... ........................ 1-11
Drift Limits .................... ',' .............................. 1-12
i
TABLES ......................... ".' . . . . .. . ....................... 1-13
Table 1-1. Workable Seismic Weld Access Hole onfigurations ............. 1-13
Table 1-2. W-Shapes That Satisfy Seismic Local uckllng Requirements ...... 1-13
TabIe 1-3. Single Angles That Satisfy Seismic Lo al Buckling Requirements ... 1-14
Table 1-4. Rectangular and Square HSS That Sati fy Seismic Local
Bucking Requirements . . . . . . . . . .. . ....................... 1-14
TabIe 1-5. Round HSS That Satisfy Seismic Loc Buckling Requirements ..... 1-15
Table 1-6. Pipes That Satisfy Seismic Local Buc 'ng Requirements .......... 1-15
TabIe 1-7. Design Strength of Gusset PIates (F'y =
TabIe 1-8. Design Strength of Gusset PIates (F'y = 50 ksi) .................. 1-16
PART 1 REFERENCES ............................................. 1-17

AMERICAN !NSTm.rrn OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CON TRuenoN, !Nc.
 1-3
1-2 GENERAL DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS SEISMIC DESIGN OVERVIEW

SEISMIC DESIGN OVERVIEW

Terminology c::
o
Genera11y, seismic load resisting systems are c1assified into three levels of performance, des- e
~
ignated as ordinary, intermedia te, or special, depending on the level of ductility that the Q)

system is expected to provide. A system designated as ordinary is detailed to meet certain <C
8
ductility and redundancy requirements, but the requirements are not as stringent as those of
systems classified as intermediate or special. Also, structures not specifically designed or
detailed for seismic resistance by the Seismic Provisions are referred to as low-seismic 0.2 sec 1.0 sec Period, T
sttuctures throughout this SeisrnÍc Manual. It is important to note, however, that even low-
seisrnic steel strUctures possess sorne inherent amount of seismic resistance, which may be a) Typical acceleratlon s ectrum
adequate to resist a limited amount of seisri:ric demando See the discussion "R Equal to 3
Applications" below.

Eai1:hquake Ground· Motion and Structure Response Spectra l'

I
I

Earthquakes cause vibratory ground IilOtions that may occur in all directions. The horizon-
tal components of these motions produce horizontal ground accelerations, which cause ~-------- ..--*-~ I

structural accelerations and impart energy to the structure.

Earthquake motions are a complex combination of many displacements acting at differ- " ,_ _ _ :~2

ent vibration frequencies so that the energy imparted to the structure is caused by the
combined effect of many accelerations acting at many frequencies. A spectral plot of these Ground motion Ground motion
acceierations is a graphical surnrnary of the peak response (acceleration) for a large number
of ground motion natural periods of Vibration. b) Stiff structure (T '" o. sec)
Figure l-la (using natural period instead of frequency) shows a typical earthquake spec-
tral acceleration plot. Each point on the curve can be thought of as the amount of energy at
that vibration frequeIicy that the earthquake can impart to the structure. The closer the fun-
damental frequency of the structure is to a frequency containing energy, the more the I
I
I
structure will feel the earthquake. I
LW!~~_......""" J--l.---~~!f~
Figure l-la shows that for this ground motion most of the earthquake accelerations (and I I
I
hence the energy imparted into a stru~ture) fall in a natural period range of 0.2 second to 1.0 I
second. Thus, strUctures with natural periods in this range will collect more energy than ~-\!!"!!!~~...._"" "--,--~~!!II- -;
I
I I
structures with periods outside this range. A typical two-story building has a period near I I
0.2 second, and the period for a lO-story building is approximately 1.0 second. Since these I
¡-- --¡
I
frequencies are in the portion of the spectrum that contains most of the earthquake energy, I I
I I...._.-I!!!~~~---l
buildings with 10 stories and less tend to "feel" the earthquake more than taller structures. 1- - _~~~!too--'"
I

..._---......
I I
Low-rise buildings also tend to be stiff and tall structures tend to be flexible (Figures 1-1 b I I
and l-lc). Stiff structures tend to attract a larger percentage of displacement-induced force ~--""--_-01 ---,
1
than do flexible structures. For these two reasons, earthquake-induced forces in stiff struc- I

IiII_.
I
I
tures (genera11y those of 10 stories or less) tend to be a larger percentage of the structure's L __ ~~!!!'!!I--_", t--~!!"!!!!'~--~
weight than those in flexible (taller)structures. Tall, flexible structures generally experience
a greater total deflection (drift). c~-=-
I
I
__ ••__ ".-=-~":J
I

Multistory buildings are multi-degree-of-freedom systems and have multiple vibrational

modes. Each mode has a deflected shape and a period (or frequency) of vibration. Since an
H Ground motion Ground motion

earthquake ground motion contains a Spectrum of acceleration components (each contain-

e) Flexible structure (T >
ing energy), each acceleration frequeIicy that corresponds to a mode frequency imparts
energy into the structure. For example, Figure 1-2 shows a typical five-story building, which
behaves as a vertical column with a lumped mas s at each floor leve!. Application of a Figure 1-1. Earthquake acceleration a structure response.

AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INc. AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CON TRucnoN, !Nc.

... ~~c_~~~~~--~------~--_·- ---- --~--

 1-4 GENERAL DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS ANALYSIS PROCEDURES 1-5

code-specified earthquake design spectrum produces several mode-deflected shapes, the
most significant of which are shown. Although the deflected shapes are shown separately,
the actual building motion is based upon the combination of these deflected shapes that
occurs at any instant. The participation percentage indicates the mode(s) that "attract" the
greatest amount of energy from the earthquake. As can be seen, Mode 1 dominates the way .
this particular building responds to the earthquake. The participation percentages shown in
Figure 1-2 do not add up to 100 percent because there are additional modes whose partici-
pation is les s than 1 percent.
Seismic Use Groups, Maximum Considered Earthquake,
and Design Earthquake
The expected performance of a structure is determined by assigning it to a Seismic Use
Group (SUG). There are three SUGs (l, n, ID), based on the nature of the structure's OCCU-
pancy and the risk to society that would be a consequence of earthquake damage to the
structure. The SUGs are used in determining the Seismic Design Category (SDC) for a
structure. AIso, Importance Factors (1) are based on the SUG, and hence are related
to structure occupancy and use. The·Importance Factor, 1, is used in the Equivalent Lateral
Force analysis method (described later) to compute earthquake-induced forces on and in
the structure.
The NEHRP Provisions (FEMA 368/369) define earthquake ground motion hazards
based on the seismicity of the site. The approach of the NEHRP Provisions is intended to
provide a uniform margin against collapse at the design ground motion. In order to accom-
plish this, ground motion hazards are defined in terms of maximum considered earthquake
(MCE) ground motions.
The MCE ground motions are based on a set of rules that depend on the seismicity of an
individual region, while the design ground motions are based on a lower-bound estimate of
the margin against collapse inherent in structures de .gned to the NEHRP Provisions. This
lower-bound margin was judged, based on experien e, to correspond to the factor of 1.5
used to determine the design ground motion. Conse uently, the design earthquake ground
motion is established at a ground shaking level that is 1 1.5 (or 2/3) of the MCE ground motion.
For most regions of the nation, the MCEground otion is defined with a uniform prob-
ability of exceedence of 2 percent in 50 years, which orresponds to a return period of about
2500 years. While stronger shaking than this could occur, it is considered economically
impractical to design for such rare ground motions, d the selection of the 2-percent prob-
ability of exceedence in 50 years as the MCE grou motion is considered an acceptable
level of seismic safety.
Seismic Design Category
Buildings subject to seismic forces are designed o allow controlled inelastic, ductile
deformations of the system. A building's Seismic D sign Category (SDC) establishes the
minimum required performance level of the structu e, based on the location, soil condi-
tion, and intended occupancy. The SDC may limit e system types that are permitted for
use, based on the required leve! of ductile performan e for the structural system. There are
six SDCs, designated by the lbtters A through F, wi A being the leastsevere and F being
the most severe.
Determination of the SDC involves three primary eps. First, the mapped spectral accel-
erations for a building, Ss and S1> are determined fr m maps found in ASCE 7. Next, the
design earthquake accelerations at short periods, S ,and at one-second, SDI, are found
by adjusting the accelerations:Ss and SI for soil con itions, and then multiplying by 2/3 as
prescribed in ASCE 7. Finally, the design earthqu e accelerations and the Seismic Use
Groups are used to determine the SDC, according to SCE 7. The acceleration (SDS or SDI)
that yields the higher category must be used in desig .

ANALYSIS PROCEDURES
Seismic forces on the structure result from the later acceleration due to the earthquake
ground motion, essentially as a function of F = ma. he seismic force resisting system is
designed to resist the induced forces and dissipate t e energy causing the acceleration of
the structure.
ASCE 7 describes six procedures for determining e distortions and forces in structures
subject to earthquake ground motion. These are e order of increasing difficulty and
expected accuracy):
1. lndex Force procedure !
2. Simplified Analysis procedure
3. Equivalent Lateral Force (ELF) procedure
4. Modal Analysis procedure (response spectrum alysis)
The numbers al each ~: ~: ~: ~:
5. Push-over Analysis (an inelastic static analysis f progressive yielding through
floor level are !he relative Frequency: 027 Hz
masses that were usad
Penod: 3.70sec
Frequency: 0.80 Hz Frequency: 1.42 Hz Frequency: 2.12Hz the structure)
lo compute !he modal Penod: 1.25see Penod: 0.71 sec Penod: 0.47see
shapes shown. Participation: 79.2% Participation: 13.8% Participation: 5.4% Partieipalion: 1.5%
6. lnelastic Response History Analysis (~tepwise i tegration of equations of motion)
The index force and the simplified analysis procedures e "alternate" methods that have limited
Figure 1-2. Vibration modes for a multi-degree-of-freedom building caused by application of a application and must be approved by the authority hav· g jurisdiction. The remaining methods
typical earthquake acceleration design spectra. account for dissipation of earthquake input energy by inelastic distortion of the structure.
AMERICAN INsTlTUTE OF S1EEL CONSTRUCTION, INC.
AMERICAN INSTITU1E OF STEEL Co STRUCTION, INc.
 1-6 GENERAL DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
The Equivalent Lateral Force (ELF) procedure and the Modal Analysis procedure involve
linear elastic analyses that use earthquake effects adjusted to account for expected inelastic
behavior of the structure. Both are approximate methods of analysis useful within the
limitations of their applicability (see FEMA 369). The last two methods (Push-over
Analysis, Inelastic Response History Analysis) are generally not required except in spe-
cial situations.
According to ASCE 7, the Equivalent Lateral Force (ELF) analysis is permitted for aU
structures except those with certain structural irregularities, and the Modal Analysis is per-
mitted for all structures. Both analyses use four important seismic parameters: the response
modification coefficient, R; the overstrength factor, no; the deflection amplification factor,
Cd ; and the reliability or redundancy coefficient, p.
Equivalent Lateral Force Method
The Equivalent Lateral Force method involves the application of a set of representative or
equivalent forces on each level of the structure that produce horizontal deflections that
approximate the deflections caused by the ground motion. A total horizontal force, called
the seismic base shear, Vs , is fust computed. The base shear is di stributed "vertically to
each level of the structure as forces, F'x, at each level, x. A linear elastic analysis is then
performed to determine the seismic force effects, QE, (axial force, shear, moment) in the
structural components.
The base shear, Vs, depends on" estimated mass, stiffness, period of vibration, and damp-
ing of the structure, as well as the characteristics of the soil and the earthquake ground motion
accelerations. The magnitude of Vs also depends on the amount of earthquake energy that
the structure is expected to dissipate by inelastic distortion. A typical form of the expression
for Vs is
(Equation 1-1)
where:
[SDCA-D]
(Equation 1-2)
[SDC E-F]
SDS and SD1 are the design ground accelerations (based on structure and soil properties, as
well as spectral acceleration Ss and SI); 1 is the occupancy importance factor; Wis the effec-
tive seismic weight of the structure (the total dead load plus applicable portions of other
loads); T is the fundamental period of the structure, for which a simplified approximate
building period, Ta , may be used; and R is the response modification coefficient.
Response Modification Coefficient (R-factor)
The Seismic Design Category is used, along with the lateral system type, to establish a
minimum level of inelastic, ductil e performance that is required for a structure. The cor-
responding expected system performance is codified in the form of an R-factor, which is a
reduction factor applied to the lateral force to balance the level of ductility in a structural
system with the required strength of the system.
AMERICAN !NsTITU1E OF STEEL CONSTRUCfION, INC.
ANALYSIS PROCEDURES 1-7
The response modification coeÍficient, R, represents e ratio of forcés that w~uld develop
in the seismic load resisting syst~m (SLRS) under the s ecified ground motion ¡f the sttuc-
ture possessed apure linearly elastic response to the réscribed forces. When a higher
R-factor is applied, the system is expected to exhibit a gr ater deformation capacity and may
be designed for a lower equivalent lateral for~e in the linear elastic analysis. Figure 1-3
shows the relationship betweén R and thé design-Ievel D rces, along with the corresponding
lateral deformation of the structutal system (FEMA 200 ).
Factors that determine the magnitude of the response odification factor are the predicted
performance of the system subjected to strong ground m tion, the villnerability of the grav-
ity load resisting system to a failure of elements in the S RS, the level and reliability of the
inelasticity the system can attain,' and potential backiIp ame resistance such as that which
is provided by dual-frame systems. As illustrated in Figu e 1-3, in order for a system to uti-
lize higher R factors, the lateral system must have mlilti le yielding elements, and the other
elements of the system must have adequate strength and eformation capacity to remain sta-
ble at the maximum lateral deflection levels. If the system redundancy and element
overstrength cannot be achieved, a lower value of R shou be incorporated in the design and
detailing of the structure.
R Equal to 3 Applications ,
Buildings designed utilizing R equal to 3 must meet the req . ements of the AISC Specification
based upon the code-specified forces distributed through ut the framing. The resulting sys-
tems have ductility associated with conventional steel fr 'ng not specificalIy detailed for
high-seismic resistance. The Seismic Provisions are n t intended to apply to structures
~~------~~~--~-----+---------------d
Lateral Deformation (Dri ), d
Figure 1-3. Relationship between R, design levelfo es, and lateral defonrtation.
AMERICAN lNSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTR enON, !Nc.
1-8 GENERAL DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS ANALYSIS PROCEDURES 1-9

designed with R equal to 3 or less. These systems are permitted in Seismic Design The code-specified base accelerations used to calculat the seismic forces are not neces-
Categories A, B, and C, but not in Seismic Design Categories D, E, or F. sarily maximums. Rather, they nipresent the intensity f ground motions that have been
selected as reasonable for design purposes. Accordin y, the requirements in both the
R Greater Than 3 Applications Seismic Provisions and the Specification must be met to sure that the resulting frames can
R greater than 3 applications are intended for buildings that are designed to meet the require- undergo controlled deformations in a ductile, well-dis buted manner. The design provi-
ments of both the Seismic Provisions and the AlSC Specification. The use of R greater than sions are also intended to result in distributed deformatio s throughout the frame: to increase
3 in the calculation of the seismic base shear requires the use of a seismically detailed the level of available energy dissipation and correspondi g level of ground motion that can
system that is representative of the R selected in the designo Consider the foIlowing three be withstood.
examples: The connections will also be much more robust to tr smit the member-strength-based
force demands. Net sections will ofien require special ttention to avoid having fracture
1. Special Concentrically Braced Frame (SCBF) systems-SCBF systems are generally limit states control. Special material requirements, desig considerations, and construction
configured so that energy dissipation will occur by tension yielding and/or compres- practices must be followed.
sion buckling in the braces. The connections of the braces to the columns and beams
and between the columns and beams themselves must then be proportioned to remain
essentially elastic as they undergo these deformations. See Figure 1-4.
2. Eccentrically Braced Frame (EBF) systems-EBF systems are generally configured
so that energy dissipation will occur by shear yielding and/or flexural yielding in
the link. The beam outside the link, connections, braces, and columns must then be
proportioned to remain essentially elastic as they undergo these deformations. See
Figure 1-5.
3. Special Moment Frame (SMF) systems-SMF systems are generally configured so
that energy dissipation will occur by flexural yielding in the girders near, but away
from, the connection of the girders to the columns. The connections of the girders to
the columns and the columns themselves must then be proportioned to remain es sen-
tially elastic as they undergo these deformations. See Figure 1-6. ~I-==---I~ominally Elastic
lements
As a result of these special requirements, which force the deformations to occur in specific
locations, R greater than 3 design and construction will generally cost more than R equal to
3 design and construction.
Figure ]-5. Ductile EBF.

Buckling

Yielding

Nominally Elastic
Elements Yielding

Figure 1-4. Ductile braced frames. Figure 1-6. es.

AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INC. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRU ON, !Nc.
1-10 GENERAL DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
Redundancy Factors
Adequate redundancy is ensured when a large numbet of hinges form throughout the struc-
ture in a progressive manner and when no one element is required to provide full seismic
resistance of the structure. To account for a minimum level of redundancy in the structure,
the reliability factor, p, is used, based on the floor area and the number of frames resisting
the seismic force. When structureS do have redundancy, this factor ampiifies the lateral
forces used in the design of the lateral system. The elastic analysis of the SLRS is performed
using Vs based on the tabulated value of R, and p is applied to the resulting QE member
force effects.
For structures in SDCs A, B, and C, p = 1.0 is permitted. The reliability factor, p, must
be determined in accordance with ASCE 7 Section 12.3.4.2 and used for all structures in
SDCs D, E, and F. Because of the need for redundancy in Moment Fnimes and Braced
Frames, the special requirements of ASCE 7 Table 12.3-3 apply. Often, p in SDCs D, E, and
F will equal 1.3. These limitations are intended to provide sufficient redundancy in what are
typically drift-controlled systems.
Overstrength Factors
All seismic load resisting systems rely on dissipation of earthquake energy through sorne
varying level of inelastic behavior. However, ductility must be used with care, as the details
can affect the leve1 of ductility available. To account for this, an overstrength factor, no, is
used and the specific components that must be designed to remain nominally elastic are
designed for an amplified force, ºoQE' The locations where this factor must be considered
are stipulated in the Seismic Provisions.
LOAD COMBINATIONS USE O IN DESIGN EXAMPLES
Seismic Provisions Section 4.1 requires that the required strength be determined using the
loads, load factors, and load combinations stipulated in the Applicable Building Codeo In
current U.S. model building codes, these items are typically based onASCE 7. For this rea-
son, ASCE 7 is used as the basis for load determination herein. However, the presentation
. of 10ads ánd load combinations in this Seismic Manual differs slightly from that in ASCE 7.
Coilsider the load combinations given in ASCE 7 Section 2.3.2 (see also Section 12.4.2).
-For the case when the effects of the dead load and earthquake load are additive, the load
combination given is
1.2D + LOE + L + 0.2S (Equation 1-3)
and E is defined as
E = pQE + 0.2SDS D (Equation 1-4)
Substituting Equation 1-4 into Equation 1-3,
(1.2 +0.2SDS )D+ pQE +L+0.2S (Equation 1-5)
For the case when the effects of the dead load and earthquake load counteract, the load
combination given is
0.9D + 1.0E + 1.6H (Equation 1-6)
AMERICAN lNSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCI'rON, INC.
LOAD COMBINATIONS USED IN DESIGN EXAMPLES 1-11
and E is defined as
(Equation 1-7)
Substituting Equation 1-7 into Eq~ation 1-6 yields
(0.9-0.2S DS )D+pQE +1.6H (Equation 1-8)
Similar substitutions can be made when E is based on the amplified seismic load provisions
given in ASCE 7 Section 12.4.3. The resulting l?ad com 'nations are
(1.2+ 0.2SDS )D + ºoQE -tL+0.2S (Equation 1-9)
(0.9 - 0.2SDS )D + ºoQE + 1.6H (Equation 1-10)
Note thatASCE 7 Section 2.3.2, Exception 1 allows a 0.510 d factor on live load in sorne cases.
Structural Deflection and Story Drift
Adequacy of a seismic load resisting system (SI¡-RS) req . es that it be suitable to undergo
the deformations that result as its components deform in lastically to dissipate earthquake
energy. A building with a properly designed SLRS can sti 1 behave poorly if the non-SLRS
structural components are not able to safely deform ong with the SLRS. Likewise,
nonstructural components such as exterior cladding an curtain walls can pose falling
hazards or impede egress from the building if they are not ecured to the building in a man-
ner that is compatible with the deformations of the struc al components.
In the Equivalent Lateral Force procedure, deflections, ()x' are computed by multiplying
deflections, ()xe (computed by elastic analysis using the re uced equivalent lateral forces on
the structure), by Cd to produce an estimate of the drift produced by the design ground
motion, such that
() = Cd()xe
x 1 [ASeE 7]
includes the effect of inelastic distortion of the structur .
()x
The design story drijt, ~, is the difference in the absolu e deflections, ()x' at the center of
~
mass at the top and bottom of the story under cohsideratio
Stability Coefficient
The stability coefficient, 8 (AS CE 7), is a measure of the tructure's sensitivity to second-
order effects at each story level x:
Px~
8=
Vxh sx Cd
Px is the total vertical design load át and aboye level x, ~ i the design story drift, Vx is the
horizontal seismic shear acting over the height of the story .. e., between levels x and x - 1),
hsx is the story height below level x, and Cd is the structure deflection ampliñcation factor.
When 8 ~ 0.10, second-order effects are negligible. Wh n 0.1 < 8 ~ 8max , moments and
forces are increased by multiplying the story shear, Vx (obt ned by the ELF ana1ysis) by the
multiplier 8(1 - 8) and recomputing the seismic forces in e story. The design story drift,
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEE\... CONSTRUC rON, INC.
1-12 GENERAL DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS TABLES 1-13

d, is also amplified by this multiplier. The maximum value, 8 max , given in ASeE 7, repre-
sents a level of deformation that is considered excessive.
Drift Limits
Seismic design requirements inc1ude drift limits, usually expressed in terms of story drifts.
Limiting story drift helps to control component inelastic strain in the SLRS and to maintain
structural stability. Drift limitations also help to reduce damage to nonstructural building
components. Design story drift limits are given in ASCE 7. Where second-order effects must
be inc1uded, the amplified d is used in the drift limit check.
TABLES
Table 1-1. Workable Seismic Weld Acc ess Hole
Configurations
Fourteen configurations are given based upon the miniml m seismic weld access hole pro-
file. This table is intended to be used in conjunction wiü Table 1-2 for quick selection of
weld access hole geometry for wide-flange beams wheIl the special seismic weld access
hole is used. Otherwise, see Specification Section J1.6. 1 should be noted that the geome-
tries shown represent only one set of configurations ~at satisfy the dimensions and
tolerances in Seismic Provisions Figure 11-1. Other (onfigurations that comply with
Seismic Provisions Figure 11-1 can also be used.

Table 1-2. W-Shapes That Satisfy Seis mic Local Buckling

Requirements
W-Shapes (inc1uding W-shapes that incorporate reduced b{ am section moment connections)
that satisfy Seismic Provisions local buckling requirements for use as beams and columns in I
SMF systems; braces and columns in SCBF and OCBF sys ems; and links and braces in EBF
systems, are indicated with a "." in the corresponding col fIIID. A wide-flange section satis-
fies these requirements if its flange and web width-thickne~s ratios are less than or equal to
the corresponding limits listed in the following tapIe, whicl is summarized from the· require-
ments in the Seismic Provisions. For cases where the limitipg web width-thickness ratio is a
function of the member's required axial strength, Pu' the m mber will satisfy the local buck-
ling requirements if Pu is less than or equal to the value tabu ated for Pu max. Note that in these
cases it is assumed that Pu!cfJbIy > 0.125. Py' calculated as} Ag , is also tabulated.
AIso, a workable seismic access hole configuration from rabie 1-1 is given for each shape.
Wh~re a dash is shown, no configuration shown in Table -1 meets all criteria. See Table
1-1 for further information.

LlMITING WIOTH-THII CKNESS RATIO

Flange Web

u. Beam 0.30~E/Fy 2.45~E/Fy

:lE
UJ
Column 0.30~E/Fy 1.12~F/ Fy (2.3 -pu/cfJbPy ):?1.49~E/ Fy

u.
al
Brace 0.30~E/Fy 1.12~E/ Fy (2.3 -Pu/cfJbPy ):?1.49~E/ Fy
O
UJ Column 0.30~E/Fy l.l2~E/ Fy (2.3 -pu/cfJbPy ):?1.49~E/ Fy

u. Link 0.30~E/Fy 1.12~T/ Fy (2.3 -Pu/cfJbPy ):?1.49~E/ Fy

al
w , ~

Brace 0.38~E/Fy [7
3.76J1 Fy See note a.

a If the brace is designed for compression with no flexure, the web wi~th-thickness ratio limit is 1.49JEiii;,.

AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF SlEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCl ON, !Nc.
1-14 GENERAL DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS TABLES 1-15

Table 1-3. Single Angles That Satisfy Seismic Local
Buckling Requirements
Single angles that satisfy Seismic Provisions local buckling requirernents for use as braces
in SCBF, OCBF and EBF systems are indicated with a "." in the corresponding colurnn. A
single angle satisfies these requirernents if its greatest leg width-thickness ratio is less than
or equal to the corresponding limits listed in the following table, which is surnmarized frorn
the requirernents in the Seismic Provisions.
Table 1-5. Round HSS That Satisfy Sei ~mic Local
Buckling Requirements
Round HSS that satisfy Seismic Provisions local bucklin~ requirernents for use as braces
and columns in SCBF and OCBF systerns and praces in IEBF systerns are rndicated with
a "." in the corresponding column.: A round HSS satisfie these requirernents if its width-
thickness ratio is less than or equal to the corresponding lim .t listed in the following tableo

LlMITING WIDTH-THI CKNESS RATIO

LIMITING WIDTH-THICKNESS RATIO
La.
al
Brace 0.044 E/ f<'y
SCBF Brace O
en Colurnn 0.044E/fi'y
EBF Brace
La.
fa Brace 0.07 E/I y
Table 1-4. Rectangular and Square HSS That Satisfy
Seismic Local Buckling Requirements
Rectangular HSS that satisfy Seismic Provisions local buckling requirernents for use as
braces and columns in SCBF and OCBF systerns and braces in EBF systerns are indicated
Table 1-6. Pipes That Satisfy Seismic Lpcal Buckling
with a "." in the corresponding column. A rectangular HSS satisfies these requirernents if Requirements
its flange and web width-thickness ratio s are less than or equal to the corresponding limits Pipes that satisfy Seismic Provisions local buckling requ rernents for use as braces and
listed in the following tableo EBF braces are indicated as cornplying with the local buckling columns in SCBF and braces in EBF are indicated with a " "in the corresponding column.
provisions for the case of cornpression with strong-axis flexure. Sorne sections listed rnay A pipe satisfies these requirernents if its width-thickness rFltio is les s than or equal to the
not satisfy the provisions ifthey are subject to cornpression only, or cornpression with weak- corresponding lirnit listed in the following tableo
axis flexure.
LIMITING WIDTH-THIC KNESS RATIO
LlMITING WIDTH-THICKNESS RATIO
La.
al
Brace ?044E/F~
Flange Web O
en Colurnn 0.044E/F
La.
al
Brace 0.64~E/Fy 0.64~E/Fy La.
O al Brace 0.07E/r;
en Colurnn 0.64~E/Fy 0.64~E/Fy w

1.12~E/Fy 2.42~ E/ Fy
La.
al Brace See note a.
w

a If the braee is designed for eompression with no flexure, all four walls must meet the width-thiekness
eriterion for the flanges.

AMERICAN !NsTITUlE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITOTE OF SlEEL CONSTRUCTI pN, !Ne.
 1-16 GENERAL DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS PART 1 REFERENCES 1-17

Table 1-7. Design Strength of Gusset Plates (Fy =36 ksi) PART 1 REFERENCES
Design strengths in axial compression are given for l-in.-wide plate segments of various
thicknesses and E'y = 36 ksi. The tabulated values have been determined in accordance American Institute of Steel Construc~on, 2005. Seismic Provi ions for Structural Steel Buildings,
with Specification Section E3 using the effective length with respect to the y-y axis (axis ANSIIAISC 341-05, AISC, Chicago, IL.
paralIeI to the plane of the gusset plate). The maximum recornmended Iength of the free
American Institute of Steel Construction, 2005. Specificatz nfor Structural Steel Buildings,
edge of the gusset plate, Lfe , is also tabulated (Astaneh-AsI, 1998), where,
ANSIIAISC 360-05, AISC, Chicago, IL.

American Institute of Steel Construction, 2005. Steel Const tion Manual, 13th Edition, AISC,
Lfe = 0.75t [f Chicago, IL.
~Fy
American Society of Civil Engineers, 2005. Minimum esign Loads for Buildings and
Table 1-8. Design Strength of Gusset Plates (Fy 50 = ksi) Other Structures, SEllAS CE 7-05, ASCE, Reston, VA.
Table 1-8 is similar to Table 1-7, except that it covers plates with E'y = 50 ksi. Astaneh-AsI, A. (1998). "Seismic Behavior and Design of G sset Plates." Steel Tips, Structural
Steel EducationaI Council, Moraga, CA.

Federal Emergency Management Agency, 2000. NEHRP Re mmended Provisions for Seismic
Regulations for New Buildings arld Other Structures, FE 368/369, Washington, De.

GaIambos, T.y. (1998). Guide to Stability Design Criteria or Metal Structures, 5th Edition,
John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York.

AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc.

AMERICAN !NSTlTUTE OF STEEL CONSTRU ION, !Nc .
.... -
 1-18 GENERAL DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS TABLES 1-19

Table 1-2
Table 1-1
Workable Seismic Weld Access Secti.ons That Se tisfy
Hole Configurations
Fy = 50 ksi Local Buckling
Requirement s
W Shapes
SMF SCBF EBf pumaxa Py Access
Shape
Beam Column Brace Column Link Brace b (kips) (kips) Hole
W44x335 4080 4930 F
x290 2540 4270 E
x262 1700 3850 E
x230 909 3390 D
W40x593 8700 J
x503 7400 I
x431 6350 H
x397 • 5850 G
1\
x372 5450 G
v x362 5350 G
x324 4770 F
x297 3800 4370 E
A
v x277 2940 4070 E
x249 2110 3670 E
x215 1080 3170 D
x199 1000 2930 D
W40x392 5750 H
x331 4880 G
x327 4800 G
x294 4320 F
x278 4100 F
x264 3880 F
x235 2490 3450 E
x211 1780 3100 E
x183 911 2670 D
x167 841 2460 D
x149 625 2190 C
Dimension from Provisions Figure 11-1
Access W36x800
Hole Type ® ® @ ® x652
! • 11800
9600
L
K
degrees in. in. in. in.
x529 7800 I
A x487 7150 I
B x441 6500 H
C x395 5800 G
D x361 5300 G
E x330 4850 F
F x302 4440 F
G x282 3690 4150 E
30 x262 3170 3850 E
H
I x247 2750 3630 E
J x231 2350 3410 D
K
a Pu greater than Pu max results in a noncompact web per AlSC SeiSmic Provisions Sec1 on 8.2 tor members in combined flexure
L b and axial compression with Pu/CPbPy> 0.125. A dash indicates that Pu max exceeds cP Py and tlJe web is compact.
M If tlJe brace is designed for compresslon with noflexure, check that tlJe web widtIJ-~ ickness ratio is equal to or less tlJan
N 1.49JBF;,. .

N4ERICAN INSTl'I1ITE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTlON, !Ne. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCI ON, !Nc,

.... - ....
 1-20 GENERAL DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS TABLES
1-21

Table 1-2 (continued) Table 1-2 (continu ~d)

8ections That 8atisfy 8ections That 84 ~tisfy
Local Buckl.ing Fy = 50 ksi Fy = 50 ksi Local Bucklir 9
Requirements Requ'ireinen1 s
W Shapes WShapes
SMF SCBF EBF

~
puma/ Py Access SMF
Shape
b Shape SCBF EBe Pumaxa py . Access
Beam Column Brace Column Link Brace (kips) (kips) Hole
Beam Column Brace Column Link b (kips) (kips) Hole
··
Brace
W36x256
x232 ·· ·· ·· ·· ·· -
2900
3770
3410
F
E
W27x539
x368
··· ··· ··· ··· ··· ···
-
-
7950 K
x210
·· ·· ·· ·· ·· ·· 2450 3090 E x336

·· ··
-
5400
4950
H
G
x194 1940 2850 O x307

··· · ···
-
··· ··· ··· ··· ··· ···
~
4520 G

··· ··
x182 1610 2680 O x281 -

··· ···
x170
4150 F
1270 2510 O x258
- 3800 F

··· ··· ···

x160 1020 2350 O x235
x150
· · · · · ·· 807 2210 C x217

···
-
-
3470 E
~
··· ··
3200 E
x135 579 1990 e x194 - 2860 E
·· ··· ··· ··· ··· ··· ··· ··· ···
W33x387 - 5700 G x178
- o
x354 - 5200 G x161

·· ·· · 2120
2630
2380 o
··· ···
x318 - 4680 F x146 1690 2160
·· ·· ··
C
·· ·· ··· ··· · ···
x291 - 4290 F W27x129
o
··
1460 1890

···
x263 - 3880 E xl14

··· ··· ··· ·· ··· ···

1140 1680
··
x241 C
3190 3550 E xl02

·
788 1500
x221 2650 3260 o x94
· · ·
C

···
617 1390 C

···
x201 2090 2960 o x84 420
··
1240

···
B
W33x169
x152 ·· ··· ···
1500
1170
2480
2240
o
o
W24x370
x335
··· ··· ··· ·· ···
- 5450 I

·· ·
· ··
- 4920 H

··· ···
x141 919 2080 e x306
x130
xl18 · · ·· 712
483
1920
1740
e
C
x279
x250
··· ··· ··· ···
-
-
-
4490
4100
3680
G
G
F
W30x391
··· ··· ·· ·· ·· ···
- 5750 H x229

·· ··· · -

···
3360 F

·· ··· ···
x357 - 5250 G x207 - 3040 E

··· ··· ···

x326 - 4790 G x192 -

···
2820

···
E
x292
·· ·· ·· - 4300 F x176

···
- 2590

···
E

··· ···
x162
x261 - 3850 E - 2390 o

··· ··· ·· ·· ··· ···

x146
x235 - 3460 E - o
x211 - 3110 o x131
· · · -
2150
1930 e

··· ··· ···

x191 2360 2820 o xl17 1360 1720 e
x173
·· ·· ·· ·· 1880 2550 o xl04

··
1010 1530 C

··· ··· ··· ···

W30x148 1540 2180 o W24xl03 1200 1520 C
x132
x124
··· ·· ··· ··· ··· ·· 1230
1010
1950
1830
e or o
e
x94
x84
·· ···
968
698
1390
1240
C
C
xl16

· ·· · · · ·· 859 1710 e x76

· · · · 517 1120 C

···
xl 08 701 1590 C x68 364 1010 B
x99
x90
· · 531
236
1460
1320
C
B
W24x62
x55
·· ·· ·· ·· ·· 387
223
910
810
B
AorB
a Pu greater than Pumax results in a noncompact web per AISC Seismic Provisions Section 8.2 for.members in combined flexure a Pu greater tIlan Pumax results in a noncompact web per AlSC Seismlc Provisions Se cti n 8.2 for members in combined flexure
and axial compression with PuI(jlbPy> 0.125. Adash indicates that Pu max exce~ds (jIb~ and the ~~b is compact. b and axial compresslon with Pu/(jIbPy> 0.125. A dash Indicates that Pu m~ exceeds (jIb and tIle web is compacto
b If the
brace is designed for compression with no flexura, check .that the web wldth-thlckness ratio IS equal to or less than If tIle brace is designed for compression with no flexure, check tIlat the' web width -thl kness ratio is equal to or less than
1.49 /EiFy. 1.49/EiFy.

AMERICAN lNSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, lNc. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTI N, lNc.
...... - --01IIIIIIII
1-22 GENERAL DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS TABLES 1-23

Table 1-2 (continued) Table 1-2 (continue( )

Sections That Satisfy Sections That Sa1isfy
Local Buckling Fy =50 ksi Fy =50 ksi Local Bucklin~
Requirements Requirements
W Shapes W Shapes
SMF SCBF EBF Pumaxa Py Access SMF SCBF EBF
Shape Shape puma/ Py Ac~ess
Beam Column Brace Column Link (kips) (kips) Hole (kips) (kips) Hole
Beam Column Brace Column link
W21x201 2960 E W18x46 411 675 B
x182 2680 E x40 235 590 AorB
x166 2440 E x35 161 515 AorB
x147 2160 D
x132 W16x100 1480 C
1940 D
x122 x89 1310 C
1800 C
x111 x77 1130 C
1640 C
x101 x67 886 985 B or C
1260 1490 C
W21x93 W16x57 840 C
1370 C
x83 x50 624 735 B
1070 1220 C
x73 x45 483 665 AorB
776 1080 C
x68 x40 322 590 AorB
642 1000 C
x62 x36 261 530 AorB
487 915 B
x55 347 810 Aor B W16x31 171 457 AorB
W21x57 x26 77.5 384 AorB
461 835 B
x50 330 735 AorB W14x730 10800 N
x44 201 650 A or B x665 9800 M
W18x311 x605 8900 L
4580 I
x283 x550 8100 K
4170 H
x258 x500 7350 K
3800 G
x234 x455 6700 J
3440 G
x211 x426 6250 J
3110 F
x192 x398 5850 I
2820 F
x370 5450 H
x175 2570 : E
x158 x342 5050 H
2320 E
x143 x311 4570 G
2110 D
x130 x283 4170 G
1910 D
x119 x257 3780 F
1760 D
x106 x233 3430 F
1560 C x211
x97 3100 E
1430 C
x86 x193 2840 E
1270 C
x76 x176 2590 D
932 1120 C
x159 2340 D
W18x71 1040 C x145 2140 D
x65 955 C
x60 W14x132 1940 D
709 880 C
x55 x120 1770 C
588 810 B
x50 x109 1600 C
433 735 Aor B

a Pu greater than Pu max results in a noncompact web per AISC Seismic Provisions Section 8.2 for members in combined flexure a Pu greater than Pu max results in a noncompact web per AISC Seismic Provisions Secti n 8.2 tor mempers in combined flexure
and axial compression with Pul<PbPy> 0.125. A dash indicates tlJat Pumax exceeds <PbPy and tlJe web is compact. and axial compression with PUI<PbPy> 0.125. A dash indicates that Pumax exceeds <Pb IV and tlJe web is compact. :
b If the
braceis designed for compression with no flexure, check that the web width-thickness ratio is equal to or less than brace is designed tor compression with no flexure, check tlJat thé web width-th kness ratio is equal to or less than
b If the
1.49!EiFr . 1.49!EiFr.: :

AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Ne. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONsTRuCfrpN, !Ne.

.......

-
1-24 GENERAL DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS TABLES 1-25

Table 1-2 (continued) Table 1-2 (continue~)

Sections That Satisfy Sections That Sa'tisfy
Local Buckling Fy =50 ksi Fy =50 ksi Local Bucklin~~
Requirements Requirements
W Shapes W Shapes
SMF SCBF EBF Pumaxa Py Access SMF SCBF EBF puma/ Py Access
Shape Shape
b (kips) (kips) B ace b (kips) (kips) Hole
··
Hole Beam Column Brace Column Link

.. ·
Beam Column Brace Column Link Brace
W12x22
W14x82
x74
x68
1200
1090
1000
C
C
C
x19
x16
. 228
155
106
324
279
236
AorB
AorB
A
x61 x14 59.3 208
W14x53 · .
895
780
B
B Wl0x112 · . ·· .. 1650 D
x48 705 B xl00
·· .. · 1470 D

.. . .
x43 535 630 A orB x88 1300 C
W14x38
x34
· . 434
329
560
500
AorB
A or B
x77
x68
x60
· . · 1130
1000
880
C
C
C
x30 258 443 AorB x54 790 B
W14x26 189 385 Aor B x49
. ·
720 AorB
x22
W12x336
103 325
4940
AorB
I
Wl0x45
x39
· . 665
575
B
AorB
x305 4480 I x33 486 AorB
x279
x252
x230
4100
3700
3390
H
G
G
Wl0x30
x26
· . ·· .. 442
381
AorB
AorB
x22
.. ··
281 325 AorB

· . ·· ..
x210 3090 F
x190 2790 F Wl0x19 281 AorB
x170 2500 E x17 216 250 A
x152 2240 E x15 179 221 A
x136 2000 D
x120
xl06
x96
· . 1770
1560
1410
D
C
C
x87 1280 C
x79 1160 C
x72 1060 C
W12x58 850 B
x53 780 A or B
W12x50 730 B
x45 655 A or B
x40 585 A or B
W12x35 458 515 AorB
x30 309 440 AorB
x26 200 383 A or B

a Pu greater tlJan Pumax results in a noncompact web per AISC Seismic Provisions Section 8.2 for members in combined flexure a Pu gre~ter tlJan Pu max results in a noncompact web par AlSC Seismie Pro~isions Seetion 8.2 for members in combined flexure
b and axial compression with PU/<Pbl} > 0.125.A dash indicates tlJat Pumaxexceeds <PbPy and tlJe web is compacto b and axial co~pre~fon with Pu/<Pbl}::: 0.12.5. A dash ipdicates tlJat fu mix exceeds <Pbl} nd tlJe web is compacto
If the brace is designed for compression with no flexure, check tlJat the web width-tlJickness ratio is equal to or less tlJan If the brace IS deslgned for compresslon WltIJ no flexure, check tlJat tlJe web width-tlJié~ ~ess ratio is equal to or less tlJan
1.49!EiFr . 1.49 ./EiFy . ,

AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN INSTlTUTE OF STEEL CCPNSTRUCTIOI , !Nc.
 1-26 GENERAL DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS TABLES 1-27

Table 1-3 Table 1-4a

D
Sections That Satisfy Sections That Sa'Usfy

L Local Bupkling
Requirements

SCBF
Single Angles
EBF
Fy

SCBF
=36 ksi

EBF
Fy =46 ksi Local Bucklin!~

SCBF
Requirement~
Rectangular HSS
EBF SCBF EBF
Shape Shape Shape Shape
Brace Brace Brace Brace Brace Col. Brace Col.
L8x8x1'/a L5x3'f2X3/4 HSS20x12x5/a • HSS12x10x' 2
x1 x5/a x l l2
x7/a x'f2 HSS20x8x5/B HSS12x8x5 a
X 3/4
L5x3x'f2 Xl/2 x, 2
x5/a x3/a x3 a
x7h6
5
L8x6x1 X '6
L4x4x3/4
x 7/a HSS12x6x 5 B
X5/B
X 3/4 X, 2
x'f2 HSS18x6x5/a
x 5/a x3 a
x 7h6 x l l2
L8x4x1 x3/a ¡ X5 '6
x3/a X, 4
x 7/a xSh6 x5h6
X 3/4
L4x3'f2x'f2 HSS12x4x5 a
x5/a HSS16x12x5/a
x3/a Xl/2
X'2

L7x4x3/4 x5h6 x3 a
x5/a HSS16x8x5/a x5 6
L4x3x5/a x l f2 X,
L6x6x1 x'f2 x 3/a
x7/a x3fa HSS12x3'/2x3 ~
x 5h6
X 3/4 x 5h6 x5 6
x5/a HSS16x4x5/a
L3'l2x3'l2x' /2 Xl 12
HSS12x3x 5, 6
x 9h6 xli
x7h6 x3/a
x'l2
x3/a x5h6 HSS12x2x5/ 6
L6x4x7/a x 5h6
x'/
X 3/4 HSS14x100/a
L3'f2x3x'f2 x l f2 HSS10x8x5/
x5/a
x7h6 x3/a x'/
x 9h6
x3/a x 3/
x'f2 HSS14x6x5/a
x5h6 X 5/6
L6x3'f2x'f2 x l f2
x3/a HSS10x6x51
L5x5x'/a x5h6 x'l
X 3/4
xl/4 x 3/
x 5/a X 5/6
x'f2 HSS14x4x5/a
x'/
x7h6 Xl/2
x3/a HSS10x5x3/¡
0h6 x 5h6
Xl/4 x'l
x3h~

b Tabulation assumes compresslon with strong-axis flexure. If the brace is designed tor ~ompression with no tlexure, check that
all walls have width-thickness ratio equal to or leSS'than 1.12 Mr.lt'the brace is dE~lgned tor compression with weak-axis
tlexure, the tabulated intol1l.lation is not applicable.

AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc . AMERICAN !NST,ITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTIPN, !Nc.

--
.
1-28 GENERAL DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS TABLES 1-29

Table 1-4a (continued) Table 1-4a (continlJ ed)

D D
Sections That Satisfy Sections That Sé.tisfy
Local Buckling Fy = 46 ksi Fy = 46 ksi Local Bucklir, 9
Requirements Requirement$
Rectangular HSS Rectangular HS~

~
SCBF EBF SCBF EBF SCBF EBF SCBF EBF
Shape Shape Shape Shape
Brace Col. Braceb Brace Col. Braceb Brace Col. Braceb Brace Col. Braceb
HSS10x4x5/s
x 1f2 · · ·· HSS8x6x5/s
X1/2 ·· ·· ·· ,
HSS7x2x1/4
X3/16 ·· HSS5x21f2 1/4
3/16 ··
x 3/s
·· x3/s
·· x1/a
· 1/a
·
X5/16
X1/4
X3/16 ··
X5/16
X1/4
·· HSS6x5x1f2
x 3/a ·· ·· ·· HSS5x2 3/a
5/16
·· ·· ··
·· ·· ··· ···
HSS8x4x5/a X5/16 1/4
HSS1 Ox31f2x112
x 3/a ·· x 112
x3/a ·· X1/4
x3hs
3/16
1/a ~
·· X5/16
··
·· ·· ··· ·· ·· ···
x 5/1s
HSS6x4x1f2 , HSS4x3 3/a
X1/4 x1/4
x3/a
·
5/16
x 3/1s X3/16
· X5/16 1/4
· ·
HSS10x3x3/s
x 5h6 ·· HSS8x3x112
x 3/a · · ···
X1/4
X3/16
··
3/16
1/a ··
·· ·· ·· ··· ··· ··· ···
X1/4 X5/16
HSS6x3x1f2 HSS4x21f2> 3/a
x 3h6 X1/4
X3/16 ·· x 3/a >5/16

···
HSS10x2x3/a x 5h6 >1/4

··· ··· ··
x 5h6 HSS8x2x3/a X1/4 >3/16
X1/4 X5/16 x 3h6 >1/a
x 3h6
· X1/4

·
X1/S
HSS4x2'> 3/a
·· ·· ··
HSS9x7x5/a
x 1f2 · · ·· HSS7x5x1f2
x 3h6

· · ··
HSS6x2x3/a
x5h6 · · ·· >5/16
x 1/4
· · ··
·· ···
x3/a x3/a X1/4 X~h6
X5/16

·
x 5h6
·· x 3h6 >< la
·
x1f4 X1/4

·
x1/a
H$S3 1f2x2 112>< ~/a
·· ·· ··
· · ·· ··· ··· ···
x3h6 HSS5x4x1/2 X /16
HSS9x5x5/a
x 1f2 HSS7x4x1f2
· · ·· x 3/a X /4
· · ··
···
x 3/a x 3/a X5/16 X /16

·· ·· ·
x 5h6 X5/16 X1/4 x/a
X1/4
x 3h6
·
X1/4
X3/16
·
x3h6
HSS5x3x1/2
·· ·· ··
HSS3 1/2X2x /4
X /16 · · ···
HSS9x3x1f2
·· HSS7x3x1f2
· · ···
x3/a

· · ··
x/a
x 3/a
x5h6
··
x 3/a
x5h6
x 5h6
X1/4
HSS3 1/2X1 1/2X 14
· · ··
··· ··
X /16
X3/16
X1/4
x3h6
·
X1/4
x 3h6
x1/a
x1/a
x/a
·
b b Tabulation assumes compression witll strong-axis flexure. If tIle brace is designed f r compression with no flexure, check tIlat
l1abulation assumes compression with strong-axis flexure. If tIle brace is designed for compression with no flexure, check tIlat
a11 walls have width-tIllckness ratio equal to or less tIlan 1.12 /EiF.y. If tIle brace is designed for compression witll weak-axis all walls have width-thickness ratio equal to or leSs tIlan 1.12 /EiF.y. If tIle brace is ~esigned tor compression with weak-axis
f lexure, tIle tabulated information is not applicable. flexure, the tabulated information is not applicable.

AMERICAN !NSTlTUI'E OF STEEL CONSTRUcrION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTlTUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUC pON, !Nc.

.....
..
- - ----- -
1-30 GENERAL DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS TABLES 1-31

Table 1-4a (continued) Table 1-4b

D
Sections That Satisfy

o
Sections That Satisfy
Local Buckling Fy =46 ksi Fy =46 ksi Local Qucklirg
Requirements Requiremen1s
Rectangular HSS SquareHSS
SCBF EBF SCBF EBF SCBF EBF SCBF
Shape Shape Shape Shape
Brace Col. Brace Col. Brace Col. Brace Brace Col. Brace
HSS3x21/2x5ha HSS2 1/2x1 1/2X1/4 HSS16x16x5/s HSS4112x41/ xll2
X 1/4 x 3ha x 3/s
x 3ha Xl/S HSS14x14x 5/s
xl/2 x 5h6
Xl/S X1/4
HSS2 1/2X1x 3h6
HSS3x2x511a Xl/S HSS12x12x 5/s x 3h6
x l l2
X 1/4 HSS4x4pc:112
HSS21/4X2x 3h6
x3ha HSS1 Ox1 Ox5/s pc:3/s
Xl/S
Xl/S xl/2 pc:5h6 •
HSS3x1 1/2x 1/4 HSS2x1 1/2X 3h6 x3/s pc:l/4
~3h6
x 3ha HSS2x1x3h6 HSS9x9x5/s
Xl/S Xl/S x l l2 HSS3 1/2X3 112pc:3/S
HSS3x1x3ha
Xl/S
x3/s
x 5h6
p<5h6
p<1/4
p<3h6
.
l'

HSS8x8x%
HSS2 1/2x2x 1/4 ~l/S
x3ha xl l2
Xl/S x 3/s HSS3x3p<3/S
x5h6 ~5h6
r-l/4
HSS7x7x5/s
k 3/16
xl l2
xa/s r-1/ S
x 5h6 HSS2112x2112'r<5h6
Xl/4 kl/4
'('-3h6
HSS6x6x5/s
~l/S
xl l2
x3/s HSS21/4X21/4~1/4
x5h6 3/16
Xl/4 l/S
HSS5 1/2x5 1/2X3/S HSS2x2 1/4
x5h6 3/16
Xl/4 l/S
HSS5x5x l12
x 3/s
x 5h6
Xl/4
x3h6

b Tabulation assumes compression with strong-axis flexure. If the brace is designed for compression with no flexure, check that
fEiFr.
all walls have width-thickness ratio equal to or less than 1.12 If the brace is designed for compression with weak-axis
flexure, the tabulated information is not applicable.

AMERICAN !NSTlTUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcrION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRU~ON, !Nc.
 1-32 GENERAL DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS TABLES 1-33

Table 1-5 Tablé 1-5 (continue4~)

Sections That Satisfy Sections That Sa1 isfy

O Local Buckling
Requirements
Round HSS
Fy =42 ksi Fy =42 ksi Local Bucklin~1
Requirements
Round HSS
O
Shape

HSS20.000xO.500
Braee
SCBF
Col.
EBF
Braee

·
·
Shape

HSS7.000xO.500
xO.375
Braee

··
··
SCBF
Col.

··
··
EBF
Braee

··
Shape

HSS4.500xO.375
xO.337
Braee
SCBF

··
Col.

··
EBF
Braee

··
Shape

HSS2.875xO 250
xO 203
Braee
SCBF

···
Col.

···
EBF
Braee

·· 4
···
HSS18.000xO.500
HSS16.000xO.625
xO.500 · · ··
xO.312
xO.250
xO.188
xO.237
xO.188 ·· ·· ···
xO 188
xO 125
· · ··
·· ·· ··· ···
xO.125
HSS2.500xO 250
xO.438
xO.375 HSS6.875xO.500
·· ·· ·· HSS4.000xO.313
·· ·· ·· xO 188
·
HSS14.000xO.625
xO.500 ·· ·· ··
xO.375
xO.312
xO.250
· · ·· ···
xO.250
xO.237
·
·· ·· ··
xO 125
HSS2.375xO 250

··· ··· ·· 4
··
xO.226
xO.375 xO.188
·· ·· xO 218

···
xO.220
xO.312

··· ·· ·· · xO 188

··
··
HSS6.625xO.500 xO.188
HSS12.750xO.500
· · ··
xO.432 xO.125
· xO 154
xO 125

··· ··· ·· ·· ··
xO.375 xO.375
HSS1 O. 750xO.500
· · ·· xO.312

···
HSS3.500xO.313
xO.300
HSS1.900xO 188
·· ·· ··
xO.375
xO.250
·
xO.280
xO.250
· ··
xO.250
xO.216
··· ··· ·· xO 145
xO 120
· · ·
·· ··
xO.188 xO.203
·· HSS1.660xO 140
· · ·
·· ·· ·· ·· ·· ··
HSS10.000xO.625 xO.188
HSS6.000xO.500
xO.500
·
· · ···
xO.375 xO.125
xO.375
xO.312
xO.312
xO.280 ·· ·· ·· HSS3.000xO.250
xO.216
··· ··· ···•
xO.250

·· ··
xO.250
· · ··
···
xO.203
HSS9.625xO.500 xO.188 xO.188
·· ··
·· ·· ··· ···
xO.375 xO.152
HSS5.563xO.500
xO.312
xO.250
· xO.375
xO.258
· ·
xO.134
xO.125 ·· ··
HSS8.625xO.625
xO.500 ·· ·· ·· xO.188
xO.134 ··
·· ·· ··
··· ··· ···
xO.375
HSS5.500xO.500
xO.322
xO.250
· xO.375
xO.258
HSS7.625xO.375
xO.328 ·· ·· ·· HSS5.000xO.500
xO.375 ·· ·· ··
HSS7.500xO.500

··· ··· ···

xO.312

··· ·• ·
···
xO.375 xO.258
xO.312 xO.250
··
·· ·
xO.250 xO.188
xO.188 xO.125
· i

AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION,INC. t AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCI ON,INC.

. --- l .........

- . ~'-'-''''''~'''-'L..&..o~''''''''.""-"--""-"",,,,, •.,,,~ "" '~'L''''''UL~,L<D'-,-,--"--~'.",-,- ,~._~ __ •• _·_ •• r"~_.~~~_~~_~_~=~_ ~ __ .~~Lr"_.~~~~.~~

 1-34 GENERAL DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS TABLES 1-35

Table 1-6 Table 1-7

o Sections That Satisfy

SCBF
Local Buckling
Requirements

EBF
Pipe
Fy

SCBF
=35 ksi

EBF
Design Strength pf
Gusset Plates, <l>1i-n'
kips/in. Width
Fy = 36·ksi

Shape Shape Thickness (io.)

Brace Col. Brace Brace Col. Brace 3
Staodard Weight (Std.) Extra Stroog (x-stroog) 2 12.2 16.2 20.3 24.3 28.4 32.4 40.5 48.6 56 rT 64.8 72.9 81.0 89.1 97.2
Pipe 12 Std. 56.~

··· ...
Pipe 12 x-strong 3 11.7 16.2 20.3 24.3 28.4 32.4 40.5 48.6 64.8 72.9 81.0 89.1 97.2
Pipe 10 Std. Pipe 10 x-strong 4 11.3 15.6 20.3 24.3 28.4 32.4 40.5 48.6 56.~ 64.8 72.9 81.0 89.1 97.2
Pipe 8 Std. 5 10.9 15.2 19.4 24.3 28.4 32.4 40.5' 48.6 56. 64.8 72.9 81.0 89.1 97.2
Pipe 8 x-strong
6 10.3 14.8 19.1 23.3 28.4 32.4 40.5 I 48.6 56.7 64.8 72.9 81.0 89.1 97.2
Pipe 6 Std.

··· ...
Pipe 6 x-strong 7 9.75 14.3 18.7 23.0 27.2 32.4 40.5 48.6 56.7 64.8 72.9 81.0 89.1 97.2
Pipe 5 Std. Pipe 5 x-strong 8 9.11 13.8 18.3 22.6 26.9 31.1 40.5 48.6 56. 7 64.8 72.9 81.0 89.1 97.2
Pipe 4 Std; Pipe 4 x-strong 9 8.44 13.2 17.8 22.2 26.5 30.8 40.5 48.6 56.i7 64.8 72.9 81.0 89.1 97.2
Pipe 3'/2 Std. 10 7.75 12.6 17.2 21.7 26.1 30.4 38.9 48.6 56.17 64.8 72.9 81.0 89.1 97.2

··· ...
Pipe 3'12 x-strong
Pipe 3 Std. 11 7.06 11.9 16.7 21.2 25.7 30.0 38.6 47.0 56. 17 64.8 72.9 81.0 89.1 97.2
Pipe 3 x-strong
12 6.36 11.3 16.0 20.7 25.2 29.6 38.21 46.7 56. 17 64.8 72.9 81.0 89.1 97.2
Pipe 2112 Std. Pipe 2112 x-strong 13 5.69 10.6 15.4 20.1 24.7 29.1 37.8 46.3 54.~ 64.8 72.9 81.0 89.1 97.2
Pipe 2 Std.
Pipe 1'12 std.
Pipe 1'/4 Std.
·· .. Pipe 2 x-strong
Pipe 1112 x-strong
.5
14 5.04
15 4.41
16 3.88
9.87
9.17
8.48
14.7 19.5
14.1 18.9
13.4 18.2
24.1
23.5
23.0
28.6
28.1
27.6
37.4
37.0
36.5
46.0
45.6
45.2
54.1)
54.
53.~
64.8
62.5
62.2
72.9
72.9
72.9
81.0
81.0
81.0
89.1
89.1
89.1
97.2
97.2
97.2

··· ...
Pipe 1'/4 x-strong
Pipe 1 Std. Pipe 1 x-strong
~ 17 3.44 7.80 12.7 17.6 22.3 27.0 36.0 44.8 53. 61.9 70.3 81.0 89.1 97.2
S 18 3.06 7.14 12.0 16.9 21.7 26.4 35.5! 44.4 53.D 61.6 70.0 81.0 89.1 97.2
Pipe 3/4 Std.
Pipe 112 Std.
Pipe 3/4 x-strong =
~ 19 2.75 6.51 11.3 16.2 21.0 25.8 35.0 43.9 52.p 61.2 69.7 78.1 89.1 97.2
Pipe '12 x-strong Q) 20 2.48 5.88 10.6 15.5 20.4 25.2 34.5 43.4 52.D 60.8 69.4 77.8 86.2 97.2
Double-Extra Stroog (xx-stroog)
:g 21 2.25 5.34 9.92 14.8 19.'7 24.5 33.9 i 42.9 51.~ 60.4 69.0 77.5 85.9 97.2
! 22 2.05 4.86 9.26 14.1 19.0 23.9 33.3 42.4 51.p 60.0 68.6 77.1 85.6 94.0
Pipe 8 xx-strong w 23 1.88 4.45 8.61 13.4 18.3 23.2 32.7 41.9 50.~ 59.6 68.2 76.8 85.2 93.7
Pipe 6 xx-strong 24 1.72 4.09 7.98 12.7 17.6 22.5 32.1 41.3 50.~ 59.2 67.8 76.4 84.9 93.3
25 1.59 3.77 7.35 12.0 16.9 21.8 31.5 40.8 49.~ 58.7 67.4 76.0 84.6 93.0
Pipe 5 xx-strong
26 1.47 3.48 6.80 11.4 16.2 21.1 30.8 40.2 49. ~ 58.2 67.0 75.7 84.2 92.7
Pipe 4 xx-strong
27 1.36 3.23 6.30 10.7 15.5 20.4 30.2 39.6 48. ~ 57.8 66.6 75.2 83.8 92.4
Pipe 3 xx-strong 28 1.27 3.00 5.8610.1 14.8 19.7 29.5 39.0 48. D 57.3 66.1 74.8 83.5 92.0
Pipe 2112 xx-strong 29 1.18 2.80 5.47 9.44 14.2 19.0 28.8 i 38.4 47. 56.7 65.6 74.4 83.1 91.6
Pipe 2 xx-strong 30 1.10 2.61 5.11 8.82 13.5 18.3 28.1 37.7 47. 56.2 65.2 74.0 82.6 91.2
31 1.03 2.45 4.78 8.26 12.8 17.7 27.5' 37.1 46. 55.7 64.7 73.5 82.2 90.9
32 0.970 2.30 4.49 7.76 12.2 17.0 26.8 36.5 45. 55.1 64.2 73.0 81.8 90.5
33 0.912 2.16 4.22 7.29 11:5 16.3 26.1 35.8 45. 54.6 63.6 72.6 81.4 90.0
34 0.859 2.04 3.98 6.87 10.9 15.6 25.4 35.1 44. 54.0 63.1 72.1 80.9 89.6
35 0.810 1.92 3.75 6.48 10.3 14.9 24.7' 34.5 44. 53.4 62.6 71.6 80.4 89.2
36 0.766 1.82 3.55 6.13 9.73 14.3 24.0 33.8 43. 52.8 62.0 71.1 80.0 88.7
. Max. Lfe, io. 7.98 10.6 13.3 16.0 18.6 21.3 26.6 31.9 37. 42.6 47.9 53.2 58.5 63.9

AMERICAN !NsTITU1E OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc.

AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc.

----....--------~--------------------------------_. _._._.~~~."._ .•. __._.~ .....~... ~_...•...

1-36 GENERAL DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS 2-1

Table 1-8 I PART2

Design Strength 01 SYSTEMS UTILIZING =3
Fy =50 ksi Gusset Plates, <l>Rn ,
kips/in. Width SCOPE ............................................................ 2-2
BRACED FRAMES .................................................. 2-2
Example 2.1. Braced-Frame Brace Design ............................... 2-3
Thickness (in.)
3/a 1/2 5/a 3/4 7/a 1 11/4 11/2 13/4 2 21/4 2112 23/4 3 Example 2.2. Braced-Frame Column Design ............................. 2-5
2 16.9 22.5 28.1 33.8 39.4 45.0 56.3 67.5 78.8 90.0 101 113 124 135 Example 2.3. Braced-Frame Brace-to-BearnJColumn Co ection Design ........ 2-6
3 16.0 22.5 28.1 33.8 39.4 45.0 56.3 67.5 78.8 90.0 101 113 124 135
4 15.3 21.3 28.1 33.8 39.4 45.0 56.3 67.5 78.8 90.0 101 113 124 135 ~O~E~~S ................................................ 2-18
5 14.4 20.6 26.6 33.8 39.4 45.0 56.3 67.5 78.8 90.0 101 113 124 135 Example 2.4. ~oment-Frame Story Drift Check .......................... 2-19
6 13.5 19.8 25.9 31.9 39.4 45.0 56.3 67.5 78.8 90.0 101 113 124 135
7 12.4 18.9 25.2 31.3 37.2 45.0 56.3 67.5 78.8 90.0 101 113 124 135 Example 2.5. ~oment-Frame Column Design ............................ 2-20
8 11.3 18.0 24.4 30.5 36.6 42.5 56.3 67.5 78.8 90.0 101 113 124 135
Example 2.6. ~oment-Frame Beam Design ............................. 2-27
9 10.2 16.9 23.4 29.7 35.9 41.9 56.3 67.5 78.8 90.0 101 113 124 135
10 9.04 15.8 22.5 28.9 35.1 41.2 53.2 67.5 78.8 90.0 101 113 124 135 Example 2.7. ~oment-Frame Beam-to-Column Connec on Design ........... 2-30
11 7.93 14.7 21.4 27.9 34.3 40.5 52.6 64.4 78.8 90.0 101 113 124 135
12 6.87 13.6 20.4 27.0 33.4 39.7 51.9 63.8 78.8 90.0 101 113 124 135 PART 2 REFERENCES .............................................. 2-35
13 5.87 12.4 19.2 25.9 32.4 38.8 51.2 63.2 75.0 90.0 101 113 124 135
14 5.07 11.3 18.1 24.9 31.5 37.9 50.4 62.5 74.4 90.0 101 113 124 135
15 4.41 10.2 17.0 23.8 30.4 36.9 49.6 61.8 73.8 85.7 101 113 124 135
.5 16 3.88 9.16 15.8 22.6 29.4 35.9 48.7 61.1 73.2 85.1 101 113 124 135
si 17 3.44 8.14 14.7 21.5 28.3 34.9 47.8 60.3 72.5 84.5 96.3 113 124 135
oS
CI
18 3.06 7.26 13.6 20.4 27.2 33.9 46.9 59.5 71.8 83.8 95.7 113 124 135
eel) 19 2.75 6.52 12.5 19.2 26.0 32.8 45.9 58.6 71.0 83.1 95.1 107 124 135
.....
20 2.48 5.88 11.5 18.1 24.9 31.7 44.9 57.8 70.2 82.4 94.5 106 118 135
~
ti 21 2.25 5.34 10.4 17.0 23.8 30.6 43.9 56.8 69.4 81.7 93.8 106 118 135
~ 22
23
2.05
1.88
4.86
4.45
9.50
8.69
15.9
14.8
22.6
21.5
29.4
28.3
42.9
41.8
55.9
54.9
68.6
67.7
80.9
80.1
93.1
92.4
105
104
117
116
129
128
24 1.72 4.09 7.98 13.7 20.3 27.1 40.7 53.9 66.8 79.3 91.6 104 116 128
25 1.59 3.77 7.35 12.7 19.2 26.0 39.6 52.9 65.8 78.5 90.9 103 115 127
26 1.47 3.48 6.80 11.7 18.1 24.9 38.5 51.9 64.9 77.6 90.1 102 114 126
27 1.36 3.23 6.30 10.9 17.1 23.7 37.4 50.8 63.9 76.7 89.2 102 114 126
28 1.27 3.DO 5.86 10.1 16.0 22.6 36.2 49.7 62.9 75.8 88.4 101 113 125
29 1.18 2.80 5.47 9.44 15.0 21.5 35.1 48.6 61.9 74.8 87.5 100 112 124
30 1.10 2.61 5.11 8.82 14.0 20.4 33.9 47.5 60.9· 73.9 86.6 99.1 111 124
31 1.03 2.45 4.78 8.26 13.1 19.4 32.8 46.4 59.8 72.9 85.7 98.3 111 123
32 0.970 2.30 4.49 7.76 12.3 18.3 31.7 45.3 58.7 71.9 84.8 97.4 110 122
33 0.912 2.16 4.22 7.29 11.6 17.3 30.5 44.1 57.6 70.9 83.8 96.6 109 121
34 0.859 2.04 3.98 6.87 10.9 16.3 29.4 43.0 56.5 69.8 82.9 95.6 108 121
35 0.810 1.92 3.75 6.48 10.3 15.4 28.3 41.9 55.4 68.8 81.9 94.7 107 120
36 0.766 1.82 3.55 6.13 9.73 14.5 27.2 40.7 54.3 67.7 80.9 93.8 106 119
Max. L'8, in. 6.77 9.03 11.3 13.5 15.8 18.1 22.6 27.1 31.6 36.1 40.6 45.2 49.7 54.2

AMERICAN !NSTlTUTE OF S1EEL CONsTRucnON, !Nc. AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF S1EEL CONSTRUC ON, !Nc.
 2-3
2-2 SYSTEMS UTILIZING R = 3 BRACED FRAMES

SCOPE Example 2.1. Braced-Frame Brace Oesig

The Specification requirements and other design considerations surnmarized in this Part
apply to the design of members and connections in braced frames and moment frames that Given: Refer to Brace BR-I in Figure 2-1. Select an A TM A36 double-anglesection
utilize a response modification factor, R, equal to 3. (R = 36 ksi, Fu = 58 ksÓ to resist the followin axial forces. The Applicable
B~lding Code specifies the use of ASCE 7 for c culation of loads.
BRACEO FRAMES
PD = 15 kips PL = 12 kips
Braced frames gain their strength and their resistance to lateral forces and displacements
primarily from the axial strength and stiffness of the bracing members. Braced frames are From ASCE 7, this structure is assigned to Seismic Design Category A
arranged such that the centerlines of the framing members (braces, columns, and beams)
(p = 1.0) and SDS = 0.153.
coincide or nearly coincide, thus eliminating the majority of flexure that might occur due to
lateral forces. Assume that the ends of the brace are pinned an braced against translation.
Braced-frame systems tend to be more economical than moment-resisting frames when
material, fabrication, and erection costs are considered. These efficiencies are often offset So/ution:' Using the basic load combinations in ASCE 7 S ction 2.3.2 with Exception 1,
by reduced flexibility in floor plan layout, space planning, and electrical and mechanical the maximum compressive force, in the brace is,
routing, encountered as a result of the space requirements of the brace members.
PU=(1.2+0.2SVS)PV+PPQE +O.5PL +0.2 S (ASCE 7)
Braced frames typically are located in walls that stack vertically between floor levels. In
the typical office building, these walls generally occur in the "core" area around stair and P = 1.23(15 kips) + LO(31.5 kips) + 0.5(12 ips) + 0.2(0 kips)
elevator shafts, central restrooms, and mechanical and electrical rooms. This generally u
allows for greater architectural flexibility in placement and configuration of exterior win- =56.0 kips
dows and cladding. Depending on the plan location and the size of the core area of the
And the maximum tensile force in the ¡brace is,
building, the torsional resistance offered by the braced frames may become a controlling
design parameter. Differential drift between stories at the building perimeter must be con- (ASeE 7)
sidered with this type of layout, as rotational displacements of the floor diaphragms may
Tu =(0.9-0.2S vs )Pv +PPQE +1.6PH
impose deformation demands on the cladding system and other nonstructural elements of T = 0.869(15 kips) + 1.0( - 31.5 kips) + 1.6( kips)
u
the building.
=-18.5 kips
In addition to the requirements of the applicable building code, members and connections
of braced-frame systems in applications with R equal to 3 need only comply with the The length of the brace is,
Specification. The Seismic Provisions are not required for use in the design of braced-frame
systems when R is taken as equal to 3.
L = J(12.5 ft)2 + (12.5 ft)2
=17.7ft

and

KL = 1.0 (17.7 ft)

= 17.7 ft
This unbraced length has been determined by c
the work points based on the intersection of th
umn, and beams, and using K = 1.0. Shorter unb
be used if justified by the Owner's Designated
culating the distance between
centerlines of the brace, col-
aced lengths of the brace may
presentative for Design.

AMERICAN !NSTITIJTE OF SlEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTI N, INc.
2--4 SYSTEMS UTILIZING R = 3 BRACED FRAMES 2-5

Select brace size Check element slenderness

Assuming that the compressive strength of the brace is the controlling limit Specification Section E6.2 requires that the individual element slendemess
state, and using Manual Table 4-9, a 2L6x4x5h6 LLBB is selected. The design between connectors must be less than three-q arters of the slendemess of the
strength of the brace in compression is, built-up member.

<PcPn =62.4 kips>56.0 kips KL _ 1.0(17.7 ft)(12 in./ft) _ 996

0.75- - 0.75 . - .
5 ry 1.60 in.
Since Pu < <PcPm the 2L6x4x h6 is adequate. AIso, per Manual Table 4-9, at
least two welded or pretensioned bolted intermediate connectors must be Assuming two connectors, the lengili between connectors is,
provided.
a = L/3 = 17.7 ft/3 = 5.90 ft

cp Using Manual Table 1-7, the slendemess betw en connectors is,

t-
.....I-'R.=o=of'----->i...._
25'-0" Ka = 1.0(5.90 ft)(12 in.lft)
r.I

81.0 < 99.6

0.874 in .

o.k.
81.0

Check tensile strength of brace

From Manual Table 5-8, the design istrength f the brace for yielding on the
gross section is,

COLUMN SPLlCE
48in.ABOVE
FINISHED FLOOR
(TYPICAL) Since Tu < <PtPn, the 2L6x4x5h6 is adequate.
Use a 2L6x4x51t6 LLBB with a 3/S_in. sep ration and two inte:rmediate
connectors for braced-frame Brace BR-l.
Note that the intermediate connectors be welded or pretensioned
bolted. If bolted interlnediate connectors a e used, a net-section rupture
check is also required.
The net-section must also be checked at the end connection; see
Example 2.3.

FX2
Example 2.2. Braced-Frame Column De ign

Given: Refer to Column C-l in Figure 2-1. Select ASTM A992 W-shape (F'y =
50 ksi, Fu = 65 ksi) with a nominal depth of 1 in. to resist the following axial
forces. The Applicable Building Code specifie the use of ASCE 7 for calcula-
tion of loads.

PD = 143 kips PL = 37 kips Ps = 8 kips

From ASCE 7, this structure is assigned to Seis .c Design Category A (p = 1.0)

and SDS = 0.153 ..
Figure 2-1. Bracedframe elevationfor Examples 2.1 and 2.2. Assume that ends of the column are pinned braced against translation for
For floor plan see Figure 2-5. both the X-X and y-y axes.
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSlRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSlRU
 2-6 SYSTEMS UTILIZING R = 3 BRACED FRAMES
2-7

So/ution: Using the basic load combinations in ASCE 7 Section 2.3.2 with Exception 1,
Design the brace-to-gusset connecti n
the maximum compressive force in the column is,
From Example 2.1,
Pu = (1.2+ O.2SDS )PD +PP +0.5PL +O.2P (AS CE 7)
QE S P =56.0 kips .
u
Pu = 1.23(143 kips) + 1.0(52.4 kips) + 0.5 (37 kips) + 0.2(8 kips) Tu = 18.5 kips
= 248 kips
And the maximum tensile force in the column is, Using Manual Table 7-4 for 3/4-in.-diameter STM A325SC bolts in double-
shear, Class B faying surfaces, oversized holes in the gusset, and standard holes
Tu = (0.9-0.2S DS )PD +POP +1.6P (ASCE 7)
QE H in the brace,
Tu = 0.869(143 kips) + 1.0(-52.4 kips) + 1.6(0 kips) P
N u 56.0 kips
= 71.9 kips
bmin Q>R 1.43(16.0 kips/bolt)
n
Per ASCE 7, since Tu> O, there is no net tension (uplift) on the column.
Using Manual TabIe 4-1 with KL = 14 ft, the lightest W12 section with a com- Try three 3/4-in.-diameter bolts at 3-in. spacin .
pressive strength greater than 248 kips is a W12x40.
Q>cPn = 304 kips > 248 kips Check brace net sectian far tensile st ngth
The net area of the brace is
Since Pu < Q>cPn' the W12x40 is adequate.
Use a W12x40 for braced-frame Column C-l.
An =Ag -2(dh + X6 in}
=6.05 in.
2
"':2(J{ in.)(X6 in.)
2
Example .2.3. Braced-Frame Brace-to-Beam/Column =5.50 in.
Connection Design
U=l-~ (Specification Table D3.1)
Given: Refer to Joint J-1 in Figure 2-1. Design the connection between the brace, 1
beam, and colmilIl. Use a gusset plate concentric to the brace and welded to = 1- 0.908 in.
the beam with 70-ksi electrodes. CoIinect the gusset and the beam to the 6 in.
column using a bolted single-pIate connection with ASTM A325 bolts. Use = 0.849
ASTM A36 (E; = 36 ksi, Fu = 58 ksi) for all pI ate material; as sume the col-
umn and brace are as designed in Examples 2.1 and 2.2, respectively, and that
=UA =0.849(5.50
Ae n . in. 2 )=4.67 in.
the beam is anASTM A992 (E; = 50 ksi, Fu = 65 ksi) W18x35. The Applicable
Building Code specifies the use of ASCE 7 for calculation of loads.
Q>tPn =0.75FuAe (Specification D2-2)
The shear force in the beam coincident with the axial force in the brace is
Ru = 5.40 kips. =0.75(58 k~)( 4.67 in. 2
)

Wl8x35 d = 17.7 in. tw = 0.300 in. t¡ = 0.425 in. = 203 kips > 18.5 kips . o.k.
kdes = 0.827 in.
So/ution: From Examples 2.1 and 2.2, the brace is an ASTM A36 2L6x4x5h6 double- Check balt bearing strength in brace
angle section and the column is an ASTM A992 W12x40 wide-flange section. For compression, using Manual Table 7-5 with = 3 in., the bearing strength is,
W12x40 d = 11.9 in. tw = 0.295 in. t¡ = 0.515 in. Q>Rn =2NbQ>rnt
kdes = 1.02 in.
=2(3)(78.3 kipsfm.)(}(6 in.)
L6x4x5h6 x = 0.908 in. y = 1.90 in.
=147 kips>56.0 kips o.k.
2L6x4x5h6 LLBB Ag = 6.05 in. 2
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, INc.
AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRU N, INC.
2--8 SYSTEMS UTILIZING R = 3 BRACED FRAMES 2--9

A similar check for the tension force using Manual Tables 7-5 and 7-6 with From Manual Table 4-22, <!>Fcr = 30.0 ksi. The compression buckling strength
s = 3 in. and Le = 2 in. shows that is then,

<!>Rn = <!>FcrAg

=30.0 ksi(6.93 in.)(Ys in.)

Check bolt shear strength
=78.0 kips>56.0 kips o.k.
Using Manual Table 7-1 for threads included in the shear plane, the shear
strength of the bolts is,
Altematively, Table 1-7 can be used. The efi ctive length of the gusset in
<!>Rn =31.8 kips/bolt( 3 bolts )=95.4 kips> 56.0 kips o.k. compression is,

By inspection, block shear rupture will not control for the 2L6x4x5J¡6 brace
member.
Use (3) ASTM A325SC bolts to connect the brace angles to tbe gusset plate.
Use Class B faying surfaces, standard boles in the brace, and oversized
boles in tbe gusset.
KL = 0.65(6.25 in.) =4.06 in.
Interpolating from Table 1-7 for a 3/8-in.-thick usset with KL = 4.06 in., the
design compression buckling strength of the gu set is,
<!>Rn =<!>rn L w =l1.3kip&lin.(6.93 in.)=78.3 kips

Select trial gusset plate thickness

Thus, the 3/8-in. gusset is o.k., although other c ecks are required as follows.
From Example 2.1, the back-to-back spacing of the brace angles is 3/ 8 in. For
compression, using Manual Table 7-5 for bearing strength with s = 3 in., the
rninimurn required gusset-plate thickness is, 1'-4~"

P' 56.0 kips

t . u CGBRACE
mm 0.238 in.
3 ( 78.3 kipsfm. )

A similar check for the tension force using Manual Tables 7-5 and 7-6 with
s = 3 in. and Le = 2 in. shows that the minimum thickness is less than that aboye
for compression.

Try a 3/8-in. gusset plateo Assume an initial connection geometry as shown in

Figure 2-2.

Check the gusset compression buckling strength

The Whitrnore width is, W.P. ~BEAM

Lw = 2l tan 30° =2(6 in.) tan 30° = 6.93 in.

__t _ _ 0.375 in. _ 0108 .

r - J12 - J12 -. m.

W18x35BEAM
The average length of the gusset plate beyond the connection on the Whitrnore
width is approximately 6.25 in. Assuming a fixed-fixed buck1ing condition,
K=0.65, and

KL 0.65( 6.25 in.)

37.6
r 0.108 in.
Figure 2-2. Initial connection geometry for xample 2.3.
AMERICAN !NslITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCl10N, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSlITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTI N, !Nc.
2-10 SYSTEMS UTILIZING R == 3 BRACED FRAMES 2-11

Determine connection interface torces

H =!!:..P = 6.40 in. (56.0 k' ~)=17.1 k ps
The forces at the gusset-to-beam and gusset-to-column interfaces are deterrnined ub r u 210' . m. 11'
using the Uniform Force Method. The planes of uniform forces will be set as the
column bolt line and the gusset/beam interface. The assumption of aplane of uni- M ub = Vub la - al = 23.6 kipsl6.40 in. - .75 in.1 = 55.5 kip-in.
form force at the column boltline allows the bolts at the column connection to be
designed for shear only (no eccentricity). However, this convenient assumption
Design gusset-to-b({Jam weld
for connection design requires that a corresponding moment be resolved in the
Treating the welds as a line,
design of the members. In this case, the moment will be assigned to the beam.
It should be noted that this assumption is different from that made for the lw =16.5 in.+ Xin.-5 in. - X in.=l .5 in.
typical cases of the Uniform Force Method shown in the Manual and is not a
2
requirement for this type of connection. Appropriate work points and uniform ( 11.5 in. )
force planes can ofien be selected conveniently to balance engineering, fabri- sw 22.0 in. 3{m.;
cation, and erection economy. 6

Using the connection geometry given in Figure 2-2 and the analysis found in The forces along the gusset-to-beam interface e,
Manual Part 13, page 13-10,
17.1 kips
fv 1.49 kips/in.
db . 11.5 in.
eb = - = 8.85 m. ec = ;- + 2.5 in. = 8.45 in. e = 45.0°
2 I
23.6 kips
2.05 kips/in.
~ = 6.00 in. fa
11.5 in.

a= X(16.5 in. + Xin.-5 in.- Xin.)+2 Xin. + Xin.=8.75 in. fb 55.5 kip-in. 2.52 kipsfm.
22.0 in. 3{m.
Since the gusset-to-beam connection is more rigid than the gusset-to-column
connection, the beam can be assumed to resist the moment generated by eccen-
tricity between the actual gusset connection centroids and the ideal centroids f peak = f} + (¡a + fb )2
calculated using the Uniform Force Method. Therefore,

~ = ~ = 6.00 in.
=~1.492+(2.05+2.52)2 =4.81 kips in.

a = (eb + ~)tane- ec
=(8.85 in.+6.00 in.)tan(45.00)-8.45 in. fav. = X[fpook + Jfv2 +(¡a -1b l' J
= 6.40 in.

r= ~( a + ec )2 + (~ + eb )2
= X( 2
4.81+ 1.49 +(2.05-252)2 J=3.19 K1ps/in.

= ~( 6.40 in.+ 8.45 inl + (6.00 in.+ 8.85 inl f peak = 4.81 in. =1.51
= 21.0 in. f avg 3.19 in.

Since fpeak/favg > 1.25, the weld stress distribu on factor need not be applied.
v = ~ P = 6.00 in. (56.0 kips) = 16.0 kips For a discussion of the weld stress distribution actor of 1.25, see Manual Part
uc r u 21.0 in. 13, page 13-11.

H ec 8.45 in. (5 .) .
=-P = - - 6.0 kIps =22.5 kIps 4.81 kips/ in. 1 73' th
uc r u 21.0 in.
D> =. SIXteen s
2(1.392 kips/in.)

V b eb =8.85
=-P - -in.
- (56 .O kIps
. ) =2 36'
. klpS For a derivation of the fillet weld shear stre , <j>rn = 1.392 kips/in., see
u r u 21.0 in.
Manual Part 8.
AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INC. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL 'CONSTRUCTI N, INc.
 BRACED FRAMES 2-13
2-12 SYSTEMS UTILIZING R = 3

Check beam web local yielding

Altematively, the Eccentrically Loaded Weld Group Tables found in Part 8 of The beam force is applied at ex from th;e beam e d. Since ex < 17.7 in.,
the Manual can be used. The load angle with respect to the longitudinal axis
of the weld group is, Rn = (2.5k+N)Fyw t w (SpecificationJlO-3)

<l>Rn = 1.00 [ 2.5(0.827 in.)+l1.5 ill.J(50 ksi (0.300 in.)

8= tan- 1 [ Vub J=tan -1 (23.6 kips J= 54.1 °
H ub 17.1 kips = 204 kips > 23.6 kips o.k.

a = eb = 8.85 in. = 0.770 Check beam web crippling

l 11.5 in. N = 11.5 in. = 0.650
w
d 17.7 in.
The tabulated angle that is closest to, but less than, the calculated load angle
is 45°. Interpolating from Manual Table 8-4 with 8 = 45° and using k = O, Using Manual Table 9-4with Nld > 0.:2,
c= 2.06 <l>Rs = 34.1 kips
The average and peak weld stresses are not determined when using this <l>R6 =5.19 kipsrm.
method; therefore the weld stress distribution factor should be applied unless <l>Rn =<I>Rs+N(<I>R6)
additional calculations establish that the ratio of peak-to-average weld stresses
= 34.1 kips + 11.5 in.( 5.19 kipsrm.)
is greater than or equal to 1.25.
= 93.8 kips > 23.6 kips o.k.

Design gusset-to-single-plate connecti

The resultant force that will be resisted by the bIts in the gusset plate is

Ru = ~(16 kips)2 + (22.5 kipsf = 27.6 ips

From Specification Table 12.4, the minimum size fillet weld allowed for the
From Manual Table 7-1, (2) 3/4-in. diameter AS A325N bolts are required
parts being connected is 3116 in.
(<I>Rn = 2 x 15.9 kips = 31.8 kips).
Use an U l l2-in.-Iong, double-sided, 31I6-in. fillet weld to connect the gusset
plate to the beam. Use (2) ASTM A325N bolts to conne~t the gus et plate to the column.

Using Manual Tables 7-5 and 7-6 for gusse bearing with s = 3 in. and
Check gusset plate rupture at beam weld
Le = 2 in.,
A conservative method to determine the minimum gusset plate thickness required
to transfer the shear and tension forces is to set the shear rupture strength of the <l>Rn =Nb<l>rnt
gusset plate equal to the weld strength (based on the resultant force). Thus, one
check satisfies both the shear rupture and tension rupture criteria (see Manual = 2(78.3 kips/in.)(Ys in.)
Part 9). = 58.7 kips > 27.6 kips o.k.

(6.19 kips/in.)D By inspection, block shear rupture does not co trol for this connection.
t .
mm F
u Use a 3/s-in.-thick gusset plateo
6.19 kips/in.( 1.73)
58 ksi
=0.185 in.

3/8 in. > 0.185 in., o.k.

AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTIO ,!Nc.
AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRucnON, !Nc.
2-14
SYSTEMS UTILIZING R = 3 BRACED FRAMES 2-15

Design beam-to-column single-plate connection Based on the assumptions above, the maximum orce in the weld will occur at
The forces on the connection are, the shorter (gusset) bolt group. The connection rces at this location are,

Vu = Ru + Vub = 5.40 kips +23.6 kips = 29 kips

Hu = Huc = 22.5 kips f. =45
--kips
- =201
. k'·lpS m. l'
v 22.4 in.

The resultant force that will be resisted by the bolts is, i, = 22.5 kips = 3 75 k'
a 6 in. . lpS
l'm.

Ru = ~(29 kipsf + (22.5 kipsf = 36.7 kips

lb 113 kip-in. 1.35 kipsfm.
83.6 in. 3 /in.
From Manual Table 7-1, (3) 3/4-in.-diameter ASTM A325N bolts are required
(<I>Rn = 3 x 15.9 kips = 47.7 kips). Note that three bolts is the minimum con-
nection depth to cover TI2 for the W18 beam.

Use (3) ASTM A325N bolts to connect the beam to the column. 5.48 kipsl in. I .97'
D> SlXteen th s
2( 1.J92 kips/in.)
Using Manual Tables 7-5 and 7-6 for beam web bearing with s = 3 in. and
Le = 2 in.,
Considering the column flange thickness and assu .ng the single-plate thickness
<l>Rn = Nb<l>rntw will be similar to the gusset plate thickness fro Specification Table J2.4, the
=3(87.8 kipslin.)(0.300 in.) minimum-size fillet weld is 3116 in. This Specifica 'on requirement for minimum
weld size can be revisited after the single plate thi kness is determined.
=79.0 kips>36.7 kips o.k.

By inspection, block shear rupture does not control. Size the single plate
Using Manual Tables 7-5 and 7-6, the minim m single-plate thickness for
Design weld between column and single plate bearing of the gusset to single-plate connection lts is,
The forces at the connection of the single plate to the column flange are,
27.6 kips 0206 .
t. ( ) . m.
Vu = Ru + Vub + Vuc = 5.40 kips + 23.6 kips + 16.0 kips = 45.0 kips mm 78.3 kipsfm.+55.5 kipslin.
Hu = 22.5 kips
Note that edge distance controls for one bolt.
Mu =Vu e=45 kips(2.5 in.)=113 kip-in.

Using Manual Tables 7-5 and 7-6, fue minim m single-plate thickness for
It will be assumed that tlle tension and compression loads are resisted by the bearing of the beam to single-plate connection bits is,
plate segments extending 11/2 in. from the outer bolts in each bolt group, and
the shear force and moment are resisted by the entire plate length. Treating the 36.7 kips I 0.173'
welds as a line, tmm.
2(78.3 kipsfm.) + 55.5 kipsfm.
lw =eb +~+3.00 in.+4.50 in. (see Figure 2-3)
The pIate thicknesses required to resist the shear d tensiIe forces individualIy
=8.85 in.+6.00 in.+7.50 in.
are,
=22.4 in.
2.0Ikipsfm.
t . 0.093 in.
(22.4 in.)2 3 vmm
Sw = = 83.6 in. Ijn. 1.0( 0.6)( 36 ksi)
6 .

t . 3.75 kipslin.+1.35 kipsfm. 0.157 in.

amm
0.90( 36 ksi)

AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCfION, !Nc.

AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTIO , !Nc.
 2-16 SYSTEMS UfTI..,1ZING R = 3 BRACED FRAMES 2-17

Therefore the required thickness for the single plate is,

tmin =~(0.093 in.)2 +(0.157 inf =0.182 in.

Try a 3/s-in.-thick single plateo For compression buckling of the single plate CG BRAC
- (3) 3/4"0 A325$C
as sume K = 0.65. The radius of gyration for a 1-in.-wide strip of the plate is,
BOLTS W/OVS HOlES
_ _t _ _ 0.375 in. _ O 108 . IN GUSSET, STO HOlES
r - Jfi - Jfi -. m. IN BRACE, & CLASS B
FAYING SURFACES
Kl 0.65(2.5 in.)
-= 15.0
r 0.108 in.
3/8" Pl
Since Kl/r::; 25, Fcr = Fy, and the compressive strength of the single pi ate is,
(5) 3/4"0 325N
$Pn = 0.90Fy Ag = 0.90(36 ksi)( 0.375 in.) = 12.2 kipslin. BOLTS IN STO HOlES

M =H e=22.5 kiPS(X in. +

u u 2
X 2
in·J=8.43 kip-in.
- ClBM

Again using plate segments extending 1112 in. from the outer bolts to resist the
compression,

$Mn = 0.90Fy Z = 0.90(36 ksi) 9 in . 48 in)2

'
c,% J= 10.3 kip-in. I M
(
I 3/8" Pl
.!:JL = I I
22.5 kips = 0.205 > 0.2
ClCOL.
L ____ (5) 3/4"0 A325N
$Pn 12.2 kips/in.(9 in.) BOLTS IN STO HOlES

.!:JL + ~( Mu J::; 1. O Figure 2-3. Final connection design for E ample 2.3.
$Pn 9 $Mn

0.205+~(8.43 kip-in.J=0.933::;1.0 o.k.

9 10.3 kip-in.

Use a 3/s-in.-thick single plate to connect the beam and gusset to the colomn.

Per Specification Table 12.4, the 31l6-in. fIllet weld between the column and the
single plate meets the mínimum weld size requirements.

Use a full-Iength, double-sided, 3/16-in. fillet weld to connect the single plate
to the column.

The final connection design and geometry is shown in Figure 2-3.

AMERICAN !NSTITUI'E OF STEEL CONSTRUCfION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTlTUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCfI N, !Nc.

- - _ . - - -_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ .~~."'_. _ _ _ _ _ O " _•.••.• _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ .. 0 ___•.•· .. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ..

2-18 SYSTEMS UTILIZING R = 3 MOMENT FRAMES 2-19

MOMENT FRAMES
Moment frames resist lateral forces and displacements through flexure and shear in the
beams and columns. The necessary restraint must be provided by the moment connections
between the beam and the columns.
Moment frames tend to have larger and heavier beam and column sizes than braced
frames, as the beams and columns in moment frames are often sized for drift control rather
than strength. The increase in member sizes and related costs, however, is often accepted to
gain the increased flexibility provided in the architectural and mechanical layout in the
structure. The absence of diagonal bracing members can provide greater freedom in the con-
figuration of walls and in the routing of mechanical ductwork and piping. Moment frames
are often positioned at the perimeter of the structure, allowing maximum flexibility of the
interior spaces. Drift control is required by the Applicable Building Code to help limit dam-
age to both the structural and nonstructural systems.
In addition to the requirements of the Applicable Building Code, members and connec-
tions of moment-frames systems for applications with R equal to 3 need only comply with
the Specification. The Seismic Provisions are not required for use in the design of moment
frame systems when R is taken equal to 3.
Example 2.4. Moment-Frame Story Drift Check
Given: Refer to the moment frame elevation shown' Figure 2-4. The Applicable
Building Code specifies the use of AS CE 7 for 'ft requirements. Determine if
the second level of the frame satisfies the drift
From ASCE 7, the Seismic Use Group is 1, the Seismic Design Category is A,
Cd = 3, 1 = 1.0
Solution: From a second-order elastic analysis of the struc e, the inter-story drift between
the base and second levels is,
bxe = 0.277 in.
The Design Story Drift and the story drift li its are those stipulated by the
Applicable Building Cdde. From ASCE 7, th allowable story drift, ¿la, is
0.025hsx ' where hsx is the story height below 1 vel x.

¿la = 0.025hsx = 0.025(14.0 ft)(12 in.lft = 4.20 in.

cp 30'-0"
cp 30'-0" 30'-0" cr
~ROOF W18x50 W18x50 W18x50

~FOURTH W18x50 W18x50 W18x50

LEVE!.
~
~
0THIRD W18x55 W18x5.5 W18x55
LEVEL

~SECOND W18x55 W18x55

~
U') O)
(O
LEVEL x
N ~
r
~ 3:
~BASE

COLUMN SPLlCE
48" ABOVE FINISHED
FLOOR (TYPICAL)

Figure 2~. Moment frame elevation for Exampl s 2.4, 2.5, and 2.6.

AMERICAN lNSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INc. AMERICAN lNSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRU ON, INc.
2-20 SYSTEMS UTILIZING R = 3 MOMENT FRAMES
2-21

ASCE 7 defines the Design Story Oríft as bx ' the deflection of Level x at thej Solution: Check column element slenderness
center of mass as, i The width-thickness ratio for the flanges is,
b = Cdb xe (ASCE 7)[
x 1 b
A¡ = --L = 8.22 (Specification B4.1)
2t¡
3( 0.277 in.)
bx
1.0 The limíting width-thickness ratio for compact anges is,
= 0.831 in. < 4.20 in. o.k. i
i A = 0.38 ~ = 0.38 29,000 ksi = 9. 5
(Specification Table B4.1)
Comment: Comparing the design story drift to the allowable drift, it appears that this frame ¡ p ~ Fy 50 ksi
has been significantly overdesigned. However, it should be noted that the seis-I
Since Al < Ap , the flanges are compact.
míe drift requirements may not govern the design of this frame. In this case, the
frame proportions resulted from serviceability drift requirements for wind. The width-thickness ratio for the web is,

h
Aw =-=20.7 (Specification B4.1)
Example 2.5. Moment-Frame Column Design tw

Given: Refer to Column C-l in Figure 2-4. Determine the adequacy of the ASTM
(Specification Table B4.1)
A992 W-shape (Fy = 50 ksi, Fu = 65 ksi) to resist the following loading between
the base and second levels. The Applicable Building Code specifies the use of
ASCE 7 for calculation of loads. The governing load combination that ineludes 29,000 ksi
Ap = 3.76 ¡--5-0-k-Sl-.-
seismic effects is,
=90.6
(ASCE 7)
Since Aw < Ap , the web is compact.
The factored column forces and moments are,
Determine K
Pu = 224 kips M nt top =2.7 kip-ft Mnt bot =- 0.9 kip-ft
For the x-x axis,
Vu = 8.2 kips Mlt top =38.9 kip-ft Mlt bot =- 66.4 kip-ft

where
Mnt = first-order moment assuming no translation
M lt = first-order moment caused by lateral translation of the frame only With two lateral frame beams and two lateral fr e columns at the connection
located at the column top;
W12x79 d = 12.4 in. tw = 0.470 in. Ix = 662 in. 4 Ag = 23.2 in.2
rx = 5.34 in. ry = 3.05 in. Sx = 107 in) Zx = 119 in) 4
2( 662 in. /14 ft)
1.59
2( 890 in. /3o ft)
W18x55 Ix = 890 in. 4 4

From ASCE 7, this structure is assigned to Seismic Oesign Category A (p = 1.0)

From Commentary Section C2.2b, G = 1.0 r a fixed-base connection.
and SDS = 0.153. Assume there is no transverse loading between the column
Using Commentary Figure C-C2.4, Kx is dete ined as 1.40. (Note that it
supports in the plane of bending and that the beams framing into the column
may be possible to determine a reduc¿d K fact by accounting for inelastic
weak axis are pin connected and produce a negligible moment.
column behavior through the use of the stiffne s reduction factor, t, in the
calculation of G.)

AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc.

AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTIO , !Nc.
2-22 SYSTEMS UTlLIZING R = 3 MOMENT FRAMES
2-23

The leaning column amplifier (Lim and McNamara, 1972) is: Determine the flexural strength
From Specification Section F2, with compact f anges and web and L Lb < Ln
1+ I, P leaning the applicable limit states are yielding and late al-torsional buck1ing~

~(M l(~: =; ; J]" M

, I,P stability
M. = Ch [ M p p -0.7Fy Sx p (SpecificationF2-2)
Assuming 2,625 ft2 is tributary to the stability columns and 6,375 ft 2 is tribu-
tary to the leaning columns, and a uniform load over the entire area,
The cornmentary to Specification Section Fl p ovides an alternate equation for
calculation of Cb for members with linearly vaJIYing moment diagrams between
2
1+ 6,375 ft = 1.85 end points.
2,625 ft2
MI =/Mnt top +Mlt topl=41.6 kip-ft
Therefore,

Kx = 1.85(1.40) = 2.59 M 2 =/Mnt bot +Mlt botl=67.3 kip-ft

From Specification Section C1.3a and Commentary Table C-C2.2,

Ky = 1.0.

Determine the compression strength of the column

Ch = 1.75 + 1.05( :~) + 0.3( :~ r
Cb = 1.75 + 1.05( 41.6 kiP-ft),+ 0.3( 41.6 kiP-ft)2
(Specification C-Fl-l)

67.3 kip-ft 67.3 kip-ft

KL 2.59( 14 ft)( 12 %)
_~x_ = ._ _ _---.:'----:...-..::..:.,,:._ = 81.5
= 2.51
r 5.34 in.
x Mp =FyZx (Specification F2-1)
KLy 1.0(14.0 ft)(12 i%t)
= ----~-..;"...::~ = 55.1 = 50 kSi(119 i~.3)(1 ~2 i~J
ry 3.05 in.
= 496 kip-ft
Using Manual Table 4-22 with KLJrx = 81.5,

<l>Fcr =27.7 ksi Mn =2.51[496-(4.96 0.7(50 ksi)(107 ir

1;2in.lft
hJ( 14.0-10.8J]5::M.
39.9-10.8, p
Pn =Fcr Ag (Specification E3-1)
=1,190 kip-ft:5:496 kip-ft
2 =496 kip-ft
<l>cPn =27.7 ksi( 23.2 in. )
=643 kips Mp controls

<l>bMn= 0.90(496 kip-ft) = 446 kip-ft

Check unbraced length for bending
From Manual Table 3-2, Consider second-order effects

Lp = 10.8 ft Lr = 39.9 ft
(Specification C2-2)
Lp < Lb = 14.0 ft < Lr

(Specification C2-I b)

AME~CAN lNsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INc. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcrI PN, INc.
 2--24 SYSTEMS UTILIZING R = 3 MOMENT FRAMES 2--25

Curtain Wall = 70 kips/level

(Specification C2-4)

where L jloor = 9,000 ft2 ( 80 lb/ft2 ) =720 kips

MI = 0.9 kip-ft
5=9,000 ft2 (20 lb/ ft2 )=180 kips
M 2 = 2.7 kip-ft

_ _ (0.9 kip-ft/ ) The total dead load supported by the second-Itjvel columns is,
Cm - 0.6 0.4 /2.7 kip-ft
= 0.467 r,PD =612 kipS+3(765 kips) + 3(70 kip )=3,120 kips

u= 1.0 Assuming a 0.60 live load reduction factor on the columns, the totallive load
supported by the second-Ievel columns is,
Using Cornmentary Figure C-C2.3 (no sway case) with Gtop = 1.59 and Gbot = 1.0,
Kx is detennined as 0.8. A1temate1y, Kx can conservatively be taken as 1.0 per
Specification Section C 1.3a. r,PL =0.60(3)(720 kipS) = 1,300 kips

2 4
n (29,000 ksi)( 662 in. )
10,500 kips Dfloor = 85psf CURTAIN WALL =70 kips/level
[0.8(14 ft)(12 in./ft)Y Droof =68psf
L floor =80psf
S=20psf

Therefore,

Pr = Pnt =Pu =224 kips

30'-0"
2
30'-0' ~ 30'-0" GD 3<1-0" T
B
1
OA67
1_1.0(224 kips)/
/10,500 kips
>lD
~~~".~-"""~~r~----.¡i:'.====:4:'~~~~~l
=OA77 ~ 1.0 ®--+f:E~-:-~ !E+----3: ~
= 1.0
~i ¡ ~ ~~=.~--I
~+,1~\ ~ ~.- ~:~~----3:
.1'
(Specification C2-3)

-------------1==:1, ~
m _______

u=l.O
D ".A
I_:::._-\---------="_.:.':._----------~_.:.':._,_.:_------~--,
From Figure 2-5,
~
~
MOM NTFRAMEINVESTIGATEO
Ajloor = Aroo! =75 ft(120 ft)=9,000 ft2 . IN DEjslGN EXAMPLES. FOR
ELEI.J~TION SEE FIG. 2-6

D fioor = 9,000 ft2 ( 85 lb/ ft2 ) = 765 kips BRACEO FRAME INVESTIGATEO
IN DESIGN EXAMPLES. FOR
ELEVATION SEE FIG. 2-1
Droo! =9,000 ft2 (68 lb/ ft2 )=612 kips
Figure 2-5. Floor planfor Examples 2.1, 2.2, 2.~ 2.4,2.5, and 2.6.

AMERICAN !NSTITIJTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN INSTP'U'TE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTlPN, !Nc.

-- -
2-26 SYSTEMS UTILIZING R = 3 MOMENT FRAMES
2-27

~Pnt =(1.2+0.2SDS )~PD +P~PQE +O.5~PL +O.2~PS

+OJ=0.~14
(1-3)
0.348+!(83.2 kip-ft
9 446 kip-ft
~Pnt = 1.23( 3,120 kips) + 1.0 (O)+0.5( 1,300 kips )+0.2( 180 kips)
0.514 < 1.0 o.k.
=4,520 kips

2 4 Check the shear strength of the colu n

1t (29,000 kSi)( 662 in. )
-----....!...------;:2;-'- = 3,430 kips
[1.40(14 ft)(12 in.jft)] 2.24Jf,. =2.24 29,000 ksi =~3.9
Fy 50 ksi
By similar process, Pe2 for the W12x65 colurnns on lines 1 and 4 is,
Since h/tw = 20.7 < 53.9, (Specification G2.1a)
Pe2 = 2,400 kips
Vn = 0.6Fyw A w Cv (Specification G2-1)
Since there are two frames,
<1> v Vn = 1.0 ( 0.6)(50 ksi)( 12.4 in.)(0.470' .)(1.0)
~Pe2 =2[2(3,430 kips) + 2(2,400 kiPS)] = 175 kips > 8.2 kips
=23,300 kips
<l>Yn> Vu o.k.
Therefore,
The Wl2x79 is adequate to resist the loads ·ven for Column C-l.
1.24 Note that load combinations that do not inelu e seismic effects must also be
4,520 kips investigated.
23,300 kips

(Specification C2-1 a) Example 2.6. Moment-Frame Beam Des"gn

M rtop =1.0(2.7 kip-ft) + 1.24(38.9 kip-ft) Gíven: Refer to Beam BM-l in Figure 2-4. Determine e adequacy of the ASTM A992
wide-flange section (F'y = 50 ksi, Fu = 65 ks) for the following forc~~ and
= 50.9 kip-ft
moments. The Applicable Building Code speci s the use of ASCE 7 forcalcu-
lation of loads. The governing load combination that ineludes seismic effects is,
M rbot = 1.0( 0.9 kip-ft) + 1.24(66.4 kip-ft)
=83.2 kip-ft (1.2 + 0.2SDS )D + pQE + 0.5L + 0.2S (ASeE 7)

The factored beam moments and shear are,

Check combined loading Mu = -121 kip-ft Vu = 21.4 kips

The moments at quarter points are,

Pr 224 kips 0.348 M 1I4 = 32.8 kip-ft M 1I2 =51.8 kip- t M 3/4 = -3.07 kip-ft
Pe 643 kips
W18x55 d = 18.1 in. tw = 0.390 in. ry = 1.67 in. Sx = 98.3 in.3
Zx = 112 in.3 L = 30 ft rts = 2.00 in. J = 1.66 in. 4

P 8(M
; +"9 M TX + M ry M JS; 1.0 (Specification Hl-la)
ha = 17.5 in. ~=O.OO 965
Sh
·xo
e ex cy

Assume that the beam flanges are braced at the olurnns.

AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc.

AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTI N, !Nc.
 2:-28 SYSTEMS UTll..JZING R = 3 MOMENT FRAMES 2:-29

So/ut¡on: Check beam element slenderness C _ 12.5(121 ~p-ft)

The width-thickness ratio for the flanges is, b- 2.5(121 kip-ft) + 3(32.8 k;ip-ft) + (51.8 kip-ft) + 3(3.07 kip-ft)
= 2.45::; 3.0
A.f =.!!.L. = 5.98 (Specification B4.I)
2tf
The limiting width-thickness ratio for compact flanges is,
Fcr 2
2.451t (29,000) I1+ 0.078(0.000~65) (J2
30.0(12)
[30.0(12)/2.00 y-~ 2.00

A. = 0.38 [ [ = 0.38 /29,000 ksi = 9.15 (Specification Table B4.I) =40.1 ksi
P VFy 50 ksi
Mn = 40.1(98.3) = 3,940 kip-in. == 328 kif-ft::; Mp
Since A.f < A.p , the flanges are compacto
The width-thickness ratio for the web is,
Mp = FyZx (Specification F2-1)
3
= 50 kSi( 112 in. )(1 o/¡2 inJ
(Specification B4.1) = 467 kip-ft

The limiting width-thickness ratio for a compact web is, M n =328 kip-ft

'1
"" p = 3.76p; Fy
= 3.76 /29,000 ksi -_ 90.6
50 ksi
(Specification Table B4.1) <l>bMn =0.90(328 kip-ft) = 295 kip-ft>121 k~-ft o.k.

Since A.w < A.p , the web is compact. Check shear strength
,
Check unbraced length 2.24 ~ =2.24 /29,000 ksi =53.9
From Manual Table 3-2, VFy 50 ksi

Lp = 5.90 ft Lr = 17.5 ft
Since h/t w <2.24~E/Fy ,
Determine the flexural strength
Vn =0.6Fy Aw Cv (Specification G2-1)
From Specification Section F2, with compact flanges and web and Lb > Ln the
applicable limit states are yielding and lateral-torsional buckling.
<l>Vn =1.0(0.6)(50 ksi )(18.1 in.)( 0.390 in.)11.0)
(Specification F2-3) = 212 kips > 21.4 kips o.k.

The Wl8x55 is adequate to resist the loads gi¡Ven for Beam BM-l.
0.078~( Lb J2
2
F Cb1t E 1 + (Specification F2-4)
cr = (Lb J2 Sx ho Yrs Note that load combinations that do ~ot includ~ seismic effects must' also be
Yrs investigated. For example, considering the load ce mbination I.2D + 0.5L + 1.6W,
the following can be determined by a similar pro edure:
12.5M
C
b
= max R ::;3.0 (Specification FI-l) Mu = -166 kip-ft Vu = 24.6 kips
2.5Mmax +3MA +4MB +3MC m
Cb = 2.39 <l>Mn =320 kip-ft
Rm =1.0, doubly syrnmetric members
Mu<<l>Mn o.k.
where,
Vu < <l>Vn o.k.
M c =IM 3/ 4 1

----- AMERICAN lNsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCfION, lNc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTI N, !NC.
2-30 SYSTEMS UTILIZING R = 3 MOMENT FRAMES 2-31

Example 2.7. Moment-Frame Beam-to-Column Using Manual Table 7-5 with s = 3 in., the be . g strength of the beam web is,
Corinection Design <l>Rn =Nb<l>rnt w

Given: = 3(87.8 kipsfm.)( 0.390 in.)

Refer to Joint J-l in Figure 2-4. Design a bolted flange-plated FR moment
connection between Beam BM-l and Column C-1. Assume that the beam and =103 kips > 21.4 kips o.k.
coIuinn are ~STM A992 (Fy = 50 ksi, Fu = 65 ksi) wide-flange sections and
Use 3/ s-in.-thick, single-plate connection wit (3) 3/4-in.-diameter ASTM
that ASTM Á36 (Fy = 36 ksi, Fu = 58 ksi) is used for connecting material. Use
3/4 -in.-dianieter ASTM A325N boIts and 70-ksi eIectrodes.
A325N bolts in standard holes, per Manual able 10-9.

W18x55 d = 18.1 in. bf = 7.53 in. tw = 0.390 in. Determine the required number of bolt in the flange plate
f¡ = 0.630 in. Sx = 98.3 in.3 The flange force is,

From Example 2.6,

Puf =-Mu = ---=--......:.-__
121 kip-ft(12 in./ft)
..!....

Mu = -121 kip-ft d 18.1 in.

Ru = 21.4 kips From Manual TabIe 7-1 for bolt shear, the requ red number of 3/4-in.-diameter
ASTM A325-N bolts is,
Solution: Check beam flexural strength
P 80.2 kips
Specification Section F13 requires that tensile rupture of the flange be investi- N uf 5.04 bolts
gated if, bmin <l>r 15.9 kipslboIt
n

FuAfn < YtFyAfg Try six boIts on a 4-in. gage. Using Manual L bIes 7-5 and 7-6 for bearing
strength and assuming Le = 2 in. and s= 3 in., e bearing strength of the beam
Since Fy/Fu = 50/65 = 0.77 < 0.8, flange is,

<l>Rn =<l>rntfNb ,

Assuming two rows of 3/4-in.-diameter ASTM A325N bolts in standard holes, =87.8 kipsfm.( 0.630 in.)( 6)
=332 kips>80.2 kips o.k.
Afg = bft f = 7.53 in.( 0.630 in.) = 4.74 in.2
Size flange plate for tension force
(Specification D3.2)
Assuming a 7-in. plate width, the minimum thi ess for tension yielding is,
= 4.74 in.2 - 2(Ys in.)(0.630 in.) = 3.64 in.2
YtFyA fg = 1.0(50 ksi)(4.74 in.) = 237 kips

FuAfn = (65 ksi)(3.64 in. 2 ) = 237 kips Try a PL 3/8 in. x 7 in. The tension rupture stre gth of the pIate is,

Since FuAfn z YrFyAg, the limit state of tensile rupture of the flange does not apply. <l>Rn = <l>FuAe = <l>FuUAn

Design the single-piate web connection

=0.75(58 ksi)(){ in.)(l.O)( 7 in.-2 IJ{6 in.+ X6 in.))
=85.6 kips>80.2 kips o.k. (Specification D2-2)
Conservatively, using, Manual Table 10-9, select a 3/8-in.-thick ASTM A36
plate with (3) 3/4-in.-diameter ASTM A325N bolts in standard holes.

<l>Rn = 47.7 kips> 21.4 kips o.k.

AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCfI N, !Nc.
2-32 SYSTEMS UTILIZING R = 3 MOMENTFRAMES 2-33

Using Manual Tables 7-5. and 7-6, with Le = 2 in and s = 3 in., the bearing From Manual Tables 9-3a, 9-3b, and 9-3c,
strength of the flange pI ate is,
<j>FuAnt = 2(46.2 kips/in.)(0.375 in.) = 4.7 kips
<j>Rn = <j>riwNb

= 78.3 kipslin.(X in.)(6) <j>0.6FuA nv = 2(152 kips/in.)(0.375 in.) = 1 4 kips

= 176 kips > 80.2 kips o.k. <j>0.6FyAgv = 2(130 kips/in.)(0.375 in.) = 9 .5 kips

Ubs = 1.0 for uniform tension stress

Note that the flange plate is the critical element, because its block shear width,
thickness, and material strengths are allless than those of the beam flange. The
<j>Rn = 114 kips + 1.0 (34.7 kips) ~ 9 .5 kips + 1.0 (34.7 kips)
two cases for which block shear must be checked are shown in Figure 2-6.
Assume ASTM A36 material. <j>Rn = 149 kips ~ 132 kips .

The first case involves the tearout of the two blocks outside of the two rows of <j>Rn = 132 kips > 80.2 kips o.k.
bolt holes in the flange plateo For this case, the tension area has a width of
2(11/2 in.). The second case involves the tearout of the block between the two Use (2) rows of 3/4 -in.-diameter ASTM A3 5N bolts at a 4-in. gage to
rows of holes in the flange plateo For this case, the tension area has a width connect each flange plate to the beam flang . Use 2-in. edge distance and
of 4-in. Thus, the first case governs. 3-in. spacing for the bolts.

Size the flange plat~ for the compressi n force

t 0.375 .
r= J12 = J12 = 0.108 lll.

Assuming K = 0.65 and 1== 2112 in. (2-in. edge dis ce plus 1/2 in. beam setback),

Kl 0.65(2.50 in.)
15.0
r 0.108 in.
Since KI/r ~ 25, Fcr = Fy, and the compressive s ength of the flange plate is,

<j>Pn =<j>FyAg
=0.90(36ksi)(7in.)(X in.)
= 85.1 kips> 80.2 kips

Use 3/s-in. x 7-in. ASTM A36 flange plates.

FLANGE PL FLANGE PL:

Design the weld between the flange pI. tes and column flange
1 1/2" 4"· 1 1/2" 1 1/2" 4" 1 1/2"
D. 80.2 kips =2.74
mlJ'!
2(1.5)( .392 kipslin.)(7 in.)
CASE 1 CASE 2
Use double-sided, 3/16-in. fillet welds to con ect the flange plates to the
Figure 2-6. Block shear failure paths for Example 2.7. column flange.

By similar calculations, it can be shown that the be flange has adequate strength.
AMERICAN INSTITU1E OF S1EEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NsTITU1E OF S1EEL CONSTRUCTI N, !Nc.
2-34 SYSTEMS UTll.JZING R = 3 PART 2 REFERENCES 2-35

Comment: The colurrm must be checked for panel zone and stiffening requirements. For fur-
ther information, see AISC Design Guide No. 13 Wide-Flange Column Stiffening
at Moment Connections-Wind and Seismic Applications (Carter, 1999).
The final connection design and geometry is shown in Figure 1r-7.
W12X79 COLUMN
PART 2 REFERENCES
American Institute of Steel Construction fuc. (AISC). (2005). Ste 1Construction Manual, AISC,
Chicago, IL.
American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE). (2005). Minimu Design Loads for Buíldings
and Other Structures, SEIIASCE 7-05, ASCE, Reston, VA.
Blodgett, O.W. (1966). Design of Welded Structures, The J es F. LincoIn Arc Welding
Foundation, Cleveland, OH.
Galambos, T.v., ed. (1998). Guide to Stability Design Crite 'a for Metal Structures, 5th
Edition, John Wiley & Sons, fuc., New York.

Lim, L.e. and McNamara, RJ. (1972). "Stability of Novel uilding Systems," Structural
21/2" (6) 3/4"0 A325N Design of Tall Steel Buildings, Vol. ll-16, Proceedings, ASCE-IABSE futemational
BOLTS @ 4" GAGE Conference on the Planning and Design of Tall Buildings, B thlehem, fA, pp. 499-524.
(TOP & BOT.)
Tamboli, A.R. (1999). Handbook ofStructural Steel Connection esign and Details, McGraw-
Hill, New York.
3/8" SINGLE PL
CONNECTION PER
MANUAL TABLE 10-9

W18x55 BEAM WI
STO HOLES

PL 3/8"x7" W/
(3) 3/4"0 STO HOLES
A325N BOLTS (TOP & BOT.)
NOTE:
ALLOW FOR FINGER SHIMS AS NEEOEO.

Figure 2-7. Connection as designed in Example 2.7.

AMERICAN !NSTlTUTE OF STEEL CONsTRucnON, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITIITE OF STEEi:. CONSTRUcnO ,!Nc.
2-36 SYSTEMS UTILIZING R = 3 3-1

PART3
BRACEO FRAME SYSTEMS U ILIZING R > 3

SCOPE ........................................................... 3-2

ORDINARY CONCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAME (O BF) SYSTEMS ....... 3-2
OCBF DESIGN EXAMPLES .......................................... 3-3
Example 3.1. OCBF Brace Design-HSS .............................. 3-3
Example 3.2. OCBF Column Design .............. . ................... 3-6
Example 3.3. OCBF Beam Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ................... 3-8
Example 3.4. OCBF Brace-to-Beam/Column Connection Design-Welded ..... 3-,12
Example 3.5. OCBF Brace-to-Beam/Column Connection Design-Bolted ...... 3-25
SPECIAL CONCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAME (SCB SYSTEMS ......... 3-35
SCBF DESIGN EXAMPLES ...................... . .................. 3-38
Example 3.6. SCBF Brace Design-Pipe . . . . . . . . . .. . .................. 3-38
Example 3.7. SCBF Brace Design-W-Shape ....... . .................. 3-42
Example 3.8. SCBF Column Design .................................. 3-43
Example 3.9. SCBF Beam Design-Inverted V ...... . .................. 3-46
Example 3.10. SCBF Brace-to-Beam Connection Design ................... 3-52
Example 3.11. SCBF Brace-to-Beam/Column Óonnectio Design ......... : .. 3-65
Example 3.12. SCBF Brace-to-Beam/Column Connectio Design-W-Shape ... 3-79
ECCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAME (EBF) SYSTEMS .................. 3-107
EBF SYSTEM DESIGN EXAMPLES ............... . ................. 3-111
Example 3.13. EBF Story Drift Check ............................... 3-111
Example 3.14. EBF Link: Design ................. . ................. 3-112
Example 3.15. EBF Beam Outside of the Link: Design . . ................. 3-120
Example 3.16. EBF Brace Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ................. 3-125
Example 3.17. EBF Column Design ................................. 3-129
Example 3.18. EBF Brace-to-Link Connection Design. . ................. 3-134
Example 3.19. EBF Brace-to-Beam/Column Connection esign ............ 3-138
COLUMN SPLICE DESIGN EXAMPLE . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ................. 3-161
Example 3.20. SCBF Column Splice Design ........ . ................. 3-161
TABLES ....................................... . ................. 3-166
Table 3-1. EBF Link: Design Values for W-Shapes .... . ................. 3-166
PART 3 REFERENCES ............................................ 3-167

AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !NC. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCI1 N, !Nc.
3--2 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTnJZING R > 3 OCBF DESIGN EXAMPLES

SCOPE
The Seismic Provisions requirements and other design considerations summarized in this
Part apply to the design of the members and connections in braced frames that utilize a
response modification factor, R, greater than 3.
derness limit does not apply to braces in two-storyIX-brace frames, because1:hat configura-
tion prevents the development of unbalanced forces on the b amo
OCBF OESIGN EXAMPLES

OROINARY CONCENTRICÁLLY BRACEO FRAME (OCBF)

Example 3.1. OCBF Brace Oesign - H
SYSTEMS
Ordinary Concentrically Braced Frame (OCBF) systems, like other concentrically braced Given: Refer to Brace BR-l in Figure 3-1. Select an ASTM A500 Gr. B HSS
frame systems, resist lateral forces and displacements primarily through the axial strength (~ = 46 ksi, Fu = 58 ksi) to resist the followi g axial !orces. The Applicable
and stiffness of the brace members. Concentrically braced frames are arranged such that Building Code specifies the use of ASCE 7 for calculanon of loads.
the centerlines of the framing members (braces, columns, and beams) coincide or nearly
coincide, thus eliminating flexural behavior. While Special Concentrically Braced Frame PD = O kips . PL = O kips' P E = 10 kips
(SCBF) systems have numerous detailing requirements to ensure greater ductility, OCBF
Ps =O kips PH =O kips
systems anticipate limited inelastic deformation and are designed using a higher seismic
force level to account for their limited system ductility. OCBF systems, with their rela-
tively simple design and construction procedures, can be an attractive choice for smaller
From ASCE 7, the Seismic Design Category is D, 00 = 2.0, P = 1.3, and
SDS = 0.533.
buildings and nonbuilding structures. OCBF systems may be less desirable in larger build-
ings and building s with a higher seismic performance objective. 0.2SDS = 0.2(0.533) = 0.107
Concentrically braced frame systems tend to be more economical than moment resisting
frames and eccentrically braced frames in terms of material, fabrication, and erection costs. Assume that the ends of the brace are pinned d braced against translation for
They do, however, often have reduced flexibility in floor-plan layout, space planning, and both the X-X and y-y axes.
electrlcal and mechanical routirig as a result of the presence of btaces. Foundation costs,
however, may be larger for concentrically braced fráme systems. In certain circumstances, Solution: Using the seismic load combinations in ASC 7, the maximum compressive
braced frames are exposed and featured in the architecture of the building. Several configu- force in the brace is,
rations of braced frames may be considered, inc1uding thoseshown in Seismic Provisions
Figures C-I-13.1 and C-I-13.3. Pu =(1.2 + 0.2SDS )PD + pPQE + 0.5PL + .2Ps
Braced frames typically are located in walls that stack vertically between floor levels. In
Pu = 1.31(0 kips) + 1.3(10 kips)+O.5(O ips)+0.2(0 kips)
the typical office building, these walls generally occur in the "core" area around stair and
elevator shafts, central restroorris, and mechanical and electrical rooms. This generally =13.0 kips
allows for greater architectural flexibility in placement and configuration of exterior win-
dows and c1adding. Depending on the plan location and the size of the core area of the
building, the torsionÍll resistance offered by the braced frames may become a controlling
design parameter. Differential drift between stories at the exterior perimeter must be con-
sidered with this type of layout, as rotational displacements of the floor diaphragms may 18'-9"
J-1
impose forces and deformations on the c1adding system and other nonstructural elements of
the building.
In designing and detailing OCBF systems, there are few special considerations. This is in
direct contrast to SCBF systems, which have numerous detailing and design requirements.
The design of QCBF members is based upon typical steel design procedures, as outlined in
the AISC Steel Construction Manual. The design requirements for OCBF systems are
located in Seismic Provisions Section 14.
Brace members in K, V, or inverted V configuratlons have a slenderness limit of KlIr <
4,JETF:,.YThe
...
liniit on the slenderness in V-type and inverted V-type braced frames is intended
. . •
to limit the unbalanced force that develops on the braced frame beam when the compresslOn
brace buckles and its strength degrades while the tension brace yields. The buckling of the Figure 3-1. OBCF elevaiionfor Examples 3.1,3. 3.3,3.4, and 3.5.
compression brace results in a sigriificant reduction in the frame shear resistance. This slen- For rt;Jofplan see Figure 4-1.

AMERICAN !NsTIfUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Ne. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTI N, mc.
3-4 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 OCBF DESIGN EXAMPLES 3-5

And the maximum tensile force in the brace is,

/.., ps =0.64~EIF
'/ y
Tu = (0.9 - 0.2SDS )PD + POPQE + 1.6PH
29,000 ksi
Tu = 0.793(0 kips) + 1.3( -10 kips) + 1.6(0 kips) /"'ps=0.64 1--'----
46 ksi
= -13 kips =16.1

The length of the brace is, Since /..,::; /..,ps,the HSS4x4x 1/4 is seismically c mpact.
.

L= ~(18.75 ftf + (17.0 ft)2 Determine compression strength of br, ce

= 25.3 ft From Specification Section E3,

This length has been determined by calculating the distance between the work
4.71 [f = 4.71 29,000 ksi = 118
points based on the intersection of the centerlines of the brace, column, and
beams. Shorter lengths of the brace may be used if justified by the Owner's
VFy 46 ksi

Designated Representative for Design.

Kl =197>118
Try an HSS4x4x 1/4 for the braceo
r

(Specification E3-3)
Ag = 3.37 in. 2 r = 1.52 in.
2
tnom = 0.250 in. tdes = 0.233 in. n (29,OOO ksi)
(Specification E3-4)
(197)2
Check slenderness
From Specification Section Cl.3a and Specification Cornmentary Table C-C2.2,
K = 1.0 for both the x-x and y-y axes. =7.38 ksi

KL Fer =0.877( 7.38 )=6.47 ksi

- ::; 200 is recornmended (Specification E2 User Note)
r
(Specification E3-1)
KL 1.0( 25.3 ft)( 12 %)
197 2
r 1.52 in. <PePn =0.90(3.37 in. )(6.47 ksi)

KL ::;200 =19.6 kips> 13.0 kips o.k.

o.k.
r
Determine tension strength ofbrace
Note that if a V or inverted-V brace configuration were used in this design For yielding on the gross section,
example, Seismic Provisions Section 14.2 specifies KL/r::; 4.0~ as the limit
on brace slenderness. Additional beam design requiretnents are specified in (Specification D2-1)
Seismic Provisions Section 14.3.
2
<PtPn =0.90(46 ksi)( 3.37 in. )
Check local buckHng
Per Seismic Provisions Sections 14.2 and 8.2b, the width-thickness ratios of = 140 kips> 13.0 kips o.k.
compression elements in the bracing members must not exceed /"'ps. From
Tension rupture of the brace is checked in Exa
Manual TabIe 1-12,

h Use an HSS4x4x1/4 for OCBF Brace BR-!.

/"'=-=14.2

AMERICAN !NsTlTUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnoN, !Nc. AMERICAN !NsTlTU1E OF STEEL CONSTRUCTI N, !Nc.
3-6 OCBF DESIGN EXAMPLES
BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 3-7

From Specification Table B4.1, for flanges,

Example 3.2. OCBF Column Design
Given: Refer to Column C-1 in Figure 3-1. Select a 17-ft-Iong, ASTM A992 wide- A = 0.56~EIR= 0.56 /29,000 k~i = 13.5
r I y 50 ksi
flange section (S = 50 ksi, ~ = 65 ksi) to resist the following axial forces. The
Applicable Building Code specifies the use of ASCE 7 for ca1culation of loads.
Since A¡ < Ar' the flanges are not slender.
PD = 5 kips PQE = 7 kips PS = 6 kips The width-to-thickness ratio for the web is,
PH =O kips PL = O kips
h
Aw =-=29.9 (Specification B4.2)
From the ASCE 7, the Seismic Design Category is D, 00 = 2.0, P = 1.3, and tw
SDS = 0.533.
From Specification Table B4.1, for webs,
0.2SDS = 0.2(0.533) = 0.107
/29,000 k~ i
Assume that the ends of the column are pinned and braced against translation
Ar = 1.49~E/ Fy = 1.49 . = 35.9
50 kSI
for both the X-X and y-y axes.
Since Aw < Ar' the web is not slender.
So/ution: Using the seismic load combinations in ASCE 7, the maximum compressive
force in the column is,
Determine column compressive streng h
Pu = (1.2 + 0.2SDS )PD + PPQE + 0.5PL + 0.2PS From Specification Section C1.3a and Specificatipn Commentary Table C-C2.2,
K = 1.0 for both the X-X and y-y axes.
Pu = 1.31(5 kips) + 1.3(7 kips) + 0.5( O kips) + 0.2( 6 kips)
= 16.9 kips Kl (1.0)(17.0ft)(12 %) 166
And the maximum tensile force in the colurnn is, r (1.23 in.)

Tu =(0.9 - 0.2SDS )PD + POPQE + 1.6PH 4.71 ~ = 4.71 [29,000 ~si = 113
VFy 50 kSI
Tu =0.793(5 kips) + 1.3(-7 kips) +1.6(0 kips)
= -5.14 kips Kl> 113
r
Try a W8X18,
when ->4.71
Kl
r
-
Fy
[!;
Ag = 5.26 in. 2 b¡= 5.25 in. d = 8.14 in.
rx = 3.43 in. f¡= 0.330 in. tw = 0.230 in.
Fcr = 0.877 Fe (Specification E3-3)
ry = 1.23 in. 2
rt E

Fe=(~r
(Specification E3-4)
ChecklocalbuckHng
The stiffened and unstiffened elements of columns must comply with Specification
Table B4.1.
- 2(29,000 2kSi] = 10 . 4 k SI.
Fe -rt
The width-to-thickness ratio for the flanges is, (166)
bf
/..f=-=7.95 (Specification B4.1) ~r =0.877(1O.4ksi)=9.12ksi
2tf
Pn = FcrAg I

AMERICAN INsTITUlE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INC. AMERICAN INsTITUlE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTI( N, 1Nc.
 3-8 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 OCBF DESIGN EXAMPLES 3-9

'1>cPn =0.90(9.12 ksi)(5.26 in. 2 ) Mu =(1.2+0.2SDS )MD +POM +O.5ML 0.2Ms

=43.2 kips> 16.9 kips
Determine column tension strength
For yielding on the gross section,
Pn = FyAg
2
'1>tPn =0.90(50 ksi)(5.26 in. )
=237 kips>5.14 kips
Use a W8x18 for OCBF Column C-I.
QE
o.k. = 1.31( 4.66 kip-ft) + 1.3( O kip-ft) + 0.5 O kip-ft) + 0.2( 3.52 kip-ft)
= 6.81 kip-ft
Determine the axial force in the beam
The maximum axial force in the beam is,
(Specification D2-l)
Pu = (1.2 + 0.2SDS )PD + POPQE + 0.5PL 0.2Ps
o.k. Pu = 1.31( O kips) + 1.3(8 kips) + 0.5 (O ips) + 0.2( O kips)
= 10.4 kips (tension or compression)

Determine the shear in the beam

Example 3.3. OCBF Beam Design
VD =.!..(0.08 kips/ft+0.026 kips/ft)(18. 5 ft) = 0.994 k;ips
Given: Refer to Beam BM-1 in Figure 3-1. Detennine the adequacy ofthe 18-ft 9-in.- 2
long W12x26, noncomposite ASTM A992 wide-flange section = 50 ksi, (r;, Vs = .!..0.08 kips/ft(18.75 ft) = 0.750 ki s
~ = 65 ksi) for the loading and forces shown. The Applicable Building Code 2
specifies the use of ASCE 7 for calculation of loads.
Vu =(1.2+0.2S DS )VD +pVQE +0.5VL 0.2Vs
WD = 0.08 kips/ft W s = 0.08 kips/ft Vu = 1.31( 0.994 kips) + 1.3( O kips) + O. (O kips) + 0.2( 0.750 kip~)

From the AS CE 7, the Seismic Design Category is D, p = 1.3, and SDS = 0.533. = 1.45 kips

0.2SDS = 0.2(0.533) = 0.107 Check beam element slenderness

The width-to-thickness ratio for the flanges is,
For a W12x26
b¡
rx = 5.17 in. Ix = 204 in. 4 A¡ = - = 8.54 (Specification B4.1)
Ag = 7.65 in. 2 tw = 0.230 in. 2t¡
ry = 1.51 in. Zx = 37.2 in. 3 d= 12.2 in. Sx = 33.4 in. 3
The limiting width-to-thickness ratio for eomp et flanges is,
Assume that the ends of the beam are pinned and braced against translation for
both the X-X and y-y axes.
(Specification Table B4.1)
Solution: Using the seismic load combinations in ASCE 7, determine the moments in
the beam. 29,000 ksi
Ap = 0.38 1-5-0-k-s-i-

M = (0.08 kips/ft+0.026 kips/ft)(18.75 ft)2 = 4.66 kip-ft = 9.15

D
8
0.08 kips/ft(18.75 ft)2 Sinee Al < Ap ' the flanges are eompaet.
Ms = 3.52 kip-ft
- 8 The width-to-thiekness ratio for the web is,

h
Aw =-=47.2 (Specification B4.1)
tw
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRU ON, !Nc.
3-10 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 OCBF DESIGN EXAMPLES 3-11

(Specification Table B4.1) 2

1t EI
el
P = (KLf
2
29,000 ksi "1t (29,000 kSi)( 204 in.4 ) ,
Ap = 3.76 1--5-0-k-s-i-
[1.0(18.75 ft)(12 in.fft)J2;
= 90.6
= 1,150 kips
Since Aw < Ap' the web is compact.
For beam-columns subject to transverse
Determine the flexura! strength (Specification Table C--C2.l)
The steel deck provides the strength and stiffness required by Specification
Section el to brace the top (compression) flange. Since all compression ele- Since there is no translation of the beam ends,
ments of the beam are compact and Lb < Lp' the applicable limit state is
yielding.
Pr =Pnt +B2Plt
Mn=Mp=~Zx (Specification F2-l)
= O kips+1.0(10.4 kips)
M n =50 kSi(37.2 in.
3
)(t o/¡'2 inJ = 10.4 kips
= 155 kip-ft M rx = B1Mnt +B2 M lt
= 1.0 1(6.81 kip-ft) + 1.0(0 kip-ft)
M ex = <l>bMn = 0.90(155 kip-ft)
=6.88 kip-ft
= 140 kip-ft
Therefore,
Determine the compressive strength
B 1.0 1.01
From Specification Section e1.3a and Specification eornmentary Table e-e2.2,
1 1-( 1.0(10.4 kiPS))
K = 1.0 for both the X-X and y-y axes. The unbraced length with respect to both
1,150 kips
the X-X and the y-y axes is 18.75 ft.

KLy = 1.0(18.75 ft)(12 iVrt) Check combined !oading of the W1

149
ry 1.51 in.
Pr 10.4 kips = 0.133
From Manual Table 4-22, Pe 78.0 kips
<l>eFer = 10.2 ksi Since P/Pc < 0.2,

= FcrAg
~+(Mrx
Pn (Specification E3-1)
+ Mry.J:::; 1.0 (Specification Hl-lb)
<l>ePn =<l>FerAg 2P Me M ex ey
Pe = <l>ePn = 10.2 kSi( 7.65 in.2 ) = 78.0 kips
~+(
2(78.0)
6.88 +0)=0.116<1.0
140 kip-ft
o.k.
Consider second-order effects
e
Bl=-_m_~l
(Specification C2-2)
aP
r
1-_
P
el
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL COlI/SnmCl:lOJI¡, !Ne.
 3-12
BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 OCBF DESIGN EXAMPLES

Check shear strength Solution: From Examples 3.1, 3.2, and 3.3,

2.24 JFE ~2.24 29,000 ksi ~53.9 Beam W12x26 d = 12.2 in.
k des = 0.680 in.
tw = 0.230 in.
h = 6.49 in.
tf= 0.380 in.
T= 10 1/8 in.
yw
50 ksi f
~ = 50 ksi Fu = 65 ksi
Since h/tw < 2.24JE/~w '
Column W8x18 d = 8.14 in. t w = 0.230 in. tf= 0:330 in.
k des = 0.630 in. Fy = 50 ksi Fu = 65 ksi
(Specification G2-1)

Brace HSS4x4x 1/4 Ag = 3.37 in. 2 =0.233 in. r = 1.52 in.

<p Vn = 1.0 ( 0.6)(50 ksi)( 12.2 in.)( 0.230 in.)(1.0)
Fy =46ksi Ry = 1.4 ksi
= 84.2 kips > 1.45 kips o.k.

Use a W12x26 for OCBF Beam BM-l. Determine required tensile strength of brace connection
Per Seismic Provisions Section 14.4, the brace dormecticm must be designed to
Comments: In this case, the beam has significant margin between its strength and the actual develop the expected yield strength, in of the braceo Therefore, the
load it resists. When the beam is more heavily loaded, the Owner's Designated required tensile strength of the connection is,
Representative for Design may be able to justify a shorter unbraced Iength
about the y-y axis for the beam in compression, resulting ina lighter designo Tu = RyFyAg =1.4( 46 kSi)( 3.3~ in.2 ) =
For example, transverse beams or joists framing into Beam BM-l could have
connections deep enough to brace the beam laterally, or bracing couId be added The required brace connection strength need exceed the maximum force
when transverse beams do not existo However, least weight is not always syn- that can be developed by the system or a effect based upon using the
onymous with least cost, and the decreased material cost for a lighter beam amplified seismic load. From Example 3.1,
should be compared against any additional material, fabrication, "and erection
costs that may result, as a lighter beam does not often offset the additional cost PD =O kips PL = O kips = 10 kips PS =Okips
of special bracing or connections.
~ =(1.2+0.2 SDS)PD +ºo PQE +O.5PL +
Example 3.4. OCBF Brace-to-Beam/Column Connection Pu = 1.31( O kips) + 2.0( 10 kips) + 0.5( O
Design - Welded
=20 kips
Given: Refer to Joint J-1 in Figure 3-1. Design the connection between brace, beam, Therefore the required tensile strength of the cormelctIcm is 20 kips.
and column. Use a welded gusset plate concentric to the brace to connect the
brace to the beam and column. Use a welded connection between the beam and
Design brace-to-gusset weld
the column. Use ASTM A36 (~ = 36 ksi, ~ = 58 ksi) for aH pIate material and
The maximum fillet weld size that can be de'fel()pe:a by the brace can be deter-
assume the member sizes and their material specifications are as determined in
mined bysetting the weld strength equal to shear rupture strength of the
Examples 3.1, 3.2, and 3.3. The Applicable Building Code specifies the use of
ASCE 7 for calculation of loads. HSS wall.

From the ASCE 7, the Seismic Design Category is D,

SDS= 0.533.
ºo = 2.0, P = 1.3, and
$( Jz J( ~ )(0.60FEXX )~$(0.60FuHSS 'd"
The shear force in the beam coincident with the axial force in the brace is
Ru = 1.45 kips.

AMERICAN !NSIDUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~sTR~uQrl0N, !Nc.
3-14 BRACEO FRAME SYSTEMS UrnJZING R > 3 OCBF OESIGN EXAMPLES 3-15

F t
D< uHSS des
3.09 kips/in. An =Ag - 2(~ in. + jg in.)tdeSign
2
58 ksi( 0.233 in.) = 3.37 in. - 2(% in.)( 0.233 in.)
<-_....:...-_,--...:...
3.09 kips/in. = 3.08 in.2
::;;4.37 sixteenths
B2+2BH
(Specification Table 03.1)
Try (4) 31I6-in. fillet welds to connect the brace to the gusset plate. x= 4(B+H)
The minimum Iength of the four fillet welds is,
For square HSS, this reduces to,
P
1 > u _ 3B
w 4(1.392 kiPS/in.)D x=8
> 20 kips __ 3(4 in.) _ 50'
x-----l. lll.
4( 1.392 kipS/in.)( 3 sixteenths) 8

~1.20 in.
U=I-~ (Specification Table D3.1)
1
It is good practice to select the length of longitudinal fillet welds at least equal
to the distance between the welds, and shear lag effects are reduced by increas- =1_1.50 in.
ing connection length. 5 in.
Try 5-in.-Iong fillet welds to connect the brace to the gusset plateo =0.700

The strength of (4) 5-in.-Iong 31I6-in. fillet welds to connect the brace to the 2
Ae =UAn =0.700(3.08 in. )=2.16 in. (Specification D3-1)
gusset plate is,

Pn = FuAe (Specification 02-2)

(Specification J2.4)

<pRnw = <pFwAw <PtPn = 0.75( 58 ksi)( 2.16 in. 2 ) = 94.0 kip > 20 kips
= 0.75 (0.60FEXX )(Aw)
Since Pu < <pPn, the HSS4x4x 1/4 is adequate, n coverplates are requirea.
= 0.75(0.60 x 70 ksi)( 0.707 x X6 in. x 4 x 5 in.)
Use (4) 3/16-in. fillet welds, 5 in. long to conne t the brace to the gusset plateo
= 83.5 kips> 20 kips . o.k.
Assume an initial connection geometry as sho n in Figure 3-2.
The minimum gusset plate thickness required to develop the force delivered by
the welds is, Check the Whitmore section
The Whitmore width is,
. =
mm Pu _ 20 kips = O 077 .
t 2<P(0.6Fug )L - 2(0.75)(0.6)(58 ksi)(5 in.) . lll.
Lw = 21w tan30+B=2(5 in.)tán30+4· .=9.8 in.

This is well below the minimum practica! thickness. Try a 112-in. gusset thickness. However, approximately 3/8 in. of the Whitmo e width is in the beam. Using
the 112-in. gusset plate,
Check shear lag rupture of brace
Rn =Fy Ag (Specification J4-1)
Assume that the width of the sIot in the HSS brace will allow a lh6-in. gap

[
between the HSS walI and the gusset on each side of the gusset. The net area
of the HSS is then, (36ksi)(9.8in.-0~375)(X· .)]
<pR =0.90 . )
n +(50 ksi)(0.375 in.)(0.230· .

= 157 kips > 20 kips o.k.

AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INc.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRU
3-16 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTlLIZING R > 3 OCBF DESIGN EXAMPLES
3-17

Determine connection interface torces

~ P =5-in.- ( 2OkIps
V =- . ) =6.54
The forces at the gusset-to-beam and gusset-to-column interfaces are deter- uc r u 15.3 in.
mined using the Uniform Force Method with a geometry that produces a
a
negligible moment (a. - = 0.5 in.). This moment will not alter the final design H ec 4.07 in. (
=-p = - - 20kIps =5.32
.)
ofthis connection and is neglected in this example. A l-in. X l-in. clip is used uc r u 15.3 in. ,
in the comer of the gusset. The connection design is based on the amplified
seismic load. ebp 6.10 in. (
Vub=- .)
u =--.- 20kIps =7.97
r 15.3 ID.
12.2 in. 6 10 .
eb =--2-=' In. ec -- -
8.14
- 2in.
-- -4. 07·In.
a. =--.
H ub=-Pu 6.5 in. ( .)
-.- 20 klpS =8.50
r 15.3 ID.
a. = 1 in.+ li(12 in.-l in.) ~ = 1 in.+ li(9 in.-l in.)
= 6.5 in. =5.0 in. Design gusset-to-beam weld
The length of weld along the gusset-to-beam . is,

r= (a. + eJ2 +(~+eb)2 lWb = 12 in. -1.00 in. = 11 in.

8.50 kips
=J(6.5 in.+4.07 inf +(5.0 in.+6.10 inf fv
11 in.
0.773 kips/in.

=15.3 in. 7.97 kips

fa 0.725 kips/ in.
11 in.

fpeak = ~(fa + fb)2 + fv 2

fLCOLUMN
W12x26 BEAM

favg = i[ ~(fa -fb)2 + f} +

W.P. Because no bending stress is present,

------- f peak=favg =~0.7732+0.7252 =1.06

To account for weld stress distribution, the cprmelcticm is designed for the
greater offpeak or 1.25favg.
W8x18 ---JI
COLUMN f r= 1.25favg= 1.25(1.06 kips/in.) = 1 kips/in.

D> 1.33 kips/in. 0.478

2( 1.392 kips/ in.) S1Xtet~nt:hjs

L BRACE

Figure 3-2. Assumed initial connection geometry for Example 3.4.

AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INc.

AMERICAN INsTlTUTE OF STEEL CmlsTR:uCI1OIN, INc.
3-18 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTllJZING R > 3 OCBF DESIGN EXAMPLES 3-19

<j>Rn = 1.0[2.5 (0.680 in.) + 11 in.J( 50 )(0.230 in.)

Altematively, Specification J2.4 can be used. The load angle with respect to
the longitudinal axis of the weld group is, = 146 kips > 7.97 kips o.k.

e=tan- 1 ( Vub J=tan- 1 (7.97 kiPS] =43.2 0 Design gusset-to-column weld

Hub 8.50kips The length of weld along the gm¡ser.-[O··COlLUIIlm interface is,

The fillet weld strength is, lwc =9.0 ÍD.-LOO ÍD.=8 ÍD.

5 6.54 kips
<j>rn =1.392 kiPsl"m.(1.o+0.50sin1. e)
fv 0.818 kips/ ÍD.
8 in.
0
= 1.392 kiPsl"m.( 1.0+ 0.50 sin 1.5 (43.2 ))
5.32 kips
fa 0.665 kips/in.
= 1.79 kipslin. 8 ÍD.

Because no bending stress is present,

1.25 (7.97)2 +(8.50)2
D=--~--~~~---
1.79(11)(2) f peak =/avg =~0.8182+0.6652 =1.05 in.
= 0.370 sixteenths
f r = 1.25favg = 1.25( 1.05 ki~S/in.)= 1
Use (2) full-Iength 31I6-in. filIet weIds to connect the gusset pIate to the beam. 1.31 kips/ÍD. O: .
D> .471 SIX
2(1.392 kiPS/in.)
Check gusset plate rupture at beam weld
A conservative method to determine the mínimum gusset plate thickness reguired
to transfer the shear and tension forces is to set the shear rupture strength of the Altematively, Specification Section J2.4 can used. The load angIe with
gusset pIate egual to the weId strength (based on the resultant force). Thus, one respect to the longitudinal axis of the weld
check satisfies both the shear rupture and tension rupture criteria. In tension,

6.19D
t . =--
mm F
a=mn-1[~: J=mn-l( !~~::]
u
The fillet weld strength is,
6.19(0.4 78)
58 ksi
<j>rn = 1.392 kiPslin.( 1.0 + 0.5 oSÍll 1.5 e)
= 0.051 ÍD. < Ji' ÍD. o.k.
= 1.392 kipsl"m.[ 1.0 + 0.50sin1.5 (39. ]

Check gusset plate yielding at beam weld = 1.74 kipsl"m.

Since the gusset pIate satisfies the mínimum thickness criteria for shear rupture
1.31 kipsl"m.
based on weld size, it also satisfies the t~~sion and shear yielding criteria. D. 0.376 sixteenths
mm
2( 1.74 kipsl"m.)
Check beam web local yielding
The beam force is applied at o. from the beam end. Since ex < 12.2 in., A 1/8-in. fillet weId on each side of the gusset be sufficient for strength.
However, a 1/8-in. gap between the coIumn and pIate has been provided
(Specification 110-3)
to accommodate erection toIerances. Per AWS 1.1, if the root opening of a

AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CO~STRUcrION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTIPiN, !Nc.

._-------_._---_.. _-----------
3-20 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 OCBF DESIGN EXAMPLES
3-21

fillet weld is greater than Ih6 in., the size of the fillet weld must be increased To facilitate erection of the beam, a shear plate
by the root opening. Therefore, a thickness and grade and
with the number, diameter, and grade of bolts to resist erection loads
Use (2) full-Iength 1/4_in. filIet welds to connect the gusset plate to the column. may be provided. The shear plate can also as backing for the weld
between the beam web and column flange. that these elements could be
Check gusset plate rupture at weld designed similarly to Example 3.5 to eliminate CJP groove weld.
As determined previously, a 0.051-in. gusset plate will develop the strength of
a l/s-in. fillet weld on each side of the plate e/4-in. fillet welds, les s the l/s-in. Determine the compression strength
root opening allowance). The length of the brace from work point to point is 25.3 ft. However,
based on the connection geometry shown in 3-2, the actual Iength ofthe
112 in. > 0.051 in. o.k. ft
brace is approximately 22 11 in. The actual will be used to determine
the maximum expected strength of the brace
Check gusset plate yielding at column weld yield strength of the brace is,
The yielding strength of the gusset plate is adequate for the same reasons stated
Fye = RyFy = 1.4 (46 ksi) = 64.4 ksi
previously for the check at the beam weld.
Use a 112-in.-thick gusset plateo
KL 1.0(22.9 ft)(12 %)
181
Check column web local yielding r 1.52 in.
Since the column force is applied at (B + d b ) > de from the end,
4.71 [K = 4.71 29,000 = 99.9 < KL
(Specification JI 0-2)
VFy 64.4 r
Rn = (5k+N)Fyw t w
When KL >4.71 [K
$Rn = 1.0[ 5( 0.630 in.)+8 in.J( 50 ksi)( 0.230 in.) r VFy
=128 kips>5.32 kips o.k. Fcr = 0.877 Fe (Specification E3-3)
Determine torces at beam-to-column connection

Vu = Vub + RUb = 7.97 kips + 1.45 kips = 9.42 kips F

Hu =Huc =5.32 kips

e (~r
Use a complete-joint-penetration gro ove weld, which is more than adequate Fcr =0.877(8.74 ksi)=7.66 ksi
given the loads.

Check beam web shear strength $Pn =$Fcr Ag (Specificatión E3-1)

Assuming the weld access holes do not extend past the k dimension, the beam 2
Pn = 0.90( 7.66 ksi)( 3.37 in. )
web shear yielding strength is,
=23.2 kips
$vVn =1.0(0.6F)t
y wT The required strength of the gusset need not the amplified seismic load.
= 1.0 ( 0.6)( 50 ksi)( 0.230 in.)( 10 Xin.) Therefore,

=69.9 kips> 9.42 kips o.k. P u gusset = 20.0 kips

AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTlON, !Nc.

AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL Cbl'iSTRUCTIONi, !Nc.
3-22 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 OCBF DESIGN EXAMPLES 3-23

Check compression buckling ot gusset plate Using Manual Table 9-4 with N/d > 0.2,
Based on the connection geometry shown in Figure 3-2, the average unbraced
length of the gusset plate is approximately 5 1/2 in. <1>Rs = 22.3 kips

r= Ju. = O~. =0.144 in.

<1>R6 =3.79 kipsfm.

<1>Rn =<1>Rs +N(<1>R6)

KL 0.65(5.50 in.) = 22.3 kips + 11 in.( 3.79 kipsfm.)
24.8
r 0.144 in. = 64.0 kips > 7.97 kips o.k.
Since KLlr ~ 25, F;;r = S, and the required Whitmore width is then,
Check column web crippling

Lwmuz.
p
u 20.0 kips
0.90( 36 ksi)( 0.5 in.)

The Whitmore width along the gusset plate is,

1.23 in.
Rn~ O.80t
w2
l1+ 3( ~)( :; r (Specification 110-4)

L w =9.8 in.-0.375 in.=9.43 in. > 1.23 in. o.k. = 0.80 (0.230 f [1 + 3(_8_.. )( 0.23
8.14 O.
29,000(50)( 0.330)
0.230
= 166 kips
Determine connection interface torces
The forces at the gusset-to-beam and gusset-to-column interfaces are determined
using the Uniform Force Method.
<1>Rn = O.75( 166 kips) = 125 kipSI> 5.32 o.k.

eb = 6.10 in. ec = 4.07 in. r = 15.3 in. Determine torces at beam-to-column ,...h,nn.=>,....,.¡nn

a = 6.5 in. ~ = 5.00 in. Vu = Vub + RUb = 7.97 kips + 1.45 kips =

= ~ p = 5.00 in. (20.0 kips) = 6.54 kips

Hu =Huc =5.32 kips
v
uc r u 15.3 in.
The shear and tension forces are the same as the and cOmpression forces for
H = ec P = 4.07 in. (20.0 kipS)=5.32 kips which the connection was origillally designed. 'T'I.I,~_~.,~_~ the connection as pre-
uc r u 15.3 in. viously designed is adequate to resist the shear tension forces by inspection.
The final connec~on design and ge9metry is
V =ebp
- = 6.lOin·(200k·
--- . 1ps ) =.
797k·lpS
ub r u 15.3 in.

a =
H b=-P 6.5-in.
- ( 20.0kIps
. ) =8. 50 k·lpS
u r u 15.3 in.

As can be seen by comparison, the forces generated in compression of the brace

are the same as those generated by the tensile force of the braceo Nonetheless,
since compressive forces are being transferred through the gusset-to-beam and
gusset-to-column interfaces, additional connection checks are required.

Check beam web crippling

N/ = 11 in.! . = 0.90
Id 712.2 m.
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc.
AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL Cm¡STRucr¡O¡"¡, !Ne.
3-24 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 OCBF DESIGN EXAMPLES 3-25

Example 3.5. OCBF Brace-tO-Deii:lrtl/' lumn Connection

Design - Bolted

Given: Refer to Joint J-l in Figure 3-1. Redesign connection given in Example 3.4.
Use a welded gusset plate concentric to the Use a single-plate connec-
tion to connect the beam and the gusset to the column and a welded
rCOLUMN CJP GROOVE WElD connection between the beam and the gusset Use ASTM A36 (~ = 36 ksi,
BEAMWEBTO
COlUMN FLANGE Fu = 58 ksi) for all plate material and the member sizes and their mate-
I rial specifications are as determined in EX,illll)1es 3.1, 3.2, and 3.3. TheAppticable
Building Code specifies the use of ASCE 7 calculation of loads.
I
I
ASREQD FOR
From ASCE 7, the Seismic Design is D, no = 2.0, P = 1.3, and
ERECTION lOADS ON
SINGLE PLATE SDS= 0.533.
I
Solution: From Examples 3.1, 3.2, and 3.3,
Beam W12x26 d= 12.2 in. tw = 0.230 in. t¡= 0.380 in.
b¡= 6.49 in. T= 101/8 in.
W12x26 Fu = 65 ksi Ru = 1.45 kips
PLATE W/ BOlTS BEAM
ASREQD. FOR
ERECTION lOADS Column W8x18 tw = 0.230 in. t¡ = 0.330 in.
& WELD BACKING
~= 50 ksi Fu = 65 ksi
BOLT(S) AS REQD. _---1L~
FOR ERECTION lOADS Brace tdes = 0.233 in. r'= 1.52 in.

Fu = 58 ksi
W8x18
COlUMN
As in Example 3.4, the connection design based on the amplified seismic
load. The brace to gusset connection and buckling checks are similar to
HSS 4x4x1/4 those illustrated in Example 3.4.
BRACEW/
1/4 STD. HOlES Use (4) 5-in.-long, 31t6-in. fillet welds to
1/4 plate and a 112-in. gussetplate thickness,

Determine connection interface

Figure 3-3. Connection designed in Example 3.4. The forces at the gusset-to-beam and !lWiSel[-UI:'-C(HUlrnn
using the Unifonn Force Method. The planes
column bolt tine and the gussetlbeam u ..\~u.,.,,'I" The assumption of aplane ofuni-
form force at the column bolt tine allows the at the column connection to be
designed for shear only (no eccentricity). this convenient assumption
for connection design requires that a moment be resolved in the
design of the members. In this case, the will be assigned to the beam.
It should be noted that this assumption is than that made for the typi-
cal cases of the Unifonn Force Method in the Manual and is not a
requirement for this type of connection. work points and unifonn
force planes can ofien be selected to balance engineering, fabri-
cation and erection economy.

AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnoN, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STlfEL COIN"STRt(¡C:TION, !Nc.
 3-26 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 OCBF DESIGN EXAMPLES 3-27

Assume ah initial connection geometry as shown in Figure 3-4. Using the

analysis found on Manual page 13-10: v = ~p = 5'.00 in. (20.0 tclps) =
ue r u 16.5 in.

d d H = ee P = 6.57 in. (20.0 ~s) = 7

eb =i=6.l0 in. e =---f..
2
+ 2.5 fu. =6.57 in. ue r u 16.5 in.
2 e

f3 =5.00 in. a= ){(12 in. + ){ in.-5 in.+ ){ in.) v = eb p = 6.1 Oin. (20.0 laps) = 7
ub r u 16.5 in. •
=6.50 in.
H =~p = 5.67 in. (20.0 kips)=6.8
Since the gusset-to-beam connection is more rigid than the gusset-to-column ub r u 16.5 in.
connection, the beam can be assumed to resist the moment generated by eccen-
tricity between the actual gusset centroids and the ideal centroids calculated
MUb = vub!a - ~ = 7.39 kips!5.67 in. - .50 in.! = 6.13 kip-in.
using the Uniform Force Method. Therefore,
These forces are illustrated in Figures 3-5 3-6.
f3 =~ = 5.00 in. COL.
a=(eb +f3)tane-ee
=( 6.10 in. + 5.00 in.) tan (47.8° )-6.57 in.
= 5.67 in.

r= (a+eet +(f3+ eb t
=~(5.67 ih.+ 6.57 iny +(5.00 in. + 6.10 iny
=16.5 in.
fLCOLUMN

2"

t=
Vu Vub+Vuc+Rub
W.P.
(a) THROUGH AXIS OF BOLTED
LBEAM
W.P.

f:t~b3---
-t--1f----.¡,---r--
CD I

I I

W8x18
COLUMN L (4)3/4"0
ASiMA325N
BOLTSIN
sto. HOl.ES (b) THROUGH GUSSET

Figure 3-4. Assumed initial connecn'on geometry for Example 3.5.

Figure 3-5. Free-body diagrams
AMERICAN lNsT.rr&rn OF STEEL CONsTRucnON, lNc.
AMERICAN lNSlITUTE OF STEEL COiNST&UC:TION,lNC.
hit'h. >
3-28 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTlLIZING R > 3 OCBP DESIGN EXAMPLES 3-29

Design gusset-to-beam weld

To accornmodate the bottorn flange block, which extends 112 in. past the single f""" = Hfp"'k +~f, 2 +(fa - fb)2 ]
plate, the maxirnurn length of weld along the gusset-to-bearn interface is,
~[ 2.06 kiprlm. +
l
= r - - - -...:...kip-·-m-o)-2+-(-1-.06-kip-·-m-.---0.7-5-0-kip-m-.
)2-
1
lwb =12 in. + X in.-5 in.- X in. = 7.00 in.
= 1.54 kipm.
Treating the weld as a line,
2.06 kipslin. 3
1.
s = (7.00iny
f avg 154 kipm.
w 6
Since Ipeal/favg > 1.25, the weld stress <11.S1tnb~(m factor need not be applied.
The forces along the gusset-to-beam interface are, For a discussion of the weld stress distribution of 1.25 see Manual Part 13,
page 13-11.
fv 6.87 kips 0.981 kipsj in. Therefore,fr = Ipeak = i06 kips/in.
7.00 in.

fa
7.39 kips j
1.06 kips in.
2.06 kips / in. O 40
D> ( ) .7 """......,,,'u.'"
7.00 in. 2 1.392 kips/ in.
h 6.13 kip-in 0.750 kipm. For a derivation of the ¡fillet weld sHear <j>rn = 1.392 kips/in. per six-
8.17 in. 3 1m. teenth see Manual Part 8.

f peak = f} + (fa + fb )2 Altematively, the Eccentrically Loaded Weld Tables found in Part 8 of

~( 0.981 kipm.)2 + (1.06 kipm. + 0.750 kipm.)2

the Manual can be used. The load angle with to the longitudinal axis
= of the weld group is,

= 2.06 kipm.
e=tan-1 [ Vub J=tan-1 (7.39kipSJ=
Hub 6.87 kips
CLCOL.

a=!Jz.= 6.10 in. =0.871

W.P. 1w 7.00 in.
LBEAM
The tabulated angle that is closest to, but less the calculated load angle
Vub = 7.39 kips is 45°. Interpolating frorn Manual Table 8-4 e = 45° and using k = O,
vuc = 6.06 kips MUb = 6.13 kip-in.
e = 1.88 kips/in.
Hulf 6.87 kips The average and peak weld stresses are not deterrnined when using this
rnethod; therefore, the weld stress distribution should be applied unless
Huc =7.96 kips additional calculations establish that the of peak-to-average weld
stresses is greater than or equal to 1.25.

RUb =125~Vub2 +Hub 2 =1 + (6.87 kips)2 = 12.6 kips

L BRACE
--~------~--~~~=128~reenfus

Figure 3-6. Connection interface jorces jor Example 3.5.

AMERICAN !NSTITU1E OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~STR.uCIjloN, !Nc.
3-30 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 OCBF DESIGN EXAMPLES 3-31

From Specification Table J2.4, the minimum size fillet weld allowed for the Both of these values exceed the 10.0 kips l~'-IIUllqU, but at least 2 bolts are
parts being connected is 3116 in. required. By inspection, block shear rupture does
Use (2) full-Iength 3f¡6-in. filIet weIds to connect the gusset pIate to the beam. Use (2) 3/4-in.-diameter ASTM A325N bolts in d9nlf:ilIrlf holes to connect
the gusset pIate to the shear plateo
Check gusset plate rupture at beam weld
A conservative method to determine the minimum gusset plate thiclrness required Design beam-to-column single-plate
to transfer the shear and tension forces is to set the weld strength (based on the As given in Example 3.4, Ru = 1.45 kips
resultant force) equal to the shear rupture strength of the gusset plateo Thus, one
check satisfies both the shear rupture and tension rupture criteria. Vu = Ru + Vub = 1.45 kips + 7.39 kips = 8.84

6.19D Hu = Huc = 7.96kips

t. = - -
muz F
u The resultant that will be resisted by the bolts is,
6.19(0.740)
58
=0.0790 in. Ru =~(8.84kipst +(7.96kipst
= 11.9 kips
1/2 in. > 0.0790 in., o.k.
The resultant is similar to that which is showh
Check gusset plate yielding at beam weld plate connection and, therefore, a similar cOImelctic,~
It can be shown that since the gusset plate satisfies the minimum thiclrness cri- Use (2) 3/4-in.-diameter ASTM A325N bolts in sland~lrd holes to conttect
teria for rupture based on weld size, it also satisfies the tension and shear the beam to shear plateo
yielding criteria.
Design weld between column and single
Check beam web local yielding The single plate supports the reactions from the and the gusset. The
The beam force is applied a. from the beam end. Since a. < 12.2 in., forces at the connection of the single plate to the flange are,
;'1
Rn =(25k+N)Fywtw (Specification 110-3) Vu =Ru + Vub + Vuc
= 1.45 kips + 7.39 kips + 6.06 kips
<l>Rn = 1.0 [ 25( 0.680 in.)+7.00 in.J(50 ksi)( 0.230 in.)
= 100 kips> 6.87 kips o.k.
= 14.9 kips
Hu = 7.96 kips (at both connections)
t'1

M u = Vu e = 14.9 kips (25 in.) = 37.3 kip-in.

I
Design gusset-to-single-plate connection
The resultant force on the bolts in the gusset plate is, The tension and compression loads are assumed to be by the plate segments
extending 1112 in. from the outer bolts in each bolt (6 in.) and the shear forces
R =
u
IV 2+Huc 2
Vuc and moments are assumed to be resisted by the entire length, which is 17.1 in.

= ~( 6.06 kips)2 + (7.96 kips)2 lw =eb +~+3.00in.+3.00in.

=6.10 in. +5.00 in. +6.00 in.
=10.0 kips
= 17.1 in.
From Manual Table 7-1, the shear strength of a 3/4-in.-diameter A325N bolt is
Treating the welds as lines,
15.9 kips. With a 1/2-in. gusset plate and using Manual Table 7-5 for a 3-in.
spacing, the bearing strength of the plate is,

sw z2
(17.1 inf 3
48.7 in. / in.
<l>rn =78.3 kipslin.( 05 in.)=392 kipSlboh 6 6 '!",

ti
AMERICAN !NsTlTUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION,
~32 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 OCBF DESIGN EXAMPLES ~33

f = 14.9kips =0.871 kips/in.

v 17.1 in.
M =H e=7.96kipS(X in. +
u u 2
Ji'2 in'J=3 kip-in.
fa 7.96.kips 1.33 kips/in.
6m.
Again using plate segments extending 11hin. the outer bolts to resist the
fb 37.3 kip-in. 0.766 kips/in. compression,
48.7 in. 3 /in.
P 7.96kips
u
2 0.109<0.2
f r = fv +(fa + fb )2 <j>Pn 12.2 kipslin.(6 in.)

=~( 0.871 kipsfm.)2 +(1.33 kipsfm.+ 0.766 kipsfm.)2 P M

_u_+ _u_:::; 1.0
2<j>Pn <j>Mn
= 2.27 kipsfm.
0.109 + 3.48 kip-ft 0564<1.0 o.k.
D> 2.27 kips/ in. 2 6.83 kip-ft
0.815 sixteen1hs
2(1.392 kips/in.) Use a 3/s-in.-thick single plate to connect the and gusset to the column.
Considering the column flange thickness and assuming the single-plate thick-
ness will be similar to the gusset plate thickness, from Specification Table J2.4, Check column web cripplíng
the minimum size fillet weld is 3/16 in.
Use a full-Iength, double-sided 3/16-in. fillet weld to connect the single plate
to the column flange. (Specification J10-4)

Size the single plate

By a process similar to that which was illustrated for the gusset pi ate, it can be
shown that a 3/s-in. single plate will satisfy bolt bearing and block shear
requirements, as well as the gusset edge forces.
=140 kips
Try a 3/s-in.-thick single plateo For compression buckling of the single plate,
assume K = 0.65. The radius of gyration for a 1-in.-wide strip of the plate is, <j>Rn =0.75( 140 kips)= 105 kips> 7.96 kips
__t__ 0375 in. -O 108'
r- Jl2 - Jl2 -. m. By a process similar to that which was illustrated Example 3.4, it can be
shown that the connection is adequate for the ampl1Jlea seismic load acting in
compression.
Kl 0.65( 25 in.)
15.0 The final connection design and geometry is
r 0.108 in.

Since Kl/r :::; 25, ~r = ~ and the compressive strength of the single plate is,

<j)Pn =0.90Fy Ag =0.90(36 ksi)(0.375 in.)= 12.2 kipslin.

6
<j>M = 0.90F Z = 0.90(36 kSl.J[ in.(0.375 ini ] = 6.83 kip-in.
n y 4

AMERICAN !NsTIrUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !NC.

AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION,
 3-34 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 SPECIAL CONCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAME (SCBF) QV<J'T'1:'l\KQ 3-35

SPECIAL CONCENTRICALLV BRAC

(SCBF) SVSTEMS
Special Concentrically Braced Frame (SCBF) , like other concentrically braced
frames, resist lateral forces and displacements primarily the axial strength and stiff-
ness of the brace members. In concentrically braced the centerlines of the framing
members (braces, columns, and beams) coincide or coincide, eliminating a great deal
fLCOLUMN 3/8" PL of flexure from the system. While the general layout an SCBF is very similar to that of
an Ordinary Concentrically Braced Frame (OCBF), are additional detailing require-
ments, to focus ductile behavior.of the frames into the The detailing requirements
provide for greater energy dissipation and duchlity, SCBF systems to be designed
using a lower force level in comparison to that of systems.
Concentrically braced frame systems tend to be economical than moment resisting
frames and eccentrically braced frames in terms of fabrication, and erection costs.
LBEAM They do, however, ofien have reduced flexibility in layout, space planning, and
electrical and mechanical routing as a result of the of braces. In certain circum-
stances, however, braced frames are exposed and in the architecture of the building.
Braced frames typically are located in walls that vertically between floor levels. In
the typical office building, these walls generally occur the "core" area around stair and
elevator shafts, central restrooms, and mechanical electrical rooms. This generally
W8x18 allows for greater architectural flexibility in placement configuration of exterior windows
COLUMN 3/8" PL
and cladding.
In considering the configuration of an SCBF both in plan and elevation, it is
important to note the requirements for redundancy in the The Provisions require that
(4)3/4"0 - - an SCBF system balance the compression and tension The Provisions require that
ASTMA325N
BOLTSIN
along any line of bracing, the braces must be oriented in to engage at least 30 percent
STO HOLES but not more than 70 percent of the braces in tension.
The Provisions limit member slendemess, cOlmplre~;si\fe strength, and width-to-thlckness
HSS 4x4x1/4 BRACE ratios (compactness), in addition to requiring special for gusset plates. The cumu-
W/ STO. HOLES lative effect of these requirements is intended to result braces that exhibit ductility and
TYP. hysteretic damping when subjected to severe seismic
Brace slendemess is limited to énsure adequate strength and resistance to the
BOLT(S) AS REQO. cyclic degradation of the braceo The post-buckling of the brace is also depend-
FOR ERECTION BOLTS ent on the compactness of the members used; with a higher width-to-thlckness
ratio are more susceptible to local buckling, which may lead to brittle failure of the brace
Figure 3-7. Connection as designed in Example 3.5. material in the buckled areas prior to the dissipation of a amount of energy. This
brittle behavior results in a system with significantly energy dissipation capability.
The last of the predominant issues relating to the members relates to the spacing
of stitches (interconnection locations), of or double-channel braces. The
Provisions note that stitches should be placeQ such the KlIr value for the individual
components of the brace is less than 40 percent of the slendemess of the com-
bined brace built-up section. Additionally, it is ~equired the stitches have adequate shear
capacity to develop the tensile strength of individual of the braceo These two
provisions are intended to ensure that the brace buckles a unit and that buckling of the
individual members does not occur, thus allowing more The stitch require-
ments are reduced when it can be shown that the assembly can buckle as a single
element without inducing' shear forces in the stitches the individual members. In

AMERICAN !NSTITIn'E OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, !Nc. AMERICAN INSTI11JTE OF STEEL C01'lST!RljJcTION, INc.

---------------------------------------~------_._------------~-------
 3-36 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 SPEClAL CONCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAME .(SCBF) SYStEMS 3-37

any case, no fewer than two stitches are allowed with unifonn spacing, and bolted stitches
are not pennitted in the middle quarter of the clear brace length. The limitation on the loca-
tion of bolted attachments is included to guard against premature fracture due to the
fonnation of a plastic hinge in the buckled braceo
fu the past, a great deal of emphasis was placed upon the strength and stiffness of the
brace member. More recently, emphasis has been placed upon the detailing of the connec-
tions in order to increase ductility and energy dissipation of the system. Cur,rently, there are
two approaches used in the design of these connections. The first creates enough strength
and rigidity in the connections to force the brace to fonn plastic hinges at the ends and mid-
dIe of the brace under compressive forces. The second approach utilizes out of plane
. buckling of the gusset plate such that plastic hinges occur in the gusset plate at the brace
ends with a hinge still occurring at the midpoint of the braceo This is accommodated by
detailing the connection such that the end of the brace is located two times the thickness of
the gusset from the intersection of the gusset and the beam or column. This configuration is
shown in Provisions Figure C-I-13.2. The value of two times the thickness of the gusset was
developed through research and analysis.
The design requirements for most basic frame configurations are covered by the condi-
tions listed earlier in this section. V-type and inverted V-type frames, however, are required to
(A) INERTEO V (CHEVRON)
meet additional criteria, as noted in Seismic Provisions Section 13.4. These requirements BRACEOFRAME
include the folIowing:
1. Beams must be continuous between columns .
. 2. Beam must be designed for gravity dead plus live loads, assuming the bracing does not
existo
3. Beams intersected by braces must be designed for the additional verticalloads result-
ing from 100 percent of the tension brace expected yield strength and 30 percent of the
compression brace nominal strength.
4. Beam top and bottom flanges must be braced at the intersection of the brace members
and beam in accordance with Appendix 6 of the AISC Specification.
These requirements are intended to reduce the effect of a loss in strength of the compres-
sion brace relative to the tension brace in the post-buckling range (see Figure 3-8). As the
compression brace buckles under load, its capability to resist the vertical load is diminished
relative to the strength of the tension braceo This results in an unbalanced vertical load
between the two members, which exerts additional vertical force on the beam. Braced
frame configurations utilizing two-story X configurations and zipper columns, as shown in
Figure 3-8b and 3-8c, distribute this unbalanced vertical load to other levels that are not
experiencing high seismic demands, providing for better overall frame perfonnance.
The final check covered in the Provisions relates to columns that are part of the SCBF
system. Columns are required to meet the same compactness criteria as bracing members
and have special consideration for their splices. According to Provisions Section 13.5,
splices are required to develop L ~. This requirement is intended to account for the pos- (C) TWO STORY X BRACEO FRAME
sibility of the columns sharing sorne of the lateral force demand through frame action as the
brace elements inelastically defonn, deflecting the frames beyond what elastic calculations
Figure 3-8. Assumed inelastic deforrnation of various braced configurations.
might predict. Additionally, it is noted that the column splices must be located in the middle
one-third of the column clear height.

AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCfION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCfION, INc.
3-38 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 SCBF DESIGN EXAMPLES 3-39

SCBF DESIGN EXAMPLES 0.2SDS = 0.2(1.0) = 0.2

Assume that the ends of the brace are pinned and against translation for
Example 3.6. SCBF Brace Design - Pipe both the X-X and y-y axes.

Given: Refer to Brace BR-l in Figure 3-9. Select an ASTM A53 Pipe section (~ = Solution: From analysis, the total horizontal force in the line braced frame is 271 kips.
35 ksi, Fu = 60 ksi) to resist the following axial loading. The Applicable The horizontal component of the axial force in BR-1, when it is in
Building eode specifies the use of AseE 7 for calculation of loads. tension, is,
I

PD = 29 kips PL = 19 kips . (12.5 o/t8.8 ft)(204 kips) = 136 kip~

From AseE 7, the Seismic Design eategory is e, no = 2.0, P = 1.0, and which is 50 percent of the total,horizontal force in
SDS= 1.0. Therefore, it meets Seisrnic Provisions Section 13 since the brace resists
more than 30 percent but less than 70 percent of the horizontal force.
Using the basic load combinations in the ASeE 7, maxirnum compressive
force in the brace is,

Pu =(1.2 + 0.2SDS )PD + PPQE + O.5PL +

FXR =110 kips
Pu = 1.4(29 kips) + 1.0(204 kips) + 0.5(19

= 254 kips
And the maximum tensile force in the brac¡e is,

Fourth FX4 = 81 kips Tu = (0.9-0.2S DS )PD +PPQE +1.6PH

COLUMN SPLlCE
48 in.ABOVE Tu = 0.7(29 kips) + 1.0( -204 kips)
FINISHED FLOOR
(TYPICAL) = -184 kips

The unbraced length of the brace is,

L= ~(14 ft)2 + (12.5 ft)2

= 18.8 ft
This length has been deterrnined by calculating the between the work
FX2= 24 kips points based on the intersection of the centerlines
beams. Shorter unbraced lengths of the brace may
Owner's Designated Representative for Design.
Try a Pipe 10 X-Strong for the braceo

Ag = 15.0 in. 2 tnom = 0.500 in.

D = 10.8 in. r = 3.64 in.

Check local buckling

Figure 3-9. SCBF frame elevation for Examples 3.6, 3.7, and 3.8. f..::; f.. ps (Provisions 13.2d)
For floor plan see Figure 4-9.

AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, lNe. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION,

3-40 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 SCBF DESIGN EXAMPLES 3-41

A= D = 10.8 in. 23.2

t 0.465 in.
(Specification E3-2)

A =0.044~ (Provisions Table 1-8-1)

ps F
y
(Specification E3-4)

A = 0.044( 29,000 kSi)

ps 35 ksi
= 36.5 2
n (29,000 ksi)

Since A ~ Aps' the Pipe. 10 X-Strong is seismically compacto (62.0 )2

= 74.5 ksi
Altematively, using Table 1-6, it can be seen that a Pipe 10 X-Strong will
satisfy the local buckling requirements for an SCBF braceo
(Specification E3-2)

Check slenderness
=28.8 ksi
From Specification Section C1.3a and Specification Cornmentary Table C-C2.2,
K = 1.0 for both the x-X and y-y axes. P =F A (Specification E3-1)
n cr g
2
(Provisions 13.2a) <l>cPn =0.90(28.8 ksi)(15.0 in. )

= 389 kips> 254 kips o.k.

KL
1.0(18.8 ft)(12 %) 62.0
Determine tensíon strength of brace
r 3.64 in. For yielding on the gross section,

(Specification D2-1)
4.0Jf=4.0 29,000 ksi =115
Fy 35 ksi
2
<l>tPn = 0.90( 35.ksi)( 15.0 in. )

o.k. = 473 kips > 184 kips o.k.

Use a Pipe 10 X-Strong for SCBF Brace BR-l.

Determine compressive strength of brace The net section must also be checked at the corme,cti()Q; see Examples 3.10 and
From Specification Section E3, 3.11 for illustration of this check.

4.71 II
VFy
Comments: The Owner's Designated Rep~esentative fOI Design be able to justify a
shorter unbraced length for the braceo In this I:'AlILUIJ.-'ll:',¡if an unbraced length of
16 ft could be justified, a Pipe 10 Std. could be for the braceo Since the
4.71 29,000 ksi = 136 end connections must be designed to resist the axial strength of the
35 ksi brace, a 26 percent decrease in the required force would result from
this reduction in brace size. The implications on requirements must
KL ~4.71 fK be considered in making such a reduction.
r VFy
AMERICAN lNSTlTUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCITON,lNC. AMERICAN lNSTITUfE OF STEEL CONSTRUCITON,

._-----------_.----------
 3-42 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 SCBF DESIGN EXAMPLES 3-43

Example 3.7. SCBF Brace Design - W-Shape Example 3.8. SCBF Column Design

Given: Refer to Brace BR-l in Figure 3-9. Select an ASTM A992 wide flange section Given: Refer to Column C-1 in Figure 3-9. Select 'an A992 wide-flange section
(~= 50 ksi, Fu = 65 ksi) with a 14-in. nominal depth to resist the axialloading (~ = 50 ksi, Fu = 65 ksi) to resist the following loading between the
given in Example 3.6. The Applicable Building Code specifies the use of ASCE base and the second level. The Applicable tlullo:m21 Code specifies the use of
7 for calculation of loads. ASCE 7 for ca1culation of loads.

Assume the Seismic Design Category as well as the values of no' p, and SDS PD = 135 kips PL == 34 kips Ps =7 kips
are the same as those given in Example 3.6.
Based on the end connection geometry illustrated in Example 3.12, the brace is From the AS CE 7, the Seismic Design Category is C, no = 2.0, P = 1.0, and
designed with fixed ends and braced against translation for both the X-X and SDS= 1.0.
y-y axes. The unbraced length of the brace is assumed to be 9 ft (see Example
3.12 to determine the actual connection geometry and to verify the adequacy of 0.2SDS = 0.2(1.0) = 0.2
the unbraced length assumption).
Assume that the ends of the column are pinned and braced against translation
for both the X-X and y-y axes.
So/afion: From Example 3.6,
;

P u = 254 kips So/ufion: Using the basic load combinations in ASCE 7, the m~LXirnUln compressive force
in the column is,
KLx = KLy = 9 ft

Using Manual Table 4-1 with KL = 9 ft, Pu = (1.2+0.2SDS )PD +PPQE +0.5PL +0
Pu = 1.4(135 kips) + 1.0(274 kips) + 0.5(34 )+0.2(7 kips)
= 481 kips
Using Table 1-2, it can be seen that a W14x48 will satisfy the local buckling
And the maximum tensile force in the column is,
requirements for a SCBF braceo

Tu =(0.9-0.2SDS )PD +PPQE +1.6PH

Tu =0.7(135 kips) +1.0(-274 kips) + 1.6(0 . )
Determine tensile strength of brace = -180 kips
For yielding on the gross section,
Try a W14x132,
(Specification D2-1)
Ag = 38.8 in. 2 b¡= 14.7 in.
rx = 6.28 in. t¡= 1.03 in.
<l>tPn = 0.90(50 kSi)( 14.1 in.2 )
ry = 3.76 in.
= 635 kips > 184 kips

Since Tu < <l>tPn' the W14x48 is adequate. Check column element slenderness
Per Seismic Provisions Section 13.2d, the stiffened unstiffened elements of
Use a W14x48 for SCBF Brace BR-l.
columns must comply with Provisions Table 1-8-1.
The net section must also be checked at the connection; see Example 3.12 for
The width-to-thickness ratio for the flanges is
illustration of this check.

(Specification B4.1)

AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INc. AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION,

---...--------------------------------_._------------_._-_._-----_.---_.__ .. _----------_._-
3-44 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 SCBF DESIGN EXAMPLES 3-45

From Seisrnic Provisions Table 1-8-1, for flange compactness,

4.71 Ir = 4.71 29,000 ksi = 113
VFy 50 ksi
Aps =0.30J!i
F
n 2E
y F--- . (Specification E3-4)
=0.30 29,000 ksi ,- (~Lr
50 ksi
=7.22 F = n 2 (29,000 ksi) = 143 ksi
Since Al < Aps' the flanges are seisrnically compact. e (44.7)2

The width-to-thickness ratio for the web is

h
KL
when -::;4.71 -
r F
y
J!i
Aw = -t = 17.7 (Specification B4.2)
w
(Specification E3-2)
From Seismic Provisions Table 1-8-1, for web compactness,

481 kips = 0.275

0.90(50 kSi)( 38.8 in.2 )

=43.2 ksi

Pn = FcrAg (Specification E3-l)

2
<PcPn =0.90(43.2 ksi)(38.8 in. )
Aps =1.12J!i(2.33-C)
F a
¿ 1.49J!i
F
y y
= 1,510 kips > 481 kips o.k.
=1.12 29,000 ksi (2.33-0.275) ¿ 1.49 29,000 ksi
50ksi 50ksi Determine column tensile strength
=55.4
For yielding on the gross section,
Since Aw < Aps' the web is seismical1y compact.
Pn = FyAg (Specification D2-1)
2
<PtPn =0.90(50 ksi)( 38.8 in. )
Alternatively, using Table 1-2, it can be seen that a W14x132 will satisfy
the local buckling requirements for an SCBF column.
= 1,750 kips> 180 kips o.k.

Since Tu < <ptPn, the W14x132 is adequate.

Determine column compression strength
From Specification Section C1.3a and Specification Cornrnentary Table C-C2.2,
Check axial load ratios
K = 1.0 for both the X-X and y-y axes. Since the unbraced length is the same for
both axes, use the least radius of gyration. ~ 180kips =0.103
<PtPn 1,750 kips
KL 1.0(14.0 ft)(12 i%)
-= =44.7 ~= 481 kips
r (3.76 in.) 0.318
<PcPn 1,510 kips
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION,
"3-46 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 SCBF DESIGN EXAMPLES 3-47

Per Seismic Provisions Section 8.3, since Pi~ePn < 0.4, the special seismic load
combinations that inc1ude the Amplified Seismic Load effects need not be used.
Since Pu < <PcPn, the W14x132 is adequate.
Use a Wl4xl32 for SCBF Column C-I.
Assume Pipe 10 X-Strong braces as determined in .L.:.4GUHI-'~1;. 3.6 (~= 35 ksi,
A g = 15.0 in. 2) and that the Seismic Design Category
Solufion: Determine the assumed force in the tension

(Provisions 13.4a(la))
Example 3.9. SCBF Beam Design - Inverted V
Ry = 1.6 (Provisions Table 1-6-1)
Given: Refer to Beam BM-1 in Figure 3-10. Select a noncomposite ASTM A992 wide
flange section (~ = 50 ksi, Fu = 65 ksi) with a maximum depth of 36 in. The ~ =1.6(35 ksi)( 15.0 in. 2 )=840 kips
Applicable Building Code specifies the use of ASCE 7 for calculation of loads.
Determine the assumed force in the Cnml)reS>SJ'On brace

e B (Provisions 13.4a(1 b))

25'-0" From Example 3.6, for the Pipe 10 X-Strong brace,

Roof FXR = 110 kips 2
Pn =Fer Ag =28.7ksi(15.0in. )=431kiPS

Pe =0.3Pn =0.3(431 kips)

=129 kips

FX4 = 81 kips
Determine the unbalanced vertical load on beam, Qb
COLUMN SPLlCE
48 in. ABOVE The vertical components of Pt and Pe are
FINISHED FLOOR
P = ~(840 kips) = 626 kips
(TYPICAL)
ty 18.8 ft
FX3 =63 kips
P =~(129 kips)=96.1 kips
cy 18.8 ft

Therefore,

FX2 = 11 kips ºb =Pty -Pcy

= 626 kips - 96.1 kips
=530 kips

Determine the axial force in the beam

The horizontal components of P t and Pe are

P = 12.5
-- ft (840 kIps
. ) ="
5"59 k'lpS
Ix 18.8ft

Figure 3-10. SCBF frame elevationfor Example 3.9.

P = 12.5 ft (129 kips) = 85.8 kips
For floor plan see Figure 4-9. ex 18.8 ft
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc.
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcrION, !Nc.
348 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 SCBF DESIGN EXAMPLES 3-49

Assuming that the unbalanced force is shared equally,

A = 0.38 . 29,000 ksi
Ptx +Pcx p 50 ksi
Pu
2 = 9.15
559 kips+85.8 kips
2 Since Af < Ap ' the flanges are compact.
=332 kips The width-to-thickness ratio for the web is
h
Aw = - = 18.9 (Specification B4.2)
Determine the moments in the beam tw
See Figure 4-9 for floor plan and floor loads.
Assuming the self-weight of the beam is 350 lbs/ft, the curtain waIl weight is Ap =3.76JfF y
(Specification Table B4.l)
200 lbs/ft and a distributed live load of 110 lbs/ft, and conservatively assuming
a simply supported beam,
29,000 ksi
Ap = 3.76 50 ksi
(0.20 kips/ft+0.35 kips/ft)(25 ft)2 16 kips(25 ft) . f
MD = + = 143 kIP- t
8 4 =90.6

0.11 kips/ft(25 ftf 15 kips(25 ft) Since Aw < Ap ' the web is compact.
ML = + 102 kip-ft
· 8 4
Check unbraced length
530 kips( 25 ft) From Manual Table 3-2,
MQb 4 3,310kip-ft
Lp = 12.2 ft
Mu= 1.2M D +0.5M L +1.0MQb +0.2Ms
Assuming a W14x132 column as determined in 3.8, the distance from
Mu = 1.2 ( 143 kip-ft )+o.s(102 kip-ft)+ 1.0 (3,310 kip-ft) the beam centerline to the column flange is
+02(0 kip-ft)=3,530 kip-ft
Lb =12.5 ft- de =12.5 ft- 14.7 in. 1.9 ft
2 2(12 in.jft)
Try a W27x336

d= 30.0 in. bf =14.6 in. rx = 12.1 in. Ix = 14,600 in. 4 Determine the flexural strength of the W2
tw = 1.26 in. t¡= 2.28 in. ry = 3.45 in. Zx = 1,130 in. 3 From Specification Section F1, with compact flanges web and Lb < Lp ' the
Ag = 98.9 in. 2 Sx = 972 in. 3 applicable limit state is yielding.

(Specification F2-l)
Check element slenderness of the W27x336
The width-to-thickness ratio for the flanges is
M p = 50 kSi( 1,130 in.
3
)(1 o/¡2 inJ
b¡
A¡ =-=3.19 (Specification B4.l) = 4,710 kip-ft
2t¡
The limiting width-to-thickness ratio for compact flanges is <l>bMn = 0.90( 4,710 ft-kips)
= 4,240 kip-ft
(Specification Table B4.1)

AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTlTUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Ne.
 SCBF DESIGN EXAMPLES 3-51
3-50 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3

Determine the compression strength of the W27x336 Pr =Pnt + B2P/t

From Specification Section C1.3a and Specification Cornmentary Table C-C2.2, = O kips + (1.0) (322 kips)
K = 1.0 for both the X-X and y-y axes. The unbraced length with respect to the = 322 kips
X-X and the y-y axes are 25 fi and 12.5 ft, respectively.
M rx =B1Mnt + B2MZt ::::: BIMu

KLx = 1.0(25 ft)(~2

= 1.01 (3,530 kip-fi)
h7ri) = 24.8 = 3,570 kip-ft
rx 12.1 m.

KLy 1.0(12.5 ft)(12 i%t) Check combined loading of the W27x336

-= . =43.5
ry 3.45 in. Pr 322 kips
0.083
Pe 3,880 kips

Since P/Pc < 0.2,

From Manual Table 4-22

cj>Fcr = 39.2 ksi P [M

_r +
2Pe M
M J<10.
--1".!:...+--2.
M (Specification HI-lb)
cx cy
2
cj>ePn = (39.2 kSi)(98.9 in. )
0.083 + 3,570 kip-ft +0=0.883
= 3,880 kips
2 4,240 kip-fi
0.883<1.0 o.k
Consider second-order effects

e Determine the shear in the beam

(Specification C2-2)
V _ (0.2 kips/ft + 0.336 kips/ft)(25 ft) 1
D- 2 +

n2 EI 0.11 kips/ft(25 ft) 15 kips

e1 VL = +--=888
P = (KL)2 2 2·

_ n 2 (29,000 kSi}(14,600 in.4 )

530 kips 265 kIp· s
VQb 2
- [1.0(25 ft)(12 in.jft)J2

= 46,400 kips Vu = 1.2VD + 0.5VL + 1.0VQb + 0.2Vs

Vu = 1.2 (14.7 kips )+0.5( 8.88 kips) + 1.0 ( 265 )+0.2(0 kips)
Therefore, =287 kips

1.0 Check shear strength of the W27x336

B1 ( ) 1.01
1- 322kips/ .
/46,400 kips
2.24 JFE = 2.24 29,000 ksi = 53 9
50 ksi .
yw
Since there is no translation of the beam ends,

AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION,

AMERICAN lNsTITUTE OF STEE~ CONSTRUCTION, !Ne.
3-52 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 SCBF DESIGN EXAMPLES
3-53

Since h/tw < 2.24~E/ Fy ' W18x50 d = 18.0 in. t¡ = 0.570 in.
kdes = 0.972 in.
Vn = 0.6FyAw Cv (Specification G2-l)

Solution: Determine the expected tensile ~"'r,Qn/"Y"'''' of the brace

<1> Vn = 1.0 ( 0.6)(50 ksi)( 30.0 in.)( 1.26 in.)( 1.0)
Per Seismíc Provisions Section 13.3a, the connection must be designed
=1,130 kips to develop the expected yield strength of the in tension. From Seismic
Provisions Table 1-6-1, Ry = 1.6. Therefore, the tensile strength of the
Alternatively, using Table 4-2 for the W27x336 beam, connection is,
I
<l>Vn = <l>RvI = 1,130 kips
Tu = RyFyAg = 1.6(35 kSi)(ll.1 in. 2 )

~<<I>~ o.k.
Design brace-to-gusset weld
Use a W27x336 for SCBF Beam BM-l. The maximum fillet weld size that can be de'¡el(~pe:d by the brace can be deter-
mined by setting the weld strength equal to shear rupture strength of the
Per Seismic Provisions Section 13.4a(2), the top and bottom flanges of the
pipe wall. As noted in Manual Part 9, on page 5,
beam must be laterally braced with a maximum spacing of Lb = L pd ' as speci-
fied by Equations A-I-7 and A-I-8 of Appendix 1 of the Specification. Lateral Fupipet
D<--~--
braces must meet the provisions of Equations A-6-7 and A-6-8 of Appendix 6 3.09 kips/in.
of the Specification.
60 ksi(0.340 in.)
< ----'------'-
ha = 27.7 in. (Manual Table 1-1) - 3.09 kips/in.

Cd =1.0 ::;; 6.60 sixteenths

C Try (4) 3/s-in. fillet welds to connect the brace the gusset plateo
Pb =0.02M - d
r rx h The mínimum length of the four fillet welds is,
o
=0.02( 3,570 kip-ft )(12 in./ft )(1.0/ . ) P
/27.7 ffi. 1 > u
=30.9 kips w 4(1.392 kips/in.)D

Provide top and bottom flange beam bracing with a minimum strength of > 622 kips
30.9 kips at the brace-beam intersection. - 4(1.392 kips/in.)(6 sixteenths)
;:::18.6 in.
Example 3.10. SCBF Brace-to-Beam Connection Design
Use (4) 19-in.-Iong, 3/s-in. filIet welds to connect brace to the gusset plateo
Given: Refer to Joint J-l in Figure 3-9. Design the connection between braces and The minimum gusset plate thickness required to the force delivered by
beam. Use an ASTM A36 (~= 36 ksi, Fu = 58 ksi) welded gusset plate con- the welds is,
centric to the braces and 70-ksi electrodes to connect the braces to the beam.
Assume the braces are ASTM A53 (~ = 35 ksi, ~ = 60 ksi) Pipe 10 Std. steel p.
pipe sections and the beam is an ASTM A992 (~ = 50 ksi, ~ = 65 ksi) W18x50
wide flange section. The Applicable Building Code specifies the use of ASCE
7 for calculation of loads. From AS CE 7, the Seismic Design Category is C.
However, the gusset edge buckling criterion (to checked later) may require
a thicker gusset. Try a gusset plate thickness of 1
Pipe 10 Std. Ag = 11.1 in. 2 tnam = 0.365 tdes = 0.340 in.
r = 3.68 in. D = 10.8 in.

AMERICAN lNsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, lNc.

AMERICAN lNSTITUTE OF STEEL CmlsTR.uCTIO~, lNc.
3-54 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3
SCBF DESIGN EXAMPLES
3-55

Check shear lag of brace I

where S is rneasured in radians, as shown Figure 3-11. Knowing that
Per Seisrnic Provisions Section 13.2b and Section 6.2,
45° = 0.785 rad and 83° = 1.45 rad,

-
xbrace =523·
.. m. [sin(1.45)]
~ = . . m.
358'·
(Table 1-6-1)

(0.75)( 1.2)( 60 ksi )Ae ~ 622 kips - cp -557· [sin CO.785)]_5 02 .

x - . m. 0.785 -. m
A e req 'd ~ 11.5 in. 2

Since A e req 'd > A g' net section reinforcernent is required.

.
There are rnany
. .
ways Determine x for thecomposite cross c-.4>'....,.¡r.n

that the net section cou1d be reinforced. These mc1ude, but are not hrnlted to,
rods, bars, pIates, roUed shapes, etc.
Region x xA
Use the width of the sIot in the pipe brace to allow a Ih6-in. gap between the
in. in. 3
pipe walI and the gusset on each side of the gusset. The net area of the pipe Pipe 18.3
alone is, Cover PIate 5 13.9
L 32.2
Ae =An U (Specification D3-1)

An =Ag -2(1 X in.+ Xin} _ L(xA)

x=---
tg 32.2in. 3
2 LA 2 7.89in. 2
= 11.1 in. - 2( 1}{ in.)( 0.340 ,in.)

=10.2 in. 2 U=l-~=l- 3.46 ÍIl. =0.818

1 19 in.
Because 1 ~ 1.3D, U = 1 and,

Ae = (10.2 in2) (1)

= 10.2 in. 2 <l>Pn = <!>RtFuAe (Specification D2-2)
The area of reinforcernent required at this eccentricity is, 2
<l>tPn =(0.75)(1.2)(60 kSi)(12.9 in. )= kips > 622 kips o.k.
A 'd 11.5 in. 2
A =~-A 10.2 in. 2 = 1.30 in. 2
ecp U n 1.0

However, the addition of cover pIates on the brace will reduce U below 1.0 and
a larger reinforcernent area wilI be used to account for this. Try reinforcing the
net section with (2) quarter-sections of a Pipe 10 Std. as shown in Figure 3-11.
D t 10.8 in. - 0.340 in. = 5 23 .
r =--- . m.
1 2 2 2

r = D +..:. = 10.8 in.+ 0.340 in. = 5.57 in.

2 2 2 2

The distance to the center of gravity of a partial circ1e can be calcuIated as,

_ sin(S)
x=r--
S
Figure 3-11. Brace cross-section at net section Example 3.10.
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc.
AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF ~TEEL !Nc.
 SCBF DESIGN EXAMPLES 3-57
3-56 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3

=[0.658~ Jlp
Use (2) quarter-sections of a Pipe 10 Std. as cover plates on each end of
the braceo
F (Specification E3-2)
cr y
Design welds connecting cover plates to brace
Per Specification Section J2.2b, the maximum fillet weld size is (t - 1/16 in.). F", =[ O.658(.ii)}5 Jci=323 Jci
Therefore,

w = 0.340 in. - Yt6 in. = 0.278 in. = 4.44 sixteenths 1.1Ry times the nominal compressive strength the braces is,

Using 1/4-in. fillet welds, the mínimum weld length required to develop the 1.1Ryn
P =l.lRycrg
F A
fracture strength of the cover plate is,
= 1.1(1.6)(3~.3ksi)(l1.lin.2)
<\>RtF A
1 > u n =631ldps
w 2(1.392 kips/in.)D
Assume an initial connection geometry as
2
0.7S( 1.2)(60 ksi)( 2.77 in. )
>-,--------~~~----~
2( 1.392 kips/in.)( 4 sixteenths)

2::13.4 in.

Use 1S-in.-Iong, 1/4-in. fiUet welds on each side of the net section to connect
the cover plates to the braceo

Determine connection torces

The connection will be designed assuming the expected tension yield strength
of the braces and the -nominal expected compressive strength of the braces
based on the actual length of the braces. As shown in Figure 3-12, this length is
ft
12 0 15/16 in. The expected tensile strength of the braces has been determined.
Assuming K = 1.0, the nominal strength of the braces can be determined as,

KL 1.0 (12.1 ft)( 12 in./ft)

39.5
r 3.68 in.

~4.71 ~FEy =4.71 29,000ksi =134

VFy 3Sksi

KL ~134
r

n 2 (29,000 ksi)
Fe 183
(Specification E3-4)
(39.5)2
Figure 3-12. Partial SCBF elevationfor

AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL COINSTRU(:nO~, INc.

AMERICAN lNSTITUTE OF S1EEL CONSTRUCTION, 1Ne.
3-58 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTll..IZING R > 3
SCBF DESIGN EXAMPLES 3-59

Determine the torces at the gussetlbeam interface

Design the weld at the gussetlbeam
Based on these loads as. shown in Figure 3-13, the shear force at the interface
of the gusset with the beam flange is, From Figure 3-13, the length of the gusset is 5 ft 93/4 in. Treating the
welds as lines,
v =( 622 kips+631 kip~) ~ =886 kips z2 (69.75 inf
sw 811 in. 3 / in.
the ténsion force is, 6 6

T = (622 kips - 631 kips) ~ = -6.36 kips = ~ = 886 kip~ = 12.7 kipsliri.
fv 1 69.75 in.
and the moment is, T 6.36kips
fa 0.0912 kipm.
1 69.75 in.
M=V dbJ =886klpS
(2" . (18.0in.J
- 2 - =, 7970k·Ip-m.
.
fb
M 7,970 kips-in.
9.83 kipm.
Sw 811 in. 2

631 kips 2
PIPE 10 STO TYP. f peak = fv +{!a + fb )2

2'..9"
(12.7 kipm. )2+ (0.0912 kipm. + .83 kips'in. )2
= 16.1 kipm.

1,2 ]
~
......
~
~ 5'-93/4"
W18x50
(127ltipslnf 1
12 kipm. + 9.83 kipm. + (12.7 kipm.)2

= 16.1 kipm.

fpeak = 16.1 =1.00<125

f avg 16.1
Therefore,fr = 1.25 f avg = 1.25(16.1 kips/in.) = .1 kipslin.
The mínimum double-sided fillet weld size is,

D~ 20.1 kips/in. - 722 sixteenth

2(1.392 kips/in.)

Figure 3-13. lriitial connection geometry ¡or Example 3.10.

AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc.

AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~STB~UC1lOIj!, !Nc.
3-60 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 SCBF DESIGN EXAMPLES 3-61

The gusset is detailed in accordanc~ with . Provisions .Cornmentary

Altematively, the Eccentrically Loaded Weld Group Tables found in the Manual
Section C13.l, which results in a fixed-fixed sidesway buckling configu-
can be used. The load angle with respect to the longitudinal axis of the weld
group is, ration. With K = 1.2 andthe average buckling equal to 18.9 in.,

KL 1.2(18.9 in.)
e=tan-1 (!J=tan-1 (6.36 kipSJ=0.411 ° 62.8
V 886 kips r 0.361 in.

Prom Manual Table 4-22,

e = db = 18.0 in. = 9.00 in.
2 2 <l>Fcr =26.3ksi

e 9.00 in. The Whitmore width is,

a= 0.129
1w 69.75 in.
Lw = 2lw tan 30 + D= 2( 19.0 in.) tan 30 + 1 in. = 32.7 in.
The tabulated angle that is closest to, but less than the calculated load angle is
<l>Rn =<I>~rAg I
O°. Interpolating from Manual Table 8-4 with e = 0° and using k = O,
=26.3ksi(32.7in.)(Iy,; in.) :
c= 3.69
= 1,080 kips > 631 kips
The average and peak weld stresses are not detennined when using this
method; therefore, the weld stress distribution factor should be applied unless Altematively, Table 1-7 can be used. The length of the gusset in
additional calculations establish that the ratio of peak-to-average weld compression is,
stresses is greater than or equal to 1.25. The previous calculation illustrated
that ratio of peak-to-average weld stress is less than 1.25. KL = 1.2(18.9 in.) = 22.7 in.

RUb = ~V2 + T = ~( 6.36 kips

2
t + (886 kips t = 886 kips
Interpolating from Table 1-7 for a 11/4-in.-thick
compression buckling strength of the gusset is,
with KL = 22.7 in., the

f r =125Rub = 1.25 x 886kips= 1,1l0kips <l>Rn =<I>rn L w =32.9 kipsfm.(32.7 in.)=I,

D. RUb 1,1l0kips 5.75 sixteenths

mm CC11 0.75(3.69)( 1.0)( 69.75 in.)

Check tension yielding of gusset

Use (2) fuII-length, 3/8~in. filIet welds to connect the gusset plate to the beam.
<l>Rn = <l>FyAg
Check compressíon bucklíng of gusset plate
= 0.90 ( 36 ksi)( 32.7 in.)( 1y,; in.)
Per Seismic Provisions Section 13.3c, the gusset plate must have a design
strength greater than or equal to 1.IRy times the nominal compression strength =1,320 kips
of the braceo This was previously detennined as 1. lR/n = 631 kips. <l>Rn >Tu o.k.

Por a 11/4-in.-thick gusset plate, Use a 11/4-in.-thick gusset plate.

t 1y,; in.
r= .J12= .J12 =0.361 in. Check beam web local yíeldíng
The maximum compressive load per unit of the gusset is,

fe = fb + fa =9.83 kipslin. + 0.0912 = 9.92 kipslin.

AMERICAN INSTITU1E OF STEEL CONSTRUCfION, 1Nc. AMERICAN INslTIUTE OF STEEL Cm~STR.uCfI(j)N, INc.
3-62 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 SCBF DESIGN EXAMPLES 3-63

The maximum tensile load per unit length of the gusset is, With the compressive force applied > db l2 froin

Ir = fb -
2[1+3 (~ J(:;]'"']
fa =9.83 kip&fu..-0.0912 kipsfm.=9.74 kip&fu..

The length of gusset subjected to tensile stresses is, Rn =0.80tw I---f--"- (Specification 110-4)

L, =( f, ~ ~ )(L g)
=(0.80)(0.355)2 [1+3( :::~ J( ~ 29, OOO( 50)( 0.570)
0.355
=( 9.74
9.74+9.92
J(69.75 in.) =597 kips

=34.6 in.
<l>Rn = 0.75( 597 kips)
The resultant tensile force is, = 448 kips > 174 kips o.k.

Ru = }{ L/t = }{(34.6 in.)(9.74 kipsfm.) = 169 kips Seismic Provisions Section 13.4a also that the combination of the
expected tension strength of tension braces (Tu = and 30 percent of the
With the tensile force applied > db from the beam end, nominal compression strength of compression u = O.3Pn ) be investi-
gated for V-type and iIiverted V-type c01mg;ural1Jiolns at beams intersected by
Rn =(5k+N)Fyww
t (Specification110-2) braces. By similar calculations, it can be shown the selected connection is
also adequate for this load case.
<l>Rn = 1.0 [ 5( 0.972 in.)+34.6 in.J(50 ksi)( 0.355 in.)
= 700 kips > 169 kips o.k. Check free-edge buckling of gusset
To prevent edge buck1ing of the gusset plate the ~mlX1Inulm free-edge length is,
Note that a quick check could have been made by comparing the gusset design
tensile strength per unit length with the peak tensile load per unit length,
Lfg max =0.75t/f (Astaneh, 1998)
F .
y
<l>Fywtw =0.90(50 ksi)( 0.355 in.)

= 16.0 kipslin. > 9.92 kipslin. o.k. Lfgmax =0.75(1 X in.) 29~~0~siksi
A similar check for the compressive force shows that the design strength is =26.6 in.
greater than the required strength.
From Figure 3-13, the free-edge lengtb. between brace and the beam is,
Check beam web crippling
The resultant compressive force is, Lfg 19 in·rs
cos 30°
n
. 24.8 in.
From Figure 3-13, assuming the gusset plate is horizontal between the
braces, the free-edge length between braces is 66 This is much larger than the
maximum length, therefore the gusset IÜate will to be stiffened. Assuming
the gusset is as shown in the figure aiJ.d using a pair of vertical stiffeners at
the center of the gusset plate, the free-edge length

AMERICAN !NSlTIUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCfION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSlTIUTE OF STEEL Cm~STB~ucrlO:¡'¡-, !Nc.

._---------_._-----------------
 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 SCBF DESIGN EXAMPLES ~5

L [
X C66 in.)
] 34.2 in.
Example 3.11. SCBF Brace-to-Bea
fg 0
cos 90 -(45°+30°) Design

Lfg> Lfgmax n.g. Given: Refer to Joint J-2 in Figure 3-9. Design the COIUlecu(m between braces, beam,
and column. Use ASTM A36 CE'.¡ =36 ksi, Fu = ksi) welded gusset plates con-
Try a pair of stiffeners at the end of each yield lineo The gusset free-edge between centric to the braces and 70-ksi electrodes to the braces to the gusset
the brace and the stiffener is, plates and the gusset plates to the beam and Assume the braces are
ASTM A53 CE'.¡ = 35 ksi, ~ =60 ksi) Pipe 10 steel pipe sections, the beam
Lfg =24.8 in. < Lfgmax o.k. is an ASTM A992 CE'.¡ =50 ksi, ~ = 65ksi) Wl wide-flange section and the
column is as designed in Example 3.8, The Building Code specifies
Use two pairs of plate stiffeners placed on each side of the gusset and the use of ASCE 7 for caiculation of 10flds.
beam web.
From ASCE 7, the Seismic Design Category is
The final connection design and geometry is shown in Figure 3-14.
0.2SDS = 0.2(1.0) = 0.2

PIPE 10 STO TYP. Pipe 10 Std. Ag = 11.1 in. 2 tdes = 0.340 in.
BOLTeS} AS REQ'O FOR
ERECTION LOAOS (TYP.) D = 10.8 in.
W18x86 ! d = 18.4 in. t¡= 0.770 in.
k des = 1.17 in.

W14x132 d = 14.7 in. t¡= 1.03 in.

k des = 1.63 in. .
(2) ~ 3/S
n
x 3 1/2" TYP .- - ' - _
Solution: Assume theconnection geometry and member are as shown in Figure 3-15.

Determine the expected tensile' C''t,.,cn,...,'tfn of the brace

brace connection is,

Tu =Ry Fy Ag =622 kips

\~~i-+-+-<' TYP. Determine the maximum compressive ci+ ...."" ... , ... +h of the brace
From Example 3.10, the required strength of

Design brace-to-gusset connection

Since the required strength of the copnection the brace and gusset
COVER le. CUT FROM plate is the same as in Example 3.10, a similar cPlmectü)n can be used.
PIPE 10 STO W/It _ _ _-
WIOTH EQUAL TO 1/4
CIRCUMFERENCE Design gusset plate .
OF PIPE 10 STO TYP.
As shown in Figure 3-15, the average unbraced of the gusset is less than
that used in Example 3.10. Therefor~, it may possible to use a thinner
Figure 3-14. Final connection designfor Example 3.10.

AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCI10N, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~sTR.ucrlqN, !Nc.
3-66 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3
SCBF DESIGN EXAMPLES 3-67

gusset plate at this end of the braceo However, in order to allow equal slot
e b = 9.20 in. ec = 7.35 in.
widths at each end of the brace, the same thiclmess will be used for the gusset
plates at each end of the braceo 8=45° a. = 14.0 in. ~ = 12.8 in.

Use a 11/4-in.-tbick gusset plateo

The factored gravity load on the beam: is,

Determine connection interface torces Ru = (1.2 + 0.25'DS )PD + ºoPQE + 0.5

With a l-in. x l-in. clip at the comer of the gusset pl~te, the forces at the
gUsset-to-beam and gusset-to-column interfaces are deterrnined using the Ru = 1.4(12 kips) + 2.0(0 kips) + 0.5
geometry showrt in Figure 3-15, assuming no moinent at the column. = 21.3 kips

This reaction has an eccentricity equal ,to 39 in. respect to the centerline of
PD=18 kips
the column. The total shear at the face of the is,
PL =11 kips
=
PQe :135 kips Vi =(631 kips+622 kips) ~ +21.3 =907 kips
...;2

The moment at the face of the column· is,

MI =(631 kips+622 kipS)( ~}c -

=886 kipS(7.35 in.)-21.3 kips(39· -7.35 in.)
=5,840 kip-in.

The moment arm to resist this moment is the between the centroids of
PD= 12 kips the gusset-to-column interfaces. This distance is,
PL =9 kips
d arm =db +2~=18.4 in.+2(12.8 in.)=
.. •I
PQe= 8 kips
PQe =:18 kips Huc 5,840 kip-in. 133 kips
F===::::II
44.0 in.

The vertical shear will be distributed pro,polrtion~t:ely to the shear areas of the
gussets and the beam. The gusset area is,

The beam web area is,

Abeam =dtw =18.4 in.(0.480 in.)=8.83 in.

PD= 18 kips
=
PL 11 kips The portion of the shear at the column face by each gusset is,
PQe =':¡'172 kips
2
Vuc 59.3 in. (. .
( ; ).907 kIps =395 kIps
2
Figure 3-15. Initial connection geometry for Example 3.11. 2 59.3in. + 8.83in. 2

AMERICAN lNSTITIJTE OF STEEL CONS'l'RUCTION, lNc.

AMERICAN lNSTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~sTR.uCTIO¡f, lNc.
3-68 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 SCBF DESIGN EXAMPLES
3-69

and the portion taken by the beam is, The axial force transferred by the beam-w-coJlurnn flange conI1ection is,

RUb = 907 kips - 2( 395 kips) = 117 kips

For the gusset at the compression brace, The connection interface forces are shown in 3-16. Note that a negligi-
ble imbalance of moment exists on the beam shown in Figure 3-16. The
H
ub
=P
uc
(~J-H
"1/2 uc
=631 kipS( ~J-133 kips=313 kips
"1/2
imbalance results because all of the nitoment
the forces Huc on the top and bottom gussets.
the colurnn face is assigned to

Vub =Puc (~ J- Vue =631 kip{ ~J-395 kips=51.2 kips 631 kips

The moment arm for the vertical component of the brace force is the distance
from the gusset connection centroid to the intersection of the brace centerline
with the gusset-to-beam interface. This distance is, V =
395 kips
uc

a-IX in.=12.lin.
Surnming moments about the center of the gusset-to-beam connection for the
compression brace,

Mub =631 kips( Jz }12.1 in.)- uca-Hue~

V

=5,400 kip-in.- 395 kips(14.0 in.)-133 kips( 12.8 in.)

=-1,830 kip-in.

For the gusset at the tension brace,

~ ~ -117 i._._._._._.,._-----c:t::.- t--
Huc =133 kips HB = 36 kips t::::===::¡::::;====1!
V
uc
= 395 kips

~
\{¡B=
Hub =Tu (~ J-Huc =622 kip{ Jz )-133 kips=307 kips ~= 14.0 in.
M =1
UB

V
ub
=T ( ~J- Vuc =622 kiPS( "1/2~J-395 kips=44.8 kips
u "1/2 Huc =133 kips

Surnming moments about the center of the gusset-to-beam connection for the Vuc =395 kips
tension brace,

Mub =622 kip{ ~ }12.1 in.)-Vuea-Hue~

622 kips
=5,320 kip-in.-395 kips(14.0 in.)-133 kipS(12.8 in.)
=-1,910 kip-in. Figure 3-16. Connection interfaceJorcesfor 3.11.
AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF SlEEL CONSTRUCTION, INc. AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF SlEEL INc.
 SCBF DESIGN EXAMPLES
BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 3-71
3-70

Design the weld at the gusset/column interface calculations establish that the ratio of "eélLK-tO-averap"p.
'-" weld stresses is greater
From Figure 3-15, the length of the gusset plate mínus the l-in. comer clip is than or equal to 1.25.
23.7 in. The magnitude of the forces is the same at the gusset-to-column inter-
Rub =1.25~Vu2c
face for both the compression brace and the tension braceo The forces on the
gusset per unit length are,
+H =1'2
, u2 c +(133lOps)2 =521 kips
Vuc 395 kips
fv 16.7 kips/in.
23.7 in.
H uc 133 kips
f= 5.61 kips/in. Use (2) full-Iength, l/Z-in. fillet welds to
a
1 23.7 in. the gusset plates to the
coluDm.
Becausefb = O,
Check strength of gusset plate at
f peak = f avg = ~ The mínimum gilsset plate thicknessrequired

= (16.7 kiPslinY +(5.61 kiPsfmY (6.19 kips/in.)D

t .
mm Fu
= 17.6 kipslin.
= 6.19 kipS/in.(8)
f r = 1.25favg '
58 ksi
f r = 1.25(17.6 kipsflll.)= 22.0 kipsfm. =0.854 in.
11/4 in > 0.854 in. i o.k.
The mínimum double-sided fillet weld size is,

22.0 kips/ in. 9' Check yielding of the gusset

D> 7. O SIXteenths
The shear yielding strength of the gusset plate
2(1.392 kipS/in.)

Altematively, the Eccentrically Loaded Weld Group Tables found in the Manual
<l>rn= <l>0.6F/= 1.0 (0.6)(36 ksi)( 1 X in.
can be used. The load angle with respect to the longitudinal axis of the weld
Since <l>rn is greater than both J~a andj,v' the thickness is adeq1iate.
group is,

Check column web yielding

e= tan-1(Huc J=tan-1 (133 kips )=18.6 0
V 395 kips
uc
<l>rn = <l>F/w =1.0(50 ksi)(0.645 in.)=3
The tabulated angle that is closest to, but less than the calculated load angle
is 15°. Since the moment at the column face has been resolved into a couple ru = fa =5.61 kipsfm.
and included in Huc ' a = O. From Manual Table 8-4 with e = 15° and using
k=O,

c= 3.84 Check column web crippling

The average and peak weld stresses are not determined when using this method; With the compressive force applied > d/ from the column end and
therefore, the weld stress distribution factor should be applied unless additional N= 23.7 in.,

AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL C·ONS'TRUC::nPN, INc.

AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INC.
3-72 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3
SCBF DESIGN EXAMPLES 3-73

2
Rn=O.80tw [1+3 ( : )(:; r]rf (Specification JI 0-4)
Therefore, f r = 1.25 f avg = 1.25(20.3 kips/in.) =
The mínimum double-sided fillet weld size is,
.4 kips/in.

l ( J(
25.4 kips/in.
D> 9.12 sixteenths
2 23.7 0.645 1.51 29,000( 50)( 1.03)
2( 1.392 kips/in.)
=(0.80)(0.645) 1+3 -
14.7
-
1.03 J 0.645

=1,720 kips Alternatively, the Eccentrically Loaded Weld Tables found in the Manual
can be used. The load angle with respect to the Ilonlgiuldinlal axis of the weld
<l>Rn =0.75(1,720 kips) group is,

= 1,290 kips > 133 kips o.k.

8= tan- 1 ( Vub J= tan- 1 (51.2 kiPSJ=
Hub 313 kips
Design the weld at the compression gusset/beam interface
From Figure 3-15, the length of the gusset plate mínus the l-in. comer clip is The eccentricity of Hub required to produce
25.9 in. Treating the welds as lines,
MUb 1,830 kip-in.
e 5.85 in.
z2 (25.9 inf Hub 313 kips
3
sw 112 in. lin.
6 6 a=-=-= 5.85 in. =0.226
1w 25.9 in.
Hub 313 kips
fv 12.1 kips/in.
1 25.9 in. The tabulated angle that is closest to, but less the ca1culated load angle
Vub 51.2 kips is O°. Interpolating from Manual Table 8-4 8 = 0° and using k = O,
fa 1.98 kips/in.
1 25.9 in. C = 3.41
MUb 1,830 kip-in. The average and peak weld stresses are not <Jet,ernlÍm~d when using this
fb 16.3 kips/in.
Sw 112 in. 3 lin. method; therefore, the weld stress distribution should be applied unless
additional calculations establish that the ratio of weld stresses
is greater than or equal to 1.25.
f peak = /; + Va + fb )2
=1.25)VUb 2 + H ub 2
=~(12.1 kipsfmf +(1.98 kipslin.+16.3 kiPslin.)2
RUb

= 21.9 kipslin. =1.25 (313 kips)2 +(51.2 kips)2 =3 kips

RUb 396 kips

f a"8 =~[~(fa - f")2 + f/ +~(fa + f")2 + f/ 1 D.
muz
<l>CC1l 0.75(3.41)(1.0)(25.9 in.)
.98 sixteenths

1[~(1.98kipslin.-16.3kipslin.)2 +(12.lkipslin.)2] Two (2) 5/8 in. welds are required.

= 2 +~(1.98kipslin.+163kipslin.)2 +(12.lkipslin.)2
Check beam web yielding
= 20.3ldpslin
<l>rn = <l>F/w =1.0(50 ksi)(0.480 k.)=24.0 sfm.
f peak 21.9 kipsfm. 1.08 < 1.25
20.3 kipslin. ru = fa + fb = 18.3 kipslin.
f avg
<l>rn > ru o.k.
AMERICAN !NSTITUIE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~sTR.ucrlo~, !Ne.
3-74 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3
r SCBF DESIGN EXAMPLES 3-75
[1'

Check bearn web crippling 1,910 kip-in.

17.1 kips/ip.
The maximum stress due to moment Mub is [Mub/(N 2/4)] assuming a plastic 112 in. 3 /in.
stress distribution. Conservatively neglecting the half of this stress distribution
that acts in the opposite direction, and taking the total force at the center of the ; 2
2
f peak = fv +(ta -Ir f b )
bearing length, the resultant compressive force is,

(NI{) (NJ
= (11.9 kiPsfmf +(1.73 kipsfm.+ 1 17 .1 kiPsfmf
R M ub - +V =~+V
2M
u= 2 ub N ub = 22.3 kipsfm.

2( 1,830 kip-in.)
. +51.2 kips=193 kips -"2
f avg _1['
V(fa - fb) 2 + fv 2 + (fa + fb) 2 f+ fv 2]
25.9m.

With the compressive force applied < d b l2 from the beam end, _![ (1.73 kips/in.-17.1 kiPS/in.)~ +(11.9 kiPS/inf 1
N/d=25.9 in/18.4 in. = 1.41
- 2 + (1.73 kipslin. + 17.1 kipslin ¡> + (11.9 kiPsflllY ,

Rn = 0'40'{+ ( 4; -0.2 J( :~ r] tF (Specification J10-5b)

=20.9 kips/in.

_f_p e_a_k = _2_2_.3_k---,ip=-sIi_m_._ =

f avg 20.9 kipslin.
1.07 <1.25

=(0.40)(0.480)2 [1 +(4( 25.9) _ 0.2J(0.480J1.5] /29,000(50)(0.770) Therefore,fr = 1.25favg = 1.25(20.9 kips/in.) = 2~.1 kips/in.
18.4 0.770 V 0.480
The mirumum double-sided fillet weld size is,
::;:529 kips
(26.1 kips/ in.)
cpRn =0.75(529 kips) D> 9.38 sixteenths
2( 1.392 kips/ in.)
= 397 kips > 193 kips o.k.

Design the weld at the tension gusset/beam interface Altematively, the Eccentrically Loaded :Weld Gro p Tables found in the Manual
can be used. The load angle with respect to the ongitudinal axis of the weld
From Figure 3-15, the length of the gusset plate minus the l-in. comer clip is
group is,
25.9 in. Treating the welds as lines,

e-- tan- 1[ -Vub J--tan-1 (44.8 kips J =8.30°

Hub 307 kips

The eccentricity of H u b required to produce M UI is '

-_ Hub __ 307 kips
11.9 kips/in.
fv 1
---'----"--=
25.9 in. MUb 1,910 kip-in.
e = -....:=;- = .----"--. = 6.22 in.
-_ Vub -_ ---=--=1.73
44.8 kips
kips/in. Hub 307 kips
f
a 1 25.9 in.
e 6.22 in. O 4
a=-=---= .2 O
lw 25.9 in.

AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCI'ION, INc.

AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCI'I pN, me.
3-76 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 SCBF DESIGN EXAMPLES 3-77

The tabulated angle that is closest to, but less than the calculated load angle is f r =~f2+
v
f a2
O°. Interpolating from Manual Table 8-4 with e = 0° and using k = O,

C= 3.35
= J(7.80 kiPs/in.)2 + (2.40 kipsfm.)2
The average and peak weld stresses are not determined when using this method; =8.16 kipsfm.
therefore, the weld stress distribution factor should be applied unless additional
The minimum double-sided fillet weld size is,
calculations establish that the ratio of peak-to-average weld stresses is greater
than or equal to 1.25.
D> 8.16 kips/in. 293·
. srxteenth s
2(1.392 kips/in.)
RUb=1.25~Vu/+Hub2 =1.25 (44.8kips)2 +(307kiPS)2 =388kips

Altematively, the Eccentrically Loaded Weld Tables found in theManual

D RUb 388 kips 5 96· th can be used. The load angle with respect to
mm $CC1l 0.75(3.35)(1.0)(25.9 in.) . srxteen s group is,

Since the loading could be the reverse of that shown in Figure 3-16, the e=tan-I[HUb
Vub
J= tan-I ( 117
36 kips J=
kips
requíred gusset-to-beam weld size is the maximum of the sizes determined for
the compressive and tensile brace forces.
The tabulated angle that is closest to, but less the calculated load angle
Use (2) fuIl-Iength, 51 s-in. fiIlet welds to connect the gusset plate to the beam. is 15°. Since the moment at the column face been resolved into a couple
and included in H uc ' a = O. From Manual 8-4 with e = 15° and using
Check beam web yielding k=O,

ru =1.73 kipsfm.+ 17.1 kips/in.= 18.8 kipsfm. C= 3.84

$rn = $Fy t w = 1.0(50 ksi)(0.480 in.) = 24.0 kipsfm. o.k. The average and peak weld stresses are not deterq¡ún(~d when using this method;
therefore, the weld stress distribution factor be applied unless additional
calculations establish that the ratio of weld stresses is' greater
. than or equal to 1.25.
Check beam web crippling
The resultant compressive force is,
RUb = 1.25~VUb 2 + Hub 2 =1 + (36 kiPs)2 = 153 kips

2M 2(1,910 kips-in.) D . = RUb = . 153 kips

R =~-V 48.8 kips=98.7 kips 3.54 sixteenths
u N ub 25.9 in. mm $CC1l 0.75(3.84)(1.0)(15.0 in.)
$Rn =397 kips>98.7 kips o.k.
Use 1/4-in. fiIlet welds each side of the beam to connect the beam stub
Check beam stub/column connection to the column.
Using the 15 in. of beam web,

f
vub 117 kips 7 . 80 k·lpSl·ID.
v 1 15 in.

f -- Hub
--- - -
36-kips - . k·lP si·ID.
. - -240
a 1 15 in.

AMERICAN INsT1TU1E OF SlEEL CONSTRUCTION, INc. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~sTR.ucTI~N, INc.
 3-78 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3
SCBF DESIGN EXAMPLES 3-79

Check beam web at weld

The minimum thickness required to develop the welds is, Example 3.12. SCBF Brace-to-Bea n Connecti¡on
Design - W-Shape
(6.19 kips/in.)D
t . G/ven:
mm F Refer to Figure 3-10. Design the connection at Joint
u
J-3 on the third level. The brace orientation connection type to b~ used are
6.19 kips/in.( 4) shown in Figure 3-18. Assume that fue brace an ASTM A992 (~= 50 ksi,
65 ksi Fu = 65 ksi) W14x48 wide-flange section, and column and Beam BM-1 are
as designed in Example 3.8 and Example 3.9 respectively. Use ASTM A572
=0.381 in.
grade 50 plate material for the plates welded to brace and ASTM A36 mate-
0.480 in. > 0.381 in. o.k. rial for the gusset and gusset flange plates.

The final connection design and geometry is shown in Figure 3-17, and a sim-
ilar section of the coverplated brace configuration is shown in Figure 3-11.

CONNECTION - - - - h
PLATE

1/4
1/4 GUSSET - FLANGE
PLATE

GUSSETPL

.
• 1

W.P. •
W14x132

W27x336
BEAM
W14x132
COVER re. EA SIOE CUT COLUMN
FROM PIPE 10 STO WI Ft
WIOTH EQUAL TO 1/4
CIRCUMFERENCE
OF PIPE 10 STO TYP.

Figure 3-17. Connection designed in Example 3.11.

Figure 3-18. Brace connection to be designed Example 3.12.
AMERICAN !NSTIfUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCfION; !Nc.
AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~STI<~ucr'PN, !Nc.

- - - . . . - - - - - - -_ _ _ _ _- _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _• _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _. _ _ ••. .• •• __ __ ._
~
_
.
o
.
~
"
~
~
"
_
,
.
~
.
_
~
.
,
_
,
.
~
~
3-80 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 SCBF DESIGN EXAMPLES
3-81

W14x48 d =13.8 in. Ag = 14.1 in. 2 t¡= 0.595 in. the force delivered by one of the connection and each made up of 1h of
the web and 1h of each!flange (see Figure 3-1 ).
h¡= 8.03 in. tw = 0.340 in. kdes = 1.19 in.

From Example 3.8 for the design of the column, Region x A xA

in. in. 2 . 3
ill.

W14x132 tw = 0.645 in. d = 14.7 in. t¡= 1.03 in. Flange 2.01 4.78 9.61
Web 3.93 2.27 8.92
b¡= 14.7 in. kdes = 1.63 in. kdet = 25/16 in.
L 7.05 18.5
From Example 3.9 for the design of the beam,
_ L(xA) 18.5 in. 3
x= - - = 2.62 in.
W27x336 tw = 1.26 in. d= 30 in. t¡= 2.28 in. LA 7.05 in.2
b¡= 14.6 in.
It is necessary to keep the connection plate as as possible in order to allow
for bolt instal1ation. It will be assumed that bolt :1nstal1ati<)ll is feasible if the dis-
tance from the end of the connection plate to furthest bolt is less than about
Solutíon: Determine the expected tensile strength of the brace 18 in. Using 18 in. as the connection length,
Per Seismic Provisions Section 13.3a, the brace connection must be designed
to develop the expected yield strength of the brace, in tension. From Seismic U=1- -
x 1 2.62 in.
= - - - = 0.854
Provisions Table 1-6-1, Ry = 1.1. Therefore, the required tensile strength of the 1 18 in.
connection is,
An = Ag = 14.1 in.2
Tu = RyFyAg = 1.1 (50 ksi)( 14.1 in.2 ) = 776 kips
Ae = UAn = 0.854 (14.1 in. 2 ) = 12.0 in. 2

Determine 1. 1Ry times the nominal compressive strength

To transfer the expected yield strength of the through the connection
ofthe brace plates, the required strength per inch of each
The effective length of the brace between gusset plates will be assumed as 9 ft.
This length will need to be verified when the final connection geometry is known. RFA
y y g 776 kips
r - 10.8 kipslin.
From Manual Table 4-1 with KL = 9 ft, the design strength of the brace in com- u
41 4 ( 1.8.0 in. )
pression is <l>cPn = 504 kips (<l> = 0.90). Therefore, 1.1Ry times the nominal
strength of the brace in compression is,
The minimum required fillet weld size is,

1.1(1.1)(504 kips) D > 10.8 kipsjin. _ .

1.1R P
y n 678 kips - 1. 392 k·lpS j.In. - 7.76 slxteenths
0.90

Try 1h-in. fillet welds. The minimum base thickness required to develop
Check shear lag of brace
the weld can be determined by settingthe weld equal to the shear frac-
Seismic Provisions Cornmentary Section 13.2b clarifies that the net section ture strength of the base metal.
check requirement does not apply where there is no reduction in section. This
is the case for the bracing member in this example. Thus, the check does not
apply. Note that the connection length is substantial in this case in comparison
to thex dimension (see weld design that follows). When this is not the case, the
applicability of the Commentary exception is a matter of judgment.

Design welds connecting connection plates to brace

Load is transferred to the brace by plates welded across its flange tips. To
determine the U-factor, the brace will be treated as two channels, each resisting Figure 3-19. Geometry for brace shear lag cal.c:ulGztiQJ'1S in Example 3.12.

AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCfION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~STI<~UCII0~, !Nc.
3-82 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTllJZING R > 3 SCBF DESIGN EXAMPLES 3-83

( 3.09 kips/in.) D
tmin= <l>Rn =<l>( 0.6Fy )Ag
Fubrace
= (3.09 kips/in.)8 =1.0(0.6)(50 ksi)( 27.0 in?)
65 ksi =810 kips
= 0.380 in.

t¡ > 0.380 in. o.k.

Use 18..in...long, ]12.. in. fillet welds along each flange tip to connect the
connection plates to the braceo Design bolts between connection pla
gusset flange plates
Determine trial connection plate thickness Try 11/s-in.-diameter ASTMA325X bolts in shear. From Manual Table 7-1,
The minimum width of the connection plate is equal to the brace depth plus two the design shear strength is 44.7 kipslbolt. The of bolts required in each
times the shelf dimension for the fillet welds. From Manual Figure 8-11, the min- plate to transfer the expected yield strength of brace is,
imum recommended shelf dimension for a lh-in. fillet weld is 3/4 in. Therefore,
the minimum connection plate width is,

b = 13.8 in. + 2(X in.) = 15.3 in.

Two rows of bolts will be used in each plate; th~:retore 10 bolts are required.
Try a 15 I h-in. plate width, which will provide allowance for the brace over- Use (10) 1lJs-in.-diameter ASTM A325X bolts STD holes in each connec-
depth tolerance. tion plate-to-flange plate connection.
The connection plates must be able to transfer the expected yield strength of
tbe brace through the lh-in. fillet welds. As determined previously for the Check bearing strength of connection
brace (Fu = 65 ksi), the minimum ~hickness required to develop the strength Using Manual Table 7-5 for the interior bolts
of a lh-in. weld is 0.380 in. Therefpre, the 3/4-in. plate thickness.
<l>rn=106 kips/in.(X in.) = 79.5 lr1n'Nhr\1t

Determine connection plate design forces

Each connection plate must transfer half of the expected yield strength of the The minimum edge distance of 2 in. occurs the brace is in compression.
brace in tension, as well as half of 1.1Ry times the nominal compressive Using Manual Table 7-6 with a 2-in. edge Ul"'La.tI'\'~, the bearing strength of the
strength of the braceo The req1.lired strength of each plate in tension is, plate at the edge bolts is,

<l>rn = 82.3 kips/in.(X in.) = 61.7 t{}n!~Ih(111t

The required strength of each plate in compression is, Since the bearing strength of the plate at each is greater than the design
shear strength of a 11/s-in.-diameter ASTM A3 bolt, the bearing strength of
1.1Ry Pn 678 kips the plate is adequate.
R
uc
339 kips
2 2
Check shear rupture strength of r-n,nn':II'1'Tlfl"'ln
Check shear yielding strength of cpnnection plates The net shear area of each connection plate is,
The gross shear area of each connection plate is,

2
Ag =2(18 in.)(X in.) = 27.0 in.

AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~sTR:ucTlojN, !Nc.
 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTlLIZING R > 3 SCBF DESIGN EXAMPLES ~85
3-84

$Rn = $(0.6Fu )An Agv=2[2 in.+4(3 in.)J(X in.) =

2
= 0.75 (0.6)( 65 kSi)( 17.6 in. )
Anv = 21.0 in.
2
- 2( 4 ~)( 1 Ys in. in.)(X in.) = 12.6 in.2
= 515 kips
Agt = 6 in.(X in.) = 4.50 in.2

2
FuAnt = 65 kSi( 3.56 in. ) = 231
Check block-shea'r rupture strength of connection plates
The block-shear rupture failure paths through the connection plates are shown 0.6FuA nv = 0.6( 65 kSi)( 12.6 in.2 ) = 491 kips
in Figure 3-20. As can be seen in this figure, the only difference between the
failure paths is the edge distance at the end of the connection plateo lt follows 0.6Fy Agv = 0.6(50 kSi)( 21.0 in. 2 ) =
that the controlling case occurs when the brace is in compression, with the bolts
in standard holes and spaced as shown in Figure 3-20,
(Specification J4-5)

4" 4@3" 2" $Rn =0.75[491 kips+(1.0)(231Ikips)]:s; 75[630 kips + (1.0)(231 kips)]
=542 kips:S;646 kips
=542 kips

3"
----"=-r-~ BRACE Since the block shear strength for this case also greater than the required
3" strength of the connection plate in tension, other block shear failure path
need not be investigated.
4%"
== == == == == == == 1==1======1 Use 3/4-in. x 151h-in. A,STM A572 Grade 50 ~olllDe4¡:tioln plates.
(a) BRACE IN TENSION
Determine trial thickness for flange
In order to allow for a field-welded altemative, fit-up problems occur in
the field, the top flange plate should be naITO\IVer than, and the bottom flange
4@3" 2" plate wider than, the connection plates by two the weld shelf dimensiono
Using the dimensions previously determined
flange plate width is,
4%"
btop=15.5in.-2(J{ in.)=14.0in.
3"
_---"=:::,_~ BRACE
and the bottom flange plate width is,
3"

4%" bbot=15.5 in.+2(J{ in.)=17.0 in.

== == == == == == == ~~====I
This will allow for up to 112-in. fillet welds to made in the field, if required.
(b) BRACE IN COMPRESSION These plates must also meet the loc~ requirements as compression
elements of the braceo Try 1-in.-thick,plates ASTM A36 (~ = 36 ksi, ~ =
58 ksi) material for both flange plates.
Figure 3-20. Connection plate block shear failure paths for Example 3.12.

AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL COl'¡STRUCT~ON, !Nc.
 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTlLIZlNG R > 3 SCBF DESIGN EXAMPLES 3--&7
3--86

Check bearing strength of flange plates Check block-shear rupture strength

Using Manual Table 7-5 for the interior bolts with a 3-in. spacing, The controlling block-shear rupture fáilure path the flange platf~s is shown
in Figure 3-21.
<jlrn = 94.6 kips/in.(1 in.) = 94.6 kips/bolt
Agv=2[ 2 in.+4(3 in.)](l in.)=28
The minimum edge distance of 2 in. occurs when the brace is tension. Using
Manual Table 7-6 with a 2-in. edge distance, the bearing strength of the plate 2
at the edge bolts is,
Anv = 28.0 in. - 2( 4!i)( 1Ys in. in.)(1 in.) = 16.8 in.2

Agt = 6 in.(l in.) = 6.OQ in.2

<jlrn =73.4 kips/in.(l in.) = 73.4 kips/bolt

Since the bearing strength of the plate at each bolt is greater than the design
2
A nt = 6.00 in. -1(1 Ys ip.+ Ys .
shear strength of an 11fs-in.-diameter ASTM A325X bolt, the bearing strength
of the plate is adequate. FuAnt= 58 kSi( 4.75 in. 2 ) ~ 276

Check tension yielding of flange plates Q.6fuAnv = 0.6( 58 kSi)( 16.8 iq,2) = 58
The tension yield strength of the top flange plate is,
O.6Fy Agv = 0.6( 36 kSi)( 28.0 in}) =
2
<jlR = <jlFyAg = 0.90( 36 ksi)( 14.0 in. ) = 454 kips
n

Rut < <jlRn o.k.

<jlRn =0.75[585 kips+( 1.0)( 276 kipS)]
The bottom flange plate has a larger gross area. Therefore, it is adequate by
inspection. $0.75[ 605 kips + (1.0)(276 k~)J
= 645 kips::; 661 kips
Check tension rupture of flange plates
=645 kips
The net area of the top flange plate is,

Specification Section J4.1 requires that An cannot be taken larger than 0.85Ag
for bolted splice plates.

2
0.85Ag = 0.85 (14.0 in.2 ) = 11.9 in.

An <0.85Ag o.k.
_-i----~ BRACE
The tension rupture strength of the top flange plate is,

Rut < <jlRn o.k.

. Figure 3-21. Gussetflange plate block shear failure for Example 3.12.
The bottom flange plate has a larger net area. Therefore, it is adequate by
inspection.

AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCfION, INc. AMERICAN INsmUTE OF STEELiCm~snlUC1:JON.INC.

 3-88 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 SCBF DESIGN EXAMPLES 3-89

Check shear lag of the flange plates at the welded connection t 1.0 in.
to the gusset plate
r= .J12 = .J12 = 0.289 in.

Assume a trial connection length for the bottom flange plate equal to its width,
x
b. Using as half of the width of the plate on each side of the slot, KL 0.65( 4.50 in.)
10.1
b .
r 0.289 in.
x=¡ (approxlmately)
From Specification Section J4.4, Fer = ~
flange plates is,

i x b/4
U=I--=1--=0.750
1 b

Assume a l l/8-in. slot will be made to fit the flange plates over the gusset (this
allows for al-in. gusset plate plus a 1/16-in. gap each side ofthe gusset). Checking
A g = 1 in.(14 in.+ 17 in.) = 31.0 .

<l>Pn = <l>FyAg =0.90(36 ksi)(31.0 in. )=1,000 kips> 678 kips o.k.
I I
the bottom flange plate,
Use l-in.-thick ASTM A36 flange Use a 14-in. width for the top
:.. i
\! An = (17.0 in.-l Ys in.')(1 in.) = 15.9 in.
2 flange plate and a F -in. width for the flange plate. Use standard
) '.'. . .! holes in the plates. I

'1 2 2
l.t·.1·
',-1 Ae = UAn = 0.750(15.9 in. ) = 11.9 in. Each bolt group connecting the brace to gusset plate will have a 3-in.
bolt spacing, 6-in. gage, and 2-in. edge Q.lsltaD4~e at the brace end of the
<l>tPn=<I>FuAe connection and flange plates.
2
= 0.75(58 ksi)(1l.9 in. )
Design welds connecting flange
=518 kips
Per Specification Table J2.4, the minimum filiet weld size is 5116 in.
Using 5116-in. fillet welds top and bottom of
gusset plate, the design strength of each IlaIlI!e'-Dlale connection is,
The top flange plate will be at least as long as the bottom flange plateo Therefore,
<l>Rn = 1.392Dlw
using 1= 17 in.,
= 1.392 kipsfm.( 4)( 5)( 17.0 in.)
( 14 in.) =473 kips
U=I- =0.794
4(17 in.)

2
An =(14.0 in.-1Ys in.)(l in.) = 12.9 in.

2 2 Check gusset plate fracture at plate welds

Ae= UAn = 0.794(12.9 in. ) = 10.2 in.
Try a 3/4-in.-thick, ASTM A36 (F = 36 ksi, = 58 ksi) gusset plateo The min-
• y
lmum gusset pIate thickness required to welds connecting the flange
<l>tPn= <l>FuAe
plate to the gusset plate is,
2
= 0.75(58 kSi)(1O.2 in. )
6.19D
= 444 kips t, = - -
mm F
u
Rut < <l>tPn o.k. 6.19 kipsfm.(5)
58 ksi
Check compression buckling of flange plates
=0.534 in.
Based on the connection geometry shown in Figure 3-20 and assuming a l/2-in.
setback between the brace and gusset plate, the average unbraced length of each 3/4 in. > tmin o.k.
flange plate is 4 1/2 in.
AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~sTR~tJCTlON. !Nc.
3-90 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 SCBF DESIGN EXAMPLES 3-91

Use double-sided 5h6-iD. fillet welds on each side ofthe gusset plate to con- <PtPn = <P Fy Ag ;
nect the flange plates to the gusset plateo
= 0.90(36 ksi)(31.2 in.)(,% .
I

Check tension yielding strength of the gusset plate = 758 kips

UsiIig a 2 1h-in. offset between the beam flange and bottom flange plate, the
<PtPn <Ry Fy Ag D.g.
iilitiál gusset plate geometry is as shown in Figure 3-22. The width of the
Whitmore section is,
Try increasing the connection length to 18 in.

lw=8.03 in.+2(X" in.+l in.)+2(17 in.)tan(30o)

lw=8.03in.+2(X" in.+lin.)+2(1 in.)tan(300)
=31.2 in.
=32.3 in.

It should be noted that a portion of the Whitmore width falls within the beam. <PtPn = <P Fy Ag
The beam web thickrtess and yield strength are both larger than those assumed
= 0.90(36 ksi)(32.3 in.)(,% .
for the glisset plateo Conservatively using the gusset yield strength and thick-
ness along the full Whitmore width, = 785 kips

Determine compression buckling c:!:tr¡;.~nh'th of the gusset plate

W14X132 3/ .
t 74
r = J12 = J12In. = 0.217 In.
.

W14X48

With K = 0.65 and the average buckling length to 7.56 in.,

KL 0.65(7.56 in.)
- 22.6
r 0.217 in.
From Specification Section J4.4; Fcr = ~ and

<PRn =<PFy Ag

= 0.90 (36 ksi )( 32.3 in. )(~ in.)

Wp

=785 kips>678 kips

Determine the connection deslgn

1/2"
The expected tensile strength of the brace was Pni'vi011S1y determined as 776 kips.
For this condition, the governing load for the factoted shear load
W27X336 on the beam is,

Figure 3~22. Connection geometry for Example 3.12.

AMBRICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTlTUTE OF STEEL Cm~s-rn~ucl1~N, !Nc.
3-92 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 OCBF DESIGN EXAMPLES 3-93

Rub =0.7(7 kips)+2.0(0)+1.6(0 kips) The connection interface forces for the ....,,+J........ ~u tensile strength of the brace
are,
= 4.90 kips

1.IRy times the nominal compressive strength of the brace was previously deter- v =~P = 12.0in·(776k· S)=244ki
ue r u 382·
. ID. 1p P
mined as 678 kips. For this condition, the governing load combination for the
factored shear load on the beam is, H = ee P = 7.35in·(776ki S)=149
ue r u 382·. ID. P
RUb = (1.2+ O.2S DS )PD +ºoP +0.5PL +O.2PS
QE v~ = eb Pu = 382·
15.0 in. (776 ki s)· =305
p
Rub =1.4(7 kips)+2.0(0)+0.5(4 kips) + 0.2(0)
r . ID.

= 11.8 kips H =:!:..P = 19.7 in. (776 ki S)1=400

-ub r u 382·
. ID. P

In addition, for both conditions, the connection must accornmodate an amplified The connection interface forces for 1.IRy times nominal compression strength
drag force equal to, of the brace are,

V ~P
=- 12.0 in. (678 k·lpS ) c:::
=--~- . 213 k·lP
ue r u 38.2 in.

Determine connection interface torces H = ee P = 7.35 in. (678 ki s)= 131 ki

ue r u 382· . ID. P P
The forces at the gusset-to-beam and gusset-to-column interfaces are deter-
mined using the Uniform Force Method. Using the connection geometry given v = eb P = 15.0 in. (678 ki s)=266
in Figure 3-22, ~ r u 382·. ID. p

d d H =:!:..P = 19.7 in. (678 ki s)=350 ki

eb =i=15.0 in. e =--.f...=7.35 in.
e 2
e = 45.0 0
~ = 12.0 in. ub r u 382·
. ID. P P
2
The connection design forces are shown in
For the connection interfaces to remain free of moments,

a=(eb +~)tane-ee Design the gusset-to-beam IV"lnn,o.I"'t'/1"I1I"I

The resultant force on the connection is,

=(15.0 in.+12.0 in.)tan(45.0 0 )-7.35 in.
=19.7 in.

The corresponding edge dimension for the gusset is

The length of weld along the gusset-to-beam lijtlertllce is,
2(19.7 in. - 5 in. - 112 in.) + 5 in. + 112 in. = 33.9 in.
Use 2 ft 10 in.
The actual value of a at this edge dimension is 19.8 in. The moment due to this
small difference is negligible and a = 19.7 in. will be used in the calculations. Since there is no moment on this interface, the stress is equal to the aver-
age stress. Thus, the weld stress distribution of 1.25 must be used. The
resulting demand is
r= (a+eJ2 +(~+ebt
=~(19.7 in.+7.35 in.)2 +(12.0 in.+15.0 inf
1.25(503 kips)
ir 22.1 kips/ in.
28.4 in.
=38.2 in.
Use double-sided, 112_in. fillet welds to the gusset plate to the beam.
AMERICAN INslITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INC. AMERICAN !NSTlTUTE OF STEEL CmlsTRuc~~ON, !Ne.
3-94 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 SCBF DESIGN EXAMPLES 3-95

776 kips Check gusset plate rupture at'beam

The minimum gusset plate thickness to develop welds is,

(6.19 kipslin'.)D
t .
mUl
F
u
I 6.19 kipsfm.( 6.41)
I •
58 ksi
I •
in.
. I • =0.684

~
I
149 kips I • 3/4 in. > 0.684 o.k.
I •
I •
I Check local yielding of beam web for -tL:>r.coír,,, and compression
244kips I •
L_~ ____________________ ~
Using Manual Table 9-4 for a W27x336,
........1 - - - - 400 kips <l>Rl = 483 kips

~
305kips
<l>R2 =63.0 kipslin.

<l>Rn =<I>R¡ +N(<I>R2 )

(a) BRACE IN TENSION /526ki PS =483 kips+28.4 in.(63.0 kipsfm.)

=2,270 kips

Check local web crippling of beam compression

Using Manual Táble 9-4 for a W27x336 with > 0.2,
I <l>R5 = 708 kips
I •
I • <l>R6 = 42.3 kipsfm.

131 kips .. ti •
•
•
<l>Rn =<I>R5 +N(<I>R6)
=708 kips+28.4 in.( 42.3 kipslin.)
213kips I
•
I • =1,910 kips
____________________

t·
L_~ ~

<l>Rn > Vub o.k.

350kips

Determine loads at aU,SSE~r-z'O-~~m('1le-DI,ere connection

266 kips
The beam and gusset plate are connected to column with a bolted single-
plate connection. There are two grOlips of used to transfer the forces -
(b) BRACE IN COMPRESSION
one centered in the beam web and another at the ~ dimension on the
Figure 3-23. Connection interfaceforcesfor Example 3.12. gusset piate. To address the eccentricity of shear load, it will be assuíned

AMERICAN INSTITU1E OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INc. AMERICAN INsTITU1E OF STEEL Cm~s'rn~ucrloN, INc.
 3-96 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 SCBF DESIGN EXAMPLES 3-97

that this moment is balanced by a force couple with a component at the centroid Check single-plate bearing
of each bolt group. The eccentricity of the bolts will be assumed as half of the
Try a 5/s-in.-thick single plateo Using Table 7-5 with a bolt spacing
plate width. It has been determined that the controlling load combination is for
equal to 3 in., the bearing strength of the bolts is,
the brace in tension. This additional horizontal force is,
<l>rn = 94.6 kips/in.(0.625 in.) = 59.1
H um
(Vuc + Vub - RUb )e
eb +~ Conservatively using Manual Table 7-6 with 2-in. edge distance, the strength
of the edge bolt is,
(244 kips+305 kips-4.90 kips)( 2.50 in.)
15.0 in.+12.0 in. <l>rn = 73.4 kips/in.(0.625 in.) = 45.9
=50.4 kips
The bearing strength of the plate is·,
The force components at the connection are,
<l>Rn = 59.1 kips(5) + 45.9 kips = 341
Vu = Vuc = 244 kips

Hu =Huc + Hum =149 kips+50.4 kips=199 kips

i The resultant load at the connection is,

Check gusset bearing
Since the gusset has the same tensile as the single plate and is thicker

u =~V2+H
than the single plate, its bearing strength is aqe:qUéue.
R
u u2
Check gusset yielding
= (244 kips)2 +(199 kiPs)2
The shear yielding strength is,
=315 kips
<l>Rn =<I>( 0.6Fy )Ag
Design bolts at gusset-to-single-plate connection
Use 11/s-in.-diameter ASTM A490X bolts. From Manual Table 7-1, <l>rn =
= 1.0 ( 0.6)( 36 ksi)( 24 in.)( 0.750·
55.9 kips. The required number of bolts is, =389 kips

<l>Rn >Ru o.k.

N = 315 kips 5.64 bolts
b 55.9 kipslbolt
Check block shear rupture of gusset-rro,-C>I,nrr,'o plate cor:mection
Use (6) tI/s-in. diameter ASTM A490X bolts in standard boles to connect
The controlling block shear rupture failure occurs in the single plate when
tbe gusset plate to tbe single plateo Locate holts 21/2 in. from tbe column face.
the brace is in tension. The shear plane is and passes from the top of the
Typical practice is to specify only one bolt type for each bolt diameter on a jobo plate to the center of the lowest bolt holeo tension plane is horizontal and
This is done to avoid the possibility of a bolt of correct diameter, but incorrect passes from the center of the lowest bolt hole the free edge of the plateo With
strength, being installed in ajoint. Previously in this example, 11/s-in.-diameter 6 bolts spaced at 3 in. on center,
ASTM A325 bolts were used in the design of the brace-to-gusset connection.
There is not enough space in the beam-to-single-plate connection for the Agv = [4.50 in. + 5 (3 in.) J( 0.625 in.) =
required number of ASTM A325 bolts; therefore, an equal number of ASTM
A490 bolts will be substituted for the 11/s-in.-diameter ASTM A325 bolts con-
2
Anv=12.2in. -5 X'(IX in. + Xin.)(
necting the brace to the gusset plateo
Agt = 2.50 in.( 0.625 in.) = 1.56 in. 2
Use (10) ll/s-in.-diameter ASTMA490X bolts in eacb connection plate-to-
flange plate connection.

AMERICAN lNSTIfUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, lNc. AMERICAN lNSTIfUTE OF STEEL COJIIsTRUqrION,lNC.

 3-98 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 SCBF DESIGN EXAMPLES
3-99

Ant=1.56 in.2_~(lYs in.+ Ys in.)(0.625 in.) =1.17 in.2 <l>Rn =0.75[407 kips+ 81.8 kips]
~ 0.75 [356 kips+81.8 kips]
FuAnt = 58 kSi( 1.17 in.2 ) = 67.9 kips =367 kips~329 kips
=329 kips
0.6FuAnv = 0.6(58 kSi)( 7.90 in?) = 275 kips

0.6FyAgv = 0.6 (36 kSi)( 12.2 in.2 ) = 264 kips

\ i
Use a 4-in. spacing between tbe bolts in tbe plate.
<l>Rn = <I>(0. 6FuAnv +UbsFuAnt) (Specification J4-5)

~ <1>( 0.6FyAgv + UbsFuAnt) Determine loads at beam-ro-s/lr701e-lJ/lil¡re connection

tension. The force components are,

<l>Rn =0.75[275 kips+(1.0 in.)(67.9 kiPS)] Vu = Vub - RUb = 305 kips - 4.90 kips =

~9.75[ 0.6( 36 ksi)(12.2 in. 2 ) +(1.0)(67.9 kiPS)] Hu =Huc +Hum¡+.0 o P

QE

=257 kips~249 kips =149 kips+50.4 kips+64.0 kips=

=249 kips
The resultant load is,

Try a 3/4-in.-thick single plate and a 4-in. bolt spacing.

J( 0.750 in.) = 16.5 in.2

A gv = [2.00 in. + 5 (4 in.)
= (300 kips)f + (263 kips )2
=399 kips
Anv=16.5m. -5 X(I){ in.+ X in.)(0.750in.)=11.3in.
2 2
The required number of bolts is,
A gt = 2.50 in.(0.750 in.) = 1.88 in.2
Nb 399 kips 7 13 bo 1ts
=.
Ant = 1.88 in.2 - ~(IYs in.+ Ys in.)(0.750 in.) = 1.41 in.2 55.9 kipslbolt

FuAnt = 58 kSi( 1.41 in.2 ) = 81.8 kips Use (8) ¡l/s-in.-diameter ASTM A~90X in standard holes to connect
the beam to the singleplate. Locate bolts 2 in. from the column face.
2
0.6FuAnv :::0.6(58 ksi)( 11.7 in. )=407 kips
Check single-plate bearing
2
0.6FyAgv = 0.6(36 kSi)( 16.5 in. ) = 356 kips Using Manual Table 7-5 with a bolt spacing to 3 in., the bearing strength
of the bolts is,
thR
'f' n
t)
=<1> (O.6FuAnv +UbsFuAn (Specification J4-5)
<l>Rn = 8(94.6 kips/in.)(0.750 in.) = 568
~th(0.6Fygv
'f'
F A t)
A +Ubsun

AMERICAN iNsTintrE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL Cm.¡STRUCT[{)N, INC.

~--------------------------------------------
 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 SCBF DESIGN EXAMPLES 3-101
3-100

Check beam web bearing Try a l-in.-thick plate,

Since the beam web has a higher ultimate strength than the single plate and is
thicker than the single plate, its bearing strength is adequate.
J(
Agv = [1.50 in. + 7 (3 in.) 1.00 in = 22.5 in.2
2
Anv =22.5 in. -7 Yz (1 X in.+ in.)( 1.00 in.)= 13.1 in. 2
Check beam web yielding
The shear yielding .strength is, Agt = 2.50 in.(1.00 in.) =¡ 2.50 in.

2
el>Rn =el>(0.6Fy )dtw Ant=2.50in. - Yz(IXin.+ X

= 1.0 ( 0.6)(50 ksi)( 30.0 in.)( 1.26 in.)

FuAnt = 58 kSi( 1.88 in.2 ) = 109 kips
=1,130 kips
0.6FuAnv = 0.6(58 kSi)( 13.1 in.2 ) = 456
el>Rn> Ru o.k.
0.6Fy Agv= 0.6( 36 kSi)( 22.5 in. 2 ) =
Check block shear rupture of beam-to-single-plate connection
I
The controlling block shear rupture failure path occurs in the single plate when el>Rn = el> ( O. 6FuAnv + UbsPuAnt ) :::;
the brace is in compression. The shear plane is vertical and passes from the bot-
tom of the plate to the center of the highest beam bolt holeo The tension plane (Specification J4-5)
is horizontal and passes froID the center of the highest beam bolt hole to the free
edge of the plateo With 8 bolts spaced at 3-in. on center,
2
el>Rn =0.75[4~6 kips+(1.0)(109
Agv =[1.50 in.+ 7(3 in.)J( 0.75 in.) = 16.9 in.
:::;0.75[486 kips+(1.0)(109
2
Anv=16.9in. -7 Yz(l1s in.+ Is in.)(0.750in.)=9.87in.
2
=424 kips:::;446 kips
=424 kips
2
Agt = 2.50 in.( O. 750 in.) = 1.88 in.

Ant =1.88 in. 2 - Yz( 1 Is Is in.+ in.)( 0.750 in.)=1.41 in.

2

Use a 3-in. spacing between bolts in tbe web and a 1112-in. edge
2
distance at tbe bottom of tbe single plateo
FuAnt= 58 kSi( 1.41 in. ) = 81.8 kips
2 Check shear yielding of single :plate
0.6FuAnv = 0.6(58 kSi)(9.87 in. ) = 343 kips
The length of the single plate is,
2
0.6Fy Agv= 0.6(36 ksi)( 16.9 in. ) = 365 kips
L=24 in.+ ;;(30.0 in.)+3.5(3 in
el>Rn = el> ( 0.6FuAnv + UbsFuAnt):::; el> ( 0.6Fy Agv + UbsFuAnt) =51.0 in.
(Specification J4-5)
The controlllng load combination is for the in tension. The total shear
load on the joint is,

<pR =0.75[343 kips+(1.0)(81.8 kips)] Vu =Vuc + Vub -Rub

n
:::;0.75[365 kips + (1.0)(8 1.8 kips)] =244 kips+305 kips-4.90

=319 kips:::;335 kips =544 kips

Ru><pRn n.g.

L AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INc. AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL 'COlI/STl1lUCJloN, INc.
 3-102 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 SCBF DESIGN EXAMPLES
3-103

The shear yielding strength is, The load angle with respect to the axis of the weld group is,

<l>Rn =<I>( 0.6Fy )Ag

= 1.0 ( 0.6)( 36 ksi)( SO.8 in.)( 1.00 in.)

e=mn-
1
( ~: } mn-
1
( :~~::)= .40

=1,100 kips The fillet weld strength is,

<l>Rn >Vu o.k.

<l>rn =1.392 kiPS/in.( 1.0+0.S0sin1. 5 e

Check shear rupture of single plate =1.392 kiPs/in.[1.0+0.50Sin1.5( .4 o )J

The net area of the single plate is,
=1.70 kips/in.

An=[S1.0in.-14(1){ in.+){ in.)J(1.00in.) The minimum double-sicted fillet weld size is,
2
=33.5 in. D 15.3 kipWm.
mm ( ) 4.50 sixteenths
The shear rupture strength is, 2 1.70 kipWm.

<l>Rn =<I>(0.6Fu)An Use double-sided, 5116-in. filIet welds to tbe single plate to the col-
umn flange.
2
=0.7S(0.6)(S8 ksi)(33.5 in. )
Check single-plate fracture at sma/~~-nJr::JT(.~-to-column welds
=874 kips
Conservatively checking the mihimuin thickness required to develop
the welds through shear fracture,

6.19D
Use a l-in.-tbick single plateo t. =--
mm F
u
Design single-plate-to-column connection 6.19 kipsfm.(5)
It has been determined that the controlling load combination is at the beaml 58 ksi
column interface for the brace in tension. The force components are, =0.534 in.
vu = Vub - Rub =305kips-4.90 kips=300 kips t> tmin o.k.
H =H +Q PQ =149 kips+64.0 kips=213 kips
u uc o E Use a l-in.-tbick, single-plate connection D~ltWt~en tbe bealil/gusset ada
column.
The resultant load is,

Check local yielding of columá web

R
u =~Vu2+Hu2 With the force applied away from the member the column web local yield-

= (300 kips t + ( 213 kips t ing strength is,

=368 kips <l>Rn =<I>(5k + N) Fywtw

Using a connection length of 7(3 in.) + 2(11/2 in.) = 24.0 in., = 1.0 [ 5(1.63 in.)+27.0 in.J(SO ksi)( in.)
=1,130 kips
ir 368 kips lS.3 kips/in.
24.0 in.
<l>Rn > Huc o.k.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL Cm¡STRUCf[(bN,!NC.

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ~ _ _ _ o _ _• _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ._" _ _ • _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . _. . . . . _ . _ . . . . . . . . _ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ._ .. _ •••• ,
 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 SCBF DESIGN EXAMPLES
3-104 3-105

Check local web crippling of column The couple required in the connection plates resist this moment is,
For this case, the governing equation for web crippling is Specification 1.1R M
Equation 110-4. This equation is not tabulated in the Manual. However, the T =C y p 1,190 kip-in.
cp cp d 8
result of Specification Equation 11 0-4 is simply double that of Equation JI 0-5a, cp .78 in.
which is tabulated. Using Manual Table 9-4 for a WI4x132,
Since the connection plates, flange pIates, gusset pIates were previously
<\>~ =190 kips designed to resist larger tension and cornpI·es~~on forces, they are adequate to
resist the expected flexural strength of the about its buckling axis.
<\>R4 = 19.3 kipslin.
The connection interface forces due to this must also be evaluated.

<\>Rn =2[ <\>~ +N(<\>R4 )]

Assuming that the moment will be resisted at single-plate connection by a
couple with components Iocated at the of the gusset and the center-
line of the beam web,
=2[190 kips+27.0 in.(19.3 kipsfm.)]

=1,420 kips 1,190 kip-in.

Huc
15.0 in.+12.0 in.
<\>R >H +Q P o.k.
n uc o QE
Hub =-Huc =- 44.1 kips

Check column web shear Vub = Vuc = O kips

The shear strength of the column web is,
M b=1.1R M -H ~
u y p ,uc
<\>Rn =<\>(0.6Fy )dtw =1,190 kip-in.-44.1 kips(12.0 in.)=
= 1.0 ( 0.6)(50 ksi)( 14.7 in.)( 0.645 in.)
Since the gusset plate, beam, colurnn, and plate were previously designed
=284 kips to resist larger connection interface fotces, they adequate to resist the strain-
hardened, expected flexural strength of the about its buckling axis.
<\>R >H +Q P o.k.
n uc o QE
Verify brace length
Verify flexural strength of connection In this example, as well :;lS in Examplé 3.7, the u~lt>ral~ed Iength of the brace was
Seismic Provisions Section 13.3b requires that the connection be able to either assumed to, be 9 ft. Figure 3-12 shows the between work points is
develop 1.IR M of the brace about its buckling axis or accornmodate the rota- approximately 17 ft 8 in. Based on the geometry, the distance from
tion required' te!
support the post-buckling deformations of the braceo This the work point to the edge of the gusset along brace axis is approximately
connection will not accornmodate the post-buckling deformations; therefore it 4 ft O in. at each end of the braceo The:resulting Iength for the brace is
must be verified that it can develop 1.1RyMp of the braceo The strain-hardened, 9 ft 8 in. Therefore, the assumption of a 9 ft Oin. length for the brace was
expected plastic flexural strength of the brace is, sIightly conservative for determining the required of the connections.

1.1Ry M p =I.1Ry Fy Z y The final connection design is shown in

= 1.1( 1.1)( 50 ksi)( 19.6 in? J

= 1,190 kip-in.

The distance between the centerlines of the connection plates is,

dcp =b¡ +tcp

=8.03 in.+ y; in.
=8.78 in.
AMERICAN lNSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL Cm¡¡STFtUC1~IO¡"¡, !Nc.
3-106 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 ECCENTRiCALLY BRACED FRAME (EBF) SYSTEMS
I 3-107

ECCENTRICALLV BRACEO FRAME

In Eccentrically Braced Frame (EBF) systems, l~teral are resisted by a combination
~---,.....,...-< TYP. of the.flexure, shear, and axial force s in the framing Eccentrically braced frames
are essentially a hybrid system, offering lateral stiffnes~ that of a con~entrically
braced frame and ductility approaching that of a moment system. The general concept
is that tbe centerline of abrace member coincides with the intersection of a beam-to-
column joint at one end, with the other end intersecting
brace ot column. Sorne typical configurations of EBF are shown in Seismic
Provisions Figure C-I-15.1. The section of the beam traJns~~rriing the vertical shear compo-
nent of the eccentrically connected brace to fue adjacent or brace is called the "link."
Tbe link becomes the focal point in the design and
intended to be the primary location for the inelastic hp}HI,,;nr
the members and connections are intended to remain essenl:lal.ly elastic and are required to
have sufficient strength to withstand forces corresponding the link yield forces.
Designers can ofien fit eccentrically braced frames in within the architectural
WP floor plan where concentrically braced frames cannot be due to the space limitations
presented by doors and windows. Additionally, the system adequately stiff to limit non-
structural damage, as compared to the relatively flexible of moment frames, An EBF
system may be more complex for design and construction. with all systems, the choice
of an EBF as the lateral system requires balancingthe needs the building owner and archi-
tect with the project budget. Consideration should be to "first-costs" of the project
versus the life-cyele costs and potentlal repair cosrs a major earthquake. First-cost
benefits of using an EBF system inelude a reduction in the base shear force, which
may result in savings in the construction of the diaphragm
While EBF systems combine many c.oncepts of both coj~ce:ntIicaLlly braced frames and
moment frames, the technology of eccentrically braced is relatively new. The system
was first developed in Japan in the early 1970s. Research development in the United
States followed later that decade, continuing through the 1980s, with the frrst codified
design procedure appearing in the 1988 Uniform Building (UBC). As noted aboye, the
focal point of the design of an EBF system is the link. The design procedures put forth
in the Seismic Provisions are quite extensive and are to provide reliable and duc-
Figure 3-24. Connection designedfor Example 3.12. tile performance of the link under seismic loading. The of these provisions relate
to width-to-thickness limits in Section 8 of the Seismic PrclvísíonLs. For link beams in EBF
systems, the web width-to-thicknessratio (h/tw ) is' limited

AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc.

AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL Cml/STFlUCll0N, !Nc.
3-108 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTll.JZING R > 3 ECCEN1RICALLY BRACED FRAME (EBF) SYSTEMS 3-109

Additionallimitations on the link web inelude a maximum specified yield stress of 50 ksi
and a requirement that the web be a single thickness of material. Thus, doubler plates and 20
penetrations are not permitted for use in the link zone. P
The available shear strength of the link, <1> Vn , must be greater than the shear demand, V¡¡,
where en 16
en
w
1
<1>=0.90
z
IJ..
IJ..
1
Vn = the nominal strength of the link (equal to the les ser of l.p or 2Mp /e) ¡::
en
l.p = 0.6Fy A w w
~
Mp=FyZ <
o:
e = the length of the link IJ..
W
Aw = (db - 2t¡)tw >

Additional link requirements apply when the required axial strength in the link exceeds w
~
o:
0.15Py ' These requirements limit the design shear strength and the link length in order to
provide for more stable inelastic behavior within the link when axial forces become large
enough to have a significant effect. For specific requirements, the Seismic Provisions should o~--~--~--~ ____ __
~ ~

0.0 0.2 0.4 0.6 1.0

be consulted. When Pu ~ 0.15Py ' axial force effects in the link need not be considered.
Another consideration in the design of the link is the link length, e. When related to the e/L
length of the frame, L, it can be shown that as e/L approaches zero, an EBF system reaches
the stiffuess of a concentrically braced frame, while values of e/L approaching 1.0 indicate Figure 3-25. Frame stiffness vs. link length (bnlgel¡1a~1.t and Popov, 1989).
behavior consistent with moment frames. This concept is illustrated in Figure 3-25. Further
consideration of link length relates to the behavior of the link itself in the inelastic range.
From simple mechanics, it can be demonstrated that when e = 2.0Mp/l.p, the yield condi-
tion is balanced between shear and flexure. For values less than 1.6Mp/l.p, the link behavior
is generally controlled by shear, whereas values greater than 2.6Mp/l.p are controlled by
flexure. For link lengths between 1.6Mp/l.p and 2.6Mp/l.p, a combination of shear and flex-
ural yielding occurs. Because shear yielding is much more reliable than flexural yielding, it
is generally considered advantageous to keep link lengths short enough to be controlled by
shear. With this in mind, a target value of 1.6Mp/l.p is used for the link length, e. To achieve
yp(rad)
this, many designers will start the design of the link using a value of I.3Mp/l.p. This allows
sorne flexibility in changing the link beam size and frame geometry while still maintaining
a final link length consistent with the 1.6Mp/l.p goaL
The Seismic Provisions address the ratio of Mp/l.p in relation to the overall ductility of 0.08
the frame by relating the link rotation angle 'Yp to the value of Mp/l.p in a given frame. Link
rotation angle is illustrated in Seismic Provisions Figure C-I-15.3. The Seismic Provisions
yp,= 0.1
note that for e < 1.6Mp/l.p the link rotation angle is limited to 0.08 radian, and for e >
2.6Mp/l.p the link rotation angle is limited to 0.02 radian. For values between these limits,
the link rotation angle should be interpolated. This is illustrated in Figure 3-26. Additional
link-design considerations apply when providing stiffener plates in the link zone. The 0.02
Seismic Provisions require stiffeners at each end of alllinks. Additionally, links of various
lengths have varying spacing requirements for such stiffeners. Note that for e> 5.0Mp/l.p,
no web stiffeners are required. o
When the frame is configured such that the link is directly adjacent to a column, there are Link Length, e
special requirements for the connection between the link and the column. The first of these
notes that the link-to-column connection must be capable of resisting the link rotation angle Figure 3-26. Maximum allowed link rotation vs. link length.
as prescribed by the Seismic Provisions based on link length. Additionally, the connection
must be able to develop the full value of the nominal shear strength, Vn , at such a rotation

AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL C01N"STRUCTI0l', !Ne.
3-110 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 EBF SYSTEM DESIGN EXAMPLES 3-111

angle. Furthennore, the connection is required to meet the requirements of moment con- EBF SYSTEM DESIGN'EXAMPLES
nections consistent with those as prescribed under the provisions for Special Moment When designing EBF systems, iterations are usually to obtain the best combination
Frames. The exception to this occurs when the connections are adequately reinforced such of compatible frame-member sizes. Qptimized deSigns are difficult to obtain, due tü
that beam yielding is forced to a location away from the face of the column and when the member local buckling requirements, geometric constraints, resistance of the beam outside
length of the link is less than 1.6Mp/~' In this case, the link length is defined as the length of the link to flexure combined with rutial effects, and archiú!qITrral constraints that cornmonly
from the end of the beam reinforcing to the end of the brace member. If the link-to-column occur throughout the design process. Nonetheless, EBF can be used to provide duc-
connection meets these requirements, prequalification of the connection is not required. tile and cost-effective solutions for seismic load resistance.
Full-depth stiffener plates are still required at the end of the link adjacent to the reinforced
beam section, however.
The Seismic Provisions require lateral bracing for both the top and bottom flanges of the
link beam at the ends of the link. These braces must be designed for 6 percent of the ratio Example 3.13. EBF Story' Drift Check
Mr/ho, where M r is as defined in Seismic Provisions Section 15.5, and ho is the depth
between centers of the flanges. It is also required that the braces have a stiffness that meets Gíven: Refer to the EBF elevation shown in Figure . The Applicable Building
Equation A-6-8 in the Specification. It should be noted that for the bottom flange this brac- Code specifies the use of AS CE 7 for drift recluijr·emlenlts. Determine if the third
ing cannot be assumed to be provided by the concrete floor system. Independent bracing is level of the frame satisfies the drift reqluir'emlen1~.
generally required in order to meet these requirements. From ASCE 7, the Occupancy Category is 1, thel Sejlsmic Desi~ Category is D,
Once the design of the link is complete, the remaining requirements are somewhat lim-
Cd = 4, 1 = 1.0.
ited. The remaining provisions address the design of the diagonal brace and beam segments
away from the link, the connections of the beams to the columns, and the strength of the So/utíon: From an elastic analysis pf the structure, the ;'T,tPir"t"",ru drift between the second
columns and the column base attachment to the foundation. and third levels is,
The first of these items considers the strength requirements of the diagonal brace and
beam outside the link zone. Because of the nature of the EBF system, the brace members Oxe = 0.175 in.
may be subject to large axial and flexural forces due to the rotations anticipated in the link
segmento With this in mind, the diagonal brace is required have a combined axial and flex- Per Seismic Provisions Section 3, th~ Design Drift and the story drift
ural strength equal to the forces generated by the expected nominal shear strength of the limits are those stipulated by the Applicable Codeo Frgm ASCE 7, the
link, Ry"n, multiplied by a factor of 1.25 to account for strain hardening. allowable story drift, da' is 0.025hw where hsx
The design of the beam away from the link zone is similar, and the beam is designed for
the expected nominal shear strength of the link multiplied by a factor of 1.1, differing only da = 0.025hsx = 0.025(12.5 ft)~12 in.lft) = 3.75 in.
slightly from the brace design requirements. This reduced strain-hardening factor accounts
for the increased member strength realized by having a concrete slab composite with the AS CE 7 defines the Design Story Drift as Ox' deflection of level x at the
beam outside of the link. If there is not a concrete slab composite with the beam outside of center of mass.
the link, a strain hardening factor of 1.25 should be considered (for additional infonnation
see Seismic Provisions Cornmentary Section C15.6). Additional lateral bracing along the
length of the beam, if required, is designed per Specification Appendix 6.
o= CdOxe (ASeE 7)
x 1
The connection of the brace to the beam is required to meet the same strength require-
ments as the brace member (Section 15.6a), plus it must also be designed for l.lRyPn of the
braceo The Seismic Provisions require this connection to be considered fully restrained (FR)
o = 4(0.175 in.)
x 1.0
if the connection is detailed such that the brace resists any portion of the link end momento
Additionally, the brace connection is not pennitted to extend into the link zone. This is illus- = 0.700 in. < 3.75 in.
trated in Seismic Provisions Cornmentary Figures C-I-15.4, C-I-15.5, and C-I-15.6.
The connection of the beam to the column away from the link may be designed as ox <da o.k.
pinned or fixed, provided the corresponding R-factors specified in the applicable building
code are used.
The columns of the EBF system must meet the requirements provided in Section 8 of the
Seismic Provisions. Additionally, the columns must be designed to resist the forces induced
into the column at either the beam or brace connection location as a result of 1.1 times the
expected nominal shear strength of the link, Ry"n, for alllinks aboye the level of the column.

AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Ne. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL COI~STlRUCTI4>N, !Ne.
3-112 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 EBF SYSTEM DESIGN EXAMPLES 3-113

W16x77 d = 16.5 in. Ag = 22.6 in.2

Example 3.14. EBF Link Design
1'= 0.760 in. Zx = 150 in.3
Given: Refer to Beam BM-l in Figure 3-27. Determine the adequacy of a W16x77
ASTM A992 wide-flange section (E;, = 50 ksi, Fu = 65 ksi) as the link segment From ASCE 7, Seismic Design Category is D, = 1.3 and SDS = 1.0 ..
for the following loading. The Applicable Building Code specifies the use of
0.2SDS = 0.2(1.0) = 0.2
ASCE 7 for calculation of loads.

Assume the brace-to-beam connection will be shown in Seismic Provisions

PD = 7.4 kips P =5.3 kips PQE = 5.5 kips
L Figure C-I-15.5. The brace wiIl be detailed as to the link in order to decrease
VD = 1.8 kips VI = 1.3 kips VQE= 84 kips the flexural demand on the beam outside of the Assume the brace will be a
WlO wide-flange section.
M D = 14.4 kip-ft M L = 9.6 kip-ft M QE = 168 kip-ft

So/ution: Determine the factored loads On the

Considering the load combinations given in 7, it was determined that the
governing load combination for the link is,

1.2D+ 1.0E +0.5L+0.2S

Pu =(1.2+0.2SDS )PD +PPQE +O.5PL +

Pu =1.4(7.4 kips~+1.3(5.5 ki~s)+0.5( .3kips)+0.2(0)

= 20.2 kips

Vu =(1.2+0.2SDS )VD +pVQE +0.5VL + .2Vs

Vu =1.4(1.8 kips) + 1.3(84 kips)+0.5(1 kips) + 0.2(0)

= 112 kips

Mu= (1.2 + 0.2SDS )M D +pMQ~ +0.5M +0.2Ms

M u = 1.4(14.4 kip-ft) + 1.3(168 kip-ft) + .5 (9.6 kip-ft) + 0.2( O)

= 243 kip-ft

Check geometry
Seismic Provisions Section 15.6b prohibits the ~xt.ens:ion of any portion of the
brace-to-beam connection within the link This section also requires
that the intersection of the centerlines of the and brace must occur at the
end of the link or within the link segment. the intersection will
occur at the end of the link for the connection and the geometry shown
BASE in Figure 3-27, the minimum depth of the link necessary to prec1ude the
WlO brace from extending inside the link is approximately 16 in.

Figure 3-27. EBF evelationfor Examples 3.13,3.14,3.15,3.16, and 3.17. d b > 16 in. o.k.

AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INc. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~sTR.uCTI~N, !Nc.
 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 ,EBF SYSTEM DESIGN EXAMPLES
3-114 3-115

To accornmodate the connection, the link beam flange width must be greater Determine the shear strength ,of the
than or equal to the brace flange width. Assuming that the maximum flange
width of'the WlO brace is 10 in., 0.15Py = 0.15Fy Ag = 0.15(50 ksi)(22.

bj > 10 in. o.k.

Alternatively, from Table 3-1 for a W16x77,
Check link element slenderness
0.15Py = 170 kips
Per Seismic Provisions Section 15.2a, the stiffened and unstiffened elements of
links shall comply with Seismic Provisions Table I-8-1.
The width-thickness ratio for the flanges is,
With Pu < 0.15Py , Seismic Provisions Section 1 allows the effect ofthe axial
force on the link shear strength to be ignored. For this case the nominal shear
Aj =.!!.!..-= 6.77 . (Specification B4.1)
strength of the link is defined as the lesser of por 2Mp /e. Seismic Provisions
2tf
Section 15.2b defines Y¡, as,
From Seismic Provisions Table 1-8-1, for flange compactness,
Vp = 0.6Fyw Aw

A =0.30j!i=0.30 29,000 ksi =7.22 where,

ps F 50 ksi
y
Aw =( d b - 2t j)tw =[ 16.5 in.- 2( 0.7 in.) J0.455 in.=6.82 in. 2
Since Al < Aps, the flanges meet the local buckling requirements.
2
The widtb-thickness ratio for the web is, Vp =0.6(50 kf)( 6.82 in. )=205

h
A =-=31.2 (Specification B4.2) Mp = FyZX =(50 ksi)150 in. 3 =7,500
W t
W

Pu = 20.2 kips = 0.0199 Alternatively, from Table 3-1 for a W16x77,

0.9Fy Ag 0.9(50 ksi)( 22.6 in.2 )
Y¡, = 204 kips
With Ca < 0.125, from Seismic Provisions Table I-8-1, for web compactness,
Mp = 7,500 kip-in.

Aps =3.14~(1-1.54C)
F a
y
2M
p 2( 7,500 ~.-kiPS)
=3.14 29;~0~siksi [1-1.54(0.0199)J e 48 in.
313 kips

=73.3
2M
Since Aw < Aps, the web meets the local buckling requirements.
$Vn =$V ::;; $--p
p e
=0.90( 205kips )::;;0.90( 313 kips)
=185 kips

AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~sTR:UCTIbN, !Nc.
3-116 BRACED FR.AME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 EBF SYSTEM DESIGN EXAMPLES
3-117

Check link rotatíon angle The Seismic Provisions Commentarjr Section 15.2 suggests that fue plastic
Seismic Provisions Section 15.2c specifies a maximum link rotation angle story drift conservatively can be assumed to the design story drift. Using
based on the expected behavior of the link. The expected link behavior is deter- the design story drift determined in Example 3 3,
mined by comparing the link length to multiples of MplV¡;.
e = 0.700 in. _
p 12.5 ft(12 in.lft) - 0.00467 rad

30 ft( 12 in.lft)
Altematively, the aboye equation can be rearranged, yielding, 'Y (0.00467 rad)=0.03
p 48 in.
'Y p < 0.08 rad o.k.

The W16x77 is adequate to resist the loads for the link segment of
For the link being investigated,
BeamBM-l.

Vpe 205 kips( 48 in.)

l.31<l.6 Check lateral bracíng requírements
M 7,500 kip-in.
p Seismic Provisions Secti,on 15.5 requires that beam flanges at each end of
the link be braced to resist the following force:
A value les s than 1.6 indicates that the link behavior will be dominated by shear
yielding. Ru =0.06Ry Fy ZI ho

= 0.06( l.1)( 50 ksi)( 150 in. 3 ) / (16.5' - 0.760 in.)

Altematively, from Table 3-1 for a WI6x77,
=3l.5 kips
M
l.6 -E.. = 58.7 in.
Vp Top and bottom flange bracing with a strength greater than 31.5
kips will be provided at each end of the link s~~:numt.
e = 48 in. < 58.7 in.; therefore link behavior is dominated by shear yielding.
Check stiffener requírements
Seismíc Provisions Section 15.3 requi~es UUIJ.DlIe!-SlLUel(l. full-depth stiffeners at
The corresponding limit on the link rotation angle for this type of expected link each end of the link. The ininimum required of each of the stiffep.ers is,
behavior is 0.08 radian. Seismic Provisions Figure C-I-15.3 defines the link
rotation angle as, _ 10.3
. -_ b¡ - 2tw _ in.-_
2(0.455 in.)
w mzn - -_ __ ....t...
~

2 2

The mínimum required thickness is,

where,
t . =0.75t ~ 3/ in.
~ mm 78 w
ep = 1
h =0.75(0.455 in.)~}{ in.

=0.341 in.~ }{ in.

=}{ in.

AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTlON, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CmlsTRuCTIOr-t, !Ne.
3-118
BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTll..IZING R > 3 EBF SYSTEM DESIGN EXAMPLES
3-119

Altematively, from Table 3-1 for a W16x77, Altematively, from Table 3-1 for a W16x77,

w . = 9.39 in. = 4.70 in.

W
min
=4.70 in.
mm 2
1/.
tmin= /2 In.

FuU-deptb, lf2-in. x 43/4-in. intermediate stiffeners will be provided

Full-deptb, 3/s-in. x 43/4-in. stiffeners will be provided on botb sides of tbe witbin tbe link segment, on one side of web only and at a maximum
web at eacb end of tbe link segmento spacing of 17.9 in.
Seismíc Provisions Section 15.3 also requ.ifes full-depth intermediate web stiff- Note that it may be beneficial to also use -thick material for the link end
eners within the link segmento Since the length of the link is less than 1.6Mp /Vp, stiffeners in order to simplify the detailing fabrication of tbe li~.
the spacing requirements for intermediat~ web stiffeners are as follows:
Seismic Provisions Section 15.3 also specifies the required strength of the
for a link rotation angle equal to 0~08 radian, welds connecting the link stiffeners to the web is FyAst' and ofthe welds
connecting the link stiffeners to the link is 15,Ast /4. For the lf2-in.-thick
stiffener, the area of the stiffener is, .
30tw -d/ 5=30 ( 0.455 in. ) - ( - 5in.)
16.5 - = 104.
. m.
A st =0.5 in.(4.75 in.) = 2.38 in?
for a link rotation angle equal to 0.02 radian or less,
Assuming a 23/8-in. clip along the web to with AWS D 1.8, the double-
16.5 in.) 204. sided fillet weld size required to connect the stiffeners to the link web is,
52tw - d/5 = 52 ( 0.~55 in. ) - ( - - 5 - = . In.

Altematively, from Table 3-1 for a W16x77,

d .
30t --=10.4 m.
w 5

d .
52t --=20.4 In.
w 5 = 3.01 sixteenths

Checking Specification Table 12.4, with the v.tt·..J..J·-IU. link web thickness, the
Interpolating between these limits using the calculated link rotation angle, the minimum fillet weld size is 3116 in.
maximum spacing between web stiffeners is 17.9 in.
Use double-sided, 1/4-in. fillet welds to tbe link stiffeners to tbe
With a link depth less than 25 in., the intermediate stiffeners are only required link web.
on one side of the web only. The mínimum required thickness of the interme-
diate web stiffeners is, Assuming a 3/4-in. clip along the flange to the stiffeners to clear the
fillets, the double-sided fillet weld size reqluuedlto connect the link stiffeners to
- >Ys.m.
tmm. -tw - 8
the link flanges is,

=0.455 in.~ Ys in.

F
D=~----------~~---- ____~
=0.455 in. 4( 2)( 1.392'kipslin.

The required width of the intermediate stiffeners is,

w . =b¡
--t =10.3
- -in.
- -0455·
. 470 In.
In.=. .
mm 2 w 2
= 1.92 sixteenths
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTlTUTE OF STEEL Cm-¡STRUCTlPN, !Nc.
 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 EBF SYSTEM DESIGN EXAMPLES 3-121
3-120

Checking Specification Table J2.4, with the 112-in. stiffener plate thickness, the The resulting link end i moment bas~d on expected shear strength of the
mínimum fillet weld size is 3116 in. link is,

Use double-sided, 31t6-in. tillet welds to connect tbe link stiffeners to the
link flanges. M; 1.IR V e
n
248 kips
---2~-.j.!..=5,950 kip-in.

Note that it may be beneficial to also use double-sided, 1/4-in. fillet welds to
From Example 3.14, the brace-to-beam will be detailed as a fixed
connect the link stiffeners to the link flange in order to simplify the detailing
connection; therefore, the moment at the of the link will be distributed
and fabrication of the link.
between the brace and the beam outside of link. One way to determine the
portion of this moment resisted by the beam of the link: is based on
Example 3.15. EBF Beam Outside of the Link Design relative member stiffness. Since the modulus elasticity is the same for both
members, it can be neglected in the stiffness . . Using relative mem-
Given: Refer to Beam BM-1 in Figure 3-27. Determine the adequacy of the ASTM ber stiffness to distribute the link end: moment, portion of the moment taken
A992 wide-flange (F'y = 50 ksi, Fu = 65 ksi) link segment selected in Example by the beam outside of 'the link (bol) is,
3.14 as the beam outside of the link for the following loading. The Applicable
Building Code specifies the use of ASCE 7 for calculation of loads.

PD = 1 kip PL = 0.7 kips PQE = 105 kips

VD =6.8 kips VL = 4.8 kips VQE = 8.7 kips

MD = 17 kip-ft M L = 11.3 kip-ft M QE = 113 kip-ft

W16x77 Ag = 22.6 in. 2 Ix = 1,110 in. 4 1,110 in. 4

85.4:
13 ft
From ASCE 7, Seismíc Design Category is D, p = 1.3, and SDS = 1.0.
4
0.2SDS= 0.2(1.0) = 0.2
l2L = 716 in. = 39.8
Lbr 18,.0 ft '

Assume the braces are WlOx112, the columns will be W14 wide-flange sections,
and the flanges of Beam BM-1 are braced at the columns.
85.4 = 0.682
Ibol + Ibr 85.4 + 39.8
WlOxl12 Ix = 716 in. 4
Lbol Lbr

So/ution: Determine the factored loads

Per Seismíc Provisions Section 15.6b, the required strength of the beam outside 1.1 RyVn
of the link is a combination of the factored gravity forces plus the forces gener-
ated by 1.1 times the expected shear strength of the link, RyVn · From Example
3.14, the nominal shear strength of the link is 205 kips.

1.1RyVn = 1.1 (1.1)( 205 kips) = 248 kips

The geometry of the column, brace, half-beam, and ha1f-link is shown in

Figure 3-28. The axial force in the beam outside of the link based on the
expected shear strength of the link is,

1.1RyVn L 248 kips(30 ft) .

PE = = ( ) = 298 klpS
2h 2 12.5 ft Figure 3-28. Diagram for

AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL COI'iSTItuClnON, !Nc.

AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc.
3-122 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTlLIZING R > 3 EBF SYSTEM DESIGN EXAMPLES 3-123

I
Usihg this method, the beam outside of the link is assumed to take 68.2 percent
Vu = (1.2+0.2S DS )VD + VE +Q.5VL +0
of the link end momento The moment in the beam outside of the link is then,
Vu = 1.4( 6.8 kips) + 25.7 kips + 0.5( 4.8 s)+0.2(0)
M E=0.682(5,950 kips )=4,060 kip-in.=338 kip-ft
= 37.6 kips

Altematively, a method based oh the calculation of a link shear overstrength M u =(1.2+0.2SDS:)M D +ME +0.5M L
factor can be used. In this rnethod" the strain hardened expected yield strength Mu = 1.4(17 kip-ft) + 333 kip-f~ + 0.5 (11
of tlte link is dlvided by the link shear generated by the code-specified earth-
quake forces. The resulting overstrength factor is used to amplify the remaining = 362 kip-ft
member end forces generated by th~ analysis using the code-specified earthquake
loading. The link shear force obtained from analysis using the code-prescribed Check beam element s/enderness
seismic forces is, From Example 3.14, the' flanges are compacto width-thickness ratio for the
web is,
h
A =-=31.2 (Specification B4.2)
W t
The resulting overstrength factor is, W

From Specification Table B4.1,

1.lRy Vn 248 kips
---= =2.95
VQE 84 kips
AP =3.76f,
F
y
The moment in the beam outside of the link due to the link mechanism is,
=3.76 29,000 ksi
ME = 2.95M QE = 2.95(113 kip-ft)= 333 kip-ft
50 ksi

The axial force in the beam outside of the link due to the link mechanism is, =90.6

PE = 2.95PQE == 2.95 (105 kips) = 310 kips Since Aw < Ap , the web ineets the local

The shear in the béam outside of the link due to the link mechanism is, Determine unbraced length
From Example 3.14, each end ofthe lilJlk will be A nominal column depth
VE= 2.95VQE = 2.95(8.7 kips) = 25.7 kips
of 14 in. will be assumed. Therefore, the unl)rru;~ length of the beam outside of
the link is,
Note that the forces generated by the two methods are very similar. Since the
beam outside of the link she~ has already been determined, the forces gener-
ated using the overstrength factor method will be used in the calculation of
factored loads.
Considering the load coIhbinations given in ASCE 7, it was determined that the _ 30 ft(12 in./ft).,...48 in;~14 in.
governing load combination for the beam outside of the link is, 2
= 149 in. = 12.4 ft
1.2D + 1.0E + 0.5L + 0.2S
Consider second-order effects
Pu = (1.2 + 0.2SDS )PD + PE + 0.5PL + 0.2Ps
e
Pu = 1.4(1 kips) + 310 kips + 0.5(0.7 kips) + 0.2(0) (Specification C2.2)

= 312 kips

AMERICAN !NSTITU1E OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NstrruTE OF STEEL··COINSTRUCn01N, !Nc.

3-124 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 :ijBF SYSTEM DESIGN EXAMPLES 3-125

Since the ends are not pennitted to translate, B2 = 1.0. pPr +bxrx
M +byry
M =0.374+0.566+0
=0.940<1.0
Assuming K = 1.0,
2 The W16x77 is adequate to resist :the given for the beam outside of
1t EI
P =-- the link segments ofBeam BM-1. Additiolllallltlallge bracing is not,required.
el (KLt
1t
2
(29,000 ksi)( 1,110 in.4 ) Example 3.16. EBF Brace Design

Given: Refer to Brace BR-l in Figure 3-27. Select ASTM A992 wide-flange sec-
[1.0(149 in.)y tion (F'y = 50 ksi, Fu = 65 ksi) to resist the tlJUlOW'1llg loads. The Applicable
=14,300 kips Building Code specifies the use of AS CE 7 calculation of loads.

Since there is transverse loading of the beam outside of the link between sup- PD =11.8 kips PL = 8.3 kips PQe = 136 kips .
ports, Cm = 1.0.
VD = 0.2 kips VL = 0.12 kips VQe = 3.02 kips
Pr =Pnt + Bitt "'" B2 Pu
M D = 3.2 kip-ft M L = 2.2 kip-ft M Qe = 54.5 kip-ft
= 1.0(312 kips)
= 312 kips From ASCE 7, Seismic Design Category is D, p = 1.3, and SDS = 1.0.

B 1.0 1.02 0.2SDS = 0.2(1.0) = 0.2

ll_(1.0(312kiP S)]
14,300 kips Assume that link segment and beam outside of the link segments are those
selected in Examples 3.14 and 3.15 and that column-end of the brace is
M rx = B1Mnt +B2MJt ""'B1Mu pinned and braced against translation for both X-X and y-y axes.
= 1.02( 362 kip-ft )
=369 kip-ft So/ution: Determine the factored loads
Per Seismic Provision~ Section 15.6a, the strength of the brace is a
combination of the factored gravity forces the forces generated by 1.25
Check combined loading
times the expected shear strength of the RyVn . From Example 3.14, the
Using Manual Table 6-1 for combined loading with K.Ly = Lbx = 13 ft,
nominal shear strength of the link is 205 kips.
p = 1.32 X 10-3 kips-l bx = 1.72 X 10-3 (kip_ft)-l
1.25RyVn = 1.25 (1.1)( 205 kips) = 282
Per Seismic Provisions Section 15.6(b), the design strengths of the beam out-
Using the overstrength factor method des:cnlbep in Example 3.15 with the link
side of the link are pennitted to be increased by Ry.
shear force, VQe , as in Example 3.15, the factor is,
1.32 x 10-3 kips-l(312 kips) 0.374
_1._2_5R....::y~V._n = 282 kips = 3.36
1.1
VQe 84 kips

1.72 xl 0-3 (kiP_ft)-l (362 kip-ft ) The moment in the brace due to the link mech~nis:m is,
0.566
1.1
= 183 kip-ft

Since Pr > 0.2,

Pe

AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL COll/STItUcjl0N, !Nc.
3-126 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 EBF SYSTEM DESIGN EXAMPLES 3-127

The axial force in the brace due to the link mechanism is, From Specification Table B4.1, for flange cOIinp~.ctllless,

PE = 3.36PQE = 3.36(136 kips) = 457 kips

A =0.38/f
P Fy
The shear in the brace due to the link mechanism is,
=0.38 29,000 ksi
VE = 3.36VQE = 3.36( 3.02 kips) = 10.1 kips SO ksi
=9.15
Considering the load combinations given in ASCE 7, the governing load com-
bination for the brace is,
Since A¡ < Ap, the flanges meet the local requirements.
1.2D + 1.0E + L + 0.2S
(Specification B4.2)
Pu = (1.2 + 0.2SDS )PD + PE + 0.5PL + 0.2Ps
From Specification Table B4.1, for web cornpalctness,
Pu = 1.4(11.8 kips) + 457 kips + 0.S(8.3 kips) + 0.2(0)
= 478 kips
A =3.76/f
P F
y
Vu = (1.2 + 0.2SDS )VD + VE +0.5VL +0.2VS
= 3.76 29,000 ksi
Vu =1.4(0.2 kips) + 10.1 kips+0.S(0.12 kips)+0.2(0) 50 ksi
= 10.4 kips = 90.6

Mu= (1.2+0.2SDS )M D +ME +O.SM L +0.2Ms Since Aw < Ap, the web meets fue local bUCklrnlgl requirements.
M u= 1.4( 3.2 kip-ft) + 183 kip-ft + 0.5 (2.2 kip-ft) + 0.2( O)
= 189 kip-ft Alternatively, using Table 1-2, it can be seen the WlOx112 will satisfy
the local buckling reqüirements for an EBF
To be consistent with the assumptions used in Examples 3.14 and 3.15, try a
WlOx112 for the braceo
Determine unbraced length
WlOx112 Ag = 32.9 in.2 d = 11.4 in. tw = 0.755 in.
Ix = 716 in. 4 Lb = ~(12.5 ft)2 + (13 ftf = 18.0 ft = 21

Check brace element slenderness Note that the unbraced length is based on the point-to-work point distance.
Per Seismic Provisions Section lS.6, the stiffened and unstiffened elements of Shorter lengths may be used provided the lateral is adequate at each end
EBF braces shall comply with Ap from Specification Table B4.1. of the assumed brace length.
The width-thickness ratio for the flanges is,
Consider second-order effects
b¡
A¡=-=4.17 (Specification B4.1) e
2t¡ (Specification C2-2)

AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCI'ION. !Nc. AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL COrilSTFlUCl10ji!. INc.
3-128 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTlLIZING R > 3 ' EBF SYSTEM DESIGN EXAMPLES
3-129

Since the ends are not permitted to translate, B 2 = 1.0.

Since Pr > 0.2,
Assuming K = 1.0, Pe

2
1t E! pPr +bxrx
M +byry
M =0.516+0.325+0
P =--
el (KL)2 =0.841<1.0 o.k.
2 4
1t (29,000 ksi)( 716 in. ) Check shear strength

[1.0(216in.)y
2.24{ E =2.24 29,000 ksi =54.0
=4,390 kips Fyw 50 ksi

O kip-ft/ )
Cm = 0.6 - 0.4 ( /189 kip-ft Since h/t w <2.24~E/Fyw'
=0.6
Vn = 0.6F~AwCv (Specification G2-1)
Pr =Pnt +B2 l[t ~B2Pu
= 1.0(478 kips) Cv =1.0 , (Specification G2-2)

= 478 kips
CPVn =1.0(0.6)(50 ksi)(Ü.4 in.)(o. in.)(1.0)
Therefore,
=258 kips>1O.4 kips
B 0.6 >1.0
1 1_((1.0)(478 kipS)]
4,390 kips Altematively, using Table 4-2 (CP = 1.00) for

=0.673<1.0
=1.0

M rx =B1Mnt +B2 M lt -=B1 M u

= 1.0( 189 kip-ft)
The WI0x112 is adequate to resist the loads
=189 kip-ft

Check combined loading

Example 3.17. EBF Column Design
Using Manual Table 6-1 for combined loading with KLy = Lbx = 18 ft, Given: Refer to Column C-1 in Figure 3-27. Select Ul~I""U'.LH A992 wide-flange sec-
..

tion (F'y = 50 ksi, Fu = 65 ksi) to resist the loading between the base
p = 1.08 X 10-3 kips-l bx = 1.72 X 10-3 (kip-ft)-l
and second leve!. The Applicable Building specifies the use of ASCE 7
P for calculation of loads.
....L.= pP =1.08 x 10-3 kips-1 (478 kips) = 0.516
P
e
r PD = 151 kips PL =46 kips PQE = 172 kips
M Dx = 15 kip-ft MLx = 9 kip-ft M QEX =O kip-ft
MDy =10 kip-ft MLy = 6 kip-ft M QEy =O kip-ft

AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcrION, !Nc.

AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~sn~ucrlQ>N, !Nc.
 3-130 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 EBF SYSTEM DESIGN EXAMPLES
3-131

From ASCE 7, Seismic Design Category is D, no = 2.0, P = 1.3, and SDS = 1.0. Try a W14x99.

0.2SDS = 0.2(1.0) = 0.2 Ag = 29.1 in. 2 Ix = 1,110 in. 4 Iy = 402 in. 4

Assume that ends of the column are pinned and braced against translation for Check Pu/</>Pn
both the X-X and y-y axes and that the beam at the third level and brace From Manual Table 4-,..1 with L = 14 ft,
between the second and third levels are as designed in Examples 3.14, 3.15, and
3.16. The sum of the nominal shear strengths for the links at the fourth level and <l>cPn = 1,130 kips
the roof is 318 kips. P
_u_ 458 kips
OA05
Solution: Determine the factored loads
Using the basic load combinations in AS CE 7, the governing load combination Per Seismic Provisions, Section 8.3, since P. > 0.4, the special seismic load
for the column in compression is, combinations that incltide the Amplífied Load effects must be used to
determine the required axial compression and strengths of the column.
1.2D + 1.0E+ L +0.2S However, the adequacy of the column to these axialloads is permitted to
be evaluated in the absence of any applied
Pu =(1.2+0.2SDS )PD +PPQE +0.5PL +0.2Ps

Pu = 1.4(151 kips) + 1.3(172 kips) + 0.5(46 kips) + 0.2(0) = 458 kips Determine factored loads based on seismic load
The required compressive strength of fue
Mu= (1.2 + 0.2SDS )M D +pM QE +0.5ML +0.2M s Load effects is,

Pu = (1.2 + 0.2SDS )PD +nOPQE

Mux = 1.4 (15 kip-ft)+ 1.3(0)+0.5(9 kip-ft )+0.2(0)
= 25.5 kip-ft Pu =1.4(151 kips) + 2.0(172 )+0.5(46 kips) + 0:2(0)
= 578 kips
Muy = 1.4(10 kip-ft) + 1.3(0) + 0.5 (6 kip-ft) +0.2( O)
= 17.0 ft-kips The required tensile strength of the column . the Amplified Seismic Load
effects is,
And the goveming load combination for the column in tension is,
TU = (0.9 - 0.2SDS )PD + noPQE
0.9D+l.0E+l.6H Tu = 0.7(151 kips)+2.0(-172

Tu = (0.9 - 0.2SDS )PD + PPQE + 1.6PH = -238 kips

Tu =0.7(151 kips) + 1.3(-172 kips) + 1.6(0) Determine required column strength Seismic Provisions
Section 15.8
= -118 kips
Seismic Provisions Section 15.8 requires that column must resist the forces
M u =(0.9-0.2SDS)M D +pM QE +1.6M H generated by the sum of the strain hardened ....J\.p''P......~u yield strengths of the links
aboye the level of the column top in addition to factored gravity forces. From
Mux = 0.7( 15 kip-ft)+ 1.3(0) + 1.6(0) Example 3.14, the nominal shear strength ofthe at the third level is 205 kips.
By calculations not shown here, it wás that the sum of the nominal
= 10.5 kip-ft shear strengths of the links at the fourth level roof is 318 kips. Therefore, the
sum of the strain hardened expected yield of the links at the third level,
MUY =0.7(10 kip-ft) + 1.3(0)+ 1.6(0) fourth level, and roof is,
= 7.00kip-ft

~'i
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc.
AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~STIluC1t>N, !Nc.
~
....
 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 EBF SYSTEM DESIGN EXAMPLES 3-133
3-132

Using the goveming load combination for the column in compression,

Pe1y = Pelx [ ; : } 1;300
4
J
402 in. 4 = 4, 080 kips
Pu = (1.2 + 0.2SDS )PD + PE + 0.5PL + 0.2Ps 1,110 in.
ex= 1.0
Pu =1.4(151 kips) + 633 kips + 0.5( 46 kips) + 0.2(0)
= 867 kips Pr =Pnt +B2Ptt ::=B2Pu (Specification C2-2)
Pr = 1.0(867 kips)
Mux =25.5 kip-ft
=867 kips
Muy = 17.0 kip-ft
Assume Cmx = Cmy = :1.0. Since th~ are so small, this cQnservative
Using the governing load combination for the column in tension, assumption will not affect the economy of designo From Specification
Section C1.3a and Commentary Table K = 1.0 for both the X-X and
Y-Yaxes.
Tu =(0.9 - 0.2SDS )PD + PE + 1.6PH
Therefore,
Tu = 0.7(151 kips) + (-633 kips) + 1.6(0 kips)

= -527 kips 1.0 . _ ) ~1.

1- 867 kips
( 11 ,300 kips
M ux = 10.5 kip-ft
=1.08;:::1.0
Muy = 7.00 kip-ft
B 1.0
Comparing anload combinations calculated to this point, the load combination ly 1- ( 867 kips. »1.0
that govems the design of the column is, 4,080 kips
=1.27~1.0
Pu = 867 kips Mux=25.5 kip-ft Muy = 17.0 kip-ft
M r =B1Mnt +B2 Mtt ::=BIMu
Consider second-order effects Mr.x =~lMux =1.08(25.5 =27.5 kip-ft

Mry = BIMuy =1.27( 17.0 =21.6 kip-ft

Check combined loading

Using Manual Table 6-1 for combined with KLy = Lbx = 14 ft,
Calculations not shown here confirm that this column is not subject to transla-
tion. Therefore, B2 = 1.0. p = 0.886 X 10-3 kips-l bx = 1.38 X 10-3 (kip-ft)-l
by = 2.85 X 10-3 (kip-ft)-l

P 3
; = PPr = 0.886 X10- kips (867 kips) = 0.768
e

- ----.EL J=b M =138XlO-3 (

8(M I
9 M x r.x .
ex

. = 11,300 kips

AMERICAN lNsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, lNc. AMERICAN lNsTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~sTR:ucrtoN. lNc.
 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 EBF SYSTEM DESIGN EXAMPLES
3--134 3--135

Determine the brace web force

~(Mry
9 M
J=b M =2.85X10-3(kip-ftr1(21.6kip-ft)=0.0616
ry y
It will be assumed that the entire shear will be taken by the web.
cy
Vw = Vu = 10.4 kips
¡
Since Pr > 0.2, Design brace flange connection
Pe
From Example 3.14, the brace-to-b~am corm41cticm was assumed to be as shown
pPr +bx M r.x +by M ry =0.768+0.0380+0.0616
in Seismic Provisions Figure C-I-15.5. Íhe must be detailed as fixed to
= 0.868 < 1.0 o.k. the link in order for this assumption to be Try a fully welded connection.
The W14x99 is adequate to resist the loads given for Column C-l between The axial force in the brace flanges is too for a single-sided :fillet weld to be
the base and second level. economical. Additionally, because the angle the brace and the beam is less
than 60°, there is not a prequalified fillet weld detail. Try· a complete-
joint-penetration groove weid to connect the flanges to the beam flange.
Example 3.18. EBF Brace-to-Link Connection Design
From Specification Table J2.5, the strength the weld is based on the strength
Refer to Joint J-1 in Figure 3-27. Design the connection between Brace BR-1 and of the base material. The yield strehgth of flange is,
Gíven:
Beam BM-1. Use ASTM A36 material (Fj = 36 ksi, Fu = 58 ksi) for all plate mate-
<j>Rn =0.90Fy bl
rial and 70-ksi electrodes for all welds. Assume that the link, beam outside of the f
link, and brace are as designed in Examples 3.14, 3.15, and 3.16, respectively. = 0.90(50 ksi)( 10.4 in.)(1.25 in.)
WlOx112 d = 11.4 in. A g = 32.9 in. 2 t/= 1.25 in. =585 kips>:462 kips
b/= 10.4 in. Ix = 716 in.
<j>Rn > PI o.k..
W16x77 tw = 0.455 in. d = 16.5 in. t¡= 0.760 in.
b/= 10.3 in. k = 1.16 in. Check concentrated forces at brace connection
The vertical component of the flange force
From Example 3.16 for the design of the brace,

P u =478 kips Vu = 10.4 kips Mu = 189 kip-ft V =462 kiPs(12.5 ftJ=321 kips
f 18 fti

So/ution: Determine the brace flange force The local yielding strength of the beam web the brace flange connection is,
Assuming the axial force is resisted entirely by the flanges, the force in each
flange due to axial load is, <j>Rn =1.0(5k+N)Fyww
t (Specification 110-2)

Pu 478 kips 239 kips =1.0[5(1.16 in.)+1.25 in.J(50 ksi)( .455 in.)
Pfa=-;¡= 2
=161kips<321 kips
Assuming the entire moment will be taken by the flanges, the force in each flange =161kips
due to the moment is,

M
P = __u_ =
l189 kip-ft(12 in./ft)j = 223 kips With the concentrated force applied at a from the beam end that is greater
ff d -tf 11.4 in.-1.25 in. thaIi dl2, the beam web crippling strength at brace flange connection is,

The maximum resu1tant force in the flange is,

(Specification 110-4)
P = P + P = 239 kips + 223 kips = 462 kips
f fa ff

.AMERICAN INSTITIITE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INC. AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEa Cm-¡STRuCtION, INc .
3-136 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 EBF SYSTEM DESIGN EXAMPLES 3--137

The length of stiffener adjacent to the beam is,

Rn =(0.80)( 0.455)2[1 + 3(1.25.J(0.455 J1.5] 29,000(50)(0.760)
16.5 0.760 0.455 L=d-2(t¡ +1 in.)
=285 kips =16.5 in.-2(0.760 in.+l Di.)
=13.0 in.
<l>Rn =0.75(285 kips)
The minimum single-sided fillet weld .size to transfer the stiffener force
=214 kips<321 kips
to the web is,
<l>Rn < V¡ n.g.
80.0 kips
D.
mm
Beam web stiffeners are required adjacent to the brace flanges. 1.392 kipslin.(13.0 in.)

Use double-sided, 3/S-in. filIet welds to connect stiffener to the beam flanges
Size beam web stiffeners
and a single-sided, SI16-in. filIet weld to the stiffener to the beam web.
Using one stiffener on each side of the beam web, the portion of the vertical
component of the brace flange force to be taken by each stiffener is,
Design the brace web connectíon
Try a 3/s-in. x 4-in. x O-ft 6-in. single:-plate with 5116-in. fillet welds
to connect the plate to the beam and braceo By this connection will
be adequate to transfer the resultant load of 10 kips.
The maximum width of each stiffener adjacent to the beam flange is,
The final connection design and geómetry is in Figure 3-29.
b= X(b¡-t w ) I

= X(1O.3 in.-0.455 in.)

=4.92 in. W16x77 BEAM

Try a 43/4-in.stiffener width with l-in. x l-in. comer clips. The stiffener thick-
ness required to develop the required force through yielding is,

t . Ps 80.0 kips 0.658 in.

mm 0.90Fl 0.90(36ksi)(3}{ in.) K

Note that one flange of each brace frames into the beam at the end of the link
segmento In Example 3.14, the Seismic Provisions requirements resulted in a
3/ s-in. minimum thickness for the stiffeners at the end of the link. ~ 3/8"x4"xO'-6" W/
BOLTS AS REQ'D
Use 3/4-in. x 43/4-in. full-depth stiffeners on each side of the beam at the FOR ERECTION
locations where abrace flange intersects the beam flange. LOADS ---+-c?"

Design stiffener welds

Using the increased strength allowed for transversely loaded fillet welds per
Specification Appendix Section J2.4, the mínimum double-sided fillet weld size
required to transfer the required stiffener load from the flange to the stiffener is,

D.
80.0 kips . SIXteenth S
511·
mm
2( 1.5)(1.392 kipslin.)( 3 }{ in.) Figure 3-29. Connection as designed in
AMERICAN !NSTITlfI'E OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL C01'lSTFmCll1óN, !Nc.
 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 EBF SYSTEM DESIGN EXAMPLES 3-139
3-138

The brace force need not exceed that to develop the strain-hardened
Example 3.19. EBF Brace-to-Beam/Column Connection expected yield strength of the link at the level. The shear in the beam
Design outside of the link must be transferred the column.
Considering the load cornbinations given in 7, it was determined that the
Gíven: Refer to Joint J-2 in Figure 3-27. Design the connection between brace, beam,
governing load combination for the design of connection is,
and column. Use ASTM A572 Grade 50 material (F'y = 50 ksi, Fu = 65 ksi) for
all plate material and 70-ksi electrodes for all welds. Assume that the beam is as l.2D + 1.0E + 0.5L + O.2S
designed in Ex&mple 3.15, the brace size is the same as that detennined in
Example 3.16, and the column is as designed in Example 3.17. The Applicable and the goveming earthquake load case causes in the braceo Assume
Building Code specifies the use of ASCE 7 for calculation of loads. the connection forces are as shown in Figure

From Example 3.15 for the design of the beam outside of the link,
Determine the required strength of
W16x77 F'y = 50 ksi Fu = 65 ksi tw = 0.455 in. Seismic Provisions Section 15.6a requires that brace have sufficient strength
to develop 1.25Ry Vn of the link. U sing the ov(~Ijstrength factor method described
bf = 10.3 in. t¡= 0.760 in. d = 16.5 in.
in Example 3.15, the overstrength factor for link shear is 2.95. The factored
k = 1.16 in. T= 13 1/4 in. forces at the connection due to the tJrace are,

From Example 3.16 for the design of the brace,

WlOxl12 F'y = 50 ksi Fu = 65 ksi T= 7 112 in. Po = 12.3 kips

tw = 0.755 in. Ag = 32.9 in.2 d = 11.4 in. ~Ft=6.7kiPS
YWT = 1.21 in. ~ Paff105kips
From Example 3.17 for the design of the column,

W14x99 F'y = 50 ksi Fu = 65 ksi tw = 0.485 in. VD= 0.2 kips

d = 14.2 in. k = 1.38 in. \{ = 0.1 kips
tf= 0.780 in.
"oE= -2.3 kips
From the ASCE 7, the Seismic Design Category is D, 0 0 = 2.0, and SDS = 1.0. Po = 1.3 kips L-------j.~ =46.1 o

0.2SDS =0.2(1.0) = 0.2

Fl. = 1.0 kips
PoE= 105 kips
Solutíon: To envelope the design, two conditions should be examined.

·~kiPS~========~
1. The brace force required to develop the strain-hardened expected yield
strength of the link at the fourth level must be transferred through the con- ~RAG
nection and into the column and beam outside of the link. Any additional =27kips
drag force required to develop the strain-hardened expected yield strength of
the link at the third level must be transferred through the beam-to-column
connection. The drag force need not exceed the amplified drag load. The W.P.
shear in the beam outside of the link must be transferred into the colurnn. VL = 3.0 kips

2. The amplified drag force must be transferred into the beam outside of the
=
VQE -8.7 kips

link. The additional brace force required to develop the strain-hardened

expected yield strength of the link at the third level rnust be transferred
through the connection and into the column and beam outside of the link. Figure 3-30. Connection forces for 3.19.

.AMERICAN lNsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, lNc. .AMERICAN lNS:rrruTE OF STEEL Cm~sTR:udION, lNc.
 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 EBF SYSTEM DESIGN EXAMPLES 3-141
3-140

Pu = (1.2 + 0.2SDS)PD + PQE + 0.5PL + 0.2PS

7.12 kips

P = 1.4( 12.3 kips )+2.95(105 kips )+0.5( S.7 kips )+0.2( O)

u
=331kips

Vu = (1.2 + 0.2SDS )VD + VE + 0.5VL + 0.2VS

36.5kips
V =1.4( 0.2 kips )+2.95( 2.3 kips )+0.5( 0.1 kips )+0.2( O)

F==~=~I
u
=7.12 kips 355kiPS--+
,.
Determine the required strength of the beam outside of the link
In Example 3.15, the beam outside of the link was designed to develop the
strain-hardened expected yield strength of the link at the third level. The strain-
hardening factor used in the design of the beam outside of the link was allowed
to be reduced from 1.25 to 1.1 due to the presence of a concrete slab compo-
site with the beam. However, the forces for which the beam outside of the link
was designed will need to be adjusted to reflect a strain-hardening factor of
1.25 for the connection designo From Example 3.16, the overstrength factor for
the link at the third level is 3.36. The factored forces at the connection due to
t
the beam outside of the link are,
(a) CON ITION 1
Pu = (1.2 + 0.2SDS )PD + PQE + 0.5PL + 0.2Ps

P
u
=1.4(1.0 kips) + 3.36(105 kips) + 0.5( 0.7 kips) + 0.2( O)
= 355 kips

Vu = (1.2 + 0.2SDS )VD + VE + 0.5VL + 0.2Vs

Vu =1.4(4.1 kips)+3.36(S.7 kips)+0.5(3.0 kips) + 0.2(0)

= 36.5 kips 36.5kips F==~=*=II

Determine the amplified drag force

The amplified drag force is,
355kiPS--+ ~--- ~54kips

Force diagrams for conditions 1 and 2 are shown in Figure 3-31. For the pur-
poses of this example, these forces will be assumed to be equal and opposite for
the condition of the brace in tension·. This is a conservative assumption for the
connection being designed in this example. However, this may not be a conser-
t
vative assumption for all connection geometries and loading conditions.

(b) ION 2

Figure 3-31. Force diagramsfor 3.19.

AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL COl'ISTRUCTI<l>N,lNC.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INc.

_ -_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ' _ . _ _ _ _ _ . " . _ _ _ _o
3-142 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 EBF SYSTEM DESIGN EXAMPLES 3-143

Determine the required strength of the brace-to-gusset

connection
2
Ant = 2.63 in. - (1 in. + Xin.)(0.7
Using the required strength of the brace, the resultant force on the connection is,
FuAnt = 65 kSi( 1.79 in.2 ) = 116 kips

0.6FuAnv = 0.6( 65 kSi)( 10.6 in.2 ) = 413

0.6FyAgv = 0.6 (50 ksi)( 16.5 in.2 ) = 495

Because this is less than Ru = 418 kips for condition 2, use Ru = 418 kips.

$Rn = $( 0.6FuAnv + Ubs~Ant ) ::; $

Determine the required number of bolts
Using Manual Table 7-1, the núnimum number of 1-in.-diameter ASTM A325X
$Rn = 0.75[ 413 kips + (1.0)(116 (Specification J4-5)
bolts required to develop Ru is,
::;0.75[ 495 kips+(1.0)'(116
Ru 418 kips
N. 5.91 bolts = 397 kips<459 kips
mm $rn 70.7 kipslbolt
=397kips
Try 8 bolts in standard holes with 3-in. spacing and 2-in. edge distance.

Check bearing strength of gusset plate Try changing the bolt spacing to 3112 in. and edge dislfUlce to 2 1/2 in.
Try an initial gusset pIate thickness equal to 3/4 in. Using Manual Table 7-5 for
1-in.-diameter bolts in standard holes, the design bearing strength of the plate
at each of the interior bolts is,
Xin.+3(3 X~.)J(0.75· .)=19.5 in. 2
Agv =2[ 2

Anv=195in. -2(3 X)(rin.+ X .)(0.75 in.)=13.6 in.

2 2
$rn= 113 kip/in.(0.75 in.) = 84.8 kips
Using Manual Table 7-6 for 1-in.-diameter bolts in standard holes, the design 0.6FuAnv = 0.6(65 ksi)( 13.6 in.2 ) = 530
bearing strength of the plate at each of the edge bolts is,
0.6FyAgv = 0.6(50 kSi)( 19.5 in~2) = 585
$rn=85.9 kips/in.(0.75 in.) = 64.4 kips
FyAgv + UbsFuAnt )
The total design bearing strength of the gusset pIate is,
(Specification J4-5)
$Rn = 6(84.8 kips) + 2{ 64.4 kips);::: 638 kips
$Rn =0.75[530 kips+(1.0)(116 kip
. ::;0.75[585 kips+(1.0)(116

Check block shear strength of gusset plate (for the 418 kips as = 485 kips ::;526 kips
a tensíon force) = 485 kips
Assume the bolt spacing is equal to 3 in., the edge distance is equal to 2 in., and
the gage is equal to 3 1/2 in.

2
See Figure 3-32 for inirial connecrion (yf'CITnP·trl!

Agv = 2[2 in.+3( 3 in.)J( 0.75 in.)= 16.5 in.

~Tr:onJ.... "'h
2
Anv =16.5 in. -2(3 X)(1 in.+ Ys in.)(0.75 in.)=10.6 in. 2 Check the compressíon buckling
As can be seen in Figure 3-32, the Whitmore
of the gusset
passes outside of the gus-
Agt=3 Xin.(0.75in.)=2.63in.2 set and into the beam flange. The width exceeds gusset thickness, and the full

AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL COl'ISTRUcrjON, !Nc.
3-144 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 EBF SYSTEM DESIGN EXAMPLES
3-145

Whitmore section can be used. The length of the Whitmore section is, Because Kl/r:S; 25, Fcr= Fy = 50 ksi. The strength of the gusset is,
Lw = 3}i in. + 2( 3)( 3}i in.)tan( 30°) = 15.6 in. <l>cPn =<l>FcrAg
The average unbraced length of the gusset plate is, =0.90(50 ksi)(15.6 in.)(0.75 in.)
=527 kips

L
8}{ in.+2
8
Ys in.+O 3.58 in.
3
__t__ 0.75 in. -O 217·
r- fU- fU -. ID.
Alternatively, Table 1-8 can be used. The length of the gusset in
compression is,
KL 0.65( 3.58 in.)
10.7 KL=0.65(3.58 in.)=2.33 in.
r 0.217 in.
Interpolating from Table 1-8 for a 3/4-in.-thick with KL = 2.33 in., the
compression buckling strength of the gusset is,

Use a 3/4-in.-thick gusset plateo

Select trial conneciion betwee'n

Use a pair of bolted WT-sections to connect brace to the gusset plateo The
flange width of the WT':'sections must be less or equal to the T-dimension
of the WlOx112 brace (T = 7.5 in.). Try (2)

d = 8.22 in. bf = 7.12 in. y = 1.94 in.

tw = 0.430 in. t¡= 0.715 in.

bfwr = 7.12 in. < Tbrace = 7 X in.

Check tension yielding strength of wn
tension force)
The tension yielding strength of the WT is,

<l>Rn = 0.90Fy Ag
= 0.90(50 kSi)(2)( 8.39 in.2 )
W16x77 W14x99 = 755 kips

<l>Rn >Ru o.k.

Figure 3-32. ¡nitial connection geometry for Example 3.19.

AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CorI!STIl~Ucrl<1>N, !Nc.
 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTlLIZING R > 3 EBF SYSTEM DESIGN EXAMPLES 3-147
3-146

Check tension rupture strength of WTs The web width-thickness limit from ~P€!CItlcalJ.f>n Table B4.1 is,
The net area of the WT-sections is,
A =0.75 JI =0.75 29,000 ksi = .1
An =2(Ag - 2dht¡) r VFy 50 ksi

= 2[ 8.39 in.2 -2(1?{6 in.+?{6 ill.)(0.715 in.)] dltw =8.22 in. I 0.430 in. = 19~1
2
= 13.6 in.

Since the WT webs are not connected to the brace, an effective area of the WT-
With dltw > Aro local buckling reduces the cOInll)I·ession strength.
sections needs to be detennined.

X
(Specification Table D3.1)
Check compression; strength of the
U=l--
l The unbraced length of each WT is 5 1/2 in.

= 1_1.94 in.
10.5 in.
KL = 0.65(5 Ji
in.)
2.23·
r 1.60 in.
= 0.815
Because Kl/ r = 25, F'cr = QsF'y. From Manual 1-8, Qs = 0.942.
Ae =UAn ::;;O.85Ag
2 F'cr = 0.942 (50 ksi) = 47.1 ksi
=0.815( 13.6 in} )::;;0.85(2)(8.39 in. )
$cPn =$FcrAg
= 11.1 in. 2 ::;; 14.3 in. 2 i
= 0.90( 47.1 ksi)( 2)( 8.39 in.2 )
=11.1 in. 2
=711 kips
The tension rupture strength of the WT-sections is,
$cPn > Ru o.k.
$Rn = 0.75FuAe
2
= 0.75(65 ksi)(11.1 in. ) b¡ = 7.12 in. = 0.866
d 8.22 in.
= 541 kips
Since b¡ld > 0.5 and t¡ltw > 1.10, flexural buckling need not be checked
per Specification Cornmentary Table C-E4.2.

Check element s/enderness of the WTs
The flange width-thickness limit frOIn Specification Table B4.1 is,
A =0.45~=0.45
r F
y
b¡12t¡ = 4.98
Check bearing strength of the WTs
Since the tensile strength of the WT-sections is to the tensile strength of
the gusset plate and the sum of the WT flange f:lll(;knessc~s is greater than the
29,000 ksi =10.8
gusset plate thickness, the bearing strength of WTs is adequate.
~Oksi
Check block shear rupture strength of
Since the tensile strength of the WT-s€(ctions is to the tensile strength of
the gusset plate and the shear and tensÜe areas the wr flanges in block shear
are each greater than the corresponding gusset the block shear rupture
strength of the wrs is adequate.
Use (2) WT8x25 to connect the beam web to

AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTlON, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL Cm{STRuCTlqN, !Nc.
3-148 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 EBF SYSTEM DESIGN EXAMPLES 3-149

Check bearing strength ot the brace web <PtPn =0.75FuAe

Since the tensile strength of the brace is equal to the tensile strength of the gus- 2
=0.75(65 ksi)( 25.0 in. ):
set plate and the brace web thickness is greater than the gusset plate thickness,
the bearing strength of the brace web is adequate. =1,220 kips>418 kips

Check block shear rupture strength ot the brace web

Since the tensile strength of the brace is equal to the tensile strength of the gus-
set plate and the brace web thickness is greater than the gusset plate thickness, Use (8) l-in.-diameter ASTM A32SX bolts standard boles to connect the
the block shear rupture strength of the brace web is adequate. WT-sections to tbe beam web. Use a 31h-in. 21/2-in. edge distance
and 31/2-in. gage for tbe bolts.
I
Check shear lag rupture strength ot brace
Determine gusset-to-beam cd/umn I"'nlnn,,,.,..+í,..,., interface torces
The net area of the brace is,
The forces at the gusset-to-bearn and interfaces are deter-
An =Ag -2(dh + X6 in}w mined using the geon;¡etry shown in Figure 3-32 and the Uniform Force
Method. It will be assumed that a l-in. clip in comer of the gusset will be
=32.9 in. 2 - 2( 1X in.)( 0.755 in.) necessary to clear a fillet weld on the top ofthe beam and a 3/4-in.-thick
bolted end-plate will be used to connect the and beam to the column.
=31.2 in. 2
eh = 8.25 in. ec = 7.10 in.
To detennine the connection eccentricity for shear lag, Specification Section
C-D3.3 requires that half of the flange and a portion of the web are treated as
an angle.
a = ~(20.5 in.-l in.-.% in.) + 1 in. .% in. = 11.1 in.

Conservatively ignoring the fillets, ~= ~(17.5 in.-l in.)+1 in.=9.25·

p =~,
_t¡l~ fi}i( %-t¡ )('~]
Using

a = (eb + P) tan e - ec

x= t¡lb;}t;(%-t¡] =(8.25 in.+9.25 in.)tan(46.1°)-

= 11.1 in.
10 in.

125 m.(~](~.in+ 0.75; m. (~-1.25 mt·75: m.] Since a = a, there is no moment at the beam column interface.

1.25 m. (10.~ m} 0.75; m. (11.~ m. -1.25 m.]

r = ~(a + ec )2 + (p + eb )2
= (11.1 in.+7.10 ini +(9.25 in. 8.25 ini
=2.10 in. = 25.2 in.

U=I-~ (Specification Table D3.1) 8.25 in. (

Vub =eb- Pu =--.- .)
418 kIps =136
1 r 25.2 ffi.

U=I- 2.10 in. =0.800 V PP =

=- 9.25 in. ( .)
- - 418 kips =153 klp .
10.5 in.
uc r u 25.2 in.

AMERICAN !NsTITU1E OF STEEL CONSTRucnON, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITU1E OF STEEL CmIjSTI<~uCTi>N, !Nc.
3-150 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS U1TI...IZING R > 3 EBF SYSTEM DESIGN EXAMPLES 3-151

H =~p = 11.1 in. (418 kipS) = 184 kips From Specification Section J2.4, fue load with respect to the longitudi-
ub r u 2S.2 in. nal axis of the weld group is,

H = ec P = 7.l0in·(418kipS)=118kipS
uc r u 2S.2 in. e=tan- 1 ( Vub J=tan- 1(136kiP SJ
Hub 184 kips
The connection interface forces are shown in Figure 3-33. It should be noted
that the forces are for the brace in compression. For the purposes of this exam- The ffllet weld strength is,
, pIe, equal and opposite forces have been assumed for the brace in tension.
<j)rn = 1.392 kiPslin.( 1.0 + 0.~Osin1.5 e
Design the weld at the gusset/beam interface
Assuming a 3/4-in.-thick end-plate and 1-in. comer clip, the length ofthe weld is, = 1.392 kiPslin.[ 1.0+ 0.SOsin1.5 ( .5°) ]

= 1.71 kipslin.
I =20.S in.-1 in.- 3/ in.=18.8 in.
w /4
, lS.3 kipsfm.
H D. 4.47 Sixteenths
muz
f. = ub 184 kips 9.79 kipsfm. 2(1.71 kipsfm.)
v I 18.8 in.

_ V- _136 This exceeds the minimum we~d size.

f - ub- - -kips
- --723
. k'lp~m.
_ro
a I 18.8 in. Use (2) full-lengt!l, 5/16-in. tillet welds to the gusset plate to the beam.

f peak = f avg = V'(9.79 k,ipslin.)2 + (7 .23 kiPslin.)2 Check yielding of the gusset
The shear yielding strength of the gusset
= 12.2 kipslin.
<j)Rn =<j)0.6Fy ti w

=0.90(0.6)(SOksi)(0.7Sin.)(18.8· )
=382 kips
• I

Since <j)Rn is greater than the resultartt load, gusset str~ngth is adequate.

Check beam web local yieldirog

With the compressive force applied 1< db

<j)Rn =<j)(2.5k+ N)F/w

= 1.00 [ 2.5( 1.16 in.)+ 18.8 in.J(SO

+ 118kips =494 kips
153kips

+184kiPS
136kips

Figure 3-33. Connection inteifaceforcesfor Example 3.19.

AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, INc. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~sTR.uctION, JNc,
 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 EBF SYSTEM DESIGN EXAMPLES 3-153
3--152

The fillet weld strength is,

Check beam web crippling
With the compressive force applied> d b /2 from the beam end,
Ij>rn = 1.392 kipsfm{ 1.0 + 0.50 sin 1.5 e)
N/d=18.8 inj16.5 in.=1.13
= 1.392 kiPsfm.[ 1.0 + 0.50,sin 1.5 (37 o)]
Where N = the length of bearing,
= 1.72 kipsfm.

Rn~O.80tw2[1+(3:)[:; r]~ (Specification JlO-5b) D.

mm
14.6 kipsfm.
2( 1.72 kipsfm.)
4.24 sÍxteenths

~(O.80)(O.455t[1+3(l.13)( ~:~!~
=405 kips
rl 29,000( 50)( 0.760)
0.455
Use (2) full-Iength, SIt6-in. fillet welds to
end-plate.

Check yielding of the gusset

the gusset plate to the

The shear yielding strength of the gusset

Ij>Rn = 1j>0.6Fytl w
Design the weld between the gusset and the end-plate
=0.90(0.6)(50 ksi)(0.75 in.)(16.5· .)
From Figure 3-32, the length of weld is equal to 16.5 in. The forces on the gusset
per unit length are, =335 kips

V 153 kips Since Ij>Rn is greater than the resultant load, gusset strength is adequate.
uc 9.27 kips/in.
fv
16.5 in.

Huc 118 kips

7.15 kips/in. The vertical force component at the º"W~seltJerld-ll'llalte interface is,
fa
16.5 in.
Vub - Vu beam =136 kips-36.5 kips=99

The minimum double",sided fillet weld size to develop the vertical

force through the beam web T-dimension is,
= (9.27 kiPsfm.)2 +(7.15 kiPsfmf

= 11.7 kipslin. D> 99.5 kips 2.65 SIPctf:entl!J.s

2(1.392 kipsfm.)(13.5 in.)
Multiplying by the weld stress distribution factor of 1.25,
A 3II6-in. weld size is the minimum for the W 6x77 web.
f r = 1.25(11.7 kipslin.)= 14.6 kipsfm. Use a 3116-in., double-sided fillet weld to the beam web to the
end-plate.
From Specification Section J2.4, the load angle with respect to the longitudinal
axis of the weld group is, The horizontal force component is the of the following three load
conditions:
l. The amplified drag load, H = 54.0 kips
e=tan -1(HUCJ-
- - -tan-1(118ki
--- PSJ-376
- .
0

V 153 kips 2. The axial force in the beam outside the corresponding to 1.25Ry Vn -
uc
Hub' H = 355 kips - 184 kips = 171 kips

3. H= H uc = 118 kips '

AMERICAN lNSTITUTE OF STEEL COJIlSTR:UCI~ON, INc.

AMERICAN lNSTlTUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, lNc.
 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 EBF SYSTEM DESIGN EXAMPLES 3-155
3-154

The required horizontal strength of the beam-to-colurnn connection is 171 kips.

Assuming that the horizontal force is transferred by the beam flanges, the force
in each flange is, 1-[ : 'J2
<\> nv

R = Huc = 171 kips =85.5 kips

uf 2 2 :S; 53.0 kips 1_(18.0 kipsJ2
28.3 kips
Using the fu1l beam flange width, the minimum required single-sided fillet
:s;; 40.9 kips
weld size to develop the flange force is,
When the brace is in compression, a tensile is transm1tted across the
.= 85.5 kips 398'
=. SIXteenth s beam/column interface."Assuming the four ádjacent to each beam flange
D
mm 1.5 (1.392 kipslin.)(1O.3 in.) transfer the tensile load, the tensile force per

A 1/4-in. weld size is the minimum for the 3/4-in. end plateo
Use single-sided, 1/4-in. filIet welds to connect the beam flanges to the
end-plate.

Check beam web rupture at weld

The shear rupture strength of the beam web is,

<j>Rn = 0.75(0.6)(65 ksi)(0.455 in.)(13.5 in.)

= 180 kips

<j>R >99.5 kips o.k.

n

Check beam flange rupture at weld

The tension rupture strength of the beam flange is,

<j>Rn = 0.75(65 ksi)(0.760 in.)(1O.3 in.)

= 382 kips

<j>R >85.5 kips o.k.

n
W.P.
Design end-plate bolts
1
Try seven rows of two l-in.-diameter ASTM A325N bolts at a 5 /2-in. gage.
U se fo~ 'bolts adjacent to each beam flange and an additional three bolts on
each side of the gusset plate as shown in Figure 3-34. Assuming the total shear
is shared equally among all bolts, the shear force per bolt is,
W14x99
V -
V·uc +Vub -Vubeam 153 kips+99.5 kips =18.0 kipslbolt
u N 14 bolts
b
Froro Manual Tables 7-1 and 7-2, the design shear and tensile strength per bolt
are 28.3 kips, and 53.0 kipsj respectively. Using RCSC Specification Equation 5.2
fOÍ" bolts subjected to" combined shear and tension and solving for the required
Figure 3-34. End~plate geometry for 3.19.
teilsile strength per bolt,
AMERICAN !NsTITUfE oi"" STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTlTUTE OF STEEL COlI/SntUC1j)N, !Nc.
3-156 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 EBF SYSTEM DESIGN EXAMPLES 3-157

T -_171
- -kips
-- . k'lp sIb ot
-214 1 .~ d' 1){6 in.
0= 1- - = 1- - - = 0.764
u 8 bolts p 4.50 in.
Tu <40.9 kips o.k.
b ' 1.88 in.
P=--;=-3
a .25'm. =0.578
A similar check for other loading conditions shows that the other bolts in this
connection have adequate strength. Note that prying action must also be addressed
when the end-plate thickness is selected. ~=.!.(<\>r~ -lJ=_1_(39.1 kips 1 =2.84
P rut 0.578 14.~ kips
Select end-plate thickness
When the brace is in tension, a tensile force is transmitted across the gusset/ Since ~ > 1, a' = 1.0. The minimum required en(l-DJate thickness is,
column interface. Assuming the four rows of bolts adjacent to the gusset plate
transfer the tensile load, the tensile force per bolt is, 4.44r b '
tmm. = ut

T 118 kips 14.8 kipslbolt

u 8 bolts 4.44(14.8 kips)(1.88 in.)
Part 9 of the Manual will be used to account for the effects of prying action on 4.50 in.( 50 kSi)[ 1+ 0.764( 1.0)]
the bolts. However, the design tensile strength per bolt used in the prying action
ca1culations will need to be reduced to reflect the fact that the bolts are sub- =0.558 in.
jected to combined shear and tension. The shear per bolt is 153 kips/8 bolts, or
19.1 kips. Using RCSC Specification Equation 5.2,
The 3/4-in. end-plate tbickness is ac~eptable.
Check bearing strength of end-plate
<\>r;=53.0 kips 1- ( 19.1 kips J2 From Manual Table 7-5, the minimum required to achieve full bearing
28.3 kips strength is 31¡16 in. Using the smallest bolt on the end-plate (4 112 in.),
the design bearing strength at each interior
=39.1 kips

The two locations that need to be investigated for prying action are at the bolts <\>rn= 117 kipsfm. (X in.) = 87.8 kips
adjacent to the gusset plate and the bolts adjacent to each beam flange. The
controlling condition for prying action in this case is for the bolts adjacent to Conservatively using Manual Table 7-6 with edge distance equal to 11/4 in.,
the gusset plate when the brace is in tension. Using the dimensions shown in the design bearing strength at each edge bolt
Figure 3-34, an 11-in. end-plate width, and standard holes in the end-plate,
<\>rn =42.0 kiPsfm.(X in.)=31.5 kips
b 5.50 in.-0.750 in. 2.38 in.
2 Since the design strength at each bolt is than the required shear strength
per bolt, the bearing strength of the end-plate adequate.
b' = b - d b = 2.38 in.- 1 in. = 1.88 in.
2 2
Check bearing strength of column
a 11 in.~5.5 in. <1.25(2.38 in.) Since the column flange thickness is greater the end-plate thickness and
the end-plate and column have the same strength, the bearing strength
=2.75 in.~2.98 in. of the column flange is adequate.
=2.75 in.
Use (7) rows of (2) l-in.-diameter ASTM bolts at a Sl/Z-in. gage. Use
a' = a+ d b = 2.75 in.+ 1 in. =3.25 in. (4) bolts adjacent to each beam fiange and additional 3 bolts on each
2 2 side of the gusset pIate as shown in Figure

p = 4.50 in. d' = 1){6 in.

AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCfION, !Ne. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~STI<~Uc1rION, !Ne.
3-158. BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTllJZING R> 3 EBF SYSTEM DESIGN EXAMPLES 3-159

Check shear yielding strength of end-plate Check end-plate fracture at beam

The shear yielding strength of the end-plate is, The shear fracture strength of the end-plate beam web weld is,

<l>Rn =0.90(2)(0.6)(50 ksi)(X' in.)=40.5 kip&'m. <l>Rn =0.75(2)(0.6)(65 ksi)(X' in.)(13.5

=592 kips
This is greater than the required strength at both the beam and gusset connec-
tions to the end-plate. Therefore, the end-plate strength is adequate. <l>Rn > 99.5 kips o.k.

Check end-plate fracture at bf?am

WT8x28.5 A992 EA. SIOE The shear fracture strength of the end-plate at beain flange weld is,
(16) 1"0 A325X BOlTS
IN STO HOlES @31/2" OFBRACEWEB
GAGE <l>Rn =0.75(0.6)(65 ksi)(}{ in.)(1O.3 in.)
=226 kips

<l>Rn > 85.5 kips o.k.

Check end-plate shear fracture at

The shear fracture streqgth of the end-plate at bolt tine is,

An =2(0.75)[17 Xin.-4(1 in.+ X in.

cj
@9 ~ =19 ..5 in. 2
- .....
~~
"'<t"
u;>
;... <l>Rn = <l>0.6FuAn

=0.75(0.6)(65 ksi)(19.S in. 2 )

=570 kips
1/4
This force is conservatively compared 'to the of the shear and axial force,
W.P.
Ru = (118 kiPs)2 + (153 kips)2
W14x99
=193 kips
W16x77 <l>Rn > Ru o.k.

I
Use a 3/4-in. x U-in. end-piate.
(14) 1"0 A325N
BOLTS @ 5 1/2" GAGE
Check column web local yielding
!lCOlUMN
Pl 3/4"x11" A572 GR. 50 Adjacent to the gusset plate, the coluirm web yielding strength is,

Figure 3-3~. Connection designed in Example 3.19. <l>Rn =<I>(5k+N)F/w (Specification J10-2)

= 1.0 [ 5( 1.38 in.)+ 16.5 in.J( 50 ksi)( o 85 in.)

=567 kips

AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CmlsTRuCT~ON, !Nc.
3--160 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 COLUMN SPLICE DESIGN EXAMPLE
3--161

<l>Rn > Hue o.k. Check column local flange bending

The prying action model found in the can be used to determine the
Adjacent to each beam flange, the column web local yielding strength is,
minimum column flange thickness required prevent flexura! yielding of the
flange. This flange is thicker than the endL-nl.ate_ which was previously deter-
<l>Rn =<I>(5k+N)Fywt w mined to have adequate thickness.
=1.0[5(1.38 in.)+0.760 in.J(50 ksi)(0.485 in.)
Therefore,
=186 kips
t¡= 0.780 in. o.k.
<l>Rn> 85.5 kips o.k.
Check column shear
Check column web crippling The maximum shear in the column is equa! to gusset to column force Huc =
With the compressive force applied at> d e l2 from the column end, the column 118 kips. Using the required column strength on the sum of the strain-
web crippling strength adjacent to the gusset plate is, hardened expected yield strengths of the links the third and fourth levels as
determined in Example 3.17, Pr = 867 kips

Rn = 0.80t [1 + 3( ~)( :; rJlF;:t

w
2 f (Specification J10-4) Pr 867 kips 0.596
kS{ 29.1 in. 2)

l ( )( )
Pe 50

=(0.80)(0.485)
2 16.5
1+3 -
0.485
--
1.5J 29,000( 50)( 0.780)
14.2 0.780 0.485 From Specification Section 11 0.6 with Pr > O
Pe
=779 kips

<l>Rn = 0.75(779 kips) $Rv =0.90(0.6 ) Fyd/w (1.4 - ~ J (Specification no. lO)
= 584 kips
= 0.90( 0.6)(50 ksi)( 14.2 in.)( 0.485 in (1.4 - 0.596)
<l>Rn > Hue o.k. =150 kips

With the compressive force applied> d e /2 from the column end, the column <l>Rv > 118 kips o.k.
web crippling strength adjacent to each beam flange is,

Rn = 0.80t [1 3( ~)( :; llF;:t

w
2
+ r f (Specification J10-4)
The final connection design and geometry is

COLUMN SPLICE DESIGN EXAMPLE

in Figure 3-35.

Rn=0.80(0.485)

=310 kips
2

l ( )( ) 0.760
1+3 - -
14.2
0.485
--
0.780
1.5J 29,000( 50)( 0.780)
0.485
Example 3.20. SCBF Column Splice
Given: Design a fully welded sPlice between the third
column located on grid B in Figure 3-9. The material is ASTM A992
<l>Rn = 0.75(310 kips) = 233 kips (F'y = 50 ksi, F'u= 65 ksi), the upper shaft is a W wide-flange section and
the lower shaft is a W14x132 wide-flange The Applicable Building
<l>Rn> 85.5 kips o.k. Code specifies the use of ASCE 7 for calculatic)n of loads.

W14x48 d = 13.8 in. t¡ = 0.595 in.

tw ~ 0.340 in.

AMERICAN !NSTITIJTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc.

AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~sTR:ucrlON. !Nc.
3-162 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 COLUMN SPLICE DESIGN EXAMPLE
3-163

The loading on the upper shaft between the third and fourth levels was deter-
Tu=(0.9-0.2SDS)PD+nOPQ +1.6P
mined to be, E

Tu = 0.7(62 kips) + 2.0(-57 kips)+l

PD = 62 kips PQE = 57 kips Ps = 6 kips
= -70.6 kips
From the ASCE 7, the Seismic Design Category is D, no = 2.0, P = 1.3, and
Seismic Provisions Section 8.4a has l addlltlo.n~ requir~ments for welded splices
SDS = 1.0.
subject to a net tensile load resulting from combinations inc1uding the
0.2SDS = 0.2(1.0) = 0.2 amplified seismic load. In addition to filler requirements, items (1) and
(2) in this section restript the use of groove welds in the
Assume that ends of the column are pinned and braced against translation for flange welds of welded splices subject to net
both the X-X and y-y axes and the column moment produced by gravity fram- Filler metal must comply witb Seismic ~Ilví~:ioru:
ing connections is negligible. joint penetration groove welds to splice the

Solution: Using the basic load combinations in ASCE 7, the maximum compressive force
Determine the required flexural-<::tr"Anjr1th
in the column is,
Seismic Provisions Section 13.5 defines the flexural strength of the
Pu = (1.2 + 0.2SDS )PD + pPQE + 0.5PL + 0.2Ps splice to be at least half of the nominal strength of the smaller shaft.
Using Manual Table 6-1 with KL = 12.5 ft,
P =1.4(62 kips) + 1.3(57 kips )+0.5(18 kips )+0.2( 6 kips)
u
=171 kips bx =3.55XlO-3 (kip-ft f 1

And the maXimum tensile force in the column is, M =_8_= 8

=278 kip-ft
Tu = (0.9 - 0.2SDS)PD + PPQE + 1.6PH
n 9bx $ 3.55XlO-3 (kip-ft 1 f
Tu = 0.7 (62 kips) + 1.3(-57 kips) + 1.6(0 kips)
M = M n = 278 kip-ft 139 kip-ft
= -30.7 kips u 2 2

From Figure 3-8, the unbraced length of the column is 12.5 ft. Using Manual Assuming that the'entire moment is taken the flange splices, the required
Table 4-1 with K = 1.0, strength of each flange splice is,

$cPn = 406 kips

139 kip-ft( 12 in./ft)
Using Manual Table 5-1, the tension yielding strength of the column is, 13.8 in.-0.595 in.
$ln =634 kips
The design strength of each complete-joint pe!letr'atÜ)n groove welded flange
Since PJ$cPn > 0.4, Seismic Provisions Section 8.4 requires consideration of splice is,
amplified seismic loads in the design of the column.
$Rn = 0.90Fy b¡t¡
Pu = (1.2 + 0.2SDS )PD + noPQE + 0.5PL + 0.2Ps = 0.90(50 ksi)(8.03 in.)(0.595 in.)

Pu =' 1.4(62 kips) + 2.0(57 kips)+0.5(18 kips)+0.2(6 kips) = 215 kips

= 211 kips

AMERICAN !NsirrurE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CmisTR:uCIlpN, !Nc.
 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 COLUMN SPLICE DESIGN EXAMPLE
3-164 3-165

Determine the required shear strength of splice

Seisrnic Provisions Section 13.5 defines the required shear strength of the
splice to be at least I.MpcIH, where "f.Mpc is the sum of the nominal plastic
flexural strengths of the columns aboye and below the splice. To develop this
required strength through the use of a welded connection, a complete-joint-
penetration groove weld must be used. UPPER & L\.~'III1r-""
COL. SHAFT
KL=12.5 ft
Using Manual Table 6-1 for W14x132,

M =_8_= 8 =978 kip-ft

n 9bx <\> 9[1.01xlO-3 (kip-ft)-I](0.90)
"f.M 278 kip-ft+978 kip-ft 101 ki s
uc
H 12.5 ft P L_--I-t-~At--<; CJP
----l.J----
Assurning weld access holes with a height of 1.5(tw) = 1.5(0.340 in.) 0.510 in.
are used,
<\>R =0.90(0.6)Ft [d-2t¡-2(0.510in.)]
n yw
= 0.90(0.6)(50 ksi)(0.340 in.)[13.8 in. - 2(0.595 in.) - 2(0.51 O in.)]
=106 kips > 101 kips o.k.

Use a complete-joint-penetration groove weld to splice tbe column webs.

Location
The splice location satisfies the requirement that it be located in the middle
third of the column cIear height. *ERECTION AIOS NOT SHOWN FOR
Tbe final connection design is sbown in Figure 3-36.
Figure 3-36. Connection as designed in

AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INc. AMERICAN INsTlTUTE OF STEEL'cm~s'rn~uCIloN •. INC.

 PART 3 REFERENCES 3-167
BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3
3-166

PART 3 REFERENCES
TABLES American Institute of Steel Construction Inc. (AISC). (2005 . Specificationfor Structural Steel
Buildings, ANSIIAISC 360-05, AISC, Chicago, IL.
Table 3-1. EBF Link Design Values for W-Shapes
Various values useful in the design of eccentrically braced frame~ are tabulat~. v~u~~ ':s: American Institute of Steel Construction Inc. (AISC). Steel Construction Manual,
given for W-shapes that meet the local buclding requirements for link beams Wlth Fy - 13th Ed., AISC, Chicago, IL.
(ASTM A992). dd·· al American Institute. of Steel Construction Inc. (AISC).
The value of 0.15Py is tabulated to aid in the determinati~n of whether or not a luon
Structural Steel Buildings, ANSIIAISC 341-05, AISC, ~111'-'a.14v,
link requirements must be met per Seismic Provisions Secuon 15.2. The v~ues of Py ' A w'
TT d M are provided for the case in which these additional link reqUlrements must American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE). (2005). Miir-zz)11tum Design Loads for Buildings
Yp' an p
and Other StructUres, SEIIASCE 7, ASCE, Reston, VA.
be satisfied. . . t al
· 1 f 1 6 2 6 and 5M IV, as well as the values of the three spacmg m erv s
M u ltip es o ., ., p p' . f fnk tiff Astaneh-AsI, A. (1998). "Seismic Behavior and Design of Plates." Steel Tips, Structural
o-iven in Seismic Provisions Section 15.3 are listed to aid i~ the e~tabhshment. o I s - Steel Educational Council, Moraga, CA.
0& • • I dditi the minimum requrred wldths and thlcknesses for
ener spacmg requrrements. na on,.. .
both link end stiffeners and link intermediate suffeners are glven. .. Blodgett, O.W. (1966). Design of Welded Structures,
The forces to be resisted by bracing of both the link beam and the beam outslde the lmk Foundation, Cleveland, OH.

are also given. Building Seismic Safety Council. (2000). NEHRP (........u" ..... Earthquake Hazards Reduction
Program) Recommended Provisions for Seismic New Buildings and Other
Structures Part 1: Provisions, FEMA 368, Federal Management Agency,
Washington, D.C.
Building Seismic Safety Council. (2000). NEHRP (1vu...",,.u..Earthquake Hazards Reduction
Program) Recommended Provisions for Seismic for New Buildings and Other
Structures Part 2: Commentary, FEMA 369, Federal Management Agency,
Washington, D.C.
Engelhardt, M.D., and Popov, E.P. (1989). "Behavior of Links in Eccentrically Bniced
Frames." UCBIEERC - 89/01, Earthquake Engineering Research Center, University of
California, Berkeley, CA.
Galambos, T.V (1998). Guide to Stability Design Cntena Metal Structures, 5th Edition,
John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York.
Honeck, W.c., and Westphal, D. (1999). "Practical Design and Detailing of Steel Column
Base Plates." Steel Tips, Structura:l Steel Educational Moraga, CA.
Naeim, F. (2001). The Seismic Design Handbook, 2nd
Boston, MA.
Research Council on Structural Connections. (2~04). :::i]J~~j:;'l)r-zC(AltlOn for Structural Joints
Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts,~American In~titute of Construction, Chicago, It.
Structural Engineers Association of California (SEAOC). 999). Recommended Lateral
Force Requirements and Commentary, SEAOC; CA.
Tamboli, A.R. (1999). Handbook of Structural Steel COlr-znectu¡lfl Design and Details, McGraw-
Hill, New York.
Tremblay, R. (2001). "Seismic Behavior and Design of Cpnc(!ntJicaLlly Braced Frames."
Engineenng Jouma/, Vol. 38, 3rd Quarter, 148..:..166.

Tremblay, R. (2003). "Achieving a Stable Inelastic:Response Multi-Story Concentrically

Braced Frames." Engineering Joumal, Vol. 40, 2nd 111-129.
AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL CO/IlSTRUCTlpN, INc.
AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INC.

- - - - - - - - - - _ . _ - - - - -- ----------- -
 3-168 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3
TABLES
3-169

Table 3-1
Table 3-1 (.
<1>=0.90 EBF Link
Ry = 1.1 EBF Link
Design Values Fy = 50 ksi
Oesign 'Valu
WShapes
W Shapes
Bracing Force
O.15Py Py Aw Vp Mp
1.6Mp 2.6Mp ~ O.06M, Nominal
Shape Vp Vp Vp
---¡;;- Wt.
kips kips in? kips kip-in. in. in. in. kips
W44x335 739 4930 41.7 1250 81000 104 168 324 127
x290 641 4270 35.0 1050 70500 107 175 336 111 6.92 11/a 22.1 44.8 23.9
x262 577 3850 31.8 953 63500 107 173 333 100 7.04 7/a 17.2
5/a 36.3 23.7
x230 508 3390 28.7 862 55000 102 166 319 87.1 7.12 7/a 14.9
5/a 32.2 23.7
7.19 3/4 12.7
W40x593 1310 8700 65.4 1960 138000 113 183 352 229 28.3 23.7
593 13.1 13/8 7
x503 1110 7400 56.3 1690 116000 110 178 343 195 6.56 1 /8 45.1
503 13.3 l1J4 84.5 25.1
x431 953 6350 49.0 1470 98000 107 173 333 166 6.66 1% 37.8
431 13.5 11/a 71.7 24.6
x397 878 5850 44.7 1340 90000 107 175 336 153 6.76 13/8 31.9 61.4
397 13.7 1 24.3
x372 818 5450 42.3 1270 84000 106 172 331 144 6.83 11J4 28.4
372 13.8 7/8 55.2 24.2
x362 803 5350 41.0 1230 82000 107 173 334 140 6.89 11J4 26.7
362 13.8 7/8 52.2 24.2
x324 715 4770 36.6 1100 73000 106 173 333 129 6.88 11Ja 25.5 50.1
324 13.9 3J4 24.0
x297 656 4370 33.9 1020 66500 104 170 327 115 6.95 1 22.0
297 13.9 44.0 23.9
x277 611 4070 30.3 910 62500 110 179 343 108 3J4 6.97 1 19.9
277 14.1 5/8 40.4 23.7
x249 550 3670 27.4 823 56000 109 177 340 97.3 7.07 7/a 17.0
249 14.3 35.2 23.7
x215 476 3170 23.8 713 48200 108 176 338 84.2 5Ja 7.15 3J4 14.6
215 14.5 1/2 31.1 23.7
7.25 3/4 11.7
W40x392 863 5750 51.9 1560 85500 87.8 143 274 144 26.0 23.7
392 9.56 11/8
x331 731 4880 44.6 1340 71500 85.5 139 267 122 4.78 11/2 34.3
331 9.76 65.5 18.6
x327 720 4800 43.1 1290 70500 87.2 142 273 120 1 4.88 11/4
327 28.4 55.3 18.3
x294 647 4320 9.74 4.87
38.7 1160 63500 87.4 142 273 109 11/4 27.2 53.2 18.2
294 9.88 7/8
x278 615 4100 37.7 1130 59500 84.2 137 263 102 4.94 11/8 23.7
278 9.94 7/a 47.0 18.0
x264 582 3880 35.1 1050 56500 85.9 140 268 97.4 4.97 11/8 22.9
264 9.98 3/4 45.5 18.0
x235 518 3450 30.3 910 50500 88.8 144 278 87.4 4.99 1 20.8 41.9
235 10.2 5/8 17.9
x211 465 3100 27.4 823 45300 88.1 143 275 78.7 5.12 7/a 17.0
211 10.3 35.2 17.9
x183 400 2670 23.8 714 '38700 86.8 141 271 67.6 5Ja 5.15 3/4 14.6
183 10.5 31.1 17.7
x167 369 2460 23.8 713 34600 77.8 126 243 60.9 1J2 5.25 3/4 11.7
167 10.5 112 26.0 17.7
x149 329 2190 23.0 691 29900 69.3 113 216 52.8 5.25 3/4 11.8 26.1
149 10.5 112 17.7
5.27 3/4 11.3
W36x800 1770 11800 81.0 2430 183000 120 195 376 314 25.1 17.7
800 13.2 17/8 6.62
x652 1440 9600 67.0 2010 146000 116 188 362 256 2112 62.9 115 27.0
652 13.7 1112 6.83
x529 1170 7800 54.7 1640 117000 114 185 355 208 2 50.9 94.2
529 14.0 11J4 26.4
x487 1070 7150 50.9 1530 107000 112 181 349 192 6.99 15/a 40.3
487 14.1 75.8 25.8
x441 975 6500 46.3 1390 95500 110 179 344 173 11/a 7.05 11/2 37.1
441 14.3 11/8 70.1 25.7
x395 870 5800 41.5 1240 85500 110 179 344 156 7.14 13/a 33.0 62.9
395 14.4 1 25.5
x361 795 5300 38.1 1140 77500 109 176 339 142 7.18 1114 28.9
361 14.5 7/a 55.8 25.2
x330 728 4850 34.7 1040 70500 108 176 339 130 7.23 11/8 26.0
330 14.6 7/8 50.6 25.1
x302 666 4440 32.1 962 64000 106 173 333 119 7.28 11J8 23.1 45.5
302 14.8 3/4 24.9
x282 622 4150 30.1 902 59500 .106 172 330 111 7.41 1 20.9 41.7
282 14.8 3/4 25.1
x262 578 3850 28.6 857 55000 103 167 321 102 7.42 1 19.1 38.6
262 14.9 3/4 24.9
x247 544 3630 27.2 816 51500 101 164 316 96.2 7.46 7/8 17.8
247 14.9 5/a 36.3 24.9
x231 511 3410 25.8 775 48200 99.4 162 311 90.2 7.45 7/a 16.7 34.3
231 15.0 5/8 24.8
I¡',.!! 7.49 7/8 15.5 32.2 24.8

L AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCI10N, !Nc.

AMERICAN !NSTITIJTE OF STEEL !Nc.
 -<-""'~"-"-"~".~',-'o-·.~'r'~",~. __
. _

3-170 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 TABLES

3.-171

Table 3-1 (continued) Table 3-1 (

<\> = 0.90 EBF Link EBF Link
Ry = 1.1 Design Values DesignValu Fy = 50 ksi
WShapes
WShapes
Bracing Force
O.15Py 1.6Mp 2.6Mp 5Mp Nominal
Py Aw Vp Mp
Sh~pe Vp Vp ----v;- O.06M,
---¡¡;;- wt
kips kips in.2 kips kip-in. in. in. in. kips
W36x256 566 3770 32.6 977 52000 85.1 138 266 96.2
x232 511 3410 29.5 5.14 21.3
886 46800 84.5 137 264 86.9 42.4 18.3
x210 464 3090 28.2 846 5.18 7/8 18.7
41700 78.8 128 246 77.8 5fs 37.8 18.2
x194 428 2850 26.0 780 38400 5.27 7/8 17.6
78.7 128 246 71.8 5/8 35.8 18.3
x182 402 2680 24.6 738 35900 5.29 7/8 15.7
77.8 126 243 67.5 5/a 32.5 18.2
x170 376 2510 23.1 694 5.33 3/4 14.5
33400 77.0 125 241 62.8 5/a 30.4 18.2
x160 353 2350 22.1 662 5.32 3/4 13.2
31200 75.4 122 236 58.9 1f2 28.1 18.0
x150 332 2210 21.3 638 29100 5.35 3/4 12.3
72.9 118 228 54.8 1f2 26.6 18.0
5.38 5fs 11.6
W33x387 855 5700 25.3 18.0
39.6 1190 78000 105 171 328 153 387 13.7
x354 780 5200 36.4 1090 71000 6.84 Ha 30.6
104 169 325 140 354 13.8 7/a 58.3 24.3
x318 702 4680 32.7 980 63500 104 6.89 11/4 27.7
168 324 126 318 13.9 7/a 53.2 24.2
x291 643 4290 30.1 903 58000 6.96 11/a 24.2
103 167 321 116 291 14.0 3/4
47.0 24.0
x263 581 3880 27.3 818 6.99 1 21.8
52000 102 165 318 104 263 14.1 3/4
43.0 23.9
x241 533 3550 26.1 782 47000 7.03 7/a 19.2
96.2 156 301 94.6 241 14.2 5fs 38.3 23.7
x221 489 3260 24.3 729 7.12 7/a 18.1
42800 94.1 153 294 86.7 221 14.3 5/8 36.3 23.9
x201 444 2960 22.5 674 7.13 7/a 16.5
38700 91.8 149 287 78.4 201 14.3 5fs 33.5 23.7
7.14 3f4 14.7
W36x169 371 30.4 23.6
2480 21.0 630 31500 79.8 130 249 63.7 169 10.2 5fs 5.08 3f4 13.3
x152 336 2240 19.9 598 28000 74.8 122 234 56.9 152 10.3 112 28.1 17.3
x141 312 5.17 3/4 12.4
2080 19.0 570 25700 72.2 117 226 52.4 141 10.3 112 26.3 17.4
x130 287 1920 5.15 5/a 11.5
18.2 546 23400 68.4 111 214 47.8 130 10.3 112 24.8 17.3
5.17 5/a 10.8
W30x391 23.5 17.3
863 5750 38.5 1160 72500 100 163 314 156 391 12.9 11fa 6.44 1% 34.2
x357 788 5250 35.1 1050 66000 100 163 313 143 357 13.0 1 64.1 23.4
x326 719 4790 32.3 6.51 11/4 30.6
968 59500 98.4 160 307 129 326 13.1 7/a 57.9 23.3
x292 644 4300 28.9 866 53000 6.56 11/4 27.7
97.9 159 306 116 292 13.3 7/a 52.8 23.1
x261 6.63 1'/a 24.2
577 3850 26.3 790 47200 95.5 155 299 104 261 13.3 3/4
46.6 23.0
x235 6.67 1 21.6
519 3460 23.5 705 42400 96.2 156 300 93.8 235 13.4 5/a 42.0 22.8
6.72 7/a 18.6
x211 467 3110 21.9 657 37600 91.4 149 286 83.8 211 13.6 36.9 22.7
5fs 6.78 7/a 17.1
x191 422 2820 20.1 603 33800 89.5 145 280 75.5 191 13.6 34.1 22.7
5fs 6.79 3f4 15.2
x173 383 2550 18.5 555 30400 87.4 142 273 68.3 173 13.7 30.8 22.5
V2 6.85 13f4 13.6 28.0 22.5
W30x148 326 2180 18.4 553 25000 72.4 118 226 55.9 148 9.20 112 4.60 3f4 13.4
x132 292 1950 17.4 522 21900 67.0 109 209 49.2 132 9.27 112
27.7 15.8
4.64 % 2.4
x124 274 1830 16.6 497 20400 65.6 107 205 46.0 124 9.33 112 25.9 15.8
4.67 5fs 1.5
x116 257 1710 16.0 480 18900 63.0 102 197 42.8 116 9.37 1f2 24.4 15.8
4.69 5fa 1.0
x108 238 1590 15.4 462 17300 59.9 97.3 187 39.3 108 9.41 1f2 23.4 15.8
4.71 5fs 0.4 22.4 15.8

AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc.

AMERICAN !NSTlTUTE OF STEEL'e ONsTRucrr(~N, !Ne.

-------------------------------------------------
3-172 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 TABLES
3-173

Table 3-1 (continued) Table 3-1 (contin

<t> = 0.90 EBF Link EBF Link
Ry = 1.1 Design Values Fy =50 ksi
Design
WShapes

Bracing Force
1.6Mp 2.6Mp 5Mp Nominal
O.15Py Py Aw Vp Mp
Shape ----v,;- Vp Vp O.06M,
---¡¡;- Wt.

kips kips in.2 kips kip-in. in. in. in. kips

W27x539 1190 7950 50.1 1500 94500 101 164 315 215 539 5.68 '2 52.6 95.9 23.0
x368 810 5400 35.1 1050 62000 94.2 153 294 147 368 5.97 ' 1112 35.3 65.7 22.1
x336 742 4950 32.1 962 56500 94.0 153 294 135 336 6.04 13/8 31.8 59.5 21.9
x307 678 4520 29.5 885 51500 93.1 151 291 124 307 12.1 7/8 6.04 11/4 28.9 54.4 21.6
x281 622 4150 27.0 809 46800 92.6 150 289 113 281 12.3 7/8 6.14 11/8 25.9 49.3 21.6
x258 570 3800 25.0 749 42600 91.1 148 285 103 258 12.3 % 6.17 1 23.6 45.2 21.5
x235 521 3470 23.2 696 38600 88.8 144 277 94.0 235 12.4 3/4 6.19 1 21.6 41.6 21.3
x217 480 3200 21.1 632 35600 89.9 146 281 87.2 217 12.4 5/8 6.22 7/8 19.2 37.5 21.2
x194 429 2860 19.1 572 31600 88.3 143 276 77.8 194 12.5 5fs 6.25 3/4 16.9 33.4 21.0
x178 394 2630 18.4 553 28500 82.5 134 258 70.7 178 12.7 5/8 6.33 3/4 16.2 32.1 21.2
x161 357 2380 16.8 504 25800 81.8 133 256 64.1 161 12.7 112 6.34 3/4 14.3 28.8 21.0
x146 323 2160 15.4 462 23200 80.4 131 251 57.9 146 12.8 1/2 6.40 5/8 12.7 26.0 21.0
W27x129 284 1890 15.5 465 19800 68.0 110 212 49.2 129 8.78 112 4.39 5/8 12.8 26.2 15.0
x114 251 1680 14.5 435 17200 63.1 103 197 42.9 114 8.96 1/2 4.48 5/8 11.6 24.2 15.2
x102 225 1500 13.1 393 15300 62.1 101 194 38.3 102 8.97 112 4.49 5/8 10.0 21.4 15.0
x94 208 1390 12.5 374 13900 59.5 96.8 186 35.1 94 9.02 3fs 4.51 112 9.32 20.1 15.0
W24x370 818 5450 34.3 1030 56500 87.9 143 275 148 370 10.7 1114 5.33 15/8 40.0 73.4 20.6
x335 738 4920 31.1 933 51000 87.4 142 273 135 335 10.7 1118 5.37 11/2 35.9 66.3 20.3
x306 674 4490 28.4 852 46100 86.6 141 271 123 306 10.9 1 5.44 13/8 32.4 60.1 20.1
x279 615 4100 26.1 784 41800 85.2 139 266 112 279 11.0 7/8 5.49 11/4 29.5 55.0 20.0
x250 551 3680 23.4 703 37200 84.7 138 265 101 250 11.1 7/8 5.56 11/8 25.9 48.8 19.8
x229 504 3360 21.6 649 33800 83.2 135 260 91.8 229 11.2 3/4 5.59 1 23.6 44.7 19.7
x207 455 3040 19.6 589 30300 82.3 134 257 82.9 207 11.3 3/4 5.63 7/8 21.0 40.1 19.5
x192 422 2820 18.3 549 28000 81.5 132 255 76.7 192 11.4 5/8 5.69 7/8 19.2 37.0 19.5
x176 388 2590 16.9 507 25600 80.7 131 252 70.7 176 11.4 5/8 5.70 3/4 17.5 34.0 19.4
x162 358 2390 15.9 477 23400 78.5 128 245 64.9 162 11.6 5/8 5.80 3/4 16.2 31.7 19.5
x146 323 2150 14.6 439 20900 76.1 124 238 58.4 146 11.6 112 5.80 3/4 14.6 28.9 19.4
x131 289 1930 13.7 410 18500 72.2 117 226 51.9 131 11.7 112 5.85 5/8 13.3 26.6 19.4
W24x103 227 1520 12.4 372 14000 60.2 97.9 188 39.3 103' 7.90 112 3.95 5/8 11.6 23.7 13.5
x94 208 1390 11.6 348 12700 58.3 94.8 182 35.8 94 8.04 112 4.02 5fa 10.6 21.9 13.6
x84 185 1240 10.6 318 11200 56.3 91.5 170 31.7 84 8.08 3/8 4.04 112 9.28 19.6 13.5
x76 168 1120 9.92 298 10000 53.8 87.4 168 28.4 76 8.11 3/8 4.06 112 8.42 18.1 13.5
W24x62 137 910 9.68 291 7650 42.1 68.5 132 21.8 62 6.18 3/8 3.09 1/2 8.16 17.6 10.6
x55 122 810 8.92 268 6700 40.0 65.1 125 19.1 55 6.22 3/8 3.11 112 7.13 15.8 10.5

I
AMERICAN lNsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc.
AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~STFlUCI'~ON, !Ne.
 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 TABLES 3-175
3-174

Table 3-1 (continued) Table 3-1 (conti

<\l=O.90 EBF Link EBF Link

Fy~ 50 ksi
Ry = 1.1 Design Values Design Val
W Shapes

Bracing Force
Py Aw Vp Mp
1.6Mp 2.6Mp ~ O.06M,
NQminal
O.15Py Vp Vp Vp Wt.
Shape -¡¡;;-
kips kip-in. in. in. kips
kips kips in.2 in.
539 26500 78.7 128 246 81.8 10.8 3/4 5.39 22.7 42.7 18.9
W21x201 444 2960 18.0
16.4 492 23800 77.5 126 242 74.0 10.8 5fs 5.42 7/8 20.4 38.1il 18.8
x182 402 2680
14.8 445 21600 77.7 126 243 67.4 10.9 5/8 5.45 3/4 18.0 34.5 18.6
x166 366 2440
14.3 428 18700 69.8 113 218 58.8 11.1 5/8 5.53 3/4 17.2 33.0 18.8
x147 324 2160
12.8 385 16700 69.3 113 216 52.9 11.1 112 5.55 3/4 15.1 29.4 18.6
x132 291 1940
11.9 356 15400 69.0 112 216 48.8 11.2 112 5.60 5/8 13.7 26.9 18.6
x122 269 1800
10.9 326 14000 68.5 111 214 44.6 11.2 112 5.60 5/8 12.2 24.3 18.5
x111 245 1640
11.4 343 11100 51.5 83.6 161 35.3 93 7.26 1f2 3.63 5/8 13.1 25.8 12.6
W21x93 205 1370
10.2 305 9800 51.4 83.6 161 31.5 83 7.33 112 3.67 5/8 11.2 22.5 12.5
x83 182 1220
8.97 269 8600 51.1 83.1 160 27.7 73 7.39 3/8 3.70 112 9.41 19.4 12.5
x73 161 1080
8.48 255 8000 50.3 81.7 157 25.9 68 7.41 3fs 3.71 1/2 8.68 18.1 12.4
x68 150 1000
7.91 237 7200 48.6 78.9 152 23.3 62 7.44 3/8 3.72 1/2 7.80 16·fi 12.4
x62 137 915
8.02 241 6450 42.9 69.7 134 20.8 57 5.75 3/a 2.88 1/2 7.93 16.8 9.84
W21x57 125 835
7.50 225 5500 39.1 63.6 122 17.9 50 5.77 3fs 2.89 1/2 7.24 15.6 9.80
x50 110 735
6.93 208 4770 36.7 59.7 115 15.5 44 5.80 3/8 2.90 3/a 6.36 14.1 9.75
x44 97.5 650
687 4580 25.6 767 37700 78.6 128 246 127 311 8.96 11f4 4.48 15/8 41.1 74.6 18.0
W18x311
4170 23.7 710 33800 76.2 124 238 115 283 9.10 11fa 4.55 11f2 37.6 68.4 17.9
x283 625
569 3800 21.6 649 30600 75.3 122 235 105 258 9.24 1 4.62 13/a 34.1 62.3 17.7
x258
587 27500 74.8 121 234 95.4 234 9.38 7/a 4.69 11f4 30.6 56.1 17.6
x234 516 3440 19.6
537 24500 73.0 119 228 86.1 211 9.48 7/8 4.74 11/8 27.7 51.0 17.4
x211 466 3110 17.9
16.2 487 22100 72.6 118 227 78.2 192 9.58 3f4 4.79 1 24.7 45.8 17.3
x192 423 2820
449 19900 70.9 115 222 71.3 175 9.62 3/4 4.81 22.7 42.3 17.1
x175 385 2570 15.0
409 17800 69.7 113 218 64.3 158 9.68 5/8 4.84 7/a 20.4 38.2 17.0
x158 347 2320 13.6
369 16100 69.8 113 218 58.4 143 9.74 5/8 4.87 3/4 18.0 34.1 16.8
x143 316 2110 12.3
340 14500 68.3 111 213 52.9 130 9.86 5/8 4.93 3/4 16.2 31.0 16.8
x130 287 1910 11.3
11.1 332 13100 63.2 103 197 48.2 119 9.99 1f2 5.00 3/4 15.9 30.3 17.0
x119 263 1760
9.92 298 11500 61.8 100 193 42.7 106 10.0 112 5.01 5/8 14.0 26.9 16.8
x106 233 1560
271 10600 62.4 101 195 39.3 97 10.0 1f2 5.02 5/8 12.3 24.1 16.7
x97 214 1430 9.02
8.09 243 9300 61.3 100 192 34.8 86 10.1 3/8 5.07 1/2 10.7 21.3 1Q.7
x86 190 1270
251 7300 46.6 75.7 146 27.2 71 6.65 3/8 3.33 1f2 11.2 22.0 11.5
W18x71 156 1040 8.36
7.61 228 6650 46.6 75.8 146 24.9 65 ~.69 3/8 3.35 1/2 9.82 19.7 11.4
x65 143 955
209 6150 47.0 76.4 147 23.2 60 6.73 3/8 3.37 1f2 8.81 17.9 11.3
x60 132 880 6.98
197 5600 45.5 73.9 142 21.2 55 6.75 3/8 3.38 1/2 8.08 16.7 11.3
x55 122 810 6.57
180 5050 45.0 73.1 141 19.1 50 6.79 3/8 3.40 3/8 7.05 14.9 11.3
x50 110 735 5.99
182 4540 39.8 64.6 124 17.1 46 5.34 3/8 2.67 3/8 7.18 15.1 9.09
W18x46 101 675 6.08
159 3920 39.4 64.0 123 14.9 40 5.39 3fa 2.70 3/8 5.87 12.8 9.03
x40 88.5 590 5.31
5.06 152 3330 35.1 57.0 110 12.7 35 !f40 3/a 2.70 3/8 5.46 12.1 9.00
x35 77.3 515

AMERICAN INSTIfUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcrION, INc. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CmlsTRucr:ION.INC.

 TABLES 3-177
BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3
3-176

Table 3-1 {contin

Table 3-1 (continued)
EBF Link
EBF Link Fy ='50 ksi
<\>=0.90 Design Valu
Ry=1.1. Design Values
WShapes
W Shapes
Bracing Force Nominal
1.6Mp 2.6Mp 5Mp
O.06M, Wt.
Py Aw Vp Mp Vp
Shape
O.15Py Vp Vp ---¡¡;;-
in. in. kips
kips in.2 kips kip-in. in. 14.2
kips 27.0 15.6
60.1 97.6 188 40.8
221 1480 8.79 264 9900 12.4 23.9 15.6
W16x100 59.1 96.0 185 36.3
197 1310 7.90 237 8750 10.4 20.4 15.5
x89 58.7 95.4 183 31.4
170 1130 6.82 204 7500
x77 57 6.26 3/a 3.13 1/2 9.62 19.1 10.7
43.5 70.7 136 22.1 1/2
126 840 6.44 193 5250 50 6.31 3/a 3.16 8.14 16.5 10.6
W16x57 42.9 69.8 134 19.4
735 5.72 171 4600 45 6.35 3/a 3.18 3/a 7.13 14.7 10.6
x50 110 69.1 133 17.5
665 5.16 155 4120 42.5 40 6.39 3/a 3.20 I 3/a 5.95 12.7 10.5
x45 100 69.2 133 15.5
590 4.57 137 3650 42.6
x40 88.5 31 4.98 3/a 2.49 3/a 5.07 11.1 8.30
2700 34.9 56.7 109 11.5
68.5 457 4.13 124 1
W16x31 730 11.8 23/a 5.88 3 /a 87.6 155 26.9
115 186 358 313
1610 10800 38.6 1160 83000 665 12.0 21ta 6.02 27/a 80.6 143 26.6
W14x730 180 347 286
1470 9800 35.5 1070 74000 111 605 12.2 2 6.10 25/a 73.8 131 26.1
x665 108 175 336 260
x605 1340 8900 32.7 981 66000 550 12.4 17/a 6.22 21f2 67.4 120 25.8
171 329 238
x550 1220 8100 29.9 897 59000 105 500 12.6 13/4 6.31 21f4 61.8 110 25.5
52500 101 165 317 215 ,sta 21/a
1100 7350 27.6 828 455 12.8 6.38 56.8 101 25.2
x500 98.2 160 307 196
1010 6700 25.4 762 46800 426 12.9 11f2 6.47 2 52.7 94.0 25.1
x455 97.7 159 305 183
x426 938 6250 23.7 712 43500 398 13.1 13/a 6.53 17/a 49.4 88.4 24.9
95.8 156 299 171
878 5850 22.3 669 40100 370 13.2 11/4 6.59 13/4 46.2 82.7 24.8
x398 153 294 159
x370 818 5450 20.9 626 36800 94.0 342 13.3 11f4 6.66 15/a 42.7 76.6 24.6
92.6 151 290 148
758 5050 19.3 580 33600 311 13.4 11/a 6.69 11/2 38.9 69.9 24.3
x342 90.7 147 283 134
x311 686 4570 17.7 532 30200 283 13.5 1 6.76 13/a 35.4 63.7 24.2
89.2 145 279 122
625 4170 16.2 486 27100 257 13.6 1 6.82 11f4 32.1 58.1 24.0
x283 87.2 142 273 111
567 3780 14.9 447 24400 233 13.8 7/ a 6.88 11/a 28.9 52.4 23.9
x257 86.5 141 270 101
514 3430 13.4 403 21800 211 13.8 3/4 6.92 1 26.3 47.8 23.7
x233 84.4 137 264 91.0
465 3100 12.3 370 19500 193 13.9 3/4 6.96 23.6 43.2 23.6
x211 84.3 137 263 83.3
2840 11.2 337 17800 176 14.0 5/a 7.02 7/a 21.9 40.1 23.6
x193 426 133 255 76.0
2590 10.4 313 16000 81.7 159 14.1 5/a 7.06 3/4 19.4 35.7 23.4
x176 389 132 254 68.6
2340 9.40 282 14400 81.4 145 14.1 5/a 7.07 3/4 17.4 32.4 23.3
x159 350 131 252 62.6
2140 8.58 257 13000 80.8
x145 320 132 13.4 1f2 6.71 3/4 16.4 30.6 22.1
76.5 124 239 56.5
291 1940 8.15 245 11700 5/a
W14x132 82 9.08 1f2 4.54 12.4 23.7 15.2
57.7 93.8 180 34.1 3/a
180 1200 6.42 193 6950 74 9.20 4.60 1f2 10.7 20.6 15.2
W14x82 59.1 96.1 185 31.0 1/2
164 1090 5.68 171 6300 68 9.17 3/a 4.59 9.65 18.8 15.0
x74 58.8 95.6 184 28.6
,1 1000 5.21 156 5750
x68 150 53 7.32 3/a 3.66 3/a 8.32 16.5 12.1
:1
49.9 81.1 156 21.7 3/a
117 780 4.65 140 4360 48 7.35 3/a 3.68 7.44 14.9 12.0
W14x53 48.8 79.2 152 19.6
"1,
106 705 4.29 129 3920
x48 38 6.15 3/a 3.08 3/a 6.48 13.3 10.2
:11, 40.5 65.8 126 14.9
4.05 122 3080
:¡ W14x38 84.0 560
32.2 52.3 101 9.84
26 4.52 3/a 2.26 3/a 4.87 10.5 7.55
¡!\ 57.7 385 3.33 100 2010
W14x26
ti!
;1
lii AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEJ !Nc.
"!j". AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc.
3-178 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTll..IZING R > 3 TABLES
3-179

Table 3-1 (conti~ued)

Table 3-1 (contin
<\>=0.90' EBF Link EBF Link
Ry = 1.1 Design Values Fy = 50 ksi
Design
W Shapes W Shapes
Brac;lng FQrce
O.15Py Py 1.~Mp 2.6Mp ~ Nominal
Aw Vp JYlp 1).06M,
Shape Vp Vp Vp Wl
--¡¡;;-
kips kips 2
In. kips kip-in. in. in. in. Idps
W12x336 741 4940 19.4 581 302QO 83.0 135 259 144 336 9.84
x305 672 4480 17.7 532 26900 80.7 131 252 130
4.92 17/a 50.0 89.2 20.1
305 9.94 4.97
x279 614 4100 16.8 503 24100 76.5 124 239 118 ! 1% 45.6 81.5 19.8
279 10.0 5.02
x252 555 3700 15.3 458 21400 74.8 122 234 107 1% 42.7 76.4 19.7
252 10.2 5.10
x230 508 3390 14.1 424 19300 72.8 118 228 97.8 1112 38.9 69.7 19.5
230 10.3
x210 464 3090 12.9 386 17400 72.2 117 225 89.7
5.16 13/a 35.7 64.1 19.4
210 10.4 5.22
x190 419 2790 11.6 347 15600 71.6 116 224 81.1 11/4 32.5 58.4 19.2
190 10.6 7/a 5.29
x170 375 2500 10.4 313 13800 70.2 114 219 73.0 11/a 28.9 52.2 19.1
170 10.7 3/4 5.34
x152 335 2240 9.48 284 12200 68.3 111 214- 65.2 1 26.0 47.1 18.9
152 10.8 3/4 5.38 7/a
x136 299 2000 8.61 258 10700 66.3 108 207 58.1 23.4 42.5 18.8
136 10.8 5ta 5.41 7/a
x120 265 1770 7.72 232 9300 64.2 104 201 51.2 120 21.0 38.4 18.6
10.9 5/a 5.44 3/4
xl06 234 1560 6.66 200 8200 65.7 107 205 45.4 106 18.7 34.3 18.5
11.0 V2 5.49 5/a
x96 212 1410 6.00 180 7350 65.4 106 204 41.1 15.7 29.1 18.3
96 11.1 112 5.55 5/a 14.0 26.1 18.3
W12x50 110 730 4.04 121 3600 47.5 77.1 148 20.5 50 7.34 % 3.67 3/a 8.66
x45 98.3 655 3.67 110 3210 46.7 75.8 146 18.4 45 16.8 12.1
7.38 3/a 3.69 3/s 7.63 15.0 12.1
W12x35 77.3 515 3.44 103 2560 39.7 64.5 124 14.1 35 5.96 3/a 2.98 3/a 6.50 13.1 9.84
W12x22 48.6 324 2.98 89.3 1470 26.2 42.6 82.0 8.14 22 3.51 3/a
x19 41.8 279 1.76 3/a 5.34 11.1
2.70 81.1 1240 24.4 39.6 76.2 6.88 19 3.54 6.05
3ta 1.77 3/a 4.61 9.78
Wl0xl12 6.02
247 1650 6.72 202 7350 58.3 94.8 182 47.~ 112
xl00 221 1470 6.02 181 6500 57.5 93.5 180 43.0
8.89 sta 4.45 7/a 20.4 37.0 15.6
100 8.94 5/a 4.47 3/4
x88 194 1300 5.34 160 5650 56.5 91.8 176 38.0 18.2 33.1 15.5
88 9.09 112 4.55 5/a
x77 170 1130 4.70 141 4880 55.4 90.1 173 33.1 16.0 29.3 15.5
77 9.14 112 4.57 5/a
x68 150 1000 4.16 125 4270 54.6 88.8 171 • 29.2 13.8 25.4 15.3
68 9.16 3/a 4.58 112 12.0 22.4 15.2
Wl0x45 99.8 665 3.10 93.0 2750 47.2 76.7 148 19.1 45 7.32 3/a 3.66 3/a 8.48 16.2
Wl0x30 12.0
66.3 442 2.84 85.3 1830 34.3 55.8 107 12.1 30 5.21 3/a
x26 57.1 381 2.45 73.5 1570 34.1 55.4 2.61 3/a 6.90 13.5
106 10.5 26 5.25 3/e 8.72
2.63 3/e 5.74 11.5
Wl0x19 42.2 281 8.66
2.35 70.6 1080 24.5 39.8 76.5 7.27 19 3.52 3te 1.76 3/e 5.46 11.0
x17 37.4 250 2.27 68.0 935 22.0 35.8 68.8 6.32 17 3.53 3/e 6.03
1.77 3/e 5.18 10.5 6.02

AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INc.

AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~sTR~utrl0N, INc.
 BRACED FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 4--1
3-180

PART4
MOMENT FRAME SYSTEMS TILIZING R > 3

SCOPE ............................................................ 4-2

ORDINARY MOMENT FRAME (OMF) SYSTEMS ......................... 4-2
OMF DESIGN EXAMPLES ............. : .............................. 4-4
Example 4.1. OMF Story Drift and Stability Check ........................ 4-4
Example 4.2. OMF Column Design ......: .............................. 4-7
Example 4.3. OMF Beam Design ..................................... 4-13
Example 4.4. OMF Beam-Column Connection ..................... 4-16
SPECIAL MOMENT FRAME (SMF) AND
MOMENT FRAME (IMF) SYSTEMS ............. . .................... 4-24
IMF DESIGN EXAMPLES .............. 1• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • , •••• 4-28
Example 4.5. IMF Story Drift and Stability Check.. . .................... 4-28
Example 4.6. IMF Column Design ....... '. . . . . .. . ..................... 4-31
Example 4.7. IMF Beam Design ........ '.' ........................... 4-38
SMF DESIGN EXAMPLES ..................... . .................... 4-42
Example 4.8. SMF Story Drift and Stability Check.. . .................... 4-42
Example 4.9. SMF Column Design .................................. 4-45
Example 4.10. SMF Beam Design .............. . .................... 4-53
Example 4.11. SMF Beam-Column Connection .................... 4-59
COLUMN SPLICE DESIGN EXAMPLES . . . . . . . . .. . .................... 4-68
Example 4.12. Gravity Column Splice Design in Frame Building ...... 4-68
Example 4.13. SMF Column Splice Design ............................ 4-73
,
TABLES .................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .................... 4-77
i Table 4.1. Comparison of Requirements for SMF and .................. 4-77
Table 4.2. SMF Design Tables ....................................... 4-77
PART 4 REFERENCES .......................................... , ... 4-79

AMERICAN lNsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, lNC. AMERICAN lNSTITUTE OF STEEL COlI/STFtUQJ10N, lNc.
 MOMENT FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 ORDINARY MOMENT FRAME (OMF) SYSTEMS
4-2 4-3

required r~lnt()tc:ínE:-fiUet
toIdbe back-gouged and provided with a ..
SCOPE U
+;l' weld. If tJ:¡e connection
The Seismic Provisions requirements and other design considerations surnmarized in this Prulzes. we -access holes, they are required to with the requirements of Seismic
Part apply to the design of the members and connections in moment frames that utilize a S o.vIs.ions P Section 11.2a(2). The required WelQ-aC(~esll;:-h()lp configuration is shown in
els.IDlc. . rovisions Figure 11-1. FinalIy, for FR connections that use double-sided
response modification factor, R, greater than 3. al-Jomt-penetration groove welds or double-sided
paro.
d d welds, such welds must be
In the Seismic Provisions, moment frames are separated into three categories: Ordinary
Moment Frame (OMF) systems, Intermediate Moment Frame (IMF) systems, and Special SeS.lgn.e Pto support a required strength equal to 1. g of the cOImected parto The
elSIDlC rovisions also stipulate that singIe-sided groove welds
Moment Frame (SMF) systems.
and single-sided fillet welds are not to be used to tensile forces.
PR m.oment connections are re,quired to deV,elop strength limits as FR moment
ORDINARY MOMENT FRAME (OMF) SYSTEMS connecuons. In addition, it is noted that PR mo~,ent {'olru)e~cti'ons
~ must have a nominal flex-
Ordinary Moment Frame (OMF) systems resist lateral forces through the flexural and shear ural strength no less than 0.50Mp of the conne~ted beam column. It is also noted that the
strengths of the beams and columns. Lateral displacement is resisted primarily through the strength and flexibility of the connection mu~t' be COl1s141en~d
effects on overall frame stability. in the design, including the
flexural stiffness of the framing members and the restraint of relative rotation between the
beams and columns at the connections, or "frame action." OMF systems must be capable of Both FR and PR ~oment connections ar~ required have an available shear strength
providing an interstory drift angle of at least 0.01 radian. Note that the use of this system is greater than the reqUlreq strength, Vu ' as detetmined the load combination of 1.2D +
permitted within the limits of the applicable building codeo 0.5L + 0.2S plus shear resulting from the application of moment equaling,
OMF systems tend to have larger and heavier beam and column sizes than in braced-
frame systems, as the beams and columns are often sized for drift control rather than 2 l.IRy PMJ
strength. The increase in member sizes and related costs, however, may be acceptable based [ Lh
on the increased flexibility in the architectural and mechanical layout in the structure. The
absence of diagonal bracing members can provide greater freedom in the configuration of where Lh is the distance between plastic hinges.
walls and in the routing of mechanical ductwork and piping. As with other moment frame A.lesser value is permitted if justified by analysis.
systems, OMF systems are usually positioned at the perimeter of the structure, allowing moment connections are further
reqUlre d to develop, in addition to the load combina+;on
maximum flexibility of the interior spaces. The flexible nature of the frames, however, does th u the shear strength to resist'
e m~im~m end moment that can be resisted hy the cOl1lDe:ctilons
warrant sorne additional consideration of the interaction between the steel frame and more
ConunUlty
Id plates are required for
, v
FR moment "olllle:ctjc)ns w~en the connection utilizes
rigid architectural cladding systems. a w~ e.d flange or a welded flange plateo Special ' the attachment of the
The Seismic Provisions provide for two connection types when designing OMF sys- for
conOtinUlty p1ates to the column are outlined in the Provisions. See Section 11.5.
tems - fully restrained (FR) and partially restrained (PR). For the purposes of discussion,
MF. system~ are not required to have any special . of the panel zones, and have
FR is defined as having sufficient rigidity in the connection to maintain the angles
no
. dispeclal
. requrrements for the relationship between an,d column strength. This is
between members upon application of loads, while PR is defined as having insufficient
m. ca.uv: 11
of the overall OMF system, where the detaJ.·ling • are reduced and the
rigidity in the connection to maintain these angles upon load application.
sels~c O:fC~s are larger than moment frame systems 1~+~_"'_...l to provide higher amounts of
FR moment connections are required to be designed to reach a required flexural strength,
ducuhty. This basic design philosophy for OMF systems for their use as an economi-
cal moment frame system when OMF systems are perrnitltedl by the applicable building'code.

where,
Ry = ratio of the expected yield strength, Se' to the minimum specified yield strength, F'.¡
(Seismic Provisions Table 1-6-1)
Mp = nominal plastic flexural strength for either the beam or the girder

Altematively, the connections may be designed for the maximum force that can be delivered
to the frame by the surrounding components in the structural system, if this force is less than
1.1RyMp of the beam or girder; refer to Seismic Provisions Cornmentary Section C1l.2a. FR
moment connections also require the removal of backing bars in complete-joint-penetration
groove welds, except at top flange connections where the backing bar is connected to the
column with a continuous fillet weld. Upon removal of the backing material, the weId is

.AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, INc. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUC:nOiN. INc.
 MOMENT FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 OMF DESIGN EXAMPLES 4-5
4-4

OMF DESIGN EXAMPLES

30'-0" 30'-0",
Example 4.1. OMF Story Drift and Stability Check
Refer to the roof plan shown in Figure 4-1 and the OMF elevation shown in
Given:
Figure 4-2. Determine if the frame satisfies the drift and stability requirements
based on the following loading. The Applicable Building Code specifies the use
of ASCE 7 for calculation of loads.

D = 15 psf s = 20 psf L,= 20 psf

W12x35 Zx = 51.2 in.3

W18x40 Zx = 78.4 in.3

From ASCE 7, the Seismic Use Group is 1, the Seismic Design Category is D,
R = 3.5, C
d
= 3, 1 = 1.0, P = 1.3, and SDS = 0.533.
0. 2S vs = 0.2(0.533) = 0.107

Solution: Check drift

From an elastic anaIysis of the structure that includes second-order effects and
panel-zone deformations, the drift is,

Bxe = 1.20 in.

Figure 4-1. OMF and OCBF roofplanfior Examples 3 , 3.2, 3.3, 4.1, 4.2, and 4.3.
Per Seismic Provisions Section 3, the Design Story Drift and the story drift
limits are those stipulated by the Applicable Building Codeo From ASCE 7, the
allowable story drift, l1 , is 0.025hsx' where hsx is the story height below level x.
a

l1a = 0.025hsx =0.025(17 ft)(12 in./ft) = 5.10 in.

30'-0"
ASCE 7 defines the Design Story Drift as Bx' the deflection of Level x at the
center of mass.
W18x40
o = CdOxe (ASCE 7)
x 1

o = 3(1.20 in.)
x 1.0

= 3.60 in. < 5.10 in.

ox <11 a o.k.

Figure 4-2. OMF elevationfor Examples 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, and 4.4.

.
For roofplan see Figure 4-1
1 AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~sTRuctlON. !Nc.
 4-6 MOMENT FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 OMF DESIGN EXAMPLES
4-7

Check trame tor instability Therefore,

The cornmentary to Seismic Provisions Section 3 provides a method for the
evaluation of the P-D. effects on moment frames based on a dtift index, \{Ji' \{J 180 kipS(3.5)(1.20 in.)
73.8 kips( 17 ft)( 12 inJft)
ti
(Seismic Provisions C3-1)
l!
Per Seismic Provisions Commentary C3, since \{J < 0.3, tbe structure
is considered stable. I

! Aroo! = 75 ft(120

Ji =PD +0.25PL
ft) = 9,000 ft2
Alternatively, a more detailed analysis can
on each column. Such an analysis would
shear quantity, ~i' and thus a reduction in
completed to reflect the axial load
in an increase in the plastic story

Psf(9,00~ ft2)+ 0.25(20 Psf)(9,000 ft2)

drift indexo
=15

=180 kips Example 4.2. OMF Column Design

Since the columns have a lower plastic section modulus than the girders and the Given: Refer to Column C-l in Figure 4-2: Vet:ernline the adequacy of the ASTM A992
frame is continuous over multiple bays, all columns do not meet the strong- wide-flange section (~ = 50 ksi, ~ = 65 for the following loading. The
column weak-beam criterion. Therefore, Applicable Building Code specifies the use ASCE 7 for calculation of loads.
m
PD =9 kips PLr = 7 kips
~MpC PQE = ±2 kips
k=l k
V. (Seismic Provisions C3-3) VD = 0.49 kips VLr = 0.40 kips VQE = ±2.23 kips
yz H
! I
M D top = 8 kip-ft M' =7 M S top= 11 kip-ft
Note that half of Equation C3-3 applies because the columns are pinned at the Lrtop
base. M QE top= ±36.3 kip-ft
The calculation of M e requires the consideration of the axialloads present in
P k
each column. Seismic Provisions Section 9.6 allows this to be calculated as, W12x35 d = 12.5 in. = 0.300 in. Ix = 285 in. 4
Ag = 10.3 in. 2 = 5.25 in. ry = 1.54 in.
Sx = 45.6 ip.3 Zx = 51.2 in. 3 rts = 1.79
le
- - = 0.00135
Sh
x o
A conservative approach to this calculation is to as sume that all frame columns
have the same axial load and that this load is equal to load on the most heavily . W18x40
loaded frame column. From analysis, the largest value of Pu is 11.3 kips.
From ASeE 7, Seismic Design Category is p = 1.3, and SDS = 0.533.
M
pCk
3
=51.2 in. (50 ksi 11.3 kiPSJ(~)=209
10.3 in. 2
12 in.
kip-ft 0.2SDS = 0.2(0.533) = 0.107:

Assume there is no transverse loading the column supports in the

Since there are two frames, each with three identical columns,
plane of bending and that the beani framing the column's weak axis pro-
duces a negligible moment out of plane of frame.
V .
2( 3)( 209 kip-ft) 73.8 kips
yz 17 ft

AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INc. AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL COJIISTRUdrlON, INc.
 4-8 MOMENT FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 OMF DESIGN EXAMPLES
4-9

Solution: Check column element s/enderness With one lateral-frame beam and one -frame column at the connection
The width-thickness ratio for the flanges is located at the column top,

b¡
I..¡=-=6.31 285 in. 4 /17 ft
2t¡
(Specification B4.1)
Gtop
612in. 4 30ft
I 0.822

Por flexure, the limiting width-thickness ratio for compact flanges is,
Prom the notes for Cornmentary; Figures
pinned-base connection. Using ~pleClJtIc'ltIolQ.
') = . 8Jf, = 0.38 29,000 ksi = 9.15 (Specification Table B4.1) it may be possible to determine a
/\'p 03 F 50 k SI.
y
column behavior through the use of the reduction factor, t , in the
a
calculation of 6).
Since ":r < I..p ' the flanges are compact for flexure.
The width-thickness ratio fQf the web is, The leaning column;amplifier is (Lim and

h
I.. w =-= 36.2
tw
(Specification B4.2) 1+ L P/eaning
LPstability
Por flexure, the limiting width-thickness ratio for a compact web is,
With 3,375 ft2 tributary to the stability and 5,625 ft2 tributary to the
leaning columns, and a uniform load over
(Specification Table B4.1)

2
5,625 ft 6
A =3.76 29,000 ksi. 1+ 1. 3
p 50 ksi 3,375 ft2
=90.6 Therefore,
Since I..w < I..p ' the web is compact for flexure. Kx = 1.63 x 1.9 = 3.10
Therefore, the W12x35 is compact for flexure. Por compression, similar checks Prom Specification Section C1.3a and COI!IlIIjlentary Table C-C2.2, Ky = 1.0.
can be made. Altematively, the listing for a W12x35 in Manual Table 1-1 has
a footnote indicating that the web is slender. Therefore, the column strength
may be reduced by the web slendemess. Determine the compression C''tr.can'''Y.,.H of the column

Check unbraced length KL

x x
3.10(17 ft)(12 %) 120
Prom Manual Table 3-2, r-x 5.25 in.

Lp = 5.44 ft Lr = 16.7 ft
KyLy = 1.0(17.0 ft)(12 iIJfi)
132
ry 1.54 in.

Using Manual Table 6-1 with KyLy = 17 ft,

Determine K
Por the x-x axis, p=0.00751 kips-l
1 i

cp P =-=133kips
e n p
(Specification Figure C-C2.4)

i!l

L AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INc.

AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL COI'ISTRUt'r:ION, lNe.
4-10 MOMENT FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 OMF DESIGN EXAMPLES
4-11

Determine the flexural strength

From Specification Section F2, with compact flanges and web and Lb> Lr' the (SpecifiGation C2-4)
applicable limit states are yielding and lateral-torsional buckling.
WithM1 =0,
(Specification F2-3)

2
C n2 E le L Considering the load combinations given in 7, it was determined that the
F b
cr( L r
b
/)2
ts
1+0.078(---12..
Sh
xo rts J( J (Specification F2-4) governing load combination for the column

1.2D + 1.0E + 0.5L + O.2S (ASCE 7)

Since this column has no intermediate loads, the moment diagram is a straight
Therefore, for the axial load,
line, and the altemative Cb equation from the Commentary to the Specification
can be used. Pu = (1.2+ O.2SDS )PD +PPQ ,+O.5P
E
L
=1.31PD +1.3PQ +O.5PL +O.2P
E S
(Specification C-Fl-l)

Pnt =1.31(9 kips) + 1.3(0 kips) + 0.5(0 +0.2(12 kips)

WithM1 =0, =14.2 kips
C b = 1.75 Plt = 1.31(0 kips) + 1.3(2 kips) + 0.5(0 + 0.2(0 kips)
=1.60kips
2
1.75n 29,000 1+0.078 (0.00135 )( -
17 x-
12 J2
F n 2El n 2 (29,000 ksi) 285
cr (17XI2J2 1.79 Pel = _o--2 = -----~--_l__!_ = 1,960 kips (Specification

1.79
(KL) [1.0(17 ft)(12 in.jft) C2-5)

Therefore,
=59.3 ksi

M n = 59.3 kS{ 45.6 in. 3 1

)( ':2 inJ : ; 50 ksi(51.2 in. 3 1
)( ':2 inJ Bl 0.6 >1.0
1-[ (1.0 )16.8 kipS] :
= 225 kip-ft ::; 213 kip-ft
1,960 kips
=213 kip-ft
= 0.605~1.0

<\>bMn= 0.90(213 kip-ft) = 192 kip-ft =1.0

Consider second-order effects (Specification C2-3)

Bl = Cmp ~1 (Specification C2-2)

1-~ Assuming no translation due to gravity loads aIi translation is due to the
Pel
seismic load,
For the calculation of B l'
kPnt = 1.31(15 Psf)(9,000 ft2 )+ 1.3( O)

<X. = 1.0 + 0.5(0)+ 0.2( 20 Psf)( 9,000 ft2 )

=213 kips

AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCI10N, !Nc.

AMERiCAN !NSTITUTE OF SiEEL Cm{STRUCTION. !Nco
 4-12 MOMENT FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 OMF DESIGN EXAMPLES
4-13

2 4 P. M M
1t (29,000 ksi)( 285 in. ) _r_ + --L!... + ---2. ::;; 1. O
2~Pc M ex M ey (Specification Hl-Ib)
204 kips
[3.10(17 ft)(12 in./ft)J2 0.130 69.8 kip-ft O O 29
- -+ + = .4
2 192 kip-ft
Since there are two frames, and ignoring the potential reduction in Kx for the
middle column, 0.429 < 1.0 o.k.

Check the shear strength of the

Therefore,
2.24j!;=2.24 29,000 ksi =53.9
1.21 F 50 ksi .
y
(1.0)( 213 kjps)
1,220 kips Since h/tw = 36.2 < 53.9,

Pr =Pnt + B2Pzt (Specification G2-1)

=14.2 kips+ 1.21( 2.60 kips)

(Specification G2-2)
=17.3 kips
~v Vn = 1.0 ( 0.6 )(50 ksi)( 12.5 in.)( O
Mnt = 1.31( 8 kip-ft) + 1.3( O kip-ft)+ O.s( O kip-ft) + 0.2( 11 kip-ft) = 113 kips > 3 .67 kips
= 12.7 kip-ft
Altematively, using Table 4-2 (~ = 1.00) for W12x35 column,
MIt =1.31(0 kip-ft) + 1.3(36.3 kip-ft)+O.s(O kip-ft) + 0.2(0 kip-ft)
=47.2 kip-ft <l>vVn = <l>RvI =113 kips
Note that for shapes with h/tw > 2.24!iiii; <l>v = 0.90 must beused in the
(Specification e2-la)
shear strength check.

M r = 1.0 ( 12.7 kip-ft)+ 1.21( 47.2 kip-ft)

=69.8 kip-ft
The W12x35 is adequate to resist the given for Column C-I.
Vu =(1.2+0.2SDS )VD +pV +0.5VL +O.2VS (ASeE 7)
QE

Vu =1.31(0.49 kips) + 1.3(2.23 kips )+0.5( O kips )+0.2( 0.65 kipS) Example 4.3. OMF Beam Design
=3.67 kips
Given: Refer to Beam BM-l in Figure 4.--2. Detencrnrte the adequacy of the ASTM
A992 wide-flange section (~= 50 ksi, ~ = ksi) for the following loading.
Check combined loading The Applicable Building Code specifies the of ASCE 7 for calculation of
loads. The governing load combination, inc1udes seismic effects, is,
Pr 17.3kips 0.130
Pe 133 kips 1.2D + 1.0E + 0.5L + 0.2S (ASeE 7)

The beam required strengths are,

Since P/Pc < 0.2,
M u =-77.2 kip-ft

~~, AMERICAN !NsTlTUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL Cm"STFlUc!:1loN, !Nc.

~----------~~"-~=~===""""""..........._ - - - - - - - - - - - - -
 MOMENT FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 OMF DESIGN EXAMPLES
~14
4-15

The factored beam moments at the quarter points are, Determine the flexural strength
From Specification Section F2, with compact and web and Lb > Lr' the
M1I4= -10.9 kip-ft M 1/2 = 29.9 kip-ft M3/4= -45.1 kip-ft
applicable limit states are yielding and laII~r~lll-t()'rc;:ir\n<>1 buckling.

W18x40 d= 17.9 in. t w = 0.315 in. ry = 1.27 in.

(Specification F2-3)
Sx = 68.4 in. 3 Zx = 78.4 in. 3

~=0.000681
Sx ho
rts = 1.56 in.
1+0.078~[Lb
S h r
J2 (Specification F2-4)
x o ts
, ¡
Assume that the beam flanges are btaced at the columns.

So/ut¡on: Check beam e/ement s/enderness Cb = 12.5Mmax

The width-thickness ratio for the flanges is, (Specification Fl-l)
2.5Mmax + 3M A +4M B + 3M c
b where,
A =í=5.73
f 2t
f
The limiting width-thickness ratio for compact flanges is,
Cb=~~~~~~~~~~~;L--~--~-----
2.5(77.2
A = 0.38 fK = 0.38
~F
29,000 ksi = 9.15
50 ksi
(Specification TabIe B4.1)
p y =2.01

Since 'A¡ < Ap' the flanges are compacto

The width-thickness ratio for the web is,
Fcr
(2.01)1[2(29,000 ksi)
1) [(30 ft)(12 ~./ft)]2
(30 ft)(12 in.Ift)]2 1.56 in.
h [ 1.56 in.
A =-=50.9
W t
W
Fcr = 21.1 ksi
The limiting width-thickness ratio for a compact web is,
S ~Fyx
Mn =Fcrx Z

A = 3.76 fK == 3.76 29;000 ksi '= 90.6 (Specification TabIe B4.1) 21.1 ksi (68.4 in. 3 ) 50 ksi
p ~~ 50k~ ---""----~ <--~--'-I---.!...
12 in./ft - 12 in.1ft
Since Aw < Ap' the web is compacto =120 kip-ft ~ 327 kip-ft
=120 kip-ft
Check unbraced length
From Manual Table 3~2, <l>b M n=0.90(120 kip-ft) = 108 kip-ft>77.2

Lp = 4.49 ft Mu <<l>Mn o.k.

Check shear strength

Note that the infill beams are not described in this example. If the actual fram-
ing were suitable to brace the flanges of the beam being designed, Lb could be 2.24 ~ =2.24 29,000 ksi =53.9
reduced to 6 ft. VFy 50 ksi

AMERICAN iNSTITUTE OF STEEL CbNSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL COI'lSnmC1¡j¡oN, !Nc.
 MOMENT FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 OMF DESIGN EXAMPLES
4-16 4-17

Solution: Determine the expected shear force at the plastic hinge

Since h/tw<2.24~E/Fy ,
For ~s framing arrangement, the plastic will form in the colurnn, so the
Vn = 0.6Fy Aw Cv (Specification G2-1) maxlmurn moment that can be delivered the connection is the column
moment strength, which should be taken as .1Ry'~pcol·
M
(Specification G2-2)
Assuming plastic hinges form at the top each colurnn in the, frame, per
Seisrnic Provisions Section 11.2a, the shear strength is, :
<1> V = 1.00(0.6)(50 ksi)(17.9 in.)(0.315 in.)(1.0)
n
=169 kips > 9.5 kips
V _ 3(1.1Ry M pea l)
beam - 2L
Altematively, using Table 4-2 (<1> = 1.00) for the W18x40 beam,
For ASTM A992, Ry = 1.1.
<1>Vn = <1>Rvl = 169 kips

Note that for shapes with h/tw > 2.24 ~, <1>v = 0.90 rnust be used in the l.1RyM p = l.1Ry FyZ X = 1.1(1.1)( 50 ksi) 51.2 in. 3 )=3,100 kip-in.
shear strength check.
Vgravity =1.2VD + O.5VL + O.2VS

= 1.2 (3.4 kips )+0.5(0 kips)+ .2(4.5 kips)

=4.98 kips
Tbe W18x40 is adequate to resist the loads given for Beam BM-!.
Note that load cornbinations that do not inelude seisrnic effects rnust also be Vu eann =V.
gravtty +Vbeam
investigated. For example, considering the load combination 1.2D + 1.6S,

Mu= 94.0 kip-ft Vu = 14.4 kips

=17.9 kips

Example 4.4. OMF Beam-Column Connection Design

Given: Refer to Joint J-1 in Figure 4-2. Design a directly welded flange FR moment
connection for the joint shown in Figure 4-3. The beam and column are ASTM
A992 wide-flange sections (Ey = 50 ksi, ~ = 65 ksi). Use 70-ksi electrodes.

t w = 0.300 in. b¡= 6.56 in. W18x40

W12x35 d = 12.5 in.
Ag = 10.3 in. 2 kdes = 0.820 in. kdet = 13/16 in. W12x35 IVU'LUIVII~
3
T= 10 1/8 in. t¡= 0.520 in. Zx = 51.2 in.
ASSUMED
W18x40 d = 17.9 in. tw = 0.315 in. t¡= 0.525 in. PLASTIC HINGE
b¡= 6.02 in. Zx = 78.4 in. 3 k 1 = 13116 in. LOCATION

VD = 3.40 kips Vs = 4.50 kips Figure 4-3. Connection giren in 4.4.

I

AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Ne. AMERICAN !NSTlTUlE OF SlEEL Cm~sTR:uctION. !Nc.
~18
MOMENT FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 OMF DESIGN EXAMPLES
4--19

Check column panel zone shear strength thickness is required. )Vith 1. = 0.525 in., a cO~ltlrlUlty pIate thicknesk of 5116 in.
. g the factored moment given in Example
U sm .. 4.3, the required panel zone will work. The mínimum stiffener width to the beam flange width is,
strength fOI this single-sided moment connectlon IS,
6.02· in.- 0.300 in.
Mu 77.2 kip-ft(12 in./ft) _ 53 3 k' 2
R - - . lpS
u= d b -ti - 17.9 in.-0.525 in. Use two pairs oC sh6-in. x 3-in. continuity in the column at the loca-
tioDs oC the top ánd bottom beam tlanges.
From Examp1e 4.1, panel zone deformations we~e included in the analysis of
the structure and from Example 4.2, Pue = 16.8 kips.
Design connection of continuity
2 Assume that plate material with a mínimum
0.75Py = 0.75 (50 ksi) (10.3 in. ) = 386 kips strength of 36 ksi is used for
the continuity pIates. Seismíc Provisions 11.5 specifies that the required
When Pu < 0.75Py ' the panel zone shear strength is, strength of this connectiori must be greater than equal to the design strength of
the contact area of the continuity plate with column flange. To develop the

l J contact area in tension and using the increase strength for transversely Ioaded
3b t 2
R =0.60F d t 1+~ (Specification 110-11) fillet welds allowed by Specification Section the mínimum required double-
n ycw ddt
b e w sided fillet weld size ¡s,

$Rn ~ 0.9( O.60 )(50 ksi )(12.5 in.) (O.300 m.)

. [ 3( 6.56
1+ 17.9
in.)( 0.520 inf I
in.(12.5 in.)(0.300 in.) J
D.
muz
2(1.5)(1.392 kipsfm.)
--:---;-;---t-----'"""-;-
2
= 2.42

=109 kips>53.3 kips Use double-sided, 3/16 -in. fillet welds to the continuity plates lo the
column flanges, which satisfies th~ minilDUJ!lJ size oC fillet weld permitted
by SpecificatiOli Table J2.3.
Altematively, using Table 4-2 ($ = 1.00) for the W12x35 column,

0.75Py = 386 kips Design connection of cdntlnuity plates to column web

To satisfy the tequirements in Seismíc Pr()VUl1OIis
$Rvl = (113 kips) = 113 kips of the continuity plates along the web must be

$Rv2 = (160 kip-in.) = 160 kip-in.

$R
$Rn =$RvI +~d
Use a 21/4-in. clip dimensioD a10ng the web.
b
Seismíc Provisions Section 11.5 specifies that required strength of the con-
160 kip-in.
= 113 kips + --=--- nection of the cóntinuit)f plates to the coIumn
17.9 in. four forces:
be the Ieast of the following
=122 kips
1. The sum of the design strengths oÍ' the COlllle:~tllons of the continuity pIate to
For $ = 0.9, $Rn = 109 kips. the cohimn flanges. With a comer 'clip the flange of 3/4 in.,

=2$F
Ru y Ag t
Since Ru < $R v' a web doubIer pIate is not required.
= 2( 0.90 )( 36 ksi )( 3 in. - X· in. )(~
Size continuity plates . =45.6 kips
Per Seismíc Provisions Section 11.5, continuity plates are requrred because
te! < b¡l6. A thickness greater than or equal to one-half of the beam flange

AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF S1EEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL O·ONS'fRU<:TIQN, !Nc.
 OMF DESIGN EXAMPLES 4-21
MOMENT FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3
4-20

The column local flange bending strength the load applied at less than
2. The design shear strength of the contact area of the plate with the column
lOt! from the member end is,
web. With a comer clip along the web of 21/4 in.,

L=dc -2tfc -2(2.25 in.) Rn = X(6.25t/Fy! ) (Specification 110-1)

= 12.5 in.- 2( 0.520 in.)- 2(2.25 in.)

=6.96 in. ~R. ~ 1,[ 0.90(625)(0.520 ~f (50
Ru =<j>0.6Fy A gv =38.1 kips
= 1.00(0.6)( 36 ksi)( 6.96 in.)(X6 in.) The actual force transmitted ~y the pi ates is the load resulting
=47.0 kips from the beam flange force mmus the design strength based on limít
states evaluated abo ve. Therefore, for each continuity plate, ;
3. The weld design strength that develops the design shear strength of the
column panel zone. Ru = X(53.3 kips-38.1 kips)=7.60
_122 kips -610
. k·IpS
R _---- Therefore, the required strength of the cOlmectic)fi of the continuity Plates to the
u 2
column web is 7.60 kips. The mínimum single-sided fillet weld size is,
4. The actual force transmitted by the stiffener. This is detennined as half of
the difference between the beam flange force and the least design strength Ru
D.
mm
from Specification Section no. The column strength is based on the flange 1.392 kipsfm.( lw)
force being delivered less than d from the top of the column. The length of
7.60 kips
bearingis,
1.392 kipsfm.( 6.96 in.)
N = tb! = 0.525 in. =0.784
The column web yielding strength is, Checking Specification Table 12.4, with the web thickness ::::! 0.300 in.,
the mínimum fillet-weld size is 3116 in.
Rn = (2.5k + N) Fywt w (Specification 110-3)
Use single-sided, 31t6-in. filIet welJ.s to the continuity plates to the
column web.
<j>Rn = 1.00(2.5k + N) Fywt w
= 1.00[ 2.5 (0.820 in.) + 0.525 in.J(50 ksi) (0.300 in.)
Design beam flange-to-colu";n
= 38.6 kips Per Seismíc Provisions Section 11.2a(2), if WelQ-acc:ess holes are provided,
they must comply with Seismic Provisions
The column web crippling strength with N/d < 0.2 and the load applied at
less than d/2 from the member end is,
Use a complete-joint-penetration groove to connect the beam flanges
to the column flange. The we~ld-acc:es:s-hole geometry must comply with
R.~0.40tw2l1+3( ~t; rlrF~tf (Specification J10-5a) Seismic Provisions Figure 11-1.

It is important to note that Seismic p'ro"'ISl¡onS Sections 11.2a(1) and (2) have
additional requirements for treatment of weld . and surface roughness of
Rn = 0.40( 0.3~0 )2[1 + 3(0.525)(0.300)1.5] 29,000(50)(0.520) weld access holes. :
12.5 0.520 0.300

=60.2 kips

<j>Rn = 0.75(60.2 kips) = 45.2 kips

AMERICAN INS'ITTUTE OF STEEL COlIISTFtUC1~ION, INc.
AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, 1Ne.
4-22 MOMENT FRAME SYSTEMS UTIUZING R > 3 OMF DESIGN EXAMPLES 4-23

Design beam web-to..,column flange connection

Select a single-plate connection to support erection loads. With the single plate
as backing, use a CJP groove weld to connect the beam web to the colurnn
flange. Note that other connection details that are capable of providing for 0.01 ASREQUIRED
FOR ERECTION

radian interstory drift angle are permitted as an alternative.

Check beam web strength

Assume a reduced web depth of 12 in. for shear to account for the required weld
access holes.

<l>Rn =<l>0.6F
. y dtw P
=1.00(0.6)(50 ksi)(12 in.)(0.315 in.)
= 113 kips> 17.9 kips

ALTERNATE DETAlL AT TOP

The final c~nnection design and geometry is shown in Figure 4-4.

5116" CONTINUITY
PLATE

W12x35 COL.

TYP.

Figure 4-4. Connection as designed

AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRljJ<::nC)N, !Nc.
4-24 MOMENT FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 SPECIAL MOMENT FRAME AND INTERMEDIATE "'~"YJ..l-'"I' • 4-25

SPECIAL MOMENT FRAME (SMF) ANO INTERMEOIATE Currently, there are two primary methods used to plastic hinging of the beam away
MOMENT FRAME (IMF) SYSTEMS from the column. These two methods focus on either re~lucl'r19 the cross-sectional properties
Special Moment Frame (SMF) and Intermediate Moment Frame (IMF) systems resist lateral of the beam at a defined location away from the or special detailing of the beam-to-
forces and displacements through the flexural and shear strengths of the beams and columns. column connection in order to provide adequate and toughness in the connection to
Lateral displacement is resisted primarily through the flexural stiffness of the framing mem- force inelasticity into the beam just adjacent to the flange. Reduced beam section
bers and the restraint of relative rotation between the beams and columns at the connections, (RBS) connections are typically fabricated by the flanges of the beams at a short
or "frame action." SMF and IMF systems must be capable of providing an interstory drift distance away from the face of the column in order to the beam section properties at
angle of at least 0.04 radian and 0.02 radian, respectively. a defined location for formation of the plastic hinge 4-6). Research has ineluded a
SMF and IMF systems tend to have larger and heavier beam and column sizes than straight reduced segment, an angularly tapered and a circular reduced segment. A
braced-frame systems, as the beams and columns are often sized for drift control rather than higher level of ductility was noted in the latter, and RBS is typically fabricated using a
circular reduced segment.
strength. The increase in member sizes and related costs, however, may be acceptable based
on the increased flexibility in the architectural and mechanical layout in the structure. The Special connection detailing for added toughness strength has taken many forms,
absence of diagonal bracing members can provide greater freedom in the configuration of using both welded and bolted connections. In many of connections, both proprietary and
walls and in the routing of mechanical ductwork and piping. As with other moment-frame nonproprietary, such factors as welding procedures, we:la-aC(~es:~-holp. detailing, web-plate
systems, SMF and IMF systems are usually positioned at the perimeter of the structure, attachment, and flange-plate usage have been For additional information on
allowing maximum flexibility of the interior spaces. The flexible nature of the frames, how- the specification of these connections, see the Connection Standard in Part 6 of
this Manual.
ever, does warrant sorne additional consideration of the interaction between the steel frame
and more rigid architectural eladding systems. Panel zone behavior is difficult to predict and is cOl(np,licate:d by the presence of conti-
Current requirements for SMF and IMF systems are the result of research and analysis nuity plates and doubler plates, as well as k-area s. Three basic approaches are
completed by various groups, ineluding the Federal Emergency Management Agency most commonly used: "strong panel," "balanced and "weak panel." These three
(FEMA), AISC, the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) , the National terms relate the strength and inelastic behavior of the in relation to the strength and
Science Foundation (NSF), and the Structural Engineers Association of California (SEAOC).
These requirements inelude prequalification of the connections used, per Appendix P of the
Seismic Provisions, or qualification through testing in accordance with Appendix S of the
Seismic Provisions. Design and detailing requirements for moment connections prequalified
in accordance with Seismic Provisions Appendix P may be found in ANSIIAISC 358
Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Moment Frames for Seismic Plastic Hinge Zones. Hinge
Applications, herein referred to as the Prequalified Connection Standard. The Prequalified Locations Vary Depending
Connection Standard is ineluded in Part 6 of this Manual. on Connection Type.
One of the primary focal points of the testing requirements rests in the measurement of
inelastic deformations of the beam-to-column moment connections. Initially, plastic rotation
of the specimen was used as the basis for qualification; however, this quantity is dependent
on the selection of plastic hinge locations and member span. To avoid confusion, it was
decided to use the centerline dimensions of the frame to define the total inelastic drift angle,
which ineludes both elastic and inelastic deformations of the connections.
Most beam-to-column. moment connections for SMF and IMF systems develop inelas-
ticity in the beams and in the column panel zone, as shown in Figure 4-5. Panel zone defor-
mation, while more difficult to predict, can contribute a significant amount of ductility in the
frame. There are various factors that must be considered when accounting for panel zone
deformation, including continuity plates, doubler plates, and toughness of the k-area. In
regard to these two areas of inelastic deformation, beam and panel zone, the Seismic
Provisions require that at least 75 percent of the observed inelastic deformation under test- Column Panel
ing procedures be as intended in the design of a prototype connection. This means that if the Zone
connection is anticipated to achieve inelasticity through plastic rotation in the beam, at least
75 percent of the actual deformation must occur in the beam-hinge locations under testing.
Figure 4-5. Areas where inelastic t1p.fonnn~inn may be expected.

AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONST~U(:nCIN, !Nc.
4--26 MOMENT FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 SPECIAL MOMENT FRAME AND INTERMEDIATE MOME FRAME SYSTEMS 4--27

inelastic behavior of the framing members in the connection. In a "strong panel," the panel Another consideration in the design of SMF systems is the concept oí "strong column-
zone strength is greater than the surrounding framing components to the point where the weC!k beam." The Seismic Provisions provide for the prope proportioning of the frame elements
vast majority of the inelastic deformation of the frame occurs in the beam. In a "weak in Equation 9-3:
panel," the strength of the panel zone is low enough relative to the framing members such

LM~e > 1.0

that the majority of the inelastic deformation of the connection and frame occurs in the
panel zone. A "balanced panel" is in between, where inelastic deformation in the framing (Equation 9-3)
members and panel zone are similar. The requirements in the Seismic Provisions pro vide ¿Mpb
the basic panel zone detailing requirements for all of these cases. Additionally, the use of
where,
prequalified or qualified connections enables the designer to choose an approach with an
understanding of the resulting performance. *
~ M pe =
~ the summation of the
. column plastic mom nts

~ ~ I
LM *pb =the summation of the beam plastic momen s
i? ~
'~L\ r~ . J This provision is not intended to eliminate all yielding i the columns. Rather, as described
·:::",,"~~=~=~===~~==~=~=~=~=~-"r in Seismfc Provisions Cornmentary Section C9.6, it is in ~ded to result in framing sys~ems
~W L~ that have distributed inelasticity in large seismic events d discourages story mechanisms.
~
The primary difference between SMF systems and F systems is the interst9ry' drift
~ ~ I
angle capacities. While this requir~ment differs for SMFand IMF systems, there ~e many
requirements that are s~milar between the two frame typ . This comparison is surnmarized
in Table 4-1. '.
REDUCED BEAM
11. SECTION
v

~
1+
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
1
<>
I
I
I
I
t
I
1+
k'

11.
V

Figure 4-6. Reduced beam section (RES) connection.

AMERICAN !NSTITU1E OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NsTITU1E OF STEEL CONSTRU ION, lNe.
 4-28 MOMENT FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3
IMF DESIGN EXAMPLES
4-29

IMF DESIGN EXAMPLES Solution: Check drift

From an elastic analysis of the structure includes second-order effects and
Example 4.5. IMF Story Drift and Stability Check panel zone deformations, the drift is,

Given: Refer to the roof plan shown in Figure 4-7 and the IMF elevation shown in 8 xe =0.933 in.
Figure 4-8. Determine if the frame satisfies the drift and stability r~quirements
based on the following loading. The Applicable Building Code speclfies the use Per Seismic Provisions Section 3, the Story Drift and the story drift
of ASCE 7 for calculation of loads. limits are those stipulated by the Appli<;ablel Building Codeo FromASCE 7, the
allowable story drift, Óa' is 0.025hsx ' where is the story height below level x.
D = 15 psf S = 20 psf Lr = 20 psf
Óa = 0.025hsx = 0.025(17 ft)(12
W12x35 Zx = 51.2 in. 3 A g = 10.3 in. 2
ASCE 7 defines the Design Story Drift as , the deflection of Level x at the
W18x40 Zx = 78.4 in. 3 center of mass.

From ASCE 7, the Seismic Use Group is 1, the Seismic Design Category is D, 8 = Cd 8xe
R = 4.5, Cd = 4, 1 = 1.0, P = 1.3, and SDS = 0.533. x 1 (ASCE 7)

0.2SDS = 0.2(0.533) = 0.107

8x
4( 0.933 in.)
1.0
=3.73 in.<5.l0 in.
1 2 3 4 5
8x <Óa o.k.
30'-0" 30'-0" 30'-0" 30'-0"

¡ Check trame tar instability

The commentary to Seismic Provisions
evaluatíon of the P-Ó effects on moment
3 provides a method for the
based on a drift index, 'P¡.
1I
!'

30'-0"
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~-~~~--~~~~~~~~~~~
q,
W18x40

¡. ~ -1- - - 1-
~~~~-L-L-LJ>'~I.~~_~_~_-_~_~_4._~~~_~_~_~
___~_4~~~~'~~~-~
......, - - -1- - - t- - -

~
:[
:1,
,i
1
L FOR
IMF INVESTIGATED IN PART4
ELEVATION SEE FIGURE 4-8
I

!¡

L
i: Figure 4-8. IMF elevation for Examples 4.6, and 4.7.
Figure 4-7. IMF roofplanfor Examples 4.5,4.6, and 4.7.
¡.\ For roof plan see Figure
·1 ;
AMERICAN lNSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc.
\..!'1.,...... . AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL Cor'¡STl<~uPI0N, !Nc.
, .. ...
~
4-30 MOMENT FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 IMF DESIGN EXAMPLES
4-31

Altematively, a more detailed analysis can be completed to reflect the axial load
(Seismic Provisions C3-1)
on each col~mn. Such an analysis would in an increase in the plastic story
shear quant:Ity, "ji' and thus a reduction the drift indexo

Example 4.6. IMF Column Design

Ji =PD +0.25PLr
Given: Refer to Column C-1 in Figure 4-8. Del:ernlune the adequacy of the ASTM A992
=15 Psf(9,000 ft2 )+0.25(20 Psf)(9,000 ft2)
wide flange section (S = 50 ksi, ~ = ksi) for the following loading. The
=180 kips Applicable Building Code specifies the of ASCE 7 for calculation of loads.

Since the columns have a lower plastic section modulus than the girders and W12x35 d = 12.5 in. tw = 0.300 in. Ix = 285 in. 4
the frame is continuolls over multiple bays, aH columns do not meet the strong- Ag = 10.3 in. 2 rx = 5.25 in. ry = 1.54 in.
column-weak-beam criterion. Therefore,
Sx =45.6 in. 3 Zx = 51.2 in. 3 rts = 1.79 in.
le
s¡; = 0.00135
x o
V. (Seismic Provisions C3) W18x40
yl
H

Note that half of Equation C3-3 applies because the columns are pinned at the PD =9 kips = 12 kips P =±1.70 kips
QE
base.
VD = 0.49 kips VLr = 0.40 kips VQE = ±1.73 kips
The ca1culation of MpCk requires the consideration of the axialloads present in
each column. Seismic Provisions Section 9.6 aHows this to be calculated as, M D tap= 8 kip-ft M Lr tap= 7

MStap = 11 kip-ft
M
pC k
=Z F-2-
x( y P Ág J
From ASCE 7, Seismic Design Category' D, p = 1.3, and SDS = 0.533.
A conservative approach to this calculation is to assume that aH frame columns
have the same axial load and that this load is equal to the load on the most heav- 0.2SDS = 0.2(0.533) = 0.107
ily loaded frame column. From analysis, the largest value of Pu is 11.3 kips.
Assume. there is no transverse loading the column supports in the plane
p of bending and that the beam framing into the column's weak axis produces a
M =51.2 in.3 (50 ksi 11.3 ki sJ(2!LJ=209 kip-ft negligible moment out of plane of the
pC k 10.3 in. 2 12 in.

Since there are two frames, each with three identical coluIims, Solution: Check column element c/'¡:;:;,n"ro,.,.,oc• .¡,

thickness ratio for the flanges is,

2( 3)( 209 kip-ft)
V . 73.8 kips b¡
yl 17 ft fv¡=-=6.31 (Specification B4.1)
2t¡
Therefore,
For flexure, the limiting width-thickness for compact flanges is,
180 kips( 4.5)( 0.933 in.)
\f 0.0502
73.8 kips(17 ft)(12 in.lft) = 9.15 (Specification Table B4.1)

Per Seismic Provisions Commentary Section C3, since \f < 0.3, the structure
is cOllSidered stable.

AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCfION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL COl'lSTE~UC1~ION, !Nc.
4--32 MOMENT FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 IMF DESIGN EXAMPLES
4--33

Since A¡ < Ap' the flanges are compact for flexure. accounting for inelastic column behavior the use ofthe stiffness reduc-
tion factor, 'ta' in the calculation of G).
The width-thickness ratio for the web is,
The framing column amplifier (Lim and
h
Aw=-= 36.2 (Specification B4.2)
tw

For flexure, the limiting width-thickness ratio for a compact web is,

(Specification Table B4.1) With 3,375 ft 2 tributary to the stability and 5,625 ft 2 tributary to the
leaning columns, and a uniform load the entire area,

29,000 ksi
Ap = 3.76 1-5~0-k-s-i- 1+ 5,625 ft2, =1.63
=90.6
3,375 ft2
Therefore,
Since Aw < Ap' the web is compact for flexure.
Therefore, the W12x35 is compact for flexure. For compression, similar checks Kx = 1.63 x 1.9 = 3.10
can be made. Alternatively, the listing in Manual Table 1-1 has a footnote indi-
cating that the web is slender. Therefore, the column strength may be reduced From Specification Section C1.3a and Specification Commentary Table
C-C2.2, Ky = 1.0.
by the web slenderness.

Check unbraced length Determine the compression _<::t~An/"Y'rth of the column

From Manual Table 3-2,
KL
x x
3.1O( 17 ft)( 12 %)
Lp = 5.44 ft Lr = 16.7 ft 120
rx 5.25 in.
Lb = 17.0 ft > Lr
KyLy = 1.0(17.0 ft)(12 i%t)
Determine K 13
ry 1.54 in.
For the x-x axis,
Using Manual Table 6-1 with Ky Ly = 17
G I.Vc/LJ (Cornmentary Figure C-C2.4) p=0.00751 kips-l
I.(IgjLg) -
<1>
1
P =-=133 kips
c n p
With one lateral-frame beam and one lateral-frame column at the connection
located at the column top,
Determine the flexural strength
G _ 285 in.4 f17 ft From Specification Section F2, with flanges and web and Lb> Lr' the
0.822
top- 612 in.4 hO
ft applicable limit states are yielding and -torsional buckling.

From the notes for Specification Commentary Figures C-C2.3 and C-C2.4, Mn=FcrSx :::;M p (Specification F2-3)
G = 10 for a pinned base connection. Using Specification Commentary Figure
C-C2.2b, Kx = 1.9 (note that it may be possible to determine a reduced value by

AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcrION, !Nc. AMERICAN INSTlTUTE OF STEEL CQlIlST~.ucrION, !Nc.
 4-34 MOMENT FRAME SYSTEMS UTlLIZING R > 3 IMF DESIGN EXAMPLES
f 4-35

j WithM} =0,

(Specification F2-4)
Cm =0.6

Considering the load combinations given· ASCE 7, it was detennined that the
goveming load combination for the is,
Since this column has no intermediate loads, the moment diagram is a straight
line, and the altemative Cb equation from the Cornmentary to the Specification I.2D + 1.0E + 0.5L + 0.2S (ASCE 7)
can be used.
Therefore, for the axial load,

(Specification C-Fl-l) Pu =(1.2+0.2S DS )PD +PPQ +0.5P +O.2P

E
S
= 1.3 lPD +1.3PQ +O.5PL +0
WithM} =0, E

Cb = 1.75 Pnt =1.31(9 kips) + 1.3(0 kips) + 0.5(0 +0.2(12 kips)

=14.2kips

1.75rr,2(29,000 ksi) 1+0.078(0.00135)(17 ft x12 in.J2 Pzt = 1.31 (O kips) + 1.3(1.70 kips) + O
F
cr
17 ft x 12 in. J
2 1.79 =2.21 kips
( 1.79
rr,2 El rr,2 (29,000 ksi) 285
Fcr =59.3 ksi
Pel =- - = - - - - - - - ' - - f - - : , . . . . . ! . . .
(KL)2 [1.0(17 ft)(12
3
M n =(59.3 ksi)(45.6 in ) (1 ft/12 in.) :s; 50 ksi( 51.2 in. 3
)( 1 ';2 inJ Therefore,
= 225 kip-ft :s; 213 kip-ft
B
l
= 0.6 >1.0
<1>bMn = 0.90(213 kip-ft) = 192 kip-ft 1_((1.0)16.4 kiPSJ
1,960 kips
Consider second-order effects
= 0.605 ~ 1.0
C
(Specification C2-2) Therefore,

Bl =1.0

For the calculation of B l' (Specification C2-3)

Pr = Pnt + Pzt
Assuming no trans1ation due to gravity and all translation is due to the
a=1.0
seismic load,

(Specification C2-4) 2
LPnt = 1.31( 15 psf )(9,000 ft )+ 0.5(0 +0.2(20 psf )(9,000 ft2 )

=213 kips

AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL Cm.sT*.uCTION, !Ne.
 MOMENT FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 IMF DESIGN EXAMPLES 4-37
4-36

Since P/ Pe < 0.2,

1[2 (29,000 ksi)( 285 in.4 )
204 kips P. M M
_ r +~+--2..<1.0 (Specification Hl-l b)
[3.10(17 ft)(12 in./ft)r 2Pe M ex M ey

Since there are two frames, and ignoring the potential reduction in Kx for the 0.127 + 59.0 kip-ft +0=0.371
middle column, 2 192 kip-ft

LP = 2( 3Pe2 ) = 6( 204 kips) = 1,220 kips 0.371 < 1.0 o.k.

e2

Therefore, Check the shear strength of the

1.0
1.21 2.24 ~ E ~ 2.24 29,000 ksi ~
1.0 ( 213 kips ) Fyw 50 ksi
1,220 kips
Since h/tw <2.24~E/Fyw'
Determine lateral-translation moments (Mlt ) and nontranslation moments (Mnt)'
Vn = 0.6Fy Aw Cv (Specification G2-1)
M =1.3(29.5 kip-ft)=38.3 kip-ft
I1
Cv = 1.0 (Specification G2-2)
M nt = 1.31 (8 kip-ft) + 0.5(0 kip-ft) + 0.2(11 kip-ft) = 12.7 kip-ft

Pr =Pnt + Biít <1\ Vn = 1.0 ( 0.6)( 50 ksi)( 12.5 in.)( 0.3

= 14.2 kips + 1.21(2.21 kips) = 113 kips > 3.02 kips
=16.9 kips
Altematively, using Table 4-2 (<1> = 1.00) the W12x35 column,
M = B1Mnt + B2M 11 (Specification C2-la)
r
= 1.0(12.7 kip-ft) + 1.21( 38.3 kip-ft) <1> vVn = <1>v RvI =113 kips

=59.0 kip-ft Note that for shapes with h/tw > 2.24 , <1>v = 0.90 must be used in the
shear strength check.
Vu = (1.2 + 0.2S DS )VD + pVQE + 0.5VL + 0.2Vs (AS CE 7)

, : =1.31( 0.49 kipS) + 1.3 ( 1.73 kips )+0.5( O kips )+0.2( 0.65 kips)
The Wl2x35 is adequate to resist the given for Column C-I.
=3.02 kips

Check combined loading

Pr 16.9 kips 0.127

Pe 133 kips

AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~snj~UCT'lON, !Ne.
4-38 MOMENT FRAME SYSTEMS UTll...IZING R > 3 IMF DESIGN EXAMPLES 4-39

Since A.w < A.p ' the web is compacto

Example 4.7. IMF &le8m Design

Given: Refer to Beam BM-l in Figure 4-8. Detenmne the adequacy of the ASTM Check unbrace~ length
A992 wide-~ange section (~ = 50 ksi, ~ = 65 ksi) for the following loading. From Manual Table 3-2,
The Applicable Building Code specifies the use of ASCE 7 for calculation of
loads. The governing load combination that ineludes seismic effects is, Lp = 4.49 ft Lr = 13.1 ft

1.2D + 1.0E + 0.5L + 0.2S (ASCE 7) Lb = 30.0 ft > Lr

The required strengths are, Note that the infill beams are not aes:cnloeq in this example. If the actual fram-
ing were suitable to brace the flanges of beam being designed, Lb could be
Mu= -69.9 kip-ft Vu = 8.90 kips reduced to 6 ft.
The factored beam moments at quaiter points are,
Determine the flexural strength
M 1I4 =-8.10 kip-ft M 1/2 = 28.2 kip-ft M 3/4 = -38.9 kip-ft From Specification Section F2, with flanges and web and Lb> Lr' the
applicable limit states are yielding and torsional buckling.
W18x40 d=17.9iíi. tw = 0.315 in. ry = 1.27 in.
Sx = 68.4 in. 3 Zx = 78.4 in. 3 (Specification F2-3)

~=0.000681

r
rts = 1.56 in.
Sx ho
C7tE le
Assume that the beam flanges are braced at the columns. F,,= (~: 2 1+0.078 Sxho
(J( J2 (Specification F2-4)

Solution: Check beam element slenderness

Per Seismic Provisions Section lO.4a, the width-thickness ratio for the flanges is,
(Specification FI-l)
A.j=.!:L=5.73 (Specification B4.1)
2tj
where,
The limiting width-thickness ratio for compact flanges is,

A. = 0.38
P
JI = 0.38
VFy
29,000 ksi = 9.15
50 ksi
(Specification Table B4.I)
C =--~----~~~----~~~--~--~--~----~
b 2.5(69.9 kip-ft
Since Iy < Ap' the flanges are compacto
=2.04
The width-thickness ratio for the web is,
2
(2.04)7t 2 (29,000 ksi) in./ft
~~
h 30 ft 12
A. w = -- = 50.9 (Specification B4.2) Fcr 8(0.000681) ( 1 in. )
tw
[
(30 ft.)( 12 in.)]2 ]
The limiting width-tliickness ratio tor a compact web is,
[ 1.56 in.
Ap = 3.76 tI = 3.76 29,.000 ksi = 90.6 (Specification Table B4.1) =21.4 ksi
VFy 50 ksi
(Specification F2-3)

AMERICAN !NsTITUTE oi: STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL Cm'¡ST~lUC1~ON, !Nc.
 4-40 MOMENT FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 IMF DESIGN EXAMPLES 4-41

3 Note that load combinations that do not . seismic effects must also be
(50 ksi)( 78.4 in. )
(21.4 ksi)(68.4 inh :s; investigated. For example, considering the combination 1.2D + 1.6S,
Mn
12 in./ft 12 in.1ft
Mu= 94.0 kip-ft
= 122 kip-ft :s; 327 kip-ft
=122 kip-ft <l>Mn =11

Mu <<I>Mn o.k..
<l>bMn = 0.90( 122 kip-ft)= 110 kip-ft
Vu <<I>Vn o.k.
Mu =69.9 kip-ft

Although the beam design strength is adequate to resist M u' the Seismic
Provisions require IMF beams to be laterally braced in accordance witb
Section 10.8.

Check shear strength

2.24 ~ E = 2.24 29,000 ksi = 53.9

Fyw 50 ksi

Since h/tw =50.9<2.24~E/Fyw'

Vn = 0.6Fy Aw Cv (Specification G2-1)

C v = 1.0 (8pecification G2-2)

<l>vVn =1.00(0.6)(50 ksi)(17.9 in.)(0.315 in.)(1.0)

=169kips>8.90 kips

i:¡
Alternatively, using Table 4-2 (<1> = 1.00) for the W18x40 beam,
¡li
!i! <1> vvn =(<1> vRv1)=169 kips
~

Note that for shapes with h/tw > 2.24 ~, <l>v = 0.90 must be used in the
shear strength check.

;j
'1
i
1 The W18x40 is adequate to resist the loads given for Beam BM-l.
·,1\il
!

AMERICAN lNSTITU1E OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INC. AMERICAN !NSTITU1E OF STEEL Cmls~ucrIoN, !Nc.
4-42 MOMENT FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 SMF DESIGN EXAMPLES 4-43

SMF DESIGN EXAMPLES Reduced-beam-section connections are at the trame beam-to-column con-
nections. Assume that this increases the drift 7 percent over that determined
using unreduced beam cross sections.
EXAMPLE 4.8. SMF Story Drift and Stability Check
So/ution: Check drift
Given: Refer to the floor plan shown in Figure 4-9 and the SMF elevation shown in
From an elastic analysis of the structure, mt~~rst:ory drift between the second and
Figure 4-10. Determine if the third level of the frame satisfies the drift and sta-
third levels is,
bility requirements based on the following loading. The Applicable Building
Code specifies the use of ASCE 7 for calculation of loads. Oxe = 0.600 in.

Floor D = 85 psf L= 80 psf oxe RBS =1.07(0.600 in.) =0.642 in.

Roof D = 68 psf Lr =20 psf
Per Seismic Provisions Section 3, the Story Drift and the story drift
Curtain Wall D = 70 kips/level
limits are those stipulated by the Appl1C::al¡>le Buiiding Codeo From ASCE 7,
W24x76 the allowable story drift, da' is 0.025h sx ' h sx is the story height below
level X.
From ASCE 7, the Seismic Use Group is 1, the Seismic Design Category is D,
R = 8, Cd = 5.5, 1 = 1.0, P = 1.3, and SDS = 1.0. da = 0.025hsx = 0.025(12.5 ft)( 2 in./ft) = 3.75 in.

0.2SDS = 0.2(1.0) = 0.2

1 2 3 4 5

30'·0· 30'·0" 30'·0" 30'·0"

A 30'-0· 30'-0· 30'-0"

ROOF W21

~--------~~----~ ~-----~~--------I
Q)
10
~FOUR;TH
LEVEL
x
-.r
W21x62

~
~THIRD W24x76
LEVEL

W24x76

~BASE
SMF INVESTIGATED IN PART 4
FOR ELEVATION SEE FIG. 4·10

SCBF INVESTIGATED IN PART 3

Figure 4-9. SMF and SCBF floor planfor Examples 3.6,3.7,3.8,3.9,

4.8, 4.9, 4.10, 4.11,4.12, and 4.13. Figure 4-10. SMF elevationfor Examples 4.8, 4.10, 4.11, 4.12, and 4.13.
AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INc. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL Cmls~.ucrloN, INc.
rr
4-44 MOMENT FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 SMF DESIGN EXAMPLES
4-45

ASCE 7 defines the Design Story Drift as ()x' the deflection of level x at the cen- Seismic Provisions Section 9.6 requires that all columnsmeet the strong-
ter ofmass. column-weak-beam criterion. Therefore,
m
() = Cd()xe (AS CE 7)
x 1 2L,Mp G .
j=l J
V.
yl (Seismic Provisions C3-2)
5.5(0.642 in.) H
()x= O
l.
For a W24x76 girder,
= 3.53 in. < 3.75 in.
() x <~ a o.k. kip-in.=833 kip-ft

Since there are two frames, each with

Check trame tar instability
The commentary to Seismic Provisions Section 3 provides a method for the 2[2(3)(833 kip-ft)]
Vyi = = 800
evaluation of the P-~ effects on moment frames based on a drift index, 'Pi· 12.5 ft

(Seismic Provisions C3-1) Therefore,

'P 2,690 kips( 8)( 0.642 in.)

Afloor = Aroo! "" 75 ft(120 ft)::::: 9,000 ft2
800 kips( 12.5 ft)( 12 in./ft)
Dfloor = 9,000 ft2 (85 psf) = 765 kips
Per Seismic Provisions Commentary C3, since q¡ < 0.3 this level is
considered stable.
Droo! = 9,000 ft2 (68 psf) = 612kips

Lfloor = 9,000 ft2 (80 psf) = 720 kips Exarnple 4.9. SMF Colurnn Design
Lroo! = 9,000 ft2 ( 20 psf) = 180 kips Given: Refer to' Column C-I in Figure 4-10. the adequacy of the ASTM
A992 wide-flange section (~ = 50 ksi, = 65 ksi) to resist the following
The total dead load supported by the second-level columns is, loading between the second and third The Applicable Building Code
specifies the use of ASCE 7 for calculation of loads.
PD =612 kips+2(765 kips) +2(70 kips) = 2,280 kips
PD =125 kips PL =37 kips = 7 kips
and 25 percent of the transient live load supported by the second-level
columns is, VD =1 kip VL = 6 kips = ±46 kips

P =0.25[(2)(720 kips) + 180 kips J=405 kips M xD top = 2 kip-ft M xL top =

L

lj = 2,280 kips + 405 kips MxDbot = -2 kip-ft M xL bot = kip-ft

=2,690 kips MxL, top =0 kip-ft M XQE top = ± 231 kip-ft

M xL, bot = O kip-ft M XQE bot = ± 243 kip-ft

AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSlRUCI10N, !Nc. AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL Cor~STRpCTI0N, !Nc.
4-46 MOMENT FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 SMF DESIGN EXAMPLES
4-47

W14x257 d == 16.4 in. tw = 1.18 in. Ix = 3,400 in. 4

Mntxbot = 1.4 (-;-2 kip-ft)+ 1.3 ( O + 0.5( -40 kip-ft) + 0.2( O kip-ft)
Iy = 1,290 in. 4 Ag = 75.6 in. 2 rx = 6.71 in.
Zx = 487 in. 3 =-22.8 kip-ft
ry = 4.13 in. Sx = 415 in. 3

W24x76 Ix = 2,100 in. 4 Mltx top = 1.4 ( O kip-ft) + 1.3 ( ±231 ) + 0.5( O kip-ft) + 0.2( Okip-ft)
=±300 kip-ft
W14x193 Ix = 2,400 in. 4
M ltx bot = 1.4( O kip-ft)+ 1.3( ±243
W14x159 Ix = 1,900 in. 4 )+0.5( O kip-ft)+O.2( Okip-ft)
= ±316kip-ft
From ASCE 7; Seismic Design Category is D, p = 1.3, and 8DS = 1.0.
Check column element .c::I¡:¡,nrJfQ,.,.,,,,,,,.d
0.2Svs = 0.2(1.0) = 0.2
Per Seismic Provisións Section 9.4a, the - . and unstiffened elements of
'"',-\.L.L'-'U\;;U

columns shall comply with Seismic Table 1-8-1.

Assume there is no transverse loading between the column supports in the
plane of bending. The width-thickness ratio for the flanges

b
Solution: Determine the factored loads on the column A¡ = -L = 4.23 (Specification B4.1)
2t¡
Considering the load combinations given in ASCE 7, the governing load com-
bination for the column is, From Seismic Provisions Table 1-8-1, for

i.2D + LOE + 0.5L + 0.2S

Vu = (1.2 + 0.2Svs )Vv + P VQE + 0.5VL + 0. 2Vs (ASeE 7)

= 0.30 29,000 ksi

V :::1.4(1 kips) + 1.3(46 kips )+0.5( 6 kips )+0.2( O kips) 50 ksi
u
=64.2 kips =7.22

Determine the lateral-translation forces and nontranslation forces for sub se- Since A¡ < Aps' the flanges are seismically \.o~U.IIJé1I;l.
qtient calculation of secondary forces. It will be assumed that nontranslation
forces are due to dead and live loads and translation forces are due to the seis- The width-thickness ratio for the web is,
mie load. h
Aw= - = 9.71 (Specification B4.1)
(ASeE 7) , tw
Assuming B 2 = 1.2,
P = 1.4 ( 125 kips) + 1.3 ( O kips )+0.5(37 kips )+0.2( O kips)
nt
Pu =Pnt + B 2 P/t
=194 kips
= 194 kips + 1.2( 2.60 kips)
P/t = 1.4( O kipS) + 1.3( 2 kips )+0.5( O kips )+0.2( O kips) =197 kips
=2.60 kips
ea - cJ> PPu P
u
0.90F A ---t---:,.!-----,-=0.0579
Mu=(1.2+0.2Svs)Mv +pMQE +0.5M L +0. 2M s (ASeE 7) b y Y g 0.90(50

M ntx top = 1.4( 2 kip-ft) + 1.3( O kip-ft) + 0.5( 40 kip-ft) + 0.2( O kip-ft)

= 22.8 kip-ft
AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONS1RUcnON, !Nc. AMERICAN !NsTlTUTE OF STEEL Cm~sn~Ub'ION, !Ne.
4-48 MOMENT FRAME SYSTEMS UTll..IZING R > 3 SMF DESIGN EXAMPLES
4-49

The leaning column amplifier (Lim and amara, 1972) is,

E
Aps =3.14$i
FS (1-1.54Ca )
y

=3.14 29;~0:siksi [1-1.54(0.0579)J

=68.9 With 2,625 ft2 tributary to the stability and 6,375 ft2 tributary to the lean-
ing columns, and assuming that a uniform is applied over the entire area,
Since Aw < Aps' the web is seismically compact.

Check unbraced length 1+ 6,375 ft2 = 1.85

From Manual Table 3-2, 2,625 ft2

Therefore,
Lp = 14.6 ft
Kx = 1.85(1.95) = 3.61
Lb = 12.5 ft < Lp
From Specification Section C1.3a and COITllIlenltary Table C-C2.2, Ky = 1.0.
Determine K
For the X-X axis, Determine the compression t::!:t"cn¡"Jth of the column

(Figure C-C2.3)
KxLx 3.61{12.5 ft)(12 %)
rx 6.71 in.
With two lateral-frame beams and two lateral-frame columns at the connection
located at the column top, KyLy = 1.0(12.5 ft)(12 i%) _
4 ry 4.13 in. -
3.400 in.4 J+(2.400 in. J
( 12.5 ft 12.5 ft Using Manual Table 4-22 with K~!rx =
3.31
4
2(2,100in.
30 ft
J (j> F =28.0 ksi
e cr

Pn =Fcr Ag (Specification E3-1)

With two lateral-frame beams and two lateral-frame columns at the connection
located at the column bottom, :' (j>cPn =(28.0 ksi)( 75.6 in. 2 )

4 =2,120 kips
3,400 in. J+.( 3,400 m.' J
( 12.5 ft 14.0 ft
3.68 Determine the flexural strength
bot . 4
G - 2 ( 2,100 m. J From Specification Section F2, with
applicable limit state is yielding.
flanges and web and Lb < Lp' the
30 ft

Using Cornmentary Figure C-C2.4, Kx == 1.95.

Mn=Mp = FyZx (Specification F2-I)

M px =50 ksi( 487 in.

3
)(1 o/t2 in,)
= 2,030 kip-ft

AMERICAN !NsTlTUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NsTlTUTE OF STEEL Cm~sTR..(JCTION, !Nc,

-._--------------+----~~'"~~.~'''~~."~ _~.~ . --
 MOMENT FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 SMF DESIGN EXAMPLES
4-50 4-51

M cx = <PbMnx = 0.90(2,030 kip-ft) = 1,830 kip-ft LPnt =1.4( 2;280 kips) + 1.3( O kips)+ .5(0.52)[2(720 kips)J+O.2( O kips)
=3,570 kips
Consider second-order effects
Pe2 for the W14x257 columns is,
e (Specification C2-2) 2
1t (29,000 ksi)
-----~+--~=3,320 kips
[3.61( 12.5 ft)( 12
For the calcu1ation of B l'
To determine ~2 for the entire frame, deter1jrrine the contribution ofthe W14x193
columns on column lines 1 and 4,

= 194 kips + 2.60 kips 4

2.400 in.4 )+[1,900 in. )
[ 12.5 ft 12.5 ft
=197 kips
.91
2,100 in. 4
0.=1.0
30 ft
Cm=0.6-0.4(M~2) (Specification C2-4)
2.400 in.4 )+[2.400 in. )
4
[ 12.5 ft· 14.0 ft
M = 22.8 kip-ft for the no-translation case.
1
2,100 in. 4
M = 22.8 kip-ft for the no-translation case.
2 30 ft
Using Commentary Figure C-C2.4, Kx = . Adjusting for the effects of leaning
e =0.6-0.4(22.8 kip-ft/ . )=0.200
columns as before, Kx = 1.85(2.3) = 4.26.
mx /22.8 klp-ft for the W14x193 colurtms is then,

2
2 (29,000 ksi)(3,400 in.4 )
1t . 1t
2
EI
p _ 1t E1 x = . = 43,300 klpS P =-·-=-----~--t-~=1,680kips
elx- (KxLxf [1.0(12.5 ft)(12 in./ft)J2 e2 (KL)2

Therefore, Since there are two identícal frames,

0.200 >1.0 LPe2 = 2[ 2( 3,320 kips) + 2( 1,680 kips) = 20,000 kips

1_(1.0(197 kiPS)]
Therefore,
43,300 kips
1.
=0.201~1.0 1.22
1.0 ( 3,570 kips )
=1.0
20,000 kips

B2 = 1- (:I:.Pnt)
--
~1 (Specification C2-3)
The previously assumed value of B 2 = 1.2 is fiPI>roJrnnateily the same (see calcu-
latíon of Ca).
I:.Pe2
Pr =Pnt + B2Plt
Using the floor loads calculated in Example 4.8 and a 0.521ive-load reduction
factor on columns, = 194 kips + 1.22( 2.60 kips)
=197 kips

AMERICAN lNsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INC. AMERICAN lNSTITUlE OF SlEEL Cor~STI<~VCII0N, lNc.
4-52 MOMENT FRAME SYSTEMS UTll..JZINO R > 3 SMF DES ION EXAMPLES
4-53

(Specification C2-1 a)
Mr =B1Mnt +B2MIJ desired, the columns would become and the beam sections would
become deeper and heavier. The deeper stiffer bearns would also bring a
M r.x =1.0(22.8 kip-ft) + 1.22(316 kip-ft) =408 kip-ft larger plastic moment demand on the column that would most likely
require the use of thick colurnn web plates and large heavily welded
Check combined loading column stiffeners. In addition, the lighter may not be strong enough to
force the forrnationof hinges in the
Pr 197 kips _ 0.0929
P 2,120 kips Example 4.10. SMF Beam Design
e

Since P/Pc < 0.2,

Given: Refer to Bearn BM-1 in Figure 4-10. the adequacy of the ASTM

(~~}(::H::}I.O (Specification H1-1b) A992 wide-flange section (~ = 50 ksi, ~ 65 ksi) to resist the following load-
ing. The bearn end connections utilize
Figure 4-11. The Applicable Building
reduced bearn section shown in
specifies the use of ASCE 7 for
calculation of loads. Assume that a RBS connection that is prequalified in

(
J
0.0929 + ( 408 kip-ft + J (O k~p-ft J=0.269 accordance with AISC 358 will be used.
2 1,830 kip-ft Oklp-ft MD =-63 kip-ft M QE = ±235 kip-ft
0.269 < 1.0 o.k. VD = 13 kips VQE = ±16 kips

Check the shear strength of the column W24x76 d= 23.9 in. tw = ry = 1.92 in. Sx = 176 in. 3

2 .24 -F
R: -
yw
- 2.24
29,000 ksi = 54.0
50 k SI.
Zx = 200 in. 3

From ASCE 7, Seismic Design Category is

b¡= 8.99 in. ha = 23.2 in.

p = 1.3, and SDS = 1.0.

0.2SDS = 0.2(1.0) = 0.2

Since hjtw =9.71<2.24~E/ Fyw '
Assume that the bearn flanges are braced at the columns.
Vn = 0.6Fy A w Cv (Specification 02-1)

Cv =1.0 (Specification 02-2)

W24x76
BEAM
<1> V
n
= 1.00 (0.6)(50 ksi)( 16.4 in.)(1.18 in.)(1.0) FACEOF~
COLUMN "
=581 kips>64.2 kips

Altematively, using Table 4-2 (<1> = 1.00) for the W14x257 colurnn,

<l>Vn = <l>Rv1 = 581 kips

Vu < <l>Vn o.k. c= 2 in.

b=18in.
The Wl4x257 is adequate to resist the loads given for Column C-l.
Comments: The bearn and column sizes selected were base~?n a le~st-cost solution, result-
., I mn without doublers and with rnmIffial stiffeners. The bearn and
Ing
column ~o u shown In
In a slzes . F'I gure 4-10 are not the optimum sizes
.
for drift. control
and a least-weight solution. If drift reduction and a least-welght solutlOn were
Figure 4-11. Initial RBS detailforExlZm)7/!fs 4.10 and 4.11.
AMERICAN INsTIfUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION. INc. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~STIJ~Ucrl0N, !Ne.
 4-54 MOMENT FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 SMF DESIGN EXAMPLES
4-55

Choose a trial section such that,

Altematively, using Table 1-2, it can be that a W24x76 will satisfy the
0.5bb!~ a ~ 0.75bb! local-buckling requirements for a SMF
0.65d ~ b ~ 0.85d

O.lbb! ~ e ~ 0.25b b! Check lateral bracing

a, b, and e are chosen as shown in Figure 4-11. Per Seismic Provisions Section 9.8, both flanges must be laterally braced at
intervals not to exceed,
Solution: Determine the factored loads

Mu= (1.2 + 0.2SDS )MD + pM QE +0.5ML +0.2Ms (ASCE 7) 00086r,( ~ )=0 086(1.92 ino)(_29-'-~-t--_
0

Mu = 1.4( -{i3 kip-ft)+ 1.3( -235 kip-ft)+ 0.5(-45 kip-ft )+0.2( okip-ft)
=-416 kip-ft
Altematively, using Table 4-2 for a it can be seen that Lb max is
equal to 7.98 ft.
Vu=(1.2+0.2~DS)VD +pVQE +0.5VL +0. 2Vs (ASCE 7)

Vu =1.4( 13 kipS) + 1.3( 16 kips )+0.5(9 kips )+0.2( okips) The diaphragm provides continuous lateral to the top flange of the beam.
However, the only lateral supports for the flange occur at the end con-
=43.5 kips
nections. Therefore, a bottom flange brace be provided every 8 ft.
Check beam element slendemess
Check unbraced length
Per Seismic Provisions Section 9.4, the stiffened and unstiffened elements of
From Manual Table 3-2,
SMF beams shall comply with Seismic Provisions Table 1-8-1.
The width-thickness ratio for the flanges is, Lp = 6.78 ft

b Lp < Lb = 7.98 ft < Lr

At=-.t-=6.61 (Specification B4.1)
2tt
Determine the flexural strength at full cross section
From Seismic Provisions Table 1-8-1, for flange compactness, When using an RBS connection, it is that the flexural strength of the
member at the reduced section will the moment strength of the beam.

~
29,000ksi Since the maximum moments along the span occur at the beam ends, this
A =0.30 - =0.30 =7.22
ps Fy 50ksi assumption does not need to be verified for where Lb $.Lp. In these cases,
the flexural strength of the unreduced is limited by M ' and Ze will
p
Since A! < Aps ' the flanges are seismically compacto always be les s than Zx. However, in cases the lateral-torsional buckling
strength may reduce the flexural strength the unreduced section below M '
The width-thickness ratio for the web is, p
such as is the case in this example, the . will have to be verified. The
il h reader should also note that, as a practical matter, when the value of eb for
li Aw =-=49.0 (Specification B4.2)
t moment frame beams and the limits . by the Seismic Provisions on
11 w
I unbraced length are considered, the lateral buckling strength typically
1
From Seismic Provisions Table 1-8-1, for web compactness, will not reduce the flexural strength of the section below Mp.

:1 For the unreduced section, from Spleciltic~ltiol~ Section F2, with compact flanges

~
29,000ksi and web and Lp < Lb < Lr , the applicable states are yielding and lateral-
A =2.45 -=2.45 . =59.0
ps Fy 50ksi torsional buckling.

Since Aw < Aps ' the web is seismically compacto

AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTlTUTE OF STEEL Cor"sn~vcrl0N, !Ne.
4-56 MOMENT FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 SMF DESIGN EXAMPLES
4-57

~ eh [ M J( Z=~; )],; M
Comparing the reduced and unreduced flexural strengths,
Mn p - (M p - 0.7 FySx p (Specification Fl-2)

e = 12.5M max Rm ~ 3.0 (Specification Fl-l) <PbM pr =0.90(571 kip-ft)=514 kip-ft

b 2.5M max + 3M A + 4M B + 3M e
Mu =416 kip-ft
where the moments along the controlling brace interval are (from analysis),

Mmax=IMul
Check shear strength
M A = 1180 kip-ftl M B = 1-260 kip-ft! Me= !-321 kip-ft!

12.5(416 kip-ft)(1.0) 2.24) E ~2.24 29,000 ksi ~53.9

Cb = 2.5(416 kip-ft)+ 3(180 kip-ft) + 4(260 kip-ft) + 3(321 kip-ft) Fyw 50 ksi
= 1.45
Since h/tw =49.0<2.24~E/ Fyw'
3
0.7 FySx =0.7(50 ksi)( 176 in )=6,160 kip-in=513 kip-ft
Vn = 0.6Fy Aw Cv (Specification G2-1)
M p =FZ (Specification F2-1)
y x Cv = 1.0
3
=50 ksi( 200 in. )(1 ft/12 in.)
<P Vn =1.00(0.6)(50 ksi)(23.9 in.)(O in.)( 1.0)
=833 kip-ft
=315 kips>43.5 kips

M
n
=1.45[833-(833-513)(7.98-6.78J]~833
19.6-6.78
Altematively, using Table 4-2 (<P = 1.00) the W24x76 beam,

<pVn = <PRvI = 315 kips

=1,160 kip-ft$833 kip-ft

Therefore,

M n = 833 kip-ft
The W24x76 isadequate to resist the given for Beam BM-l.
At the centerline of the reduced-beam-section,
Design lateral bracing
Ze =Zx -2ct¡(d-t¡) (AISC 358 5.8-4) Per Seismic Provisions Section 9.8, the strength of nodallateral brac-
ing away from an expected plastic hinge is,
3
Ze =200 in. -2(2 in.)(0.680 in.)(23.9 in.-0.680 in.)
0.02M C
p r d
=137in. 3 br h
o
3 Ry =1.1
M pr =Fy Ze =50ksi(137 in. )=6,850 kip-in.=571 kip-ft

M r =Ry FZ
y

3
=1.1(50 ksi)( 200 in. )= 11,000 . = 917 kip-ft

AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL COJ'IISTRqCTION, !Nc.
4-58 MOMENT FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 SMF DESIGN EXAMPLES
4-59

Altematively, using Table 4-2 for the W24x76 beam, e - -1 (

= tan
- 23.9 in. J 9
12.5 ft(12 in.lft) = .
Mu = 917 kip-ft = 11,000 kip-in.
2
P = [0.02(917 kip-ft)(l2 in./ft)(l.0)]123.2 in = 9.48 kips k
3.03 in. (29,000 ksi)
_ cos
2( 9
br 152 in.
The length of the brace is assumed to extend from the centerline of the bottorn
k > ~br o.k.
flange of the W24x76 SMF beam to the centerline of the top flange of the
adjacent gravity beam. Assuming a 12 ft 6 in. beam spacing, the length of the
Use L5x5x5116 kickers to brace the bottom flange at a maximum
brace is,
spacing of 8 ft.

Note that because this connection will a prequalified RBS moment con-
L= [12.5ft(12in./ft)y +(23.9iny =152in.=12.7ft nection supporting a concrete structural according tp AISC 358 Section
5.3.1 (7) the slab plus the typicallateral bracing proyides stability suf-
From Manual Table 4-12 for eccentrically loaded single angles with the eccen- ficient that additional bracing adjacent to plastic hinges is not required,
tricity equal to or less than 0.75 times the angle thickness, try a L5x5x51I6 with provided that shear connectors are ofC)vicIed every 12 in. (but omitted in the
Kz = 1.0.- RBS protected zone).

Comments: The bearn and colurnn sizes shown in
that would be selected in order to meet
Pu < <l>Pn o.k. If drift reduction and a least-weight solution
Iighter, and the beam sections will become
Seismic Provisions Section 9.8 also specifies a minirnum stiffness for lateral
stiffer beams will also bring a larger mastI(;-momlem demand on the lighter col-
bracing. The kicker brace selected in this example is considered a nodal braceo
umn that will most likely require the use of
Assuming a rigid brace support, the required brace stiffness is, large heavily welded column stiffeners. In
be stron.g enough to comply with strQng
(Specification A-6-8)
4-10 are not the optimum sizes
goals and a least-weight solution.
desired, the coIumns will become
and heavier. The deeper and
column-web doubler pIates and
the lighter coIumns may not
beam requirements.

Example 4.11. Sr,IIF Beam-Column Co

where,

<1>=0.75 The SMF beam-column connection design pre:senlted in this exampIe has been
chosen to demonstrate. the application of design provisions for prequalified
3 RBS connections in accordance with 358. Altemative configura-
Mu =Ry Fy Z=l.1(50 ksi)( 200 in. )=11,000 kip-in.
tions of RBS connections may be possible sufficiently justified by testing
(Seismic Provisions 9.8)
and qualified in accordance with AISC Provisions Appendix S. Such
Cd =1.0
connections may inelude bolted web of RBS connections or
weak-axis RBS connections, both of have been successfully tested as
Lb =7.98 ft(12 in.lft) = 95.8 in. part of the SAC Joint Venture. The results the SAC testing are sUrnmarized
and reported on in FEMA 350, Seismic Design Criteriafor New
ho =23.2 in. Steel Moment-Frame Buildings (FEMA,

1O(11,000 kip-in.)( 1.0) Given: Refer to Joint J-l in Figure 4-10. Design
~ ) 66.0 kipsfm. connection between Beam BM-l
br 0.75(95.8 in.)(23.2 in. and CoIumn C-l using·the reduced beam (RBS) shown in Figure 4-11.
AlI beams and coIumns are ASTM A992 flange sections (t;, = 50 bi,
The stiffness of the L5x5x51I6 brace is, ~ = 65 bi). The gravity loads on the beam given below.
AE WD = 0.84 kips/ft WL = 0.60 kips/ft
k = _8-cos2 (e)
L
AMERICAN !NSTlTUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCfION, !Nc.
AMERICAN !NSTlTUTE OF STEEL CO:NSTRU~TIO!N, !Ne.
4-60 MOMENT FRAME SYSTEMS UTll..JZING R > 3 SMF DESIGN EXAMPLES
4-61

W14x257 d = 16.4 in. tw = L18 in. b

f
=16.0 in.
kdet = 33/16 in. Ag = 75.6 in. 2 Zx = 487 in. 3
W24x76
t =1.89 in. (1 7/8 in.) BEAM
f

W24x76 d= 23.9 in. tw = 0.440 in. b = 8.99 in.

f
3 Ry = 1.1
tf = 0.680 in. Zx= 200 in.

Solution: Determine the probable moment at the plastic hinge

From Example 4.10, Ze = 137 in. 3. Therefore,

M pr =C pr Ry Fy Z e (AISC 358 2.4.3-1)

F +F
C u ::;1.2
=_y _ _
pr 2F
y

50 ksi+65 ksi <12

2(50 ksi) .

=1.15

3
M pr = 1.15(1.1)( 50 ksi)( 137 in. )

=8,670 kip-in.

Compute the expected shear force at the plastic hinge

The required shear strength at the plastic hinge is determined as,

3/8" SINGLE re.

V =2 ~
M +V J . CONNECTION
RES L' gravzty
(

The factored uniform gravity load is,

Wu = 1.2wD + 0.5wL + 0.2ws

W24x76 BEAM

w u =1.2(0.84 kip s/ft) + 0.5(0.60 kips/ft) + 0.2(0 kips/ft)

= 1.31 kips/ft

The distance from the column face to the assumed plastic hinge location
(Figure 4-12) is,
OTE: FOR WELD BACKING
QUIREMENTS SEE
Sh = a + ("2bJ = 5.5· + (18in.J
ID. -2- = 145·
. ID. (AISC 358 5.8-6) 358 CHAPTER 3

Figure 4-12. Connection as designed

AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~sTRuj::TION, !Nc.
4-62 MOMENT FRAME SYSTEMS UTIUZING R > 3 SMF DESIGN EXAMPLES 4-63

Therefore, the distance between plastic hinges is,

Altematively, using Table 4-2, for the 6 beam, Mu = 917 kip-ft =
11,000 kip-in.
L'~L-2( d; )-2S h
M¡'5.CV d M pe (AISC 358 5.8-8)
=360 in.-16.4 in.-2(14.5 in.)
::; 1.0 (11,000 kip-in.)
=315 in.=26.3 ft
'5.11,000 kip-in.
The required shear strength at the plastic hinge due to gravity loads is, 9,730 kip-in. '5.11 ,000 kip-in. o.k.

V
gRBS
= X wuL' = X (1.31 kipslft) ( 26.3 ft )=17.2 kips
Check column-beam moment ratio
The expected shear at the plastic hinge is then, Seismic Provisions Section 9.6 requires that SMF connections satisfy the
following strong-column-weak-beam .

V
RBS
= L:
2M r
+ VgRBS
2(8,670 kip-in.)
315 in.
+ 17.2 kips=72.2 kips LM~c > 1.0 (Seismic Provisions 9.6)
LMpb
2M 2( -8,670 kip-in.)
,
vRBS pr V ---I-+ 17.2 kips=-37.8 kips The axial load on the column must be corl~lclere:d when determining the flex-
= ----¡;- + gRBS
----.!.._ _ _ _

315in. ural strength of the column at the beam Using Puc = 197 kips as
determined in Example 4.9,
Compute the probable maximum moment at the column face
The factored moment due to gravity load between the column fl~nge and the
plastic hinge is, LM;c ~ L[Zcl Fyc - ::JJ
=2( 487 in. 3 )(50 ksi __ 19_7~_
75.6
The probable maximum moment at the face of the column is defined as, =46,200 kip-in.

M ¡ =Mpr + VRBSS h +Mg (AISC 358 5.8-6) The expected flexural demand of the beam the column centerline is defined
in AISC 358 Section 5.4 as,
M ¡ =8,670 kip-in.+ 72.2 kipS(14.5 in.)+ 11.5 kip-in.=9, 730 kip-in.

MÍ =-8,670 kip-in.+-37.8 kiPS( 14.5 in.)+ 11.5 kip-in.=-9,21O kip-in.

It should be noted that, in this example, ignoring the effect of the additional The sum of the moments produced at the centerline by the shear at the
gravity load between the plastic hinge location and the column face would have plastic hinges is,
onIy introduced a slight error (z 0.1 percent).

Compare Mf to Mpe at the column fac~

LM, ~(VRBS +v~sl(a+ ji' + d 2 J
The expected moment strength of the unreduced beam section at t!J.e column
face is,
~(72.2 kips+37.8 kips l( 5 m.+ 18 in. +
2
16.~ in. J
M pe =R y FZ
y
= 2,500 kip-in.
3
= 1.1(50 ksi)( 200 in. )
=11,000 kip-in.
AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTlON, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~STI<~CTlON, !Nc.
4-64 MOMENT FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 SMF DESIGN EXAMPLES
4-65

"" p =2Mpr + ""

~ M*b ~Mr Altematively, using Table 4-2 for the W1 column,
=2(8,670 kip-in.) + 2,500 kip-in. 0.75Py = 2,840 kips
=19,800 kip-in.
<PRvI = 581 kips

46,200 kip-in. <PRv2 = 5,140 kip-in.

2.33
19,800 kip-in.
R
<PR
n
=<PRvI + <Pd v2
2.33 > 1.0 o.k. b
· 5,140 kip-in.
= 581 k IpS + -'-----'::.....--
Check column bracing requirements 23.9 in.
Seismic Provisions Section 9.7a aIlows the use of a strong-column/weak-beam = 796 kips
ratio (Seismic Provisions Equation 9-3) greater than 2.0 to show that a column
remains elastic outside of the panel zone at restrained beam-to-column con- Since Ru > <PRv' a column-web doubler is required.
nections. If it can be demonstrated that the column remains elastic outside of
the panel zone, Section 9.7 a requires the column flanges to be braced at the Size web doubler plate
level of the beam top flanges only. With a ratio of 2.33 in this example, the
column can be assumed to remain elastic and bracing is required at the beam The minimum thickness of each cornpcmel!b.t of the panel zone, without the aid
of intermediate plug welds between the web and the doubler, is,
top flanges only.
Column flange restraint at these locations can be provided by continuity plates t ~ (dz + W z ) / 90 (Seismic Provisions 9-2)
and a fuIl-depth shear plate between the continuity plates at the connection of
the girder framing into the weak axis of the column. in.) = 22.5 in.

Check column panel-zone shear strength W

z =dc -2tcf =16.4 in.-2(1.89 .)=12.6 in.
Seismic Provisions Section 9.3a specifies that the required panel zone shear
strength is calculated by summing the moments at the column faces. t ~ (22.5 in. + 12.6 in.) / 90 = O 390 in.

LM¡ 9,730 kip-in.+9,210 kip-in. =816 kips Altematively, using Table 4-2,
R
u 23.9 in.-0.680 in.
db -ti Wz
90 = 0.140 in. for a W14x257

0.75Pc = 0.75Fy Ag= 0.75(50 kSi)( 75.6 in.2 ) = 2,840 kips

dz .
90 = 0.250 In. based upon W z for
With Pr = 197 kips < 0.75Pc ' the design shear strength of the panel zone is
defined as, t~( 0.250 in.+0.140 in.)=O.3

l
2

R =0.6F d t 3b t J
1+~ (Specification JlO-ll)
n ycw ddt t wc =1.18 in.>0.390 in. o.k.
b e w
A lh-in. doubler plate or a larger column be investigated to increase the
panel zone strength. Further information design considerations and proce-
3( 16.0 )( 1.89)2 J dures for these options can be found in Design Guide 13, Stiffening of
<PRn =(1.0)(0.60)(50)(16.4)(1.18) 1+ ( )( )
[ 23.9 16.4 1.18 Wide-Flange Columns at Moment Conm~ctiqns: Wind and Seismic Applications.
Also note that Seismic Provisions Section contains additional requirements
=796 kips
AMERICAN !NSTlTUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NsTlTUTE OF STEEL COlI[SnluClJ:oN, !Nc.
4--66 MOMENT FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 SMF DESIGN EXAMPLES
4--67

for situations when doubler plates are used in an SMF. Alternatively, a slightly The required strenglh of the panel zone on the new RBS dimensions is,
larger cut could be considered for the RBS in order to decrease the demand on
the panel zone. Try an increase in the RBS c-dimension from 2 in. to 21/8 in. as
shown in Figure 4-12. ......:....._--!;-.......:....--I~:....::...=791 kips

Determine the new required panel zone strength

At the reduced section,
Use an RBS with e = 21/8 in. A COIUmn-\iVeD doubler plate is not required.
(AISC 358 5.8-4)
Determine the need far cantinuity
Ze =200 in. -2(2 3
X in.)(0.680 in.)(23.9 in.-0.680 in.)
AISC 358 requires continuity plates
unless the Exception of Section 2.4.4 is
=133 in. 3
tq =1.89 in.
The moment at the plastic hinge is, .--------

M pr =Cpr R y Fy ZRBS (AISC 358 5.8-5) t ef ;:::O.4 1.8bblbf[;b:Yb]

ye ye
3
M pr = 1.15(1.1)( 50 ksi)( 133 in. )
5 O ksi ( 1.1) ]
;:::0.4 1.88.99in.)(0.680in.)
( .()
=8,410 kip-in. 50 kSl 1.1

The expected shear at the plastic hinge is, ;::: 1.33 in. o.k.

V RBS =
2M
pr V
--¡;- + gRBS
2(8,410 kip-in.)
--'------'- + 17.2 kips = 70.6 kips tef >- bbf6
= 8.99 in. =150'
6 . ill.
315 in.
tef ;: : 1.50 in. o.k.
2M 2( -8,410 kip-in.)
,
v. RBS pr V
= --¡;- + gRBS
--'-------'- + 17.2 kips = -36.2 kips
315 in. The minimum thickness requirements Section 2.4.4 are met; therefore,
continuity plates are not required.
The expected moment at the face of the column is,

(AISC 358 5.8-6)

Design beam flange-ta-calumn connectian
M
f =Mpr +VRBSSh +Mg Per Seismic Provisions Section 9.2b, the cm~elctic,n configuration must comply
with the requirements of the prequalified Per AISC 358, Section 5.5.
M f = 8,410 kip-in.+ 70.6 kips(14.5 in.) + 11.5 kip-in. = 9,450 kip-in.
Use a complete-joint-penetration weld to connect the beam
Mí =-8,410 kip-in.+-36.2 kipS(14.5 in.)+ 11.5 kip-in. flanges to the column flange. The welo-aC4:eS:S-blole geometry must com-
ply with Specification Section J1.6. welds must also be con~idered
=-8,920 kip.,.in. demand critical.

Compare M, to Mpe at the column face Design beam web-ta-calumn cannection

M 5. cpMpe The factored shear force at the column face is,
f
$11,000 kip-in. o.k. 2M
V
U
=--.E.!:.
L'
+V .
gravlty

=VRBS + wuSh

AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCfION, lNc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL COI'ISTR):.¡CTION. !Ne.
4-68 MOMENT FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 SMF DESIGN EXAMPLES 4-69

So/ution: Seismic Provisions Section 8.4b has rec[u¡iI:errtents for the location of and the
=70.6 kips+ 1.31 kiPs/fr(14;{2 ft )=72.2 kips
shear forces on gravity column splices. that these gravity column splice
provisions are equ~y applicable to column splices in braced-fame
Select a single-plate connection with a plate at least 3/s-in. thick to support buildings.
erection loads.
With the single plate as backing, use a CJP groove weld to connect the Check splice location
beam web to the column flange. From Figure 4-10, the height between
and the column splices are shown to be 48 in. aboye the finished floor
Check beam web strength elevation. Based on conventional steel the clear height between beam-
The minimum remaining web depth between weld access holes for the 72.2 to-column connections will be over 8 ft. T,t..,:r,~f:.~L-C, Seismic Provisions Section
kips shear force is, 8.4b(1) requires that the splice be a minimum of 4 ft from the beam-
to-column connections.

d . = 72 kips The column splice location shown in 4-10 satisfies Seismic Provisions
m/n <j>0.6F t Section 8.4b(I).
yw
72.2 kips
Determine the required shear ~Tr,Cr1/"YTh
1.0( 0.6)( 50 ksi)( 0.440 in.) Seismic Provisions Section 8.4b(2) that, with respect to bOth orthogonal
=5.47 in. axes, the column splice be able to develop required shear strength equal to,
By inspection, a greater web depth remains. o.k.
v:u =Mpc
--
H
The final connection design and geometry is shown in Figure 4-12.
In the weak axis of the column, the shear strength of the splice is,
COLUMN SPLICE DESIGN EXAMPLES 3
v: = FyZy = 50 kSi( 16.8 in. )
u H 12.5 ft(12 in./ft)
Example 4.12. Gravity Column Splice Design in
Moment Frame Building Conservatively ignoring frictional resístanc~ between the upper and lower shafts
due to column dead load, this force will be by the splice material.
Given: Refer to the floor plan shown in Figure 4-9 and the SMF elevation shown in
Figure 4-10. Design a splice between the third and fourth levels for the gravit~ Determine the required "'r\,rnnlr.cc~C'íll.c
colurnn located at the intersection of grids 2 and B. Use ASTM A36 (~= 36 kSl, With the upper shaft centered on the shaft, the dimensions of the upper
Fu = 58 ksi) for all splice material. The column sizes aboye and below the splice shaft are such that it will achieve fuIl bearing on the lower shaft.
are as follows. Therefore, the splice will not be required transfer any compressive loads if
the upper shaft is finished to bear on the shaft.
Lower shaft
W12x58 d = 12.2 in., 121/4 in. ~f= 0.640 in. ~f= 10.0 in.
Select splice geometry
Zy = 32.5 in. 3 Try a column splice from Manual Part 14.
Upper shaft
du = 12 in.
W12x40 d = 11.9 in., 12 in. t¡= 0.515 in. b¡= 8.01 in.
Zy = 16.8 in. 3

d + 11 ::;; d ::;; d + 51
u /4 l u /8

AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL COlN'STl~UCTIOlN', !Nc.
4-70 MOMENT FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 COLUMN SPLICE DESIGN EXAMPLES 4-71

Therefore, use Case I-A, Type 2 on Manual page 14-23.

r = (M.uex J= ------=-+-~---.:...=..=
18.2 0.639 kips
PL 3/s"x8"x1'-0 1/ 2" y 8e 2
b
g =g =5 1/ in.
u l 12 The resultant force on the critical bolt is

Check shear yielding of the splice plates

The shear yielding strength of the splice plates is,

<1>Vn =<1>(0.6Fy )Ag

ru= r +(O.639kipS¡> =123kips

From Manual Table 7-1 for a ASTMA325N bolt, <1>rn = 15.9 kips.
= LO( 0.6)( 36 ksi)( 2 )(Ys in.)( 8 in.)
= 130 kips > 5.60 kips
Try using 3/4-in.-diameter ASTM A325N in standard holes.
<1>Vn > Vu o.k.
Check bearing strength of splice
Check shear yielding of the column flanges Using Manual Table 7-6 with Le = 11/4 in.,
Since the column flanges are thicker and wider than the splice plates and their
yield strengih is greater than the splice material, the shear yielding strength of <1>rn = 44.0 kips/in.(Ys in.) = 1
the column flanges is adequate.

Size splice bolts

Checkbearing strength of the ,.."'.'.. _ .....
Since the ceritroid of each bolt group is eccentric to the column ends, there will
be a moment oh each bolt group. Using the geometry shown in the Manual and Since the column flanges are thicker and than the splice plates and their
considering the eccentricity from the center of the bolt group to the colurnh tensile strength is greater than the splice ..l, the bearing strength of the
Uf""VL,U',

interface, this tnoment is, column flanges is adequate.

Mu =Vue=5.60 kips[X(3 in.)+l}{ in.J=18.2 kip-in. Check block shear rupture of each plate

The geometry of each bolt group is such that the bolts are all equidistant from
the centroid of their bolt group. Therefore, the moment will be shared equally
between the bolts. The eccentricity of each bolt with respect to the centroid of Ant =L69in. 2 -1 12
1/(3/ in +
/4 . in.)(Ys in.)=L20 in.
2

the group is,

Agv=(5 X in. + 1 y;' in.)(}{ =2.53 in. 2

2
Anv = 2.53 in. - (1.5 )(){ in. +

The forces on each bolt due to the moment are,

2
<1>FuAnt =0.75(58 ksi)( 1.20 in. )

Mue J 18.2kiP-in·[X(3in.)] .
r = --y 0.348 klpS epO.6FuAnv =0.75(0.6)(58 ksi)( 2.04
x ( 2 2
8e b 8(3.13 in.)
epO.6Fy AgV = 0.75( 0.6)(36 ksi)( 2.53

AMERICAN IlIiSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTlON, lNc. AMERICAN lNSTITUI'E OF STEEL Cm~sTRIuCTION, lNc.
4-72 MOMENT FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 COLUMN SPLICE DESIGN EXAMPLES 4-73

Ubs = 0.5 because the connection has multiple rows of bolts The shear rupture strength of each splice is,

<l>Rn =<l>0.6Fu Anv +<l>Ub s Fu An t::; <l>0.6Fy Agv +<l>Ub s Fu Ant <l>Vn =0.75(0.6FJ An
=53.2kips + 0.5(52.2kips) ::; 41.0kips + 0.5(52.2kips) 2
= 0.75( 0.6 )(58 ksi)( 2.34 in. )
=79.3 kips ::; 67.1 kips
=61.1 kips > Vu 5.60 kips
V 5.60kips 2 2
=67.1 kips;;:: u 2.80 kips o.k.
2 2
Use 3/4_in. ASTM A325N bolts in standard holes to connect the splice plates
to the column flanges.
Check shear rupture
The net area of each splice plate is, The design of the splice for shear in the
be considered, but is left as an exercise

An =[8 in.-2(J: in.+ Xin.)J(Ys in.)=2.34 in. 2

The final connection design and
shown in Figure 4-13.
~Pflln1f·ttv for the flange connections is

EXAMPLE 4.13. SMF Column Splice

t
UPPER&
LOWERSHAFT
Given: Design a splice for the SMF column located grid 4 in Figure 4-10. The col-
umn material is ASTM A992 (~ = 50 ksi, Fu 65 ksi). The Applicable Building
Code specifies the use of ASCE 7 for of loads.

W14x159 d = 15.0 in. t¡= 1.19 in. A = 46.7 in. 2

tw = 0.745 in.
le, 3/S"xS"x1'-O 1/2"
W/STDHOLES
CENTERED ON COL. W14x193 Zx = 355 in. 3
FLANGE (lYP.)
The loading on the upper shaft between the and fourth levels is,
(2) 3/4"0 A325N
BOLTS @ 5 1/2"
PD = 76 kips PL = 22 kips = 6 kips
GAGE(lYP.)
VD =4 kips VL = 2 kips = O kips VQE = ±19 kips

MxDtop= -25 kip-ft M xL top = M xL,top =0 kip-ft

M XQE top = ±126 kip-ft MxDbot = MxLbot = 13 kip-ft

M xL bot = O kip-ft M XQE bot=

r

W12x5S COL.WI From the ASCE 7, the Seismic Design is D, no = 3.0, P = 1.3, and
STDHOLES SDS= 1.0.
0.2SDS = 0.2(1.0) = 0.2
Figure 4-13. Connection as designed in Example 4.12 (web connection not shown).
Assume that there is no transverse loading the column supports in the
plane of bending and that the connections the column weak-axis produce
negligible moments on the column.

AMERICAN !NSTIfUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~sTR~ljJCTlON, !Nc.
r
I 4-74 MOMENT FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 COLUMN SPLICE DESIGN EXAMPLES 4-75

Solution: Determine the required axial strength of the splice Determine the required shear c:::tncnt'rth of the web sPlice
Using the basic load combinations in ASCE 7, the maximum compressive force From Manual Table 3-2,
in the column is,
Lp = 14.1 ft
Pu =(1.2+0.2SDS)PD +PPQE +0.5PL +0.2PS {j>Mp = 1,080 kip-ft

Pu = 1.4(76 kips) + 1.3(16 kips) + 0.5 (22 kips) + 0.2(0 kips) Per Seismic Provisions Section 9.9, the shear strength of the web
= 138 kips splice is,

and the maximum tensile force in the column is, 3

I,M e (50 ksi) ksi)( 287 in.
V = -_P- = - - - ' - - - - - - - ' ' - - - t - - - - - : : - - - - - - : : : . . . . = 214 kips
Tu = (0.9 - 0.2SDS )PD + PPQE + 1.6PH u H

Tu = 0.7 (76 kips) + 1.3(-16 kips) + 1.6( O kips) By inspection' it can be seen that using the combinations in AS CE 7, the
required shear strength will be les s than calculated aboye. Therefore,
= 32.4 kips
Vu =214 kips
According to ASCE 7, since Tu is greater than zero, there is no net up1ift on the
column; therefore, the requirements of Seismic Provisions Section 8.4 do not Th develop this force through shear of the web, the required web
apply. From Figure 4-10, the unbraced length of the column is 12.5 ft. Using depth is,
Manual Table 4-1 with K = 1.0,
Vu
dw ----;-::-;-----=;-t-----;- = 9.54 in.

Since P/$cPn and T)$¡>n are both less than 0.4, Seismic Provisions Section 8.4
does not require consideration of amplified seismic loads in the design of the Therefore, the maximum length of each access hole in the direction of the
column. Therefore, the axial load for which the column was required to be web ¡s,
designed is,

u
P = 138 kips

Tbe access boles for the flange splice may not extend more tban
Determine the required flexural strength of the splice 1112 in. measured perptmdicular to tbe flange surface.
Per Seismic Provisions Section 9.9, the required flexural strength of the splice
is equal to R y Fy Zx of the smaller shaft or can be made with CJP gro ove .welds.
. Check location of splice
Since this value will be greater than the required moment strength for WhICh the
Seismic Provisions Section 9.9 requires splices be located as reqliired by
column was designed, there is no need to calculate the required flexura!
Section 8.4a. From Figute 4-10, the height the third and fourth levels
strength based on the load combinations in ASCE 7.
is 12 ft 6 in., and thecdlumn splices are
This essentially requires the splice to develop the fully yielded cross section of finished floor elevatiún. The clear distance the beam-to-column con-
the smaller column. Complete-joint-penetration groove welds on the column nections is approximately 10.8 ft. With clear distance greater than 8 ft,
web and flanges will develop this force and are also capable of developing the Seismic Ptovisions Section 8.4a requires the splice be located a iilinimum
required axial strength of the column. of 4 ft from the beam-to-column cOIme,CU(m~.

Use complete-joint-penetration groove welds to splice tbe column webs Tbe colUinn splice ÍocaÍion sbown in 4-10 is acceptable.
and flanges.

AMERICAN !NsTITU1E OF STEEL CONSTRUCfrON, INC. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~sn;lljJC110N, !Nc.

~---~--.--------------------------_ ..
 4-76 MOMENT FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 TABLES
4-77

Check additional weld requirements TABLES

Per Seisrnic Provisions Section 9.9, the filler metal used to make the splice
welds must satisfy the toughness requirements specified in Seisrnic Provisions Table 4.1. Comparison of Requi ..ornOlhh:~ for SMF and IMF
Section 7.3b. Addítionally, Seisrnic Provisions Section 9.9 requires that weld tabs Several categories of connection criterion are listed. Seismic Provisions requirements
be removed. for each category are given for IMF and SME

The final connection design is shown in Figure 4-14.

Table 4.2. SMF Design Tables
UPPER & LOWER
Various values useful in the design of SMF are tabulateq. Values are given for W-shapes that
COL. SHAFT meet the seismic compactness requirements for SMF and columns with ~ = 50 ksi
(ASTM A992). The value 1.IRyMp is given to aid· several calculations, including the
determination of the required shear strength of SMF and SMF column-beam
moment ratio.

Several values are tabulated to enable quick deternrll:q;atic)fi of column panel zone shear
strength. To deternrúne if Specification Equations 110-1 or 110-12 are applicable, 0.75~ is
given for comparison with Pu' If Pu is less than 0.75~, the values of <l>RvI and <l>Rv2 can
be used to calculate the design panel zone shear <l>Rn' Considering strength of a
column without doubler plates (tp = tej),

R =0.60F d t [1+_3_b..::¡........:;_
n y e cw d
b

With <1> =1.00, expanding the Specification Equation 11 1 for design strength yields,
WELD ACCESS HOLE
PER SPECIFICATION
SECTION J1.6 (lYP.)
<l>Rn =<I>O.60Fyccw
d t + <l>0.60Fyc
d t
W14x193

Here, <l>Rv 1 and <l>Rv2 are defined as,

/"

~ 3b
~,'. Figure 4-14. Connection as designed in Example 4.13.
<l>R 2 = <l>0.60F d t
v yccw
[ de
J
Substituting into the expanded version of Specification uation JI 0-11 for design strength,

R
<l>R =<I>R + <l> v2
n vI d
b

w/90 is tabulated to aid in the deterrnination of the mi,úmlum panel zone element thick-
nesses. It should be noted that for connections with plates at the same elevations
as the beam flanges, the table can be entered with the and the value selected in the
w/90 column will be equal to d/90. Therefore, the sum

AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCfION, !Nc.

AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL COINSTR$CTION,
 4-78 MOMENT FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 PART 4 REFERENCES 4-79

for the SMF beam ami column will determine the rninimum panel zone element thicknesses PART 4 REFERENCES
per Seisrnic Provisions Equation 9-2, American Institute of Steel Construction Inc. (AISC). Specification for Structural
Steel Buildings, ANSIIAISC 360-05, AISC, '-'l1J."a.¡:;:.v~
American Institute of Steel Construction Inc. (AISC). . Steel Construction Manual,
Values are also tabulated to aid in the deterrnination of lateral bracing re~uire~ents: ~e 13th Ed., AISC, Chicago, IL.
. f:" L l'S th"e maxnn"'"tlm distance between lateral braces
value glven 10r b max " . spec1fied
. "m Se1sffilc American Institute of Steel Construction Inc. . (2005). Seismic Provisions for
Provisions Section 9.8. The required bracing strengthaway from plasuc hinge reglOns, equal
Structural Steel Buildings, ANSIIAISC 341-05, Chicago, IL.
to O.02Ey b'11'
t is also gt·ven. Alllateral bracing is also required to have a rninimum stiffness
".'
based on a moment equal to RyZ~. The value of this moment lS tabulated. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE). (2005). Mi;ni"'tum Design Loads for Buildings
and Other Structures, SEIIASCE 7, ASCE, Reston,
Blodgett, O.W. (1966). Design of Welded Structures,
Foundation, Cleveland, OH.

Building Seismic Safety CounciL (2000). NEHRP ( Earthquake Hazards Reduction

Program) Recommended Provisions for Seismic for New Buildings and
Other Structures Part 1: Provisions, FEMA 368, Federal Emergency Management
Agency, Washington, D.e.

Building Seisrnic Safety CouncíL (2000). NEHRP (IVHl.I.m,ruu Earthquake Hazards Reduction
Program) Recommended Provisions for Seismic for New Buildings and Other
Structures Part 2: Commentary, FEMA 369, Emergency Management Agency,
Washington, D.e.

Galambos, T.y. (1998). Guide to Stability Design for Metal Structures, 5th Ed., John
Wiley & Sons, Inc., NewYork.

Honeck, W.e., and Westphal, D. (1999). "Practical and Detailing of Steel Column
Base Plates." Steel Tips, Structural Steel Educational Moraga, CA.
i.,
Lim, L.C. and McNamara, R.J. (1972). "Stability of Building Systems," Structural
Design of Tall Steel Buildings, VoL 11-16, Prclcel3düuls, ASCE-IABSE Intemational
Conference on the Planning and,Design ofTall DU.uUlij.g1S, Bethlehem, PA, pp. 499-524.
Moore, K.S., Malley, lO., and Engelhardt, M.D. (1999) "Design of Reduced Beam Section
(RBS) Moment Frame Connections." Steel Tips, Steel Educational Council,
Moraga, CA.

Naeím, F. (2001). The Seismic Design Handbook, 2nd ., Kluwer Academic Publishers,
Boston, MA.

SAC Joint Venture. (2000). Recommended Seismic Criteria for New Steel Moment-
Frame Buildings, FEMA 350, Federal Emergency Jt.1~mageIne]lt Agency, Washington,
D.e.

Structural Engineers Association of California .. ~Lj""'" " L '. (1999). Recommended Lateral
Force Requirements and Commentary, SEAOC, CA.

AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INc. AMERICAN INsTITU1E OF STEEL CONST~U(:TIOIN, !Ne.
 MOMENT FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 TABLES 4-81
4-80

Table 4-2 (cnr,tiniIIIAI

Table 4-1 SMF Design
Comparison of Requirements WShapes
for SMF and IMF Systems

Special Moment Frame Intermediate Moment Frame 1.1

8
(SMF) (IMF) Pumax
Shape
Interstory Drift Angle 0.04 radian 0.02 radian

80% of nominal plastic moment W44x335

80% of nominal plastic moment
of the connection x290
Connection Flexural of the connection
at interstory drift angle x262
Strength at interstory drift angle
of 0.02 radian. x230v
of 0.04 radian.
W40x593 13900 2310 15700 15.8 53.9 76.3 12600
Vu for load combination x503 11700 1950 11200 15.5 45.3 64.9 10600
Vu for load combination
1.20 + 0.5L + 0.2S plus shear x431 9880 1660 8120 15.2 38.2 55.4 8980
1.20 + 0.5L + 0.2S plus shear
from application of moment x397 9070 1500 7010 15.1 35.4 51.0 8250
from application of moment
of 2[1.1 Ry FyZIdistance between, x372 8470 1410 6090 15.0 33.0 47.9 7700
of 2[1.1 RyFyZldistance between
plastic hinge locations] x362 8270 1360 5820 15.0 32.2 46.7 7520
plastic hinge locations]
Connection Shear x324 7360 1210 4690 14.9 28.8 41.8 6690
Strength x297 3800 6710 1110 3870 14.7 26.1 38.3 6100
-or- -or- x277 2940 6300 989 3550 14.9 25.0 36.1 5730
x249 2110 5650 886 2870 14.8 22.4 32.4 5130
Lesser Vu permitted if x215 14.7
1080 4860 760 2120 19.3 28.1 4420
Lesser Vu permitted if justified by analysis. See also
justified by analysis the exception provided in Seismic W40x392 8620 1770 7090 11.0 31.2 48.1 7840
Provisions Section 10.2a. x331 7210 1490 4980 10.7 26.0 40.7 6550
x327 7110 1440 4940 10.7 25.8 40.1 6460
For prs, 0.75Pc x294 6400 1280 4020 10.6 23.2 36.3 5820
x278 6000 1240 3540 10.5 21.7 34.1 5450
2 x264 5700 1150 3210 10.5 20.6 32.5 5180
R =O.6F d t [ 1+~
3bt J x235 2490 5090 989 2670 10.6 18.8 29.1 4630

Panel Zone Shear

n ycw ddt
be w
No additional requirements
x211
x183
1780
911
4570
3900
886
760
2140
1530
10.4
10.4
16.8
14.2
26.2
22.5
4150
3550
Strength with $v = 1.00 beyond A1SC Specification x167 841 3490 753 1130 10.0 12.2 20.3 3180
x149v 625 3010 722 732 9.52 9.79 17.6 2740
For Pr> 0.75Pc

Rn = Per Specification
Eqn. J1 0-12, with $v = 1.00

No additional requirements
Panel Zone Thickness t~ (dz+wz)/90 beyond AISC Specification

Continuity Plates To match tested condition To match tested condition

a Pu greater tIlan Pu mBX results in a noncompact web per AISC Seismic Proviisionsl Selction 8.2 for members in combined flexure and

Beam-Column LM:*c > 10. No additional requirements

beyond AISC Specification
axial compression with Puf$'¡y> 0.125. A dash indlcates tIlat Pu mBX exceeds
v Shape does not meet tIle hltwlimit for shear in· Specification Section G2.1 a
yand tIle web is compact.
fy = 50 ksi. $ = 0.90 when applying tIle value of
Proportion
LMpb $RVl in shear calculations.

AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NsTlTUTE OF STEEL Cm~STl1~UC110N, !Nc.
4-82 MOMENT FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 TABLES
4-83

Table 4-2 (continued) Table 4-2 (conti

Fy = 50 ksi
SMF Design Values SMF Design
Ry = 1.1
WShapes W Shapes
Fy =50 ksi

Panel Zone Lateral Bracing

1.1 1.1
Shape
Puma/ RyMp Rv<<I> =1.00) Wz
Lbmax
2% O.02M,cd
RyMp Shape
Pumax8
Rv1
<l> R
<l> V2 O.75Py 90 FyAt -h-o-
kips kip-ft kips kip-in. kips in. ft kips klps kip-ft
W36x800 - 18400 3040 29800 8850 0.378 17.5 77.2 105 16700 7310
38.1 6650
x652 - 14700 2430 19900 7200 0.378 17.0 62.3 85.2 13300 6660 34.7 6050
x529 - 11700 1920 13100 5850 0.378 16.6 50.1 69.5 10700 6000
x487 - 10700 31.6 5450
1770 11100 5360 0.377 16.5 45.8 64.0 9760 5340
28.3 38.7 4860
x441 - 9630 1590 9110 4880 0.378 16.3 41.5 57.6 8750 4750 25.1
x395 - 8620 1410 7320 4350 0.378 16.1 37.0 52.0 7840 34.6 4320
4270 22.7
x361 - 7810 1280 6070 3980 0.378 16.0 33.6 47.4 7100 x211 31.3 3880
3790 19.9
x330 - 7110 1150 5110 3640 0.378 15.9 30.7 43.3 6460 x191 27.9 3440
2360 3400
x302 - 6450 17.9 25.2 3090
1060 4240 3330 0.377 15.9 28.1 39.5 5870 x173 1880 3060 16.1 22.8 2780
x282 3690 6000 985 3680 3110 0.377 15.8 26.1 36.8 5450
W30x148 1540 2520 599 1320 1630
x262 3170 5550 930 3100 2890 0.378 15.6 23.9 34.1 5040 9.48 12.4 18.6 2290
x132 1230 2200 559 945 1460
x247 2750 5190 881 2710 2720 0.378 15.5 22.3 32.1 4720 9.35 10.5 16.4 2000
x124 1010 2060 530 817 1370
x231 2350 4860 832 2360 2550 0.378 15.4 20.8 30.1 4410 9.27 9.77 15.3 1870
x116 859 1910 508 683 1280 9.10 8.93 14.3 1730
W36x256 - 5240 1080 3290 2830 0.377 11.0 21.1 32.1 4770 x108 701 1740 487 546 1190 8.94 7.98 13.1 1590
x232 2900 4720 968 2680 2550 0.377 10.9 19.0 29.0 4290
W27x539 9530 1920 17300
x210 2450 4200 914 2030 2320 0.378 10.7 16.6 25.9 3820 54.2 71.8 8660
x368 6250 1260 8140
x194 1940 3870 838 1730 2140 0.378 10.6 15.2 23.9 3520 14.5 36.5 48.9 5680
x336 5700 1130 6830
x182 1610 3620 790 1520 2010 0.377 10.6 14.3 22.5 3290 14.3 33.3 44.8 5180
x307 5190 1030 5660
x170 1270 3370 738 1310 1880 0.378 10.5 13.2 20.9 3060 14.2 30.1 41.2 4720
x281 4720 932 4830
x160 1020 3150 702 1120 1760 0.377 10.4 12.2 19.6 2860 14.1 27.8 37.6 4290
x258 4300 853 4030
x150 807 2930 673 954 1660 0.378 10.3 11.3 18.3 2660 14.0 25.3 34.4 3900
x235 3890 784 3310 13.8 22.9 31.3 3540
W33x387 - 7860 1360 7580 4280 0.349 15.7 36.9 50.9 7150 x217 3580 707 2860 13.8 21.2
x354 - 7160 1240 6330 3900 0.349 15.5 33.6 46.6 6510 x194 29.1 3260
3180 632 2260 13.7 18.8 25.9 2890
x318 - 6400 1100 5140 3510 0.349 15.4 30.2 41.9 5820 x178 2870 605 1800 13.5 16.8
x291 - 5850 1000 4280 3210 0.348 15.3 27.5 38.6 5320 x161 23.6 2610
2120 2600 546 1470 13.4 15.1 21.4 2360
x263 - 5240 900 3510 2910 0.348 15.2 24.8 34.7 4770 x146 1690 2340 497 1200 13.3 13.7 19.3 2130
x241 3190 4740 852 2800 2660 0.349 15.0 22.3 31.5 4310
W27x129 1460 1990 505 1090
x221 2650 4320 788 2330 2440 0.348 14.9 20.2 28.9 3930 9.19 11.0 16.4 1810
x114 1140 1730 467 786
x201 2090 3900 723 1870 2220 0.349 14.8 18.1 26.1 3540 9.06 9.39 14.3 1570
x102 788 1540 419 620 8.94 8.30 12.8 1400
W33x169 1500 3170 679 1540 1860 0.348 10.4 14.0 21.2 2880 x94 617 1400 395 500 8.81 7.45 11.7 1270
x152 1170 2820 638 1170 1680 0.349 10.3 12.3 19.0 2560
x141 919 2590 604 954 1560 0.349 10.1 11.0 17.5 2360
x130 712 2350 576 757 1440 0.349 9.93 9.83 15.9 2140

a Pu greater tIlan Pu max results in a noncompact web per AISC Seismic Provisions Sectíon 8.2 for ~embers in combined flexure and
apu greater tIlan Pu max results in a noncompact web per AISC Seismic Provisionl~ Se'cüon 8.2 for members in combined f1exure and
axial compression with Puf$J'y> 0.125. A dash indicates tIlat Pu max exceeds $bPy and the web IS compacto axial compression with Pu/$J'y> 0.125. A dash indicates that Pumaxexceeds yand the web is compatt.

AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCfION, !Nc.

AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL COl:-.lSTl~UCtIOl:-.l, !Nc.
 4-84 MOMENT FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 TABLES
4-85

Table 4-2 (continued) Table 4-2 (conti

i Fy =50 ksi
SMF Design Values SMF Design
¡LO Ry = 1.1
W Shapes Fy =50 ksi
W Shapes

Panel Zone lateral Bracing

1.1 1.1
Shape
Pumaxa RyMp Rv<<l> =1.00) Wz
Lbmax
2% 0.02M,cd RyMp Shape
pumaxa
<l>Rv1 <l>RV2 0.75Py 90 FyAf --h-
o
kips kip-ft kips kip-in. kips in. ft kips kips kip-ft
W24x370 - 5700 1280 9120 4090 0.251 13.6 37.3 49.2 5180 3800 1020 32.9 3460
x335 - 5140 1140 7470 3690 0.250 13.4 33.5 44.8 4680 3410 920 29.8 3100
x306 - 4650 1020 6270 3370 0.250 13.3 30.6 40.9 4230 3080 826
x279 - 4210 27.1 2800
929 5230 3080 0.250 13.2 27.8 37.3 3830 2770 734
x250 - 3750 821 4240 2760 13.1 x211
247 2520
II 0.250 24.9 33.5 3410 2470 658 11.7 22.2 2250
j!
x229 - 3400 749 3530 2520 0.250 12.9 22.7 30.6 3090 x192 2230 588 3170
i 11.6 20.1 26.1 2030
x207 - 3060 671 2880 2280 0.251 12.8 20.4 27.6 2780 x175 2010 534 2590 11.5 18.1 23.8 1820
x192 - 2820 620 2490 2110 0.251 12.8 19.0 25.6 2560 x158 1790 479 2110 11.4 16.3 21.4 1630
x176 - 2580 567 2080 1940 0.250 12.6 17.3 23.6 2340 x143 1620 427 ' 1760 11.3 14.8 19.5 1480
x162 - 2360 529 1740 1790 0.251 12.7 15.9 21.6 2140 x130 1460 388 1450 11.2 13.4 17.6 1330
x146 - 2110 482 1380 1610 0.250 12.5 14.1 19.5 1920 x119 1320 373 1140 11.2 12.0
x131 - 1870 445 1070 1440 0.251 12.3 12.4 17.3 1700 x106 16.1 1200
1160 331 891 11.1 10.5 14.2 1050
x97 1060 299 756
W24x103 1200 1410 404 778 1140 0.250 8.27 8.82 13.1 1280 11.0 9.66 13.1 967
x86 938 265 592
x94 968 1280 375 625 1040 0.251 8.23 7.94 11.9 1160 10.9 8.55 11.6 852
x84 698 1130 340 481 926 0.251 8.11 6.95 10.6 1030 W18x71 736 275 451 7.07 6.19 9.08 669
x76 517 1010 315 374 840 0.250 7.98 6.11 9.47 917 x65 671 248 384 7.02 5.69 8.29 610
x60 709 620 227 329
W24x62 387 771 306 221 682 0.250 5.74 4.15 7.28 701 6.98 5.25 7.73 564
x55 588 565 212 269
x55 v 223 676 280 161 608 0.251 5.57 3.54 6.38 614 6.94 4.74 7.05 513
x50 433 509 192 219 6.86 4.28 6.37 463
W21x201 - 2670 628 3010 2220 0.219 12.6 20.5 27.3 2430
W18x46 411 457 195 200
x182 - 2400 565 2460 2010 0.219 12.5 18.5 24.7 2180 5.36 3.67 570 416
x40 235 395 169 149
x166 - 2180 506 2060 1830 0.220 12.4 16.9 22.5 1980 5.28 3.16 4.96 359
x35 161 335 159 97.5
x147 - 1880 477 1490 1620 0.220 12.3 14.4 19.6 1710 5.07 2.55 4.23 305
x132 - 1680 425 1210 1460 0.219 12.2 12.9 17.6 1530 W16x100 998 298 908 10.4 10.2 13.6 907
x122 - 1550 391 1030 1350 0.220 12.1 11.9 16.3 1410 x89 882 265 717 10.4 9.10 12.1 802
x111 - 1410 355 848 1230 0.219 12.1 10.8 14.9 1280 x77 756 225 535 10.3 7.83 10.5 688
W21x93 - 1110 376 655 1020 0.219 7.65 7.83 11.8 1010 W16x57 529 212 328 6.65 5.09 7.36 481
x83 1070 988 331 525 911 0.219 7.61 6.98 10.5 898 x50 624 464 186 253 6.61 4.45 6.46 422
x73 776 867 289 409 806 0.219 7.52 6.14 9.25 788 x45 483 415 167 202 6.53 3.98 5.83 377
x68 642 807 272 349 750 0.219 7.48 5.66 8.62 733 x40 322 368 146 161 6.53 3.54 5.18 335
x62 487 726 252 280 686 0.220 7.36 5.07 7.77 660
W16x31 171 272 131 96.4 4.86 2.43 3.84 248
W21x57 461 650 256 249 626 0.220 5.61 4.26 6.94 591
x50 330 555 237 168 551 0.219 5.40 3.49 5.97 504
x44 201 481 217 118 488 0.220 5.24 2.93 5.18 437

a Pu greater than Pumax results in a noncompact web per AISC Seismic Provisions Sectíon 8.2 for ~embers in combined flexure and a Pu greater than Pumax results in 3'noncompact web per AlSC Seismic
axial compression with Pufc'ptfy> 0.125. A dash indicates that Pumax exceeds c'pbPy and the web IS compact axial compression with Pu/c'p?y > 0.125. A dash indicates that P max exceeds
u
v Shape does not meet the hltw limit for shear in Specification Section G2.1 a with Fy =50 ksi. c'p = 0.90 when applying the value of
c'pRv1 in shear calculations.

AMERICAN lNsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCfION, lNc.

AMERICAN lNSTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~sTR,jJCTION, lNc.
 MOMENT FRAME SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 MOMENT FRAME SYSlEMS UTllJZING R > 3 4-87
4-86

T~ble 4-2 (continued) Table 4-2 (""..,I+i...,..

SMF Design Values SMF Design
Fy =50 ksi Ry = 1.1 Fy =50 ksi
WShapes W Shapes

Panel Zone Lateral Bracing 1.1

1.1 pumaxa
Puma/ RyMp
Rv(<I> =1.00) Wz
Lbmax
2% 0.02M,cd
RyMp Shape
Shape 0.75Py 90 FyA, ha
<l> RV1 <l> RV2

kip-in. kips in. ft kips kips kip-ft

kips kip-ft kips
19.5 87.9 104 7610 3040 897 10600 39.7 47.9 2760
W14x730 - 8370 2060 38800 8060 0.140
7350 0.140 19.2 80.0 95.3 6780 2710 797 8720 35.8 43.5 2460
x665 - 7460 1830 32500
6680 0.140 18.9 72.4 86.7 6050 x279 2430 730 7190 14.0 32.4 39.4 2200
x605 - 6660 1630 27100
6080 0.140 18.7 65.7 79.2 5410 x252 2160 647 5920 13.9 29.3 35.8 1960
x550 - 5950 1440 22600
5510 0.140 18:4 59.5 71.7 4810 x230 1950 584 4970 13.8 26.7 32.6 1770
x500 - 5290 1290 18700
5030 0.140 18.2 53.9 65.2 4290 x210 1750 520 4160 13.6 24.3 29.9 1600
x455 - 4720 1150 15600
61.0 3980 x190 1570 458 3460 13.5 22.1 27.0 1430
13900 4690 0.140 18.0 50.8
x426 - 4380 1050
57.0 3670 x170 1390 403 2760 13.4 19.7 24.3 1260
- 4040 972 12100 4390 0.140 17.9 47.3
x398 3370 x152 1230 358 2200 13.3 17.5 21.7 1110
10500 4090 0.140 17.7 43.9 53.1
x370 - 3710 891
49.2 3080 x136 1080 318 1740 13.1 15.5 19.4 981
- 3390 809 9000 3790 0.140 17.6 40.5
x342 2760 x120 938 279 1360 13.0 13.7 17.1 852
7450 3430 0.140 17.5 36.6 44.7
x311 - 3040 723
40.8 2480 x106 827 236 1080 12.9 12.1 15.1 752
6210 3120 0.140 17.3 33.3
x283 - 2730 646
30.2 36.9 2230 x96 741 210 889 11.0 13.7 674
x257 - 2460 581 5140 2840 0.140 17.2
4230 2570 0.140 17.0 27.3 33.6 2000
x233 - 2200 514
30.3 1790
W12x50 362 135 298 8.15 5.17 6.84 330
- 1970 462 3460 2330 0.140 16.9 24.6 x45 324 122 240 8.11 4.63 6.13 294
x211 1630
2930 2130 0.140 16.8 22.6 27.8
x193 - 1790 414
25.3 1470 W12x35 458 258 112 160 6.40 3.41 4.70 235
- 1610 378 2420 1940 0.140 16.7 20.6
x176 1320
1990 1750 0.140 16.6 18.6 22.9
x159 - 1450 335
20.9 1190
W12x22 228 148 95.9 65.5 3.52 1.71 2.71 134
- 1310 302 1660 1600 0.140 16.5 16.9 x19 155 125 86.0 44.2 3.42 1.40 2.29 113
x145
1400 1460 0.140 15.6 15.1 18.8 1070 W10x112 258
W14x132 - 1180 284 741 1460 13.0 15.9 674
900 0.140 10.3 8.64 11.4 637 x100 655 226 1160 11.5 14.3 596
W14x82 - 701 219 665
818 0.140 10.3 7.93 10.3 578 x88 570 196 909 10.2 12.7 518
x74 - 635 192 560
750 0.140 10.2 7.20 9.53 527 x77 492 169 695 8.87 11.0 447
x68 - 580 174 467
x68 430 147 539 7.78 9.74 391
316 585 0.140 7.98 5.32 7.24 399
W14x53 - 439 154
6.53 359 W10x45 277 106 ; 277 8.35 4.97 6.37 252
256 529 0.140 7.94 4.78
x48 - 395 141
420 0.145 6.44 3.49 4.98 282 W10x30 185 94.5 136 5.69 2.96 4.03 168
W14x38 434 310 131 162
x26 158 80.3 101 5.65 2.54 3.49 143
79.9 288 0.145 4.49 2.11 3.28 184
W14x26 189 203 106
W10x19 109 76.5 56.4 3.63 1.59 2.42 99.0
x17 216 94.3 72.7 39.3 3.51 1.32 2.11 85.7

a Pu greater than Pu max results in a noncompactweb per AISC Seismic

a P. greater than P. results in a noncompact web per A1SC Seismic Provisions Section 8.2 for members in combined flexure and
axial compression with P/~tfy> 0.125. Adash indicates that Pu max exceeds
~ial compresSio~~i1h P/~tfy> 0.125.A dash indicates that pumaxexceeds ~bPyand the web is compacto

AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL COl>IST¡f.Ucr:ION, !Nc.

AMERICAN!NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc.
4-88 MOMENT FRAME SYSTEMS UTlLIZING R > 3
5-1

PART5
OTHER SYSTEMS UTI IZING R > 3

SCOPE ........................................................... 5-2

DIAPHRAGM COLLECTOR AND CHORD ...... . ....................... 5-2
DIAPHRAGM COLLECTOR AND CHORD
Example 5.1. Diaphragm Chord and Collector ······· ............... 5-4
Example 5.2. Collector Connection Design . . . . .. . ...................... 5-10
MAXIMUM FORCE DELIVERED BY SYSTEM EXAMPLE ......... 5-21
Example 5.3. Maximum Force Limited by t'oulndati(m Uplift ................ 5-21
····· ............... 5-23
SPECIAL PLATE SHEAR WALLS ............. . ...................... 5-24
SPECIAL TRUSS MOMENT FRAMES . . . . . . . . .. . ...................... 5-25
ENGINEERED DAMPING SYSTEMS .................................. 5-26
PART 5 REFERENCES .............................................. 5-27

AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !NC. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF 8TEEL CONISTR):JCfI()N, me.
5-2 OTHER SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 DIAPHRAGM COLLECTOR AND CHORD
5-3

SCOPE
The requirements and other design considerations surnrnarized in this Part apply to seismic
load resisting systems that utilize a response modification factor, R, greater than 3 (but are
not covered in Parts 3 or 4) and members and connections that are part of the seismic load
resisting system (SLRS) but are not elements of frames.

OIAPHRAGM COLLECTOR ANO CHORO

Earthquake-resistant design requires that components of the structure be connected or tied
together in such a manner that they behave as a unit. Diaphragms are an important structural
element in achieving this interconnection. Diaphragms are horizontally spanning members,
analogous to deep beams, that distribute the seisrnic loads from their origin to the vertically
oriented lateral resisting frames (braced frames, moment frames, etc.). Diaphragms are com-
monly analyzed as simple-span or continuously spanning deep beams, and hence are subject
to shear, moment, and axial forces (for truss diaphragms and collectors) as well as the as so-
ciated deformations. Figure 5-1 shows typicalloading, shear, and moment diagrams for the
analysis and design of a diaphragm.
The floor or roof-deck system is usually designed as the shear-resistant member (which
is analogous to the web of a beam), and the beams or supplemental deck reinforcing at the
boundaries of the diaphragm are designed as the flexural-resistant member or chord (which
is analogous to the flanges of a beam).
Diaphragms are c1assified into one of three categories: rigid, flexible, or semi-rigid. Rigid
diaphragms are those that possess the strength and stiffness to distribute the lateral forces to
the lateral-force-resisting frames in proportion to the relative stiffness of the individual
frames, without significant deformation in the diaphragm. A flexible diaphragm distributes
the lateral forces to the lateral-force-resisting frames in a manner analogous to a simple-span
beam spanning between the lateral-force-resisting elements. The distribution of the lateral
forces through a flexible diaphragm is independent of the relative stiffness of the lateral-
force-resisting frames.
A serni-rigid diaphragrn distributes lateral forces in proportion to the stiffness of the
diaphragrn and the relative stiffness of the lateral-force-resisting frames. Serni-rigid diaphragms
are ofien analyzed using the analogy of a beam on elastic supports, where the beam represents
the stiffness of the diaphragrn and the elastic supports represent the stiffnesses of the lateral-
force-resisting frames.
Since many buildings have lateral-force-resisting frames that are not uniformly spaced
and continuous around the diaphragm boundaries, collector elements are utilized. Collector
elements are tension and compression members that serve to deliver the diaphragm forces
to the lateral-force-resisting frames. A redistribution of collector forces can occur as yield
mechanisms form in the lateral-force-resisting frames.

Figure 5-1. Diaphragmforce di tribution.

AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc.

AMERICAN !NsTlTUTE pF STEEL CONSTR CTION, !Nc.
5-4 OTHER SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 DIAPHRAGM COLLECTOR AND CHORD DESIGN D.I\..tUV1~ LI~ 5-5

OIAPHRAGM COLLECTOR ANO CHORO OESIGN Weigbt W i ForceFi

EXAMPLES Level kips kips
Roof 765 200
Example 5.1. Oiaphragm Chord and Collector Oesign 4th 756 150
3rd 756 102
Given: Refer to Figure 5-2. Based on the following information given for a North- 2nd 756 54
South motion, determine the collector and chord force at the third level and
size the chords. Design the collector on grid 1 between grids e and D. The From ASeE 7, this structure is assigned Seismic Design eategory e, no =
diaphragm consists of a 2-in. metal deck with 2 1f2-in. concrete topping (total 2.0, / =1.0, and SDS = 1.0.
slab thickness = 4 1/2 in.). The specified compressive strength of the concrete is
4,000 psi, and the metal-deck span is North-South. The Applicable Building 0.2SDS = 0.2(1.0) = 0.2
eode specifies the use of ASeE 7 for calculation of loads.
Solution: The diaphragm design force is
n
LFi
5 FPX=-n--wpx
i=x
(ASeE 7)

30'-0" 30'-0" 30'-0" LWi

i=x

1_1_-1-1--1 However, AseE 7 requires that this

0.2SDS /wpx ' but need not exceed O.4S
must be greater than or equal to
. Values of ~x are calculated in the
table below. Shaded values indicate the I!oo'eml["tI! force.

LWi

I-!....---I-I~- -----+-:~:
Wi Fi
Level kips kips kips
Roof 765 765 200 306
4th 756 1,521 150 302
3rd 756 2,277 102

~r
302
2nd 756 3,033 54 302

Determine the chord force at the

Analyze the diaphrag;m as a unifortnly simply supported deep beam with
a length equal to 120 ft (this is the distance the braced frame along grid
1 and the braced frame along grid 5). The ~axímtum shear in the diaphragm at
the third level is,

BRACEDFRAMES
v.u- -F-p -_ 151 kips -_ .755 k'IpS
2 2
Figure 5-2. Floor plan for Example 5.1.
The maximum moment in the diaphragm

AMERICAN lNSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, lNc. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~s~:uCT'ION, lNe.
 5-6 OTHER SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 DIAPHRAGM COLLECTOR AND CHORO DESIGN '-'L,,"n.L"~ ..".:,-.> 5-7

Assuming the diaphragm depth, d, is equal to 75 ft (the distance between grids ASCE 7 requires that collector elements structures assigned to Seismic Design
A and D) and the moment is resisted by chord members at each end of the Category C must be designed to resist amplified seismic loads (00 level
diaphragm, the maximum tension and compression fo~ce in the chords is, loads). Therefore,

T=C M 2270 kip-ft 30.3 kips M u =(1.2+0.2SDS )MD +OOMQE O.5ML +0.2M (ASeE 7)
d 75 ft
s
A chord member with adequate tensile strength to resist this force can be pro- Mu = 1.4 (123 kip-ft) + 2.0( o kip-ft) 0.5(96.2 kip-ft) + 0.2( o kip-ft)
vided by the addition of supplemental slab reinforcement such as ASTM A615 =220 kip-ft
Gr. 60 deformed reinforcing bars. The required area of slab reinforcement is,
The maximum shear in the diaphragm at each end; therefore the total
T
u 30.3 kips 0.561 in.2 shear force along grid 1 is 75.5 kips. L"""I~U'UUll~ an even distribution of shear
As req along the depth of the diaphragm, the demand on the diaphragm is,
<l>Fy 0.90( 60 ksi) .
u V 75.5 kips
Two #5 bars (As = 0.61 in.2 ) can be used to provide this supplemental slab re- v=-= =1.01
d 75 ft
inforcement at the chord locations. Per ACI 318 Section 21.9.5.3, additional
transverse reinforcement is not required if the extreme fiber stress in the con- A diaphragm should be selected that has a strength greater than 1.01 kips/ft.
crete is equal to or less than 0.2f;. Since the deck span is perpendicular to the The diaphragm should be attached to the (1nlilpr·tnr in order to transfer this shear.
chord span, assume that on1y tbe concrete aboye the top of the metal deck is This may be accomplished by using welds between the collector and
effective in resisting the chord force. The elastic section modulus of the metal deck or headed shear studs welded the collector.
diaphragm is,

bd 2 2 ~ in.(75 ft)2 3
S=-= =195 ft
6 6(12 in./ft)
i I
!.
The extreme fiber stress at the chord is,

M 2270 kip-ft( 1000 lbslkip)

80.8 psi
S
NOTE: DIAPHRAGM
REDUCED UVE SHEAR,V
LOADSSHOWN
0.2f~ = 0.2( 4000 psi) = 800 psi
D =0.306 kipslft
fe < O.2f;; therefQre additional transverse reinforcing is not required at the L =0.095 kipslft

diaphragm chord.
D =15.9kips II't COLLECTOR
FORCE,E
Design the wide-flange beam between grids and o e L =14.2kips

as a col/ector
The beam gravity loads and the collector axial force diagram are shown in
Figure 5-3. The moments in the beam are,
25ft

0.306 kips/ft(25 ft)2 15.9 kips(25 ft) -123 k' f

MD = +. ~ lP- t D =11.8 kips
8 4 L =8.29 kips

0.095 kips/ft(25 ft)2 14.2 kips(25 ft)

M L= . + 96.2 kip-ft
8 4 Figure 5-3. Collector axial load diagram and gravity loadsfor Example 5.1.

AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTlTUTE OF STEEL Co.NS~RU(:TIOIN, !Nc.
 5-8 OTHER SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 DIAPHRAGM COLLECTOR AND CHORD DESIGN -'-".L>..n.J..... 1'-'•.:....,
5-9

Using the shear demand along grid 1, the axial force in the collector at the inter-
M r.x; = 1.02( 220 kip-ft)
section of grids C and 1 is,
=224 kip-ft
QE = 25 ft(1.01 kips/ft) = 25.3 kips (tension or compression)
Using Manual Table 6-1 for cOlmbme~q loading with KLy = 12.5 ft and
Therefore, the axial load in the bearn is, Lbx = 12.5 ft,

(ASCE 7)
p = 4.43 X 10-3 kips-l = 3.97 X 10-3 (kip_ft)-l
Pu =(1.2+0.2SDS )PD +ºoP +O.5PL +0.2Ps
QE
PPr =4.43xl0-3 kips-l(50.6
Pu =1.4(0 kips )+2.0( 25.3 kips) + 0.5( O kips )+0.5( O kips)
= 50.6 kips (tension or compression) bxMr.x; =3.97XlO- (kip-ft
3
r 1
(224 ft)=0:889

Try a W18X46. Since PPr > 0.2,

":' Considering second-order effects with KLx = 25.0 ft,
pPr +bx M r.x; +by M ry =0.224+0.889
e =1.11> 1.0

1-(~:r
(Specification C2-2)
Try a W18X50.

Checking second-order effects, Bl is . deterrnined by a similar process as

1.02. Therefore,
The ends are pinned, therefore,
M r =224 kip-ft

Using Manual Table 6-1 for combined loading with KLy = 12.5 ft and
(Specification C2-l b)
Lbx = 12.5 ft,
a=1.0
p = 2.77 X 10-3 kips-l bx 3.05 X 10-3 (kip_ft)-l
Pr "" B2 Pu = 50.6 kips
PPr =2.77xlO-3 kips-l(50.6 kips =0.140
n 2 EI
P=--
el (KL)2 3
bxMr.x; =3.05 x 10- (kip-ft r 1
(224 -ft)=0.683

2 4 Since PPr < 0.2,

n (29,000 ksi)( 712 in. )

[1.0( 25 ft)( 12 in';ft) J2 Xppr + Ys(bxMr.x;+byMry)= X(o. 40)+ Ys(0.683+0)

=2,260 kips =0.838 1.0 o.k.

Use a W18X50 for the collector.
em = 1.0

Therefore, Altematively, a collector with adequate strength to resist the diaphragm

shear can be provided by the addition of SUI)p~(~mc~ntal slab reinforcement, such
1.0 as ASTM A615 Gr. 60 defonned reinforcing In this case, the required area
1.02
1.0(50.6 kips) of slab reinforcement is,

2,260 kips
A = !L = 50.6 kips = O 937 in 2
s req <l>Fy 0.90( 60 ksi)· .
(Specification C2-la)

AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STJ>EL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~sTR.tICTION, lNe.
5-10 OTHER SYSTEMS UTll..IZING R > 3 DIAPHRAGM COLLECTOR AND CHORD DESIGN J..jL>c~V'''-' ••" ..'" 5-11

Design $.e connection in accordance the procedure for extended single-

Four #5 bars (As = 1.23 in. 2) can be used to provide this supplemental slab
plate shear connections in Part 10 of the modified for the preseq.ce of an
reinforcement at the collector location. Per ACI 318 Section 21.9.5.3, addi- axial force.
tional transverse reinforcement is not required if the extreme fiber stress in
the concrete is kept below 0.2f~. Since the deck span is parallel to the col-
lector span, the concrete aboye and below the top of the metal deck will be Determine e for bolt group
effective in resisting the collector force. Assuming the metal deck profile is The angle of the resultant load with to the longitudinal axis of the bolt
such that half of the area below the top of the metal deck is filled with con- group is,
crete, the effective thickness of the concrete collector is 31¡2 in. The minimum
width of slab required to resist the collector force is, e = tan-1 ( Rua
Ruv
J= tan -1 (_5_0._6---'::'-1-
20.7
b. Pu 50.6 kips 18.1 in
mm O.2f;t Ji' in.)
0.2( 4 ksi)( 3
The tabulated angle that is closest to, but than, the calculated load angle is
60°. The ecceptricity of the shear load determined by the method used for
single-plate connections.
This collector width can be easily accornmodated.
Interpolating from Manual Table 7-7
Using the 0.2f~ compression limitation set forth in ACI 318 Section
n = 4 bolts,
21.9.5.3 in conjunction with omega-level forces may be conservative.
Alternative approaches can also be used, such as limiting compressive
C=3.17
strains in the concrete collector to 0.003 (which is analogous to the strain
limits for unconfined concrete resisting seismic loads), treating the collec-
tor as a short compression member, or any other rational design method.
W14x132
0= 11.8 kips
L = 8.29 kips
Example 5.2 Collector Connection Design
W18x50 W/
Given: Refer to Figure 5-4. Check the adequacy of the ASTM A36 (~ = 36 ksi, Fu = STO HOlES
58 ksi) single-plate connection shown to resist the collector forces determined
in Example 5.1.

Solution: Determine the factored loads

~E= 25.3kips
The factored shear load is,
~BEAM-....l,.-:::...-'I.- t--t---+f-I - - - -
Ruv =(l.2+0.2S DS )RD + QORQE +0.5RL +0.2Rs (ASCE7)

= 1.4(11.8 kips) + 2.0( Okips) + 0.5( 8.29 kips) + 0.2( O kips)

=20.7 kips

The factored axial load is,

Ff.3/8" W/
STO HOlES
Rua =(l.2+0.2S )P + QOP +O.5PL +O.2PS (ASCE 7)
DS D QE
(4) 7/8"0
= 1.4 ( O kips )+2.0(25.3 kips )+0.5( O kips )+0.2( O kips)
A325N BOLTS
=50.6 kips

Ru = ~(20.7 kips)2 + (50.6 kips)2 = 54.7 kips Figure 5~. Collector connection ínv/~stiJilatt~d in Example 5.2.
AMERICAN !NSTITUIE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~s",I<lUCIlON, !Nc.
5-12
OTHER SYSTEMS UTll.JZING R > 3 DIAPHRAGM COLLECTOR AND CHORO DESIGN J..jA..M..lVJ.r¡LJ::'~ 5-13

Try a 3/s-in. single plateo For shear yielding,

Rn =0.6FA = 0.6F dt (Specification J4-3)

Check bolt shear y g y p
From Manual Table 7-1, for a 7/s-in.-diameter bolt, R
t = __ uv_

<!>rv = 21.6 kips

pv mm <!>R jt
n p
20.7 kips
<!>Rv =C<!>rv =3.17( 21.6 kips )=68.5 kips 1.0( 0.6)( 36 ksi)( 12 in.)
=0.0799 in.

For tension yielding,

Check bearing on the plate
Rn =FA (Specification J4-1)
At this edge distance, bearing controls over tearout, y g

rn = 2.4dtFu (Specification B-6a) t .-~

pa mm - <!>Rn/ t p

rn = 2.4(Ys in.)(Ys in.)(58 ksi) 50.6 kips

= 45.7 kips 0.90(36 ksi)(12 in.)
= 0.130 in.
<!>Rn =C<!>r =3.17(0.75)(45.7 kips )=109 kips
n Therefore, the mínimum required plate th*~kness is,

Check bearing on the beam web

The beam web is nearly as thick and stronger than the plateo The beam web has
sufficient bearing strength by inspection.
Check the maximum permissible plate thickness
From Manual Table 7-7 (for e = 0° in this case),
M max = 1.25 FvAbC'
2
= 1.25(48 ksi)( 0.601 in. )(11.3 in.)
= 407 kip-in.
0.0799 inf +(0.130 in
=0.153 in.
e = 11.3 in.
Check net section rupture of the te under combined shear
and tension
In evaluating this limít state, the mínimum thickness is calculated independ-
ently for each force, and the resulting thí(~lm~ssl~s are combined for the interaction
of forces using an elliptical approximation.

6( 407 kip-in.)
t 0.471 in. >0.375 in. o.k. 7/ in . + 78
Anv =Ant =Lnet tp =[12 in.-4( /8 1/ in .)Jtp
=8tpin. 2
max
36(12 iny For shear rupture,

Check yielding of the plate under combined shear and tension (Specification J4-1)
In evaluating this limit state, the mínimum pIate thickness is ca1culated inde-
pendentIy for each force, and the resulting thicknesses are combined for the
interaction of forces using an elliptical approximation.

AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, INc. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~s'$:ucrloN, INc.
5-14 OTHER SYSTEMS UTlLIZING R > 3 DIAPHRAGM COLLECTOR AND CHORD DESIGN .LJH.ru. . . +,.~U 5-15

20.7 kips , FuAnt = 58 ksi( 2tp in.) = 116t p

= 0.75(0.6)(58 ksi)(8 in.)
= 0.0991 in. p kips
For tension rupture,

(Specification J4-2)

<l>Rn = <1>[ 0. 6FuAnv + UbsFuAnt] (Specification J4-5b)

:::;; <1>[ 0.6Fy Agv + UbsFuAnt

2
Ae =UAn =(1.0)(An )=An =8tpin.

Ae :::;; 0.85Ag o.k. <l>R

_ n =0.75[244 kipslin.+1.0(1l
Rua tp
ta inin = ~Rn/t p
:::;;0.75[ 227 kipslin. + 1.0(1
50.6 kips = 270 kipsfm. :::;; 257 kipsfm.
= 0.75(58 ksi)(8 iri.)
= 257 kipsfm.
= 0.145 in.
Ruv 20.7 kips
Therefore, the rninimum required plate thickness is, tpvm1J'!.
<l>Rn It p 257 kipslin.

tP . = (t .)2 + (t . .)2
m1J'! pvm1J'! pam1J'!
2"
=~( 0.0991 iny +(0.145 in.)2
r--..,f

= 0.176 in.

04~--
I
Check block shear rupture of the plate I

•
I
In eváluating this lirnit sta~, the rninimum plate thickness is calculated independ- I
entIy for each force, and the resulting thicknesses are combined for the interaction e I

•
I
of forces using an ellipticai approximation.
I
I
Investigate the failure path 1-2-3-4 on Figure 5-5b.
0.--
For the shear force

A =2.5t in. 2
gt P

Ant = 2.5t p - >-i(Ys in.+ Ys in.)tp = 2.5tp - 0.5tp = 2t p in.2

(a) BEAM WEB
Agv =(12in.-1.5in.)tP =10.5tp in. 2
Figure 5-5. Block shear failure paths
AMERICAN lNSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, mc. ÁMERICAN mSTlTUTE OF STEEL Cm~s~:ucTION, mc.
 5-16 OTHER SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 DIAPHRAGM COLLECTOR AND CHORD DESIGN r.A ," IV' ..... r'..'"
5-17

For the tension force For the tension force

Agt = (12 in.-1.5 in.)tp = 1O.5tp in. 2 Agt =(12 in.-3 in.)tp =9tpin. 2

Ant = 1O.5tp - 3 ~(Ys in.+ Ys in.)tp = 7t p in. 2

Ant = 9t p - 3(Ys in. + Ys in) = 6t p in. 2

Agv =2.5tp in. 2 Agv =2(2.5)tp =5tp in. 2

Anv = 2.5t p - ~(Ys in.+ Ys in}p = 2.5tp - 0.5t p = 2t p in.2 Anv -- 5 t P - (7/ . + 78
/8 m. ' ) t p -- 5t P - t P -- 4 tP m.
1 /m. . 2

FuAnt = 58 ksi(7t in.) = 406t p kips

Fu Ant =58 ksi(6tp in.) =348tp

0.6FuAnv=0.6(58 kSi)(2t p in.2 ) = 69.6t p kips

0.6FuAnv = 0.6(58 kSi)( 4t p in.2 ) =

0.6Fy Agv = 0.6(36 ksi)(2.5tp in.2)=54.0tp kips 2

0.6Fy Agv= 0.6(36ksi)(5tp in. )=1

<l>Rn = <1>[ 0.6FuAnv + UbsFuAnt] (Specification J4-5b) <l>Rn = <1>[ 0.6FuAnv + UbsFuAnt] (Specification J4-5b)

;¡:
~ <1>[ 0.6Fy Agv + UbsFuAnt ] ~ <1>[ 0.6Fy Agv + UbsFuAnt
Ubs = 1.0

I <l>Rn = 0.75[ 69.6 kipsfm.+ 1.0(406 kipsfm.) ]

t
P
<l>R
_ n = 0.75[ 139
t
p
kipslin. + 1.0(34

L
~~!".\ !!
~ 0.75[ 54.0 kipslin. + 1.0(406 kipsfm.) ]
= 356 kipsfm. ~ 345 kipslin.
= 345 kipslin.
~0.75[ 108 kipsfm. + 1
= 365 kipsfm. ~ 342 kipsfm.
= 342 kipsfm.

Rut 50.6 kips Rut 50.6 kips

t . 0.146 in. t pamm.
pa mm
<l>Rn / t p 345 kipslin. <l>Rn !tp 342 kipsfm.

t . =
p mm
(t pv mm.)2 + (ta mm.)2 t.
P mm (tpv mm. )2+ (ta mm. )2
=~( 0.081 in.)2 +(0.146 iny (0,081 iny +(0.148
= 0.167 in. < 0.375 o.k. = 0.169 in. < 0.375
Investigate the failure path 1-2-3-5 on Figure 5-5b.
Check block shear rupture of the web
For the shear force, conservatively using the minimum thickness determined for
path 1-2-3-4, In evaluating this limit state, the minimum thickness is calculated independ-
ently for each force,and the resulting thi,:;knejssles are combined for the interaction
. =0.081 in. 2
t pvmm of forces using an elliptical approximation.
Investigate the failure path 1-2-3-4 on

AMERICAN !NSTITIJTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION. INC.

AMERICAN INSTITIJTE OF STEEL COl..rsnlUC110N. !Nc.
5-18 OTHER SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 DIAPHRAGM COLLECTOR AND CHORD DESIGN DA.M'V'r-II.r·...... 5-19

For the shear force, block shear rupture is not a limit state because the beam 50.6 kips
twamlJ7..
is not coped. However, net shear rupture can occur on the beam web. For this 366 kipsfm.
limit state,

__ R uv_
t wvmlJ7..
<!>Rn / tw
R (0.0505 inf +(0.138 inf
uv
<!>(0.6)Fu d net = 0.147 in. < t w =0.355 in.
20.7 kips

0.75(0.6){65ksi)[18.0in.-4(1. in.+ 1. in.)]

Check the plate for flexure

=0.0505 in. Mu = Ruv e = 20.7 kips (2.5 in.) =

For the block shear calcuIations, a beam underrun of 1/4 in. will be assumed. The von Mises criterion will be used to the bending strength for the
For the tension force, shear stress present. The tension stress can be deducted directly from
the bending stress.
Agv =2(2 in.-0.25 in.)tw =3.5tw in. 2

Anv =3.5tw in.

2
-(Ys' in.+ ){ in}w =2.5t w in.
2
Fcr = F - Rut J2 -3f2
[ y dt v
Agt =3(3 in.)tw =9tw in. 2

-9t
Ant- . 2 3( 7/ . 1/') -6 . 2
w m. - /8 m.+ /8 m. t w - t w m.
F -. Rut
( y dt
J2 _3( Ruv J2
dt

Fu An t =65 ksi(6tw in.2)=390t w kips 2

50.6 kips -3 20.7 kips
0.6Fu Anv =0.6(65 ksi)2.5tw =97.5tw kips 12 in.(0.375 in.) (12 in.(0.375 in.) J
0.6Fy A~ =0.6(50 ksi)3.5tw =105tw kips = 23.4 ksi

Ysin.(12)2 3
<!>Rn = <!>[0.6FuAnv +Ubs FuAntJ Z= . = 13.5 in.
4
~<!>[0.6Fy Agv +Ubs FA]
u nt <!>Mn = <!>~rZ
= 0.90(23.4 ksi)(13.5 in.) == kip-in. > 51.8 kip-in. o.k.

<!>Rn = 0.75[97.5 kipslin.+ 1.0 ( 390 kipsfm.)] Check local buckling of the plate
tw The pIate buckling check conservatively . the presence of the tension
~0.75[ 105 kipsfm.+ 1.0(390 kipsfm.)] component on the connection, which may be present at all times.

= 366 kipsfm.~371 kipslin. ~r=~Q

= 366 kipsfm.

AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, INC. AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~s~.ucrION. 1Nc.
5-20 OTHER SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 MAXIMUM FORCE DELIVERED BY SYSTEM DESIGN 5-21

MAXIMUM FORCE DELIVERED BY DESIGN

EXAMPLE

IOtp 475+280( h; r Example 5.3. Maximum Force Lim by Foundation Uplift

12 in. ~36 ksi Given:
0.231 Refer to Figure 5-6. Determine the matij:nlum force that can be delivered to the

~. J2
brace based on the foundation uplift of the system. Assume a con-
1O(0.375 in.) 475+280( 12
2.5 ffi.
crete density equal to 150 Ibs/ft3 and a density equal to 100 lbs/ft3.

From ASeE 7, this structure is assilgm~d to Seismic Design eategory e, 00 =

A, < 0.7. therefore, Q =1 2.0, 1 = 1.0, and SDS = 1.0.

0.2SDS = 0.2(1.0) = 0.2

Therefore, plate buckling does not control.
Solution: Determine the dead load roC'·íC'+·t:J",.-o to overtuming
Use a 3/s-in. single-plate.

Check weld strength Vmat = 2 ft(4 ft)(26 ft) = ft 3

The welds are sized as 51stp to develop the strength of the plateo

%(% in.) = 0.234 in. Vsoil over mat = C~ ft}4 ft)(26 = 69.3 ft
3

Use a 1/4-in. double-sided fillet weld to connect the single plate to the
4'-0" 18'-0" 4'-0"
column flange.
PD =10 kips Po =10 kips
The single-plate connection shown in Figure 5-4 is adequate to resist the Fl =12 kips ~ =12 kips
collector forces determined in Example 5.1.
W12x26

COlB

COLA

9
ÑT------~ __~~________~~~_____+~~~--~~
2'-0" X 4'-0"
CONC. MAT.

NOTE: COlUMN DEAD lOADS INClUDE ,",VI¡'UIV" .. SElF-WEIGHT

Figure 5-6. SCBF frame andfound(;/tz"bll fOl Example 5.3.

AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONsmUCfION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~~'rnnCIlON, !Nc.
 5-22 OTHER SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 BUCKLING-RESTRAINED BRACED FRAMES (BRBF)
5-23

VI . t =
sab overma (~
12 ft)(4 ft)(26 ft) = 34.7 ft3
BUCKLING-RESTRAINED BRACED RAMES (BRBF)
Buckling-restrained braced frames are a special class concentrically braced frames. As in
Using the densities given arid sumrrúng moments at the extreme lower right the case of Special Concentrically Braced Frames the centerlines of BRBF members
comer of the mat, meet at a connection intersect or nearly intersect at a to forrn a complete vertical-truss
system that resists lateral forces. BRBF systerns more ductility and energy absorption
Dead Moment Resisting capacity than SCBF systerns because overall brace and its associated strength
Weight Arm Moment degradation, is precluded at forces and deforrnations to the design story drift.
l' EleÍnent kips ft kip-ft Buckling-restrained braced frames are composed of bearns, and bracing elements,
i
"
all of which are subjected prirnarily to axial forces. of buckling-restrained braced
Conc. Mat 31.2 13.0 406 frames are composed of a steel core and restraining encasing the steel core that pre-
Soil over Mat 6.93 13.0 90.1 vents buckling. Figure 5-7 shows a schematic of a bracing element (adapted from
Slab over Mat 5.21 13.0 67.7 Tremblay et al., 1999). The steel core within the element is intended to be the prirnary
ColumnA 10 4.00 40.0 source of energy dissipation. During a moderate to severe earthquake, the steel core is
Column B 10 22.0 220 expected to undergo significant ihelastic deforrnations.
824 BRBF systems can provide elastic stiffness that comparable to that oí an EBF or a
SCBE The ductility and energy dissipation capability BRBF is expected to be compara-
The maximum shear in the frame before it tips over is, ble to that of an EBF or SMF and greater than that . This high ductility is attained
by lirniting buckling of the steel coreo Further inforrmj.tion on the design of BRBF systems
v: = 824 kip-ft = 43.4 ki s may be found in Seisrnic Provisions Section 16, and associated cornmentary, and in the
maJe 17ft+2ft p references (Sabelli, 2004).
The length of the brace is,

The maximum force in the brace is,

ft) = 598 'c'

24;8-
P. =T =434 kips ( - . k'IpS
u u· 18 ft

Note that thls force' is substantially smaller than fue altemative design value,
R F. A = 180 kips. Therefore, this lower force can be used when the "maxi-
rriu~ torce that can be delivered by the system" is perrnitted as a design
PLAN

altemative by the Seisrnic Provisions. PLATE

AMERICAN lNs1TIUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCfION, lNc.

AMERICAN lNs1TIUTE OF STEEL COI'lS1JtUClI10N, INc.
5-24 OTHER SYSTEMS UTILIZING R > 3 SPECIAL TRUSS MOMENT FRAMES
5-25

SPECIAL PLATE SHEAR WALLS ' A number of laboratory tests have been cOl!1dllctt~<l on special plate shear walls, and are
Special plate shear walls, sometimes referred to as Steel PIat~ Shear Walls, consist of surnmarized in AISC Design Guide 20, Steel PIate Walls. Specification requirements
columns, beams and a steel pIate element that infills the boundanes created by the columns for this system can be found in Seismic Provisions 17. Tests indicate that special
and beams. The behavior of special steel plate shear walls is somewhat analogous to a ver- plate shear walls provide a very stiff and ductile load-resisting system, capable of
dissipating significant amounts of energy.
tically cantilevered steel plate girder with the columns acting as ~e plate girder flanges, the
beams acting as the intermediate stiffeners, and the steel plate actmg as the web of the pl.ate
girder. See AISC Design Guide 20, SteeI PIate Shear Walls. Figure 5-8 .shows an elevatlOn SPECIAL TRUSS MOMENT FRAM
of a special plate shear wall. Special plate shear walls can be used as .mdependent pl~ar
Special Truss Moment Frames incorporate horizontal elements rigidly attached to ver-
walls, coupled walls linking two planar walls with a coupling beam .(which allow.s ope~mgs
tical column elements and resist lateral displacement traditional frame action. The limits
to be pIaced through the shear wall), or interconnected walls, creatmg a three-dlmenslOnal
on the horizontal truss span and depth are set by the
tube system, which is beneficial for taller structures. Speci~ plate shear walls c~ also be
The special segment is the yield mechanism of the
used as part of a dual system, utilizing moment frames deslgned to c~ a portlOn of the
of the special segment are designed and detailed to nominally elastic in order to sup-
prescribed seismic forces. The steel pIate acts as the primary shear reslstanc.e of ~e shear
port this yield Iilechanism (see 'Provisions Figure 12.2). The horizontal truss elements
wall and may be stiffened or unstiffened. When the plate of the shear. w~l IS deslgned ~s
are designed and constructed with a special segment is usually placed near mid-span of
stiffened, it is designed to prevent buckling of the plate prior to ~~ear Yle~dmg, and ~hen lt
the truss element in order to mitigate the gravity effects on the special segment. The
is designed as unstiffened, it is expected to buckle in order to utlhze tenslOn-field actlOn.
special segment can be designed and detailed either X-braced panel segments or
vierendeel panel segments, as shown in Figure 5-9. properly designed and detailed spe-
cial segment withstands large inelastic and dissipates energy through a
combination of flexural yielding of the chord and or axial yielding of the web mem-
í -, bers, depending on which type :of special segment is Specification requirements for
I I this system can be found in Seismic Provisions
I I
I I
I
~
V-NOMINALLY
ELASTIC
L ELEMENTS

í -,
I I
I I
I I
~
I
I t--- STEEL PLATE
L .J NOMINALLY

í -, ELASTIC
ELEMENTS
I I
I I
I I
I I
1I

Figure 5-8. SteeI pIate shear wall. Figure 5-9. STMF frame eL~VULj:UfL.

AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INC. AMERICAN lNSTITUTE OF STEEL COINstRuc:noN, !Nc.
 OTHER SYSTEMS UTll...IZING R > 3 PART 5 REFERENCES
5-26 5-27

ENGINEERED DAMPING SYSTEMS PART 5 REFERENCES

Typical structures possess one to five percent inherent dampm . g contributed
'. by nonstructural
. . American Concrete Institute (ACD. (2002), Building Requirements for Structural Concrete
1 ts Engm ' eered damping systems can be built into new construcüon or used for SelSITIlC (ACI318-02) and Cornmentary (ACI318R-02), ACI, IFrumlllgtcm Hills, MI.
e emen . . dam' Man damped
retrofit of existing structures to significantly increase the structural pmg. y American Institute of Steel Construction Inc. (AISC). Specijication for Structural Steel
tructures have critical damping of 15 to 35 percent. The four major types of dampers used Buildings, ANSIIAISC 360-05, AISC, Chicago, IL.
s. the United States are fluid viscous dampers, V1SCoe. l ' d ampers, friction dampers
asüc . ' and
m
metallic-yielding dampers. Each type has specific charactensücs, .. ~d vantage,s and disadvan- American Institute of Steel Construction Inc.
tages for structural applications, and each type is made by several d~er~nt manufacturer~. To 13th Ed., AISC, Chicago, IL.
design with dampers, it is critical to capture the dynamic chru:actensücs and the no~l~near American Institute of Steel Construction Inc. (AISC). Seismic Provisions for Structural
behavior of the structure. This permits the designer to detefITIlne the amoun~ of addlüonal Steel Buildings, ANSIIAISC 341-05, AISC,
damping and stiffness that is required to achieve the desired performance. ~ngmeered damp-
ing systems are, therefore, designed on the basis of performance-based desl~: .. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE). (2005).¡Mi,nimtum Design Loads for Buildings
Engineered damping systems are effective for almost all but the most.ngl~ bUlldmgs. A and Other Structures, SEllAS CE 7-05, ASCE,
thorough discussion of engineered, supplemental damping system deslgn IS beyond ~e Astaneh-AsI, A. (2001). "Seismic Behavior and of Steel Shear Walls." Steel Tips,
scope of thi s manu al , b u t FEMA 273 " 274 and 356 are considered state-of-the-art for eXlst- Structural Steel Educational Council, Moraga, CA.
ing structures, as are FEMA 450 and ASCE 7 for new structures.
Blodgett, O.W. (1966). Design of Welded Strurturl".'i:_ The James F. Lincoln Arc Welding
Foundation, Cleveland, OH.

Building Seismic Safety Counci1. (2000). NEHRP ( Earthquake Hazards Reduction

Program) Recommended Provisions for Seismic J(e,~ulatzlonsfor New Buildings and Other
Structures Part 1: Provisions, FEMA 368, Emergency Management Agency,
Washington, D.C.

Building Seismic Safety Council. (2000). NEHRP ( Earthquake Hazards Reduction

Program) Recommended Provisions for Seismic Ke.f!4tlatTA'Jns for New Buildings and Other
Structures Part 2: Commentary, FEMA 369, Emergency Management Agency,
Washington, D.C.

Galambos, T.y. (1998). Guide to Stability Design for Metal Structures, 5th Ed., John
Wiley & Sons, inc., New York

Naeim, F. (2001). The Seismic l)esign Handbook, Ed., Kluwer Academic Publishers,
Boston, MA. -l-.

Research Council on Structural Connections. Specijication for Structural Joints

Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts, American of Steel Construction, Chicago, IL.
Sabelli, R. (2006). AISC Design Guide No. 20 Steel Shear Walls, American Institute
of Steel Construction, Chicago, IL.

Sabelli, R. (2004). "Recornmended Provisions for BQ.ckllín~~-R.estraílled Braced Frames,"

Engineering Joumal, Vol. 41, No. 4 (4th Qtr.), pp. 5-175, American Institute of Steel
Construction, Chicago, IL.

Structural Engineers Association of California (1999). Recommended Lateral

Force Requirements and Commeritary, SEAOC, Sa(;~alnellto, CA.

AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL COlNslIRuc:noN, !Nc.
5-28 OTHER SYSTEMS UTnJZING R > 3

Tamboli, A.R. (1999). Handbook of Structural Steel Connection Design and Details, McGraw- ANSI!AISC 341-05
HiU, New York. ANSI!AISC 341 s 1-05
An American National Standard
Tremblay, R. (1999). "Seismic Behavior and Design of Concentrically Braced Steel Frames,"
Engineering Journal, Vol. 36, No. 3, pp. 148-166, American Institute of Steel Construction,
Chicago, ll.,.

SeiSDlic visions for

Structural S el Buildings
..L.L.L",,~uU..L.lJ.~ Supplement No. 1

Seismic Provisions for Structural Buildings dated March 9, 2005

and SupJ)leIn~IltNo. 1 dated November 16, 2005

Supersedes the Seismic Provisions

for Structural Steel Buildings
dated May 21, 2002
and al1 previous versions

Approved by the
Committee on Specifications and
by the AISC Board of Directors

Al\fERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CTION,INC.

One East Wacker Drive,
Chicago, Illinois 60601-

AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc.

6.1-ii
6.1-iii

This Preface is not a part of ANSIIAISC 341-05, Provisions for Structural Steel
Buildings, but is included for informational pUlrpose$

The AISC Specificationfor Structural Steel Jjuitldíi~S (ANSIIAISC 360-05) is intended to

Copyright © 2005 cover cornmon design criteria. Accordingly, it is feasible for it to also cover all of the
special and unique problems encountered within full range of structural design practice.
This document, theAISCSeismic Provisionsfor SteelBuildings (ANSIIAISC 341-
by American Institute of Steel Construetion, Ine. 05) with Supplement No. 1 (ANSIIAISC 341s1-05) referred to as the Provisions)
is a separate consensus standard that addresses one topie: the design and construction of
structural steel and composite structural concrete building systems for high-
All rights reserved. This book or any part thereol must not be reproduced in any lorm seismic applications. Supplement No. 1 consists of made to Part 1, Section 14
without the written permission 01 the publisher. of the Provisions after the initial approval had been qOlnpJ.eted.

These Provisions are presented in two parts: Part I is 'f"''''''~''"'U for the design and construction
of structural steel buildings, and is written in a format that addresses both LRFD
The AISC logo is a registe red trademark 01 AISC and is used under license.
and ASD; Part 11 is intended for the design and of composite structural steeV
reinforced concrete buildings, and is written to LRFD only. In addition, seven
The informationpresented in this publication has been prepared in accordance with
mandatory appendices, a list of Symbols, and are part of this document. Terms
recognized engineering principIes and is for general information onIy. While it is
that appear in the Glossary are generally italicized they first appear in a sub-section,
believed to be accurate, tbis information should not be used or relied upon for any
throughout these Provisions. A nonmandatory with background information is
specific application without competent professional examination and verification also provided.
of its accuracy, suitability, and applicability by a licensed engineer, architect or
other professional. The publication ofthe material contained herein is not intended The previous edition of the AISC Seismic for Structural Steel Buildings,
as a representation or warranty on the part of the American Institute of Steel approved on May 21, 2002, incorporated many of advances achieved as part of the
Construction, Inc., or of any other person named herein, that this information FEMNSAC program and other investigations and developments related to the seismic
is suitable for any general or particular use or of freedom from infringement of design of steel buildings. Recognizing that rapid significant changes in the knowledge
any patent or patents. Anyone making use of tbis ipformation assumes allliability base were occurring for the seismic design of steel especially moment frames, the
arising from such use. AISC Committee on Specifications committed to frequent supplements to the
Provisions. This commitment was intended to keep provisions as current as possible.
Caution must be exercised when relying upon other specifications and codes
developed by other bodies and incorporated by reference herein since such material These Provisions were modified to be consistent SEllAS CE 7-05, Minimum Design
may be modified or ~ended from time to time subsequent to the printing of this Loadf for Buildings and Other Structures. Although . standard adopts SEllAS CE 7-02,
edition. The American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc. bears no responsibility it was)being developed in parallel with SEIIASCE . It is anticipated that ASCE will
for such material other than to refer to it and incorporate it by reference at the publish a supplement to SEIIASCE 7-05 in 2006 will adopt ANSI!AISC 341 and 360
timeof the initial publication of tbis edition. by reference. We encourage anyone who is using AISC standards to use them in
conjunction with SEIIASCE 7-05 including :sul~pllemt:tnt No. 1, when it becomes available.
Second Printing October 2006
This allows these Provisions to be incorporated by r~tlerelnce into both the 2006 mc and
2006 NFPA 5000 building codes, each of which uses ASCE 7-05 as its basis for design
loadings. Because the extent of changes that have made to these Provisions, as a result
of incorporating both technical changes and the format is so large, they are being
republished in their entirety. The most significant . is that two systems initially
developed and incorporated into the 2003 NEHRP the buckling-restrained braced
frame (BRBF) and the special plate shear wall have been added to the Provisions. A
major update to the commentary is also provided.

A number of other significant technical modifications included, as follows:

Seismic Provisionsfor Stnlctural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9,2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL COI'lSplUCII0N, INc.
6.1-iv PREFACE
PREFACE

• Clarifying that the scope of structures covered ineludes "building-like nonbuilding TheAISC Committee on Specifications, Task COIIIllrut~ee 9-Seismic Provisions is responsible
structures." for the ongoing development of these Provisions. AISC Cornmittee on Specifications
• Clarifying that all steel buildings designed with an R factor greater than 3 must comply gives final approval of the document through an balloting process, and
with the Provisions. has enhanced these Provisions through careful discussion, and suggestions for
improvement. AISC further acknowledges the contributions of .several groups
• Adding new requirements to delineate the expectations for structural design drawings
to the completion of this document: the Building Safety Council (BSSC), the SAC
and specifications, shop drawings and erection drawings.
Joint Venture, the Federal Emergency Management (FEMA), the National Science
• Adding new ASTM material specifications that are cornmonly used in the metal building Foundation (NSF), and the Structural Engineers of California (SEAOC).
industry.
The reader is cautioned that professional must be exercised when data or
• Adding Rt values for all materials to be used in determining susceptibility of connections recommendations in these provisions are applied, as more ful1y in the diselaimer
to fracture limit states. notice preceding the Preface.
• Relaxing the limitations on use of oversized holes in bolted joints. This specification was approved by the AISC cOlmrmttee on Specifications:
• Defining a new term, "demand critical welds," which have additional quality and James M. Fisher, Chairman
toughness requirements. For each system, welds considered to be demand critical are Roger E. Ferch, Vice Chairman
defined. Hansraj G. Ashar
• Defining a new term, "protected zone," to ensure that areas subject to significant William F. Baker . Leon
inelastic deformations are not disturbed by other building construction operations. For John M. Barsom . Lindsey
each system, what areas are considered to be protected zones are defined. William D. Bast Malley
Reidar Bjorhovde . Marshall (deceased)
• Expanding the applicability of requirements on splices in columns that are part of the Roger L. Brockenbrough
seismic load resisting system in moment frames to all systems. Gregory G. Deierlein
• Improving the provisions related to the design of column bases. Duane S. Ellifritt
Broce R. Ellingwood
• Making the stability bracing requirements more consistent throughout the document.
Michael Engelhardt
• Added references to the new AISC Prequalified Connections for Special and Shu-Jin Fang
Intermediate Steel Moment Frames for Seismic Applications (ANSI/AISC 358-05) as "Steven J. Fenves
one means for SMF, IMF and EBF (link-to-column) connection acceptance. John W. Fisher
• Decreasing the column splice shear capacity requirements for SMF systems. Timothy P. Fraser
Theodore V. Galambos
• Increasing the stability bracing requirements for IMF systems. Louis F. Geschwindner
• Clarifying that connections meeting the requirements for SMF or IMF systems are al so Lawrence G. Griffis
acceptable for OMF applications. John L. Gross Duncan, Secretary
• Increasing the requirements on SCBF systems that employ braces with high KlJr ratios. The Committee grateful1y acknowledges the ~VJ.~V'fV'~JI¡'; task committee (TC 9-Seismic
• Reducing the connection force demand on OCBF bracing to allow the use of the Design) for their development of this document.
amplified seismic load. James O. Malley, Chairman
• Eliminating the requirement to design all members in OCBF systems for the amplified Mark C. Saunders, Vice Chairman
Roy Becker
seismíc load, done for consistency with a corresponding reduction in the R factor for
this system in SEI/ASCE 7-05 inc1uding Supplement 1. Gregory G. Deierlein
Richard M. Drake
• Adding specific requirements for OCBF aboye seismic isolation systems. Michael D. Engelhardt
• Significantly improving the provisions related to quality assurance and quality control Roger E. Ferch
to address many ofthe issues identified in FEMA 353. Timothy P. Fraser
Subhash C. Goel
• Making changes to Part 11 to be consistent with the modifications to Part I and changes
James R. Harris Secretary
toAC1318.
Patrick M. Hassett
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions lor Structural Steel Buildings, 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN lNS1TIUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, lNc.
AMERICAN lNsTITUTE OFSTEEL C01N"STI~uc:noN, INC.
6.1-vi
6.1-vii

TABLEOFCO NTS

SYMBOLS ................................. ............................ 1

PART 1 STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS

GLOSSARY ................................ ............................ 9

1. SCOPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

2. REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS, ""'".&I.L/I ......

3. GENERAL SEISMIC DESIGN REQUIRE~~~N1~S .................... 16

4. LOADS, LOAD COMBINATIONS, AND '",~''',LL'.C1.L.1 STRENGTHS ...... 16

4.1. Loads and Load Combinations. . . . .. . ......................... 16
4.2. Nominal Strength, . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ......................... 16
5. STRUCTURAL DESIGN DRAWlNGS SPECIFICATIONS,
SHOP DRAWINGS, AND ERECTION IJ...,~,"r'li"lI'U'.::J • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 16
5.1. Structural Design Drawings and .................... 17
5.2. Shop Drawings , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ......................... 17
5.3. Erection Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ......................... 18

6. MATERIALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ......................... 18

6.1. Material Specifications .......... " .......................... 18

6.2. Material Properties for Determination Required Strengtll
of Members anq Connections ....................... '........... 19
6.3. Heavy Section CVN Requirements ............................. 20
7. CONNECTIONS, JOINTS, AND cT.... 1\Jr.... 'Il~c ••••••.••••••.••••.••••• 21
7.1. Scope .................................................... 21
7.2. Bolted Joints ...' ............................................ 21
7.3. We1ded Joints .............................................. 22
7.3a. General Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ........................ 22
7.3b. Demand Critical Welds. . . . . . . . . . . .. . ........................ 22
7.4. Protected Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ........................ 23
7.5. Continuity PJates and Stiffeners. . . . .. . ........................ 24

8. l\1EMBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ........................ 24
8.1. Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ........................ 24
8.2. Classific&tion of Sections for Local ..................... 24
8.2a~ Compact. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ........................ 24
8.2b. Seismically Compact . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ........................ 24
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN msTlTUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, mc.
AMERICAN msTlTUTE OF STEEL mc.
6.1-vüi TABLE OF CONTENTS TABLEOF
6.1-ix

8.3. Column Strength............................................ 25 lO.4a. Width-Thiekness Limitations . . . . .. . .......................... 37

8.4. Column Spliees ............................................. 27 10.4b. Beam Flanges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .......................... 37
8.4a. General ................................................... 27 10.5. Continuity Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .......................... 38
8.4b. Columns Not Part of the Seismie Load Resisting System ............ 27 10.6. Column-BeamMoment Ratio ................................ 38
8.5. Column Bases .............................................. 28 10.7. Lateral Bracing at Beam-to-Column ................. 38
8.5a. Required Axial Strength ...................................... 28 10.8. Lateral Braeing of Beams. . . . . . . .. . .......................... 38
8.5b. Required Shear Strength ...................................... 28 10.9. Column Spliees. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .......................... 38
8.5e. Required Flexural Strength ................................... 29
8.6. H-Piles ................................................... 29 11. ORDINARY MO~ENT FRAMES (OMF) ........................... 38
8.6a. Design of H-Piles ........................................... 29 11.1. Seope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .......................... 38
8.6b. Battered H-Piles ............................................ 29 11.2. Beam-to-Column Connections. . . .. . .......................... 39
8.6e. Tension in H-Piles .......................................... 29 11.2a. Requirements for FR Moment ....................... 39
11.2b. Requirements for PR Moment ....................... 41
9. SPECIAL MOMENT FRAMES (SMF) ............................... 29
11.2e. Welds .................................................... 41
9.1. Seope .... '.' .............................................. 29 11.3. Panel Zone of Beam-to-Column Conm:~cÜons
9.2. Beam-to-Column Conneetions ................................. 29 (beam web parallel to eolumn web) ............................. 41
9.2a. Requirements .............................................. 29 11.4. Beam and Column Limitations ................................. 41
9.2b. Conformanee Demonstration .................................. 30 11.5. Continuity Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ......................... 41
9.2e. Welds .................................................... 31 11.6. Column-Beam Moment Ratio . . . . .. . ......................... 42
9.2d. Proteeted Zones ............................................ 31 11.7. Lateral Braeing at Beam-to-Column .................. 42
9.3. Panel Zone ofBeám-to-Column Conneetions 11.8. Lateral Braeing of Beams. . . . . . . . .. . ......................... 42
(beam web parallel to eolumn web) ............................. 31 11.9. Column Splices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ......................... 42
9.3a. Shear Strength ............................................. 31
12. SPECIAL TRUSS MOMENT FRAMES
9.3b. Panel Zone Thiekness ........................................ 32 ········ .............. 42
9.3e. Panel Zone Doubler Plates .................................... 32
12.1. Seope ....... l. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ......................... 42
9.4. Beam and Column Limitations ................................. 32
12.2. Speeial Segment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ......................... 42
9.4a. Width-Thiekness Limitations ............ '.' .................... 32
12.3. Strength of Special Segment Members .......................... 43
9.4b. Beam Flanges .............................................. 32
12.4. Strength ofNon-Speeial Segment ...................... 43
9.5. Continuity Plates ........................................... 32
12.5. Width-Thiekness Limitations. . . . . .. . ......................... 44
9.6. Column-Beam Moment Ratio ................................. 33 12.6. Lateral Braeing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ......................... 44
9.7. Lateral Bracing at Beam-to-Column Conneetions ................. 34
9.7 a. Braeed Conneetions ......................................... 34 13. SPECIAL CONCENTRICALLY BRACED -"-""'-.LT.LL'IJ (SCBF) ........... 44
9.7b. Unbraeed Conneetions ....................................... 35 13.1. Seope .................................................... 44
9.8. Lateral Braeing ofBeams ..................................... 35 13.2. Members .................................................. 45
9.9. Column Spliees ............................................. 36 13.2a. Slendemess ................................................ 45
10. INTERMEDIATE MOMENT FRAMES (IMF) ........................ 36 13.2b. Required Strength ........................................... 45
13.2e. Lateral Force Distribution .................................... 45
10.1. Seope .................................................... 36 13.2d. Width-Thickness Limitations .................................. 45
10.2. Beam-to-Column Conneetions ................................. 36 13.2e. Built-up Members. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ........................ 46
10.2a. Requirements .............................................. 36 13.3. Required Strength of Braeing ....................... 46
10.2b. Conformanee Demonstration .................................. 36 13.3a. Required Tensile Strength . . . . . . . . .. . ........................ 46
10.2e. Welds .................................................... 37 13.3b. Required Flexural Strength ......... . ........................ 46
1O.2d. Proteeted Zone ............................................. 37 13.3c. Required Compressive Strength. . . . .. . ........................ 46
10.3. Panel Zone of Beam-to-Column Conneetions 13.4. Speeial Braeing Configuration ..................... 47
(beam web parallel to eolumn web) ............................. 37 13.4a. V-Type and Inverted V-Type Bracing.. . ........................ 47
10.4. Beam and Column Limitations ................................. 37 13.4b. K-Type Bracing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ........................ 47

Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, March 9,2005, indo Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN lNS1TfUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, lNc. AMERICAN INSTlTUTE OF S1EEL , lNe.
6.1-x TABLE OF CONTENTS TABLE OF r'f"\l\,:rT'lD\l..rrrC'
6.1-xi

13.5. Coluron Spliees ............................................. :~ 17. SPECIAL PLATE SHEAR WALLS ·········· ................ 58
13.6. Proteeted Zone ............................................ .
17.1. Scope ..................... " ............................ 58
14. ORDINARY CONCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAMES (OCBF) ......... 48 17.2. Webs .................................................... 59
17.2a. Shear Strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ........................... 59
14.1. Seope .................................................... 48
17.2b. Panel Aspeet Ratio. . . . . . . . . . . .. . ........................... 59
14.2. Braeing Members ........................................... 48
17.2c. Openings in Webs. . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ........................... 59
14.3. Special Braeing Configuration Requirements ..................... 48
. ConneetlOns
. 17.3. Connections ofWebs to Boundary .I:11~~m~mts ...................... 59
14.4. Braemg ................................ ········ 49
17.4. Horizontal and Vertical Boundary ...................... 59
14.5. OCBF aboye Seismic Isolation Systems ......................... 49
17.4a. Required Strength. . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ........................... 59
14.5a. Braeing Members ........................................... 49
17.4b. HBE-to-VBE Connections . . . . . .. . ........................... 60
14.5b. K-Type Bracing ............................................ 49
14.5e. V-Type and Inverted-V-Type Bracing ............................ 50 17.4c. Width-Thiekness Limitations. . . .. . ........................... 60
17.4d. Lateral Bracing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ........................... 60
15. ECCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAMES (EBF) ....................... 50 17.4e. VBE Splices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ........................... 60
17.4f. Panel Zones ..... . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ........................... 60
~~::. ::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::: :::::::~~
15.1.
15.2. 17.4g. Stiffness of Vertical Boundary blem~:nts ......................... 60
15.2a. Limitations ................................................ 50
18. QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN .................................... 60
15.2b. Shear Strength ............................................. 50
15.2e. Link Rotation Angle ......................................... 51 18.1. Scope .................................................... 60
15.3. Link Stiffeners ............................................. 51
15.4. Link-to-Column Conneetions .................................. 52 APPENDIX P. PREQUALIFICATION OF "'~.n.~"Jl-'-"'VLJU.1YJU '"
15.5. Lateral Braeing ofLink ...................................... 53 AND LINK-TO-COLUMN CONNECTIONS
15.6. Diagonal Braee and Beam Outside of Link ....................... 53
15.6a. Diagonal Braee ............................................. 53 PI. SCOPE .......... " ............................................. 62
15.6b. Beam Outside Link .......................................... 53
15.6e. Bracing Connections ........................................ 54
P2. GENERAL REQUlREMENTS " . . . . . .. . .......................... 62
15.7. Beam-to-Column Connections ................................. 54
15.8. Required Strength of Columns ................................. 54 P2.1. Basis for Prequalification. . . . . . . .. . .......................... 62
15.9. Protected Zone ............................................. 54 P2.2. Authority for Prequalification . . . .. . .......................... 62
15.10. Demand Critical Welds ....................................... 55
P3. TESTING REQUlREl\1ENTS . . . . . . . . .. . .......................... 62
16. BUCKLING-RESTRAINED BRACED FRAMES (BRBF) ............... 55
P4. PREQUALIFICATION VARIABLES. . .. . .......................... 63
16.1. Scope .................................................... 55
16.2. Bracing Members ........................................... 55
P5. DESIGN PROCEDURE ... . . . . . . . . . . .. . .......................... 65
16.2a. Steel Core ................................................. 55
16.2b. Buck1ing-Restraining System .................................. 55
Testing ................................................... 56 P6. PREQUALIFICATION RECORD. . . . . .. . .......................... 65
16.2c.
16.2d. Adjusted Brace Strength ...................................... 56
16.3. . ConnectlOns
Bracmg . ............................ ············ 57 APPENDIX Q. QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN
16.3a. Required Strength ........................................... 57
16.3b. Gusset Plates ............................................... 57
QI. SCOPE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .......................... 66
16.4. Special Requirements Related to Bracing Configuration ............. 57
16.5. Beams and Columns ......................................... 58
Q2. INSPECTION ANDNONDESTRUCTIVE PERSONNEL ..... 66
16.5a. Width-Thickness Limitations .................................. 58
16.5b. Required Strength ........................... : ............... 58
16.5c.
16.6. ~~~~::ed .~~~~ :::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::~: Q3. CONTRACTOR DOC;uMENTS .................................... 66

Seisrnic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1 Seisrnic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, INc. AMERIcAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~stR:UCTloN,INC.
6.1-xii TABLE OF CONTENTS
6.1-xiii

Q4. QUALITY ASSURANCE AGENCY DOCUMENTS .................... 67 S7. INSTRUMENTATION................ ............................ 81

Q5. INSPECTION POINTS AND FREQUENCIES ........................ 68 S8. MATERlALS TESTING RE~QU1RE1\1El~tS .......................... 81
Q5.1. Visual Welding Inspection .................................... 68 S8.1. Tension Testing Requirements for Steel ................. 81
Q5.2. Nondestructive Testing (NDT) of Welds ......................... 70 S8.2. Methods ofTeI;lsion Testingfor Steel ................... 81
Q5.3. Inspection of Bolting ........................................ 72 S8.3. Weld Metal Testing Requirements .............................. 82
Q5.4. Other Inspections ......... _.................................. 73
S9. TEST REPORTING REQUIREl\1ENTS.. . .......................... 82
APPENDIX R. SEISMIC DESIGN COEFFICIENTS AND APPROXIMATE
PERIOD PARAMETERS S10. ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA . . . . . . . . . . .. . .......................... 83

Rl. SCOPE . ........................................................ 74 APPENDIX T. QUALIFYING CYCLIC TESTS BUCKLING-RESTRAINED

BRACES
R2. SYMBOLS ...................................................... 74
TI. SCOPE ............................ . ·············· ............. 84
R3. DESIGN COEFFICIENTS AND FACTORS FOR BASIC SEISMIC
LOAD RESISTING SYSTEMS ..................................... 75 T2. SYMBOLS ......................... .
················ ........... 84
R4. VALUES OF APPROXIMATE PERIOD PARAMETERS ............... 75 T3. DEFINITIONS ...................... .
················ ........... 84

APPENDIX S. QUALIFYING CYCLIC TESTS OF BEAM-TO-COLUMN T4. SUBASSEMBLAGE TEST SPECIl\1EN .............................. 85
AND LINK-TO-COLUMN CONNECTIONS
T5. BRACE TEST SPECIMEN . ........................................ 86
SI. SCOPE ......................................................... 76
T5.1. Design of Brace Test Specimen ................................ 86
T5.2. Manufacture of Brace Test Specimen ............................ 86
S2. SYMBOLS ...................................................... 76 T5.3. Similarity of Brace Test Specimen Prototype .................. 86
T5.4. Connection Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ......................... 86
S3. DEFINITIONS ................................................... 76 T5.5. Materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ......................... 86
T5.6. Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ......................... 87
S4. TEST SUBASSEMBLAGE REQUIREMENTS ........................ 77
T6. LOADING HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ......................... 87
S5. ESSENTIAL TEST VARIABLES . ................................... 77 T6.1. General Requirements .......... " .......................... 87
S5.1. Sources ofInelastic Rotation .................................. 77 T6.2. Test Control .. ~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ......................... 87
S5.2. Size of Members ............................................ 78 T6.3. Loading Sequen~e . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ......................... 87
S5.3. Connection Details .......................................... 78 T7. INSTRUMENTATION ............ . . . .. . ......................... 88
S5.4. Continuity Plates ........................................... 78
S5.5. Material Strength ........................................... 78 T8. MATERlALS TESTING REQUIRI~Ml83N1rS .......................... 88
S5.6. Welds .................................................... 79
S5.7. Bolts ..................................................... 79 T8.1. Tension Testing Requirements . . . . .. . ......................... 88
T8.2. Methods of Tension Testing . . . . . . .. . ......................... 88
S6. LOADING HISTORY ............................................. 80
T9. TEST REPORTING REQUIREl\1ENTS . ............................. 88
S6.1. General Requirements ....................................... 80
S6.2. Loading Sequence for Beam-to-Column Moment Connections ....... 80 TI0.
S6.3. Loading Sequence for Link-to-Column Connections ............... 81 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA ........................................ 89

Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN msTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, mc. AMERICAN mSTITUTE OF STEEL INc.

- - - - - - _ . __._----------------------
6.1-xiv TABLE OF CONTENTS TABLE OF r"'r..."T'T'1~"¡"'~"
6.1-xv

APPENDIX W. WELDING PROVISIONS PART n COMPOSITE STRUCTURAL

CONCRETEBUlLDINGS
Wl. SCOPE ......................................................... 90
GLOSSARY ............................................................ 99
W2. STRUCTURAL DESIGN DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS, 1. SCOPE ........................................................ 101
SHOP DRAWINGS, AND ERECTION DRAWINGS ................... 90
W2.1. Structural Design Drawings and Specifications ...................... 90 2. REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS, ............'.LI'jL!<'IJ! AND STANDARDS ....... 101
W2.2. Shop Drawings ............................................. 90
W2.3. Erection Drawings .......................................... 91 3. GENERAL SEISMIC DESIGN REIQU:OO~~Nl[,S ................... 102

W3. PERSONNEL .................................................... 91 4. LOADS, LOAD COMBINATIONS, AND ""'-J'H'.. Ui ,,"",., STRENGTHS ..... 102
W3.1. QC Welding Inspectors ....................................... 91 4.1. Loads and Load Combinations. . . .. . ......................... 102
W3.2. QA Welding Inspectors ...................................... 91 4.2. Nominal Strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ......................... 102
W3.3. Nondestructive Testing Technicians ............................. 91
5. MATERIALS ....................... . '" ......... ···· .......... 102
W4. NONDESTRUCTlVE TESTING PROCEDURES ...................... 92
5.1. Structural Steel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ......................... 102
W4.1. Ultrasonic Testing ........................................... 92 5.2. Concrete and Steel Reinforcement.. . ........................ , 102
W4.2. Magnetic Particle Testing ..................................... 92
6. COMPOSITE MEMBERS ........... " .......................... 103
W5. ADDITIONAL WELDING PROVISIONS ............................ 92
6.1. Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ........................ ~ 103
W5.1. Intermixed Filler Metals ...................................... 92 6.2. Composite Floor and Roof Slabs .............................. 103
W5.2. Filler Metal Diffusible Hydrogen ............................... 92 6.2a. Load Transfer .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
W5.3. Gas-Shielded Welding Processes ............................... 92 6.2b. Nominal ShearStrength ..................................... 103
W5.4. Maximum Interpass Temperatures .............................. 92 6.3. Composite Beams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
W5.5. Weld Tabs ................................................. 93 6.4. Encased Composite Columns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
W5.6. Bottom Flange Welding Sequence .............................. 93 6.4a. Ordinary Seismic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
6.4b. Intermediate System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
W6. ADDITIONAL WELDING PROVISIONS FOR DEMAND
6.4c. Special Seismic System ......................... 105
CRITICAL WELDS ONLY ........................................ 93
6.5. Filled Composite Columns. . . . . . . .. ......................... 107
W6.1. Welding Processes .......................................... 93
7. COMPOSlTE CONNECTIONS. . . . . . . . .. . ........................ 108
W6.2. Filler Metal Packaging ....................................... 94
W6.3. Exposure Limitations on FCAW Electrodes ................ , ...... 94 7.1. Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ........................ 108
W6.4. Tack Welds ................................................ 94 7.2. General Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .. ......................... 108
7.3. Nominal Strength of Connections . .. . ........................ 108
APPENDIX X. WELD METAL/WELDING PROCEDURE SPECIFICATION 8. COMPOSITE PARTIALLY RESTRAINED (PR) MOMENT FRAMES
NOTCH TOUGHNESS VERIFICATION TEST
(C-PRMF') . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ........................ 110

Xl. SCOPE ......................................................... 95 8.1. Scope .................................................. 110

8.2. Columns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ........................ 110
8.3. Composite Beams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ......................... 110
X2. TEST CONDITIONS .............................................. 96
8.4. Moment Connections . . . . . . . . . . . .. ......................... 110
X3. TEST SPECIMENS ............................................... 96 9. COMPOSITE SPECIAL MOMENT
9.1. Scope .......... '" ...................................... 110
X4. ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA ........................................ 97
9.2. Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incI. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, 9, 2005, ¡nc1. Supplement No. 1
.AMERICAN lNSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN msTITUTE OF STEEL COt~S'rnIUcrlON, mc.
6.1-xvi TABLE OF CONTENTS TABLEOF 6.1-xvii

9.3. Beams ................................................... 111 16. SPECIAL REINFORCED CONCRETE WALLS

9.4. Moment Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 COMPOSITE WITH STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS
9.5. Column-Beam Moment Ratio ................................ 112 (C-SRCW) ...................................................... 117
10. COMPOSITE INTERMEDIATE MOMENT FRAMES (C- IMF) ........ 112 16.1. Scope ................................................... 117
16.2. Boundary Members ........................................ 117
10.1. Scope ................................................... 112
16.3. Steel Coupling Beams ...................................... 118
10.2. Columns ................................................. 112
16.4. Encased Composite Coupling Beams ........................... 118
10.3. Beams ................................................... 112
10.4. Moment Connections ....................................... 112 17. COMPOSITE STEELPLATE SHEAR (C-SPW) .............. 118
11. COMPOSITE ORDINARY MOMENT FRAMES (C-OMF) ............ 113 17.1. Seope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
17.2. Wall Elements ............................................. 118
11.1. Seope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
17.3. Boundary Members ........................................ 119
11.2. Columns ................................................. 113
17.4. Openings ................................................. 119
11.3. Beams ................................................... 113
11.4. Moment Conneetions ....................................... 113 18. STRUCTURAL DESIGN DRAWINGS SPECIFICATIONS,
SHOP DRAWINGS, AND ERECTION .................. 119
12. COMPOSITE SPECIAL CONCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAMES
(C-CBF) ........................................................ 113 19. QUALITY ASSURANCEPLAN .................................. 120
12.1. Seope ................................................... 113
12.2. Columns ................................................. 113
12.3. Beams ................................................... 113 COMMENTARY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ........................ 121
12.4. Braees ................................................... 114
12.5. Conneetions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 PART 1 STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS

13. COMPOSITE ORDINARY BRACED FRAMES (C-OBF) .............. 114

C1. SCOPE ............ "........................................... 124
13.1. Seope ................................................... 114
13.2. Columns ................................................. 114 C2. REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS, "-'vv~~. AND STANDARDS ....... 125
13.3. Beams ................................................... 114
13.4. Braees ................................................... 114 C3. GENERAL SEISMIC DESIGN REIQU:Iru~l\ID~N1rs ................... 125
13.5. Conneetions .............................................. 114
C4. LOADS, LOAD COMBINATIONS, AND N(!):MTI-lAL STRENGTHS ..... 129
14. COMPOSITE ECCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAMES (C-EBF) ....... 114
14.1. Seope ................................................... 114 C5. STRUCTURAL DESIGN DRAWINGS SPECIFICATIONS,
14.2. Columns ................................................. 115 SHOP DRAWlNGS, AND ERECTION .................. 130
14.3. Links .................................................... 115
14.4. Braees .................................................... 115 C5.1. Struetural Design Drawings and Spt~eifi"eatilons ................... 130
14.5. Conneetions .............................................. 115 C6. MATERIALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ........................ 131
15. ORDINARY REINFORCED CONCRETE SHEAR WALLS C6.1. Material Speeifieations. . . . . . . . . . .. . ........................ 131
COMPOSITE WITH STRUCTURAL STEEL ELEMENTS C6.2. Material Properties for Determination Required Strength
(C-ORCW) ..................................................... 115 of Members and Conneetions. . . . . .. . ........................ 132
15.1. Seope ................................................... 115 C6.3. Heavy Seetion CVN Requirements .. . ........................ 133
15.2. Boundary Members ........................................ 116 C7. CONNECTIONS, JOINTS, AND FASTE1~ltS ....................... 135
15.3. Steel Coupling Beams ...................................... 116
15.4. Eneased Composite Coupling Beams........................... 117 e7.!. Seope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ........................ 135
C7.2. Bolted Joints .. , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ........................ 136

Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTl11ITE OF STEEL CONISTlh¡cTIClN, !Nc.
6.1-xviii TABLE OF CONTENTS TABLE OF rV',,'''T'T'1C''''.T~rlC' 6.1-xix

C7.3. Welded Joints ............................................. 138 Cll. ORDINARY MOMENT FRAMES (OMF). . ........................ 170
C7.4. Ptotected Zone .......... : . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Cl1.1. Scope .................................................. 170
C7.5. Continuity PI ates and Stiffeners ...... ~ ........................ 141
C 11.2. Beam-to-CoIumn Connections. . . . .. ......................... 171
cs. MEMBERS ..................................................... 142 C11.2a. Requirements: FR Moment ........................ 171
C11.2b. Requirements: PR Moment ........................ 173
C8.1. Scope ................................................... 142 C11.5. Continuity PIates ......................................... 173
C8.2. Classification of Sections for Local Buckling .................... 143
C8.3. Column Strength. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 C12. SPECIAL TRUSS MOMENT FRAMES .. : .................. 174
C8.4. Column Splices ............................................ 144 C12.1. Scope......................... . ........................ 174
C8.4a. General. . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 C12.2. Special Segment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ........................ 176
C8.4b. Columns Not Part ofthe Seismic Load Resisting System ........... 146 C12.3. Strength of Special Segment Me,mbler~ ......................... 176
C8.5. Column Bases. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 C12.4. Strength of Non-Special Segment ..................... 176
C8.5a. Required Axial Strength ..................................... 147 C 12.5. Width-Thickness Limitations. . . . . .. ......................... 177
C8.5b. Required Shear Sfrength ..................................... 147 C12.6. Lateral Bracing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ........................ 177
C8.5c. Required Flexural Strength .................................. 149
H-Piles .... " ............................................. 153 C13. SPECIAL CONCENTRICALLY BRACED "'~J.Y""':''''' (SCBF) .......... 177
C8.6.
C8.6a. Design of H-Piles .......................................... 153 C13.1. Scope......................... . ........................ 177
C8.6b. Battered H-Piles ........................................... 153 C13.2. Members....................... . ........................ 181
C8.6c. Tension in H-Piles ......................................... 155 C13.2a. Slendemess. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ........................ 181
C13.2b. Required Strength. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ........................ 181
C9. SPECIAL MOMENT FRAMES (SMF) .............................. 155
C13.2c. Lateral Force Distribution .. . . . . . .. . ........................ 182
C9.1. Scope ................................................... 157 C13.2d. Width-Thickness Limitations. . . . . .. . ........................ 182
C9.2. Beam-to-Column Connections ................................ 157 C13.2e. Built-Up Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ........................ 183
C9.2a. Requirements ............................................. 157 C13.3. Required Strength ofBracing Co:nne~cti,ons ...................... 184
C9.2b. Conformance Demonstration ................................. 158 C13.3a. Required Tensile Strength . . . . . . . .. . ........................ 184
C9.3. Panel Zone ofBeam-to-Column Connections C13.3b. Required Flexural Strength ........ . ........................ 185
(beam web parallel to column web) ............................ 159 C13.4. Special Bracing Configuration .................... 186
C9.4. Beam and Column Limitations ................................ 162 C13.4a. V-Type and Inyerted V-Type Bracing. . ........................ 186
C9.5. ContiIiuity Plates .......................................... 162 C13.4b. K-Type Bracing ............... " ......................... 186
C9.6. Column-Beam Moment Ratio ................................ 164 C13.5. Column Splices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ........................ 187
C9.7. Lateral Bracing at Beam-to-Column Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 C13.6. Protected Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ........................ 187
C9.7a. Braced Connections ........................................ 165 C14. ORDINARY CONCENTRICALLY VO.l.",,.,,,...,.,p FRAMES (OCBF) ........ 188
C9.7b. Unbraced Connections ..................................... 166
C9.8. Lateral Bracing ofBeams .................................... 166 C14.1. Scope......................... . ........................ 188
C9.9. ColUinn Splices............................................ 167 C14.2. Bracing Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ........................ 189
C14.3. Special Bracing Configuration .................... 190
cio. INTERMEDIATE MOMENT FRAMES (IMF) ....................... 168 C14.4. Bracing Connections . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ........................ 190
CID.1. Scope ................................................... 168 C14.5. OCBF aboye Seismic Isolation ........................ 190
ClO.2. Beain-to-Column Connections ................................ 169 C14.5a. Bracing Members . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .. . ........................ 190
ClO.2b. Conformance Demonstration ................................. 169 C14.5b. K-Type Bracing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ........................ 191
ClO.2d. Protected Zone ............................................ 169 C14.5c. V-Type and Inyerted-V-Type Bracing. . ........................ 191
ClO.4. Beám and Column Limitations ................................ 169
ClO.4a. Width-Thickness Limitations ................................. 169
CiO.4b. Beam Flanges ............................................. 170
ClO.5. Continuity Plates .......................................... 170
ClO.8. Lateral Bracing ofBeams .................................... 170

Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, 9,2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN msTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCfION, me. AMERICAN msTITUTE OF STEEL CO''IS11lUClI10N, lNe.
6.1-xx TABLE OF CONTENTS TABLEOF 6.1-xxi

C15. ECCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAMES (EBF) ...................... 191 CP3. TESTING REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . .. . ......................... 223
CI5.1. Scope ................................................... 191
CI5.2. Links .................................................... 193 CP4. PREQUALIFICATIOlN VARIABLES. . .. . ......................... 224
CI5.3. Link Stiffeners ............................................ 196
CI5.4. Link-to-Column Connections ................................. 196 CP5. DESIGN PROCEDURE ............. " .......................... 224
C15.5. Lateral Bracing ofLink ..................................... 197
C15.6. Diagonal Brace and Beam Outside of Links ..................... 198 CP6. PREQUALIFICATION RECORD. . . . . .. . ......................... 225
C15.7. Beam-to-Column Connection................................. 202
C15.8. Required Strength of Columns ................................ 203
APPENDIX Q. QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN
C16. BUCKLING-RESTRAINED BRACED FRAMES (BRBF) .............. 204
CI6.1. Scope ................................................... 204 CQI. SCOPE ....................................................... 226
C16.2. Bracing Members .......................................... 207
C 16.2a. Steel Core ................................................ 207 CQ2. INSPECTION AND NONDESTRUCTlVE tE:STING PERSONNEL. .... 227
C16.2b. Buckling-Restraining System ................................. 208
C16.2c. Testing .................................................. 208 CQ3. CONTRACTOR DOCUMENTS ................................... 227
C16.2d. Adjusted Brace Strength ..................................... 209
C16.3. Bracing Connections ....................................... 210 CQ4. QUALITY ASSURANCE AGENCY ................... 227
CI6.4. Special Requirements Related to Bracing Configuration ............ 211
C16.5. Beams and Columns ....................................... 211 CQ4.1. Visual Welding Inspection ................................... 228
CQ4.2. Nondestructive Testing (NDT) of ........................ 228
C17. SPECIAL PLATE SHEAR WALLS (SPSW) ......................... 212
C17.1. Scope ................................................... 212 APPENDIX R. SEISMIC DESIGN r<f\.VPl",Tf'ITP"h",c- AND APPROXIMATE
CI7.2. Webs .................................................... 214 PERIOD PARAMETERS
C17.2a. Shear Strength ............................................ 214
C17.2b. Panel Aspect Ratio ......................................... 215 CRI. SCOPE ........................................................ 231
CI7.2c. Openings in Webs .......................................... 215
C17.3. Connections ofWebs to Boundary Elements ..................... 216
C17.4. Horizontal and Vertical Boundary Elements ..................... 216 APPENDIX S. QUALIFYING CYCLIC TESTS BEAM-TO-COLUMN
C17.4a. Required Strength .......................................... 216 AND LINK-TO-COLUMN CONNECTIONS
C17.4c. Width-Thickness Lirnitations ................................. 219
C 17.4d. Lateral Bracing ............................................ 219 CSI. SCOPE.............................. . ........................ 232
CI7.4f. Panel Zones .............................................. 219
C17.4g. Stiffness ofVertical Boundary Elements ........................ 219 CS3. DEFINITIONS ................................................. 233
C18. QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN ................................... 219
CS4. TEST SUBASSEMBLAGE REIQUIID~Ml~N~[,S ....................... 234

APPENDIX P. PREQUALIFICATION OF BEAM-TO-COLUMN CS5. ESSENTIAL TEST VARIABLES. . . . . . . .. . ........................ 235

AND LINK-TO-COLUMN CONNECTIONS CS5.1. Sources of Inelastic Rotation . . . . . .. . ........................ 235
CS5.2. Size ofMembers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ........................ 236
CPI. SCOPE ........................................................ 221 CS5.5. Material Strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ........................ 237
CS5.6. Welds .................................................. 238
CP2. GENERAL REQUlREMENTS .................................... 222
CS6. LOADING mSTORY : . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ........................ 238
CP2.1. Basis for Prequalification .................................... 222
CP2.2. Authority for Prequalification ................................ 222

Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, Ínel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, 9, 2005, Ínel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN !NSTITUfE OF STEEL CONSTRUcrrON, !Nc.
AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONs"Ii.LICITe'N, !Ne.
6.1-xx.ii TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLEOF 6.1-xxiii

CS8. MATERIALS TESTING REQUIREMENTS ......................... 239 CWS. ADDITIONAL WELDING PROVISIONS ........................... 253

CSlO. ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA ....................................... 240 CW5.1. Intennixed Filler Metals. . . . . . . . .. . ......................... 253
CW5.2. Filler Metal Diffusible HydTogen. .. . ......................... 254
CW5.3. Gas-Shielded Welding Prdcesses . .. . ......................... 254
APPENDIX T. QUALIFYING CYCLIC TESTS CW5.4. Maximuin Interpass Temperatures.. . ......................... 254
OF BUCKLING-RESTRAINED BRACES CW5.5. Weld Tabs ... : ............... " .......................... 255
CW5.6. Bottom Flange WeIct1ng Sequence.. . ......................... 255
CTl. SCOPE ........................................................ 242 CW6. ADDITIONAL WELDING PROVISIONS
DEMAND CRITICAL WELDS ONLY . .. . ......................... 255
CT2. SYMBOLS ..................................................... 243
CW6.1. Welding Processes . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ......................... 255
CT3. DEFINITIONS .................................................. 243 CW6.2. Filler Metal Packaging. . . . . . . . . .. . ......................... 256
CW6.3. Exposure Limitations on FCAW ..................... 256
CT4. SUBASSEMBLAGE TEST SPECIMEN ............................. 243 CW6.4. Tack Welds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ......................... 256

CT5. BRACE TEST SPECIMEN ........................................ 246 APPENDIX x. WELD METALrWELDING nn,nr<r.o-n.TTT1oT.'O SPECIFICATION
NOTCH TOUGHNESS VERIFICATION TEST
CT5.4. Connection DetaiIs ......................................... 247
CT5.5. Materials ................................................. 247
CXI. SCOPE.............................. . ......................... 257
CT5.6. Connections .............................................. 247
CT6. LOADING mSTORY ............................................ 247 CX2. TEST CONDITIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ......................... 258
CT6.3. Loading Sequence ......................................... 247
CX3. TEST SPECIMENS .............................................. 259
CT8. MATERIALS TESTING REQUIREMENTS ......................... 249
CX4. ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA ....................................... 260
CTlO. ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA ....................................... 249

PART Il COMPOSITE STRUCTURAL STEEL

APPENDIX W. WELDING PROVISIONS AND REINFORCED CONCRETE BUILDINGS

CWl. SCOPE......................................................... 251 CI. SCOPE......................................................... 261

CW2. STRUCTURAL DESIGN DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS, C2. REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS, '-''\Jf~.Q,o.AND STANDARDS ....... 262
SHOP DRAWINGS,AND ERECTION DRAWINGS .................. 251
C3. GENERAL SEISMIC DESIGN RE'QUIRlC$18:N1fS ................... 263
CW3. PERSONNEL ................................................... 252
CW3.1. QC WeIding Inspectors ...................................... 252 C4. STRENGTHS ..... 263
CW3.2. QA WeIding Inspectors ..................................... 252
CW3.3. Nondestructuve Testing Technicians ........................... 252 CS. MATERIALS ..... '. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ........................ 263

CW4. NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING PROCEDURES ..................... 253 C6. COMPOSITE MEMBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ........................ 264
C6.1. Scope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ........................ 264
C6.2. Composite Floor and Roof Slabs . . .. . ........................ 264
C6.3. Composite Beams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ........................ 265

Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN lNSTITIlTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCfION, !Nc.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONs~lrCfIc.N, !Nc.
6.1-xxiv TABLE OF CONTENTS
6.1-1

C6.4. Encased Composite Columns ................................. 265

C6.4a. Ordinary Seismic System Requirements ........................ 266 SYMBO
C6.4b. Intermediate Seismic System Requirements ..................... 267
C6.4c. Special Seismic System Requirements .......................... 267
C6.5. Filled Composite Columns ................................... 268
Numbers in parentheses after the definition refer to Section in either Part I or TI of these
C7. COMPOSITE CONNECTIONS .................................... 269 Provisions in which the symbol is first used.
C7.1. Scope ................................................... 269 Cross-sectional area of a horizontal hl"\llnn"h, element (HBE),
2 2
C7.2. General Requirements ...................................... 269 in. (mm ) • • • • . • • • • • • • . • • . . • • • . • . • . • • • • . . • . • • • • • • • • • • • • (I-17.2a)
C7.3. Nominal Strength of Connections ............................. 271
Cross-sectional area of a vertical boundary (VBE) ,
cs. COMPOSITE PARTIALLY RESTRAINED (PR) MOMENT FRAMES
. 2 (
lll.
2
mm) .............................................. (I-17.2a)
(C-PRMF) ...................................................... 274 2 2
Flange area, in. (mm ) •••••••..•.••••..•••..••••••••••••.• (1-8)
2 2
C9. COMPOSITE SPECIAL MOMENT FRAMES (C-SMF) ............... 276 Gross area, in. (mm ) • • • . . • • • • . • • . . • • • . . . • . • . • • • • • • • • • • • • • (1-9)

C9.1. Scope ................................................... 276 As Cross-sectional area of the structural steel in. 2 (mm2) •••.•••• (TI-6)
C9.2. Columns ................................................. 276 2
Area of the yielding segment of steel core, 2 (mm ) • • • • • • • • • • • • (1-16)
C9.3. Beams ................................................... 276
2
C9.4. Moment Connections ....................................... 277 Minimum area of tie reinforcement, in. ................. (TI-6)
ClO. COMPOSíTE INTERMEDIATE MOMENT FRAMES (C-IMF) ........ 279 Horizontal area of the steel plate in shear wall,
2 2
in. (mm ) • • • • • • • . • • • • . • • • . • . • • • • • . • • •...••••.••.•••••• (TI-17)
Cll. COMPOSITE ORDINARY MOMENT FRAMES (C-OMF) ............ 279 Area of link stiffener, in. (mm
2 2
) . • . • • . • •• • ••..•••••••••••••• (1-15)
2 2
C12. COMPOSITE SPECIAL CONCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAMES Link web area, in. (mm ) • • • • . • • . . • . • . • . • • • . . • • • • . • • • . . • • • (1-15)
(C-CBF) ........................................................ 279 Ratio of required stre~gth to available ................. (Table 1-8-1)
Coefficient relating relative brace stiffness curvature ......... (1-9)
C13. COMPOSITE ORDINARY BRACED FRAMES (C-OBF) .............. 282
C d Deflection amplification factor. . . . . . . . .. . .................. (I-R2)
C14. COMPOSITE ECCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAMES (C-EBF) ....... 282
Parameter used for determining the apJJro;tinjlate fundamental
period. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .................. (1-R2)
C15. ORDINARY REINFORCED CONCRETE SHEAR WALLS COMPOSITE
WITH STRUCTURAL STEEL ELEMENTS (C-ORCW) .............. 283 D Dead load due to the weight of the structural and
permanent features on the building, kips (N) ................... (1-9)
C16. SPECIAL REINFORCED CONCRETE SHEAR WALLS COMPOSITE D Outside diameter of round HSS, in. (mm) ...................... (Table 1-8-1)
WITH STRUCTURAL STEEL ELEMENTS (C-SRCW) ............... 284
E Earthquake load .......................................... (1-4)
C17. COMPOSITE STEEL PLATE SHEAR WALLS (C-SPW) .............. 287 E Effect of horizontal and vertical earthQluak:e-i~~duced loads ........ (1-9)
E Modulus of elasticity of steel, E = 29,000 ksi MPa) ...... (1-8)
ClS. STRUCTURAL DESIGN DRAWlNGS AND SPECIFICATIONS,
SHOP DRAWlNGS AND ERECTION DRAWlNGS ................... 289 El Flexural elastic stiffness of the chord of the special
2 2
segment, kip-in. (N-mm ). • • • • • • • • • • • • •• • ••••••••••••••••• (1-12)
C19. QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN ................................... 289

REFERENCES ........................................................ 291

Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, !Nc.
AMERICAN !NsTlTUTE OF STEEL Cm~~.ucrloN, !Nc.
6.1-2 SYMBOLS S YMBOLS 6.1-3

Specified minimum yield stress of the type of steel to be used, Additional moment due to shear from the location
ksi (MPa). As used in the Specification, "yield stress" denotes of the plastic hinge to the column based on ASD load
either the minimum specified yield point (for those steels that combinations, kip-in. (N-mm). . . . . . . . .. . ................... (1-9)
have a yield point) or the specified yield strength (for those steels
that do not have a yield point) ............................... (1-6) Nominal flexural strength, kip-in. (N-mm) .................... (1-11)
Mnc Nominal flexural strength of the chord of the special
Fy of a beam, ksi (MPa) .................................... (1-9)
segment, kip-in. (N-mm) ................................. (1-12)
F y of a column, ksi (MPa) .................................. (1-9)
Nominal plastic flexural strength, kip-in.
Specified minimum yield stress of the ties, ksi (MPa) ............ (11-6)
Nominal plastic flexural strength modified axial load, kip-in.
Specified minimum yield stress of the steel core, or actual yield (N-mm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ................... (1-15)
stress of fue steel core as determined from a coupon test, ksi (MPa) . (1-16)
Nominal plastic flexural strength of the kip-in. (N-mm) ..... (1-9)
Specified minimum tensile strength, ksi (MPa) ................. (1-6)
Expected plastic moment, kip-in. (N-mm) ..................... (1-9)
H Height of story, which may be taken as the distance between the
centerline of floor framing at each of the levels aboye and below, Nominal plastic flexural strength of the kip-in. (N-mm) .... (1-8)
or the distance between the top of floor slabs at each of the levels Mr Expected flexural strength, kip-in. (N-mm) ..................... (1-9)
aboye and below, in. (mm) .................................. (1-8)
Additional moment due to shear from the location
1 Moment of inertia, in. 4 (mm4 ) ••••.••••••••.••.••••.••.•.••.• (1-12) of the plastic hinge to the column based on LRFD load
Moment of inertia of a vertical boundary element (VBE) taken combinations, kip-in. (N-mm) ............................... (1-9)
perpendicular to the direction of the web pI ate line, in. 4 (mm4) ••••• (1-17) Required flexural strength, using LRFD combinations, kip-in.
K Effedive length factor for prismatic member ................... (1-13) (N-mm) .......... , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .......... : ....... (1-9)

L Live load due to occupanGy and moveable equipment, kips (kN) .... (11-6)
Mu,exp Expected required flexural strength, kip-in.

L Span length of the truss, in. (mm) ............................ (1-12) Required axial strength of a column using load combinations,
kips (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .................. (1-8)
L Distaiice between VBE centerlines, in. (Iilm) ...............•... (1-17)
Required compressive strength using ASD combinations,
LeIigth between points which are either braced against lateral kips (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .................. (1-9)
displacement of compression flange or braced against twist of the
cross section, in. (mm) ..................................... (1-13) Required strength oflateral brace at ends of link, kips (N) ...... (1-15)

Link length, in. (mm) ...................................... (1-15) Available axial strength of a column, kips .................. (1-9)

Clear distance between VBE flanges, in. (mm) .................. (1-17) Nominal axial strength of a column, kips ................... (1-8)

Distance between plastic hinge 10cations, in. (mm) .............. (1-9) Nominal compressive strength of the column
calculated in accordance with the kips (N) .......... (11-6)
Limiting laterally unbraced length for full plastic flexural strength,
uniform moment case, in. (mm) ............................. (1-12) Nominal axial compressive strength of members of
the special segment, kips (N). . . . . . . . . . .. . .................. (1-12)
Limiting laterally unbraced length for plastic analysis, in. (mm) .... (1-13)
Nominal axial tensile strength of diagonal of the
Length ofthe special segment, in. (mm) ....................... (1-12) special segment, kips (N) ................................... (1-12)
Required flexural strength, using ASD load combinations, kip-in. Nominal axial strength of a composite at zero eccentricity,
(N-mm) ................................................ (1-9) kips (N) ............................................... '. (ll-6)
Pr Required compressive strength, kips (N) ....................... (1-15)

Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
- AMERICAN !NSTITlITE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Ne. AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~stR:ucrlON, !Ne.
 6.1-4 SYMBOLS
P rc Required compressive strength using ASD or LRFD load
combinations, kips (N) ..................................... (1-9)
Pu Required axial strength of a column or a link using LRFD load
combínations, kips (N) ..................................... (1-8)
Pu Required axial strength of a composite column, kips (N) .......... (lI-9)
P ue Required compressive strength using LRFD load combinations,
kips (N) ................................................ (1-9)
Py Nominal axial yield strength of a member, equal to FyAg, kips (N) .. (~able 1-8-1)
Pyse Axial yield strength of steel core, kips (N) ..................... (1-16)
Qb Maximum unbalanced vertical load effect applied to a beam by
the braces, kips (N) ....................................... (1-13)
QI Axial forces and moments generated by at least 1.25 times the
expected nominal shear strength of the link .................... (1-15)
R Seismic response modification coefficient ..................... (1-1)
Rn Nominal strength, kips (N) ................................. (1-6)
R¡ Ratio of the expected tensile strength to the specified minimum
tensile strength Fu, as related to overstrength in material yield
stress Ry ................................................ (1-6)
Ru Required strength ......................................... (1-9)
Panel zone nominal shear strength ............................ (1-9)
Rv
Ratio of the expected yield stress to the specified minimum yield
Ry
stress, Fy • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • (1-6)
S Snow load, kips (N) ....................................... (1-9)
Required shear strength using ASD load combinations, kips (N) .... (1-9)
Va
Vn Nominal shear strength of a member, kips (N) .................. (1-15)
Vne Expected vertical shear strength of the special segment, kips (N) ... (1-12)
Vns Nominal shear strength of the steel plate in a composite plate
shear wall, kips (N) ....................................... (lI -17)
Vp Nominal shear strength of an active link, kips (N) ............... (Table 1-8-1)
I Vpa Nominal shear strength of an active link modified by the axial load
·1
¡ magnitude, kips (N) ....................................... (1-15)
• 1
Vu . Required shear strength usíng LRFD load combinations, kips (N) ... (1-10)
! [
Ycon Distance from top of steel beam to top of concrete slab or
encasement, in. (mm) ...................................... (H-6)
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, ine!. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN 1NSTI11lTE OF STEEL CONsTRUcnON, INc.
SYMBOLS
6.1-5
Maximum distance from the maximum co crete compression
fiber to the plastic neutral axis, in. (mm) ....................... (lI-9)
Z Plastic section modulus of a member, in. 3 mm3) •..••••.••••..•• (1-9)
3
Plastic section modulus of the beam, in. ( 3) . . . . . • . • . • . • • • . • • (1-9)
3
Plastic section modulus of the column, in. (mm3) .•••••.•••••••• (1-9)
3
Plastic section modulus x-axis, in. (mm\ ..................... (1-8)
ZRBS Mínimum plastic section modulus at the re uced beam section,
3 3
in. (mm ) . . . . • . • . • . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . • (1-9)
a Angle that diagonal members make with horizontal ........... (1-12)
b Width of compression element as defined i Specification
Section B4.1, in. (mm). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ................... (Table 1-8-1)
Width of column flange, in. (mm). . . . . .. . ................... (1-9)
b¡ Flange width, in. (mm) .................................... (1-9)
Width of the concrete cross-section minus e width of the
structural shape measured perpendicular to e direction
of shear, in. (mm) ......................................... (n-6)
d
Nominal fastener diameter, in. (mm) .......................... (1-7)
d Overall beam depth, in. (mm) ............................... (1-15)
Overall column depth, in. (mm) .............................. (1-9)
Overall panel zone depth between continuit plates, in. (mm) ...... (1-9)
e EBF link length, in. (mm) ........................... " ..... (1-15)
f~ Specified compressive strength of concrete, si (MPa) ............ (n-6)
h Clear distance between flanges less the filIe or comer radius
for rolled shapes; and for built-up sections, e distance between
adjacent lines of fasteners or the clear distan e between flanges
when welds are used; for tees, the overall de th; and for rectangular
HSS, the clear distance between the flanges ess the inside comer
radius on each side, in. (mm). . . . . . . . . . .. . .................. (Table 1-8-1)
h Distance between horizontal boundary elem nt centerlines,
in. (mm) ................................................ (1-17)
Cross-sectional dimension of the confined c re region in
composite columns measured center-to-cent of the transverse
reinforcement, in. (mm) .................................... (n-6)
Distance between flange centroids, in. (mm) ................... (1-9)
Unbraced length between stitches of built-up bracing members,
in. (mm) ................................................ (1-13)
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mare 9, 2005, ind. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INS1TI'UTE OF STEEL CONS UcnON, INc.
6.1-6 SYMBOLS SYMBOLS
6.1-7

Unbraced length of compression or bracing member, in. (mm) ..... (I-13) Q

r Governing radius of gyration, in. (mm) ........................ (1-13)
ry Radius of gyration about y-axis, in. (mm) ...................... (I-9)
s Spacing of transverse reinforcement measured along the
longitudinal axis of the structural composite member, in. (mm) ..... (11-6)
Thiclrness of connected part, in. (mm) ........................ (I-7)
Thiclrness of element, in. (mm) .............................. (Table 1-8-1)
Thiclrness of column web or doubler plate, in. (mm) ............. (1-9)
tbl Thiclrness ofbeam flange, in. (mm) .......................... (1-9)
Safety factor ............................................. (1-6)
Safety factor for flexure = 1.67 .............................. (1-8)
Safety factor for compression = 1.67 .......................... (1-8)
Horizontal seismic overstrength factor ........................ (1-4)
Safety factor for shear strength of panel zo e of beam-to-column
connections ...................... '. . ................... (1-9)
a Angle of diagonal members with the horiz ntal ................. (1-12)
a Angle of web yielding in radians, as meas ed relative to
the vertical ............................................. (1-17)

tcl Thiclrness of column flange, in. (mm) ......................... (I-9) Deformation quantit)' used to controlloadi g of test specimen ..... (I-S6)
ti Thiclrness offlange, in. (mm) ............................... (1-17) Value of deformation quantity () at first si ificant yield oí
test specimen ............................................. (I-S6)
tmin Minimum wall thiclrness of concrete-filled rectangular HSS,
in. (mm) ................................................ (11-6) p' Ratio of required axial force Puto required hear strength Vu
of a lirik ................................................ (1-15)
tp Thiclrness of panel zone including doubler plates, in. (mm) ........ (I-9)
Limiting slendemess parameter for compac element. ............ (1-8)
tw Thiclrness of web, in. (mm) ................................. (Table 1-8-1)
Resistance factor ......................................... (1-6)
Wz Width of panel zone between column flanges, in. (mm) ........... (I-9)
Resistance factor for flexure ................................ (1-8)
x Parameter used for determining the approximate fundamental period (I-R2)
Resistance factor for compression ............................ (1-8)
Zb Minimum plastic section modulus at the reduced beam section,
in. 3 (mm3) • . • • . • • • • • • . • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • . . • • • . . • • • . • . • • • • • • • (I-9) Resistance factor for shear strength of panel zone
of beam-to-column connections ......... . .................. (1-9)
LM* pc Moment at beam and column centerline determined by projecting
the sum of the nominal column plastic moment strength, reduced Resistance factor for shear ............ " ................... (1-15)
by the axial stress PuJAg , from the top and bottom of the beam
Resistance factor for the shear strength of a omposite column ..... (11-6)
moment connection ....................................... (I-9)
Intetstory drift angle, radians .......... " ................... (I-S3)
LM*pb Moment at the intersection of the beam and column centerlines
determined by projecting the beam maximum developed moments YtotaI Link rotation angle ................... . ................... (1-82)
from the column face. Maximum developed moments shall be
Strain hardening adju~tment factor . . . . . .. . .................. (1-16)
determined from test results ................................. (1-9)
13 Compression strength adjustment factor ....................... (1-16)
Ll Design story drift. ........................................ (I-15)
Llb Deformation quantity used to controlloading of test specimen
(total brace end rotation for the subassemblage test specimen;
total brace axial deformation for the brace test specimen) ......... (I-T2)
Llbm Value of deformation quantity, Llb, corresponding to the design
story drift ............................................... (I-T6)
Llby Value of deformation quantity, Llb, at first significant yield of
test specimen ............................................ (I-T6)

Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Struciural Steel Buildings, Marc 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONsTRuenoN, !Nc.
AMERICAN !NsTiTUTE OF STEEL CON uenON, !Ne.
6.1-8
6.1-9

PARTI. STRUCTURALS LBUILDINGS

GLO

Terms that appear in this glossary are general1y u·all(:-l4é~a throughout these Provisions and
Commentary, where they first appear within a sulbse~ctiqn.
Notes:

(1) Terms designated with t are common AISI-AISC that are coordinated between
the two standards developers.

(2) Terms designated with * are usual1y qualified by type of load effect, for example,
nominal tensile strength, available compressive ,"fI"'TL~'LTL designflexural strength.
(3) Terms designated with ** are usually qualified by
web local buckling, flange local bending.

Adjusted brace strength. Strength of a brace in a {}UCKllnJ:~-n~SIl"all'1ea braced frame at

deformations corresponding to 2.0 times the design
Allowable strength *t. Nominal strength divided by the
Applicable building code (ABe) t. Building code
Amplified seismic load. Horizontal component of eru1hc:¡lj1~tke load E multiplied by no, where
E and the horizontal component of E are specified in applicable building codeo
Authority having jurisdiction (AH]). Organization, subdivision, office or individual
charged with the responsibility of adrninistering enforcing the provisions of this
standard.

Available strength*t. Design strength or allowable

ASD (Allowable Strength Design). Method ofprc.po:rt101ntlilg structural components such that
the allowable strength equals or exceeds the required of the component under the
action of the ASD load combinations.

ASD load combinationt. Load combination in the alJ¡o~l(~able building code intended for
allowable strength design (allowable stress design).
Buckling-restrained braced frame (BRBF). braced frame safisfying the
requirements of Section 16 in which all members the bracing system are subjected
primarily to axial forces and in which the limit state compression buckling of braces is
precluded at forces and deformations corresponding 2.0 times the design story drift.
Buckling-restraining system. System of restraints that buckling of the steel core in
BRBF. This system includes the' casing on the steel and structural elements adjoining
its connections. The buckling-restraining system is ~llLI"'U\.l"'U to permit the transverse
expansion and longitudinal contraction of the steel for deformations corresponding
to 2.0 times the design story drift.
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9,2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March
AMERICAN mS1ITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, INc. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~STIl~t:lcIl0N

....
-~ ~ .. _~._--_._.~._-_._-_. __ . _ - - --- - - - - -
6.1-10 PART 1 - GLOSSARY PART 1 - GLOSS
6.1-11

Casing. Element that resists forcestransverse to the axis of the brace thereby restraining
buckling of the coreo The casing requires a means of delivering this force to the remainder
of the buckling-restraining system. The casing resists little or no force in the axis of
the braceo
Column base. Assemblage of plates, connectors, bolts, and rods at the base of a column used
to transmit forces between the steel superstructure and the foundation.
Continuity plates. Column stiffeners at the top and bottom of the panel zone; also known as
transverse stiffeners.
Contractor. Fabricator or erector, as applicable.
Demand critical weld. Weld so designated by these Provisions.
Design earthquake. The earthquake represented 'by the design response spectrum as specified
in the ClPplicable building code.
Design story drift. Amplified story drift (drift under the design earthquake, including the
effects of inelastic action), determined as specified in the applicable building codeo
Design strength *t. Resistance factor multiplied by the nominal strength, <l>RII'
Diagonal bracing. Inelined structural members carrying primarily axial load that are
employed to enable a structural frame to act as a truss to resist lateralloads.
Dual system. Structural system with the following features: (1) an essentially complete space
frame that provides support for gravi~y 10ad,s; (2) resistance to lateral load provided by
moment frames (SMF, IMF or OMF)thatare capab1e of resisting at least 25 percent of
the base shear, and concrete or ste~l' shear wal1s, or steel braced frames (EBF, SCBF or
OCBF); and (3) each system designed to resist the total lateral load in proportion to its
relative rigidity.
Ductile limit state. Ductile limit states ínelude member and connection yielding, bearing
deformation at bolt holes, as well as buckling of members that conform to the width-
thickness limitations ofTable 1-8-1. Fracture of a member or of a connection, or buckling
of a connection element, is not a ductile limit state.
Eccentrically braced frame (EBF). Diagonally braced frame meeting the requirements of
Section 15 that has at least one end of each bracing member connected to a beam a short
distance from another beam-to-brace connection oro a beam-to-column connection.
Exempted column. Column not meeting the requirements of Equation 9-3 for SME
Expected yield strength. Yield strength in tension of ,a member, equal to the expected yield
stress multiplied by Ag.
Expected tensile strength *. Tensile strength of a member, equal to the specified minimum
tensile strength, Fu, multiplied by Rt.
Expected yield stress. Yield stress of the material, equal to the specified mínimum yield
stress, Fy, multiplied by Ry.
Ordinary moment frame (OMF).
Intermediate moment frame (IMF). Moment frame s stem that meets the requirements of
Section 10.
Interstory drift angle. Interstory displacement divided by story height, radians.
Inverted- V-braced frame. See V-braced frame.
k-area. The k-area is the region of the web that exte s from the tangent point of the web
and the flange-web fillet (AISC "k" dimension) a di ance of 1 Y2 in. (38 mm) into the web
beyond the "lC' dimensiono
K-braced frame. A bracing configuration in which bra es connect to a column at a location
with no diaphragm or other out-of-plane support.
Lateral bracing member. Member that is designed t inhibit lateral buckling or lateral-
torsional buckIing of primary framing members.
Link. In EBF, the segment of a beam that is located bet een the ends of two diagonal braces
or between the end of a diagonal brace and a colum . The length of the link is defined as
the elear distance between the ends of two diagonal races or between the diagonal brace
and the column face.
Link intermediate web stiffeners.· Vertical web stiffener placed within the link in EBE
Link rotation angle. Inelastic angle between the link the beam outside of the link when
the total story drift is equal to the design story drift.
Link shear design strength. Lesser of the available she strength of the link developed from
the moment or shear strength of the link.
Low~st Anticipated Service Temperature (LAST). The lowest l-hour average temperature
Wlth a 100-year mean recurrence interval.
LRFD (Load and Resistance Factor DesignJt. M thod of proportioning structural
components such that the design strength equals or xceeds the required strength of the
component under the action of the LRFD load combi ations.
LRFD Load Combinationt. Load combination in the a licable building code intended for
strength design (load and resistance factor design).
Measuredflexural resistance. Bending moment measure in a beam at the face ofthe column,
for a beam-to-column test specimen tested in accord ce with Appendix S.
Nominalloadt. Magnitude of the load specified by the
Nominal strength*t. Strength of a structure or compo ent (without the resistance factor
or safety factor applied) to resist the load effects, as etermined in accordance with this
Specification.
Ordina? concentrically braced frame (OCBF). Diag nally braced frame meeting the
reqUlrements of Section 14 in which aH members o the bracing system are subjected
primarily to axial forces.
that meets the requirements of
Section 11.

Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March ,2005, ¡ncl. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, INc. AMEruCAN INSTl11JTE OF STEEL CONSTR ON, mc.

- - - - _ . _ ...._--_._----------------------_._----- ..... _...

6.1-12 PART 1 - GLOSSARY
6.1-13

Overstrengthfactor, Oo' Factor specified by the applicable building code in order to determine
the amplified seisrnic load, where required by these Provisions.
Prequalified connection. Connection that complies with the requirements of Appendix P or
ANSI!AISC 358.
Protected zone. Area of members in which limitations apply to fabrication and attachments.
See Section 7.4.
Prototype. The connection or brace design that is to be used in the building (SMF, IMF, EBF,
andBRBF).
Provisions. Refers to this document, the AISC Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel
Buildings (ANSI!AISC 341).
Quality assurance plan. Written description of qualifications, procedures, quality inspections,
resources, and records to be used to provide assurance that the structure complies with the
engineer's quality requirements, specifications and contract documents.
Reduced beam section. Reduction in cross section over a discrete length that promotes a zone
of inelasticity in the member.
Special truss moment frame frame system that meets the
requirements of Section 12.
Speeification. Refers to the for Structural Steel Buildings
(ANSI!AISC 360).
Sta tic yield strength. Strength of a structural member r connection deterrnined on the basis
of testing conducted under slow monotonic loading until failure.
Steel eore. Axial- force-r~sisting element of braces in B F. The steel core contains a yielding
segm~nt an~ c~nnectlOns to transfer its axial forc to adjoining elements; it may also
contam prOjectlOns beyond the casing and transiti n segments between the projections
and yielding segment.
Tested connection. Connection that complies with the equirements of Appendix S.
V-b~aeed frame. Concentrically braced frame (SCBF, OCBF or BRBF) in which a pair of
diagonal braces located either aboye or below a be is connected to a single point within
the clear beam span. Where the diagonal braces ar below the beam, fue system is also
referred to as an inverted-V-braced frame.

Required strength*t. Forces, stresses, and deformations produced in a structural component, X-braeed frame. Concentrically braced frame (OCBF r SCBF) in which a pair of diagonal
deterrnined by either structural analysis, for the LRFD or ASD load eombinations, as braces crosses near the rnid-Iength of the braces.
appropriate, or as specified by the Specification and these Provisions. Y-braeed frame. Eecentrieally braced frame (EBF) in hich the stem of the Y is the link of
Resistance factor, <l>t. Factor that accounts for unavoidable deviations of the nominal strength the EBF system.
from the actual strength and for the manner and consequences of failure.
Safety factor, Ot. Factor that accounts for deviations of the actual strength from the nominal
strength, deviations of the actual load from the nominal load, uncertainties in the analysis
that transforms the load into a load effect, and for the manner and consequences of failure.
Seismic design eategory. Classification assigned to a building by the applicable building
code based upon its seismic use group and the design spectral response acceleration
coefficients.
Seismic load resisting system (SLRS). Assembly of structural elements in the building that
resists seisrnic loads, inc1uding struts, collectors, chords, diaphragms and trusses.
Seismic response modification eoeffieient, R. Factor that reduces seismic load effects to
strength level as specified by the applicable building codeo
Seismic use group. Classification assigned to a structure based on its use as specified by the
applicable building codeo
Special concentrically braced frame (SCBF). Diagonally braced frame meeting the
requirements of Section 13 in which all members of the bracing system are subjected
primarily to axial forces.
~pecial moment frame (SMF). Moment frame system that meets the requirements of
Section 9.
Special plate shear wall (SPSW). Plate shear wall system that meets the requirements of
Section 17.

Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9,2005, ¡nel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INS1ITUTE OF STEEL CONSlRUCTION, INc. AMERICAN INS1ITUTE OF STEEL CON enON, INc.
6.1-14 Sect. 2.] PART 1 - REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS,
6.1-15

1. SCOPE
The Seismic Provisions for Structural
these Provisions, shall govem the
steel members and connections in the . load resisting systems (SLRS)
and splices in colunms that are not part of the SLRS, in buildings and other
structures, where other structures are as those structures designed, fab-
ricated and erected in a manner similar buildings, with building-like vertical
and lateralload-resisting-elements. These Provisions shall apply when the seis-
mic response modification coefficient, R, specified in the a'pplicable building
code) is taken greater than 3, regardless of seismic design category. When the
seismic response modification R, is taken as 3 or less, the structure
is not required to satisfy these , unless specifically required by the
applicable building codeo

These Provisions shall be applied in COI]juJ~ction with the AISC Specification for
Structural Steel Buildings, hereinafter to as the Specification. Members
and connections of the SLRS shall the requirements of the applicable

Wherever these provisions refer to the aPJ)~ic:ab]te building code and there is no
local building code, the loads, load system limitations and general
design requirements shall be those in CE 7.

Part 1 includes a Glossary that is sPt~cij[ic,lllv

dices P, Q, R, S, T, W and X.

2. REFERENCED SPECIFICAT S, CODES, ANO

STANDARDS
The documents referenced in these PY(Wi.l1iOllS shall inelude those listed in Speci-
fication Section A2 with ~e following and modifications:
American Institute orSteel Construction
Specificationfor Structural Steel Buildings, nl'h~.Lr.n..l.~~
Prequalified Connections for Special and lniennettia¡te
for Seismic Applicdtions, ANSI/AISC 35
American Society for Nondestructive
Recommended Practice for the Training Testing of Nondestructive Testing
Personnel, ASNT SNT TC-Ia-200l
Standard for the Qualification and :er¡titü,;at,~on of Nondestructive Testing
Personnel, ANSI/ASNT CP-189-2001

Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN mS1ITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCIlON, !Nc.
AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL mc.
 PART 1 - REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS [Seet.2. Seet. 5.] PART 1 - STRUC1'URAL DESIGN . . . . ''-nyyUJnJ.~
6.1-16 6.1-17

American Welding Society (AWS) 5.1. Structural Design Drawin

Standard Methods for Determination of the Diffusible Hydrogen Content Structural designdrawings and spe~citi4atiol[lS shall show the work to be per-
of Martensitic, Bainitic, and Ferritic Steel Weld Metal Produced by Arc fonned, and inelude iterns required by Specification and the following, as
Welding, AWS A4.3-93R applicable:
Standard Methods for Mechanical Testing ofWelds-U.S. Customary, ANSI!
(1) Designation of the seismic load re system (SLRS)
AWS B4.0-98
Standard Methodsfor Mechanical Testing ofWelds-Metric Only, ANSI!AWS (2) Designation of the rnembers and co~me:ctilons that are part of the SLRS
B4.0M:2000
(3) Configuration of the connections
Standardfor the Qualification ofWelding Inspectors, AWS B5.1:2003
Oxygen Cutting Surface Roughness Gauge and Wall Chart for Criteria (4) Connection material specifications
Describing Oxygen-Cut Surfaces, AWS C4.1 (5) Locations of demand critical welds
Federal Ernergency Managernent Agency (FEMA)
(6) Lowest anticipated service tenllJerature (LAST) of the steel structure, if the
Recommended Seismic Design Criteriafor New Steel Moment-Frame
structure is not enelosed and at a temperature of 50°F (10 oC)
Buildings, FEMA 350, July 2000 or higher

GENERAL SEISMIC DESIGN REQUIREMENTS (7) Locations and dirnensions of vrc1tected zones
3.
The required strength and other seisrnic provisions for seismic design categories (8) Locations where gusset plates are be detailed to accornmodate inelastic
(SDC) and seismic use groups and the lirnitations on height and irregularity shall rotation
be as specified in the applicable building codeo
The design story drift shall be deterrnined as required in the applicable
building codeo

4. LOADS, LOAD COMBINATIONS, AND NOMINAL

STRENGTHS
4.1. Loads and Load Combinations
The loads and load cornbinations shall be as stipulated by the applicable build-
ing codeo Where amplified seismic loads are required by these Provisions, the
horizontal portion of the earthquake load E (as defined in the applicable building
code) shall be rnultiplied by the overstrengthfactor, Qo> prescribed by the appli-
cable building codeo

5.2. Shop Drawings

Shop drawings shall inelude items by the Specification and the follow-
ing, as applicable:
4.2. Nominal Strength
The nominal strength of systerns, rnernbers and connections shall cornply with (1) Designation of the members and corlIlect!c)ns that are part of the SLRS
the Specification, except as rnodified throughout these Provisions. (2) Connection material specifications
(3) Locations of demand critical shop
5. STRUCTURAL DESIGN DRAWINGS AND
SPECIFICATIONS, SHOP DRAWINGS, AND (4) Locations and dimensions of vro'tectelJ zones

ERECTION DRAWINGS (5) Gusset pIates drawn to scale when they are detailed to accornmodate
inelastic rotation

(6) Welding requirements as specified in 4\p~pen.d:·ix W, Section W2.2.

Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, 9, 2005, ¡nel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSlRUcnON, !Ne. AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~s'tR.ucrloN, !Nc.
 [Sect. 5. Sect. 6.]
6.1-18 PART 1 - STRUCTURAL DESIGN DRAWINGS AND SPEClf1CATIONS PARTI-MATE s 6.1-19

5.3. Erection Drawings
Ereetion drawings shall inc1ude items required by the Specificatwn and the fol-
lowing, as applieable:
(1) Designation of the members and eonneetions that are part of the SLRS
(2) Field eonneetion material specifieations and sizes
(3) Loeations of demand critical field welds
(4) Loeations and dimensions of protected zones
(5) Loeations of pretensioned bolts
(6) Field welding requirements as speeified in Appendix W, Seetion W2.3
The struetural steel used in the SLRS d seribed in Seetions 9, 10, 11, 12, 13,
14, 15, 16 and 17 .shall meet one of the following ASTM Specifieations: A36/
A36M, A53/A53M, A500 (Grade B or ), A50l, A529/A529M, A572/A572M
[Grade 42 (290), 50 (345) or 55 (380)], 588/A588M, A913/A913M [Grade 50
(345),60 (415) or 65 (450)], A992/A99 M, or AlOll HSLAS Grade 55 (380).
The struetural steel used for eolumn bas plates shall meet one of the preeeding
ASTM specifieations or ASTM A283/A 83M Grade D.
Other steels and non-steel material s in uckling-restrained braced frames are
perrnitted to be used subjeet to the requir ments of Seetion 16 and Appendix T.
. .
6.2. Material Properties for Dete ination of Required
Strength of Members and nections
When required in these Provisions, the strength of an element (a mem-
ber or a eonneetion) shall be deterrnined from the expected yield stress, RyFy ,
of an adjoining member, where F y is the minimum yield stress of the
grade of steel to be used in the adjoining and Ry is the ratio of the ex-
peeted yield stress to the specified " yield stress, F y , of that material.
The available strength of the element,
be equal to or greater than the required where Rn is the nominal strength
of the eonnection. The expected tensile R,Fu , and the expected yield stress,
RyFy, are perrnitted to be used in lieu of and Fy, respeetively, in deterrnining
the nominal strength, Rm of rupture and limit states within the same
member for whieh the required strength is deterrnined.

6. MATERIALS
6.1. Material Specifications
Struetural steel used in the seismic load resisting system (SL~~..s) s~all meet the
requirements of Specification Seetion A3.1 a, exeept as modified m these ~ro-
. . ns The specified minimum yield stress of steel to be used for mem ers
vzsw
. h' . h inelastie behavior is expeeted shall not exeeed 50 k SI. (345 MPa) for
m w
S stemsle defined in Seetions
: 9, 10, 12, 13, 15 , 16
. ,and 17 nor 55 ksi (380 MPa)
.
/ t s defined in Seetions 11 and 14, unless the suitability of the matenal
lor sys em . l' . . d s not ap
is deterrnined by testing or other rational eriteria. ThlS 1~ltat~on. o~ - The values of Ry and Rt for various steels given in Table 1-6-1. Other values of
ply to eolumns for which the only expeeted inelastie behavlOr IS yleldmg at the Ry and R, shall be perrnitted if the values deterrnined by testing of specimens
column base. similar in size and sOUree eondueted in aec:<j)rclan,::e with the requirements for the
specified grade of steel.

Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, 9,2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN lNSTITUTE OF STEJiL CONSTRUCTlON, lNc. AMERICAN lNsTITUTE OF STEEL COI~S1\FlUC1'10N, INc.
6.1-20 PART 1 - MATERIALS [Sect. 6. Sect. 7.]
PART 1 - ~ONNECTIONS, JOINT , AND FASTENERS
6.1-21

TABLE 1-6-1 7. CONNECTIONS, JOINTS, NO FASTENERS

Ryand Rt Values for Different Member Types 7.1. Scope
Application Ry Rt Connections, joints and fasteners that e part of the seismic load resisting sys-
Hot-rolled structural shapes and bars: tem (SLRS) shall comply with Specific tion Chapter J, and with the additional

· ASTM A36/A36M 1.5 1.2

requirements of this Section.

· ASTM A572/572M Grade 42 (290) 1.3 1.1 The design of connections for a membe that is a part of the SLRS shall be con-

· ASTM
ASTM
ASTM
A572/572M Grade 50 (345) or 55 (380),
A913/A913M Grade 50 (345), 60 (415), or 65 (450),
A588/A588M,
1.1 1.1 figured such that a ductile limit state i either the connection or the member
controls the designo

ASTM A992/A992M, A1011 HSLAS Grade 55 (380)

· ASTM A529 Grade 50 (345) 1.2 1.2

· ASTM A529 Grade 55 (380)

Hollow structural sections (HSS):
1.1 1.2

· ASTM A500 (Grade B or C), ASTM A501

Pipe:
1.4 1.3
7.2. Solted Joints

· ASTM A53/A53M
Plates:
1.6 1.2
AH bolts shall be pretensioned high bolts and shalI meet the require-
ments for slip-critical faying surfaces in lac(~ordaIICe with Specification Section
13.8 with a Class A surface. Bolts shall installed in standard holes or in short-
· ASTM A36/A36M 1.3 1.2 slotted holes perpendicular to the load. For brace diagonals, oversized
· ASTM A572/A572M Grade 50 (345),
ASTM A588/A588M
1.1 1.2 holes shall be permitted when the
and the oversized hole is in one ply
is designed as a slip-critical joint,
Alternative hole types are permitted
if designated in the'Prequalified for Special and Intermediate Mo-
6.3. Heavy Section CVN Requirements . .
SI/AISC 358), or if otherwise de-
· the SLRS , in addition to the requirements of SpeclficatIon
For structura1 steel ID th. k termined in a connection pn:~qual1j]caltionl in accordance with Appendix P, or if
S ti A3 1c hot roUed shapes with flanges 11h in. thick (38 mm) and lC er
:~l ~:ve ~ nrlnimum Charpy V-Notch toughness of 20 ft-Ib (27 J) at 70°F (21
determined in a program of qualification in accordance with Appendix S

~C) tested in the alternate core Iocation as described in :--STM A6 SuppIem.e~- or T. The available shear strength of joints using standard holes shall be
ca1culated as that for bearing-type joints accordance with Specification Sec-
, R· t S30 PI ates 2 in. (50 mm) thick and thlcker shall have a mlm- . tions 13.7 and 13.10, except that the bearing strength at bolt holes shall
tary eqUlremen . ° OC) a ured at
Charpy V-Notch toughness of 20 ft-Ib (27 J) at 70 F (21 , me s . not be taken greaterthan 2.4dtE;..
mum.
any IocatlOn pemn.tte d by ASTM A673 , where the plate is used in the followmg:
Exception: The faying surfaces for end
moment connections are permitted
1. Members built-up from plate to be coated with coatings not tested for
resistance, or with coatings with a
2. Connection plates where inelastic strain under seismic loading is expected slip coefficient less than that of a Class A surface.
3. As the steel core of buckling-restrained braces Bolts and welds shall not be designed to
component in a connection.

Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN !NS'lTIUfE OF STEEL CONSlRUCTION, lNc.
AMERICAlIl!NsTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~s~:ucrlON, !Nc.
 [Sect. 7. Sect. 7.] PART 1 ~ CONNECTIONS,
6.1-22 PART 1 - CONNECTIONS, JOINTS, AND FASTENERS 6.1-23

7.3. Welded Joints

Welding shall be performed in accordance with Appendix W. Welding shall be
performed in accordance with a welding procedure specification (WPS) as re-
quired in AWS D 1.1 and approved by the engineer of record. The WPS variables
shall be within the parameters established by the filler metal manufacturero

7.3a. General Requirements

All welds used in members and connections in the SLRS shaU be made with a
filler metal that can produce welds that have a minimum Charpy V-Notch tough-
ness of 20 ft-lb (27 J) at O °F (minus 18 OC), as determined by the appropriate
AWS A5 classification test method or manufacturer certification. This require-
ment for notch toughness shall also apply inother cases as required in these
Provisions.

7.3b. Demand Critical Welds 7.4. Protected Zone

Where welds are designated as demand critical, they shall be made with a filler Where a protected zone is designated
metal capable of providing a minimum Charpy V-Notch (CVN) toughness of shall comply with the following:
20 ft-lb (27 J) at -20°F (-29 oC) as determined by the appropriate AWS c1as-
. (1) Within the protected zone, díS:COllltir~il:ies created by fabrication or erection
sification test method or manufacturer certification, and 40 ft-lb (54 J) at 70°F
(21°C) as determined by Appendix X or other approved method, when the steel operations, such as tack welds, aids, air-arc gouging and thermal
frame is normally enc10sed d!id maintained at a temperature of 50°F (10°C) or cutting shall be repaired as the engineer of record.
higher. For structures with service temperatures lower than 50°F (lO oC), the (2) Welded shearstuds and decking that penetrate the beam flange
qualification temperature for Appendix X shall be 20°F (11°C) aboye the lowest shall not be placed on beam flanges the protected zone. Decking arc
anticipated service temperature, or at a lower temperature. spot welds as required to secure shaU be permitted.
SMAW electrodes c1assified in AWS A5.1 as E7018 or E7018-X, SMAWelec- (3) Welded, bolted, screwed or shot-in for perimeter edge angles,
trodes c1assified·in AWS A5.5 as E7018-C3L or E8018-C3, and GMAW solid exterior facades, partitions, duct piping or other construction shall not
electrodes are exempted from production lot testing when the CVN toughness be placed within the protected zone.
of the electrode equals or exceeds 20 ft-lb (27 J) at a temperature not exceeding
-20°F (-29 oC) as determined by AWS c1assification test methods. The man- Exception: Weldeq shear studs and connections shaU be permitted when
ufacturer's certificate of compliance shall be considered sufficient evidence of designated in the Prequalified cOl"Zne'ctülmsjor Special and Intermediate Mo-
meeting this requirement. ment Frames jor Seismic Applications SIIAISC 358), or as otherwise de-
termined in accordance with a prequalification in accordance with
Appendix P, or as determined in a of qualification testing in accordance
with Appendix S.
Outside the protect~d zone, calculations upon the expected moment shall
be· made to demonstrate the adequacy of member net section when connec-
tors that penetrate the member are used.
7.5. Continuity Plates and 5tlnemelrs
Comers of continuity plates and stítteIlleris placed in the webs of roUed shapes
shall be c1ipped as ctescribed below. the web, the clip shall be detailed so
that the clip extends a di~tance ·of at least in. (38 mm) beyond the published k
detaildimension for the roUed shape. the flange, the clip shall be detailed
so that the clip does not exceed a distance Y2 in. (12 mm) beyond the published
k¡ detail dimensiono The clip shall be . to facilitate sui~ble weld tennina-
tions for both the flange weld and the weld. If a curved clip is used, it shall
have a minimum radius of Y2 in. (12 mm).

Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN !NslTIUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, !Nc. AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CO¡)I~mClrrON, !Nc.
 PART 1 - CONNECTIONS, JOINTS, AND FASTENERS [Seet.7.
6.1-24 Seet. 8.] PART 1 - MEMBiERf) 6.1-25

At the end of the weld adjacent to the column web/flange juncture, weld. tabs
for continuity plates shall not be used, except when permitted by the engmeer
of record. Unless specified by the engineer of record that they be removed, weld
tabs shall not be removed when used in this location.

Limiting Width-
8. MEMBERS Thickness Ratios
Description of Element
8.1. Scope .
Members in the seismic load resisting system (SLRS) shall comply W1th the
Specification and Section 8. For columns that are not part of the SLRS, see Sec-
tion 8.4b.
Flexure in flanges of rolled or built-up
I-shaped seetions [a], [e], [e], [g], [h]
bit 0.30~E/Ff,
Uniform eompression in flanges of
8.2. Classification of Sections for Local Buckling rolled or built-up I-shaped sections bit 0.30~E/Ff,
8.2a. Compact rn
When required by these Provisions, members of the SLRS shall hav~ flang~s e Uniform compression in flanges of
rolled or built-up I-shaped sections [d]
bit 0.38 ~E/Fy
Q)
continuously connected to the web or webs and the width-thic.kness ratlO.s of 1tS E Uniform eompression in flanges of
Q)
compression elements shall not exceed the limiting width-th1ckness ratlos, A.p , ¡¡¡ ehannels, outstanding legs of pairs
bit 0.30 ~EIFy
of angles in eontinuous eontaet, and
from Specification Table B4.1.
braees

8.2b. Seismically Compact Uniform compression in flanges of

bit 0.45 ~EIFy
When required by these Provisions, members of the SLRS must hav~ flang~s H-pile sections
continuously connected to the web or webs and the width-thi~kness ratl~s of 1tS
compression elements shall not exceed the limiting width-th1ckness ratlOs, A.Ps>
from Provisions Table 1-8-1. bit 0.30 ~E/Fy

dlt 0.30 ~EIFy

8.3. Column Strength

When Pu/~cPn (LRFD) > 0.4 or ºcPalPn ) > 0.4, as appropriate, without
consideration of the amplified seismic

where
~c 0.90 (LRFD) 1.67 (ASD)
Pa required q,xial strength of a using ASD load combinations,
kips (N)
nominal axial strength of a
required axial strength of a using LRFD load combinations,
kips (N)

the following requirements shall be met:

(1) The required axial compressive and strength, considered in the ab-
sence of any applied moment, shall determined using the load combi-
nations stipulateid by the applicable code including the amplified
seismÍc load.

Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, ¡nel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structitral Steel Buildings, 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, mc. AMERICAN msTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~s"I1,ucrlON, mc.
6.1-26 PART 1 - MEMBERS [Sect. 8. Sect. 8.] PART 1 _ l\1f"C'l\Ift:)..,TI,<,
6.1-27

TABLE 1-8-1 (cont.) (2) The required. axial compressive tensile strength shall not exceed
either of the following:
Limiting Width-Thickness Ratios tor
Compression Elements (a) The maximum load transferred the column considering 1.lRy (LRFD)
or (1.1/1.5)Ry (ASO), as apl)wPIllite, times the nominal strengths of the
Limiting Width-
Width- Thickness Ratios
connecting beam or brace of the building.
Description of Element Thickness
Aps
(b) The limit as determined from resistance of the foundation to over-
Ratio
(seismically compact) turning uplift.
Webs in flexural eompression in
beams in SMF, Seetion 9, unless 2.45 ~E/Fy 8.4. Column Splices
noted otherwise
8.4a. General
for Ca::; 0.125 [k] The required strength of column in the seismic load resisting system
(SLRS) shall equal.the required strength of the columns, including that deter-
J!3 3.14 (L(1-1.54Ca ) mined from Sections 8.3, 9.9, 10.9, 11.9, 3.5 and 16.5b.
c:::
Q) Webs in flexural eompression ~ Fy
E
el)
or eombined flexure ánd axial hftw In addition, welded column splices that subject to a calculated net tensile
¡¡:¡ eompression [a], [e], [g], [h], [i], [j] tor Ca> 0.125 [k]
load effect determined using the load c01llb:matIol!lS stipulated by the applicable
~(2.33-Ca) ~ 1.491I
"CI
Q)
c::: 1.12 building code including the amplified load, shall satisfy both of the fol-
~ VFy VFy lowing requirements:
~ r----------------------------+----------r---------------------~
v, Round HSS in axial andlor flexural (1) The available strength of partial-J·omt-Pc~netratlon (PJP) groove welded joints,
Dft 0.044 E/Fy
eompression [e], [g] if used, shall be at least equal to 200 of the required strength.
Rectangular HSS in rucial andlor
flexural eompressi9n [~]j [g]
bftor
hftw
0.64 ~E/Fy (2) The available strength for each splice shall be at least equal to
0.5 RyFyAf(LRFD) or (0.5/1 (ASD), as appropriate, where RyFy is
Webs of H-Pile sections h/tw 0.94 ~E/Fy the expected yield stress of the material and Af is the flange area of
[a] Required tor beams in SMF; Seetion 9 and SPSW, Seetion 17.
the smaller col1:lmn connected.
[b] Required for eolumns in SMF, Seetion 9, unless the ratios from Equation 9·3 are greater than 2.0 where it
is permitted to use A.p in Speeifibatibn Table 84.1. Beveled transitions are not required changes in thickness and width of
[e] Required for braees andeolumns in SCBF, SeeUon 13 and braees in OCBF, Seetion 14.
[d] I~ is permitted to use A.p in Speeifieation Table B4.1 for eolumns in STMF, Seetion 12 and eolumns in EBF, flanges and webs occur in column where PJP groove welded joints
Seetion 15. . are used.
[e] RequirEid for link in EBF, Seetion 15, exeept it iSí permitted to use ')..p in Table B4.1 of the Specífícatíon
for flanges of links of length 1.6Mp/Vp or less, where Mp and Vp are defined in Seetion 15.
[f] Diagonal web members within the speeial segment of STMF, Seetion 12. Column web splices shall be either or welded, or welded to one column
[g] Chord members of STMF, SeeUon 12.
[h] Required for beams and eolumns in BRBF, Seetion 16. and bolted to the other. In moment frames bolted splices, plates or channels
[i] Required tor eolumns in SPSW, Seetion 17. shall be used on both sides of the column
m For eolumns in STMF, SecUon 12; eolumps in SMF, ifJtie ratios from Equation 9-3 are greater than 2.0;
eolumns in EBF, Seetion 15; or EBF webs of links of length 1.6 Mp/Vp or less, it is permitted to use the
following for A.p : The centerline of column splices made . fillet welds or partial-joint-penetra-

~
. tion groove welds shall be located 4 ft (1 m) or more away from the beam-to-
for Ca::; 0.125, A.p = 3.76 - (1-2.75Ca)
Fy column connections. When the column height between beam-to-column
connections is less than 8 ft (2.4 m), shall be at half the clear height.
for Ca> 0.125, f..p = 1.12 ~ (2.33-Ca) ~1.49 ~
~ Fy ~ Fy 8.4b. Columns Not Part of the
[k] ForLFRO, Ca =..!L Seismic Load Resisting Sy
I/Jb~
Splices of columns that are not a part of
For ASO e = nb~
'a ~
(1) Splices shall be located 4 ft (1.2 or more away from the beam-to-
where column connections. When the
Pa =required eompressive strength (ASO), kips (N) clear height between beam-to-
Pu = requíred compressíve strength (LRFD), kips (N) column connections is less than 8 (2.4 m), splices shall be at half the
Py =axial yield strength, kips (N)
«Pb =0.90 clear height.
ilb =1.67

Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplerrient No. 1 Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, 9,2005, incl. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcrrON, INc. AMERICAN lNsTITUTE OF STEEL CO:N~TRUCTIO:N, INc.
6.1-28 PART 1 - MEMBERS [Seet.8. Seet. 9.] PART 1 - SPECIAL l\/fnll\/fl:'''I'lf' FRAMES 6.1-29

(2) The required shear strength of column splices with respect to both (b) The shear calculated using the load combinations of the applicable
orthogonal axes of the column shall be MpJH (LRFD) or Mpc ll.5H (ASD), building code, including the seismic load.
as appropriate, where Mpc is the lesser nominal plastic ~exural streng~ of
the column sections for the direction in question, and H lS the story he1ght. 8.5c. Required Flexural Strength
The required flexural strength of bases, including their attachment
8.5. Column Bases to the foundation, shall be the sunmn:at1c.~ of the required strengths of the steel
The required strength of column bases shall be calculated in accordance with elements that are connected to the base as follows:
Sections 8.5a, 8.5b, and 8.5c. The available strength of anchor rods shall be
detennined in accordance with Specification Section 13. (1) For diagonal bracing, the required strength shall be at least equal to
the required strength of bracing cOlrm~~ctions for the SLRS.
The availab1e strength of concrete elements at the column base, including anchor
rod embedment and reinforcing steel, shall be in accordance with ACI 318, (2) For columns, t:J¡e required flexural shall be at least equal to the
Appendix D. lesser of the following:

(a) 1.1Ry Fy Z (LRFD) or (1.1/1 FyZ (ASD), as appropriate, of the

column or

(b) the moment calculated using load combinations of the applicable

building code, including the ampl1tled seismic load.
8.6. H-Piles
Exception: The special requirements in ACI 318, Appendi~ D, for :'regions. of
8.6a. Design of H-Piles
moderate or high seismic risk, or for structures assigned to mtermedlate or hlgh Design of H-piles shall comply with the prC)VUH0I1S of the Specification regard-
seismic performance or design categories" need not be applied. ing design of members subjected to loads. H-piles shall meet the
requirements of Section 8.2b.
8.5a Required Axial Strength
8.6b.
The required axial strength of column bases, including their attachment to. the
Battered H-Piles
foundation, shall be the summation of the vertical components of the reqUlred If battered (sloped) and vertical piles are in apile group, the vertical piles
strengths of the steel elements that are connected to the column base. shall be designed tO, support the cOInbln~ effects of the dead and live loads
without the participa:tion of the battered
8.5b. Required Shear Strength
The required shear strength of column bases, including their attachments too the
8.6c. Tension in H-Piles
Tension in each pile shall be transferred the pile cap by mechanical means
foundations, shall be the summation of the horizontal component of the reqUlred
strengths of the steel elements that are connected to the column base as such as shear keys, reinforcing bars or welded to the embedded portion
follows: of the pile. Directly below the bottom of pile cap, each pile shall be free of
attachments and welds for a length at equal to the depth of the pile cross
(1) For diagonal bracing, the horizontal component shall be determined frOID section.
the required strength of bracing connections for the seismic load resisting
system (SLRS). 9. SPECIAL MOMENT FRAMES (SMF)
(2) For columns, the horizontal component shall be at least equal to the lesser 9.1. Scope
of the following: Special moment frames (SMF) are eXjJected¡ to withstand significant inelastic de-
(a) 2RyFyZx /H (LRFD) or (2/1.5) RyFyZx /H (ASD), as appropriate, of the formations when subjected to the forces from the motions of the design
column earthquake. SMF shall satisfy the req . in this Section.

where 9.2. Beam-to-Column Connecti

H = height of story, which may be taken as the distance between 9.2a. Requirements
the centerline of floor framing at each of the levels aboye and
Beam-to-column connections used in the load resisting system (SLRS)
below, or the distance between the top of floor slabs at each of
shall satisfy the following three requin~me~~s
the levels aboye and below, in. (mm)

Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9,2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN !NSTlTUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, !Nc.
AMERICAN !NSTlTIJTE OF STEEL Cm~sTj<~uCI10N, !Nc.
 6.1-30 PART I - SPECIAL MOMENT FRAMES [Seet. 9. Seet. 9.] 6.1-31

(1) The connection shall be capable of sustaining an interstory drift angle of at 9.2c. Welds
least 0.04 radians.
Unless otherWise designated by ANSI! C 358, or otherwise determined in a
(2) The measured flexural resistance of the connection, determined at the col- connection prequal1fication in acc:orclan(:;~ with Appendix P, or as determined
umn face, shall equal at least 0.80Mp of the connected beam at an interstory in a program of qualification testing in with Appendix S, complete-
drift ang1e of 0.04 radians. joint-penetration gróove welds of beam shear plates, and beam webs to
columns shall be de'mand critical welds described in Section 7.3b.
(3) The required shear strength ofthe connection shall be detennined using the
following quantity for the earthquake load effect E:
(9-1)
where
Ry ratio of the expected yield stress to the specified minimum yield
stress, Fy
nominal plastic flexural strength, kip-in. (N-mm)
distance between plastic hinge locations, in. (mm)
When E as defined in Equation 9-1 is used in ASD load combinations that are
additive with other transient loads and that are based on SEI!ASCE 7, the 0.75 Protected Zones
combination factor for transient loads shall not be applied to E.
The region at each end of the beam subj to inelastic straining shall be desig-
Conriections that accornmodate the required interstory drift angle within the nated as. a protected zone, and shall meet requirements of Section 7.4. The
connection elements and provide the measured flexural resistance and shear extent of the protected zone shall be as 4e~;i,grlatt~d in ANSI!AISC 358, or as
strengths specified aboye are permitted. In addition to satisfying the require- otherwise determined in a connection in accordance with Ap-
ments noted aboye, the design shall demonstrate that any additional drift due to pendix P, or as determined in a program qualification testing in accordance
connection defonnation can be accornmodated by the structure. The design shall with Appendix S.
inelude analysis for stability effects of the overall frame, ineluding second-order
effects.

9.2b. Conformance Demonstration

Beam-to-colurnn connections used in the SLRS shall satisfy the requirements of
Section 9.2a by one of the following:
(a) Use of SMF connections designed in accordance with ANSI!AISC 358.
(b) Use of a connection prequalified for SMF in accordance with Appendix P.

(e) Provision of qualifying cyclic test results in accordance with Appendix S.

Panel Zone of Beam-to-Colu
Results of at least two cyclic connection. tests shall be provided and are (beam web parallel to colu
permitted to be based on one of the following: Shear Strength
(i) Tests reported in the research literature or documented tests perfonned The required thickness of the panel zone be determined in accordance with
fur other projects that represent the project conditions, within the lirnits the method used in propbrtioning the zone of the tested or prequalified
specified in Appendix S. connection. As a minimuin, the required strength of the panel zone shall
be determined from :the sumniation of the moments at the column faces as de-
(ii) Tests that are conducted specifically for the project and are representa- termined by projectirg the expected at the plastic hinge points to the
tive of project member sizes, material strengths, connection configura- column faces. The design shear strength be q>vRv and the allowable shear
tions, and matching connection processes, within the lirnits specified in strength shall be Ritlv where
Appendix S.
$v =1.0 (LRFD)
and the nominal shear strength, R", acc:ordlin2 to the limit state of shear yielding,
is determined as spe~ified in Specification 110.6.
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9,2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisionsfor Structural SteelBuildings, 9,2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, INC.
AMERICAN INS1ITUTE OF STEEL COI~StN~uCII0N, INc.

--------~--------------------_._----_ .._. __... _ . _ - - - _ . - - - _..__.__._._-"..__._-----_.._.._._ ..._.. _--._.,~ .. ..

" ~ ..__ ... -
6.1-32 PART 1 - SPECIAL MOMENT FRAMES [Seet. 9. Seet. 9.] PART 1 - SPECIAL Ml)M.t~ft.lT FRAMES 6.1-33

9.3b. Panel Zone Thickness 9.6. Column-Beam Moment

The individual thicknesses, t, of. column webs and doubler plates, if used, shall The foIlowing relationship shall be at bearn-to-column connections:
conform to the following requirement:

(9-2)
where 1.0 (9-3)
thickness of column web or doubler plate, in. (mm)
dz panel zone depth between continuity plates, in. (mm)
Wz panel zone width between column flanges, in. (mm) = the sum of the moments in column aboye and below the joint at
the intersection of the bearn colurnn centerlines. W;c is deter-
Altematively, when local buckling of the column web and doubler plate is pre- mined-by surnrning the pro1le4:tíOIls of the nominal flexural strengths
vented by using plug welds joining them, the total panel zone thickness shall of the lcolumns (including where used) aboye and below
satisfy Equation 9-2. the joint to the bearn with a reduction for the axial force in
9.3c. Panel Zone Doubler Plates the colurnn. It is permitted to W;c ='IZc(Fyc - PuJAg ) (LRFD)
Doubler plates shall be welded to the colurnn flanges using either a complete- or LZc[(Fyc /1.5) - Pac/Ag)] ), as appropriate. When the cen-
joint-penetration groove-welded or fillet-weldedjoint that develops the available terlines of opposing beams the same joint do not coincide, the
mid-line between centerlines be used.
shear strength of the foIl doubler plate thickness. When doubler plates are placed
against the colurnn web, they shall be welded across the top and bottom edges to beams at the intersection of the beam
develop the proportion of the total force that is transmitted to the doubler plateo and colurnn centerlines. determined by sumrning the projec-
When doubler plates are placed away from the column web, they shall be placed tions of the expected strengths of the bearns at the plas-
tic hinge locations to the centerline. It is permitted to take
symmetrically in pairs and welded to continuity plates to develop the proportion
of the total force that is transmitted to the doubler plateo W;b = L(1.1RyFyb Zb + Muv) or L[(1.1/1.5)RyFyb Zb + Mav]
(ASD); as appropriate. Alltertlati:veliv. it is permitted to determine
9.4. Beam and Column Limitations W;b consistent with a design as designat-
The requirements of Section 8.1 shall be satisfied, in addition to theJollowing. ed in ANSI/AISC 358, or as deterrnined in a connection
prequalification in with Appendix P, or in a program of
9.4a. Width-Thickness Limitations qualification testing in with Appendix S. When connec-
Bearn and colurnn members shall meet the requirements of Section 8.2b, unless
tions with reduced beam are used, it is permitted to take
otherwise qualified by tests.
W;b =1:(1.1RyFYbZRBS + Muv) or L[(1.111.5)RyFybZRBS + Mav]
9.4b. Beam Flanges (ASD),:as appropriate.
Abrupt changes in bearn flange area are not permitted in plastic hinge regions. = gross area of column, in. 2
The drilling of flange holes or trirnrning of bearn flange width is permitted if = specified minimum yield
testing or qualification demonstrates that the resulting configuration can develop = the additional moment due to amplification from the location
stable plastic hinges. The configuration shall be consistent with a prequalified of the plastic hinge to the centerline, based on ASD load
connection designated in ANSIIAISC 358, or as otherwise determined in a combinations, kip-in. (N
connection prequalification in accordance with Appendix P, or in a program of = the additional moment due to arnplification from the location
qualification testing in accordance with Appendix S. of the plastic hinge to the centerline, based on LRFD load
combinations, kip-in. (N-mm)
9.5. Continuity Plates = required compressive using ASD load combinations, kips
Continuity plates shall be consistent with the prequalified connection designated (a positive number) (N)
in ANSI/AISC 358, or as otherwise determined in a connection prequalification = required compressive strength LRFD load combinations, kips
in accordance with Appendix P, or as determined in a program of qualification (a positive number) (N)
testing in accordance with Appendix S. = plastic section modulus of the in. 3 (mm 3 )
= plastic section modulus of the in. 3 (mm 3 )
= rninimum plastic section at the reduced beam section,
in. 3 (mm 3)

Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMEruCAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc.
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL COII/S"IJ<lUCI10N, !Nc.

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _• _ _ . _ .... _ . _ . _ _ _ ..... _ _ _ " . - - - - - - _ ................. __ ...................... 1, ..... ..

 PART 1 - SPECIAL MOMENT FRAMES [Sect. 9. Sect. 9.]
6.1-34 6.1-35

Exception: This requirement does not apply if either of the following two condi-
tions is satisfied:
(a) Colurnns with Prc < O.3Pc for all load combinations other than those de-
tennined using the amplified seismic load that satisfy either of the
following:
(i) Colurnns used in a one-story building or the top story of a multistory
building.
(2) Each colurnn-flange lateral brace be designed for a required strength
(ii) Colurnns where: (1) the sum of the available shear strengths of all that is equal to 2 percent of the beam fl ange strength Fyb¡t
bJ
exempted columns in the story is less than 20 percent of the sum of (LRFD) or Fyb¡tb¡Il.5 (ASD), as apt,ro¡:,rialte.
the available shear strengths of all moment frame columns in the story
acting in the same direction; and (2) the sum of the available shear
9.7b. Unbraced Connections
strengths of aH exempted colurnns on each moment frame column line tiOll1ll(~ctilon with no lateral bracing trans-
A colurnn containing a beam-to-colurnn "l'
within that story is less than 33 percent of the available shear strength verse to the seismic frarne at the shall be designed using the distance
of aH moment frame colurnns on that colurnn lineo For the purpose of between adjacent lateral braces as the height for buckling transverse to
this exception, a colurnn line is defined as a single line of colurnns or the seismic frarne and shall conform to "\7j~C~fiCf-ltic'n
~J Chapter H, except that:
parallellines of colurnns located within 10 percent of the plan dimen- (1) The required colurnn strength shall determined from the appropriate load
sion perpendicular to the line of colurnns. combinations in the applicable code, except that E shall be taken as
the lesser of:
where
For design according to Specification Section B3.3 (LRFD), (a) The amplified seismic load.
Pc FycAg, kips (Í'~') (b) 125 percent of the frame aVf-lllal1te strength based upon either the beam
Prc = P uo required compressive strength, using LRFD load combina- available flexural strength or zone available shear strength.
tions, kips (N)
(2) not exceed 60.
For design according to Specification Section B3.4 (ASD),
(3) !he colurnn required flexural transverse to the seisrnic frarne shall
Pe FyeAg11.5, kips (N)
Prc = Pao required compressive strength, using ASD load combinations, rnclude that moment caused by the application of the beam flange '"
'fi d' S . 1 orce
kips (N) Specl e .rn ectlOn 9.7a.(2) in to the second-order moment due to
the resultrng colurnn flange c1ISplaceilneIllt.
(b) Colurnns in any story that has a ratio of available shear strength to required
shear strength that is 50 percent gr~ater than the story aboye. Lateral Bracing of Beams
Bo~ flanges of beams shall be laterally braced, with a maximurn spacing of
Lateral Bracing at Beam-to-Column Connections Lb - 0.086~yE/Fy. Braces shall meet the .. of Equations A-6-7 and A-6-8
9.7.
~f AppendIX 6 of the Speci.ficat~on, Mr = Mu = RyZFy (LRFD) or Mr = Ma
9.7a. Braced Connections - RyZFyf1.5 (ASD), as appropnate, of beam and Cd = 1.0.
Colurnn flanges at beam-to-colurnn connections require lateral bracing only at
the level of the top flanges of the beams, when the webs of the beams and col- In addition, lateral braces shall be near concentrated forces, changes in
urnn are co",p1anar, and a colurnn is shown to remain elastic outside of the panel cross-section, and other locations where . di cates that a plastic hinge
m
zone. It shall be pennitted to as sume that the colurnn remains elastic when the will form during in~lastic deformations the SMF. The placement of lateral
ratio calculated using Equation 9-3 is greater than 2.0. bracing shall be consistent with that doQ;l11ID.enlted for a prequalified connec-
tion designated in ANSIIAISC 358, or as htllpr,xT;'"'' determined in a connection
When a colurnn cannot be shown to remain elastic outside of the panel zone, the prequalification in accordance with P, or in a program of qualification
foHowing reqtrirements shall apply: testing in accordance with Appendix S.
(1) The colurnn flanges shall be laterally braced at the levels ofboth the top and
bottom beam flanges. Lateral bracing shall be either direct or indirect.

Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, 9,2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, lNe. AMERICAN INsTITUlE OF STEEL CmlstRuCTloN, lNe.
6.1-36 PART 1 - SPECIAL MOMENT FRAMES [Sect. 9. Seet. 10.] PART 1 - INTERMEDIATE ~MlIAKD'lI.T'"
6.1-37

The required strength of lateral bracing provided adjacent to plastic hinges shall 10.2c. Welds
be Pu =0.06 MJho (LRFD) or Pa =0.06Ma/h o (ASD), as appropriate, where ho is Unless otherwise designated by ANSI! 358, or otherwise determined in a
the distance between flange centroids; and the required stiffness shall meet the connection prequalification in ac(~ord31~ce with Appendix P, or as determined
provisions of Equation A-6-8 of Appendix 6 of the Specification.
in a program of qualification testing in with Appendix S, complete-
9.9. Column Splices joint-penetration groove welds ofbeam shear plates, and beam webs to
Column splices shall comply with the requirements of Section 8.4a. Where columns shall be demand critical welds described in Section 7.3b.
groove welds are used to make the splice, they shall be complete-joint-penetra-
tion groove welds that meet the requirements of Section 7.3b. Weld tabs shall
be removed. When column splices are not made with groove welds, they shall
have a requiredflexural strength that is at least equal to RyFyZALRFD) or RyFyZxl
l.5 (ASD), as appropriate, of the smaller column. The required shear strength
of column web splices shall be at least equal to LMpc/H (LRFD) or LMpc ll.5H
(ASD), as appropriate, where LMpc is the sum of the nominal plastic flexural
strengths of the columns aboye and below the splice.
Exception: The required strength of the column splice considering appropriate
stress concentration factors or fracture mechanics stress intensity factors need 10.2d. Protected Zone
not exceed that determined by inelastic analyses.
The region at each ~nd of the beam to inelastic straining shall be treated
as a protected zone, and shall meet of Section 7.4. The extent
10. INTERMEDIATE MOMENT FRAMES (IMF) of the protected zone shall be as aes:¡gr~ate:a in ANSI!AISC 358, or as other-
10.1. Scope wise determined in a connection in accordance with Appen-
Intermediate moment frames (IMF) are expected to withstand limited inelastic dix P, or as determined in a program of testing in accordance with
Appendix S.
deformations in their members and connections when subjected to the forces
resulting from the motions of the design earthquake. IMF shall meet the require-
ments in this Section.

10.2. Beam-to-Column Connections

10.2a. Requirements
Beam-to-column connections used in the seismic load resisting system (SLRS)
shall satisfy the requirements of Section 9.2a, with the following exceptions:
(1) The required interstory drift angle shall be a minimum of 0.02 radian. 10.3. Panel Zone of Beam-to-Col
(2) The required strength in shear shall be determined as specified in Section (beam web parallel to colu
9.2a, except that a lesser value of Vu or Va, as appropriate, is permitted if No additional requirements beyond the Sv~eci¡fiC('ltion.
justified by analysis. The required shear strength need not exceed the shear 10.4.
resulting from the application of appropriate load combinations in the
The requirements of Section 8.1 shall be "f&L."U.VU, in addition to the following.
applicable building code using the amplified seismic load.
10.4a. Width-Thickness Limitati
10.2b. Conformance Demonstration Beam and column members shall meet requirements of Section 8.2a, unless
Conformance demonstration shall be as described in Section 9.2b to satisfy the otherwise qualified by tests.
requirements of Section 1O.2a for IMP, except that a connection prequalified for
IMF in accordance with ANSIIAISC 358, or as otherwise determined in a con- 10.4b. Beam Flanges
nection prequalification in accordance with Appendix P, or as determined in a Abrupt changes in beam flange area are permitted in plastic hinge regions.
program of qualification testing in accordance with Appendix S. Drilling of flange holes or trimming of flange width is permitted if testing
or qualification demonstrates that the resullt:mg configuration can develop stable
plastic hinges. The configuration shall be with a prequalified connection

Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9,2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, 9,2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCITON, !Nc. AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~stRucrl0N, !Nc.
6.1-38 PART 1 - INTERMEDIATE MOMENT FRAMES [Sect. 10. Sect. 11.] PART 1 - ORDINARY MOIMENT FRAMES 6.1-39

designated in ANSIIAISC 358, or as otherwise determined in a connection

prequalification in accordance with Appendix P, or in a program of qualification
testing in accordance with Appendix S.

10.5. Continuity Plates

Continuity plates shall be provided to be consistent with the prequalified connec- 11.2. Beam-to-Column Connec::tlc~n
tions designated in ANSIIAISC 358, or as otherwise determined in a connection Beam-to-column connections shall be with welds and/or high-strength
prequalification in accordance with Appendix P, or as determined in a program bolts. Connections are permitted to be restrained (FR) or partially restrained
of qualification testing in accordance with Appendix S. (PR) moment connections as follows.
10.6. Column-Beam Moment Ratio 11.2a. Requirements for FR M""rw.o .........
No additional requirements beyond the Specification. FR moment connections that are part of seismic load resisting system (SLRS)
shall be designed for a requiredflexural thatis equal to 1.1RyMp (LRFD)
10.7. Lateral Braeing at Beam-to-Column Conneetions or (1.1/1.5)RyMp (ASD), as appropriate, the beam or girder, or the maximum
No additional requirements beyond the Specification. moment that can be developed by the whichever is less.
10.8. Lateral Braeing of Beams
Both flanges shall be laterally braced directly or indirectly. The unbraced length
between lateral braces shall not exceed 0.17ryE/Fy. Braces shall meet the provi- (1) Where steeI backing is used in cOll1lle:dti,ons with complete-joint-penetration
sions of Equations A-6-7 and A-6-8 of Appendix 6 of the Specification, where (CJP) beam flange groove welds, backing and tabs shall be removed,
M r =Mu =RyZ Fy (LRFD) or M r =Ma =RyZ Fyl1.5 (ASD), as appropriate, of the except that top-flange backing to the column by a continuous fillet
beam, and Cd = 1.0. weld on the edge beIow the CJP weld need not be removed. Removal
of steel backing and tabs shall be as
In addition, lateral braces shall be placed near concentrated loads, changes in
cross-section and other locations where analysis indicates that a plastic hinge (i) Following the removal of the root pass shall be backgouged
will form during inelastic deformations of the !ME Where the design is based to sound weId metal and ba(;kvvelclled with a reinforcing fillet. The rein-
upon assemblies tested in accordance with Appendix S, the placement of lateral forcing fillet shall have a leg size of V16 in. (8 mm).
bracing for the beams shall be consistent with that used in the tests or as required (ii) . Vs in. (3 mm) of the base metal
for prequalification in Appendix P. The required strength of lateral bracing pro- surface, except at continuity nlntp~llwh'Prp removal to within lA in. (6 mm)
vided adjacent to plastic hinges shall be Pu =0.06 MJh o (LRFD) or Pa =0.06Ma/ of the pIate edge is acceptable. of the weId tab shall be finished
ha (ASD), as appropriate, where ha = distance between flange centroids; and the to a surface roughness value of /-lino (13 /-lm) or better. Grinding to
required stiffness shall meet the provisions of Equation A-6-8 of Appendix 6 of a flush condition is not required. and notches are not permit-
the Specification. ted. The transitional slope of any where gouges and notches have
10.9. Column Splices been removed shall not exceed l' . Material removed by grinding that
Column splices shall comply with the requirements of Section 8.4a. Where extends more than Yí6 in. (2 below the surface of the base metal
groove welds are used to make the splice, they shall be complete-joint-penetra- shall be filled with weld metal. contour of the weld at the ends shall
tion groove welds that meet the requirements of Section 7.3b.
(2) Where weld access holes are provided, shall be as shown in Figure 11-1.
11. ORDINARV MOMENT FRAMES (OMF) The weld access hole shall have a roughness valiJ.e not to exceed
500 /-lino (13 /-l~), and shall be free notches and gouges. Notches and
11.1. Seo pe gouges shall be fepaired as required the engineer"of record. Weld access
Ordinary moment frames (OMF) are expected to withstand mínimal inelastic holes are prohibited in the beam adjacent to the end-plate in bolted
deformations in their members and connections when subjected to the forces moment end-plate connections.
resulting from the motions of the design earthquake. OMF shall meet the
requirements of this Section. Connections in conformance with Sections 9.2b (3) The required strength of dOllhlle-~:tdk:~cl partial-joint-penetration groove
and 9.5 or Sections 1O.2b and 10.5 shall be permitted for use in OMF without welds and double-sided fillet welds resist tensile forces in connec-
meeting the requirements of Sections l1.2a, l1.2c, and 11.5. tions shall be 1.1RyFyAg (LRFD) or (1 /1.5)R yFyA g (ASD), as appropriate,
of the connected element or parto ~tntº"le:-sH'lec1 partial-joint-penetration

Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings,
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONsTRUcrrON, lNc.
AMERIcAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL C01~snl~UCT10N,
 Seet. 11.] 6.1-41
PART 1 - ORDINARY MOMENT FRAMES [Sect. 11.
6.1-40

11.2b. Requirement$ for PR n.. " ..-........+ Connections

groove welds and single-sided fillet welds shall not be used to resist PR moment connec~ons are permitted the following requirements are met:
tensile forces in the connections.
(1) Such connections shall be designed the required strength as specified in
(4) Por PR moment connections, the required shear strength, Vu or Va, as appro- Section 11.2a aboye.
priate, of the connection shall be determined using the following quantity
for the earthquake load effect E: (2) The nominalflexural strength ofthe cprmec::tion. Mno shall be no less than 50
percent of Mp of the connected beam colurnn, whichever is less.
(11-1)
(3) The stiffness and strength of the PR connections shall be consid-
Where this E is used in ASD load combinations that are additive with other ered in the design, inc1uding the on overall frame stability.
transient loads and that are based on SEllAS CE 7, the 0.75 combination
factor for transient loads shall not be applied to E. (4) Por PR moment connections, Vu or as appropriate, shall be determined
from the load combination aboye the shear resulting from the rnaxi-
Altematively, a les ser value of Vu or Va is permitted if justified by analysis. rnurn end moment that the corme,ctic)IÍ is capabIe of resisting.
The required shear strength need not exceed the shear resulting from the ap-
plication of appropriate load combinations in the applicable building code 11.2c. Welds
using the amplified seismic load. CornpIete-joint-penetration groove weIds beam flanges, shear pIates, and beam
webs to coIurnns shall be demand critical as described in Section 7.3b.

·11.3. Panel Zone of Beam-to-Colu

(beam web parallel to colu
~~.__~~______~t_M______~ No additionaI requirernents beyorid the Sp1rctficlltilm
o
-Ir-\---...L 11.4. Beam and Column Limitat
No requirernents beyond Section 8.1.

11.5. Continuity Plates

When FR rnornent connections are rnade by rneans of weIds of beam flanges
or beam-fl~ge c?nnection pIates' to coIurnn flanges, continuity plates
shall be provlded m accordance with JI0 ofthe Specification. Continuity
pIates shall aIso be required when:

or when:

Where continuity pIates are required, the thi<::kness of the pIates shalI be deter-
mined as follows:
(a) Por one-sided connections, cOllltirlUÍ1:V pIate thickness shall be at least one
haIf of the thickness of the beam
Notes: l. Bevel as required for selected groove weld. (b) Por two-sided connections the cOIltirluit:v
2. Larger of tblor Yí in. (13 mm) (plus \tí tbl' or minus lA tbl) thickness to the thicker of the beam
3. % tblto t bft % in. (19 mm) minimum (± 1)¡ in.) (± 6 mm)
4. 3fs in. (lO mm) minimum radius (plus not limited, minus O)
5. 3 tbl (± V2 in.) (±13 mm)
Tolerances shall not accumulate to the extent that the angle of the aceess hole cut to the flange
surface exeeeds 25°.

Fig. 11-1. Weld access hole detail (from FEMA 350,

"Recommended Seismic Design Criteriafor New Steel Moment-Frame Buildings").
Seismic Provisionsjor Structural Steel Buildings, 9,2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
Seismic Provisions jor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL COI~sjnmC'rroN, INc.
AMERICAN INSTITUrE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, INc.
6.1-42 PART 1 - ORbINARY MOMENT FRAMES [Sect. 11.
The welded joints of the continuity plates to the column flanges shall be made
with either complete-joint-penetratjon groove welds, two-sided partial-joint-
penetration groove welds combined with reinforcing fillet welds, or two-sided
fillet welds. The required.· strength of these joints shall not be less than the
available strength of the contact area of the plate with the column flange. Tbe
required strength of the welded joints of the continuity plates to the column web
shall be the least of the following:
(a) The sum of the availabIe strengths at the connections of the continuity plate
to the column flanges ..
(b) The available shear strength of the contact area of the plate with the column
web.
(c) The weld available strength that develops the available shear strength of the
column panel zone.
(d) The actual force transmitted.by the stiffener.
11.6. Column-Beam Moment Ratio
No requirements. 12.3.
11.7. Lateral Bracing at Beam-to-Column Connections
No additional requirements beyond the Specification.
11.8. Lateral Bracing of Beams
No additional requirements beyond the Specification.
11.9. Column Splices
Column splices shall comply with the requirements of Section 8.4a.
12. SPECIAL TRUSS MOMENT FRAMES (STMF)
12.1. Scope
Special truss moment frames (STMF) are expected to withstand significant in-
elastic deformation within a specially designed segment of the truss when sub-
jected to the forces from the motions of the design earthquake. STMF shall be
limited to span lengths between columns not to exceed 65 ft (20 m) and overall
depth not to exceed 6 ft (1.8 m). The columns and truss segments outside of the
special segments shall be designed to remain elastic under the forces that can be 12.4.
generated by the fully yielded and strain-hardened special segment. STMF shall
meet the requirements in this Section.
12.2. Special Segment
Each horizontal truss that is part of the sf!ismic load resisting system (SLRS) shall
have a special segment that is located between the quarter points of the span of
the truss. The length of the special segment shall be between 0.1 and 0.5 times
the truss span length. The length-to-depth ratio of any panel in the special seg-
ment shall neither exceed 1.5 nor be less than 0.67.
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, March 9,2005, incl. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN !NSTlTUTE OF STEEL CONSlRVenON, !Nc.
Sect. 12.] PART 1 - SPECIAL TRUSS MO ENT FRAMES 6.1-43
Panels within a spécial segment shall ei er be all Vierendeel panels or all X-
braced panels; neither a combination ther of nor the use of other truss diagonal
configurations is permitted. Where diag nal members are used in the special
segment, they shall. be arranged in an X attem separated by vertical members.
Such diagonal members shall be intercon ected at points where they cross. The
interconnection shall have a required str, gth equal to 0.25 times the nominal
tensile strength of ~he diagonal member. olted connections shall not be used
for web members within the special segm nt. Diagonal web members within the
special segment sha11 be made of flat bars of identical sections.
Splicing of chord members is not permitte within the special segment, nor with-
in one-half the panellength from the end of the special segment. The required
axial strength of the diagonal web memb rs in the special segment due to dead
and live loads within the special segment hall not exceed 0.03Fy Ag (LRFD) or
(0.03/1.5)FyA g (ASID), as appropriate.
The special segment sha11 be a protecte zone meeting the requirements of
Section 7.4.
Strength of Special Segmen Members
The available shear strength of the speci 1 segment sha11 be calculated as the
sum of the available shear strength of the chord members through flexure, and
the shear strength corresponding to the av ilable tensile strength and 0.3 times
the available comprlfssive strength of the agonal members, when they are used.
The top and bottom chord members in the ecial segment shall be made of iden-
tical sections and shaII provide at least 25 ercent of the required vertical shear
strength. The requirf!d axial strength in th chord members, determined accord-
ing to the limit state.of tensile yielding, sh 11 not exceed 0.45 times <l>Pn (LRFD)
or Pn / Q (ASD), as appropriate,
<l> = 0.90 (LRFD) Q = 1.67 (ASD)
where
Pn FyAg
The end connection of diagonal web mem ers in the special segment sha11 have
a required strength that is at least equal to t e expected yield strength, in tension,
of the web member, RyFyAg (LRFD) or Ry yAg / 1.5 (ASD), as appropriate.
Strength of Non-Special Seg ent Members
Members and connections of STMF, exce t those in the special segment speci-
fied in Section 12.2~ sha11 have a require strength based on the appropriate
load combinations in the applicable buildin code, replacing the earthquake load
term E with the lateral loads necessary to develop the expected vertical shear
strength of the special segment Vne (LRFD) or Vne 11.5 (ASD), as appropriate, at
mid-Iength, given as!
(12-1)
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Marc 9, 2005, incL Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN !NsTlTUTE OF STEEL CONS venON, !Nc.
6.1-44 PART 1 - SPECIAL TRUSS MOMENT FRAMES [Seet. 12. Seet. l3.] PART 1 - SPECIAL CONCENTRICALL BRACED FRAMES 6.1-45

where
Mne nominal flexural strength of a chord member of the special segment,
kip-in. (N-mm)
El flexural elastic stiffness of a chord member of the special segment,
kip-in? (N-mm2) 13.2. Members
span length of the truss, in. (mm)
length of the special segment, in. (mm)
13.2a. Slenderness
nominal tensile strength of a diagonal member of the special
segment, kips (N) Bracing members sl;J.all have KUr:S 4
nominal compressive strength of a diagonal member of the special
segment,kips (N) Exception: Braces with 4..JE/E'y < KlIr :S are permitted in frames in which
a angle of diagonal members with the horizontal the available strength of the column is at equal to the maximum load trans-
ferred to the column considering Ry or (l/1.5)R y (ASD), as appropriate,
12.5. Width-Thickness Limitations times the nominal strengths of the cOImectiIl,g brace elements of the building.
Chord members and diagonal web members within the special segment shall Column forces need not exceed those by inelastic analysis, nor the
meet the requirements of Section 8.2b. maximum load effects that can be by the system.
12.6. Lateral Bracing 13.2b. Required Strength
The top and bottom chords of the trusses shall be laterally braced at the ends of Where the effective net area of bracing m~mblers is less than the gross area, the
the special segment, and at intervals not to exceed Lp according to Specification required tensile strength of the brace upon the limit state of fracture in the
Chapter F, along the entire length of the truss. The required strength of each net section shall be greater than the lesser the following:
lateral brace at the ends of and within the special segment shall be
(a) The expected yield strength, in
Pu = 0.06 RyPne (LRFD) or as RyFyAg (LRFD) or RyFyAg/1.5
Pa = (0.06/1.5) RyPne (ASD), as appropriate,
(b) analysis that can be transferred to
where Pne is the nominal compressive strength of the special segment chord
member.
Lateral braces outside of the special segment shall have a required strength of
Pu = 0.02 RyPne (LRFD) or
Pa = (0.02/1.5) RyPne (ASD), as appropriate.
13.2c. Lateral ForceOistribution
The required brace stiffness shall meet the provisions of Equation A-6-4 of Along any line of bracing, braces shall be k1etJlo'iTed in alternate directions such
Appendix 6 of the Specification, where that, for either direction of force parallel bracing, at least 30 percent but
P, =Pu =RyPne (LRFD) or no more than 70 percent of the total force along that line is resisted by
P, =Pa =RyPncl1.5 (ASD), as appropriate. braces in tension, u11less the available of each brace in compression is
larger than the required strength resulting the application of the appropri-
SPECIAL CONCENTRICALLV BRACEO FRAMES ate load combinatioris stipulated by the icable building code including the
13.
amplified seismic load. For the purposes this provision, a line of bracing is
(SCBF) defined as a single line or parallellines . a plan offset of 10 percent or less of
13.1. Scope . .. the building dimension perpendicular to line of bracing.
Special concentrically braced frames (SCBF) are expected to wlthstand slgmfi-
13.2d. Width-Thickness Limitati
cant inelastic deformations when subjected to the forces resulting from the
~eq[uiflem¡~nts of Section 8.2b.
motions of the design earthquake. SCBF shall meet the requirements in this
Section.

Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9,2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, 9, 2005, ¡nel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~s-q.~uC1lON, !Nc.
6.1-46 PART 1 - SPECIAL CONCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAMES [Sect. 13. Sect. 13.]
6.1-47

13.2e. Built-up Members 13.4. Special Bracing Configu n Requirements

The spacing of stitches shall be such that the slenderness ratio llr of individual
13.4a. V-Type and Ihverted-V- Bracing
elements between the stitches does not exceed 0.4 times the goveming slender-
ness ratio of the built-up member. V-type and inverted V-type SCBf shall the following requirements:

The sum of the available shear strengths of the stitches shall equal or exceed the (1) The required Strength of beams ir'lteI'$ec:íed by braces, their connections, and
available tensile strength of each elemento The spacing of stitches shall be uni- supporting members shall be based on the load combinations of
formo Not les s than two stitches shall be used in a built-up member. Bolted stitch- the applicable building code that the braces provide no support
es shall not be located within the middle one-fourth of the c1ear brace length. f~r deact and live loads. For load that include earthquake ef-
fects, the earthquake effect,' E, on beam shall be detennined as follows:
Exception: Where the buckling of braces about their critical bucking axis does
(a) The forces in all braces in shall be assumed to be equal to
not cause shear in the stitches, the spacing of the stitches shall be such that the
RyFyAg.
slendemess ratio l/r of the individual elements between the stitches does not
exceed 0.75 times the goveming slendemess ratio of the built-up member. (b) The forces in all adjoining in compression shall be assumed to
be equal to 0.3Pn •
13.3. Required Strength of Bracing Connections (2) Beams shall be continuous between I"'VJlUll.1H~. Both flanges of beams shall
13.3a. Required Tensile. Strength ... be laterally braced, with a spacing of Lb = Lpd , as specified by
The required tensile strength of bracing connectlOns (mcludmg beam-to-c?lumn Equation A-1-7 and A-1-8 of 1 of the Specification. Lateral brac-
connections if part of the bracing system) shall be the les ser of the followmg: es shall meet the provisions of Eq A-6-7 and A-6-8 of Appendix 6 of
the Specification, where M r = Mu = Z Fy (LRFD) or M r = Ma = RyZ Fyfl.5
(a) The expected yield strength, in tension, of the bracing member, determined
(ASD), as appropriate, of the beam Cd = 1.0.
as RyFyAg (LRFD) or RyFyAgI1.5 (ASD), as appropriate.
As a minimum, one set of lateral braces required at the point of intersection
(b) The maximum load effect, indicated by analysis that can be transferred to
of the V-type (or inverted V-type) bracing unless the beam has sufficient out-of-
the brace by the system.
plane strength and stiffness to ensure between adjacent brace points.
13.3b. Required Flexural Strength
The required flexural strength of bracing connections shall be equal to 1.1~~Mp
(LRFD) or (1.1I1.5)RyMp (ASD), as appropriate, of the brace about the cnucal
buckling axis.
Exception: Brace connections that meet the requirements of Section 13.3a ~nd
can accornmodate the inelastic rotations associated with brace post-buck1mg
deformations need not meet this requirement.
13.4b. K-Type Bracing
K-type braced frames are not pennitted
13.5. Column Splices
In addition to meeting the requirements Section 8.4, column splices in SCBF
shall be designed to develop 50 percent of les ser available flexural strength of
13.3c. Required Compressive Strength . the connected members. The required strength shall be 'LMpclH (LRFD) or
Bracing connections shall be designed for a required compreSSlve strength based 'LMpJ1.5H (ASD), as appropriate', where is the sum of the nominal plastic
on buck1ing limit states that is at least equal to 1.1RyPn (LRFD) or (1.1/1.5)RyPn flexuralstrengths oÍ' the columns aboye below the splice.
(ASD), as appropriate, where Pn is the nominal compressive strength of the 13.6. Protected Zone
braceo The protected zone ?f br~cing m€fmbers .
quarter of the brace length, and a zone aUII~""~HL to each connection equál to the
brace depth in the plane of buckling. The zone of SCBF shall i:n~lude

Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONS1RucnON, lNe. AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL Cor.$:UCTlON,lNe.
6.1-48 PART 1 - SPECIAL CONCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAMES [Sect. 13.
Sect. 14.] PART 1 - ORDINARY CONClEN:rIUCAlLlJi 6.1-49

elements that connect braces to beams and columns and shall satisfy the require- (1) The required strength shall be det:enniIjledbased on the load combinations of
ments of Section 7.4. the applicable building code that the braces provide no support of
dead and live loads. For load that indude earthquake effects,
14. OROINARV CONCENTRICALLV BRACEO FRAMES the earthquake effect, E, on the shall be detennined as follows:
(OCBF) (a) The forces in braces in tension be assumed to be equal to RyFyAg.
14.1. Seo pe For V-type and inverted V-type , the forces in braces in tension need
Ordinary concentrically braced frames (OCBF) are expected to withstand lim- not exceed the maximum force can be developed by the system.
ited inelastic deformations in their members and connections when subjected to
(b) The forces ,jn braces in co:mpres:~ioln shall be assumed to be equal to
the fbrces resulting from the motions of the design earthquake. OCBF shall meet
0.3Pn.
the requirements in this Section. OCBF aboye the isolation system in seismically
isolated structures shall meet the requirements of Sections 14.4 and 14.5 and (2) Both flanges ~hall be laterally with a maximum spacing of
need not meet the requirements of Sections 14.2 and 14.3. Lb = Lpd , as specified by Equations 1-7 and A-1-8 of Appendix 1 of the
Specification. Lateral braces shall the provisions of Equations A-6-7
and A-6-8 of Appendix 6 of the Spc~¡::Ú'icc.~tion, where M r = Mu = RyZ Fy
(LRFD) or M r = Ma = RyZ Fyf 1. 5 as appropriate, of the beam and
Cd = 1.0. As a minimum, one set of braces is required at the point of
intersection of the bracing, unless member has sufficient out-of-plane
strength and stiffness to ensure between adjacent brace points.

14.4. Braeing Conneetions

The required strength of bracing cOIme:CtllDtIs
14.2. Braeing Members
Bracing members shall meet the requirements of Section 8.2b. (1) For the limit state of bolt slip, the strength of bracing connec-
tions shall be that detennined using load combinations stipulated by the
Exception: HSS braces that are filled with concrete need not comply with this applicable building code, not ir·IcluLdIrLg the amplified seismic load.
provision.
(2) For other limit states, the required of bracing connections is the
Bracing members in K, V, or inverted-V configurations shall have expected yield strength, in tension, the brace, determined as Ry Fy Ag
(LRFD) or Ry Fy AgI1.5 (ASD), as ap¡:lrp¡:lriat:e.
KUr<S:4~.
Exception: The required strength of the connection need not exceed either
of the following:
(a) The maximum force that can be de"el<boed by the system
(b) A load effect based upon using the seismic load

14.5. OCBF aboye Seismie Isol

14.3. Speeial Braeing Configuration Requirements 14.5a. Braeing Members
Beams in V-type and inverted V-type OCBF and columns in K-type OCBF shall Bracing members shall meet the recluÍ1:errlepts of Section 8.2a and shall have
be continuous at bracing connections away from the beam-column connection KI/r <S: 4~EIFy .
and shall meet the following requirements:
14.5b. K-Type Braeing
K-type braced frames are not pennitted.

Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN lNS1TfUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, mc. AMERICAN lNs1TfUTE OF STEEL Cm~s'$lUCl]ON, mc.
 [Seet. 14. Sect. 15.] PARTI-ECCENTRICALLY FRAMES
6.1-50 PART 1 - ORDINARY CONCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAMES 6.1-51

If Pu > 0.15Py (LRFD)

14.5c. V-Type and Inverted-V-Type Bracing
or
Beams in V-type and inverted WtYpe bracing shall be continuous between
Pa > (0.15/1.5)Py (ASD), as aplDropriate. the following additional requirements
columns.
shall be met:

ECCENTRICALLV BRACEO FRAMES (EBF) (1) The available shear strength of the shall be the lesser of
15.
15.1. Scope <PvVpa and 2<P01pa/e (LRFD)
Eccentrically braced frames (EBFs) are expected to withstand significant in- or
elastic defonnations in the links when subjected to the forces resulting from Vpa / nv and 2 (Mpa/e)/n v (ASD), as IaO[)ro[)rial:e.
the motions of the design earthquake. The diagonal braces, columns, and beam where
segments outside of the links shall be designed to remain essentially elastic <Pv = 0.90 (LRFD) (ASD)
under the maximum forces that can Q~ generated by the fully yielded and strain-
hardened links, except where pennitted in this Section. In building s exceeding Vpa = Y¡,~1- (E'r/l:y
(15-1)
five stories in height, the upper story of an EBF system is pennitted to be de-
Mpa = 1. 18Mp [l-(p,/~)J
signed as an OCBF oi" a SCBF and still be considered to be part of an EBF (15-2)
system for the purposes of detennining system factors in the applicable building Pr = Pu (LRFD) or Pa (ASD), as laplJroJmate
codeo El3F shall meet the requirement's in this Section. Pe = Py (LRFD) or Pyf1.5
(2) The length of the link shall not
15.2. Links
15.2a. Limitations (15-3)
nor
Línks shall meet the requirements of Section 8.2b.
(b) 1.6 Mp/Vp when p'(Aw/A g) < (15-4)
The web of a link shall be single thickness. Doubler-plate reinforcement and
web penetrations are not pennitted. . where
Aw = (d - 2t¡)tw
15.2b. Shear Strength p' = Pr/Vr
Except as limited below, the link design shear strength, <PvVm and the allowable
and where
shear strength, Vn/n v , according to the limit state of shear yielding shall be de-
Vr = v" (LRFD) or Va (ASD), as a~proPIiate
tennined as follows:
=
v" required shear strength based LRFD load combinations, kips
nominal shear strength of the link, equal to the lesser of Vp or 2Mp /e, Va = required shear strength based ASD load combinations, kips
kips (N)
0.90 (LRFD) nv = 1.67 (ASD) 15.2c. Link Rotation Angle
The link rotatíon angle is the inelastic between the link and the beam out-
FyZ, kip-in. (N-mm) side of the link when the total story drift equal to the design story drijt, ~. The
link rotation angle shall not exceed the IOl.lO'W'lnQ values:
0.6Fy Aw , kips (N)
link length, in. (mm) (a) 0.08 radians for links oflength 1.
(d-2t¡)tw
(b) 0.02 radians for links of length
The effect ofaxial force on the link available shear strength need not be con-
sidered if (e) The value detennined by linear mtl~rbc)lat:ion between the aboye values for
Pu ~ 0.15Py (LRFD) links oflengthbetween 1.6Mp/Vp 2.6Mp/Vp.
or 15.3. Link Stiffeners
Pa ~ (O. 15/1.5)Py (ASD), as appropriate.
Full-depth web stiffeners shall be of()Vicirld on both sides of the link web at the
where diagonal brace ends of the link. These shall have a combined width
Pu required axial strength using LRFD load combinations, kips (N) not less than (b! - 2tw ) and a thickness less than 0.75tw or Ys in. (lO mm),
Pa required axial strength using ASD load combinatíons, kips (N)
Py nominal axial yield strength =FyAg, kips (N)

Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, ¡nel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Stru~tural Steel Buildings, 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMEruCAN msTITUTE OF STEEL CONS1RUcnON, mc. AMERIcAN msTITUTE OF STEEL COIIj$nlucllON, mc.
6.1-52 PART 1 - ECCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAMES [Seet. 15.
whichever is larger, where b¡ and tw are the link flange width and link web
thickness, respectively.
Links shall be provided with intennediate web stiffeners as follows:
(a) Links of lengths 1.6Mp /Vp or less shall be provided with intennediate web
stiffeners spaced at intervals not exceeding (30tw-d/5) for a link rotation
angle of 0.08 radian or (52tw-d/5) for link rotatioIÍ angles of 0.02 radian or
less. Linear interpolation shall be used for values between 0.08 and 0.02
radian.
(b) Links of length greater than 2.6Mp /Vp and les s than 5Mp /Vp shall be
provided with intennediate web stiffeners placed at a distance of 1.5 times b¡
from each end of the link.
(c) Links of length between 1.6Mp /Vp and 2.6Mp /Vp shall be provided with
intennediate web stiffeners meeting the requirements of (a) and (b) aboye.
(d) Intennediate web stiffeners are not required in links of lengths greater than
5Mp /Vp •
(e) Intennediate web stiffeners shall be full depth. For links that are les s than
25 in. (635 mm) in depth, stiffeners are required on only one side of the link
web. The thickness of one-sided stiffeners shall not be les s than tw or % in.
(10 mm), whichever is larger, and the width shall be not less than (b¡/2) - tw •
For links that are 25 in. (635 mm) in depth or greater, similar intennediate
stiffeners are required on both sides of the web.
The required strength of fillet welds connecting a link stiffener to the link web
is AstFy (LRFD) or AstFy / 1.5 (ASD), as appropriate, where Ast is the area of the
stiffener. The required strength of fillet welds connecting the stiffener to the link
flanges is AstF)4 (LRFD) or AstFy /4(1.5) (ASD).
15.4. Link-to-Column Connections
Link-to-column connections must be capable of sustaining the maximum link
rotation angle based on the length ofthe link, as specified in Section 15.2c. The
strength of the connection measured at the co1umn face shall equal at least the
nominal shear strength of the link, V", as specified in Section 15.2b at the maxi-
mum link rotation angle.
Link-to-column connections shall satisfy the aboye requirements by one of the
following:
(a) Use a connection prequalified for EBF in accordance with Appendix P.
(b) Provide qualifying cyclic test results in accordance with Appendix S. Re-
sults of at least two cyc1ic connection tests shall be provided and are permit-
ted to be based on one of the following:
(i) Tests reported in research literature or documented tests perfonned for
other projects that are representative of project conditions, within the
limits specified in Appendix S.
Seismic Provisionsjor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9,2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERIcAN !NSTITIJTE OF STEEL CONsTRuenoN, !Nc.
Seet. 15.] PART 1 - ECCENTRICALLY B CED FRAMES 6.1-53
(ii) Tests that are conducted specifically for the project and are representa-
tive of project memb6r sizes, aterial strengths, connection configura-
tions, and matching connection processes, within the limits specified in
Appendix S.
Exception: Where reinforcement at the eam-to-column connection at the link
end precludes yielding of the beam ove the reinforced length, the link is per-
mitted to be the beam segment from th end of the reinforcement to the brace
connection. Where such links are use and the link length does not exceed
1.6Mp /Vp , cyc1ic testing of the reinforce connection is not required if the avail-
able strength of the reinforced section d the connection equals or exceeds the
required strength calculated based upon he strain-hardened link as described in
Section 15.6. Full depth stiffeners as req ired in Section 15.3 shall be placed at
the link-to-reinforcement interface.
15.5. Lateral Bracing of Link
Lateral bracing shall be provided at bo the top and bottom link flanges at the
ends of the link. The required strength f each lateral brace at the ends of the
link shall be Pb = 0.06 Mr/h a, where ha i the distance between flange centroids
in in. (mm).
For desigIi according to Specification Se tion B3.3 (LRFD)
For design according to Specification Se tion B3.4 (ASD)
The required brace stiffness shall meet e provisions of Equation A-6-8 of the
Specification, where M r is defined aboye, Cd = 1, and Lb is the link length.
15.6. Diagonal Brace and Beam utside of Link
15.6a. Diagonal Brace
The required combined axial and flexur, 1 strength of the diagonal brace shall
be determined based on load combinatio s stipulated by the applicable building
codeo For load combinations inc1uding se smic effects, a load Q¡ shall be substi-
tuted for the tenn E, where Q¡ is defined s the axial force s and moments gener-
ated by at least 1.25 times the expected n minal shear strength of the link Ry Vm
where Vn is as defined in Section l5.2b. e available strength of the diagonal
brace shall comply with Specification eh pter H.
Brace members shall meet the requireme ts of Section 8.2a.
15.6b. Beam Outside Link
The required combinyd axial and flexur 1 strength of the beam outside of the
link shall be determined based on load co binations stipulated by the applicable
building codeo Fór load combinations inc uding seismic effects, a load Q¡ shall
be substituted for the term E where QI is defined as the torces generated by at
least 1.1 times ~e expected nominal she strength of the link, RyVm where Vn
Seismic Provisions jor Structural Steel Buildings, M h 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERrCAN !NSTITIJTE OF STEEL CON TRuenON, !Nc.
6.1-54 PART 1 - ECCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAMES [Sect. 15. Sect.16.] PART 1 - BUCKLlNG-RESTRA D BRACED FRAMES 6.1-55

is as defined in Section 15.2b. The available strength of the beam outside of the
link shall be determined by the Specification, multiplied by Rr 15.10. Oemand Critical Welds
Complete-joint-penetration groove we ds attaching the link flanges and the link
web to the column are de1Jland critica welds, and shall satisfy the requirements
of Section 7.3b.

16. BUCKLING-RESTRAINEO BRACEO FRAMES (BRBF)

16.1. Scope
Buckling-restrained bracedframes (B F) are expected to witbstand significant
inelastic deforrnations when subjected b the forces resulting from the motions of
At the connection between the diagonal brace and the beam at the link end of the design earthquake. BRBF shall me t the requirements in tlús Section. Where
the brace, the intersection of the brace and beam centerlines shall be at the end the applicable b~ilding cade does not ontain design coefficients for BRBF, the
of the link or in the link. provisions of Appendix R shall apply.
15.6c. Bracing Connections 16.2. Bracing Members
The required strength of the diagonal brace connections, at both ends of the Bracing members shall be composed o a structural steel core and a system that
brace, shall be at least equal to the required strength of the diagonal brace, as restrains the steel core from buckling.
defined in Section 15.6a. The diagonal brace connections shall also satisfy the 16.2a. Steel Core
requirements of Section 13.3c.
The steel core shall be designed to resi t the entire axial force in the braceo
No part of the diagonal brace connection at the link end of the brace shall extend
The brace design axial strength, <l>Pyse (LRFD) , and the brace allowable axial
over the link length. If the brace is designed to resist a portion of the link end
strength, Pyse /0. (ASD), in tension and ompression, according to the limit state
moment, then the diagonal brace connection at the link end of the brace shall be of yielding, shallbe determin~d as foll ws:
designed as a fully-restrained moment connection.
15.7. Beam-to-Column Connections (16-1)
If the EBF system factors in the applicable building code require moment resist- <1> = 0.90 (LRFD) o. = 1.67 (ASD)
ing connections away from the link, then the beam-to-column connections away where
from the link shall meet the requirements for beam-to-column connections for F yse specified minimum yield str ss of the steel core, or actual yield stress
OMF specified in Sections 11.2 and 11.5. of the steel core as determin d from a coupon test, ksi (MPa)
Ase net area of steel core, in. 2 ( 2 ) .' .
If the EBF system factors in the applicable building code do not require moment
resisting connections away from the link, then the beam-to-column connections Plates used in the steel core that are 2 i . (50 mm) thick or greater shall satisfy
away from the link are permitted to be designed as pinned in the plane of the web. the minimum notch toughness requirem nts of Section 6.3.
15.8. Required Strength of Columns Splices in the steel core are not permitt
In addition to the requirements in Section 8.3, the required strength of columns
shall be determined from load combinations as stipulated by the applicable 16.2b. Buckling-Restraining Syst
building code, except that the seismic load E shall be the forces generated by The buckling-restraining system shall c nsist of the casing for the steel coreo In
1.1 times the expected nominal shear strength of alllinks aboye the level under stability calculations, beams, columns, d gussets pOJlnecting the core shall be
consideration. The expected nominal shear strength of a link is RyVm where Vn is considered parts of this system.
as defined in Section 15.2b.
The buckling-restraining system shall imit local 'llld overall buckling of the
Column members shall meet the requirements of Section 8.2b. steel core for deforrnations correspondin to 2.0 times the design story drift. The
15.9. Protected Zone buck1ing-restraining system shall not be ermitted to buckle within deforrnations
corresponding to 2.0 times the design st ry drift.
Links in EBFs are a protected zone, and shall satisfy the requirements of Section I

7.4. Welding on links is permitted for attachment of link stiffeners, as required

in Section 15.3.

Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1 I

AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, !Nc. Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, 9,2005, incl. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL Cot~sn~uCTI0N, !Nc.
6.1-56 1 - BUCKLING-RESTRAINED BRACED FRAMES [Sect. 16. Sect. 16.] PART 1 - BUCKLING-RESTRAINED FRAMES 6.1-57

16.2c. 16.3. Bracing Connections

braces shall be based upon results from qualifying cyelic tests in 16.3a. Required Strength
the procedures and acceptance criteria of Appendix T. Qualify- The required strength of bracing C01me:ct~IDns in tension and compression (in-
shall consist of at least two successful cyelic tests: one is required eluding beam-to-column connecti;ons if of the bracing system) shall be 1.1
abrace subassemblage that ineludes brace connection rotational times the adjusted brace strength in (LRFD) or 1.111.5 times the
cojnpllyirlJ2; with Appendix T, Section T4 and the other shall be either a adjusted brace strength in compression
subassemblage test complying with Appendix T, Section T5. Both
permitted to be based upon one of the following: 16.3b. Gusset Plates
The design of connections sha11 inClude cOl~silder'atiIDns of local and overall buck-
(a) in research or documented tests performed for other
ling. Bracing consistent with that used in tests upon which the design is based
is required.
(b)

lnten:1oléltíOIP. or extrapolation of test results for different member sizes shall be

analysis that demonstrates stress distributions and magni-
strains consistent with or less severe than the tested assem-
considers the adverse effects of variations in material properties.
Ex~tra.polatJLqn of test results shall be based upon similar combinations of steel
bu~::lding:-re:straining system sizes. Tests shall be permitted to qualify a
the provisions of Appendix T are met.
16.4. Special Requirements Rela'tea
16.2d. Configuration
by these Provisions, bracing connections and adjoining mem- V-type and inverted-V-type braced shall meet the following
designed to resist forces ca1culated based on the adjusted brace requirements:
(1) The required strength of beams ir'ltelrsejcted by braces, their connections, and
brace strength in compression shall be ~roRyPyse' The adjusted supporting members shall be based on the load combinations of
in tension shall be roRyPyse . the applicable building. code that the braces provide no support
factor Ry need not be applied if Pyse is established using yield for dead and live loads. Por load . that inelude earthquake ef-
stress det:ef]~liI1Led from a coupon test. fects, the vertical and horizontal effect, E, on the beam shall be
determined from the adjusted brace in tension and compression.
The cor,nvr~ssion strength adjustment factor, ~, shall be ca1culated as the ratio
of the compression force to the maximum tension force of the test (2) Beams shall becontinuous between . Both flanges of beams shall
m~~asun:~d from the qualification tests specified in Appendix T, Section
be laterally braced. Lateral braces meet the provisions of Equations
range of deformations corresponding to 2.0 times the design story A-6-7 and A-6-8 of Appendix 6 of Specification, where M r = Mu =
value of ~ from the two required brace qualification tests shall Ry ZFy (LRFD) or M r =Ma =RyZFyfl (ASD), as appropriate, ofthe beam
case shall ~ be taken as less than 1.0. and Cd = 1.0. As a minimum, one set lateral braces is required at the point
of intersection of the V-type (or . V-type) bracing, unless the beam
lirurdemILg adjustment factor, ro, shall be calculated as the ratio of the has sufficient out-of-plane strength stiffness to ensure stability between
force measured from the qualification tests specified in Ap- adjacent brace points.
T6.3 (for the range of deformations corresponding to 2.0 times
drift) to Fyse of the test specimen. The larger value of ro from the
qualification tests shall be used. Where the tested steel core mate-
match that of the prototype, ro shall be based on coupon testing of
nrflltotvne material.

Seismic Prl101J¡.':l1nl.jotStructural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisionsjor Structural Steel Buildings, 9,2005, incl. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONs1RUcnON, INc. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~siR:uCTION, INc.
6.1-58 PART 1- BUCKLING-RESTRAlNED BRACED FRAMES [Sect. 16. Sect. 17.] PARTI-SPEC~PLATE 6.1-59

For purposes of brace design and testing, the calculated maximum deformation 17.2. Webs
of braces shall be increased by inc1uding the effect of the vertical deflection of
the beam under the loading defined in Section 16.4(1). 17.2a. Shear Stren.gth
The panel design shear strength, <1> Vn ), and the allowable shear strength,
K-type braced frames are not pennitted for BRBF.
Vn/Q (ASD), according to the limit of shear yielding, shall be detennined
16.5. Beams and Coluinns as follows:
Beams and columns in BRBF shall meet the following requirements.
(17-1)
16.5a. Width-Thickness Limitations <1> ~ 0.90 (LRFD) Q = 1.67 (ASD)
Beam and column members shall meet the requirements of Section 8.2b.
where ;
16.5b. Required Strength thickness of the web, in.
The required strength of beams and columns in BRBF shall be determined from c1ear dlstance between VBE
load combinations as stipulated in the applicable building codeo For load combi-
nations that inc1ude earthquake effects, the earthquake effect, E, shall be deter- a is the angle of web yielding in
mined from the adjusted brace strengths in tension and compression. and it is given by:

The required strength of beams and columns need not exceed the maximum
force that can be developed by the system.
tan 4 a =- - + - - ; - - - - - - , : - (17-2)

h distance between HBE cel1lte~¡lme:s, in. (mm)

16.5c. Splices Ab cross-sectional area of a in. 2 (mm2)
In addition to meeting the requirements in Section 8.4, column splices in BRBF Ae cross:"sectional area of a in. 2 (mm2)
shall be designed to develop 50 percent of the lesser available flexural strength le moment of inertia of a perpendicular to the direction of
of the connected members, detennined based on the limit state of yielding. The the web plate line, in. 4
required shear strength shall be LMpelH (LRFD) or LMpe /1.5H (ASD), as ap- L distance between VBE ceIlte:t1línc:~s, in. (mm)
propriate, where LMpc is the sum of the nominal plastic flexural strengths of the
columns aboye and below the splice. 17.2b. Panel Aspect Ratio
The ratio of panellength to height, L/h, be limited to 0.8 < L/h ::; 2.5.
16.6. Protected Zone
The protected zone shall inc1ude the steel core of bracing members and elements 17.2c. Openings in Webs
that connect the steel core to beams and columns, and shall satisfy the require- Openings in webs shall be bounded all sides by HBE and VBE extending
ments of Section 7.4. the full width andheight of the panel, vely, unless otherwise justified by
testing and analysls.
17. SPECIAL PLATE SHEAR WALLS (SPSW) 17.3. Connections of Webs to Boulna¡:lrV
17.1. Scope The required strength of web cOImecti~l>ns to the surrounding HBE and VBE
Special plate shear walls (SPSW) are expected to withstand significant inelastic shall equal the expected yield strength, tension, of the web calculated at an
deformations in the webs when subjected to the forces resulting from the mo- angle a, defined by Equation 17-2.
tions of the design earthquake. The horizontal boundary elements (HBEs) and
vertical boundary elements (VBEs) adjacent to the webs shall be designed to 17.4. Horizontal and Vertical dary Elements
remain essentially elastic under the maximum forces that can be generated by
17.48. Required Strength
the fully yielded webs, except that plastic hinging at the ends of HBEs is permit-
In addition to the requirements of 8.3, the required strength ofVBE shall
ted. SPSW shall meet the requirements of this Secciono Where the applicable
be based upon the forces corresponding the expected yield strength, in tension,
building code does not contain design coefficients for SPSW, the provisions of
of the web calculated at an angle a.
Appendix R shall apply.

Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INSTITIITE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTlON, INc. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CQi'lSTImC:rION, INc.
6.1-60 PART 1 - SPECIAL PLATE SHEAR WALLS [Seet. 17. Seet. 18.] PART 1 - QUALITY n.~ •.)u¡rV"U"""'.c 6.1-61

The required strength of HBE shall be the greater of the forces corresponding
to the expected yield strength, in tension, of the web calculated at an angle a. or
that determined from the load combinations in the applicable building code as-
suming the web provides no support for gravity loads.
The beam-column moment ratio provisions in Section 9.6 shall be met for all
HBENBE intersections without consideration of the effects of the webs.

17.4b. HBE-to-VBE Connections

HBE-to-VBE connections shall satisfy the requirements of Section 11.2. The
required shear strength, v." of a HBE-to-VBE connection shall be determined in
accordance with the provisions of Section 11.2, except that the required shear
strength shall not be les s than the shear corresponding to moments at each end
equal to 1.lRyMp (LRFD) or (1.1I1.5)R yM p(ASD), as appropriate, together with
the shear resulting from the expected yield strength in tension of the webs yield-
ing at an angle a..

17.4c. Width-Thickness Limitations

HBE and VBE members shall meet the requirements of Section 8.2b.

17.4d. Lateral Bracing

HBE shall be laterally braced at all intersections with VBE and at a spacing
not to exceed 0.086ryEIFr Both flanges of HBE shall be braced either directly
or indirectly. The required strength of lateral bracing shall be at least 2 percent
of the HBE flange nominal strength, Fyb¡t¡. The required stiffness of alllateral
bracing shall be determined in accordance with Equation A-6-8 of Appendix 6 of
the Specification. In these equations, M r shall be computed as RyZFy (LRFD) or
M r shall be computed as RyZFyf1.5 (ASD), as appropriate, and Cd = 1.0.

17.4e. VBE Splices

VBE splices shall comply with the requirements of Section 8.4.

17.41. Panel Zones

The VBE panel zone next to the top and base HBE of the SPSW shall comply
with the requirements in Section 9.3.

17.4g. Stiffness 01 Vertical Boundary Elements

The VBE shall have moments of inertia about an axis taken perpendicular to the
plane of the web, le, not less than 0.00307 tw h41L.

18. QUALITV ASSURANCE PLAN

18.1. Scope
When required by the applicable building code or the engineer of record, a qual-
ity assurance plan shall be proVided. The quality assurance plan shall include the
requirements of Appendix Q.

Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisionsfor Úructural Steel Buildings, 9,2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STBEL CONSTRUCI'ION, !Nc. AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STBEL Cq~~STRUcrION, !Nc.
6.1-62
App.P.] PARTI- 'RBQlli~IflCATIONIOFCONNECTIONS 6.1-63

APPENDIX P the eonneetion has the ability and reli:*-bility to undergothe required interstory
drift angle for SMF and iMF and the link rotation angle for ESF, where
the link is adjaeent lo eolumns. The on member sizes for prequalifieation
PREQUALIFICATION OF BEAM-COLUMN shall not exeeed the limits speeified in S, 5eetion S5.2.
AND LINK-TO-COLUMN CONNECTIONS
P4.
In order to be prequalified, the effeet the following variables on eonneetion
performance shall be eonsidered. on the permissible values for eaeh vari-
able shall be established by the CPRP the prequalified connection.
P1. SCOPE
This appendix eontains minimum requirements for prequalifieation of beam- (1) Beam or link parameters:
to-eolumn moment eonnections in special moment frames (SMF), intermediate (a) Cross-sedion shape: wide
moment frames (IMF), and link-to-eolumn eonneetions in eccentrically braced
frames (EBF). Prequalified connections are permitted to be used, within the ap- (b) Cross-seetion fabrieation rolled shape, welded shape, or other
plieable limits of prequalifieation, without the need for further qualifying eyclie (e) Depth
tests. When the limits of prequalifieation or design requirements for prequali-
fied eonneetions eonfliet with the requirements of these Provisions, the limits (d) Weight per foot
of prequalifieation and design requirements for prequalified eonneetions shall (e) Flange thiekness
govern.
(f) Material speeifieation

P2. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS (g) Span-to':'depth ratio (for SMF IMF), or link length (for EBF)
P2.1. Basis for Prequalification (h) Width thiekness ratio of erc,sS!-·se(:tton elements
Conneetions shall be prequalified based on test data satisfying Seetion P3, sup-
(i) Lateral braeing
ported by analytieal studies and design models. The,eombined body of evidenee
for prequalifieation must be sufficient to assure that the eonneetion can supply (j) Other :parameters to the speeifie conneetion under
the required interstory drift angle for SMF and IMF systems, or the required eonsideration
link rotation angle for EBF, on a eonsistent and reliable basis within the speei-
(2) Column parameters:
fied limits of prequalifieation. All applieable limit states for the eonneetion that
affeet the stiffness, strength and deformation eapacity of the eonneetion and the (a) Cross-seetion shape: wide box, or other
seismic load resisting system (SLRS) must be identified. These include fracture
(b) Cross-seetion fabrieation . rolled shape, welded shape, or other
related limit states, stability related limit states, and all other limit states perti-
nent for the eonneetion under eonsideration. The effeet of design variables listed (e) Colurnrt orientation with to beam or link: beam oí link is eon-
in Seetion P4 shall be addressed for eonneetion prequalifieation. nected to eolumn flange, or link is eonneeted to eolumn web,
Authority for Prequalification beams or links are to both the eolurnh flange and web,
P2.2.
Prequalifieation of a eonneetion and the assoeiated limits of prequalifieation or other
shall be established by a eonneetion prequalifieation review panel (CPRP) ap- (d) Depth
proved by the authority having jurisdiction.
(e) Weight per foot

P3. TESTING REQUIREMENTS (f) Flange thickness

Data used to support conneetion prequalifieation shall be based on tests eon-
(g) Material specifieation
dueted in aeeordanee with Appendix S. The CPRP shall determine the number
of tests and the variables eonsidered by the tests for eonneetion prequalifieation. (h) Width-thiekness ratio of crc,ss-·se(:tton elements
The CPRP shall also provide the same information when limits are to be ehanged
for a previously prequalified eonneetion. A suffieient number of tests shall be
performed on a suffieient number of nonidentieal speeimens to demonstrate that

Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, March 9,2005, incl. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CoNSTRUcrrON, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE oÍ' STEEL <rolNSTlmC:l1oN, !Nc.
6.1-64 PART 1 - PREQUALIFICATION OF CONNECTIONS [App.P. App.P.] PARTI- ~'-'-''Yvru.,'Ü '~''--n..~ H.,'lN OF CONNECTIONS 6.1-6:

(i) Lateral bracing (c) Weld reinforcement or cOIltOlmrlg

G) Other parameters pertinent to the specific connection under (d) Presence of holes, fasteners welds for attachments
consideration
(8) Additional.connection details: variables pertinent to the specific connec-
(3) Beam (or link:~olumn relations: tion under consideration, as by the CPRP
(a) Panel zone strength
P5. DESIGN PROCEDURE
(b) Doubler plate attachment details
A comprehensive design procedure be available for a prequalified connec-
(c) Column-beam (or link:) moment ratio tion. The design procedure must all applicable limit states within the
limits of prequalification.
(4) Continuity plates:
(a) Identification of conditions under which continuity plates are required P6. PREQUALIFICATION R"---L.o"~r1I ••
(b) Thickness, width and depth A prequalified connection shall be TlrclV1l1p.t1 with a written prequalification
record with the following information:
(c) Attachment detaiIs
(1) General description of the pre~qu;a1Uied connection and drawings that dearly
(5) WeIds:
identify key features and of the connection
(a) Location, extent (induding returns), type (CJP, PIP, fillet, etc.) and any
(2) Description of the expected of the connection in the elastic and
reinforcement or contouring required
inelastic ranges of behavior, ~U""'''r-.'"'u location(s) of inelastic action, and a
(b) Filler metal dassification strength and notch toughness description of limit states the strength and deformation capacity
of the connection
(c) Details and treatment of weld backing and weld tabs
(3) Listing of systems for which c!oImectiC)fl is prequalified: SMF, IMF,
(d) Weld access holes: size, geometry and finish
orEBF
(e) Welding quality control and quality assurance beyond that described in
(4) Listing of limits for all pn:~qualij6.dlticm variables listed in Section P4
Section 18, induding the nondestructive testing (NDT) method, inspec-
tion frequency, acceptance criteria and documentation requirements (5) Listing of demand critical welds
(6) Bolts: (6) Definition of the region of the
cprmectHm that comprises the protected
zone
(a) Bolt diameter
(7) Detailed description of the design of()cedm-e for the connection, as required
(b) Bolt grade: ASTM A325, A490, or other
in Section P5
(c) Installation requirements: pretensioned, snug-tight, or other
(8) List of references of test reports,
reports and other publications that
(d) Hole type: standard, oversize, short-slot, long-slot, or other provided the basis for
(e) Hole fabrication method: drilling, punching, sub-punching and (9) Summary of quality control and assurance procedures
reaming, or other
(f) Other parameters pertinent to the specific connection under
consideration
(7) Workmanship: All workmanship parameters that exceed AISC, RCSC and
AWS requirements, pertinent to the specific connection under consideration,
such as:
(a) Surface roughness of thermal cut or ground edges
(b) Cutting tolerances

Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, 9, 2005, mcl. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcrrON, lNe. AMEruCAN INSTITUTE OF S1EEL Cot~STR:UcrION, lNc.
 App.Q.]
6.1-66 PART 1 - QUALITY .M.~''>I-'''V1o.1''\..-.c, PLAN 6.1-6~

APPENDIX Q (6) Manufacturer's product data
GMAW cdmposite (cored)
describe the product, limitations
QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN parameters, and storage and
applicable. '
or catalog data for SMAW, FCAWane
metals to be used. The data sheets shall
use, recommended or typical welding
requirements, including baking, ii

The following documents shall be av¿U!able for review by the engineer of record
or designee prior to fabrication or as applicable, unless specified to be

~~?:c~ntrol (QC) and quality assurance (QA) shall be provided as specified

Q1. submitted:
(1) Material test reports for
in this Section. steel, bolts, shear connectors, and weld-
ing materials

Q2. INSPECTION ANO NONOESTRUCTIVE TESTING (2) Inspection procedures

PERSONNEL (3) Nonconformance procedure
Visual welding inspection and nondestructive testing (~DT) .shall be ;onduct~
in accordance with a written practice by personnel quallfied m accor ance Wl (4) Material control procedure

AppendixW. (5) Bolt installation procedure

(6) Welder performance qualification

(WPQR), including any supple-
mental testing requirements
(7) QC Inspectór qualifications

Bolting inspection shall be conducted in accordance with a written practice by

QUALITV ASSURANCE ENCY OOCUMENTS
qualified personnel. The agency responsible for quality aSj,ttroam~e shall submit the following docu-
ments to the authority having . the engineer of record, and the owner
Q3. CONTRACTOR OOCUMENTS . or owner's designee:
The following documents shall be submi.tted for rev~ew by. the engmeer of record
(1) QA agency's written practices for monitoring and control ofthe agency's
or designee, prior to fabrication or erectlOn, as apphcable.
operations. The written practice include:
(1) Shop drawings
(a) The agency's procedures for selection and administration of inspec-
(2) Erection drawings tion personnel, describing the experience and examination re-
(3) Welding Procedure Specifications (WPS), which shall speci.fy all applicable quirements for qualification certification of inspection personnel,
essential variables of AWS D 1.1 and the following, as apphcable and

(a) power source (constant current or constant voltage) (b) The agency's inspection pf()tedUl~es. including general inspection,
material controls, and visual inspection
(b) for demand critical welds, electrode manufacturer and trade name
(2) Qualifications of management and personnel designated for the project
Co ies of the manufacturer's typical certificate of conformaIice for all elec-
(4) tr ~es fluxes and shielding gasses to be used. Certificates of conformance (3) Qualificationrecords for Inspectors NDT technicians designated for the
o , . t project
shall satisfy the applicable AWS A5 reqmremen s.
(5) For demand critical welds, applicable manufacturer's certi~cations that the (4) NDT procedures and equipment cWibr;atic)ll records for NDT to be per-
filler metal meets the supplemental notch toughness reqmrements, as ap- fonued and equipment to be used the project
licable. Should the filler metal manufacturer not supply ~uch supplemental (5) Daily or wee.kly inspection reports
~ertifications, the contractor shall have the necessary testmg performed and
(6) Nonconformance reports
provide the applicable test reports.

Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN lNSTITUTE OF STEEL CONsTRucrroN, lNe. AMERICAN lNSTITUTE OF STEEL COI~STImcnoN, mc.
 (App.Q. App.Q.] PART 1 - QUALITY n~,;)I1JrV\.l'n :t<. 6.1-69
PART 1 - QUAUTY ASSURANCE PLAN
6.1-68

Q5. INSPECTION POINTS ANO FREQUENCIES

Inspection points and frequencies of quality control (QC) and quality assurance
(QA) tasks and documentation for the seismic load resisting system (SLRS) shall
be as provided in the following tables.
The following entries are used in the tables:
Observe (O) _ The inspector shall observe these functions on a random, daily P/O** o
basis. Welding operations need not be delayed pending observations.
Perform (P) _ These inspections shall be performed prior to the final acceptance
of the item. Where a task is noted to be performed by both QC and QA, it shall
be permitted to coordinate the inspection function between QC and QA so that
Fit-up 01 Fillet Welds
the inspection functions need be performed by only one party. Where QA is to - Dimen~ions (alignment, gaps at root)
rely upon ínspection functions performed by QC, the approval of the engineer of - Clea~lIness (condition 01 steel surfaces)
P/O** o
- Tacklng (tack weld quality and location)
record and the authority having jurisdiction is required.
** Following p.erformance of this inspection be made by a g!ven welder, with the welder
Document (D) _The inspector shall prepare reports indicating that the work has ~emonstratlng adequate understanding of reqlJirelnenlts 01 skllls and tools to verify these
:Tssthe Perforl!l designation of this task shall be Observe, and the welder shall perlorm this
been performed in accordance with the contract documents. The report need not
th~ tas~~h~lt~: ~~:~~~~~od~:~~~eu~~~ts~;h ~~~e~s~~~
adequate performance of this task
has reestablished adequate assurance
provide detailed measurements for joint fit-up, WPS settings, completed welds, that the welder wlll perform the inspection tasks listed.
or other individual items listed in the Tables in Sections Q5.1, Q5.3, or Q5.4. For
shop fabrication, the report shall indicate the piece mark of the piece inspected.
For field work, the report shall indicate the reference grid lines and floor or Visual Inspection Tasks During Welding
elevation inspected. Work not in compliance with the contract documents and
whether the noncompliance has been satisfactorily repaired shall be noted in the
inspection reporto

Q5.1. Visual Welding Inspection

Visual inspection of welding shall be the primary method used to confirm that
the procedures, materials, and workmanship incorporated in construction are
those that have been specified and approved for the project. As a mínimum,
tasks shall be as follows:

Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, 9,2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 AMERICAN lNsTITUTE OF STEEL CO!l\I"sTRUCTION.lNe.
AMERICAN lNSTlTUTE OF STE.E.L CONSTRUCI10N, lNe.

~~~.. ~.~-------~---_.--------~"--~--~-_._.-~_.-.
6.1-70 PART 1 - QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN [App.Q. App.Q.]
6.1-71

QC QA and contains CJP groove shall be ultrasonically tested for

Visual Inspection Tasks After Welding
Task Doc. Task I Doc. discontinuities behind and to the fusion line of such welds.
Welds cleaned O O Any b~e metal dIslcon!tImlll~,es found within t/4 of the steel surface
Welder identification legible O O shall be accepted or on the basis of criteria of AWS D 1.1
Verify size, length, and location of weld~ . O O Table 6.2, where t is the of the part subjected to the through-
Visually inspect welds to acceptance entena
thickness strain.
Craek prohibition (d) Beam Cope andAccess Role
Weldlbase-metal fusion
Crater cross-seetion At welded splices and C01In~CtI(>ns, themially cut surfaces of beam
P D P D
Weld profiles copes and access holes shall tested using magnetic particle testing
Weldsize or penetrant testing, when flange thickness exceeds llh in.
Undereut (38 mm) for roUed shapes, or the web thickness exceeds llh in.
Porosity
(38 mm) for built-up shapes.
Plaeement of reinforeement fillets P D P D (e) Reduced Beam Section
Backing bars removed and weld tabs removed and
P D P D Magnetic particle testing shall
finished (if required) performed on any weld and adjacent
I Repair aetivities P P I D area of the reduced beam
(RBS) plastic hinge region that has
been repa,¡red by welding, or
the base metal of the RBS plastic hinge
region if a sharp notch has
Q5.2. Nondestructive Testing (NOn of Welds removed by grinding.
Nondestructive testing of welds shall be performed by quality assurance (f) Weld Tab Removal Sites
personnel.
Magnetic particle testing shall
performed on the end of welds from
(1) Procedures which the weld tabs have
removed, except for continuity pIate
weld tabs.
Ultrasonic testing shall be performed by QA according to the procedures
prescribed in Appendix W, Section W 4.1. (g) Reduction of Percentage of U l1~as.onlc Testing
Magnetic particle testing shall be perf?rmed by QA according to the proce- The amount of ultrasonic is permitted to be reduced if ap-
dures prescribed in Appendix W, SectIon W4.2. proved by the engineer of and the authority having jurisdic-
(2) Required NDT tion. The nondestructive rate for an individual welder or
welding operator may be to 25 percent, provided the reject
(a) k-Area NDT
rate is demonstrated to be 5 or less of the welds tested for
When welding of doubler plates, continuity plates, or stiffeners ?as the welder or welding A sampling of at least 40 completed
..c
been peuorme d'In the k-area, the web shall be tested for cracks
h 11' usmg
1d welds for a job shall be made such reduction evaluation. Reject
magnetIc. partIcle
. . (MT) . The MT inspection area s a mc u e
testIng rate is the number of welds rejectable defects divided
the k-area base metal within 3 in. (75 mm) of the weld. by the nuínber of welds For evaluating the reject rate of
continuous welds over 3 ft ( in length where the effective throat
(b) CJP Groove Weld NDT
thickness is 1 in. (25 mm) or each 12 in. (300 mm) incremeht or
Ultrasonic testing shall be performed on 100 percent of CJ~ gro~ve fraction thereof shall be as one weld. For evaluating the
. maten'als 51.
welds In 716 In.
• (8 mm) thick or greater. Ultrasomc
. , testIng reject rate on cOhtinuous welds over 3 ft (1 m) in length where the
in materials less than 5/i6 in. (8 mm) thick is not reqUlred. Magneuc effective throat thickness is than 1 in. (25 mm), each 6 in.
particle testing shall be performed on 25 percent of all beam-to-column (150 mm) of length or fraction shall be considered one weld.
CJP groove welds. (h) Reduction of Percentage of MaLgJ1lI~tIc Partic1e Testing
(c) Base Metal NDT for Lamellar Tearing andLaminations
The amount of MT on CJP welds is perrnitted to be reduced if
After joint completion, base metal thicke~ th~ 1. 1h in. (38 mm) approved by the engineer of and the authority having jurisdic-
10aded in tension in the through thickness drrectIon In te~ and comer tion. The MT rate for an welder or welding operator may be
joints, where the connected material is greater than 3¡4 m. (19 mm)
Seismic Provisions Jor Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions Jor Structural Steel Buildings, 9, 2005, ¡ncl. Supp1ement No. 1
AMERICAN rnsTITlITE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, !Nc.
AMERIcAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL COII/StI;mCI10N, lNc.
6.1-72 PART 1- QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN [App.Q.
App.Q.]
PARTI-QUALITYAS~Y'~"LGPLAN
6.1-7~
reduced to 10 percent, provided the reject rate is demonstrated to be
Q5.4. Other Inspections
5 percent or less of the welds tested for the welder or welding operator.
A sampling of at least 20 completed welds for a job shall be made for Where applicable, the fOllowing HlSpl~t:Lon
tasks shall be performed:
such reduction evaluation. Reject rate is the number of welds contain-
ing rejectable defects divided by the number of welds completed. This
reduction is not pennitted on welds in the k-area, at repair sites, weld
tab and backing removal sites and access holes.
(3) Documentation
All NDT performed shall be documented. For shop fabrication, the NDT
report shall identify the tested weld by piece mark and location in the piece.
For field work, fue NDT report shall identify the tested weld by locati~n in
the structure, piece mark, and location in the piece.

aS.3. Inspection of Bolting

Observation of bolting operations shall be the primary method used to confirm
that the procedures, materials, and workmanship incorporated in construction are
those that have been specified and approved for the project. As a minimum, the
tasks shall be as follows:

QC QA
Inspection Tasks Prior to Bolting
Task Doc. Task Doc.
Proper bolts selected for the joint detail O O
Proper bolting procedure selected for joint detail O O
Connecting elements are fabricated properly, including
the appropriate faying surface condition and hole O O
preparation, if specified, meets applicable requirements
Pre-installation verification testing conducted for fastener
P D O D
assemblies and methods used
Proper storage provided for bolts, nuts, washers, and
O O
other fastener components

QC QA
Inspection Tasks During Bolting
Task Doc. Task Doc.
Fastener assemblies placed in all holes and washers (if
O O
required) are properly positioned
Joint brought to the snug tight condition prior to the
O O
pretensioning operation
Fastener component not turned by the wrench prevented
O O
from rotating
Bolts are pretensioned progressing systematically from
most rigid point toward free edges
O O

QC
Inspection Tasks After Bolting
Task Doc. Task
Document accepted and rejected connections P D P

Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN !NsnruTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, !Nc. Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings,
9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMEruCAN !NSTlTlFIE OF STEEL Cm~STBluClI0N, !Ne.

--------------.._-_ _-----_.. .... ~.. -

 App. R.] COEFFICIENTS 6.1-75
6.1-74

R3. DESIGN COEFFICIENTS FACTORS FOR BASIC

APPENDIX R SEISMIC LOAD RESISTIN SYSTEMS
SEISMIC DESIGN COEFFICIENTS , TABLE 1
ANO Design Coefficients and "~·"""'-rs for Basic Seismic
APPROXIMATE PERIOO PARAMETERS Lqad Resisti Systems
Response
Basic Seismic
Modification IOVI!rstlrepSlthlt~mp>lification~~==~~~~~
Load Resisting
Coefficient
System
R
R1. SCOPE
This appendix contains design coefficients, system limitations and design pa- Buckling-Restrained Braced
rameters for seismic load resisting systems (SLRS) that are included in these Frames, non-moment-resisting
Provisions but not yet defined in the applicable building code for buckling-re- beam-column connections
strained bracedframes (BRBF) and special plate shear walls (SPSW). The val-
ues presented in Tables R3-1 and R4-1 in this appendix shall only be used where Buckling-Restrained Braced
Frames, moment-resisting 8 NL 160 160 100
neither the applicable building code nor SEIIASCE 7 contain such values. beam-column connections
Dual Systems with Special Moment at Least 25%
ofthe
Buckling-Restrained Braced
8 NL NL NL NL
Frame

Special Plate Shear Walls 8 NL NL NL NL

(NL =Not Limited)

R2. SYMBOLS
The following symbols are used in this appendix. PERIOD PARAMETERS
Cd Deflection amplification factor
C x Parameters used for determining the approximate fundamental period 1
n
Parameters C, and X
no System overstrengthfactor
R Response modification coefficient

Seismic Provisionsfor Strubtural Steel Buildings, 9,2005, inel. Supplement No. 1

Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 AMER.ICAN INSTITUTE OF STBEL C01'ljmlUC110N, INc.
AMERICAN INsnTUTE OF STEEL CONSTRucnON,INC.

---.----------------------"-"~-----_._-~-_. __ ._--_._._--------~_.-
 App.S.] PART 1 - QUALIFYING CYCLIC
6.1-76 OF CONNECTIONS 6.1-77

Prototype. The connections, member

APPENDIX S detailing, and construction features
steel properties, and other design
be used in the actual building frame. '
Test specimen. A portion of a frarne
QUALIFYING CYCLIC TESTS OF BEAM-TO-COLUMN el the prototype.
for laboratory testing, intended to mod-

ANO LINK-TO-COLUMN CONNECTIONS

Test setup. The supporting fixtures, equipment, and lateral bracing used
to support and load the test spe:CInlen.
Test subassemblage. The combination
of the test setup. the test specimen and pertinent portions
S1. SCOPE
This appendix ineludes requirements for qualifying cyelic tests of beam-to- Total link rotation angle. The relative IfIlsplalCelneJllt
'1' of one end of the link with
column moment connections in special and intermediate moment frames and respect to the .other end (measured tlrans,ren:p. to the longitudinal axis of the
link-to-column connections in eccentrically braced frames, when required in un detionned link), divided by the 1 th
shall inelude both elastic and . eng . The total link: rotation angle
these Provisions. The purpose of the testing described in this appendix is to pro-
and the members attached to the e:~:ponents of defonnation of the link
vide evidence that a beam-to-column connection or a link-to-column connection
satisfies the requirements for strength and interstory drift angle or link rotation
angle in these Provisions. Alternative testing requirements are permitted when S4.
approved by the engineer of record and the authority having jurisdiction. elosely as is practical the conditions
This appendix provides mínimum recornmendations for simplified test conditions. loading. The test subassem-

The test specimen shall consist of 1east a single column with beams or
S2. SYMBOLS links attached to one or both sides the column. .
The numbers in parentheses after the definition of a symbol refers to the Section
number in which the symbol is first used. (2) Points of inflection in the test ass,err~bljige
the anticipated points of inflection shall coincide approximately with
e Interstory drift angle (S6) the Prototype under earthquake loading.
(3) Lateral bracing of the test sut)as:)~nlblia1!e
"ftotal Total link rotation angle (S6) cation or reaction points as .IS permitted near load. appli-
to provlde lateral stability of the test
subassemblage.
. Additional bracing of the test subassemblage
S3. DEFINITIONS IS not permitted, unless it 1ateral bracing to be used in the
Complete loading cycle. A cyele of rotation taken from zero force to zero force, prototype.
ineluding one positive and one negative peak.
Interstory drift angle. Interstory displacement divided by story height, radians.
ss. ESSENTIAL TEST VARIAB
The test specimen shall replicate as as is practical the pertinent design,
Inelastic rotation. The permanent or plastic portion of the rotation angle between detailing, construction features, and properties of the prototype. The
a beam and the column or between a link and the column of the test specimen; following variables shall be replicated in test specimen.
measured in radians. The inelastic rotation shall be computed based on aIi
analysis of test specimen deforrnations. Sources of inelastic rotation inelude Sources of Inelastic Rotat
yielding of members, yielding of connection elements and connectors, and Inelastic rotation shall be d 1 d'
the same members and eve ?pe m test specimen by inelastic action in
slip between members and connection elements. For beam-to-column mo- connectlon f' d .
other words, in the beam or link in th as an lclpate 1~ the prototype (in
ment connections in special and intermediate moment frames, inelastic ro- side of the 1 .' e panel zone, m the cohirnn out-
tation is computed based upon the assumption that inelastic action is con- b 1 Th pane ~one, or m connection elements) within the limits described
centrated at a single point located at the intersection of the centerline of the e ow. e percentage of the total . . .
developed in each b rotation m the test specimen that is
beam with the centerline of the column. For link-to-column connections in of the ti" d mem er or element shall be within 25· percent
eccentrically bracedframes, inelastic rotation shall be computed based upon an clpate . percentage . l' '.
. d' me astic rotation In the ·pro.to-
the assumption that inelastic action is concentrated at a single point located at;: type th at IS eveloped m the {'ol:Te~;poifidl:im! .
~. member or connection elemento
the intersection of the centerline of the link with the face of the colurnn.

Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, ¡nel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN lNsTITUTE OF STEEL CONsTRUcnON, lNc. AMERICAN lNS'ITIUIE OF STEEL COl~$TIl~UC1lON. INc.
 PART 1 - QUALIFYING CYCLlC TESTS OF CONNECTlONS [App.S. App.S.]
6.1-78 PART I - QUALlFYING CYCLIC OF CONNECTIONS 6.1-7~

55.2. 5ize of Members .. f 11 _ 55.6. Welds

The size of the beam or link used in the test specimen shall be wlthin the o ow Welds on the test specimen shall
ing limits:
(1) Welding shall be performed in conformance with Welding Proce-
(1) The depth of the test beam or link shall be no less than 90 percent of the dure Specifications (WPS) as in AWS .D 1.1. The WPS essential
depth of the prototype beam or link. variables shall meet the recluu·errljents
(2) The weight per foot of the test beam or link shall. be no less than 75 percent parameters established by the manufacturero The tensile strength
of the weight per foot of the prototype beam or lmk. of the welds used in the tested and the Charpy V-Notch (CVN)
toughness used in the tested shall be determined by material
The size of the column used in the test spe~::e:~:n P;~~t~:~ ;~~;~~:n:d~i~ tests as specified in Section S8 . The use of tensi¡e strength and CVN
inelastic action in the column, as pealr ~e req 1 than 90 percent of the depth of toughness values that are on the manufacturer's typical certificate
tion, the depth of the test column sh e no ess
of conformance is not permitted to be used for purposes of this section,
the prototype column. . unless the report includes results to Appendix X requirements.
. ... ted in this Section shall be permltted
Extrapolation beyond the ~nrutah;ns sta al by the authority having jurisdiction. (2) The specifiéd minimum tensile
of the filler metal used for the test
subject to qualified peer reV1ew an approv specimen shall be the same as to be used for the corresponding proto-
type welds. The tested tensile of the test specimen weld shall not be
55.3. Connection Details e
more than 25 ksi (125 MPa)
The connechon. d · ls use d in the test specimen shall represent the prototyp
etal d in the the tensile strength c1assification of the
filler metal specification
connection details· as closely as possible. The connection ele~ents :;nts used the prototype.
.
test speclmen shall be a full-scale representation of the connechon ele (3) The specified minimum CVN
of the filler metal used for the test
in the prototype, for the member sizes being tested. specimen shall not exceed the minimum CVN toughness of the
filler metal to be used for the prototype welds. The tested
55.4.
Con.tinu~tY Pla!:: details of continuity plates used in the test spe~im~n CVN toughness of the test weld shall not be more than 50 percent,
The Slze an co~ecd t h the size and connection details of contmUlty nor 25 ft-lb (34 kJ), whichever is above the minimum CVN tough-
shall be propomone to ma c . ness that wilI be specified for the
plates used in the prototype connection as closely as posslble.
(4) The welding positions used to
the welds on the test specimen shall be
55.5. Material 5trength . .sfied for each member or con- the same as those to be used for prototype welds.
The ~Ollowl. atddfittihOenalte::;pu:c:::~t~s~~~~:l~:~ inelastic rotation by yielding:
ing
nechon e emen o
(5) Details of weld backing, weld
access holes, and similar items used
for the test specimen welds shall the same as those to be used for the
(1) The yield stress shall be determin~d by ~ateri~ tests ~h:::ec~~~i::t:::!: correspondi:qg prototype welds. backing and weld tabs shall not be
used for the test specimen, as speclfied m SectlOn S8. ·tt d to be removed from the test specimen unless the corresponding weld back-
values that are reported on certified mill test reports are not perml e ing and weld tabs are removed the prototype welds.
used for purposes of this Section.
(6) Methods of inspection and
. f th b shall not be more than 15 percent below RyFy testing and standards of accep-
(2) The yleld stress o e eam f the proto tance used for test specimen welds be the same as those to be used for
for the grade of steel to be used for the corr~sponding:l~~~n:~~ss shall no~ the prototype welds.
type Columns and connection elements Wlth a teste yle d f tIto be
be ~ore than 15 percent above or below RyFy for the gra e o s
used for the corresponding elements of the prototype. RyFyshall b
e:
deter-
S5.7. Bolts
The bolted portions of the test specimen replicate the bolted portions of the
mined in accordance with Section 6.2. prototype connec~ion as c10sely as pOSSl Additionally, bolted portions of the
test specimen shall satisfy the following
(1) Thebolt grade (for example,
ASTM F1852) used in the test shall be the same as that to be
used for the prototype, except that A325 bolts may be substituted for
ASTM F1852 bolts, and vice versa.

Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005~nel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, 9,2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN rnsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, c.
AMERICAN lNSTlTIJTE OF STEEL CmvsTR:uCTION, INe.
 PART 1 - QUALIFYING CYCLlC TESTS OF CONNECTIONS [App.S. App. S.] PART 1 - QUALIFYING CYCLlC
6.1-80 OF CONNECTIONS 6.1-81

(2) The type and orientation of bolt holes (standard, oversize, short slot, long S6.3. Loading Sequence for Lin.v-ILIUO-L.<... ·Iumn Connections
slot, or other) used in the test specimen shall be the same as those to be used Qualifying cyclic ,tests of link moment connections in eccentrically
for the corresponding bolt holes in the prototype. braced frames shall be conducted by the total link rotation angle,
"(10101, imposed on the test specimen, as
(3) When inelastic rotation is to be developed either by yielding or by slip
within a bolted portion of the connection, the method ~sed to make th~ bolt (1) 6 cycles at "(10101 = 0.00375 rad
holes (drilling, sub-punching and reaming, or other) m the test spe~lmen
(2) 6 cycles at "(tolal = 0.005 rad
shall be the same as that to be used in the corresponding bolt holes m the
prototype. (3) 6 cycles at "(tolal = 0.0075 rad
(4) Bolts in the test specimen shall have the same installation (pretensioned or (4) 6 cycles at "(Iotal = 0.01 rad
other) and faying surface preparation (no specified slip resistance, Class A
(5) 4 cycles at "(iolal = 0.015 rad
or B slip resistance, or other) as that to be used for the corresponding bolts
in the prototype. (6) 4 cycles at "(Iotal = 0.02 rad
(7) 2 cycles at "(10101 = 0.03 rad
S6. LOADING HISTORV (8) 1 cycle at "(tolal = 0.04 rad
S6.1. General Requirements . ' (9)
The test specimen shall be subjected to cyclic loads according to the req~lfe­ 1 cycle at "(tolal = 0.05 rad
ments prescribed in Section S6.2 for beam-to-column moment con~ectlOns (10) 1 cycle at 'Ylolal = 0.07 rad
in special and intermediate moment frames, and accordin~ to ~e reqU1re~ents
(11) 1 cycle at 'Ylolal = 0.09 rad
prescribed in Section S6.3 for link-to-column connecnons m eccentrzcally
braced frames. Continue loading at increments of 'Ytotal = 02 radian, with one cycle of loading
at each step.
Loading sequences other than those specified in Sections S6.2 and S?3 may be
used when they are demonstrated to be of equivalent or greater seventy.
S7. INSTRUMENTATION
S6.2. Loading Sequence for Beam-to-Co_lumn Sufficient instrumentation shall be UL\'/v",n:.u on the test specimen to permit
Moment Connections measurement or calculation of the listed in Section S9.
Qualifying cyclic tests of beam-to-column moment connections in special and
intermediate moment frames shall be conducted by controlling the interstory S8.
drift angle, S, imposed on the test specimen, as specified below: S8.1. Tension Testing Requir.::unA'....... C! for Structural Steel
(1) 6 cycles at S = 0.00375 rad Tension testing shall be conducted on of steel taken from the mate-
rial adjacent to each test specimen. results from certified mill test
(2) 6 cycles at S = 0.005 rad
reports shall be reported but are not to be used in place of specimen
(3) 6 cycles at S =0.0075 rad testing for the purposes of this Section. -test results shall be based upon
testing that is conducted in accordance Section S8.2. Tension testing shall
(4) 4 cycles at S = 0.01 rad
be conducted and reported for the portions of the test specimen:
(5) 2 cycles at S = 0.015 rad
(1) Flange(s) and web(s) of beams and at standard locations
(6) 2 cycles at S = 0.02 rad (2) Any element of the connectionthat inelastic rotation by yielding
(7) 2 cycles at S = 0.03 rad
S8.2. Methods of Tension Testing
(8) 2 cycles at S = 0.04 rad Tension testlng shall be conducted in acc:qr(lan1ce with ASTM A6/A6M, ASTM
Continue loading at increments of S = 0.01 radian, with two cycles of loading A370, and ASTM E8, with the following ejXoeptl.ons
at each step. (1) The yield stres$, F y , that is reported the test shaIl be based upon the
yield strength definition in ASTM using the offset method at 0.002
strain.

Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTmJTE OF STEEL Cor~$:Ucrl0N, !Nc.
 [App. S. App.S.] PART 1 - QUALIFYING CYCLIC
PART 1 - QUALIFYING CYCLIC TESTS OF CONNECTIONS OF CONNECTIONS 6.1-83

(2) The loading rate for the tension test shall replicate, as elosely as practical, (9) The inte~story drift angle and total inelastic rotation developed by the
the loading rate to be used for the test specimen. test s~eclm~n. Th~ components of the test specimen contributing to the
t?tal melastIc ro~tIon ~ue to' or slip shall be identified. The por-
Weld Metal Testing Requirements tIon of ~e total melastIc contributed by each component of the
The tensile strength of the welds ~sed in the tested assembly and the CVN tough- test ~peclmen shall be The method used to compute inelastic
ness used in the tested assembly shall be determined by material tests as specified in rotatIons shall be elearly shown.
Appendix X. The use of tensile strength and CVN toughness values that are re-
(10) A chronologicallisting of slgnifi~ant test observations, ineluding observa-
ported on the manufacturer's typical certificate of conformance is not permitted
to be used for purposes of this section, unless that report ineludes results specific tions of yielding, slip, and fracture of any portion of the test
specimen as applicable.
to Appendix X requirements.
(11) The controlling failure mode for test specimen. If the test is terminated
A single test plate may be used if the WPS for the test specimen welds is within
plus/minus 20 kJ/in. (0.8 kJ/mm) of the WPS for the test plateo prior to failure, the reason for the test shall be elearly indicated.

Tensile specimens and CVN specimens shall be prepared in accordance with (12) The results of the material tests sPt:~cified in Section S8.
ANSIIAWS B4.0 Standard Methodsfor Mechanical Testing ofWelds. (13) The Welding Procedure (WPS) and welding inspection
reports.
TEST REPORTING REQUIREMENTS
Additional drawings, data, and als,cm;sltm of the test specimen or test results are
For each test specimen, a written test report meeting the requirements of the
permitted to be ineluded in the reporto
authority having jurisdiction and the requirements of this Section shall be pre-
pared. The report shall thoroughly document all key features and results of the
S10. ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
test. The report shall inelude the following information:
The test specimen must satisfy the and interstory drift angle or link
(1) A drawing or elear description of the test subassemblage, ineluding key rotation angle requirements of these P1I'ov'isÍl1ns ¡:lor thespecial moment frame,
dimensions, boundary conditions at loading and reaction points, and location intermediate moment frame, or braced frame connection, as appli-
of lateral braces. cable. The test specimen must sustain required interstory drift angle or link
(2) A drawing of the connection detail showing member sizes, grades of steel, rotation angle for at least one complete cyele.
the sizes of all connection elements, welding d~tails ineluding filler metal,
the size and location of bolt holes, the size and grade of bolts, and all other
pertinent details of the connection.
(3) A listing of all other essential variables for the test specimen, as listed in
Section S5.
(4) A listing or plot showing the applied load or displacement history ofthe test
specimen.
(5) A listing of all demand critical welds.
(6) Definition of the region of the connection that comprises the protected
zones.
(7) A plot of the applied load versus the displacement of the test specimen. The
displacement reported in this plot shall be measured at or near the point of
load application. The locations on the test §pecimen where the loads and
displacements were measured shall be elearly indicated.
(8) A plot of beam moment versus interstory drift angle for beam-to-column
moment connections; or a plot of link shear force versus link rotation angle
for link-to-column connections. For beam-to-column connections, the beam
moment and the interstory drift angle shall be computed with respect to the
centerline of the column.
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9,2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, 9,2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnoN, INc. AMERICAN INSlTIUrE OF S'mEL Co~~sn~ucrl0N, lNe.
 App. T.]
6.1-84 6.1-8~

APPENDIXT Inelastic deformation. The pelmamellt or plastic portion of the axial displace.
ment in a buckling-restrained

QUALIFYING CYCLIC TESTS Prototype. The brace, connections, m~mb'ers, steel properties, and other design
OF BUCKLING-RESTRAINED BRACES detailing, and construction to be used in the actual building frame.
Subassemblage test specimen. The of the brace, the connectiom
and testing apparatus that as elosely as practical the axial and flexo
ural deformations of the brace in prototype.

T1. SCOPE Test specimen. Brace test specimen subassemblage test specimen.
This appendix ineludes requirements for qualifying cyelic tests of individual
buckling-restrained braces and buckling-restrained brace subassemblages, when T4.
required in these provisions. The purpose of the testing of individual braces is The subassemblage test specimen satisfy the following requirements:
to provide evidence that a buckling-restrained brace satisfies the requirements
(1) The mechanism for inelastic rotation in the subassemblage
for strength and inelastic deformation by these provisions; it also permits the
test specimen brace shall be the as that of the prototype. The rotational
determination of maximum brace forces for design of adjoining elements. The
deformation demands on the test specimen brace shall be
purpose of testing of the brace subassemblage is to provide evidence that the
equal to or greater than those of prototype.
brace-design can satisfactorily accornmodate the deformation and rotational de-
mands associated with the designo Further, the subassemblage test is intended (2) The axial yield strength of the core, Pyse , of the brace in the subassem-
to demonstrate that the hysteretic behavior of the brace in the subassemblage is blage test specimen shall not be than that of the prototype where both
consistent with that of the individual brace elements tested uniaxially. strengths are based on the core Ase, multiplied by the yield strength as
determined' from a coupon test.
Alternative testing requirements are permitted when approved by the engineer of
record and the authority having jurisdiction. (3) The cross-sectional shape and of the steel core projection of the
subassemblage test specimen shall be the same as that of the brace in
This appendix provides only minimum recommendations for simplified test
the prototype.
conditions.
(4) The same documented design shall be used for design of the
T2. SYMBOLS subassemblage as used for the to allow comparison of the rota-
The numbers in parentheses afier the definition of a symbol refers to the Section tional deformation demands on subassemblage brace to the prototype.
number in which the symbol is first used. In stability calculations, beams, , and gussets connecting the core
shall be considered parts of this
~ Deformation quantity used to control loading of the test ,specimen (total
b .al (5) The calculated margins of safety
brace end rotation for the subassemblage test specimen; total brace aXI the prototype connection design, steel
deformation for the brace test specimen) (T6). core projection stability, overall and other relevant subassemblage
test specimen brace construction exeluding the gusset plate, for the
~bm Value of deformation quantity, ~b, corresponding to the design story drift prototype, shall equal or exceed of the subassemblage test specimen
(T6). construction.
~by Value of deformation quantity, ~b, at first significant yield of test specimen (6) Lateral bracing of the su test specimen shall replicate the lat-
(T6). eral bracing in the prototype.
(7) The brace test specimen and the shall be manufactured in accordance
T3. DEFINITIONS
with the same quality control and processes and procedures.
Brace test specimen. A single buckling-restrained brace element used for labora-
tory testing intended to model the brace in the Prototype. Extrapolation beyond the limitations in this section shall be permitted sub-
ject to qualified peer review and by the authority having jurisdiction.
Design methodology. A set of step-by-step procedures, based on ca1culation or
experiment, used to determine sizes, lengths, anddetails in the design ofbuckling-
restrained braces and their connections.

Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for S,ructural Steel Buildings, 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1
AMERIcAN lNSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, INc. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL C1or~STll'UCIloN,INC.
 PART 1 - QUALIFYING CYCLIC TESTS OF BRB [App. T. App. T.]
6.1-86 PART 1 - QUALIFYING
6.1-8~

T5. BRACE TEST SPECIMEN . (b) The measured yield stress the material of the steel core in the brac{
The brace test specimen shall replicate as elosely as is practical the pertment de- test specimen shall be at 90 percent of that of the prototype a~
sign, detailing, construction features, and material properties of the prototype. determined from coupon

T5.1. Design of Brace Test Specim.en . . (c) The specified minimum stress and strain of the brace tes1
The same documented design methodology shall be used for the brace test sp~c~­ specimen steel core shaIl
men and the prototype. The design calculations shall demonstrate, at a mlID- (2)
mum, the following requirements:
(1) The calculated margin of safety for stability against overall buckling for the
Materials used in the bU(~ktmg-testriammg mechanism of the brace test
prototype shall equal or exceed that of the brace test specimen. used in the prototype.
T5.6. Connections
(2) The calculated margins of safety for the brace test specimen and the proto-
type shall account for differences in material properties, inc1uding yield and The welded, bolted, and pinned joints the test specimen shaIl replicate those
ultimate stress, ultimate elongation, and toughness. on the prototype as elose as practica!.

T5.2. Manufacture of Brace Test Specimen T6. LOADING HISTORY

The brace test specimen and the prototype shall be manufactured in accordance T6.1. General Requirements
with the same quality control and assurance processes and procedures.
The test specimen shall be subjected cyclic loads according to the require-
T5.3. Similarity of Brace Test Speci~en a~d Prototype ments prescribed in Sections T6.2 T6.3. Additional increments of loading
The brace test specimen shall meet the followmg reqmrements: beyond those described in Section T6. are permitted. Each cyele shall inelude a
fuIl tension and fuIl compression exc:mts:lOn to the prescribed deformation.
(1) The cross-sectional shape and orientation of the steel core shall be the same
as that of the prototype.
T6.2. Test Control
The test shaIl be conducted by ~V'''''''-'''~U''ó the level ofaxial or rotational defor-
(2) The axial yield strength of the steel core, PySC ' of the brace test specimen
mation, d b , imposed on the test As an alternate, the maximum rota-
shall not vary by more than 50 percent from that of the protot~pe where both
tional deformation may be applied maintained as the protocol is foIlowed
strengths are based on the core area, ASe> multiplied by the yleld strength as for axial deformation.
determined from a coupon test.
T6.3. Loading Sequence
(3) The material for, and method of, separation between the steel core and the
Loads shall be applied to the test spe:c~nlen to produce the foIlowing deforma-
buckling restraining mechanism in the brace test specimen shall be the same
tions, where the deformation is the axial deformation for the test speci-
as that in the prototype.
men and the rotational deformation for the subassemblage test specimen
Extrapolation beyond the limitations stated in this section shall be p~~it~ed. sub- brace:
ject to qualified peer review and approval by the authority having jUrLsdzctzon.
(1) 2 cyeles of loading at the detorrnatíon corresponding to d b =d by
T5.4. Connection Details (2) 2 cycles of loading at the corresponding to d b =0.504bm
The connection details used in the brace test specimen shall represent the proto-
type connection details as elosely as practical. (3) 2 cycles of loading at the corresponding to d b = ldbm
(4) 2 cyeles of loading at the corresponding to d b = l.5dbm
T5.5. Materials
(1) Steel core: The following requirements shall be satisfied for the steel core (5) 2 cyeles of loading at the corresponding to d b =2.0dbm.
of the brace test specimen:
(6) Additional complete cycles of at the deformation corresponding to
(a) The specified minimum yield stress of the brace test specimen steel d b = 1.5dbm as required for the test specimen to achieve a cumulative
core shall be the same as that of the prototype. inelastic axial deformation of at 200 times the yield deformation (not
required for the subassemblage specimen).

Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, 9,2005, incl. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN lNs1lTUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, lNc.
AMEipCAN lNsnTIJTE OF STEEL c,.qNS'I"RU<::TION, lNc.
 App. T.] TESTSOFBRB
PART 1 - QUALIFYING CYCLIC TESTS OF BRB [App. T. 6.1-89
6.1-88

(5) A plot of the applied load versus deformation, tob. The method used to
The design story drift shall not be taken as less than 0.01 times the story height
determine the defonnations shall c1e~ly shown. The locations on the test
for the purposes of calculating tobm' Other loading sequences are permitted to be specimen where the loads and were measured shall be c1early
used to qualify the test specimen when they are demonstrated to be of equal or identified.
greater severity in terms of maximum and cumulative inelastic deformation.
(6) A chronologicallisting of Slgrut:JIQaJlt
tions of yi~lding, slip, . test observations, including observa-
INSTRUMENTATION transverse displacement along the test
T7. specimen and fracture of any
Sufficient instrumentation shall be provided on the test specimen to permit mea- of th e test specimen and connections,
surement or calculation of the quantities listed in Section T9. as applicable.
(7) spt~ci1jed in Section T8.
T8. MATERIALS TESTING REQUIREMENTS
(8) The manufacturing quality and quality assurance plans used for the
T8.1. Tension Testing Requirements fabrication of the test specimen.
Tension testing shall be conducted on samples of steel taken from the same ma- 'fi' . shall.be inc1uded with the welding
procedure specl catlOns and mspectlOn reports.
terial as that used to manufacture the steel coreo Tension test results from certi-
fied mill test reports shall be reported but are not permitted to be used in place Additional drawings, data, and OlS:cUissítm of the test specimen or test results are
of specimen testing for the purposes of this Section. Tension-test results shall be permitted to be inc1uded in the reporto
based upon testing that is conducted in accordance with Section T8.2.
T10. ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
T8.2. Methods of Tension Testing At least one subassemblage test that the requirements of Section T4
Tension testing shall be conducted in accordance with ASTM A6, ASTM A370, shall be perfonned. At least one brace that satisfies the requirements of Sec-
and ASTM E8, with the following exceptions: tion T5, shall be perfonned. Within required protocol range all tests shall
(1) The yield stress that is reported from the test shall be based upon the yield satisfy the following requirements:
strength definition in ASTM A370, using the offset method of 0.002 strain.
(1) The plot showing the applied vs. displacement history shall exhibit
(2) The loading rate for the tension test shall replicate, as closely as is practical, stable, repeatable behavior with . incremental stiffness.
the loading rate used for the test specimen. (2) There shall be no fracture, brace lIl$tabilitv or brace end connection failure.
(3) The coupon shall be machined so that its longitudinal axis is parallel to the
(3) For brace tests, each cyc1e to a ...
rle1:prrnation
' greater than Llby the maximum
longitudinal axis of the steel coreo tension and compression forces b
of the coreo . not e les s than the nominal strength

T9. TEST REPORTING REQUIREMENTS

For each test specimen, a written test report meeting the requirements of this t1ttt~orrnati'cm greater than Llby the ratio of
(4) For brace tests, each cyc1e to a ~.
Section shall be prepared. The report shall thoroughly document all key features the maximum compression force the maximum tension force shall not
and results of the test. The report shall include the following information: exceed 1.3. '

(l) A drawing or clear description of the test specimen, including key dimen- Other acceptance criteria may be ~ the brace test specimen or subas-
lor
sions, boundary conditions at loading and reaction points, and location of semblage test specimen subject to quawled
authority having jurisdiction. peer review and approval by the
lateral bracing, if any.
(2) A drawing of the connection details showing member sizes, grades of steel,
the sizes of all connection elements, welding details including filler metal,
the size and location of bolt or pin holes, the size and grade of connectors,
and all other pertinent details of the connections.
(3) A listing of all other essential variables as listed in Section T4 or T5, as
appropriate.
(4) A listing or plot showing the applied load or displacement history.

Seismic Provisions Jor St~uctural Steel Buildings, 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
Seismic ProvisionsJor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL C01~STItuC110N. lNe.
AMERICAN INs1'I1UfE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, INc.
6.1-90
App. w.] PART 1 - WELDING nn'¡-"UTC'Tr"'TC'
6.1-91

APPENDIXW (3) Locations where weld tabs are to

(4) NDT to be performed by the rabncl~tor, if any
WELDING PROVISIONS
W2.3. Erection Orawings
Erection drawings shall inelude, as a mí~n[lUln, the following information:
(1) Locations where backing bars to belreIlnmred

W1. SCOPE (2) Locations where supplemental are required when backing is permit-
This appendix provides additional details regarding welding and welding inspee- ted to remain
tion, and is included on an interim basis pending adoption of sueh eriteria by (3) Locations where weld tabs are to
AWS or other aeeredited organization.
(4) Those joints or groups of joints in a specific assembly order, welding
W2. STRUCTURAl.OESIGN ORAWINGS ANO sequence, welding technique or special precautions are required
SPECIFICATIONS, SHOPORAWINGS, ANO
ERECTION ORAWINGS W3. PERSONNEL
W2.1. Structurai Oesign Orawlngs and Specifications W3.1. QC Welding Inspectors
Struct~al design drawings arid specifications shall inelude, as a minimum, the QC welding inspection personnel shall associate welding inspectors (AWI)
following information: or higher, as definect in AWS B5.1 .)ra'YlaJ~raJo¡ the Qualification ofWelding In-
spectors, or otherwise qualified under of AWS D1.1 Section 6.1.4
(1) Locations where backup bars ate required to be removed
and to the satisfaction of the contractor's
(2) Loeations where supplemenhll fillet welds are required when baeking is W3.2.
permitted to remain
QA Welding Inspectors
QA welding inspectors shall be welding inslpecitors (WI), or senior welding in-
(3) Loeations where fillet welds are used to reinforce groove welds or to im- spectors (SWI), as defined in AWS B5.1 AWIs may be used under the
prove connection geometry direct supervision of WIs, on site and when weld inspection is being
(4) Loeations where weld tabs are requited to be removed conducted.

(5) Splice locations where tapered transitions are required W3.3. Nondestructive Testing
NDT technicians shall be qualified as
(1) In accordance with their employer's practice which shall meet or
exceed the criteria of the American for Nondestructive Testing, Inc.
SNT TC-1A Ri!commended the Training and Testing ofNonde-
structive Personnel, or of . . . ",."" .......,,,.. CP-189, Standardfor the Qualifica-
tion and Certification ofNondt~str"Uct'l1ve Testing Personnel.
(2) Ultrasonic testing for QA may be on1y by UT technicians certi-
fied as ASNT Level In through by the ASNT, or certified as
(6) The shape of weld aecess holes, if a speeial shape is required
Level n by their employer for flaw . If the engineer of record ap-
(7) Joints or groups of joints in which a specific assembly order, welding proves the use of flaw sizing UT technicians shall also be quali-
sequence,welding technique or other special precautions are required fied and certified by their employer flaw sizing.

W2.2. Shop Drawings (3) Magnetic partiele testing (MT) and penetrant testing (PT) for QA may
Shop drawings shall inelude, as a minimum, the fóllowing information: be performed on1y by technicians as Level n by their employer, or
certified as ASNT Level nI through by the ASNT and certified
(1) Access hole dimensions, surface profile and finish requirements by their emploYer.
(2) Locations where backing bars are to be removed

Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN msTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INc. Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN msTITUTE OF STEEL COII/STj;lUC110N, mc.
6.1-92 PART 1 - WELDING PROVISIONS [App. W. App. w.] PART 1 - WELDING 6.1-93

W4. NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING PROCEDURES The maximum h~at input to be used in prc,ductl(m shall be used in the qualifica-
tion testing. The ,qualified maximum temperature shall be the lowest
W4.1. Ultrasonic Testing interpass temperature used for any during qualification testing. Both weld
Ultrasonic testing shall be performed according to the procedures prescribed in metal and HAZ shall be tested. The metal shall meet all the mechanical
AWS D1.1 Section 6, Part F following a written procedure containing the ele- properties required by Section 7.3a, or for demand critical welds of Sec-
ments prescribed in paragraph K3 of Annex K. Section 6, Part F procedures shall tion 7.3b, as applicable. The heat zone CVN toughness shall meet a
be qualified using weld mock-ups having lII6-in. (1.5 mm)-diameter side drilled minimum requirement of 20 ft-Ibf (27 at 70°F (21°C) with specimens taken
holes similar to Annex K, Figure K-3. at both 1 and 5 nim from the fusion
W4.2. Magnetic Particle Testing W5.5. WeldTabs
Magnetic partiele testing shall be performed according to procedures prescribed Where practicable, weld tabs shall beyond the edge of the joint a mini-
inAWS D1.1, following a written procedure utilizing the Yoke Method that con- mum of one inch or the thickness of part, whichever is greater. Extensions
forms to ASTM E709. need not exceed 2 in. (50 mm).
Where used, weld tabs shall be within lis in. (3 mm) of the base metal
W5. ADDITIONAL WELDING PROVISIONS surface, except at eontinuity pIates removal to within lj.¡ in. (6 mm) of
W5.1. Intermixed Filler Metals the plate edge is acceptable, and the of the weld finished. Removal shall be
When FCAW-S filler metals are used in combination with filler metals of other by air carbon are cutting (CAC-A), chipping, or thermal cutting. The
processes, ineluding FCAW-G, a test specimen shall be prepared and mechani- process shall be controlled to gouging. The edges where weld
cal testing shall be conducted to verify that the notch toughness of the combined tabs have been removed shall be to a surface roughness of 500 J.l,in.
material s in the intermixed region of the weld meets the notch toughness require- (13 /lm) or better. Grinding to a flush is not required. The contour of
ments of Section 7.3a and, if required, the notch toughness requirements for the weld end shall provide a smooth free of notches and sharp comers.
demand eritieal weIds of Section 7.3b. At T-joints, a minimum radius in the need not be provided. The weld end
shall be free of gouges and notches. defects not greater than Yl6 in. (2 mm)
W5.2. Filler Metal Diffusible Hydrogen deep shall be faired to a slope not than 1:5. Other weld defects shall be
Welding electrodes and electrode-flux combinations shall meet the require- excavated and repaired by welding in with an applicable WPS.
ments for H16 (16 mL maximum diffusible hydrogen per 100 grams depos-
ited weld metal) as tested in accordance with AWS A4.3 Standard Methodsfor Bottom Flange Welding
Determination of the Diffusible Hydrogen Content of Martensitie, Bainitie, and When using weld access holes to CJP groove welds of beam bottom
Ferritie Steel Weld Metal Produeed by Are Welding. (Exception: GMAW solid flanges to column flanges or plates, the groove weld shall be se-
electrodes.) The manufacturer's typical certificate of conformance shall be con- quenced as follows:
sidered adequate proof that the supplied electrode or electrode-flux combination
(1) As far as is practicable, starts and shall not be placed directly under
meets this requirement. No testing of filler metal samples or of production welds
the beam web.
shall be required.
(2) Each layer shall be completed the full width of the flange before
W5.3. Gas-Shielded Welding Processes beginning the next layer.
GMAW and FCAW-G shall not be performed in winds exceeding 3 mph (5 kmIhr).
Windscreens or other shelters may be used to shield the welding operation from (3) For each layer, the weld starts and shall be on the opposite side of the
excessive wind. beam web, as compared to the layer.

W5.4. Maximum Interpass Temperatures W6. ADDITIONAL WELDING P S FOR DEMAND

Maximum interpass temperatures shall not exceed 550 0p (290 oC), measured
CRITICAL WELDS ONLV
at a distance not exceeding 3 in. (75 mm) from the start of the weld pass. The
maximum interpass temperature may be increased by qualification testing that W6.1. Welding Processes
ineludes weld metal and base metal CVN testing using AWS D 1.1 Annex m. SMAW, GMAW (except short circuit FCAW and SAW may be used to
The steel used for the qualification testing shall be of the same type and grade as fabricate and erect members govemed this specification. Other processes may
will be used in production. be used, provided that one or more of following criteria is met:

Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INSTIfUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcrION, lNe. AMERICAN INSTIfUTE ÚF STEEL CO*¡STRUcrION, lNe.
6.1-94 PART 1 - WELDING PROVISIONS [App. W.
6.1-9~

(a) The process is part of the prequalified connection details, as listed in

Appendix P,
(b) The process was used to perform a connection qualification test in WELD METALIWELDI G PROCEDURE
accordance with Appendix S, or
SPECIFICATION N HTOUGHNESS
(c) The process is approved by the engineer of record.
VERIFICATI N TEST
W6.2. Filler Metal Packaging
Electrodes shall be provided in packaging that limits the ability of the electrode
to absorb -moisture. Electrode from packaging that has been punctured or tom
shall be dried in accordance with the manufacturer's recornmendations, or shall This appendix provides a procedure for qUialifvingj the weld metal toughness and is ineludec
not be used for demand critical welds. Modification or lubrication of the elec- on an interim basis pending adoption of such a by the American Welding Societ)
trode after manufacture is prohibited, except that drying is permitted as recom- (AWS) or other accredited organization.
mended by the manufacturero
X1. SCOPE
W6.3. Exposure Limitations on FCAW Electrodes This appendix provides a standard for qualification testing of weld fille]
Mter removal from protective packaging, the permissible atmospheric exposure metals required to have specified toughness for service injoints designa.tec
time ofFCAW electrodes shall be limited as follows: as demand critica!.
(1) Exposure shall not exceed the electrode manufacturer's guidelines. Testing of weld metal to be used in prcIUUlctiC)fl shall be performed by filler metal
(2) In the absence of manufacturer's recornmendations, the total accumulated manufacturer's production lot, as in AWS A5.0l, Filler Metal Procure-
exposure time for FCAW electrodes shall not exceed 72 hours. When the ment Guidelines, as follows:
electrodes are not in use, they may be stored in protective packaging or a (1) Class C3 for SMAW electrodes,
cabinet. Storage time shall not be ineluded in the accumulated exposure
time. Electrodes that have been exposed to the atmosphere for periods ex- (2) Class S2 for GMAW-8 and SAW ~le(~troldes.
ceeding the aboye time limits shall be dried in accordance with the electrode (3) Class T4 fQr FCAW and GMAW
manufacturer's recornmendations, or shall not be used for demand critical
welds. The electrode manufacturer's recornmendations shall inelude time, (4) Class F2 fo! SAW fluxes.
temperature, and n\lmber of drying cyeles permitted. Filler inetals prc),duced by malllutactureit audited and approved by orte or more of
TackWelds the following agencies shall be exempt these production lot testing require-
W6.4.
Tack welds attaching backing bars and weld tabs shall be placed where they will ments, provided a minimum of 3 lots of material, as defined aboye,
are tested in accordance with the of this appendix:
be incorporated into a final weld.
(1) American aureau of Shipping

(2) Lloyds Register of Shippihg,

(3) American Society of Mechanical EnJgim~ers (ASME),

(4) ISO 9000,

(5) US Department of Defense, or

(6) A quality assurance program aC(~edltable to the engineer of record.

Under this exemption from ptoduction testing, the filler metal manufacturer
shall repeat the teSting prescribed in appendix at least every three years on a
random production lot.

Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcrrON, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL Cqll'iSTltUClLION, !Ne.
 6.1-96 PART 1 - WELD METAL/WELDING PROCEDURE [App. X. App.X.] PART 1 - WELD METAL/WEL ING PROCEDURE
6.1-97

X2. TEST CONDITIONS No ~ermal tr~atment of weldment or test specimens is permitted, except that
Tests shall be conducted at the range of heat inputs for which the weld filler machined tensile test specimens may be aged at 200°F (93 oC) to 220°F (104 oC)
metal will be qualified under the welding procedure specification (WPS). It is for up to 48 hours, then cooled to room temperature before testing.
recommended that tests be conducted atthe low heat input level and high heat
input level indicated in Table I-X-l. X4. ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
The lowest and highest Charpy V-Notc (CVN) toughness values obtained fr
thfi . fr ~
Table I-X-1 WPS e. .ve speclmens om a single test p ate shall be disregarded. Two of the re-
mammg three values shall equal, or ex ed, the specified toughness of 40 ft-Ibf
Toughness Verification Test (54 J) energy level at the testing temper ture. One ofthe three may be lower, but
Welding and Preheat Conditions not lower than 30 ft-lbf (41 J), and the a erage of the three shall not be less than
Cooling Rate Heat Input Preheat °F (OC) Interpass °F ceC) the required 40 ft-lbf (54 J) energy ley 1. Al1 test samples shall meet the notch
Low heat input test 30 kJ/in. (1.2 kJ/mm) 70±25 (21 ±14) 200 ± 50 (93 ± 28) toughness requirements for the electrod s as provided in Section 7.3b.
High heat input test 80 kJ/in. (3.1 kJ/mm) 300 ± 25 (149 ± 14) 500 ± 50 (260 ± 28)
For fille~ me~s ~lassified as E70, mate' s shall provide a minimum yield stress
Altematively, the filler metal manufacturer or contractor may elect to test a wid- of 58 ksl, a ffilrumum tensile strength 70 ksi, and a minimum elongation of
er or narrower range of heat inputs and interpass temperatures. The range of heat 2~ percent. For filler metals classified as 80, materials shall provide a minimum
inputs and interpass temperatures tested shall be clearly stated on the test reports yleld s~ess of 68 ksi, a minimum tens le strength of 80 ksi, and a minimum
and user data sheets. Regardless of the method of selecting test heat input, the elongatlOn of 19 percent.
WPS, as used by the contractor, shall fall within the range of heat inputs and
interpass temperatures tested.

X3. TEST SPECIMENS

Two test plates, one for each heat input, shall be welded following Table I-X-l.
Five CVN specimens and one tensile specimen shall be prepared per plateo Each
plate shall be steel, of any AISC-listed structural grade. The test plate shall be % in.
(19 mm) thick with a Ih in. (13 mm) root opening and 45° included groove angle.
The test plate and specimens shall be as shown in Figure 2A in AWS A5.20, or
as in Figure 5 in AWS A5.29. Except for the root pass, a minimum of two passes
per layer shall be used to fill the width.
AlI test specimens shall be taken from near the centerline of the weld at the
mid-thickness location, in order to minimize dilution effects. CVN and tensile
specimens shall be prepared in accordance with AWS B4.0, Standard Methods
for Mechanical Testing of Welds. The test assembly shall be restrained during
welding, or preset at approximately 5° to prevent warpage in excess of 5°. A
welded test assembly that has warped more than 5° shall be discarded. Welded
test assemblies shall not be straightened.
The test assembly shall be tack welded and heated to the specified preheat tem-
perature, measured by temperature indicating crayons or surface temperature
thermometers one inch from the center of the groove at the location shown in the
figures cited aboye. Welding shall continue until the assembly has reached the
interpass temperature prescribed in Table I-X-l. The interpass temperature shall
be maintained for the remainder of the weld. Should it be necessary to interrupt
welding, the assembly shall be allowed to cool in airo The assembly shall then be
heated to the prescribed interpass temperature before welding is resumed.

Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mare 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1

_--------------------------_..
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc.
AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONS UCTION, mc.

~-_....-..~~._-_.•
 6.1-99

PART 11. COMPOSITE STEELAND

REINFORCED BUILDINGS

These terms are in addition to those listed in Part 1. Glossary terms are generally italicized
where they first appear within a section throughout Part and in the Commentary.

Boundary member. Portion along wall and edge strengthened with structural steel
sections and/or longitudinal steel reinforcement

Collector elemento Member that serves to transfer between floor diaphragms and the
members of the seismic load resisting system.
Composite beam. Structural steel beam in contact
and acting compositely with reinforced
concrete via bond or shear connectors.

Composite braceo Reinforced-concrete-encased smlc~mu steel section (rolled or built-up) or

concrete-fiUed steel section used as abrace.

Composite column. Reinforced-concrete-encased Stn~ctl.lra1 steel section (roUed or built-up)

or concrete-fiUed steel section used as a column.

Composite eccentrically bracedframe (C-EBF). 4c,ml~m;ne braced frame meeting the

requirements of Section 14.

Composite intermediate momentframe (C-IMF). L~'m])Os:lte moment frame meeting the

requirements of Section 10.

Composite ordinary braced frame (C-OBF).

~V.lt"1:"V".lte braced frame meeting the
requirements of Section 13.

Composite ordinary moment frame (C-OMF). moment frame meeting the

requirements of Section 11.

Composite partially restrained moment frame ( ). Composite moment frame meeting

the requirements of Section 8.

Composite shear wall. Reinforced concrete wall that unencased or reinforced-concrete-

encased structural steel sections as boundary mé~mi)~r:s'.

Composite slab. Concrete slab supported on and to a formed steel deck that acts as a
diaphragm to transfer load to and between elements the seismic load resisting system.
Composite special concentrically braced frame (C- ). Composite braced frame meeting
the requirements of Section 12.

Composite special moment frame (C-SMF). moment frame meeting the

requirements of Section 9.

Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 200S:el. Supplernent No. 1
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, 9, 2005, inel. Supplernent No. 1
AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, c.
AMERICAN INSTlTUTE OF STEEL Cm~s~:ucrlON, INc.
 PART n - GLOSSARY Seet. 2.] PART n - REFERENCED SPECIFICATIO S, CODES, AND STANDARDS
6.1-100 6.1-101

Composite steeI pIate shear wall (C-SPW). Wall consisting of steel plate with reinforced 1. SCOPE
concrete encasement on one or both sides that provides out-of-plane stiffening to prevent These Provisions shall govem the desi fabricati d' .
stru tu al t 1 d ' on, an erectIOn of composIte
buckling of the steel plate and meeting the requirements of Section 17. c r s ee an reinforced concret members and connections in ..
Coupling beam. Structural steel or composite beam connecting adjacent reinforced concrete load resisting systems (SLRS) in bui dings and other structures ~e sezsthmzc
structures are defi d th ' w ere o er
wall elements so that they act together to resist lateralloads. .. ne as ose designed fabricated, and erected in a man .._
lar to bmldings with bu 'ldi lik . ner SInll
Encased composite beam. Composite beam completely enelosed in reinforced concrete. Th ..' 1 ng- e ve cal and lateral load-resisting systems
ese prov~slOn~ shall apply when the eismic response modification coefjicient'
Encased composite coIumn. Structural steel column (roUed or built-up) completely encased R, (as. sp~cified m the applicable buil ing code) is taken greater than 3 Whe~
in reinforced concrete. the se1SIDlC response modification coe cient, R is taken as 3 or 1 th'
ture is t . d . ' ess, e struc-
Face bearing pIates. Stiffeners attached to structural steel beams that are embedded in reinforced 'ld' no reqmre to satisfy these pro isions unless required by the applicable
bU1 mg codeo
concrete walls or columns. The plates are located at the face of the reinforced concrete to
provide confinement and to transfer loads to the concrete through direct bearing. Thde :equiremen~s of Part n modify an supplement the requirements of Part 1
an 10rrn
' .these Provisions . They shall e applied' .m conJunction
. with the AISC
Filled composite coIumn. Round or rectangular structural steel section fiUed with concrete.
Specificatzon for Structural Steel Buil ings, ANSI/AISC 360 h . af
Fully composite beam. Composite beam that has a sufficient number of shear connectors to ferred to as th S ;¡:; ' . ' erem ter re-
. e pecl,¡.catzon. The apph able requirements of the Building Code
develop the nominal plastic flexural strength of the composite section. Requzrements for Structural Concrete a Commentary ACI318 as d'fi d'
these PrOVlszons
.. shall be used for the d sign of reinf, " d mo 1 e In
Intermediate seismic systems. Seismic systems designed assuming moderate inelastic action in composite SLRS. orce concrete components
occurs in sorne members under the design earthquake.
Load-carrying reinforcement. Reinforcement in composite members designed and detailed For' seismic
d r.esisting systems inco orating reinforced concrete components
d loaddin
to resist the required loads. es~gne acco~ • g. to ACI 318, the req irements for load and resistance factor
des1gn as specified m Section B3.3 of Specification shall be used.
Ordinary reinforced concrete shear wall with structural steel elements (C-ORCW).
Composite shear walls meeting the requirements of Section 15. When the design is based upon elastic alysis, the stiffness properties of the
Ordinary seismic systems. Seismic systems designed assuming limited inelastic action occurs compone~t ~embers of composite syst ms shall reflect their condition at the
onset of slgruficant yielding of the struc e.
in sorne members under the design earthquake.
Partially composite beam. Unencased composite beam with a nominal flexural strength ~erever these Provisions refer to the a plicable building code (ABC) d th
IS no local building
. . code, the 1oad
s, oa I ' .
combmations, an and
system limitations ere
controUed by the strength of the shear stud connectors.
general des1gn requrrements shall be tho e in SEI/ASCE 7.
Partially restrained composite connection. Partially restrained (PR) connections as defined
in the Specification that connect partially or fully composite beams to steel columns with Part n inel~des a Glossary which is spec fically applicable to this Part The Part
flexural resistance provided by a force couple achieved with steel reinforcement in the 1 Glossary lS also applicable to Part n. .
slab and a steel seat angle or similar connection at the bottom flange.
2. REFERENCED SPECIFICA IONS CODES
Reinforced-concrete-encased shapes. Structural steel sections encased in reinforced concrete.
ANO STANDARDS "
Restraining bars. Steel reinforcement in composite members that is not designed to carry required The ~ocum~nts reference? in the~e provi ions shall inelude those listed in Part 1
loads, but is provided to facilitate the erection of other steel reinforcement and to provide Section 2 Wlth the followmg addltions:
anchorage for stirrups or tieso Genera1ly, such reinforcement is not spliced to be continuous.
American Society of Civil Engineers
SpeciaI reinforced concrete shear walls composite with structuraI steeI eIements (C-SRCW). Standard for the Structural Design of Co posite Slabs, ASCE 3-91
Composite shear walls meeting the requirements of Section 16.
American Welding Society
SpeciaI seismic systems. Seismic systems designed assuming significant inelastic action Structural Welding Code-Reinforcing Ste 1, AWS D1.4-98
occurs in sorne members under the design earthquake.
Unencased composite beam. Composite beam wherein the steel section is not completely
enelosed in reinforced concrete and relies on mechanicaI connectors for composite action
with a reinforced slab or slab on metal deck.

Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings' M h 9" 2005'me. 1 Supp1ement No. 1
AMERICAN lNSTlTUI'B OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CON TRUCTION, !Nc.
 [Sect. 3. Sect. 6.] PARTII-
6.1-102 PART ll- GENERAL SEISMIC DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 6.1-10:

GENERAL SEISMIC DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 6. COMPOSITE MEMBERS

3.
The required strength and other provisions for seismic design categories (SDCs) 6.1. Scope
and seismic use groups and the limitations on height and irregularity shall be as The design of composite members in S~RS described in Sections 8 througl
specified in the applicable building codeo 17 shall meet the requiremertts of SectIon and the material requirements o:
The design story drift and story drift limits shall be determined as required in the Section 5.
applicable building codeo 6.2. Composite Floor and
The design of composite floor and slabs shall meet the requirements 01
4. LOADS, LOAD COMBINATIONS, ANO NOMINAL ASCE 3. Composite slab diaphragms meet the requiremeilts in this Section,
STRENGTHS 6.2a. Load Transfer
4.1. Loads and Load Combinations Details shall be designed so as to
Where amplified seismic loads are required by these Provisions, the horizontal boundary members, collector ele:me:nt$ loads between the diaphragm and
portion of the earthquake load E (as defined in the applicable building code) shall systein. ' and elements of the horizontai framing
be multiplied by the overstrength factor º"
prescribed by the applicable building
6.2b. Nominal Shear Strength
codeo
The nominal shear strength of cOlnp1osilte di
Por the seismic load resisting system (SLRS) incorporating reinforced concrete deck diaphragms shall be taken as . aphragms and concrete-filled steel
components designed according to ACl 318, the requirements of Section B3.3 of nominal shear strength of the reinforced
concrete
. above the tbp of the steel n'bs m . accordance withACl 318 exc1ud-
the Specification shall be used.
mg Chapter 22. Alternatively, the cOllllil>,osite
shall be determined by in-plane shear diaphragm nominal shear strength
of concrete-filled diaphragms.
6.3. Cómposite' Beams
Composite bea~s shall meet the r~CluiI:~lLlellits of Specification Chapter 1. Com-
• L>

Nominal Strength poslte beams that are part of c01np(Jsil~e-S'Del~inl

4.2. also meet the requirements of Section moment frames (C-SMF) shall
The nominal strength of systems, members, and connections shall be determined
in accordance with the requirements of the Specification, except as modified 6.4. Encased CQmposite Colu
throughout these Provisions. This section is applicable to columns (1) consist of reinforced-concrete-
encase d s h apes witha structurill steel th at comprises at least 1 p.ercent of the
5. MATERIALS tot al composite column cross section'
Specification Section 12.1. Such ' (2) meet the additionallimitations of
5.1. Structural Steel cation Chapter 1, except as modified in shall ~eet the requirements of Specifi-
Structural steel members and connections used in composite seismic load resist- 'fi SectlOn. Additional requirements, as
speCI ed for inteimediate and special
ing systems. (SLRS) shall meet the requirements of Specification Section A3.
shall apply as required in the ae~;crípti(:ms systems in Sections 6.4b and 6.4c
Structural steel used in the composite SLRS described in Sections 8, 9, 12, 14, Sections 8 through 17. of the composite seismic systems in
16 and 17 shall also meet the requirements in Part 1 Sections 6 and 7.
Columns that consist of rel,l1:forced-c~Onlrrejtp-l'nr,(J<,oA shapes shall meet the re-
5.2. Concrete and Steel Reinforcement .
qurrements for rei.nforced concrete f
Concrete and steel reinforcement used in composite components in composite oACI 318 except as modified for
SLRS shall meet the requirements of ACl 318, Sections 21.2.4 through 21.2.8. '-'1rme,ctors in Section 6.4a(2).
(1) The structural steel section shear ....
Exception: Concrete and steel reinforcement used in the composite ordinary (2) The contribution of the rel17J01'celt-tlmcret~~-e¡lca.<:pd
seismic systems described in Sections 11, 13, and 15 shall meet the requirements of the column as provided in ACl 3 8. shape to the streilgth
of Specification Chapter 1 and ACl 318, exc1uding Chapter 21.
r~ÍIlfOf~ed concrete columns as specmed in the
(3) The seismic tequirements fi:>r ~~
description of the composite seismic
in Sections 8 through 17.

Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Bu¡'ldings, 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, !Nc. AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~sTR:ucrlON. INc.
6.1-104 PART TI - COMPOSITE MEMBERS [Seet. 6.
Seet. 6.]
PART TI - COMPOS MEMBERS
6.1-105

6.4a. Ordinary Seismic System Requirements 6.4b.

The following requirements for encased composite columns are applicable to Intermedi~te Seismic Sys em Requirements
all composite systems, inc1uding ordinary seismic systems: Enc~sed co"!posite c~lumns in interm diate seismic systems shall meet the fol-
lowmg reqUIrements m addition to tho e of Section 6.4a:
(1) The available shear strength of the column shall be determined in accor-
dance with Specification Section 12.ld. The nominal shear strength of the (1) The maximum spacing of transve se bars at the top and bottom shall be th
tie reinforcement shall be determined in accordance with ACI 318 Sections ~~~fu&~~ e
11.5.6.2 through 11.5.6.9. In ACI 318 Sections 11.5.6.5 and 11.5.6.9, the (a) one-half the least dimension f the section
dimension b w shall equal the width of the concrete cross-section minus the
(b) 8 longitudinal bar diameters
width of the structural shape measured perpendicular to the direction of
shear. (c) 24 tie bar diameters
(2) Composite columns designed to share the applied loads between the struc- (d) 12 in. (300 mm)
tural steel section and the reinforced concrete encasement shall have shear
connectors that meet the requirements of Specification Section 12.1. These spacings shall bemaintain d over a vertical distance equal t th
~eatest ofthe fo!lowing lengths, easured from eachjoint face and onobo~
(3) The maximum spacing of transverse ties shall meet the requirements of sldes of any section where flexur yielding is expected to occur:
Specification Section 12.1.
(a) one-sixth the vertical c1ear hei ht of the column
Transverse ties shall be located vertically within one-half of the tie spacing
aboye the top of the footing or lowest beam or slab in any story and shall (b) the maximum cross-sectional mension
be spaced as provided herein within one-half of the tie spacing below the (c) 18 in. (450 mm)
lowest beam or slab framÍng into the column.
(2) Tie ~pacing. over the remaining co umn length shall not exceed twice the
Transverse bars shall have a diameter that is not less than one-fifti- spacmg defined aboye.
eth of the greatest side dimension of the composite member, except that
ties shall not be smaller than No. 3 bars and need not be larger than No. 5 (3) Welded wire fabric is not permitte as transverse reinforcement in interme-
bars. Alternatively, welded wire fabric of equivalent area is permitted diate seismic systems.
as transverse reinforcement except when prohibited for intermediate and 6.4c. Special Seismic System R quirements
special seismic systems.
Enc~sed composite columns in special s ismic systems shall meet the foIl .
(4) Load-carrying reinforcement shall meet the detailing and splice require- requrrements in addition to those of Sec ·ons 6.4a and 6.4b: owmg
ments of ACI 318 Sections 7.8.1 and 12.17. Load-carrying reinforcement (1) T~e required axial strength for enc sed composite coIumns and splice de-
shall be provided atevery comer of a rectangular cross-section. The maximum
tmIs shalI meet the requirements in art I Section 8.3.
spacing of other load carrying or restraining longitudinal reinforcement
shall be one-half of the least side dimension of the composite member. (2) Longitudinal load-carrying reinfori ement shall meet the requirements of
ACI 318 Section 21.4.3.
(5) Splices and end bearing details for encased composite columns in ordinary
seismic systems shall meet the requirements of the Specification and ACI (3) Transverse reinforcement shall be oop reinforcement as defined in ACI
318 Section 7.8.2. The design shall comply with ACI 318 Sections 21.2.6, 318 Chapter 21 and shall meet the f, llowing requirements:
21.2.7 and 21.10. The design shall consider any adverse behavioral effects (i) The mínimum area of tie reinfo!' .ement A shall meet the following:
sh
due to abrupt changes in either the member stiffness or the nominal tensile

A", ~O.09h~+- .A'J(~ )

strength. Such locations shall inc1ude transitions to reinforced concrete sec-
tions without embedded structural steel members, transitions to bare struc-
tural steel sections, and column bases.
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN lNSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc.
(6-1)
where
hcc cross-sectio:pal dime sion of the confined core measured
cent~r-to-center of the tie reinforcement, in. (mm)
spacmg of .transvers reinforcement measured along the
longitudinal axis of th structural member, in. (mm)
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mar h 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN !Ns1TIUTE OF STEEL CON TRuenON, !Nc.
 [Sect. 6. Sect. 6.] PART TI - COMPOSITE MBERS 6.1-107
6.1-106 PART TI - COMPOSITE MEMBERS

specified minimum yield stress of the structural steel core, (ii) The stron,g-columnlweak-beam design requirements in Section 9.5
ksi (MPa) shall be satisfied. Column base shall be detailed to sustain inelastic
2 2
cross-sectional afea of the structural core, in. (mm ) flexural hinging.
As
Pn nominal compressive strength of the composite column (iii) The required shear strength of e column shall meet the requirements
calculated in accordance with the Specification, kips (N) of ACI 31~ Section 21.4.5.1.
f'e specified compressive strength of concrete, ksi (MPa)
Fyh specified mínimum yield stress of the ties, ksi (MPa) (7) ~en the column terminates on a fo ting or mat foundation, the transverse
remforcementas specified ~n this s tion shall extend into the footing or
Equation 6-1 need not be satisfied if the nominal strength of the rein- mat at least ~2 in. (300 mm). When the column terminates on a wall, the
forced-concrete-encased structural steel section alone is greater than tran~verse remforcement ~hal~ ex~en into the wall for at least the length
the load effect from a load combination of 1.OD + 0.5L. reqUlred to develop full ylelding In e reinforced-concrete-encased shape
(ii) The maximum spacing of transverse reinforcement along the length and longitudinal reinforcement.
of the column shall be the lesser of six longitudinal load-carrying bar (8) Welded wire fabric is not p~rmitted transverse reinforcement for special
diameters or 6 in. (150 mm) .. seismic systems.
(iii) When specified in Sections 6.4c(4), 6.4c(5) or 6.4c(6), the maximum 6.5. Filled Composite Columns
spacing of transverse reinforcement shall be the lesser of one-fourth
This. Section is applicable to columns tha meet the limitations of Specification
the least member dimension or 4 in. (100 mm). For this reinforcement,
Sec~on 12.2. Such columns shall be desig ed to meet the requirements of Speci-
cross ties, legs of overlapping hoops, and other confining reinforce- ficatLOn Chapter 1, except as modified in t is Section.
ment shall be spaced not more than 14 in. (350 mm) on center in the
transverse direction. (1) The nominal shear strength of the c mposite column shall be the nominal
shear strength of the structural steel section alone, based on its effective
(4) Encased composite columns in braced frames with nominal compressive
shear area. The concrete shear capa ity may be used in conjunction with
loads that are larger than 0.2 times P n shall have transverse reinforcement as
the s~ear strength from. the steel shap provided the design ineludes an ap-
specified in Section 6.4c(3)(iii) oyer the total element length. This require-
propnate load transfemng mechanis
ment need not be satisfied if the nominal strength of the reinforced-con-
crete-encased steel section alone is greater than the load effect from a load (2) In addition to the requirements of ection 6.5(1), in the special seismic
combination of 1.0D + 0.5L. sys~ems described in Sections 9, 12 d 14, the design loads and column
sphce~ for filled composite columns s all also meet the requirements of Part
(5) Composite columns supporting reactions from discontinued stiff members,
I SectlOn 8.
such as walls or braced frames, shall have transverse reinforcement as spec-
ified in Section 6.4c(3)(üi) over the fulllength beneath the level at which (3) Filled ~omp~s~te columns used in C- MF shall meet the following require-
the discontinuity occurs if the nominal compressive load exceeds 0.1 times ments m addltion to those of Sections 6.5(1) and 6.5(2):
Pn • Transverse reinforcement shall extend into the discontinued member
(i) The minimum required shear s ength of the column shall meet the
for at least the length required to develop full yielding in the reinforced-
requirements inACI 318 Section 21.4.5.1.
concrete-encased shape and longitudinal reinforcement. This requirement
need not be satisfied if tbe nominal strength of the reinforced-concrete- (ii) The strong-column/weak-beam esign requirements in Section 9.5
encased structural steel section alone is greater than the load effect from a shall be met. Column bases shall be designed to sustain inelastic flex-
load combination of 1.0D + 0.5L. ural hinging.
(6) Encased composite columns used in a C-SMF shall meet the following (iii) The minimum wall thickness of oncrete-filled rectangular HSS shall
requirements: be
(i) Transverse r~inforcement shall meet the requirements in Section tmin, = b E'y/ (6-2)
6.4c(3)(c) at fue top and bottom of the column over the region specified
in Section 6.4b. for the flat width b of each face, here b is as defined in Specification
Table B4.1.

Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buiü1ings, Mare

Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN 1NSTl1Ul'E OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, !Ne. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONS
6.1-108 PART II - COMPOSITE CONNECTIONS [Sect. 7.
7. COMPOSITE CONNECTIONS
7.1.
Scope ..
This Section is applicable to connections in buildings that utIhze composIte or
dual steel and concrete systems wherein seismic load is transferred between
structural steel and reinforced concrete components.
Composite connections shall be demonstrated to have strength, ducti?ity and
toughness comparable to that exhibited by similar structural steel or remforced
concrete connections that meet the requirements of Part 1 and ACI 318, respec-
tively. Methods for calculating the connection strength shall meet the require-
ments in this Section.
7.2. General Requirements ..
Connections shall have adequate deformation capacity to resIst the requzred
strength at the design story drift. Additionally, connections that are required.for
the lateral stability of the building under seismic loads shall meet the reqmre-
ments in Sections 8 through 17 based upon the specific system in which the con-
nection is used. When the available strength of the connected members is based
upon nominal material strengths and nominal dimensions, the determination of
the available strength of the connection shall account for any effects that result
from the increase in the actual nominal strength of the connected member.
7.3. Nominal Strength of Connections
The nominal strength of connections in composite structural systems shall be
determined on the basis of rational models that satisfy both equilibrium of in-
ternal forces and the strength limitation of component material s and elements
based upon potentiallimit states. Unless the connection strength is determined
by analysis and testing, the models used for analysis of connections shall meet
the requirements of Sections 7.3(1) through 7.3(5).
(1) When required, force shall be transferred between structural steel ando rein-
forced concrete through (a) direct bearing of headed shear studs or smtable
alternative devices; (b) by other mechanical means; (c) by shear friction
with the necessary clamping force provided by reinforcement normal to the
plane of shear transfer; or (d) by a combination of these means. Any poten-
tial bond strength between structural steel and reinforced concrete shall be
ignored for the purpose of the connection force transfer m~chanis~. The
contribution of different mechanisms can be combined only If the stlffness
and deformation capacity of the mechanisms are compatible.
The nominal bearing and shear-friction strengths shall meet the require-
ments of ACI 318 Chapters 10 and 11. Unless a higher strength is substanti-
ated by cyclic testing, the nominal bearing and shear-friction streng~s sh~l
be reduced by 25 percent for the composite seismic systems descnbed In
Sections 9, 12, 14, 16, and 17.
Seismic Provisionsjor Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1
AMEru:CAN !NSTlTIJTE OF STEEL CONSlRUCTION, !Ne.
Sect. 7.) PART II - COMPOSlTE CO CTIONS 6.1-109
(2) The available strength of structural steel components in composite connec-
tions shall be determined in accor ance with Part 1 and the Specification.
.
Structural steel elements that are e cased in confined reinforced concrete
are permitted to be considered to b braced against out-of-plane buckling.
Face bearing- plates consisting of tiffeners between the flanges of steel
beams are required when beams ar embedded in reinforced concrete col-
umns or walls.
(3) The nominal shear strength of re·nforced-concrete-encased steel panel-
zones in beam-to-column connectio s shall be calculated as the sum of the
nominal strengths of the structural teel and confined reinforced concrete
shear elements as determined in P 1 Section 9.3 and ACI 318 Section
21.5, respectively.
(4) Reinforcement shall be provided t resist all tensile forces in reinforced
concrete components of the conne ions. Additionally, the concrete shall
be confined with transverse reinforc ment. AH reinforcement shall be fully
developed in tension or compressio , as appropriate, beyond the point at
which it is no longer required to resis the forces. Development lengths shall
be determined in accordancr with A 1 318 Chapter 12. Additionally, devel-
opment lengths for the systems desc ·bed in Sections 9, 12, 14, 16, and 17
shall meet therequirements of ACI 3 8 Section 21.5.4.
(5) Connections shall meet the followin additional requirements:
(i) When the slab transfers horizon diaphragm forces, the slab reinforce-
ment shall be designed and anch red to carry the in-plane tensile forces
at all critical sections in the sla , including connections to collector
beams, columns, braces, and wal s.
(ii) For connections between structu al steel or composite beams and rein-
forced concrete or encased com osite columns,. transverse hoop rein-
forcement shall be provided in t e connection regíon of the column to
meet the requirements of ACI 31 Section 21.5, except for the foHow-
ing modifications:
(a) Structural steel sections fr ·ng into the connections are consid-
ered to provide confinemen over a width equal to that of face
bearing piates welded to the beams between the flanges.
(b) Lap splices are permitted fo perimeter ties when confinement of
the splice is provided by fac bearing plates or other means that
prevents spalling of the conc ete cover in the systems described in
Sections 10, 11, 13 and 15.
(c) The longitudinal bar sizes d layout in reinforced concrete and
composite columns shall be etailed to minimize slippage of the
bars through the beam-to-c umn connection due to high force
transfer associated with the hange in column moments over the
height'of the connection.
Seismic Provisions jor Structural Steel Buildings, Marc 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1
AMEru:CAN !NS'ITIUI'E OF STEEL CON UCTION, !Ne.
6.1-110 PART TI - COMPOSITE PARTIALLY RESTRAlNED MOMENT FRAMES [Sect. 8.
Sect. 9.] PART TI - COMPOSlTE MOMENT fRAMES 6.1-1

8. COMPOSITE PARTIALLV RESTRAINED (PR) 9.2. Columns'

MOMENT FRAMES (C-PRMF) Composite columns shall meet the
S ti' 64 tec[Uil:errlents for special seismic systems
8.1. Scope ec ons. or 6.5, as appropriate. co
This Section is applicable to frames that consist of structural steel columns and
requirements of ACI 318 Chapte 2 1 di nc~ete columns shall meet tJ
r , exc u ng Section 21.10.
composite beams that are connected with partially restrained (PR) moment con- 9.3. Beams
nections that meet the requirements in Specification Section B3.6b(b). Com-
Composite beams that are
posite partially restrained moment frames (C-PRMF) shall be designed so that C-SMF shall also meet the followir
requirements:
under earthquake loading yielding occurs in the ductile components of the com-
posite PR beam-to-column moment connections. Limited yielding is permitted (1) The distance from the maxírrmm
neutral axis shall not exceed concrete compression fiber to the plast:
at other locations, such as column base connections. Connection flexibility and
composite beam action shall be accounted for in detennining the dynamic char-
acteristics, strength and drift of C-PRMF. I:.on +db
(9-1
1700Fy
1+ - -- J
8.2. Columns ( E
Structural steel columns shall meet the requirements of Part I Sections 6 and 8 where
and the Specification.
of the steel beam to the top of concrett
8.3. Composite Beams db
Composite beams shall be unencased, fully composite and shall meet the re-
Fy
E specified minimum stress of the steel beam, ksi (MPa)
quirements of Specification Chapter 1. For purposes of analysis, the stiffness of
beams shall be determined with an effective moment of inertia of the composite elastic modulus of steel beam, ksi (MPa)
section. (2) Beam flanges shall meet the reqlutnem(~nts
reinforced-concrete-encased of Part I Section 9.4, except whel
cOI~pI'ession elements have a reinforced con
8.4. Moment Connections crete cover of at least 2 in. (50 d
The required strength of the beam-to-column PR moment connections shall be reinforcement in regions where an .confinement is provided by hOOI
determined considering the effects of connection flexibility and second-order . hmges are expected to occur unde:
selsIIlÍc deformations. Hoop relntC)rClement
moments. In addition, composite connections shall have a nominal strength that ACI 318 Section 21.3.3. shall meet the requirements o:
is at least equal to 50 percent of Mp, where Mp is the nominal plastic flexura!
strength of the connected structural steel beam ignoring composite action. Con- Neither Structural steel nor composite
" are permitted as flexural memben
nections shall meet the requirements of Section 7 and shall have a total interstory to resist seisIIlÍc loads in C-SMF
lt IS demonstrated by testing and analy.
drift angle of 0~04 radians that is substantiated by cyclic testing as descri!Jed in sis that the particular system provides
ductility and energy dissipation
capacity.
Part I Section 9.2b.
9.4. Moment Connections
9. COMPOSITE SPECIAL MOMENT FRAMES (C-SMF) The required strength of beam--tO-COlllrrtn
mined from the shear and flexure moment connect:j.ons sha11 be deter-
9.1. Scope RyMn (L.RFD) or RyM /1.5 (ASD), as with the expected flexural strengtb,
This Section is applicable to moment frames that consist of either composite n ap¡Jfopri¡ate. of the beams framing into the
or reinforced concrete columns and either structural steel or composite beams. ~onnectlOn. The nominal strength of .
m Section 7. In :addition, the connectlOn shall meet the requirements
Composite special momentframes (C-SMF) shall be designed assuming that sig-
interstory drift angle of 0.04 radian. shall be capable of sustaining a total
nificant inelastic deformations will occur under the design earthquake, primar- . beam flanges are interrupted at the
ily in the beams, but with limited inelastic defonnations in the columns andlor connection, the connections shall d.elnol~stJ:ate
0.04 radian in cyclic tests that is an interstory drift angle of at least
connections. Part I Section 9.2b. Por connections to by cyclic testing as described in
. concrete columns with a. beam
that IS continuous through the eolumo
the flanges and the connection is not tQ.at welded joints are not required in
. susceptible to premature frac-
tures, the inelastie rotation eapacity b d
substantiating data. e emonstrated by testing or other

Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
Seismic Provisions lor Structural Steel Buildings,
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, lNe. 9, 2005, indo Supplement No. 1
AMEIuCAN INsTITUTE OF S1EEL CQ1IJSTFtuCl10N. INc.
 [Seet. 9. Seet. 12.] PART II - COMPOSITE SPECIAL
6.1-112 PART II - COMPOSlTE SPEClAL MOMENT FRAMES ~''U.~1"'\I.I.l BRACED FRAMES 6.1-1

9.5. Column-Beam Moment Ratio 11. COMPOSITE ORDINA MOMENTFRAMES(C-OMF

The design of reinforced concrete columns shall meet the requirements of 11.1. Scope
ACI 318 Section 21.4.2. The column-to-beam moment ratio of composite
This Section is applicable to f '.
columns shall meet the requirements of Part 1 Section 9.6 with the following reinforced concrete columns and rames that conslst of elther composite 4

h lt: or.composite b~ams. Compo.

modifications: el
ite ordinary moment frames (
(1) The available flexural strength of the composite column shall meet the re- inelastic action will occur under the d s .a e ~Slgned. assunung that limite
andlor connections. eszgn eart quake m the beams, colunu
quirements of Specification Chapter 1 with consideration of the required
axial strength, P re' 11.2. Columns
(2) The force limit for Exception (a) in Part 1 Section 9.6 shall be Prc < O.IP e • Composite columns shall meet the uirements for ordinary seismic systems i
(3) Composite columns exempted by the minimum flexural strength require- Section 6.4 or 6.5, as appropriate.
concrete columns shall meet th
ment in Part 1 Section 9.6(a) shall have transverse reinforcement that meets requirements of ACI 318, excluding 21.
the requirements in Section 6.4c(3). 11.3. Beams
Structural steel and composite shall meet the requirements of thl
10. COMPOSITE INTERMEDIATE MOMENT FRAMES Specification.
(C-IMF) 11.4. Moment Connections
10.1. Scope Connections shall be designed fo 1 "
This Section is applicable to moment frames that consist of either composite Specification Sections B3.3 and B; 4 an~~ecom~:n;tlOns in accordance witl
or reinforced concrete columns and either structural steel or composite beams. tions shall meet the requirements in" . 7 avdazSa l~ strength of the connec·
an ectlOn 11.2 of Part 1.
Composite intermediate moment frames (C-IMF) shall be designed assuming
that inelastic deformation under the design earthquake will occur primarily 12. COMPOSITE SPECIAL
in the beams, but with moderate inelastic deformation in the columns andlor
FRAMES (C-CBF)
connections.
12.1. Scope
10.2. Columns This Section is applicable to braced
Composite columns shall meet the requirements for intermediate seismic sys- that consist of concentrically con-
nected members. Minor eccentricities
tems of Section 6.4 or 6.5. Reinforced concrete columns shall meet the require- the designo Columns shall be Qtnlculfal permitted if they are accounted for in
~ ." steel, composite structural steel, or rel'n-
ments of ACI 318 Section 21.12. lorced concrete. Beams and braces be either structural steel or composite
structural steel. Composite special
10.3. Beams be designed assuming that inelastic bracedframes (C-CBF) shalI
Structural steel and composite beams shall meet the requirements of the under the design earthquake wilI oc-
cur primarily through tension yielding buckling of braces.
Specification.
12.2. Columns
10.4. Moment Connections
The nominal strength of the connections shall meet the requirements of Section ~tructur~l steel columns shall meet the requirements of Part 1 Sections 6 and 8
omposlte columns shall meet the . . .
7. The required strength of beam-to-column connections shall meet one of the Section 6 4 or 6 5 R ':D d for speczal sezsmic systems of
following requirements: . .. em orce shalI meet the re .
structural truss elements of ACI 318 21. quuements for
(a) The required strength of the connection shall be based on the forces associ-
12.3. Beams
ated with plastic hinging of the beams adjacent to the connection.
Structural steel beams shall meet the . for special concentrically
(b) Connections shall meet the requirements of Section 7 and shall demonstrate braced frames (SCBF) of Part 1
13. Composite beams shall meet the
a total interstory drift angle of at least 0.03 radian in cyc1ic tests. requirements of the Specification 1 and the requirementS for special con-
centrically braced frames (SCBF) of 1 Section 13.

Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions lor Structural Steel B~ildings,
9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INc. AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL Ccjl'lSntUCllIoN, INc.
6.1-114 PART TI - COMPOSITE SPECIAL CONCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAMES [Seet. 12.
Seet. 15.] PART TI - ORDINARY REINFORCED CO CRETE SHEAR WALLS COMPOSITE
6.1-1

12.4. Braces Di~gonal braces,. columns, and be segments outside of the link shall
Structural steel braces shall meet the requirements for SCBF of Part 1 Section deslgned to remam essentially elas .c under the maxun'um'" th
d lorces at can
13. Composite braces shall meet the requirements fQr composite columns of generat~ by th~ fully yielded and s ain-hardened link. Columns shall be eith
Section 12.2. composlte or remforce~ con~rete. B aces shall be structural steel. Links shall ;
Connections structural steel as descnbed m this ection . The aVal'Zable strength of membe
12.5. h .
Bracing connections shall meet the requirements of Section 7 and Part 1 s. all meet the reqUlrements in the S ecification, except as modified in this Se
Section 13. uon. C-EBF shall meet the requirem nts of Part 1 Section 15 .
in this Section. ' except as modifi(

13. COMPOSITE OROINARV BRACEp FRAMES (C-OBF) 14.2. Columns

Reinforced concrete columns shall eet th .
13.1. Scope 1 e requrrements for Structural tru'
This Section is applicable to concentrically braced frame systems that consist of e ements of A~I 31 ~ C?apter 21. C mposite columns shall meet the requir;
composite or reinforced concrete colurnns, structHral steel or composite beams, nk . for. speclal selsmlC systems of Sections 6 .4 or 6..
rments 5 Add'u'
lona11y where
and structural steel or composite braces. Composite ordinary braced frames 1 IS adJacent to a reinforced conc te column or encased composit: columl
transverse column reinfo t' .
(C-OBF) shall be designed assuming that limited inelastic action under the . rcemen me ung the requrrements of ACI 318 Sectio
design earth,quake will occur in the beams, colurnns, braces, and/or connections. 21.4.4 (or ~ecuon 6.4c(6)a for comp site columns) shall be provided aboye
below the lmk connection. an
13.2. Columns
Encased composite columns shall meet the requirements for ordinary seismic AH columns shall meetthe requireme ts of Part 1 Section 15.8.
systems of Sections 6.4. Filled composite colurnns shall meet the requirements 14.3. Links
of Section 6.5 for ordinary seismic systems. Reinforced concrete columns shall Links shall be unencased structural st el and shall meet the . ..,
meet the requirements of ACI 318 excluding Chapter 21. . 11 requrrement lor ec
centnca y bracedframe (EBF) links 'n Part 1 Section 15 It' . d
th . . IS permItte to en
13.3. Beams case . ~ portlOn of the beam outside f the link in reinforced concrete Beam
Structural steel and composite beams shall meet the requirements of the contammg the link are pennitted to ct compositely with the floor sl~b usin'
Specification. shear connectors along all or any po on of the beam l'f th ...!
'd d e composlte actlOn l'
consl ere when detennining the no .nal strength of the link. .
13.4. Braces 14.4.
Structural steel braces shall meet the requirements of the Specification. Compos-
Braces
ite braces shall meet the requirements for composite columns of Sections 6.4a, Structural steel braces shall meet the r quirements for EBF of Part 1 Section 15.
6.5, and 13.2. 14.5. Connections
13.5. Connections In addition to. the requirements for EB of Part 1 Sec u' on 15 , connecuons
. shall
Connections shall be designed for the load combinations in accordance with meet the reqUlrements of Section 7.
Specification Sections B3.3 and B3.4, and t4tf available strength of the connec-
tions shall meet the requirements in Section 7.
15. OROINARV REINFORCEO CONCRETE SHEAR
WALLS COMPOSITE WIT STRUCTURAL STEEL
14. COMPOSITE ECCENTRI~ALLV BRACEO FRAMES ELEMENTS (C-ORCW)
(C-EBF) 15.1. Scope
14.1. Scope Th~ req~irements in this Section apply hen reinforced concrete walls are com-
This Section is applicable to braced frames for which one end of each brace poslte Wlth s~ctural steel elements, e ther as infill panels, such as reinforced
intersects a beam at an eccentricity from the intersection of the centerlines of the concrete walls m structural steel frames with unencased or reinforced-concrete-
beam and column, or intersects a beam at an eccentricity from the intersection encased Structural steel sections that ac as boundary me b
1 . m ers, or as Structural
of the centerlines of the beam and an adjacent braceo Composite eccentrically stee couplmg beams that connect two a ~acent reinforced concrete walls. Rein-
braced frames (C-EBF) shall be designed so that inelastic defonnations under forced concrete walls shall meet the requ' ments of ACI 318 excluding Chapter 21.
the design earthquake will occur only as shear yielding in the links.

Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings M eh 9 2005' 1 S 1
AMERICAN !NSTITUTB OF STElll- CONSlRUcnON, !Nc. ' " m e . upp ementNo. 1
AMERICAN !NsTITU1E OF STEEL C SlRUCTION, !Nc.
6.1-116 PART TI - ORDINARY REINFORCED CONCRETE SHEAR WALLS COMPOSITE [Seet. 15. Seet. 16.] PART TI - SPECIAL REINFORCED rv... >.T""~~_~_
SHEAR WALLS COMPOSITE 6.1-1

15.2. Boundary Members 15.4. Encased ,Composite Co

Boundary members shall meet the requirements of this Section: Encased composite sections
ments of Section 15.3 as modified
(1) When unencased structural steel sections function as boundary members in
reinforced concrete infill panels, the structural steel sections shall meet the (1) Coupling beams shall have an II'mbedme:nt
,.,. length into the reinforced co
requirements of the Specification. The required axial strength of the bound- crete wall that is sufficient to the maximum possible combinati<
ary member shall be determined assuming that the shear forces are carried of moment and shear
beam. of the encased composite steel couplil
by the reinforced concrete wall and the entire gravity and overturning forces
are carried by the boundary members in conjunction with the shear wall.
(2) The nominal shear capacity of encased composite steel coupling bea
The reinforced concrete wall shall meet the requirements of ACI 318 ex-
shall be used to meet the req[uirejment in Section 15.3(1).
cluding Chapter 21.
(3) The stiffness ofthe encased "Oln¡j),osite
'-" steel coupling beams shall be used fl
(2) When reinforced-concrete-encased shapes function as boundary members
in reinforced concrete infill panels, the analysis shall be based upon a trans- calculating the required strength the shear wall and coupling beam.
formed concrete section using elastic material properties. The wall shall
meet the requirements of ACI 318 excluding Chapter 21. When the rein-
16. SPECIAL 'REINFORCED CRETE SHEAR WALLS
forced-concrete-encased structural steel boundary member qualifies as a COMPOSITE WITH STRU RAL STEEL ELEMENT~
composite column as defined in Specification Chapter 1, it shall be designed (C-SRCW)
to meet the ordinary seismic system requirements of Section 6.4a. Other- 16.1. Scope
wise, it shall be designed as a composite column to meet the requirements
Special reinforced concrete shear composite with structural steel elemenl
of ACI 318 Section 10.16 and Chapter 1 of the Specification.
(C-SRCW) systems shall meet the of Section 15 for C-ORCW an
(3) Headed shear studs or welded reinforcement anchors shall be provided to the shear-wall tequirement of ACI 31 including Chapter 21, except as modifie
transfer vertical shear forces between the structural steel and reinforced in this Section.
concrete. Headed shear studs, if used, shall meet the requirements of Speci-
fication Chapter l. Welded reinforcement anchors, if used, shall meet the
16.2. Boundary Members
requirements of AWS D1.4.
In 1addition to the requirements of 15.2(1), unencased structural steé
co umns shall meet the requirements Part 1 Sections 6 and 8.
15.3. Steel Coupling Beams In addition to the requirements of 15 .2(2), the requirements in this Sec
Structural steel coupling beams that are used between two adjacent reinforced con-
tion shall apply to walls with . structural steel bound
crete walls shall meet the requirements of the Specification and this Section:
r~CluÍl~enlents ofACI 318 including Chapte
ary members. The wall shall meet the <,
(1) Coupling beams shall have an embedment length into the reinforced con- 21 . Reinforced-concrete-encased stee1boundary members that qualif'
crete wall that is sufficient to develop the maximum possible combination as composite columns in Ch apter 1 shall meet the special seismil.
of moment and shear that can be generated by the nominal bending and system requirements of Section 6.4. . such members shall be designe(
shear strength of the coupling beam. The embedment length shall be con- as composite compression members meet the requirements of ACI 318 Sec.
sidered to begin inside the first layer of confining reinforcement in the wall tion 10.16 including the special .
requrrements for boundary members ir
boundary member. Connection strength for the transfer of loads between ACI 318 Section 21.7.6. Transverse for confinement of the com
the coupling beam and the wall shall meet the requirements of Section 7. posite boundary member shall extend distance of 2h into the wall, where h ü
the overall depth of the boundary in the plane of the wall.
(2) Vertical wall reinforcement with nominal axial strength equal to the nomi-
nal shear strength of the coupling beam shall be placed over the embedment Headed shear studs or welded' bar anchors shall be provided as speci.
length of the beam with two-thirds of the steel located over the first half of fied in Section 15.2(3). For {'~,.,)nnlectloh to unencased structural steel sections.
the embedment length. This wall reinforcement shall extend a distance of the nominal strength of welded ..r~lntt)rcjln,g bar anchors shall be reduced by.
at least one tension development length aboye and below the flanges of the 25 percent f~om their static yield
coupling beam. lt is permitted to use vertical reinforcement placed for other
purposes, such as for vertical boundary members, as part of the required
vertical reinforcement.

Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMEIuCAN rnsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INc. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL qOJI/SntUClrION, INc.
6.1-118 PART II - SPECIAL REINFORCED CONCRETE SHEAR WALLS COMPOSlTE [Sect. 16. Sect. 18.] PART II - STRUCTURAL DESIGN DRA
AND SPEClFICATIONS 6.1-1g

16.3. Steel Coupling Beams local buck1ing and separation th

In addition to the requirements of Section 15.3, structural steel coupling beams zontal andvertical relntc,rC(~m4en~ e plate and reihforced concrete. Rori·
shall be. provided in the concrete e,~case.
shall meet the requirements of Part 1 Sections 15.2 and 15.3. When required in ment to meet or exceed the rlpt~1 hin". n
Part 1 Section 15.3, the coupling rotation shall be assumed as 0.08 radian unless The reinforcement ratio in both r~qulfements inACI 318 Sectio~ 14.3.
a smaller value is justified by rational analysis of the inelastic deformations that maximum spacing between bars shall not be less than 0.0025; the
not exceed 18 in. (450 mm).
are expected under the design earthquake. Face bearing plates shall be provided
on both sides of the coupling beams at the face of the reinforced concrete wall. Seismic forces acting peIpel1d.Íc::u]:rr
the applicable building code to the ?lane of the wall as specified by
These stiffeners shall meet the detailing requirements ofPart 1 Section 15.3. be consldered in the design of the com-
posite wall system.
Vertical wall reinforcement as specified in Section 15.3(2) shall be confined by
transverse reinforcement that meets the requirements for boundary members of (2) The steel plate shall be c'(mtInu()l!J.s]v
connected on all edges to structural
stee1 f raming and boundary .th .
ACI 318 Section 21.7.6. WI welds and/or slip-critical high-
streng th bolts to develop the h
Encased Composite Coupling Beams of welded and bolted connectors s ear strength of the plateo The design
16.4. Part I Section 7. meet the additional requirements of
Encased composite sections serving as coupling beams shall meet the require-
ments of Section 16.3, except the requirements of Part 1 Section 15.3 need not
17.3. Boundary Members .
be met.
Structural steel and composite hOLmrl.nrl.,
members shall be designed to resist the
shear capacity of plate and any relnfc.rb:~d
17. COMPOSITE STEEL PLATE SHEAR WALLS (C-SPW) t th d . concrete portions of the wall active
a e eSlgn story drift. Composite ·nfi
rel orced concrete boundary members
17.1. Scope shall also meet the requirements of S
1 16.2. Steel boundary members shall
This Section is applicable to structural walls consisting of steel plates with rein- a so meet the requirements of Part 1, 17.
forced concrete encasement on one or both sides of the plate and structural steel 17.4. Openings
or composite boundary members.
Boundary members shall be provided
openings as required by analysis.
17.2. Wall Elements
The available shear strength shall be <l>Vns (LRFD) or Vns / Q (ASD), as appropri- 18. STRUCTURAL DESIGN
ate, according to the limit state of shear yielding of composite steel plate shear SPECIFICATIONS, SHOP P
walls (C-SPW) with a stiffened plate conforming to Section 17.2(1) shall be
ERECTION DRAWINGS
Vns =0.6A s"Fy (17-1) S. tructural design awings and ~r')eCILticatjicms,
mgs for composiie steel and st~~l
de.

shop drawings, and erection draw-

<1> = 0.90 (LRFD) Q = 1.67 (ASD) ments of Part I Section 5. construction shall meet the require-
Vns nominal shear strength of the steel pIate, kips (N)
2 2 For reinforced concrete and composite b
Asp horizontal area of stiffened steel plate, in. (mm ) uilding construction, the contract
documents, shop drawings, and erection UljaV\lllli!S
Fy specified minimum yield stress of the pI ate, ksi (MPa) shall also indicate the following:
a) Bar placement, cutoffs, lap and me:~ianical
The available shear strength of C-SPW with a plate that does not meet the stiff- ahchorages. splices, hooks and mechanical
ening requirements in Section 17.2(1) shall be based upon the strength of the
pIate, exc1uding the strength of the reinforced concrete, and meet the require- b) Tolerance for placement of ties and
transverse reinforcement.
ments of the Specification Sections G2 and G3. e) Provisions for dimensional
(1) The steel plate shall be adequately stiffened by encasement or attachment to creep and shrinkage.
the reinforced concrete if it can be demonstrated with an elastic plate buck-
d) Location, magnitude, and
ling analysis that the composite wall can resist a nominal shear force equal of any prestresssing or post-
tensioning present.
to Vns. The concrete thickness shall be a minimum of 4 in. (100 mm) on each
side when concrete is provided on both sides of the steel plate and 8 in. (200 e) If concrete flÓor slabs or slabs on
serve as diaphragms, connection
mm) when concrete is provided on one side of the steel plateo Headed shear detaiIs between the diaphragm and
main lateral-load resisting system
stud connectors or other mechanical connectors shall be provided to prevent shall be clearly identified.

Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel B.uil.dinas,
AMERICAN INs1ITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCI10N, INc. <> 9, 2005, ¡nel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~strnuCTloN, lNe.
 PART TI - STRUCTURAL DESIGN DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS [Seet. 18.
6.1-120
6.1-121

COMMENTARY
on the Seisinic Pro · ·ons
for Structural Steel Buildings
Including Supplement No. 1

19. QUALITV ASSURANCE PLAN .

When required by the applicable building code (ABC) or the.engmeer of record,
a quality assurance plan shall be provided. For the steeI portIOn of the construc-
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings March 9, 2005
tion, the provisions ofPart 1, Section 18 apply. Supplement No. 1 dated November 16, 2005

(The Cornmentary is not a part of ANSI!AISC 34 Seismic Provisions for Structural

Steel Buildings, or ANSI!AISC 341s1-05, ~uJ)ple:me* No. 1 to ANSI!AISC 341-05, but is
inc1uded for informational purposes only.)

Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9,2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisionsfor Struciural Steel Buildings, 9,2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
.AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Ne. AMERICAN INsTlTUTE OF STEEL Cor~S~:UCTION, lNe.
 Cornm. Intro.] 6.1-

PART l. STRUC STEEL BUILDINGS

Experience from the 1994 Northridge and 1 Kobe earthquakes significantly expanl
knowledge regarding the seismic response of ~tnlctllral steel building systems, particuh
welded steel momentframes. (Note: Glossary are italicized throughout the Provisi.
and the cornmentary.) Shortly after the earthquake, the SAC Joint Ventl
initiated a comprehensive study of the seismic of steel moment frames. Fun<
by the Federal Emergency Management (FEMA) , SAC developed guidelines
structural engineers, building offiéials, and interested parties for the evaluation, rep
modification, and design of welded steel frame structures in seismic regions. Al
actively participated in the SAC activities.
Many recornmendations in the Recommended Design Criteriajor New Steel Mome
Frame Buildings-FEMA 350 (FEMA, formed the basis for Supplement No. 2
the 1997 AISC Seismic Provisions jor :itruclunzl Steel Buildings (AISC, 1997b, 2000
Supplement No. 2 to the 1997 Provisions was simultaneously and cooperativo
with the revisions to the Building- Seismic Council (BSSC) National Earthqm
Hazard Reduction Program (NEHRP) Accordingly, Supplement No. 2 forrr
the basis for steel seismic design provisions in 2000 NEHRP Provisions (FEMA, 200(
as well as those in the 2000 Intemational Code (!BC) 2002 Supplement, which 1
been published by the Intemational Code C (ICC, 2002).
These 2005 AISC Seismic Provisions jor :itru':ct:unzl Steel Buildings, hereinafter refen
to as the Provisions or ANSIJAISC 341, incorporating the recornmendations
FEMA 350 and other research. While is ongoing, the Committee has prepru
this revision of the Provisions using the best knowledge to date. These Provisic
were being developed in the same time frame a major rewrite of SEllAS CE 7 was bei
accomplished, which has subsequently been and published as the 2005 editi<
Due to this timing, these Provisions adopt the edition of SEIIASCE 7 (ASCE, 2002) 1
are intended to be compatible and used in with the 2005 edition of SEIIASCE
This Cornmentary will thus reference the in the latter (ASCE, 2005).
It is also anticipated that these Provisions be adopted by the Intemational Buildi
Code, 2006 edition, and the National Fire Pr()t~(:tlon Association (NFPA) Building CO(
dated 2005. It is expected that both of these codes will reference SEIJASCE
(ASCE, 2005) for seismic loading and neither
Unlike the previous edition of these Provisions 2002), where LRFD and ASD we
contained separately in Parts I and ID, these Provisions are presented in the sar
unified format as is the AISC 2005 jor Structural Steel Buildings, hereinaft
referred to as the Specification or ANSIIAISC 360 (AISC, 2005). Thus both LRFD al
ASD design methods are incorporated into Part The separate Part ID in the 2002 Seism
Provisions jor Structural Steel Buildings to ASD has been eliminated in this editi<
of the Provisions.

Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN!NSTITUtE OF SfEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Ne.
 PART 1 - SCOPE [Comm.CI. Cornrn.C3.] PART 1 - GENERAL SEISMIC DESIGN RB::>ujRE1V1EtIJTS 6.1-125
6.1-124

Where there is a desire to use these Provisions with a model code that has not yet adopted Previous editions of these Provisions have been to defining requirements
these Provisions, it is essential that ANSI!AISC 360 (AISC, 2005) be used in conjunction for members and connections in the seismic load system (SLRS). This
with these Provisions, as they are companion documents. In addition, users should also edition of the Provisions now includes reqluü:errlerlts for columns not part of the
concurrently use SEI!ASCE 7 (ASCE, 2005) for a fully coordinated package. SLRS in Section 8.4b.

C2. REFERENCED SPECIFICATiONS, __ ., ..

C1. SCOPE
In previous editions of these Provisions and the predecessor specifications to the STANDARDS .
new AlSC Specificationfor Structural Steel Buildings, ANSI!AlSC 360 (AlSC, The specifications, codes and standards re~erence~d in Part I are listed with the
2005), the stated scopes were limited to buildings. InANSI!AISC 360, the scope appropriate revision date in this section or Section of ANSI!AISC 360. Since
was expanded to inc1ude other structures designed, fabricated, and erected in a the Provisions act as a supplement to ANSI!
manner similar to buildings, with building-like vertical and lateralload-resisting Section A2 of ANSI!AISC 360 are not repeated
elements. Thus the scope of these Provisions has been modified for consistency
with ANSI!AlSC 360. For simplicity we will refer to steel building s and struc- C3. GENERAL SEISMIC DESIGN R
tures interchangeably throughout this cornmentary. When designing structures to resist earthquake each structure is cat-
egorized based upon its occupancy and use to the potential earthquake
It should be noted that these provisions were developed specifically for
hazard that it represents. Determining the available differs significantly
buildings. The Provisions, therefore, may not be applicable, in whole or in part,
in each specification orbuilding codeo The purpose of these Provisions
to sorne nonbuilding structures that do not have the building-like characteris-
is to pro vide information necessary to determine the required and available
tics described in the paragraph aboye. Extrapolation of their use to such non-
strengths of steel structures. The following provides a basic overview
building structures should be done with due consideration of the inherent differ-
of how several· seismic codes or specifications structures and how
ences between the response characteristics of buildings and these nonbuilding
they determine the required strength and stiffuess. the variables required to
structures. assign seismic design categories, limitations of vertical and horizontal
Structural steel systems in seismic regions are generally expected to dissipate irregularities, site characteristics, etc., the building code should be
seismic input energy through controlled inelastic deformations of the structure. consulted.
These Provisions supplement ANSI!AlSC 360 for such applications. The seis-
In SEI!ASCE 7 (AS CE, 2005), structures are to one of four occupancy
"'0303JL<:.UO,'"
mic design loads specified in the building codes have been developed consider-
categories. Category IV, for example, inc1udes facilities. Structures are
ing the energy dissipation generated during inelastic response.
then assigned to a seismic use group based upon occupancy categories and
The Provisions are intended to be mandatory for structures where ANSI!AlSC the seismicity of the site. Seismic design categories B, and C are generally ap-
341 has been specifically referenced when defining an R factor in SEI!AS CE 7 plicable to structures with moderate seismic risk special seismic provisions
(ASCE, 2005). Typically this occurs in seismic design category D and aboye, like those in these Provisions are optional. special seismic provisions
where the R factor is greater than 3. However, there are instances where an R are mandatory in seismic design categories D, E, F, which cover areas of
factor of less than 3 is assigned to a system and ANSI!AISC 341 is still required. high seismic risk.
These limited cases occur in Table 12.2-1 (ASCE, 2005) for cantilevered col-
For nonseismic applications, story drift limits like 41eJtlec;ticm limits, are com-
umn systems and Table 15.4-1 for intermediate and ordinary moment frames
monly used in design to ensure the serviceability of structure. These limits
with height increases. For these systems with R factors les s than 3, the use of
vary because they depend upon the structural usage contents. As an example,
these Provisions is required. In general, for structures in seismic design category
for wind 10ads such serviceability limit states are as a matter of engi-
A to C the designer is given a choice to either solely use ANSI!AISC 360 and the
neeringjudgment rather than absolute design limits and West, 1990) and
R factor given for structural steel buildings not specifically detailed for seismic
no specific design requirements are given in the or the Provisions.
resistance (typically, a factor of 3) or the designer may choose to assign a higher
R factor to a system detailed for seismic resistance and follow the requirements The situation is somewhat different when COIlsic!eriing seismic effects. Research
of these Provisions. has shown that story drift limits, although primarily to serviceability, also
improve frame stability (P-~ effects) and seismic because of the
resulting additional strength and stiffness. Although building codes, load
standards and resource docurrients contain specific . drift limits, there
lA joint venture of the Structural Engineers Association of California (SEAOC), Applied Technology (ATC), are major differences among them as to how the is specified and applied.
and California Universities for Research in Earthquake Engineering (CUREe).

Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1 Seismic ProvisionsforStructural Steel Buildings, March 9,2005,
AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INc. AMERICAN INSTITUTE ÓF STEEL CONSTRUCTION,

_~~. ___________
. _,.-.-.L-.. --------~----------
6.1-126 PART 1 - GENERAL SEISMIC DESIGN REQUIREMENTS [Cornm.C3. Cornm. C3.] PART 1 - GENERAL SEISMIC DESIGN REI~UIJllil\1E1~TS 6.1-127

Nevertheless, drift control is important to both the serviceability and the stability
R design factor used to determine the seismic loads applicable to
of the structure. As a minimum, the designer should use the drift limits specified
the structural system as defined in the building code
in the applicable building codeo
di calculated lateral drift at the center rigidity of story i, when the
The analytical model used to estimate building drift should accurately account design seismic loads are applied in the under consideration,
for the stiffness of the frame elements and connections and other structural and in. (mm)
nonstructural elements that materially affect the drift. Recent research on steel Vyi = total plastic lateral shear restoring in the direction under
moment frame connections indicates that in most cases panel zone deformations consideni.tion at story i, kips (N)
have little effect on analytical estimates of drift and need not be explicitly mod- The plastic story shear quantity, Vyi , should be det,etnlÍllf!d by methods of plastic
eled (FEMA, 2000f). In cases where nonlinear element deformation demands analysis. However, Vyi may be approximately from the equation:
are of interest, panel zone shear behavior should be represented in the analytical
2I,M G
model whenever it significantly affects the state of deformation at a beam-to- j=l P j
column connection. Mathematical models for the behavior of the panel zone in H
(C3-2)
terms of shear force-shear distortion relationships have been proposed by many
when the following conditions apply:
researchers. FEMA 355C presents a good discussion of how to incorporate panel
zone deformations in to the analytical model (FEMA, 2000f). (1) AH beam-column connections meet the strong OOJIUrrm-WeaK··beam criterion
in the story,
Adjustment of connection stiffness is usually not required for connections tra-
ditionally considered as fixed, although FEMA 350 (FEMA, 2000a) contains (2) The same number of moment-resisting bays is at the top and bottom
recommendations for adjusting calculated drift for frames with reduced bearn of the frame, and
sections. Nonlinear models should contain nonlinear elements where plastic (3) The strength of girders, rnoment-connected at ends, at the top and bot-
hinging is expected to properly capture the inelastic deformation of the frame. torn of the frame is similar,
The story drift limits in SEIJASCE 7 (ASCE, 2002) and the 2000 NEHRP Provi- where
sions (FEMA, 2000g) are to be compared to an amplified story drift that approxi- the plastic moment capacity of ''j'' participating in the
mates the difference in deflection between the top and bottorn of the story under moment-resisting framing at the floor on top of the story, and
consideration during a large earthquake. The amplified story drift is determined n the number of moment-tesisting girders the framing at the floor
by multiplying the elastic drift caused by the horizontal component of the earth- level on top of the story .
quake load E by a deflection amplification factor Cd , which is dependent upon
the type of building system used. In any story in which all colurrms do not meet the SIT'Onl[-COlllmn-weak-beam cri-
terion, the plastic story shear quantity, Vyi may be from the equation:
The following discussion pertains primarily to moment frames (FEMA, 2000a);
although other systems where high lateral drifts may occur require a similar
analysis. Each story of the structure should be investigated to ascertain that lat- (C3-3)
eral drifts induced by earthquake response do not result in a condition of instabil- where
ity under gravity loads. The analysis of the structure should explicitly consider m the number of colurrms in the m()mt~nt··re~;llstmQ framing in the story
the geometric nonlinearity introduced by P-d effects. The quantity \jIi should be imder consideration
calculated for each story for each direction of response, as follows: ~Ck = the plastic moment capacity of each "k", participating in the
moment-resisting framing, considering axial load present on the
'1'. PRd. colurnn
= _ 1_ _1
(C3-1)
1 V.H
yl
where For other conditions, the quahtity VYi should be ca]:cullate:d by plastic mechanism
H height of story, which may be taken as the distance between the center- analysis, considering the vertical distributioIi of loads on the structure.
line of floor framing at each of the levels aboye and below, or the Thequantity \jIi is the ratio of the effective story produced by first order
distance between the top of floor slabs at each of the levels aboye and P-d effects at the calculated story drift to the restoring force in the
below, in. (mm) structure. When this ratio has a value greater than 1 ,the structure does not
portion of the total weight of the structure inc1uding dead, permanent have enough strength to resist the P-A induced shear torces and may collapse
live, and 25 percent of transient live loads acting on all of the columns in a sidesway mechanism. It the ratio is less than 1 the restoring force in
within story level i, kips (N) the structure exceeds the storyshear due to P-d and, unless additional
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9,2005,
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRucrrON, !Ne.
AMERICAN lNsTrruTE OF STEEL CONSlRUcrrON, !Nc.
6.1-128 PART 1 - GENERAL SEISMIC DESIGN REQUIREMENTS [Comm.C3.
displacement is induced or lateral loads applied, the structure should not col-
lapse. Given the uncertainty associated with predicting significance of P-fl ef-
fects, it is recornmended that when 'I'¡ in a story exceeds 0.3, the structure be
considered unstable, unless a detailed global stability capacity evaluation for the
structure, considering P-fl effects, is conducted.
P-fl effects can have a significant impact on the ability of structures to resist
collapse when subjected to strong ground shaking. When the nondimensional
quantity, 'I'¡, calculated in accordance with Equation C3-1 significantly exceeds
a value of about 0.1, the instantaneous stiffness of the structure can be signifi-
cantly decreased, and can effectively become negative. If earthquake induced
displacements are sufficiently large to create negative instantaneous stiffness,
collapse is likely to occur.
Analyses reported in FEMA 355F (FEMA, 2000f) included direct consideration
of P-fl effects in determining the ability of regular, well configured frames de-
signed to modero code provisions to resist P-fl - induced instability and P-fl-
induced collapse. For regular, well-configured structures, if the value of'l' is
maintained within the limits indicated in this section (in other words, 0.3 or
less), P-fl- induced instability is unlikely to occur. Values of'l' greater than this
limit suggest that instability due to P-fl effects is possible. In such cases, the
frame should be redesigned to provide greater resistance to P-fl- induced insta-
bility unless explicit evaluation of these effects using the detailed performance
evaluation methods outlined in Appendix A of FEMA 350 (FEMA, 2000a) are
performed.
The evaluation approach for P-fl effects presented in this section appears similar
to but actually differs substantially from that contained in FEMA 302 (FEMA,
1997a) and in use in building codes for many years. The approach contained
in FEMA 302 and the building codes was an interim formulation. Research in-
dicates that this interim approach was not meaningful. Sorne of this research
included the explicit evaluation of P-fl effects for buildings of varying heights,
subjected to many different types of ground motion and designed using differ-
ent building code provisions. Using these and other parameters, several tens of
thousands of nonlinear analyses were run to investigate P-fl effects. Extensive
additional discussion on the issue of P-d effects and their importance in the
response of structures at large interstory drifts is contained in FEMA 355C
(FEMA, 2000d).
Any of the methods in the Specification Chapter C or Appendix 7 can be used
to assess the stability of frames in high seismic regions. When using the equiva-
lent lateral load procedure for seismic design and the direct analysis provisions
in Specification Appendix 7, the reduced stiffness and notional load provisions
should not be included in the calculation of the fundamental period of vibration
or the evaluation of seismic drift limits.
Like most of the provisions in the main specification, the stability requirements
of the Specification are intended for cases where the strength limit state is based
on the nominal elastic-plastic limit in the most critical members and connections
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INc.
Comm. C4.] PART 1 - LOADS, LOADS COMBINATIONS, AND NO AL STRENGlliS 6.1-129
(for example, the "first hing'e" limit point), not to nsure stability under seismic
loads where large inelastic deformations are exp cted. Thus, the provisions of
Appendix 7 do not alone ensure stability under eismic loads. Stability under
seismic loads is synonymous with collapse prev ntion, which is provided for
in the prescriptive design n!~quirements given for each system, including such
elements as:
(1) The basic determinatÚm of the seismic d sign force (R factors, site
effects, p-factors, etc.) ,
(2) The drift limits under the seismic lateral load (a factor of both the limiting
drift and the specified Cd factor)
(3) The "theta" limits (sidesway stability collapse prevention)
(4) Other design requirements, such as strong- olumn weak-beam require-
ments, limitations on bracing configurations, te.
C4. LOADS, LOAD COMBINATIONS, A D NOMINAL
STRENGTHS
The Provisions give member and element load r quirements that supplement
those in the applicable building code. In the 2002 Se mic Provisions for Structur-
al Steel Buildings, where element forces were defin d by the strength of another
element, the additional requfrements of the Provisi ns were typically expressed
as required strengths. In order to accornmodate bo LRFD and ASD, these Pro-
visions instead give two required "available streng s," one for LRFD and one
for ASD. ["Available strength" is the term used in SI!AISC 360 (AISC, 2005)
to cover both design strength (LRFD) and allowabl strength (ASD).]
In sorne instances, the loads defined in the Provisi ns must be combined with
other loads. In such cases, the Provisions simply define the seismic load E,
which is combined with other loads using the app priate load factor from the
seismic load combinations in the applicable buildin code, and thus both LRFD
and ASD are supported. Theearthquake load, E, is e combination of the hori-
zontal seismic load effect and an approxirrtation of e effect due to the vertical
accelerations that accompany the horizontal earthq e effects.
The Provisions are intended for use with load combi ations given in the applica-
ble building codeo However, since they are written ~ r consistency with the load
combinations given in SEI!ASCE 7 (ASCE, 2005) d IBC 2003 (ICC, 2003),
consistency with the applicable building code sho Id be confirmed if another
building code is applicable.
The engineer is expected to u~e these Provisions in c njunction with ANSI!AISC
360. Typically, the Provisions do not define available s engths. In certain locations,
the designer is directed to specific limit states or prov· ions in ANSJ/AISC 360.
An amplification or overstrength factor, no, applied to the horizontal portion of
the earthquake load, E, is prescribed in S1;':I!ASCE 7 (ASCE, 2002), the 2003
IBC, the 2003 NEHRP Provisions and the NFPA 000 provisions. However,
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, i el. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON,
6.1-130 PART 1 - LOADS, LOAD COMBINATIONS, AND NOMINAL STRENGTHS [Cornm. C4. Comm. C6.]
PART 1 - MATERIALS
6.1-131
these codes do not all express the load combinations that incorporate this factor
(7) The proteeted zone is immediately around
in exactly the same format. In the future, when all codes adopt SEIIAS CE 7 by plastic hinging region. Dn-
anticipated connections, attachments, or
reference, it will be possible to directly reference the appropriate combinations may interfere with the
formation of the hinge or initiate a Because the location of the
within these Provisions. When used in these Provisions, the tem1 amplified seis-
protected Zone depends upon the hiqge
mie load is intended to refer to the appropriate load combinations in the appli- which may vary, the extent
of the protected ZOne must be identified.
cable building code that accoilllt for overstrength of members of the seismie load
resisting system. The load combinations containing the overstrength factor, no, (8) Where brace connections are designed using
should be used where these Provisions require use of the amplified seismic load. they require special detailing as illustrated .
In the mc (ICC, 2003) these are Equations 16-9 and 16-10 and in SEIIASCE 7 nections must be identified in the structural drawings.
(ASCE, 2005) they are found in Section 12.4.3.2. SEIIASCE 7 provides different
requirements for addressing such effects for different seismie design eategories; (9) Appendix W, Section W2.1 provides an aqlClItllonaJ listing of items re-
orthogonal effects are required to be considered for aH but the lowest seismic garding welded details that must be nrr,ui,1",rI These items have been
design categories. separately listed, as it is anticipated that items will be included in
a new standard under development that aqClres:ses welding in seismic
applications.
cs. STRUCTURAL OESIGN ORAWINGS ANO
SPECIFICATIONS, SHOP ORAW-INGS, ANO C6. MATERIALS
ERECTION ORAWINGS C6.1. Material Specifications
CS.1 Structural Oesign Orawings and Specifications ~e Structural steels that are explicitly permitted for use in seismic applica-
(1) To ensure proper understanding of the contract requirements and the ap- hons have been selected based upon their inelastic . and weldability. In
plication of the design, it is necessary to identify the specific types of general, they meet the following characteristics: ( a pronounced stress-strain
seismie load resisting system (SLRS) or systems used on the project. In plateau at the yield' stress; (2) a large inelastic capability (for example,
this ínanner, those involved know the applicable requirements of the tensile elongation of 20 percent or greater in a (50 mm) gage length); and
Provisions. (3) good weldability. Other steels should not be without evidence that
(2) The special design, construction and quality requirements of the Provisions, the aboye criteria are met. For structural wide shapes, ASTM A992 and
compared to the general requirements of the Speeifieation, are applicable to ASTM A913 Supplement S75 provide a further on the ratio of yield
the SLRS. The quality assurance plan is prepared to address the require- stress to tensile stress to be not greater than 0.85.
ments of the SLRS, not the structure as a whole. Therefore, it is necessary A1011 HSLAS Grade 55 (380) was added as an aptjro1{ed steel for seismic load
to clearly designate which members and connections comprise the SLRS. resisting systems, since it meets the inelastic and weldability require-
ments noted aboye.
(3) It is necessary to designate working points and connection type(s), and any
other detailing requitements for the connections in the SLRS. While ASTM A709/A709M steel is primarily used the design and COnstruc-
(4) Provide information as to the steel specification and grade of the steel ele- tion of bridges, it could also be used in building <fOl1St:J:uctioln. Written as an
ments that comprise the connection, the size and tbickness of those ele- umbrella specification, its grades are essentially the of other approved
ments, weld material size, strength classification and required CVN tough- ASTM specifications. For example, ASTM A709/ Grade 50 (345) is es-
ness, and bolt material diameter and grade, as weH as bolted joint type. sentially ASTM A572/A572M Grade 50 (345) and A709/A709M Grade
50W (345W) is essentially ASTM A588/A588M
(5) Demand critieal welds are identified in the Provisions for each type of ASTM A709/A709M material should be treated as
SLRS. Demand critical welds have special Charpy V-Notch (CVN) tough- proved ASTM material grade.,
ness and testing requirements to ensure that this notch toughness will be
provided. The limitation on the specified minimum yield stress for members expecting in-
elastic action refers to inelastic action under the of the design earthquake.
(6) The majority of welded connection applications in buildings are in tem- The 50 ksi (345 MPa) limitation on the specified yield stress for mem-
perature-controHed settings. Where connections are subjected to tempera- bers was restricted to Sections 9, 10, 12, 13, 15, 1 and 17 for those systems
tures of less than 50°F (10 oC) during service, additional requirements for expected to undergo moderate to significant action, while a 55 ksi
welding filler metals are necessary for demand critical welds to ensure ad- (380 MPa) limitation was assigned to Sections 11 and 4, since those systems are
equate resistance to fracture at the lower setvice temperatures. expected to undergo limited inelastic action. steels of higher strength,

Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INSTITU1E OF STEEL CONSTRUCI10N, INC. Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, . Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INSTITU1E OF STEEL CONSTRUCI10N,
6.1-132 PART 1 - MATERlALS [Cornm.C6.
such as A913 Grade 65 (450), are generally considered to have properties
acceptable for seismic column applications. The listed steels conforming
to ASTM AlOll with a yield of 55 ksi (380 MPa) are ineluded as they have
adequate ductility considering their limited thickness range. This steel is
cornmonly used by the metal building industry in built-up sections.
Conformance with the material requirements of the Speeifieation is satisfied by
the testing performed in accordance with ASTM provisions by the manufacturero
Supplemental or independent material testing is only required for material that
cannot be identified or traced to a material test report and materials used in quali-
fication testing, according to Appendix S of the Provisions.
C6.2. Material Properties for Determination of Required
Strength of Members and Connections
The Provisions employ a methodology for many seismic systems (for example,
speeial moment frames, special eoneentrieally braeed frames, and eeeen~rieal­
ly braeed frames) that can be characterized as "capacity design." That IS, the
required strength of most elements is defined by forces corresponding to the
expected capacity (available strength) of certain designated yielding members
(for example, the link in eccentrically braced frames). This methodology serves
to confine ductility demands to members that have specific requirements to en-
sure their ductile behavior; furthermore, the methodology serves to ensure that
within that member the desired, ductile mode of yielding govems and other,
nonductile modes are preeluded.
Such a capacity-design methodology requires a realistic estimate of the expect-
ed strength of the designated yielding members. To this end, the expeeted yield
strengths of various steel materials have been established by a survey of mill cer-
tificates, and the ratio of expected to nominal yield strength has been ineluded in
the Provisions as "Ry-" The expected capacity of the designated yielding member
is defined as R times the nominal strength of the member based on the desired
yield mode; thls expected strength is amplified to account for strain-hardening
in sorne cases. For determination of the required strength of adjoining elements
and their connection to the designated yielding members, neither the resistance
factor (LRFD), nor the safety factor (ASD), are applied to the strength of the
designated yielding members.
Where the capacity-design methodology is employed to preelude nonductile
C6.3.
modes of failure within the designated yielding member, it is reasonable to use
the expected material strength in the determination of the member capacity. For
limit states based on yield, the factor Ry applies equally to the designated yield-
ing member capacity used to compute the required strength and ~o the s~~ng~
with respect to the limit states to be preeluded. An example of thlS condltlon IS
yielding of the beam outside the link in an eccentrically braced frame; the re-
quired strength is based on yield of the link beam, and yield limit states, such as
combined flexure and compression, can be expected to be similarly affected by
increased material strength. The factor Ry is not applied to members other than
the designated yielding member.
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, ¡nel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INc.
Comm. C6.]
PART 1 - MATERlALS
6.1-l33
Similarly, fracture limit states within the designa ed yielding member are affect-
ed by increased material strength. Such limit s es inelude block shear rupture
and net section rupture of braces in special eone ntrieally braeed frames, where
the required strength is calculated based on th brace expected yield strength
in tension. The ratio of expeeted tensile streng over the specified minimum
tensile strength is somewhat less than that of e pected yield strength over the
specified minimum yield strength, so a separate f ctor was created called Rt. This
factor applies only to fracture limit states in desi nated yielding members. As is
the case with Ry , R¡ is applied in the determinatio of the capacity of designated
yielding members and not the capacity of other embers.
The specified values of Ry for rolled shapes are s mewhat lower than those that
can be calculated using the mean values reported' the Structural Shape Produc-
ers Council survey. Those values were skewed s mewhat by the inclusion of a
large number of smaller members, which typicall have a higher measured yield
stress than the larger members cornmon in seismi designo The given values are
considered to be reasonable averages, although it .s recognized that they are not
maxima. The expected yield strength, RyFy, can e determined by testing con-
ducted in accordance with the requirements for th specified grade of steel. Such
an approach should only be followed in unusual ases where there is extensive
evidence that the values of Ry are significantIy un onservative. It is not expected
that this would be the approach followed for typi al building projects. Refer to
ASTM A370 for testing requirements. The highe values of Ry for ASTM A36/
A36M (Ry = 1.5) and ASTM A572/A572M Grade 2 (290) (Ry = 1.3) shapes are
indicative of the most recentIy reported propertie of these grades of steel. The
values of Ry will be periodically monitored to e sure that current production
practice is properly reflected.
An AISC study prepared byLiu (Liu, 2003) was u ed in determining the R¡ val-
ues shown in Table 1-6-1. These values are based n the mean value of R¡/Ry for
individual samples. Mean values are considered t be sufficiently conservative
for these calculations considering that they are ap lied along with a <l> factor of
0.75. An additional analysi~ of tensile data was c 'ed out (Harrold, 2004) to
determine appropriate Ry and R¡ factors for ASTM A529 Grade 50 (345), A529
Grade 55 (380), A1011 HSLAS Grade 55 (380), an A572 Grade 55 (380) steels,
that were added to Table 1-6.,.1.
Heavy Section CVN Requirements
The Speeifieation requirements for notch toughnes cover hot-rolled shapes with
a flange thickness exceeding 2 in. (50 mm) and p ate elements with thickness
that is greater than or equal to 2 in. (50 mm) in tensi n applications. In the Provi-
sions, this requirement is extended to cover: (1) sha es that are part ofthe SLRS
with flange thickness greater than or equal to 1lh in. (38 mm); and, (2) plate
elements with thickness greater than or equal to 2 i (50 mm) that are part of the
SLRS, such as the flanges of buiIt-up girders and c nnection material subject to
ineIastic strain under seismicloading. Because sm er shapes and thinner pIates
are generally subjected to sufficient cross-sectional reduction during the rolling
Seismic Provisions for Structural SteelBuildings, Mareh 9, 2005, .nel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, C.
 PART 1 - MATERIALS
process such that the resulting notch toughness will.exceed that r~uired aboye
(Cattan, 1995), specific requirements have not been meluded herem.
The requirements of this section may not be nece.ss~ for members that .resist
only incidental loads. For example, a des.igner mlght mclud~ a me~ber m the
SLRS to develop a more robust load path, but the member wIlI expenence ~nly
. . nificant level of seismic demando An example of such a member IDlght
an mSlg .. . d b .t
inelude a transfer girder with thick plates where its deslgn IS d~IDlnat~ .y 1 S
gravl.ty 1oad demand. It would be inconsistent witb the intent of thIS sectIOn
. . 1If the
designer were to arbitrarily exclude a member with ~sig~1ificant seIsmlC oa s
from the SLRS that would otherwise improve the se~sIDl~ perf~rmance of th~
building in order to avoid the toughness requirements m ~IS sectIOn. The Specz-
fication requirements noted aboye would still apply in thIS case.
For rotary-straightened W-shapes, an area of redu.ced notc~ toughness has been
documented in a limited region of the web immedtately adJacent to the flange as
illustrated in Figure C-I-6.1. Recommendations issued by AIS~ (AISC, 1997a)
were followed up by a series of industry sponsored research proJects ~Kaufmann:
Metrovich and Pense, 2001; Uang and Chi, 2001; Kaufm~n and FIsh~r, 2001,
Lee, Cotton, Dexter, Hajjar, Ye and Ojard, 2002; Bartlett, Jelmek, SChIDldt, De~-
ter, Graeser an d Galambos, . This research generally corroborates AISC s
2001)
initial findings and recommendations.
Early investigations of connection fractures in the 1994 Northridge earth~uake
identified a number of fractures that sorne speculated were ~e result of ma~­
equate through-thickness strength of the column flange matenal. As a result, m
the period immediately following the Northridge ~~quake, a number of rec-
ommendations were promulgated that suggested hIDltmg the value of ~ough­
thickness stress demand on column flanges to ensure that through-thlckness
J similar requirement has been ineluded in, the Los ngeles City building code
~~
/
1- to 11ft-
Ama o, potenlially low8r
(25 mm to 38 mm)
notch toughness in rotary-
v~~--
~L-r---I-
J
Fig. C-I-6.1. "k-area."
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcrrON, mc.
[Cornm.C6. Cornm.C7.]
PART 1 - CONNECTIONS, JOINTS, AND F STENERS
6.1-135
yielding did not initiate in the column flanges. is limit state often controlled
the overall design of thes~ connections; Howev r, the actual cause for the frac-
tures that were initially thought to be through- ickness faHures of the column
flange are now considered to be unrelated to .s material property. Detailed
fracture mechanics investigations conducted as art of the FEMNSAC project
confirm that damage initially identified as throu· h thickness faHures is likely to
have occurred as a result of certain combination of filler metal and base mate-
d rial strength and notch toughness, conditions of s ess in the cOnllection, and the
presence of critical flaws in the welded joint. In ddition to the analytical stud-
ies, extensive through-thickness testing conducte specifically to determine the
susceptibility to through thickness failures of mo em column materials meeting
ASTM A572, Grade 50 and ASTM A913, Grade 5 specifications did riot result
in significant through-thickness fractures (FEMA 2000h).
In addition, none ofthe more than 100 full scale t sts on "Post-Northridge" con-
nection details have demonstrated any through-thi kness column fractures. This
combined analytical and laboratory research ele ly shows that due to the high
restraint inherent in welded beam flange to colu flange joints, the through
thickness yield and tensile strengths of the colu material are significantIy
elevated in the region of the connection. For the odem materials tested, these
strengths significantIy exceed those loads that c be delivered to the column
by the beam flange. For this reason, no limits ar suggested for the throtigh-
thickness strength of the base material by the FE SAC program or in these
Provisions.
The preceding discussion assumes that no signific t laminations, inelusions or
other discontinuities Occur in regions adjacent to w lded beam flange-to-column
flange joints and other tee and comer joints. App ndix Q, Section Q5.2(2)(c),
checks the integrity of this material after welding. A more conservative approach
would be to ultrasonically test the material for la .nations prior to welding. A
since 1973; however, in practice the base. material prior to welding passes the
ultrasonic eXamination, and interior defects, if an are found only after heat-
ing and cooling during the weld process. Should a oncem exist, the ultrasonic
inspection prior to welding should be conducted to STM A435 for plates and
ASTM A898, level1, for shapes.
C7.
CONNECTIONS, JOINTS, ANO FAS ENERS
C7.1. Scope
The requirement that design of a connection of a m mber in a seismic load re-
sisting system (SLRS) ensures a ductile limit state ha been moved from the sec-
tion on bolted joints to the Scope section, since this quirement applies to both
bolted and welded joints. Tension or shear fracture, olt shear, and block shear
rupture are exainples of limit states that generally re ult in nonductile failure of
connections. As such, these lilnit states are undesira le as the controlling limit
state for connections that are part of the SURS. Acc rdingly, it is required that
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel B~ildings, Mareh '9, 2005, in l. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN mSTITUTE OF STEEL CONsTRucrrON, IN
6.1-136 PART 1 - CONNECTIONS, JOINTS, AND FASTENERS [Cornm. C7. Comm.C7.]
6.1-137

connections be configured such that a ductile lirnit state in the member or connec-
To preve~t excessive deformations ofboltedjoints to bearing on the connect-
tion, such as yielding or bearing deformation, controls the available strength. ~d m.atenal, the bearing strength is limited by the
t S -considered" op-
C7.2. Bolted Joints ~o~ m. pecification Section 13.10 (Rn =2.4dtFu). philosophical intent ofthis
The potential for fuIl reversal of design load and the likelihood of inelastic defor- hIDltatlOn in the Specification is to limit the
deformation to an approxi-
mations of members andlor connected parts necessitates that pretensioned bolts mate maximum of lA in. (6 mm). It should be rec:ogl!üz;ed. however, that the actual
be used in boltedjoints in the SLRS. However, earthquake motions are such that bearing load in a seismic event may be much larger th
d at anticipated in design
slip cannot and need not be prevented in aH cases, even with slip-critical con- an the actual deformation of holes may exceed theoreticallimit. Nonethe-
nections. Accordingly, the Provisions call for bolted joints to be proportioned as less, this limit should effectiveIy minim1'ze .
m moderate seismic events.
pretensioned bearing joints but with faying surfaces prepared as for Class A or These pr~v~sions have expanded the prohibition boIts in combination with
better slip-critical connections. That is, bolted connections can be proportioned welds res1stmg a common force The 2002 h'b' d b 1
with available strengths for bearing connections as long as the faying surfaces f h' .'. pro lIte o ts and welds
rom s anng Ioads on a common faying surface. Due to the potential of fuIl
are stiIl prepared to provide a minimum slip coefficient, 11 = 0.35. The resulting load reversal and the likeIihood of ineIastic . .
nominal amount of slip resistance will minimize damage in more moderate seis- l b 1 . m connectmg pIate
e ements, o ts may exceed their slip resistances significant" l d
mic events. This requirement is intended for joints where the faying surface is WeId th t . se1sm1C oa s.
~ a are m a common shear plane to these will IikeIy not deform
primarily subjected to shear. Where the faying surface is primarily subjected to suffic1entIy to allow the boIts to slip into bearing 'f b' 1
, 1 su ~ect to oad
tension or compression, for example, in a bolted end plate moment connection, reversa.1 Consequently the weIds will tend to t' + d .
'f . en 1re J.orce an may falI
the requirement on preparation of the faying surfaces may be relaxed. 1 they were not designed as such. These have b d'fi d
h1'b'1t boIts from sharing a common force with . alI"
een mo 1 e to pro-
'.
To prevent excessive deformations of bolted joints due to slip between the con- . . . • m SltuatlOns. WhIle th1S
nected plies under earthquake motions, the use of holes in bolted joints in the v.:0~Id St1~I prOh1blt sharing Ioads on a common surface it wouId aIso ro-
h1b1t shanng of a common force between . th "P
SLRS is limited to standard holes and short-slotted holes with the direction of For examp1e, bracmg . m o er cond1uons
connections at beam . . t f .
the slot perpendicular to the line of force. Exceptions are provided for altemative h th Jom s are o ten configured
hole types that are justified as a part of a tested assembly and for oversized holes suc at the vertical component of the brace is by a combination of both
in brace diagonals. the gusset ~d beam web connections to the (see Figures C-I-7.1a and
C-I-7.1b). Smce these two elements are in a shear plan 'th l' . d
A change from the 2002 Provisions is the acceptance of the use of oversized defo f bT . e W1 1IDlte
rm~ l?n capa 1 1ty, if one element were and the other boIted the
holes in braced connections of diagonal members subject to certain limitations. weIded Jomt wouId likeIy resist all the force By the co t' f 'h
As reported in FEMA 355D, bolted joints with oversized holes in tested moment el t th . nnec IOn o tese
emen s to e column either both bolted or both b th l
connections were found to behave as fuIl stiffness connections for most practical rk 1 . . . o e ements would
1. e y hpartlc1pate m resisting .the force. SimiIarly, e flang bracmg . connec-
applications. Bracing connections with oversized holes in bolted connections tlOns s ouId not be designed such that boIted web . h . "
should behave similarly. The design of the brace connections with oversized th . 11 d . . s are m res1sung
e aX1a oa s Wlth welded flanges (or vice versa).
holes as slip-critical will provide additional tolerance for field connections, yet
Bolts in one element of a member may be designed
should remain as slip-resistant for most seismic events. If the bolts did slip in
the oversized holes in an extreme situation, the connections should still behave ti?n v.:hile other elements may be connected by welds
d1rectlOn or shear planeo For exampIe, a beam
similar to fuIl stiffness connections. Interstory drifts may also increase slightly connected to a column
if bolts slip, and the effect of bolt slip should be considered in drift calcula- may use weIded flanges to traIisfer flexure andlor loads, whiIe a boIted web
tions. In order to minimize the amount of slip, oversized holes for bolts should connection transfers the beam shear. Similarly, splices may transfer axial
Ioads andlor flexure through flange weIds WI'th hOri:Z0I1W shear in the column web
be limited to one ply of the connection. For large diameter bolts, the amount of
slippage could also be minimized by limiting the bolt hole size to a maximum of transferred through a boIted web connection. In both these cases there shouId be
YI6 in. greater than the bolt diameter, rather than the fuH range permitted by the adequate deformation capability between the flange web connections to allow
the bolts to resist Ioads in bearing independent of the
Specification. When using oversized holes with slip-critical bolts, the effect of
the reduced slip capacities of bolts in oversized holes should be considered. The The provisions do not prohibit the use of erecu'on
on a fieId weIded connec-
reduction of pretension results in a lower static slip load, but the overall behavior tion such as a web shear tab in a wide flange moment rlQl!1ne:ctIon.
'1 In this instance
of connections with oversized holes has been shown to be similar to those with the bolts wouId resist the temporary erect¡'on loads , the weIds wouId need to
standard holes (Kulak, Fisher and Struik, 1987). be designed to resist the entire anticipated force in eIement.

Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005,
AMERICAN INslITUTE OF STEEL CONsTRUcnON, lNc. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONsTRucnON,
6.1-138 PART 1 - CONNECTIONS, JOINTS, AND FASTENERS [Cornm. C7.
·C7.3. Welded Joints
The general requirements for welded joints are given in AWS D 1.1 (AWS, 2004),
wherein a welding procedure specification (WPS) is required for all welds. Ap-
proval by the engineer of record of the WPS to be used is required in these
provisions. These provisions invoke additional requirements for welding in the
seismic load resisting system (SLRS) per Appendix W.
As in previous provisions, weld metal notch toughness is required in all welds
in merp.bers and connections in the load path of the SLRS. These provisions
furtherdesignate certain welds as demand critica) welds, and require that these
welds be made with filler metals that meet minimum levels of Charpy V-Notch
(CVN) toughness using two different test temperatures and specified test pro-
tocols. Welds designated as demandcritical welds are specified elsewhere in
e.J.p.
@
FlANGES
® A bolted web connection may be designed to resist column shear while welded flanges resist
axial and/or flexural torces.
® Conneetion using both gusset and beam web welded to column allows both elements to
participate in resisting the vertical component ot the brace force. Note erection bolts may be used
to support beam temporarily.
© Flanges and web are both welded to resist axial force in combination. Bolts are tor erection only.
@ Both web of beam and gussets are bolted to column allowing sharlng ot vertical and horizontal
torces.
® A stub detall allows both gusset·and beam web to be shop welded to column. Flanges ot
suPported beam may be welded to transter flexural and axial torces.
® For beam moment connections, bolted webs can resist shear while welded flanges resist flexural
and axial torces. (Moment connections must meet the requlrements ot Sections 9, 10, or 11 ot
the provisions as required.)
Fig. C-I-7.1a. Desirable details that avoid sharedforces between welds and bolts.
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9,2005, ¡nel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN lNSTITUI'E OF S'IEEL CONSTRUCIlON, INc.
Cornm. C7.] PART 1 - CONNECTIONS, JOINTS, ANO FA TENERS 6.1-139
designate certain welds as demand criti~al welds and require that these welds
be made with filler metals that meet minimum ley Is of Charpy V-Notch (CVN)
toughness using two different test temperatures and specified test protocols.
Welds designated as demand critical welds are sp cified elsewhere in the provi-
sions in the section applicable to the specific SL S. Demand critical welds are
generally complete-joint-penetration groove (C ) welds so designated based
on expected yield level or higher stress demand, r are those weIds the faiIure
of which would result in significant degradation i the strength and stiffness of
the SLRS.
For demand critical welds, FEMA 350 (FEMA, 20 Oa) and 353 (FEMA, 2000d)
recommended filler metal that compIied with mini um Charpy V-Notch (CVN)
requirements using two test temperatures and spe .fied test protocols. The Pro-
visions include the dual CVN requirement sugges ed in the FEMA documents
but require a Iower temperature than the FEMA re ommendations for the AWS
A5 classification method [in other words, minus 2 °F (minus 29 oC) rather than
O °F (minus 18 0C)]. Although successful testing at either temperature wouId
ensure that sorne ductile tearir·g would occur before nal fracture, use of this Iower
temperature is consistent with the filler metal u ed in the SACIFEMA tests
® Brace or column members should not be designed with combination
of bolted web and welded flanges resisting axial forces.
® Brace connections to columns with gussets welded to e column and
the beam web bolted to the column will transfer forces ifferently from
all-welded or all-bolted connections. The welded joint o the gusset to
the column will tend to resist the entire vertical force at e column face
(the vertical component of the braca force, plus the bea reaction).
Also, the transfer of horizontal force through the bolted eb to the
column face will be precluded by the stiffer path throug the welded
joints of the gusset, so the gusset-to-beam joint will ten to resist the
entire horizontal component,of the brace force. Pass-th ugh forces at
beam-column connection will bypass the shear plate an go through
the gusset. Equilibrium of the connection reqt.lires additi nal moments
in both the beam and column, as well as higher forces i the welds of
the gusset to the column and to the beam to transfer th e forces.
Fig. C-I-7.1 b. Problematic boltedlwelded member onnections.
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, i el. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INSTITUI'EioF S'IEEL CONSTRUCIlON,
6.1-140 PART I - CONNECTIONS, JOINTS, AND FASTENERS [Cornm. C7. Comm. C7.] PART 1 - CONNECTIONS, JOINTS, AND
6.1-141

and matches the filler metals commercially available and frequently used for C7.4. Protected Zone
such welds. The more critical CVN weld metal property is the minimum of 40
The FEMNSAC testing h~ demonstrated the ""n,cih"ihl of regions undergoing
ft-Ibs (54 J) at 70°F (21°C) following the procedure in Appendix X. Based on
large inelastic strains to dis~ontinuities caused by rapid change of section,
the FEMA recommendations, the engineer of record may consider applying the
penetrations, or constructiorÍ caused flaws. For this operations that cause dis-
40 ft-lbs (54 J) at 70°F (21°C) requirements to other critical welds.
continuities are prohibited in regions subject to inelastic strains. These provi-
In a structure with exposed structural steel, an unheated building, or a build- sions designate these regions as protected tones. protected zones are designated
ing used for cold storage, the demand critical welds may be subject to service in the Provisions in the sections applicable to the type of system and in
temperatures less than 50°F (10 oC). In these cases the provisions require that ANSIIAISC 358 (AISC, 2005a). The protected inelude moment frame hing-
the minimum qualification temperature for Appendix X be adjusted such that ing zones, links of EBFs, the ends and the ~enter of braces, etc.
the test temperature for the Charpy V-Notch toughness qualification tests shall
Not all regions experiencing inelastic 'aelorrna~lOn are designated protected
be no more than 20°F (11°C) aboye the lowest anticipated service temperature zones; for example, the beam-column panel It should be noted that yield
(LAST). The LAST should be determined from appropriate resources for the level strains are not strictIylimited to the plastic zones and caution should
area or application. For example, weld metal in a structure with a lowest antici- also be exercised in creating discontinuities in
pated service temperature of O °F (minus 18 oC) would need to be qualified at a
temperature less than or equal to 20°F (minus 7 oC). Many operations during fabrication, erection, and the subsequent work of other
trades have the potential to create discontinuities in seismic load resisting system.
AH other welds in members and connections in the load path of the SLRS re-
When located in the designated protected zone, discontinuities are required
quire filler metal with a minimum specified CVN toughness of 20 ft-lb (27 J) to be repaired by the responsible subcontractor as by the engineer of re-
at O °F (minus 18 oC). This is a relaxation from the previous provisions, which
cord. Discontinuities should also be repaired in regions of the seismic load
required 20 ft-lb (27 J) at minus 20°F (minus 29 OC) for all welds. The require- resisting system when the presence of the would be detrimental to its
ment in the previous provisions considered that FCAW and SMAW electrodes performance. The responsible subcontractor should propose a repair procedure for
that met the lower test values were readily available, and therefore one common the approval of the engineer of record. Repair may unnecessary for sorne discon-
test temperature could be used for both the moment frame critical welds and tinuities, subject to the approval of the engineer· of The engineer of record
the balance of welding in the SLRS. The nominal increase in test temperature should refer to AWS D 1.1 and ASTM A6, Section 9 guidance in establishing the
still provides adequate notch toughness for filler welds in nondemand critical acceptance criteria for repair of discontinuities. the plastic hinge regions,
welds, while permitting other common notch-tough electrodes used for SAW AWS D 1.1 requirements for repair of . should be applied.
and GMAW processes to be used. Welds carrying only gravity loads such as
filler beam connections and welds for collateral members of the SLRS such as C7.5. Continuity Plates and Stiffeners
The provisions are intended to avoid welding into k-area of hot-rolled shapes
deck welds, minor collectors, and lateral bracing do not require filler metal with
in highly restrained joints such as continuity and stiffeners. This would in-
notch toughness requirements. Following the manufacturer's essential variables,
elude continuity plates in columns at moment cOlo.be~ct1ons and stiffeners in link
either the AWS classification method in the AWS A5 specification or manufac-
beams. See Section C6.3 for discussion on k-area The increased elip
turer certification may be used to meet this CVN requirement.
dimensions preelude the possibility of welding these regions. (See Figures
It is not the intent of the Provisions to require project-specific CVN testing of C-I-7.2aand b.) Inaddition, when groove welds are care should beused when
either the welding procedure or any production welds. Further, these weld tough- preparing the joint terrnination near the member to enable quality welding
ness requirements are not intended to apply to electric resistance welding (ERW) for the fulllength of the joint. Weld tabs should used in the k-area.
and submerged arc welding (SAW) when these welding processes are used in the
Where practical, connections with groove or .....'...... r..., ....'"'' fillet welds in members
production ofhollow structural sections and pipe (ASTMA500 andA53/A53M).
of the SLRS should also be avoided in the k-area. example is welding
In addition, the control of heat input is not monitored unless specified.
of doublers in panel zones. Alternative details for that avoid welding in
These provisions delete the Appendix X production lot testing requirements for the k-area can be found in Figure C-I-9.3. Where in the k-area cannot be
SMAW electrodes elassified by AWS A5 specifications as E7018 and E8018, avoided, or has been done in error, the k-area be inspected per Appendix Q,
and also for GMAW solid electrodes when the CVN toughness determined per Section Q5.2. The section is not intended to welding of minor connec-
AWS elassification test methods meets or exceeds 20 ft-lb (27 J) at temperatures tion elements such as shear tabs near the k-area. elements generally have
les s than or equal to minus 20°F (minus 29 OC). The deposited filler metal of small weld sizes and minimal restraint since they
these electrodes routinely meets the CVN toughness requirements for demand with the flange of the wide flange.
critical welds and therefore the requirements for these electrodes are relaxed.

Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mateh 9,
AMERICAN INsTlTUTE OF STEEL CONS1RUCTION, INC. AMERICAN INSTlTIJ'l'E OF STEEL CON'S1RUcnON,
 PART 1 - MEMBERS [Cornm.C8. Cornm.C8.] PART 1 - MEMBERS 6.1-143
6.1-142

cs. MEMBERS C8.2. Classifieation of Seetions for Lo al Buekling

To provide for reliable inelastic deformations in those SLRS that require high
CS.1 Seope . levels of inelasticity, the member flanges must be continuously connected to the
It is intended that nominal strengths, resistance and safety factors, and avazlable
web(s) and the width-thickness ratíos of compr ssion elements should be less
strengths of members in the seismic load resisting system (SLRS) be determined
than or equal to those that are resistant to local b ck1ing when stressed into the
in accordance with the Specification, unless noted otherwise in the Provisions.
inelastic range. Although the limiting width-thic ess ratios for compact mem-
Note that columns that are not designed to be part of the SLRS also contribute to bers, Ap , given in Specification Table B4.1, are s fficient to prevent local buck-
the inelastic behavior of the entire structure; and specific design requirements must líng before onset of strain-hardening, the availab e test data suggest that these
be considered. limits are not adequate for 'the required inelastic errormance in several of the
SLRS. The limiting width-thickness ratios for s ismically compact members,
11/2 in. Aps , given in Table 1-8-1 are deemed adequate for ductilitíes to 6 or 7 (Sawyer,
(38 mm)
mino
1961; Lay, 1965; Kemp, 1986; Bansal, 1971). Th limiting width-thickness ra-
k 1/4 in.(6 mm) weld tíos for webs in flexural compression have been m dified (Uang and Fan, 2001)
hold back, typical
to comply with the recommendations in F,EMA 35 (FEMA, 2000a). Provisions
1/2 in. for special moment frames (SMF) , memhers in t especial segment of special
(13 mm) truss moment frames (STMF) , special concentri ally braced frames (SCBF),
max
the links in eccentrically braced frames (EBF), d H-pile design specifically
reference Table 1-8-1.
Center
line Diagonal web members used in the special segme ts of STMF systems are lim-
ited-to flat bars only at this time becauseof their roven high ductility without
buck1ing. The specified límiting width-thickness r io of 2.5 in Table 1-8-1 does
not vary with Fy and is intended to be a practical m thod to limit the aspect ratio
of flat bar cross-sections.
kareas During the service life of a steel H-pile it ~s prim ·ly subjected to axial com-
(a) Straight comer clip.
pression and acts as an axially loaded column. T erefore, the bit ratio limita-
tions given in Table B4.1 oí the Specification sho Id suffice. During a major
11/2 in. earthquake, because of lateral movements of pile e p and foundation, the steel
(38 mm)
mino
H-pile becomes a beam-column and may have to r sist large bending moments
k 1/4 in. (6 mm) weld and uplift. Cyclic tests (Astaneh-AsI and Ravat, 19 ) indicated that local buck-
hold back, typical
ling of píles satisfying the width-thickness limitatio s in Table 1-8-1 occurs after
many cycles of loading. In addítion, this local buck1 ng did not have much ~ffect
1/2 in.
(13 mm)
on the cyclic performance of the píle during cyclic t sting or after cyclic testing
max. stopped and the piles were once again under only ialload.
In Section 6.2, the expected yield strength, RyFy, of he material used in a mem-
Center
ber is required for the purpose of determining the ffect of the actual member
line strength on its connections to other members of the seismic load resisting sys-
temo The width-thickness requirements in Table 1-8- ,calculated using specified
minimum yield stress, are expected to permit inela tic behavior without local
buckling and need not be computed using the expect d yield strength.

C8.3. Column Strength

kareas
It is imperativethat columns that are part of the SL S have adequate strength
(b) Curved comer clip. to avoid global buckling or tensile fracture. Since t e late 1980s, the Seismic
Provisions and other codes and standards have incl ded requirements that are
Fig. C-I-7.2. Configuration of continuity plates.

Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9,2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, i l. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INSTlTU'TE OF SmEL CONSTRucnON, lNe. AMEruCAN INsTITUTE OF SlEEL CONSTRucnON, IN .
 6.1-144 PART 1 - MEMBERS [Cornm. C8. Cornm. C8.] PART 1 - MEMBERS 6.1-145

essentially identical to those included in Section 8.3. The required forces for de- general, it is recornmended that the splice be the middle third of the story
sign of the columns are intended to represent reasonable limits on the axial forc- height. For les s typical buildings, where the TlOOr-I[O-lC10()T height is insufficient
es that can be imposed, and design for these forces is expected to prevent global to accornmodate this requirement, the splice be placed as dose as prac-
column failure. These axial forces are permitted to be applied without consider- ticable to the midpoint of the clear distance the finished floor and the
ation of concurrent bending moments that may occur. Additionally, the column bottom flange of the beam aboye. It is not
design using these forces is typically checked using K = 1.0. This approach is requirements be in conflictwith applicable satet)r¡re:gulationls,
based on the recognition that in the SLRS, column bending moments would be Safety Standards for Steel Erection developed
largest at the column ends and would normally result in reverse curvature in the Rulemaking Advisory Committee (SENRAC).
column. This being the case, the bending moments would not be contributory to
column buckling, and the assumption of K = 1 would be conservative. Partial-joint-penetration gro ove welded splices thick column flanges exhibit
virtually no ductility under tensile loading and Stephen, 1977; Bruneau,
Clearly, the above-described approach provides no assurance that columns will Mahin and Popov, 1987). Consequently, column made with partial-joint-
not yield and, certainly, the combination ofaxialload and bending is often capa- penetration groove welds require a 100 percent . in required strength and
ble of causing yielding at the ends of columns. Column yielding may be caused must be made using weld metal with minimum V-Notch (CVN) tough-
by a combination of high bending moments and modest axialloads, as is normal ness properties.
in moment frames or by a combination of high axial load and bending due to the
end rotations that occur in braced frame structures. While yielding of columns The ca1culation of the minimum available
may result in damage that is significant and difficult to repair, it is judged that, in the ratio Ry. This results in a minimum aV~ljla.ble strength that is not les s than
general, it will not result in column fractures or global buckling, either of which 50 percent of the expected yield strength of the flanges. A complete-
would threaten life safety. joint-penetration (ClP) gro ove weld may be as satisfying this
requirement.
Although the provisions in Section 8.3 are believed to provide reasonable assur-
ance of adequate performance, it should be recognized that these are minimum The possible occurrence of tensile loads in splices utilizing partial-
standards and where higher levels of performance, or greater levels of reliability joint-penetration (PlP) groove welds during a mal:jcirnmTI considered earthquake
are merited, several additional concems should be considered: should be evaluated. When tensile loads are it is suggested that sorne
restraint be provided against relative lateral between the spliced
(1) Nonlinear analyses often indicate conditions wherein column end moments column shafts. For example, this can be. with the use of flange splice
are not reversed and may be contributory to buckling. plates. Altematively, web splice plates that are enough to maintain the gen-
(2) There is liule available research on column performance under the com- eral alignment of the spliced columns can be used. experiments have
bination of very high axial load (in the range of 0.6 - 0.7P y and higher) in shown that when columns that are unattached at base reseat themselves after
conjunction with significant end rotations. Research on this condition is lifting, the performance oí' a steel frame tolerable (Huckelbridge and
recornmended for the future. Clough,1977).

Realistic soil capacities must be used when determining the limiting resistance These provisions are applicable to cornmon configurations. Additional
of the foundation to overtuming uplift. considerations may be necessary when flexure dqlnirlat~~s over axial compres-
sion in columns in momeni frames, and in end of tall narrow frames
C8.4. Column Splices where overtuming forces can be very The designer should review
the conditions found in columns in buildings with story heights, when large
C8.4a. General changes in column sizes occur at the splice, or the possibility of column
Except for moment frames, the available strength of a column splice is required buckling in single curvature over multiple exists. In these and similar
to equal or exceed both the required strength determined in Section 8.3 and the cases, special column splice requirements may be for minimum avail-
required strength for axial, flexural and shear effects at the splice location deter- able strength and/or detailing.
mined from load combinations stipulated by the applicable building code.
Where CJP groove welds are not used, the coruiel:::tic1n is likely to be a PJP
Column splices should be located away from the beam-to-column connec- groove weld. The unwelded portion of the PlP weld forms a crack-like
tion to reduce the effects offlexure. For typical buildings, the 4 ft (1.2 m) mini- notch that induces stress concentrations. A weld made from one
mum distance requirement will control. When splices are located 4 to 5 ft (1.2 to si de would produce an edge crack-like notch and Rolfe, 1999). A PJP
1.5 m) aboye the floor level, field erection and construction of the column splice groove weld made from both sides would a buried crack-like notch.
will generally be simplified due to improved accessibility and convenience. In The strength of such crack-like notches' may be by using fracture

Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, March 9,
AMERICAN INSTI'IUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, INc. AMERICAN INsTITlirn OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION,

--------------------~-~-~'-'-~-_._---_ ~_ .. .. __ .. _-_.-'_._--'. __ .-
6.1-146 PART 1 - MEMBERS [Cornm. CS.
mechanics methodology. Depending on the specific characteristics of the partic-
ular design configuration, geometry and deformation, the analysis may require
elastic-plastic or plastic finite element analysis of the joint. The accuracy of the
computed strength will depend on the finite element model and mesh size used, the
assumed strength and fracture toughness of the base metal, heat affected zone and
weld metal, and on the residual stress magnitude and d4stribution in the joint.
Column web splices should be concentric with the column loads. Bolted column
web splices are required to have connection plates on both sides of the web to
minimize eccentricities.
·C8.4b. Columns Not Part of the Seismic Load
Resisting System
Inelastic analyses (FEMA, 2000f; FEMA, 20QOg) of moment frame buildings
have shown the importance of the columns that are not part of the SLRS in
helping to distribute the seismic shears between the floors. Even columns that
have beam connections considered to be pinned connections may develop large
bending moments and shears due to nonuniform drifts of adjacent levels. For this
reason, it is recommended that splices of such columns be adequate to develop
the shear forces corresponding to these large column moments in both orthogo-
nal directions.
FEMA 350 (FEMA, 2000a) recommends that, "Splices of columns that are not
part of the Seismic Load Resisting System should be made in the center one-
third of the column height, and should have sufficient shear capacity in both
OrthOgOIlal directions to maintain the alignment of the column at the maximum
shear force that the column is capable of producing." The corresponding com-
mentary suggests that this shear should be calculated assuming plastic hinges at
the ends of the colUIIlIls in both orthogonal directions.
Further review (Krawinkler, 2001) of nonlinear analyses cited in FEMA 355C
(FEMA, 2000d) showed that, in general, shears in such columns will be less
than one-half of the shear calculated from 2MpclH. For this reason, Section 8.4b
requires that the calculated shear in the splices ~e not less than MpclH.
Bolted web connections are preferred by many engineers and contractors be-
cause they have advantages for erection, and, when plates are placed on both
sides of the web, they are expected to maintain alignment of the column in the
event of a flange splice fracture. PJP groove welded webs are not recommended,
because fracture of a flange splice would likely lead to fracture of the web splice,
considering the stress concentration~ inherent in such welded joints.
C8.5. Column Bases
Column bases must have adequate strength to permit the expected ductile behav-
ior for which the system is designed in order for the anticÍpated performance to
be achieved.
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INs1ITUTE OF STEEf- CONsTRUcnON, INc.
Cornm. CS.] PART 1 - MEMBERS 6.1-147
Column bases are required to be designed for e same axial forces as those
required for the members ánd connections frami g into them. If the connections
of the system are required to be designed for the mplified seismic loads or loads
based on member strengths, the connection to e column base must also be
designed for those loads.
I~ ís necessary to decompose the required tens on strength of connections of
diagonal brace members to determine the axial d shear forces imparted on the
column base.
The provisions of ACI 318, Appendix D, inclu special requirements for an-
ch~rage for ."regions .of mo~er~te to high seismic risk, or for structures assigned
to .mtermediate or hlgh selsmIC performance or design categories." These re-
qmrements apply for calculation of available strengths to match required
strengths that are calculated at load combinatio s including 1.0E. In Sections
8.5b and 8.5c, required strengths are calculated at igher force levels. Therefore
it is judged that the additional reductions of avai able strength applied by Aci
are not necessary.
C8.5a. Required Axial Strength
The required axial (vertical) strength of the colu base is computed from the
column required strength in Section 8.3 (or the co umn strength required for the
type of system), in combination with the vertical omponent of the connection
required strength of any braces present.
C8.5b. Required Shear Strength
The required shear (horizontal) strength of the co umn base is computed from
a mechanism in which the column forms plastic inges at the top and bottom
~f the fir~t story, in combinatíon with the horizon 1 component of the connec-
tlon reqmred strength of any braces presento The ormer (column) component
of the shear need not exceed that corresponding t the amplified seismic load;
thus for braced-frame systems, the ability to achiev this story mechanism is not
required.
There are several possible mechanisms for shear for es to be transferred from the
column base into the supporting concrete foundati n. Surface friction between
the b~se pl~te and supporting grout and concrete is robably the initialload path,
especIally If the anchor rods have been pretension d. Unless the shear force is
accompanied by enough tension to completely ove come the dead loads on the
base plate, this mechanism will probably resist so e or all of the shear force.
However, many building codes prescribe that frictio cannot be considered when
resisting code earthquake loads, and anoth~r design calculation method must be
utilized. The other potential mechanisms ar:e: anchor rod bearing against the base
plates, shear keys bearing ongrout in the grout poc t, or bearing of the colurnn
embedded in a slab or grade beam. See Figure C-I- .5.1. .
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel ~uildings, Marep 9, 2005, i el. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL CONsTRucnON, C.
6.1-148 PART 1 - MEMBERS [Cornm.C8. Comm. C8.] PART 1 - MEMBERS
6.1-149

• Anchor rod bearing is usualIy considered in design and is probabIy suffi-

CS.Se. Required Flexural Strength
cient consideration for light shear Ioads. It represents the shear lirnit state if
the base pIate has overcorne friction and has displaced reIative to the anchor
rods. The anchor rods are usually checked for cornbined shear and tension.
Bearing on the base pIate rnay also be considered, but usually the base plate
is so thick that this is not a problern. Note that oversize holes are typically
used for anchor rods, and a weId washer rnay be required to transrnit forces
frorn the base pIate to the anchor rods. Where shear is transferred through
the anchor rods, anchor rods are subject to flexure.
• A shear key shouId be considered for heavy shear Ioads, although weld-
ing and construction issues rnust be considered. If tension andlo~ overtu:n-
ing Ioads are present, anchor rods rnust also be provided to resIst tensIOn
forces.
• Where coIumns are embedded, the bearing strength of the surrounding con-
crete can be utilized. Note that the concrete eIernent rnust then be designed
to resist this force and transfer it into other parts of the foundation or into
the soil.
The required flexural strength of the colurnn ba e is cornputed frorn a mecha-
nisrn in which the column forms plastic binges a the base plate, in combination
with the required flexural strength of the connec ion of any braces presento The
former (coIumn) cornponent of the rnornent nee not exceed that correspond-
ing to the ampIified seismic load; thus for brace -frarne systerns, the ability to
achieve colurnn base hinging is not required.
A ductile rnornent frame is usually expected to evelop a hinge at the base of
the colurnn. The colurnn base detail rnust acco rnodate the required hinging
rotations while rnairitaining the strength required to provide the rnechanism en-
visioned by the designer. These conditions are s rnilar to the requirernents for
beam-to-coIurnn connections.
Colurnn bases for rnornent frames can be of sever 1 different types, as follows:
(1) A rigid base assernbly rnay be provided wh eh is strong enough to force
yielding in the colurnn. The designer shoul ernploy the same guidelines
as given for the rigid fully-restrained conne tions. Such connections rnay

When the colurnn base is ernbedded in the foundation, it can serve as a shear
key to transfer shear forces. It is sornetirnes convenient to transfer shear f?rces
to concrete grade bearns through reinforcing steel welded to the colurnn. FIgure
C-I-8.5.2 shows two exampIes of shear transfer to a concrete grade bearn. The
reinforcing steeI must be long enough to allow a splice with the grade bearn rein-
forcing steel, allowing transfer of force s to additional foundations.

Surface Friction Anchor Rod Bearing

Shear Key Grout Bearing

(b)

Hg. C-I-8.5.I. Shear transfer mechanisms-column supported by foundation. Fig. C-I-8.5.2. Examples of shear transfer to a concr, te grade beam.

Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1
Seismic Provisions for. Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, ncl. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN rnsTl11lTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, !Nc.
AMERICAN rnsTITUTE OF STEEL CONsTRucnON, 1 c.
6.1-150 PART 1 - MEMBERS [Cornm.C8.
Cornm.C8.] PART 1 - MEMBERS 6.1-151

empIoy thick base pIates, haunches, cover plates, or other strength~ning as (4) The column may continue below the assu ed seismic base (for example,
required to develop the column hinge. Where haunched type connectIons are
used, hinging occurs aboye the haunch, and appropriate consideration should into a basement, craw1space, or grade beam) .n such a way that the column' s
be given to the stability of the eolumn section at the hinge. See Figure C-I- fixity is assured without the need for a rigid base pIate eonnection. The de-
signer should recognize that hinging will o cur in the column, just aboye
8.5.3 for examples ofrigid base assemblies that can be designed to be capable
of forcing column hinging. In sorne cases, yielding can occur in the concrete the seismic base or in the grade beam. If hi ging is considered to occur in
grade beams rather than in the eolumn. In this case the concrete grade beams the grade beam, then the grade beam shoul be designed in conformance
should be designed in conformance with ACI 318, Chapter 21. with ACI 318, Chapter 21. The horizontal s ear to be resisted at the ends
of the column below the seismic base shoul be calculated eonsidering the
(2) Large columns may be provided at the bottom level to limit the drift, a~d a expected strength, RyFy, of the framing. See igure C-I-8.5.4 for examples
"pinned base" may be utilized. The designer should ensure that the ~eq~lred of a column base fixed within a grade beam.
shear capacity of the eolumn, base plate, and anchor rods can be mamtamed
up to the maximum rotation that may occur. It should be recogniz~d, ho,:-
Column
ever, that without taking special measures, column base connectIon wlll
generally provide partial rotational fixity.
(3) A connection which provides "partial fixity" may be provided, so that the
column base is fixed up to sorne column moment, but the base yields be-
fore the eolumn hinges. In designing a base with partíal fixity, the designer
should consider the principIes used in the design of partially restrained con-
nections. This type of base may rely on bending of the base plate (similar
to an end plate connection), bending of angles or tees, or yielding of anchor
rods. In the latter case, it is necessary to provide anchor rods with adequate Base Plate
elongation capacity to permit the required rotation and sufficient unre- Anchor Rod
strained length for the yieIding to occur. Shear capacity of the base pIate to
Concrete
foundation connection must be assured at the maximum rotation. Foundation

(a)

Column

Column

Base
Plate

~.

(b)

Fig. C-I-8.5.3. ExampIes of "rigid base" pIate assembIy for momentframes.

Fig. C-I-8.5.4. Examples of column base fixity in a rade beam.

Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN rnsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, lNc. Seismic Provisions lor Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, in 1. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN rnSTlTIJTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, mc
6.1-152 PART 1 - MEMBERS [Cornrn. C8.
For both braced frame and moment frame column bases, the designer should
consider the base connection as similar to a beam-to-column connection and ap-
ply similar principIes of design and detailing. However, there are also significant
differences that must be considered:
(1) Long anchor rods embedded in concrete will strain much more than
the steel bolts or welds of the beam-to-column connections. The elonga-
tion of these anchor rods may contribute to frame drift and this should be
considered.
(2) Column base plates are bearing on grout or concrete that is more compress-
ible than the column flanges of beam-to-column connections.
(3) Column base connections have significantly more longitudinal load in the
plane of the flanges and less transverse load in the plane of the web, when
compared to beam-to-column connections.
(4) The shear mechanism between the column base and grout or concrete is
different from the shear mechanism between beam end plate and column
flange.
(5) The AISC standard column base anchor rod hole diameter is different from
AISC standard steel-to-steel bolt holes.
(6) Foundation rocking and rotation may be an issue, especially for isolated
column footings.
The column base connection is one of the most important elements in steel struc-
tures. Damage at column bases during past earthquakes has been reported by
many observers (Northridge Reconnaissance Team, 1996; Midorikawa, Hasega-
wa, Mukai, Nishiyama, Fukuta and Yamanouchi, 1997). Seismic design practice
for this class of connections has not been well developed (DeWolf and Ricker,
1990; Drake and Elkin, 1999) mainly because of the rather limited number of
analytical and experimental studies that have been carried out to-date (DeWolf
and Sarisley, 1980; Picard and Beaulieu, 1985; Thambiratnam and Paramasivam,
1986; Sato and Kamagata, 1988; Astaneh-AsI, Bergsma and Shen, 1992; Tar-
gowski, Lamblin and Guerlement, 1993; Ermopoulos and Stamatopoulos, 1996;
Jaspart and Vandegans, 1998; Stojadinovic, Spacone, Goel and Kwon, 1998;
Burda and ltani, 1999; Adany, Calado and Dunai, 2000).
Most of the experimental studies have been performed on reduced-scale speci-
mens representing basic types of connections simulating a column welded to an
exposed base plate, which in tum is connected to a concrete foundation through
anchor rods. Test specimens have been subjected to axial loading combined
with cyclic bending to simulate the column base behavior in moment frames.
Two recent studies (Fahmy, Stojadinovic and Goel, 2000; Lee and Goel, 2001)
have noted the importance of weld metal toughness and axis of bending of wide
flange column sections on ductility and energy dissipation capacity of the test
specimens. AIso, relative strength and stiffness of the base plate and anchor
rods can significantly influence the stress distribution and failure modes. The
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9,2005, ¡nel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTIoN,INC.
Cornrn. C8.] PART 1 - MEMBERS 6.1-153
performance of the base connection also depends on the cyclic performance of
the anchors and the surrounding concrete (Klingn r and Graces, 2001).
Many different types of column base connection are used in current practice.
Much research work is needed in order tobetter u derstand their behavior under
seismic loading and to formulate improved design rocedures. Designers should
use caution and good judgment in design and detai ng in order to achieve desired
strength, stiffness, and ductility of this very impo t class of connections.
CS.6. H-Piles
The provisions on seismic design of H-piles are b sed on the data collected on
the actual behavior of H-piles during recent e quakes, including the 1994
Northridge earthquake (Astaneh-AsI, Bolt, McM llin, Donikaian, Modjtahedi
and Cho, 1994) and the results of cyclic tests offull scale pile tests (Astaneh-AsI
and Ravat, 1997). In the testprogram, five full size H-piles with reinforced con-
crete pile caps were subjected to realistic cyclic ve .cal and horizontal displace-
ments expected in a major earthquake. Three spec' ens were vertical piles and
two specimens were batter pUes. The tests' establis ed that during cyclic loading
for all three vertical pile specimens a very ductile d stable plastic hinge formed
in the steel pile just below the reinforced concret pile cap. When very large
inelastic cycles were applied, local buckling of fl ges within the plastic hinge
area occurred. Eventually, low cycle fatigue fractu of flanges or overall buck-
ling of the pile occurred. However, before the piles xperienced fracture through
locally buckled areas, vertical piles tolerated from O to 65 large inelastic cyclic
vertical and horizontal displacements with rotation of the plastic hinge exceed-
ing 0.06 radian for more than 20 cycles.
CS.6a. Design of H-Piles
Prior to an earthquake, piles, particularly vertical p'les, are primarily subjected
to gravity axial load. During an earthquake, piles ar subjected to horizontal and
vertical displacements as shown in Figure C-I-8.6.1 The horizontal and vertical
displacements ofpiles generate axial load (compres ion and possibly uplift ten-
sion), bending moment, and shear in the pile.
During tests of H-piles, realistic cyclic horizontal and vertical displacements
were applied to the pile specimens. Figure C-I-8.6. shows test results in terms
ofaxial load and bending moment for one of the s ecimens. Based on perfor-
mance of test specimens, it was concluded that H-p les should be designed fol-
lowing the provisions of the Specification regarding embers subjected to com-
bined loads.
CS.6b. Battered H-Piles
The vertical pile specimens demonstrated very larg cyclic ductility as wel1 as
considerable energydissipation capacity. A case stud of performance of H-piles
during the 1994 Northridge earthquake (Astaneh-AsI and others, 1994) indicated
excellent performance for pile groups with vertic piles only. However, the
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9,2005, i el. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INSTlTUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION,
6.1-154 PART 1 - MEMBERS [Comm.C8.
Cornm.C9.]
PART 1 - SPECIAL MOMENT FRA
6.1-155

battered pile specimens did not show asmuch du tility as the vertical piles. The
battered piles tolerated frO.JD 7 to 17 large inelas .c cycles before failure. Based
on relatively limited information on actual seis c behavior of battered piles, it
is possible that during a major earthquake, batter d piles in apile group fail and
are no longer able to support the gravity load r the earthquake. Because of
this possibility, the use of battered piles to c gravity loads is discouraged.
Unless, through realistic cyclic tests, it is shown that battered piles will be ca-
pable of carrying their share of the gravity loads afier a major earthquake, the
vertical piles in seismic design categories D, E, an F should be designed to sup-
port the gravity load alone, ,without participation f the battered piles.
CS.6e. Tension in H-Piles'
Due to overtuming moment, piles can be subject d to tension. Piles subjected
to tension should have sufficient mechanical attac ments within their embedded
area to transfer the tension force in the pile to the ile cap or foundation. Since
it is expected that a plastic hinge will form in the ile just under the pile cap or
foundation, the use of mechanical attachment an welds over a length of pile
below the pile cap equal to the depth of cross secti n of the pile is prohibited.
(a) Vertical Piles Only (h) Vertical and Battered Piles Cg. SPECIAL MOMENT FRAMES (SM )
Fig. C-I-8.6.1. Deformations ofpiles andforces acting on an individual pile. These Provisions address three types of steel mo ent frames: special moment
frames (SMF) in Section 9, intermediate moment rames (IMF) in Section 10,
and ordinary moment frames (OMF) in Section 1. The provisions for these
Bending Moment, kN-m three moment-frame types reflect lessons leamed m the Northridge and Kobe
Earthquakes, and benefit froÍn subsequent research performed by the SAC Joint
-400 -200 o 200 400 Venture for FEMA. The reader is referred to FE A 350 (FEMA, 2000a) for
an extensive discussion of these lessons and reco endations to mitigate the
4000
800 conditions observed. Commentary on specific prov' sions in Section C9 is based
primarily on FEMA 350 (FEMA, 2000a).

2000 The prescriptive moment-frame connection includ in the 1992 Seismic Pro-
400
Axial Axial visions was based primarilyon testing that was c nducted in the early 1970s
Load, Load, (Popov and Stephen, 1972) indicating that for the izesand material strengths
kips o o kN tested, a moment connection with complete-joint enetration groove welded
flanges and a welded or bolted web connection c uld accommodate inelastic
rotations in the range of 0.01 to 0.015 radian. It wa judged by engineers at the
-400 time that such rotations, which corresponded to bu lding drifts in the range of
-2000
2 to 2.5 percent were sufficient for adequate frame erformance. Investigations
conducted subsequent to the Northridge earthquake emphasized that the many
-800 changes that took place in materials, welding, frame onfigurations and member
-4000
sizes since the 1970s,make the original results uns table as a basis for current
-4000 -2000 o designo Additionally, recent analyses using time hist ries from certain near-fault
2000 4000
earthquakes, including P-!1 effects, demonstrate that ·ft demands may be larger
than previously assumed (Krawinkler and Gupta, 19 8).
Bending Moment, kips-in
The three frame types inc1uded in these Provisions o er three different levels of
Fig. C-I-8.6.2. Axialload-moment interactionfor H-pile test. expected seismic inelastic rotation capability. SMF d IMF are designed to ac-
commodate approximately 0.03 and 0.01 radian inel stic rotation, respectively.
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildin~s; March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1
AMERIcAN INsTITUTE OF S1-EEL CONSTRUCTION, INc. Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, i 1. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INSTITI1TE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, IN .
6.1-156 PART 1 - SPECIAL MOMENT FRAMES [Comm.C9. Comm. C9.] PART 1 - SPECIAL MOMENT 6.1-157

OMF are designed to remain essentially elastic and are assumed to have only C9.1. Scope
very small inelastic demands. It is assumed that the elastic drift of typical mo- Special mament frames (SMF) are generally eX1Je~reQ to experience significant
ment frames is usually in the range of 0.01 radian and that the inelastic rotation inelastic deformation during large seismic events. is expected that most of the
of the beams is approximately equal to the inelastic drift. These frames are as- inelastic deformation will take place as rotation
sumed to accornmodate total interstory drifts in the range of 0.04, 0.02, and 0.01 inelastic deformation in the panel zone Of the
radian, respectively. C9 abo ve. The amount of inelastic deformation
Although it is cornmon to visualize inelastic rotations in moment frames oc- types used, the configuration, and a number of
curring at beam or column "hinges," analyses and testing demonstrate that the for these frames are to be qualified based upon
inelastic rotations actualiy combine flexural deformations at the hinges, shear connection can sustain an interstary drift angle of
deformations of the panel zones, and deformations from other sources depend- a specified loading protocoL Other provisions are ~~.."'..,~"'u to limit or prevent ex-
ing on the configuration unless the column webs are unusual1y thick. The con- cessive panel zone distortion, column hinging, local buckling that may lead
tribution of panel zone deformation to inelastic rotation is considered benefi- to inadequate frame performance in spite of good performance.
cial, provided that it neither leads to significant local column flange bending
at the beam-flange-to-column-flange welds nor to significant column damage. C9.2. Beam-to-Column Connections
Currently, the amount of panel zone deformationthat a given connection will C9.2a. Requirements
have and how much it will accornmodate appears to be most reliably determined Sections 9.2a and 9.2b have been rewritten to and coordinate the require-
by testing. ments with Appendices P and S. Section 9.2a the performance and design
Based upon the recornmendations in FEMA 350 (FEMA, 2000a), the Provisions requirements for the connec#ons and Section the requirements for
require that connections in SMF and IMF be qualified for use by testing. (Note verifying that the selected cónnections wil1 meet performance requirements.
that the IMF as defined in these Provisions is equivalent to the OMF as defined FEMA 350 (FEMA, 2000a) recornmends two for the qualifying drift
in FEMA 350.) The AISC Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermedi- angle (QDA) for special mament frames. The "",f-rpn,n-th degradation" drift angle,
ate Steel Moment Frames for Seismic Applications (AISC, 2005a) provides a as defined in FEMA 350, means the angle where failure of the conneetion
limited number of prequalified connections to employ in SMF and !ME It is oecurs, or the strength of the connection degrades less than the nominal plastic
not the intent of the Provisions to require specific tests for each design, except eapacity, whichever is less." The "ultimate" drift capacity is defined as the
where the design is sufficiently unique that there are no published or otherwise angle "at which connection damage is so Severe continued ability to remain
available tests adequately representing the proposed configuration. For many stable under gravity loadingis uncertain." Testing this level can be hazardous
cornmonly employed combinations of beam and column sizes, there are read- to laboratory equipment and staff, which 'Ís part
ily available test reports in publications of AISC, FEMA and others, including done. The strength degradation QDA is set at 0.04
FEMA 355D (FEMA, 2000e) and (Gross, Engelhardt, Dang, Kasai and Iwan- is set at 0.06 radian. These values formed the for extensive probabilistic
kiw, 1999). Qualification testing is not required for OMF connections, which evaluations of the performance capability of structural systems (FEMA,
may be proportioned following a set of prescriptive design rules that have been 2000f) demonstrating with high statistical cOIrtid~n(::e that frames with these
demonstrated by testing to provide adequate performance for the limited inelas- types of connections can meet the intended goals. For the sake of
tic rotation expected for such frames. simplicity, and because many connections have been tested to the ultimate
Since SMF and IMF connection configuration and design procedures are based QDA, the Pravisians adopt the single criterion of strength degradation QDA.
on the results of qualifying tests conducted and evaluated per Appendix S and, if In addition, the ultimate QDA is more used for the design of high
prequalified, per Appendix P, the configuration of connections in the prototype performance structures.
structure must be consistent with the tested configurations. Similarly, the design Although connection qualification primarily on the level of plastic rota-
procedures used in the prototype connections must be consistent with the test tion achieved, the tendency for connections to ex~~rienc;e strength degradation
specimens. For example, the aspect ratio and relative strength of the panel zone with increased deformation is also of concern. degradation can increase
to the beam in the prototype must be reasonably consistent with that used in the rotation demands from P-/1' effects and the of frame instability. In
quhlifying tests to help achievethe anticipated contribution of the panel zone the absence of additional information, it is that this degradation
to connection rotation and beam flange to column connection behavior. AIso, should not reduce flexural strength, measured at drift angle of 0.04 radian,
material properties of the test specimen must fairly represent the prototype to less than the nominal flexural strength, Mp , using the specified
connections. Refer to the cornmentary for Appendix S for more discussion on
this topic.

Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Stee4Buildings, March 9,
AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcrrON, INc. AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcrrON,
6.1-158 PART 1- SPEClAL MOMENT FRAMES [Cornm. C9. Cornm. C9.] PART 1 - SPEClAL MOMENT 6.1-159

minimum yield strength, Fy- Figure C-I-9.1 illustrates this behavior. Note that Prequalified Conn~ctions for Special and lnt'enrk,iia.tf' Steel Moment Frames
0.03 radian plastic rotation is equivalent to 0.04 radian drift angle for frames for Seismic Applications (AISC, 2005a) to and standardize connection
with an elastic drift of 0.01 radian. designo Other prequalification panels may be but are subject to the
approval of the authority having jurisdiction. of connections qualified by
The required shear strength, Vu or Ya, as appropriate, of the beam-to-column
prior tests or project specific tests may also be although the engineer of
joint is defined as the summation of the factored gravity loads and the shear that
record is responsible for substantiating the Published testing, such
results from the required flexural strengths on the two ends of the beam seg-
as that conducted as part of the SAC project and in FEMA 350 and 355
ment between the hinge points, which can be determined as 1.IRy F y Z (LRFD) or or project-specific testing may be used to satisfy
(1.1I1.5)R y F y Z (ASD). However, in sorne cases, such as when large gravity loads
occur or when panel zones are weak, rational analysis may indicate that lower C9.3. Panel Zone of Beam-to-Column
combinations of end moments are justified. (beam web parallel to column
The reason for disallowing the 0.75 combination factor on the seismic load in Cyclic testirig has demonstrated that significant
ASD load combinations is because 75 percent of the seismic ground motion is shear yielding in column panel zones through
expected to cause full yield at both ends of the beam, and the seismic load effect (Popov, Blondet, Stepanov and Stojadinovic, 1
for this limit state is controlled by the flexural capacity of the member. Fielding and Huang, 1971; Krawinkler, 1978).
necessary to provide a panel zone that is capable
It should be recognized that truss moment frames can be designed with bottom- strength of the connected beams if the available of the panel zone can
chord members or connections that can deform inelastically and such frames are be predicted. However, the usual assumption that Von Mises criterion applies
permitted as SMF if all of the provisions of Section 9 are meto and the shear strength is 0.55Fy dc t does not match actual behavior observed
C9.2b. Conformance Demonstration in many tests into the inelastic range. Due to the UH1;1SCll~C of the column flanges,
strain hardening and other phenomena, panel shear strengths in excess
This section provides requirements for demonstrating conformance with the
of Fydct have been observed. Accordingly, 11 0-11 of the Specifica-
requirements of Section 9.2a. This provision specifically permits the use
tion accounts for the significant strehgth of thick column flanges.
of prequalified connections meeting the requirements of ANSI/AISC 358,
Despite the ductility demohstrated by properIy Pf()óolrti()ne:d panel zones in pre-
vious stud~es, excessive panel zone adversely affect the perfor-
40000~-----¡------r-----¡------¡~~~~~~¡------¡------, mance of beam-to-column connections 1999; EI-Tawil, Mikesell,
Vidarsson and Kunnath, 1999). Consequently, provisions require that the
panel zone design match that of the successfully connections used to qual-
ify the connection being used. The balance of the of Section 9.3a is
intended to provide a minimum strength level to excessively weak panel
zones, which may lead to unacceptable col Where prequalified
connections described in FEMA 350 (FEMA, are used, the design of
panel zones according to the methods given generally meet the require-
ments in Section 9.3a. This should be verified by designer.
The equations in Section 110.6 of the represent the available
strength in the inelastic range and, therefore, are comparison to limiting
·.strengths of connected members. In Section 9.3a the Provisions, <Pvhas been
set equal to unity and Qv set egual to 1.50, to allow direct comparison between
available strength of the beam and the column zone. In the Specification,
the engineer is given the option to consider deformations of the panel
zone in the analysis. Separate sets of equations are for use when these
40000t-----~------~----~------~----_4------4_----_4----~
~.08 .0.06 .0.04 ~.02 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 deformations are and are not considered. In the
one equation was provided (Equation 9-1, which is
Fig. C-I-9.1. Acceptable strength degradation, per Section 9.2b.

Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRucrrON, !Nc. AMERICAN !NsÍITUTE bF STEEL CONSTRUcrroN,
6.1-160 PART 1 - SPECIAL MOMENT FRAMES [Cornm.C9. Cornm.C9.] PART 1 - SPECIAL MOMENT '6.1-161

of the Specification) and consideration of the inelastic deformation of the panel all panels meet the requirements of Equation Additionally, since a single
zone in the analysis was required. plug weld would seem to create a bound~ corldttlon that is much different than
1t should be noted thatthe equations used Ín the Provisions differ somewhat from a continuously restrained edge, it would be to place the plug welds in
the recornmendations of FEMA 350 and are slightly less conservative for sorne pairs or lines, dividing the plate into sized rectangles. Plug welds,
situations. However, as noted aboye, the equations of FEMA 350 are used for when used, should, as a mínimum, mee! the of Section J2.3 of the
Specification.
design with the connections prequalified therein, and those in the Provisions are
used only to provide a check for mínimum thickness, with the actual panel zone An altemative detail is shown in Figure C-1-9
thicknesses normally being determined by comparison to tested connections. placed syrnmetrically in pairs spaced away
The application of the moments at the column face to determine the required figuration, both the web doubler plates and the web are required to each
independently meet Equation 9-2 in order to be cOlnsÍdel~ed as effective.
shear strength of the panel zone recognizes that beam hinging will take place
at a location away from the beam-to-column connection, which will result in Web doubler plates may extend between top
amplified effects on the panel zone shear. The previous version of this provision be welded directly to the column flanges and the Icollltírmil:y
included a reduction factor of 0.8 on the beam yielding effects, which was in- extend aboye and below the top and bottom COlll41lUÍlty
tended to recognize that, in sorne cases, gravity loads míght inhibit the develop- the column flanges and web, and the continuity
ment of plastic hinges on both sides of a column. However, there is no assurance welded joint connecting the continuity plate to
that this will be the case, especially for one-sided connections and at perimeter plate is required to be configured to transmit
frames where gravity loads may be relatively small (EI-Tawil and others, 1999; continuity plate to each element of the panel
EI-Tawil, 2000). joint connecting the continuity plate to the web plate is required to be
sized to transmít the load from the continuity to the web doubler plate and
This provision requires that the panel' zone thickness be determined using the
the web doubler plate thickness is required to be to transmít this same
same method as the one used to determine the panel zone thickness in the tested
load.
connection, with a mínimum value as described in the remainder of the section.
The intent is that the local deformation demands on the various elements in the
structure be consistent with the results of the tests that justify the use of the con-
nection. The expected shear strength of the panel zone in relation to the maxi- doubler plate(s) if required per
mum expected demands that can be developed by the beam(s) framing into the 9.3a. Welding as required in
9.3 (See also Figure C-I-9.3.)
column should be consistent with the relative strengths that existed in the tested
connection configuration. Many of the connection tests were performed with a
one-sided configuration. 1f the structure has a two-sided connection configura-
tion with the same beam and column sizes as a one-sided connection test, the
panel zone shear demand will be about twice that of the test. Therefore, in order
to obtain the same relative strength, the panel zone thickness to be provided in
the structure should be approximately twice that of the test.
To mínimíze shear buckling of the panel zone during inelastic deformations, the
mínimum panel zone thickness is set at one-ninetieth (119 0 ) of the sum of its depth
and width. Thus, when the column web and web doubler platees) each meet
the requirements of Equation 9-2, their interconnection with plug welds is not '----- ~'UUI-'.UUL'Y plates and assoeiated
required. Otherwise, the column web and web doubler platees) can be intercon- as required in Seetions 9.5,
nected with plug welds as illustrated in Figure C-1-9.2 and the total panel zone and 11.5.
thickness can be used in Equation 9-2.
Section 9.3b provides no specific guidance on the number or location of plug
welds needed to prevent buckling of the doubler plateo As a mínimum, it is clear Fig. C-I-9.2. Connecting web doubler plates . welds.
that the spacing should divide the plate into rectangular panels in such a way that

Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN lNsTITUTE OF STEEL CONsTRucnON, INc. AMERICAN lNsTITUTE OF STEEL CONsTRucnON,

._--_ ... _.._------_._ .._ _---_._---_ _._._.-

.. ..
6.1-162 PART 1 - SPECIAL MOMENT FRAMES [Conun. C9.
Comm.C9.]
PART 1 - SPECIAL MOMENT
6.1-163
Shear loads transmitted to the web doubler plates from the contihuity plates are
equilibrated by shear loads along column-flange edges of the web doubler plateo
lt is anticipated that the panel zone will yield in a seismic event, and the welds
connecting the web doubler plate to the column flanges are required to be sized
to devHop the shear strength of the full web doubler plate thickness. Either a
complet~-joint-penetration groove-welded joint or a fillet-weldedjoint can be
used as illustrated in Figure C-I-9.3. 'Í'he plate thickness and column fillet radius
should be considered before selecting the fillet-welded joint.
The use of diagonal stiffeners for strengthening and stiffening of the panel zone
has not been adequately tested for low-cycle reversed ioading into the inelastic
range. Thus, no specific recornmendations are made at this time for special seis-
(a) Groove-welded (see k-area discussion, C6.3 and C7.5)
mic requirements for this detail.

C9.4. Beam and Column Limitations

Reliable inelastic deformation requires that width-thickness ratios of projecting
elements be limited to a range that providés a cross section resistant to local
buckling into the inelastic range. Although the width-thickness ratios for com-
pact elements in Specification Table B4.1 are sufficient to prevent local buck1ing
before the onset of yielding, the available test data suggest that these limits are
not adequate for the required inelastic performance in SMF. The limits given in
Table 1~8-1 are deemed adequate for dilctilities to 6 or 7 (Sawyer, 1961; Lay,
1965; Kemp, 1986; BansaI, 1971)

C9.5. Coritinuity Plates

When subjected to seismic Ioads, an interior column (in other words, one with
adjacent moment connections to both flanges) in a moment frame receives a
tensile flange force on one flange and a compressive flange force on the opposite
(b) Fillet-welded (fillet weld size may be COllttro,llei;t
side. When stiffeners are required, it is normal to place a full-depth transverse due to back-side bevel on web
stiffener on each side of the column web. As this stiffener provides a loa~ path for
the flanges on both sides of the column, it is cornmonly called a continuity plate.
The stiffener also serves as a boundary to the very highly stressed panel zone.
When the formation of a plastic hinge is anticipated adjacent to the column, the
required strength is the flange force exerted when the full beam plastic moment
has been reached, including the effects of overstrength and strain hardening, as
well as shear amplification from the hinge Iocation to the column face.
Post-Northridge studies have shown that even when continuity pIates of sub-
stantial thickness are used, ineIastic strains across the weld of the beam flange
to the column flange are substantially higher opposite the coIumn web than they
are at the flange tips. Sorne studies have indicated stress concentrations higher
than 4, which can cause the weld stress at the center of the flange to exceed
its tensile strength before the flange force exceeds its yield strength based on
a uniform average stress. This coildition may be exacerbated if relatively thin
continuity plates are used or if continuity plates are orriitted entirely. For this (e) Pair oi equal-thickness web doubler plates, or fillet-welded
reason, an earlier formula that permitted elimination of continuity plates where
column flanges were very thick was rescinded in FEMA 267 (FEMA, 1995) Fig. C-I-9.3. Web doubler plates.
and the SuppIement to FEMA 267 (FEMA, 1997b). The use of continuity plates

Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN msTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUctION, mc. Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005,
AMERICAN mSTITlJTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION,
6.1-164 PART 1 - SPECIAL MOMENT FRAMES [Cornm. C9. Cornm.C9.] PART 1 - SPEClAL MOMENT 6.1-165

was recornmended in all cases unless tests showed that other design features of SCIWB requirements is that the columns are ¡:;,...J~"'~,Clll'l strong enough to force
a given connection are so effective in reducing or redistributing flange stresses flexural yielding in beams in multiple levels the frame, thereby achieving a
that the connection will work without them. Later studies, discussed in FEMA higher level of energy dissipation. Weak frames, particularly those with
355D (FEMA, 2000e), have indicated that the old formulas and approaches may weak or soft stories, are likely to exhibit an response at those stories
not have been wrong, as described below. However, pending further study, aH with the highest column demand-to-capacity
features of SMRF connections are required to be based on either prequalification
or qualification testing. It should be noted that co;mpliance with the concept and Equation 9-3
gives no assurance that individual columns will yield, even when all connec-
The FEMA-sponsored SAC steel project studied the issue of continuity plates tion locations in the frame comply. It can be by nonlinear analysis that,
in depth. According to FEMA 350 (FEMA, 2000a), continuity plates are not as the frame defonns inelastically, points of ü·lt1~ctÜ)n shift and the distribution
required when: of moments varíes from the idealized Nonetheless, yielding of the
beams rather than the columns will predominate the desired inelastic perfor-
mance will be achieved in frames with members to meet the requirement in
(C9-3) Equation 9-3.

and Previous formulations of this relationship l·Cleallllt~C1 the beam/column intersec-

tion as a point at the intersection of the centerlines. Post-Northridge
tcf> b¡/6 (C9-4) beam-to-column moment connections are configured to shift the plas-
tic hinge location into the beam away from column face and a more gen-
Equation C9-3 is similar to the equation in older codes, except for the Ry factors. eral formulation was needed. FEMA 350 recommendations regarding
Justification for the use ofEquation C9-3 and C9-4 is based on studies by Rieles the assumed location of plastic hinges for connection configurations
discussed in FEMA 355D (FEMA, 2000e). or they can be determined from the applicable tests. Recognition of
The intent of the procedures of FEMA 350 was that use of the preceding formu- expected beam strength (see Commentary C6.2) is also incorporated
las was adequate for the determination of the need for continuity plates for the into Equation 9-3.
prequalified connections therein. Three exceptions to Equation 9-3 are given. In first exception, columns with
According to FEMA 350, the thickness of continuity plates is to be determined low axial loads used in one-story buildings or the top story of a multi-story
according to the foHowing: building need not meet Equation 9-3 because cOIlcerns for inelastic soft or weak
stories are not significant in such cases. exception is made for a
• For one-sided (exterior) connections, continuity plate thickness should be limited percentage of columns with axial loads are considered to be low
at least one-half of the thickness of the beam flanges. enough to limit undesirable performance while providing reasonable flex-
ibility where the requirement in Equation 9-3 be impractical, such as at
• For two-sided (interior) connections, the continuity plates should be equal
large transfer girders. Finally, Section 9.6 an exception for columns
in thickness to the thicker of the two beam flanges on either side of the
in levels that are significantly stronger than in level aboye because column
column. yielding at the stronger level would be unlikely.
• The plates should also conform to Section nO.8 of the Specification. C9.7. Lateral Bracing at Beam-to';Colu Connections
C9.6. Column-Beam Moment Ratio Columns are required to be braced to prevent out of the plane of the
The strong-column weak-beam (SC/WB) concept is perhaps one of the least moment frame, particularly if inelastic behavior expected in or adjacent to the
understood seismic provisions in steel designo It is often mistakenly assumed beam-to-column connection during high seismic
that it is formulated to prevent any column flange yielding in a frame and that if C9.7a. BracedConnections
such yielding occurs, the column will faíl. Tests have shown that yielding of col-
Beam-to-column connections are usually braced laterally by the floor or roof
umns in moment frame subassemblages does not necessaríly reduce the lateral
framing. When this is the case and it can be that the column remains
strength at the expected seismic displacement levels.
elastic outside of the panel zone, lateral b~acing of column flanges is required
The SC/WB concept represents more of a global frame concero than a concero only at the level of the topflanges of the beams. it canoot be shown that the
at the interconnections of individual beams and columns. Schneider, Roeder and column remains elastic, lat~ral bracing is at both the top and bottom
Carpenter (1991) and Roeder (1987) showed that the real benefit of meeting

Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Stee,l Buildings, March 9,
AMERICAN !NSTIrUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCfION, !Nc. AMERICAN INsTITlirE OF STEEL Cm~sTR.ucrloN,
 PART 1 - SPECIAL MOMENT FRAMES [Comm.C9. C omm.C9.]
PART 1 - SPECIAL MOMENT F
6.1-167

beam flanges b ecause Of the potential for flexural yielding, and consequent
beam-column eonnections, Cl = 1. Strictly spe ·ng, the correet solution would
lateral-torsional buckling of the column.
be to use the commentary equation with Cr = 1 d Cd =l at allloeations except
. at the for braees at the inflection point where Cd = 2. s the Provisions now read, we
The required strength for lateral bracmg fl beam-to-column
In ddition theconnection
element(s)is
are essentially implying that the product of Cr(C) = 2.0 by the implied value of
pe~c~nt nOffil~ hav~
f th . al trength of the beam ange. a ,
2 o e s Cr =2 and Cd = 1.
quired to adequate stiffness to inhibit lat-
provldmg lateral bracmg are rfle (B sal 1971). In sorne cases, a bracing
al movement of the column anges an , . In addition to bracing along the beam length, the provisions of this section call
emrember will be required for such lateral bracing. Altematively, CalCUlabtIOnds may
for the plaeementof lateral braeing to be near e location of expected plas-
show that adequate lateral bracing can be proVl.ded by the column we an con-
tic hinges. Such guidance dates to the original evelopment of plastic design
tinuity plates or by the flanges of perpendicular beams. . . procedures in the early 1960s. In moment fram structures, many connection
The 1997 Seismic Provisions requrre . d colIteral
umn a bracing
. . when the ratIO .m details attempt to move the plastic hinge a short .stance away from the beam-
. 9-3 was 1ess th an 1.
EquatIon 25 . The.intent of this provlsIOn
h . was to t requue
be as to-column connection. Testing carried out as part f the SAC program (FEMA,
2000a) indicated that the braeing provided by ty ical composite floor slabs is
braem!~~ ~~e;:~mn in~lastic
. t lateral-torsional buckling for cases w ere It canno -
will not hinge. Studies utilizing analyses (Gupta adequate to avoid excessive strength deterioratio up to the required interstory
sure'iv ·nkl 1999· Bondy 1996) have shown that, m severe e~quakes, drift angle of 0.04 radian. As such, the FEMA rec rnmendations do not require
and aWl er,
Plastic '.
hinging can oceur m
~e
columns even when this ratio is sigmficantly
bl t ff the placement of supplementallateral braeing at lastic hinge locations adja-
cent to column connections for beams with compo ite floor construetion. These
larger than 1.25. The .rev~se . Iffil
. d r · t of 2 O was selected as a reasona e cu -o
. eater than 2.0 only occurs in the provisions allow the placement of lateral braces to be consistent with the tested
beeause eolumn p!astIc ~mgI:~~r ~u=t!t of the revisions to this seetion is connections that are used to justify the designo For onditions where drifts larger
case of extremely arge s o r y . fl th than to force the use
to encourage appropriate bracing of column anges ra er than the anticipated 0.04 radians are anticipated r improved perfonnance is
of much heavier eolumns. desired, the designer may decide to provide additio al lateral bracing near these
plastic hinges. If lateral braces are provided, they hould provide an availabte
C9.7b. Unbraced Connecti~ns . h in two-story frames, at strength of 6 percent of the expected capacity of e beam flange at the plastic
Unbraced eonneetions occur m speclal cases, .sue aS When sueh con- hinge location. If a reduced beam section connecti n detail is used, the reduced
. al fl or in atriums and similar arehltectural spaces. flange width may be considered in calculation of th bracing force. Placement of
meehanle oors. b cklin at the conneetion should
neetions oceur, the poten~a~ for out-~f-Pl~e th: COlu!ms to limit the likelihood bracing connections should consider the requireme ts of Section 9.2d.
be minimized. Three provISlons are glven or C9.9
of column buckling.
Column Splices
In the 1997 Seismic Provisions, there were no spec· requirements for column
C9.S. Lateral Bracing of Beam~ .
ecified not to exeeed splices in SMF systerns other than those in Section 8 3. Section 8.3 was intended
Spacing of lateral b~ac~s ~or beru;:.s ~n ~~;~:g:~ I~~~ previous editions, to take care of column bending at the splice by teq ·ring splices to be at least
y 4 ft (1.2 m) or one-half the column clear height fro the beam-to-column con-
0.086ryEIF . This liffiltatIon, w .Ie t. IS f lateral bracing requirements from
. . ally based on an eXaffilna Ion o nection. This requirement was based on the gener recognition that in elastic
was ongm l . d· and based on limited experimental data on beams analyses of moment frames the columns are typical bent in double curvature
early work on p astIc eSlgn . e uirements for SMF beams have
subjeet to cyclic loading. Lateral bracmg r q . K d Liu (2002) with an inflection point somewhere rtear the middle of the column height, and
.
sinee been investIgate dm. greater detail in Nakashlma, anao. anf O086r ElF . therefore, little bending of the column was expected t the splice.
This study indicates that a beam lateral su~port s~acmg o .ft an Y of
. appropna
IS . te, and slightly eonservative, to aehleve an mterstory dri gle Nonlinear analyses performed during the FEMAlS C project following the
0.04 radian. Northridge Earthquake, clearly demonstrated that be ding moments in the mid-
height of columns can be subs~antial and that, in fact the coluinns may be bent
For caleulating bracing strength aceordmg . to EJ~~I
fon A-6-7
tions of the an
have Specifica-
implicit in single eurvature under sorne conditions. Given thi fact, and the recognition
ti the use of Cd = 1 is justified because the equa . of the potential for severe damage or even collapse due to failure of column
on, . that the beams will be subjected to top flange loading. One see e~.
as~umptIon
splices, the need for special provisions for splices o moment frame columns
. th 1999 LRFD Specification for Structural Steel Buzldmgs was apparent.
this by comparmg e C tary Equation C-C3-4b,
(AISC 2000a) Equation C3-9 to the 1999 ommen. . f
where' the Specificatio~ e~uation is b:sed: :
Cr = 2. In the case of selSffile frames, w ere
~o:::::a:::tr:~:c:r~~: :e The provisions of Section 9.9 are intended to assur that the expected flex-
ural strength of the smaller column is fully develop d, either through use of
complete-joint-penetration groove welds or another onnection that provides

Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005,~ncl. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, March 9,2005, inc . Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN msTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcrrON, c.
AMERICAN ms11TUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, mc.

----_. _._---~-
~---~-_._-_.~------~~---------- .. _.. __ .. _._-_ .. _._ .. _--_ ...•.. _...... -
 6.1-168 PART 1 - SPECIAL MOMENT FRAMES [Comm. C9. Comm. CIO.] PART 1 - INTERMEDIATE MOMENT 6.1-169

similar strength, and that the shear strength of the splice is sufficient to resist the
C10.2. Beam-to-Column Connections
shear developed when Mpc occurs at each end of the spliced column.
The minimum interstory drift angle required for connections is 0.02 radian
The exception permits the design of splices based on appropriate inelastic analy- while that for SMF connections is 0.04 radian. level of interstory drift angle
sis to determine required strength, coupled with the use of principIes of fracture has been established for this type of frame on engineering judgment
mechanics to determine the available strength of the connection. applied to available tests and analytical studies, primarily those included in
FEMA (2000d) and FEMA (2000f).
C10. INTERMEDIATE MOMENT FRAMES (IMF)
One connection commonly used in the IMF, has welded unreinforced
The intermediate momentframes (IMF) and ordinary momentframes (OMF) are
flanges and a bolted web, is the fully restrained seismic moment connection
considered to be lower ductility systems as compared to special moment frames.
referred to as WUF-B (welded unreinforced bolted web).
Consequently, building codes assign lower response modification and deflec-
tion amplification factors to these systems. Both systems are intended primarily The WUF-B connection is defined in FEMA 350, 3.5.1 (FEMA, 2000a),
for use in buildings classified in lower seismic design categories and heights which specifies all the details for flange welding, access holes and for the
(FEMA, 2003). Sections ClO.1, Scope, and CI1.1, Scope, summarize typical bolted shear tab for connection to the beam web. It very similar to the WUF-W
seismic design categories and height applications anticipated by these Provi- (welded unreinforced flange-welded web) cmmectjí()n specified in FEMA 350,
sions, though the decision to use these systems on any specific building should Section 3.5.2, except that the beam web is bolted welded) to the shear tah.
be made considering the applicable building code and performance expectations
For design of the bolts to the beam web, high strength bolts are uti-
for that building.
lized. However, the capacity of the high strength is based on bearing bolt
The IMF is based on a tested connection design with a qualifying interstory drift capacity using a resistance factor of 1.0. These strength bolts are sized to
angle of 0.02 radian, which is half that required for the SMF. The OMF is based resist the maximum shear that is developed in the when yielding occurs at
on a prescriptive design procedure with no specific rotation angle requirements, both ends of the beam under seismic loads plus tributary gravity loads.
but it may be assumed that these connections should be capable of withstanding
Based upon FEMA 350, the WUF-B connection not perform as well as the
an interstory drift angle of up to about 0.01 radians and should remain mostly
WUF-W connection, and it was not always of sustaining interstory drift
elastic. It is assumed that these limited connection rotations will be achieved by
angles as large as 0.04 radian. This was due to transferring sorne
use oflarger frame members owing to the lower R and Cd values used in designo
shear load from the beam web to the beam flanges by slight slippage of
However, these lower values may not reliably ensure that the resulting frames
the boIts to the shear plateo
will not experience excessive rotation unless reduced drift limits are used. The
designer may wish to consider this issue in the designo Because of the aboye, FEMA 350 prequalified this B connection only for
ordinary moment frames and not special moment Based on recentrevi-
Cornmentary Section C9 for special moment frames offers additional commen-
sions of types of seismic moment connections as by these Provisions
tary relevant to IMF and OMF connections.
(see CI0.l), this connection would now meet the re~luiJ:eIIlents and be prequali-
The statement, "No additional requirements beyond the Specification." which fied for intermediate moment frames, but not for
appears in Sections 10.3, 10.6, 10.7, 11.3, 11.4, and 11.7 indicates that the Pro-
visions require no limitations or provisions beyond what is in the Specification
C10.2b. Conformance Demonstration
Conformance demonstration of IMF connections .
(AISC, 2005) on that particular topic.
nections, except that the required interstory drift is smaller. Refer to Com-
C10.1. Scope mentary Section C9.2b.
The intermediate moment frame (IMF) currently specified is essentially the same
C10.2d. Protected Zone
as the ordinary moment frame (OMF) system defined in the 1997 Seismic Provi-
The requirements in this section are identical to
sions. This new IMF is intended to provide limited levels of inelastic rotation ca-
pability and is based on tested designs. Due to the limited rotational capacity of
IMF as compared to SMF, SEIIASCE 7 (AS CE, 2002) places significant height
C10.4. Beam and Column Limitations
and other limitations on their use. C10.4a. Width-Thickness Limitations
Because the rotational demands on IMF beams columns are expected to be
lower than for SMF, the width-thickness lImlltaltlOIlSI for IMF refer to Table B4.1
of the Specification. See Section C9.4 for further c:1J.~cus:slOn.

Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCI10N, 1Nc. AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCI10N,

.."..---------_...... -------------------~.--~_ ...... _. - - - - - - _. . _._ .... _._--

6.1-170 PART 1 - INTERMEDIATE MOMENT FRAMES [Comm.ClO. Comm. Cll.] PART 1 - ORDINARY MOMENT
6.1-171

C10.4b. Beam Flanges This system is not anticipated to be as sm;cedtible to column failures as a K-
The requirements in this section are identical to thos.e in Section 9.4b. type braced frame since ,the column is for the moments resulting from
C10.5. Continuity Plates forces from the knee bracees). For columns knee bracing on opposite sides,
consideration should be given to column if the knee brace on one side
The requirements in tbis section are identical to those in Section 9.5. See Section were to fail.
C9.5 for further discussion.
Although not required per Section 11, sorne
C10.8. Lateral Bracing of Beams that would be expected
to improve performance of knee-brace frames
designing beams to span
The requirement for spacing of lateral bracing in this section is les s severe than between columns under fuIl gravity loads
benefit of the knee braces,
that in Section 9.8 because of the lower required drift angle for IMF as compared design of strong column/weak beam frames
use of compact shapes for all
to SMP. In this case, the required spacing of bracing is roughly double that for frame members, and the design of braces for '1 percent of forces per the aboye
SMP. See Section C9.8 for further discussion on lateral bracing ofbeams. design method. .

C11. ORDINARV MOMENT FRAMES (OMF) C11.2. Beam-to-Column Connections

Even though the inelastic. rotation demands on are expected to be low, the
C11.1. Scope Northridge Earthquake d~age demonstrated little, if any, inelastic rota-
The ordinary moment frame (OMP) is intended to provide for a limited level of tional capacity was avaihible in the co~nection ¡:¡'re~sclibe~d by the codes prior to
inelastic rotation capability that is less than that of the IMP. Unlike the IMP, the 1994. Thus, even for OMP, new connection are needed, and these
OMP is based on a prescriptive design procedure. The prescriptive requirements are provided in this section.
oftbis section are based on lessons leamed from the Northridge Earthquake steel
moment frame investigations and the results of analytical research and physical C11.2a. Requirements: FR Moment Con
testing completed as part of the FEMA SAC project. The OMF connection The requirements given for OMF connection in this section are'prescrip-
incorporates certain prescriptive details found to be beneficial to connection per- tive, to allow the engineer to design the c01me:ctil¡lms, where OMP are permitted,
formance. See Cornmentary Section CIO for additional commentary on OME without testing or use of test data. The designs are based on strength
calculations and prescriptive details.
Due to the limited rotational capacity of OMP as compared to SMP, SEIIASCE 7
(AS CE, 2002) places significant height and other limitations on their use. For FR moment connections, the required
of 1. 1RyMp (LRFD) or (1.1/1.5)RyMp (ASD) or maximum moment that can
OMF Knee-Brace Systems. Knee-brace systems use an axial brace from the be developed by the system. The 1.1 factor in equation is to recognize the
beam to the column to form a moment connection. Resistance to lateralloads is limited strain hardening expected, as welI as possible overstrength.
by flexure of the beam and column. In the absence of configurations qualified by
cyclic testing, knee-brace moment frames may be designed as ordinary moment It is reasonable to limit the requirements to the $<lLXunUlm moment that can be
frames. developed by the system, because the size of the or girder may have been
determined to meet demands greater than the demands. Factors that
The system can be considered as analogous to a moment frame with haunch type may limit the maximum moment that can be in the beam include the
connections. The brace represents the sloping bottom flange and the beam rep- folIowing:
resents the web and top flange of the haunch. The knee brace carries axialloads
(1) The strength of the columns;
only, while the beam-to-column connection carries both axial load and shear.
The design method would be to connect fue beamlgirder end to the column and (2) The strength of the fo~ndations to resist
the brace ends based on the forces required to develop 1.IRyMp of the beaml (3) The limiting earthquake force determined
girder at the location of the brace to beain work point. The beam-to column-
connection, knee-brace connections, and knee . .brace member design shall be In addition to the strength requirement, rI",j·,,'I·i~'" enhancements are required
designed for the greater of the forces resulting from this approach or the forces that have been demonstrated by FEMA 350 2000a) to significantly
determined with the load combinations per the applicable building code using improve the connection performance as to past steel moment frame
construction.
the amplified seismic load. The column and beams shall be braced either directly
or indirectly at the brace locations for a lateral force equal to a minimum of 2 The testing completed by the SAC Joint Venture that improved perfor-
percent of the brace axial design force. mance into the inelastic range can be obtained the following improvements
over the prescriptive pre-Northridge conn~ction . (1) the use ofnotch-tough
weld metal; (2) the removal of backing bars, bac:k.l2!c)U2i·rU! of the weld root, and
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9,2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, March 9,
AMERICAN INS1ITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INc.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRucnON,
6.1-172 PART 1 - ORDINARY MOMENT FRAMES [Cornrn. CIl. Comm. Cll.] PART 1 - ORDINARY MOMENT 6.1-173

rewelding with a reinforcing fillet weld; (3) the use of a welded web connection; A welded beam-to-column moment connection a strong-axis configuration
(4) the use of continuity plates; and (5) the use of the weld access hole detail similar to one tested at Lehigh University for SAC Project is illustrated in
as described below. Where the top flange steel backing is left in place, the steel Figure C-I-ll.l. FEMA 35,0 (FEMA, 2000a) rec~mmeJnds this detail for use in
backing is welded to the flange with a continuous fillet. (See Figure C-I-ll.l.) OMF with similar member sizes and other COIldIttons.
The prescribed weld access hole is shown in Figure 11-1 and in FEMA 350 Cyelic testing has shown that use of weld holes can cause premature
(FEMA, 2000a). The requirement to use this weld access hole configuration is fracture of the beam flange at end-plate moment c<!>Ime:ctI~Dns (Meng and Murray,
not stipulated for SMF nor IMF connections since the approved joints are based 1997). Short to long weld access holes were . with similar results.
on testing. Therefore, weld access holes are not for end-plate moment
The steel backing should not be welded to the underside of the beam flange. connections.
Discussion of the connection detailing is provided in FEMA documents 350 and For information on bolted moment end-plate COIm~Ctl4:ms in seismic applications,
353 (FEMA, 2000a; FEMA, 2000b).
refer to Murray and Shoemaker (2002) and 355D (FEMA, 2000e).
FEMA 350 (FEMA, 2000a) did not prequalify welded connections of beams to
C11.2b. Requirements: PR Moment Con
the weak axis of columns due to lack of sufficient test data. Designs ineluding
Section 11.2b gives strength requirements for
moment connections to the weak axis of columns should take into consideration
provide complete prescriptive design re~IUII·emlenl~s.
the fOllowing detailing recommendations. The bottom flange continuity plate
PR connections, the reader is referred to Leon (1
should be thicker than the beam flange and set lower than the theoretical un-
Ammerman (1990); Leon and Forcier (1992); Bj Colson and Brozzet-
derside of beam to facilitate beam depth tolerance. The continuity plates should
ti(1990); Hsieh and Deierlein (1991); Leon, ......v,ufU<OU' and Staeger (1996); and
project a minimum of 3 in. (75 mm) beyond the column flange and be tapered
FEMA 355D (FEMA, 2000e).
to the width of the beam flange. Continuity plates should be provided on the far
side of the column web. The bottom flange steel backing should be removed, C11.5. Continuity Plates
and a weld transition made to the thickened continuity plateo The steel backing This section requires continuity plates for OMF cOlJrme~ctIlons when the thickness
may remain at the top flange. See LRFD Manual of Steel Construction (AISC, of the column flange to wqich the beam, or
200Ia), Driscoll and Beedle, (1982), and Gilton and Uang (2002) for informa- welded does not meet the requirements of the
tion on fully rigid connections to the column weak axis. formulas was given in the 1992 Seismic rn)vl~,i01t.st
Among the many requirements promulgated for frames immediately
after the Northridge Earthquake of 1994 ~as a req¡ujI.rement that continuity plates
be provided in all moment frame connections employ welded flanges or
welded flange plates. Finite element analyses by El-Tawil and Kun-
nath, and experimental studies by Rieles, as part of the FEMNSAC
program (see FEMA 355D), showed that when the flange met the condi-
tions in the formulas, there was negligible "dlm~rel[}qe in the beam flange stresses
Welded Web at the connection whether ornot continuity plates provided.
The Provisions require that SMF and IMF use plates to match those in
the required tested connections. FEMA 350 use of the same formu-
las given in this section for SMF and IMFfor use the prequalified connec-
tions ineluded therein. In other words, continuity would not be required
with the prequalified connec1ions, even if the tests which they were based
use them, if the conditions of the formulas were
The thicknesses of the continuity plates as required are consistent with the
Fig. C-I-ll.l Schematic illustration of strong-axis moment connection: results of the FEMNSAC sttidies cited aboye.
directly welded. See Kaufmann, Xue, Lu and Fisher (1996).

Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN msTITUTE OF STEEL CONS1RUCTION, mc.
AMERICAN msTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION,

'.t..,
6.1-174 PART 1 - SPECIAL TRUSS MOMENT FRAMES [Comm. C12.
Cornm. C12.] PART 1 - SPECIAL TRUSS MOMENT FRAMES 6.1-175

C12. SPECIAL TRUSS MOMENT FRAMES (STMF)

C12.1. Scope
Truss-girder moment frames have often been designed with little or no regard
for truss ductility. Research has shown that such truss moment frames have very
poor hysteretic behavior with large, sudden reductions in strength and stiffness
due to buckling and fracture of web members prior to or early in the dissipation
of energy through inelastic deformations (Itani and Goel, 1991; Goel and Itani,
1994a). The resulting hysteretic degradation as illustrated in Figure C-I-12.l re-
sults in excessively large story drifts in building frames subjected to earthquake
ground motions with peak accelerations on the order of OAg to O.5g.
Research led to the development of special truss girders that limit inelastic defor-
mations to a special segment of the truss (Itani and Goel, 1991; Goel and Itani,
1994b; Basha and Goel, 1994). As illustrated in Figure C-I-12.2, the chords and
web members (arranged in an X pattern) of the special segment are designed to
withstand large inelastic deformations, while the rest of the structure remains
elastic. Special truss moment frames (STMF) have been validated by extensive
testing of full-scale subassemblages with story-high columns and full-span spe-
cial truss girders. As illustrated in Figure C-I-12.3, STMF are ductile with stable
hysteretic behavior for a large number of cycles up to 3 percent story drifts.

Special Segment
80 ~--------------~------~------~--------P-----~ I•Elastic l. Inelastic. I . Elastic. I
Fig. C-I-12.2. Intended yield mechanism of STM
diagonal web members in special segmento

40 ......................................~ .....................................,··..·······....···1....·········....·
"Ü)'
o.
~ 70
~
(ti
o o .-..
-J
'"c.
e....
QJ
~
111
35

U
j ~

-40 ····..····..··..·1·······..······..· ...................................,.................... ¡. . . . . . . . .. O

'"<..J
CIII:
O

¡¡;¡ -35
f-o
<
..J
-10 L _ _-L_ _ _.L...._ _--L_-t_...
-5.0 -2.5 O 2.5 5.0
-6.0 -4.0 -2.0 0.0 2.0 4.0 8.0
Lateral Displacement (in) LATER.AL DlSPLACSMENT (in.)

Fig. C-I-I2.3. Hysteretic behavior of STMF.

Fig. C-I-12.1. Strength degradation in undetailed truss girder.

Seismic Provisionsfor StructuralSteel Buildings, March 9,2005, incl. Supplement No. 1

Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnoN, !Nc.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, lNc.
6.1-176 PART 1 - SPECIAL TRUSS MOMENT FRAMES [Comm. C12. Comm. Cl3.] PART 1 - SPECIAL CONCENTRICALLY 6.1-177

Because STMF are relatively new and unique, the span length and depth of the Equation 12-1 was formulated without the contribution from any
truss girders are limited at this time to the range used in the test programo intermediate vertical members within the segment, in other words, other
than those at the ends of!pe special segment. In cases where those intermediate
C12.2. Special Segment vertical members possess :significant flexural their contribution should
It is desirable to locate the STMF special segment near mid-span of the truss
also be included in ca1culating the value of Vne •
girder because shear due to gravity loads is generally lower in that region. The
lower limit on special segment length of 10 percent of the truss span length C12.5. Width-Thickness Limitations
provides a reasonable limit on the ductility demand, while the upper limit of 50 The ductility demand on diagonal web in the special segment can be
percent of the truss span length represents more of a practicallimit. rather large. FIat bars are suggested at this time because of their high ductility.
The required strength of interconnection for X-diagonals is intended to account Tests (Itani and Goel, 1991) have shown that angles with width-thickness
for buckling over half the full diagonallength (El-Tayem and Goel, 1986; Goel ratios that are less than 0.18~E/Fy also adequate ductility for use as
and Itani, 1994b). It is recornmended that half the full diagonal length be used web members in an X configuration. Chord in the special segment
in calculating the design compression strength of the interconnected X-diagonal are required to be compact cross-sections to the formation of plastic
hinges.
members in the special segment.
Because it is intended that the yield mechanism in the special segment form over C12.6. Lateral Bracing
its fulllength, no major structuralloads should be applied within the length of the .The top and bottom chords are required to be braced to provide for the
special segment. In special segments with open Vierendeel panels, in other words, stability of the special segment during cyclic . The lateral bracing limit
when no diagonal web members are used, any structuralloads should be avoid- for flexural members, Lp, as specified in the Sp~e<t~tiC(lticm has been found to be
ed. Accordingly, a restrictive upper limit is placed on the axial load in diagonal adequate for this purpose.
web members due to gravity loads applied directly within the special segment.
C13. SPECIAL CONCENTRICALLV BR FRAMES
C12.3. Strength of Special Segment Members (SCBF)
STMF are intended to dissipate energy through flexural yielding of the chord
members and axial yielding and buckling of the diagonal web members in the C13.1. Scope
special segment. It is desirable to provide minimum shear strength in the special Concentrically braced frames are those braced
segment through flexural yielding of the chord members and to limit the axial of members that meet at a joint intersect at a point form a vertical truss system
load to a maximum value. Plastic analysis can be used to determine the required that resists lateralloads. A few cornmon types ofcqrlCeltltrically braced frames are
shear strength of the truss special segments under the factored earthquake load shown in Figure C-I-13.1, including diagonally cross-braced (X), and
combination. V-braced (or inverted-V-braced). Use of bracing in any configura-
tion is not permitted for SCBE Because of their concentrically braced
C12.4. Strength of Non-Special Segment Members frames provide complete truss action with subjected primarily to axial
STMF are required to be designed to maintain elastic behavior of the truss mem- loads in the elastic range. However, during a to severe earthquake,
bers, columns, and all connections, except for the members of the special seg-
ment that are involved in the formation of the yield mechanism. Therefore, all
members and connections outside the special segments are to be designed for
ca1culated loads by applying the combination of gravity loads and equivalent
lateral loads that are necessary to develop the maximum expected nominal
shear strength of the special segment, Vne, in its fully yielded and strain-hard-
ened state. Thus, Equation 12-1, as formulated, accounts for uncertainties in
the actual yield strength of steel and the effects of strain hardening of yield-
ed web members and hinged chord members. It is based upon approximate
V-Bracing Inverted Diagonal
analysis and test results of special truss girder assemblies that were subjected X-Bracing
V-Bracing Bracing
to story drifts up to 3 percent (Basha and Goel, 1994). Tests (Jain, Goel and
Hanson, 1978) on axially loaded members have shown that 0.3Pnc is repre- Fig. C-I-13.1. Examples 'of concentric bracing cq¡¡¡!iJ<¡Urati01ls.
sentative of the average nominal post-buckling strength under cyclic loading.

Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mai:eh 9, 2005 inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INsTlTUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, INc. AMERICAN INSTlTUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION,
6.1-178 PART 1 - SPECIAL CONCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAMES [Comm. Cl3. Comm, Cl3.] PART 1 - SPECIAL CONCENTRICALLY
6.1-179

the bracing members and their connections are expected to undergo significant braces can sustain large inelastic cyc1ic dejOonnal:iOIls without experiencing pre-
inelastic deformations into the post-buckling range. mature failures.
Since the initial adoption of concentrically braced frames into seismic design Analytical studies (Tang and Goel, 1987; and Goel, 1991) on bracing
codes, more emphasis has been placed on increasing brace strength and stiffness, systems designed in strict accordance with code requirements for con-
primarily through the use of higher design loads in order to minimize inelastic centrically braced frames predicted brace without the development of
demando More recently, requirements for ductility and energy dissipation capa- significant energy dissipation. Failures occurred often at plastic hinges (lo-
bility have also been added. Accordingly, :provisions for special concentrically cal buckling due to lack of compactness) or in connections. Plastic hinges
braced fr4mes (SCBF) were developed to exhibit stable and ductile behavior in normally Occur at the ends of abrace and at the midspan. Analytical mod-
the event of a major earthquake. Earlier design provisions have been retained for els of bracing systems that were designed to stable ductile behavior when
ordinary concentrically bracedframes (OCBF) in Section 14. subjected to the same ground motion records the previous concentrically
During asevere earthquake, bracing members in a concentrically braced frame braced frame designs exhibited full and stable h,j,o~""~,,,";'" without fracture. Simi-
are subjected to large deformations in cyc1ic tension and compression into the lar results were observed ,in full-scale tests in and Krawinkler (1985)
post-buckling range. As a result, reversed cyc1ic rotations occur at plastic hinges and Tang and Goel (1989).
in much the same way as they do in beams and columns in moment frames. In For double-angle and double-channel braces, stitch spacing, in addition
fact, braces in a typical concentrically braced frame can be expected to yield and to more stringent compactness criteria, is to achieve improved ductility
buckle at rather moderate story drifts of about 0.3 percent to 0.5 percent. In a and energy dissipation. This is especially for double-angle and double-
severe earthquake, the braces could undergo post-buckling axial deformations channel braces that buckle imposing large shear forces on the stitches. Studies
lOto 20 times their yield deformation. In order to survive such large cyc1ic de- also showed that placement of double angles a toe-to-toe configuration re-
formations without premature failure the bracing members and their connections duces bending strains and local buckling (Aslani Goel, 1991).
must be properly detailed.
Many of m.e failures reported in concentrically braced frames due to strong
Damage during past earthquakes and that observed in laboratory tests of concen- ground motIOns have been in the connections. , cyc1ic testing of speci-
trically braced frames has generally resulted from the limited ductility and corre- mens designed and detailed in accordance with provisions for concentri-
sponding brittle failures, which are usually manifested in the fracture of connec- cally braced frames has produced connection (Astaneh-AsI, Goel and
tion elements or bracing members. The lack of compactness in braces results in Hanson, 1986). Although typical design practice been to design connections
severe local buckling, resulting in a high concentration of flexural strains at these only for axialloads, good post-buckling response that eccentricities be
locations and reduced ductility. Braces in concentrically braced frames are sub- accounted for in the connection design, which be based upon the maxi-
ject to severe local buckling, with diminished effectiveness in the nonlinear range mum loads the connection may be required to Good connection perfor-
at low story drifts. Large story drifts that result from early brace fractures can im- mance can be expected if the effects of brace cyc1ic post-buckling be-
pose excessive ductility demands on the beams and columns, or their connections. havior are considered.
Research has demonstrated that concentrically braced frames, with proper con- For brace buckling in the plane of the gusset the end connections should
figuration, member design and detailing can possess ductility far in excess of be designed for the full axial load and flexural of the brace (Astaneh-AsI
that previously ascribed to such systems. Extensive analytical and experimental and others, 1986). Note that a realistic value of K be used to represent the
work by Goel and others has shown that improved design parameters, such as connection fixity.
limiting width/thickness ratios (to minimize local buckling), c10ser spacing of
stitches, and special design and detailing of end con:q.ections greatly improve For brace buckling out of the plane of single
the post-buckling behavior of concentrically braced frames (Goel, 1992b; Goel, in the gusset is induced by, member end rotati(m~.
1992c). The design requirements for SCBF are based on those developments. conditions with plastic hing~s at midspan in
the gusset plateo Satisfactory performance can be
Previous requirements for concentrically braced frames sought reliable behavior plate to develop restraint-free plastic rotaÚons.
by limiting global buckling. Cyclic testing of diagonal bracing systems verifies between the end of the brace and the assumed
that energy can be dissipated after the onset of global buckling if brittle failures sufficiently long to pennit plastic rotations, yet
due to local buckling, stability problems and connection fractures are prevented. currence of plate buckling prior to member bu<~kli!Ih!.
When properly detailed for ductility as prescribed in the Provisions, diagonal plate thickness is recommended (Astaneh-AsI and
free distance is measured from the end of the brace

Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005 incl. Supplement No. 1
AMERIcAN lNSTITIJTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, lNc. AMEruCAN lNsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION,
6.1-180 PART 1 - SPECIAL CONCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAMES [Comm. e13. Cornrn.C13.] PART 1 - SPECIAL CONCENTRICALLY
6.1-181

to the brace centerline, drawn from the point on the gusset pIate nearest to the
Since the stringent design and detailing recluí~leIIilents for SCBF are expected
brace end that is constrained from out-of-plane rotation. See Figure C-I-13.2.
to produce more reliable performance when to high energy demands
Altematively, connections with stiffness in two directions, suc~ as. cross gusset
imposed by severe earthquakes, model codes have reduced the design
plates, can be detailed. Test results indicate that forc~ng the plasllc hmg~ t~ oc~ur load level below that required for OCBE
in the brace rather than the connection plate results m greater energy dlsslpatlOn
capacity (Lee and Ooel, 1987). Bracing connections should not be configured . such a way that beams or col-
umns of the frame are interrupted to allow for continuous brace element. This
provision is necessary to irnprove the out-of stability of the bracing system
at those connections.

A zipper column system and a two-story X are illustrated in Figure C-I-

13.3. Two-story X and zipper-braced frames be designed with post-elastic
i behavior consistent with the expected behavior V-braced SCBE These con-
i2t figurations can also capture the increase in PO:Sltf~la~;nc axialloads on beams at
I other levels. It is possible to design two-story
¡ elastic behavior that is superior to the expected
¡ proportioning elements to discourage sm.!!le:-stIOI1l
!/ C13.2. Members
--r~-
i C13.2a. Slenderness
i The slenderness (Kl/r) limit has been raised
--'~~ l...--_ _t_= thickness of gusset plate 200 for SCBE Research has
shown that frames with slender braces designed cornpression strength behave
well due to the overstrength inherent in their capacity (Trernblay, 2000).
For braces with overall slendemess greater 4.0 ~E/ Fy , the overstrength
factor of 2.0 in SEI/ASCE 7 is not adequate to account for the effectof this
Fig. C-I-13.2. Brace-to-gusset plate requirement overstrength on adjoining members, so such braces are only permitted in
for buckling out-of-plane bracing system.
frames in which the columns are designed with consideration of brace
overstrength, rather than withthe overstrength in the amplified seismic
"Zipper Column" load. Tang and Ooel (1989) and Goel and Lee 1992) showed that the post-
buckling cyclic fracture life of bracing rne:mt:.er~ generally increases with an
increase in slenderness ratio. An upper limit is to maintain a reasonable
level of cornpressive strength.

C13.2b. Required Strength

The required strength of bracing members with to the limit state of net-
section fracture is theexpected brace strehgth. In editions, this require-
ment was included with connection requirements Section 13.3. It is now
included under Section 13.2 for consistency wi the Specification, which de-
fines net section fracture as a member limit state.
It should be noted that sorne, if not all, steel ULU.''''LJ''I'''''
have expected yield strengths significantly higher
yield strengths; sorne have expected yield strlen~(tij.s
pected tensile strength. For such cases, no slgmt:lc~nt reduction of the brace sec-
(a) (b) tion is permissible and connections rnay require reinforcernent of the brace
section. This is the case foro knife-plate between gusset plates and
Fig. C-I-13.3. (a) Two-story X-bracedframe; (b) "zipper-column" with inverted-V bracing.

Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplernent No. 1
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Stee{ Buildings, Mareh 9,
AMERICAN msTITUTE OF SlEEL CONSlRUCTION, mc. AMERICAN msTITUTE OF SlEEL CONSTRUCTION,
6.1-182 PART 1 - SPECIAL CONCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAMES [Comm.C13. Comm.C13.] PART 1 - SPECIAL CONCENTRICALLY 6.1-183

ASTM A53 or A500 braces [for example, pipe braces or square, rectangular or leading to fracture may represent a limitation the performance (Yang and
round hollow structural sections (HSS) braces], where the over-slot of the brace Mahin, 2005).
required for erection leaves a reduced section. If this section is left unreinforced,
net section fracture will be the governing limit state and brace ductility may be The same limitations appIy to coIumns in as their flexural strength and
significantly reduced (Korol, 1996; Cheng, Kulak and Khoo, 1998). Reinforce- rotation capacity, and has been shówn to be a SlgljnDlCaJl1t contributor to the stabil-
ment may be provided in the form of steeI pIates weIded to the tube, increasing ity of SCBF (Tremblay, 2001, 2003). It has been demonstrated that SCBF
the effective area at the reduced brace section (Yang and Mahin, 2005). Braces can be subject to significant interstory drift (S Mahin and Chang, 2003),
with two continuous weIds to the gusset wrapped around its edge (instead requiring columns to undergo inelastic rotation.
. of the more typicaI detaiI with four welds stopping short of the gusset edge)
Enhanced ductility and fracture life of re(:taIlg~llar hollow structural sections
performed adequateIy in the tests by Cheng. However, this practice may be (HSS) bracing members can ~e achieved in a of ways. The tube walls
difficult to implement in fieId conditions; it also creates a potential stress riser can be stiffened by using longitudinal stiffeners, as rib plates or small angle
that may lead to crack initiation. sections in a hat configuration (Liu and Goel, 19 . Use of plain concrete infill
Where there is no reduction in the section, or where the section is reinforced so has been found to be quite effective in the severity of local buckling
that the effective net section is at least as great as the brace gross section, this in the post-buckling range of the member (Liu Goel, 1988; Lee and Goel,
requirement does not apply. The purpose of the requirement is to prevent net 1987). Based on their test results, Goel and (1992) formulated an empiri-
section fracture prior to significant ductility; having no reduction in the section cal equation to determinethe effective ratio of concrete-filled
is deemed sufficient to ensure this behavior. Reinforcement, if present, should rectangular tubular bracing members. The width-thickness ratio can be
be connected to the brace in a manner that is consistent with the assumed state of calculated by multiplying fue actual width- ratio by a factor, [(0.0082
stress in the designo It is recornmended that the connection of the reinforcement x KLlr) + 0.264], for KLlr between 35 and 90, r being the effective slender-
to the brace be designed for the strength of the reinforcement on either side of ness ratio of the member. The purpose of in:q.ll as described herein is to
the reduced section. inhibit the detrimental effects of local buckling tube walls. Use of concrete
to achieve composite action of braces is covered p~ 11, Section 13.4.
C13.2c. Lateral Force Distribution
This provision attempts to balance the tensile and compressive resistance across As an alternative to using~ a single large HSS, may be given to
the width and breadth of the building since the buckling and post-buckling using double smaller tube sections stitched and connected at the ends
strength of the bracing members in compression can be substantially les s than to a single gusset plate (or cross shape if in much the same way as
that in tension. Good balance helps prevent the accumulation of inelastic drifts double angle or channel sections are uséd in a . to-back configuration (Lee
in one direction. An exception is provided for cases where the bracing members and Goel, 1990). Such double tube sections a number of advantages,
are sufficiently oversized to provide essentially elastic response. including reduced fit-up problems, smaller ratio for the same
overall width of the section, in-plane buckling most cases eliminating the
C13.2d. Width-Thickness Limitations problem of out-of-plane bending of gusset greater energy dlssipation as
Traditionally, braces have shown little orno ductility after overall (member) buck- three plastic hinges form in the member, and strength because of effec-
ling, which produces a plastic hinge at the brace midpoint. At this plastic hinge, tive length factor, K, being'close to 0.5 as to K=l.O when out-of-plane
local buckling can cause large strains,leading to fracture at low drifts. It has buckling occurs in a single ,tube and single gusset plate member.
been found that braces with compact elements are capable of achieving signifi-
cantIy more ductility by forestalling local buckling (Goel, 1992b; Hassan and
C13.2e. Built-up Members
Goel, 1991; Tang and Goel, 1989). Width-thickness ratios of compression ele- Closer spacing of stitches and higher stitch s
for built-up bracing members in SCBF (Aslani
ments in bracing members have been set to be at or below the requirements for
compact sections in order to minimize the detrimental effects of local buckling 1990) than those required for OCBF. These are to restrict individual
and subsequent fracture during repeated inelastic cycles. element bending between the stitch points and premature fracture of
bracing members. Wider spacing is permitted an exception when buckling
Tests have shown fracture due to local buckling is especially prevalent in rectan- does not cause shear in the stitches. Bolted are not permitted within the
gular HSS with width-thickness ratios larger than the prescribed limits (Hassan middle one-fourth of the clear brace length as the presence of boh holes in that
and Goel, 1991; Tang and Goel, 1989). Even for square HSS braces designed region may cause premature fractures due to the of a plastic hinge in
to meet the seismic width-thickness ratios of these Provisions, local buckling the post-buckling range.

Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, , inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN mSTITIITE OF STEEL CONSTRucnON, lNc.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL COiNsTRucnO:NJ me.

----~~_. __ .~._._--,---,_ ...._--'-_._._----_._ ..__ .._- -_.__ . _ - - - - - - _

.... _ - - ..
6.1-184 PART 1 - SPECIAL CONCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAMES [Cornm. Cl3. Cornm.C13.] PART 1 - SPECIAL CONCENTRICALLY 6.1-185

C13.3. Required Strength of Bracing Connections C13.3b. Required Flexural Strength .

Braces in SCBF are expected to undergo cyclic under severe ground
C13.3a. Required Tensile Strength motions, forming plastic hinges at their center at each end. To prevent frac-
Braces in SCBF are required to have gross-section tensile yielding as their gov-
ture resulting from brace rotations, bracing cOIm~cti()lls must either have suf-
eming limit state so that they will yield in a ductile manner. Local connection
ficient strength to confine inelastic rotation to the member or sufficient
failure modes such as block shear rupture must be preeluded. Therefore, the
ductility to accornmodate brace-end rotations.
calculations for these failure modes must use the maximum load that the brace
can develop. Testing has demonstrated that where a single plate connection is: used,
the rotations can be accornmodated as long as brace end is separated by at
The minimum of two criteria (in other words, the nominal expected axial tension
least two times the gusset thickness from a line pe:rpe:ndicullar to the brace axis
strength of the bracing member and the maximum force that could be developed
about which the gusset plate may bend by the beam, column, or
by the overall system) determines the required strength of both the bracing con-
other brace joints (Astaneh-AsI and others, 198 This condition is illustrated
nection and the beam-to-column connection if it is part of the bracing system.
in Figure C-I-13.2 and provides hysteretic as illustrated in Figure
This upper limit is ineluded in the specification for structures where elements
C-I-13.4. The distance of 2t shown in Figure C-I- 3.2 should be considered the
other than the tension bracing limit the system strength; for example, foundation
minimum offset distance. In practice, it may be to specify a slightly
elements designed in systems based on the application of load combinations
larger distance (perhaps 3t) on construction to provide for erection
using the amplified seismic load. Ry has been added to the first provision to rec-
tolerances. More infonnation on seismic design gusset plates can be obtained
ognize the expected strength of the member material.
fromAstaneh-Asl (1998).
The provisions in both Sections 13.3a and 14.4 allow the connection design force
Where fixed end connections are used in one with pinned connections in
to be limited by the maximum force that the system can transfer to the connec-
the other axis, the effect of the fixity should be qO][lsi,deI:ed in determining the
tion. Depending on the specific situation(s), there are a number of ways one can
critical buckling axis.
determine the maximum force transferred to the connection. They inelude
(1) Perform a pushover analysis to determine the force s acting on the connec-
tions when the maximum frame capacity (leading to an irnminent coHapse
mechanism) is reached.
(2) Determine how much force can be resisted before causing uplift of a spread
footing (note that the foundation design forces are not required to resist
more than the code base shear level). This type of relief is not typicaHy
applicable to a deep foundation since the determination of when uplift will
occur is not easy to determine with good accuracy.
(3) Perfonn a suite of inelastic time history analyses and envelop the connec-
tion demands.
Calculating the maximum connection force by one of the three methods noted
above is not a common practice on design projects. In sorne cases, such an ap-
proach could result in smaller connection demands. But, from a conceptual b~­ • • XZO
L-IOfT.
sis, since the character of the ground motions is not known to any great extent, 1t KL/r-1O
-:200
is unrealistic to expect that such forces can be accurately calculated. AH three ap-
proaches rely on an assumed distribution of lateral forces which may not match
'IN. 3.0 IN.
reality (approach #3 probably being the best estimate, but also the most calcu- LATERAL 6
lation intensive). In most cases, providing the connection with a capacity large
enough to yield the member is needed because of the large inelastic demands Fig. C-I-J3.4. P-o diagramfor a
placed on a structure by a major earthquake.
Requirements specific to member net section fracture have been moved to
Section 13.2b.

Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, , incl. Supplement No. 1
AMERrCAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, !Ne. AMERICAN !Ns'I1TÜTE OF STEEL Cm~sTR:uCT'ION, !Nc.
6.1-186 PART 1 - SPECIAL CONCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAMES [Cornm.C13. Cornm. C13.] PART 1 - SPECIAL CONCENTRICALLY 6.1-187

C13.4. Special Bracing Configuration Requirements C13.5. Column Splices

In the event of a major earthquake, colurnris in coru):eltltncally
C13.4a. V-Type and Inverted V-Type Bracing
undergo significant bending ~eyond the elastic
V-braced and inverted-V-braced frames exhibit a special problem that sets them
of the braces. Even though fueir bending
apart from braced frames in which both ends of the braces frame into beam-
process when elastic design methods are u~ed,
column connections. The expected behavior of SCBF is that upon continued lat-
have adequate compactness and shear and'flexural
eral displacement as the brace in compression buckles, its force drops while that
their lateral strength during large cyclic def'onnatiqrls
in the brace in tension continues to increase up to the point of yielding. In order
column splices are required to have sufficient to prevent failure un-
for this to occur, an unbalanced vertical force must be resisted by the intersecting
der expected post-elastic forces. Analytical on SCBF that are not part
beam, as well as its connections and supporting members. In order to prevent
of a dual system have shown that columns can as much as 40 percent of
undesirable deterioration of lateral strength of the frame, the SCBF provisions
the story shear (Tang and Goel, 1987; Has san and 1991). When columns
require that the beain pos ses s adequate strength to resist this potentially
are cornmon to both SCBF· and SMF in a dual their contribution to
significant post-buckling load redistribution (the unbalanced load) in combination
story shear may be as high as 50 percent. This of SCBF greatly helps in
with appropriate gravity loads. Tests have shown that typical bracing members
making the overall frame hysteretic loops "full" compared with those of
demonstrate a minimum residual post-buckling compressive strength of about
individual bracing members 'which are generally ....., ... ,..Ih."'rl" (Has san and Goel,
30 percent of the initial compressive strength (Has san and Goel, 1991). [AI-
1991; Black, Wenger and Popov, 1980). See C-I-13.5.
though very slender braces can have a higher post-buckling resistance, the effect
of this additional strength on reducing the unbalance force is negligible. Very C13.6. Protected Zone
stocky braces (those with slenderness ratios below 60) can also have higher post- Welded or shot-in attachments in areas of strain may lead to fracture.
buckling resistance, but such braces are not typically used in buildings.] This is Such areas in SCBF include gusset platesand eX1Jejcted plastic-hinge regions in
the maximum compression load that should be combined with the full yield load the braceo
of the adjacent tension braceo The full tension load can be expected to be in the
range of R/\. In addition, configurations where the beam-to-brace connection is
significantly offset from the midspan location should be avoided whenever pos si-
Structure F4MR - Miyagi thQua~~e 0.5 g
ble, since such a configuration exacerbates the unbalanced conditions cited aboye.
The adverse effect of this unbalanced load can be mitigated by using bracing 300 Ba•• shear (ton)
configurations, such as V- and inverted-V-braces in alternate stories creating an
X-configuration over two story modules, or by using a "zipper column" with V-
or inverted-V bracing (Khatib, Mahin and Pis ter, 1988). See Figure C-I-13.3. 200
Adequate lateral bracing at the brace-to-beam intersection is necessary in order
100
to prevent adverse effects of possible lateral-torsional buckling of the beam. The
stability of this connection is influenced by the flexural and axial forces in the
beam, as well as by any torsion imposed by brace buckling or the post-buckling
o
residual out-of-straightness of abrace. The cornmittee did not believe that under
these conditions the bracing requirements in the Specification are sufficient to -:-100
ensure the torsional stability of this connection. Therefore a requirement based
on the moment due to the flexural strength of the beam is imposed. -200
C13.4b. K-Type Bracing -300
K-bracing is generalIy not considered desirable in cOllcentrically braced frames -15.0 10.0 15.0
and is prohibited entirely for SCBF because it is considered undesirable to have First story displace (cm)
columns that are subjected to unbalanced lateral forces from the braces, as these
forces may contribute to column failures. Fig. C-I-13.5. Base shear versus story drift aSCBF

Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings. Mareh 9. 2005. inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings. Mareh 9. 2005 inel. Supp1ement No. 1
AMERICAN lNsTlTUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON. lNc. AMERICAN lNsTlTUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON.
6.1-188 PART 1 - SPECIAL CONCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAMES
Figures C-I-13.6 and C-I-13.7 show the protected zone of an inverted-V and an X-
braced frame, respectively. Note that for the X-braced frame, the half-Iength of the
brace is used and a plastic hinge is anticipated at any of the brace quarter points.
C14. OROINARV CONCENTRICALLV BRACEO FRAMES
(OCBF)
C14.1. Scope
The Provisions as sume that the applicable building code significantly restricts
the perrnitted use of OCBF because of their limited ductility. Specifically, it is
assumed that the restrictions given in SEI/ASCE 7 (AS CE, 2002) govern the use
of the structural system. SEI/ASCE 7 effectively restricts the use of OCBF as
described in Comrnentary Section CI4.2.
Fig. C-I-13.6. Protected zone ofinverted-V bracedframe.
Hg. C-I-13.7. Protected zone ofX-bracedframe.
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN !NslITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc.
[Cornm.C13. Cornm. C14.] PART 1 - ORDINARY CONCENTRICALLY BRAC D FRAMES
6.1-189
Additionally, it is assumed that the applicable bui! 'ng code specifies a value of
the R factor much lower than that ineluded in the 02 edition of SEI/ASCE 7,
corresponding to changes made in the load combi ations specified for bracing
members and connections in these pIOvisions. Pre ious versions of the Provi-
sions have required that the members of OCBF b designed for the amplified
seismic load, effectively reducing the R factor by 50 percent. To make the design
of OCBF consistent with other systems, this require ent has been dropped from
the Provisions, but a comrnensurate reduction in th R factor for these systems
is being made in Supplement Number 1 to the 2 5 edition of SEI/AS CE 7.
The required strength of the members of OCBF w' 1 now be deterrnined using
the loading combinations stipulated by the applic ble building code (and the
reduced R factors prescribed in SEI/ASCE 7), wi out the application of the
amplified seismic load.
Although sorne building codes perrnit the use of O BF beyond the limitations
on height and response reduction factor, R, in SEI/A CE 7, such designs are not
expected to pro vide reliable seismic performance. 1 is recomrnended that con-
centrically braced frames that exceed the OCBF hei ht limit in SEI/ASCE 7, or
that use a response reduction factor R greater than p .tted by that standard, be
designed and detailed in conformance with the requi ements for SCBE
Previous versions of the Provisions required that co ections of OCBFs be de-
signed for the expected brace strength. This had the u .ntended consequence that
comrnercially available rod elevises were not able to atch the required strength
of the threaded rod bracing, unless upset IOds were sed. It is expected that in a
normal IOd (not upset) and elevis system, inelastic de ands will be limited to the
threaded portion of the IOd.
The scope has been modified to inelude the follow' g: "OCBF aboye the iso-
lation system in seismically isolated structures shal meet the requirements of
Sections 14.4 and 14.5 and need not meet the req irements of Sections 14.2
and 14.3." The pIOvisions in Section 14.5 are inten d for use in the design of
OCBFs for which forces havebeen deterrnined using n isolated response reduc-
tion factor, R¡, equal to 1.0. Such OCBFs are expecte to remain essentially elas-
tic during design level earthquakes and, therefore, pr isions that are intended to
accornrnodate significant inelastic response are not r quired for their designo
C14.2. Bracing Members
Bracing members in OCBF are expected tQ undergo imited buckling under se-
vere ground motions. They are therefore required to e seismically compact in
order to limit local buckling and fracture.
In V-, inverted-V-, and K-braced frames, slender bra es are not perrnitted. This
restriction is intended to limit the únbalance forces th develop in frarning mem-
bers after brace buckling; see ISection C13.4.
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, in 1. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INSTlTUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, me
 [Comm. C14. COffiffi. C15.] PARTI-ECCEMTIUCALLYBRACED 6.1-191
6.1-190 PART 1 - ORDINARY CONCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAMES

C14.3. Special Bracing Configuration Requirements C14.5b. K-Type Bracing

Similar to K-type bracing, V- and inverted-V-type bracing can induce a high K-type bracing is not considered appropriate use aboye isolation systems
unbalanced force in the intersecting beam. Unlike the SCBF pro"visions, which under the conditions permitted.
require that the beams at the intersections of such braces be designed for the C14.5c. V-Type and Invertéd-V-Type:, Sra
expected yield strength of the braces to prevent a plastic hinge mechanism in The requirements of Section 14.3 are corlsídlere:d
the beam, the corresponding OCBF provisions permit the beam design on the aboye the isolation system because the forces
basis of the maximum force that can be developed by the system. This relief for buckling of braces is not ariticipated. Th~ only is for the beams to
OCBF acknowledges that, unlike SCBF, the beam forces in an OCBF frame at be continuous between columns.
the time of an imminent system failure mode could be less critical than those due
to the expected yield strength of the connecting braces. See the commentary for C15. ECCENTRICALLY BRACEO F (EBF)
Sections 13.3a(b) and 14.4(a) for techniques that may be used to determine the
maximum force developed by the system. C15.1. Scope
Research has showIÍ that eccentrically braced (EBF) can provide an elas-
C14.4. Bracing Connections tic stiffness that is comparable to that of braced frames
Bracing connections are designed for forces corresponding to the expected brace (SCBF) and ordinary concentrically braced (OCBF), particularly when
strength, the maximum force that the system can develop (see Commentary Sec- short link lengths are used, and excellent ductility energy dissipation capac-
tion C13.3 for discussion), or the amplified seismic load so as to del ay the con- ity in the inelastic range, comparable to that of ial moment frames (SMF),
nection limit state. Net section fracture of the member is to be ineluded with provided that the llilks are not too short (Roeder Popov; 1978; Libby, 1981;
connection limit states and designed for the amplified seismic load. This edition Merovich, Nicoletti and Hartle, 1982; Hjelmstad Popov, 1983; Malley and
of the Provisions permit the required strength of abrace connection in an OCBF Popov, 1984; Kaslli and Popov, 1986a, 1986b; and Popov, 1987a, 1987b;
to not exceed the load effect based on the amplified seismic load. It is noted that Engelhardt and Popov, 1989a, 1989b; Popov, hn:ge1J~ar4jt and Rieles, 1989). EBF
the use of amplified seismic load for brace connection was allowed in the 1992 are composed of columns, beams and braces. distinguishing characteris-
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings; however, it was removed from tic of an EBF is that at' least one end of every is connected so that the
the 1997 and 2002 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings because brace force is transmitted through sheat and of a short beam segment
of a concem that no, the prescribed global overstrength factor may not be ap- called the link. FigUre C-I-15: 1 illustrates sorne of eccentricalIy braced
propriate because, in moderate to high ductility seismic load resisting systems, frames. Inelastic action in EBF under seismic is restricted primanly to
individual connections can experience forces much higher than the amplified the links. These provisions are intended to ensure cyclic yielding in the links
seismic load in order for the frame to achieve its maximum overall capacity. On can occur in a stable manner while the diagonal columns, and portions
the other hand, the approach based on the amplified seismic load is considered of the beam outside of the link remain essentially under the forces that
appropriate for systems designed for limited ductility. As noted in Commentary can be developed by fully yielded and strain links.
Section CI4.1, OCBFs will now be designed for a low enough R-value to elas-
sify it as a low-ductility system so that the design of its brace connections for Figure C-I-15.1 identifies the key components of
amplified seismic loads is now deemed acceptable. segments outside of the links, the diagonal braces, the columns. Require-
ments for links are provided in Sections 15.2 to 15.5;· for beam seg-
The Provisions permit that bolt slip be designed for a lower force level than is ments outside of the links and for the diagonal are provided in Sections
required for other limit states. This reflects the fact that bolt slip does not con- 15.6 and 15.7; requirements for columns are Drc)viciefl in Section 15.8.
stitute connection failure and that the associated energy dissipation can serve to
In sorne bracing arrangements, such as that ill in Figure C-I-15.2 with
reduce seismic response.
links at each end of the brace, links may not be effective. If the upper
link has a significantly lower ?esign shear strength that for the link in the
C14.5. OCBF aboye Seismic Isolation Systems story below, the upper link will deform ineHlstically limit the force that can
C14.5a. Bracing Members be developed in the brace an<;l to the lower link. this condition occurs
The requirements in this section are similar to Section 14.2, except that the KLlr the upper link is termed an active link and the link is termed an inactive
limitation is applied to all braces. Tension-only bracing is not considered to be link. The presence of potentially inactive links in an increases the difficulty
appropriate for use aboye isolation systems under the conditions permitted. of analysis. I

Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, .

Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, INc.
AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRucnON,
 PART 1 - ECCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAMES [Cornm. C15. Comm. C15.] PART 1 - ECCENTRICALLY BRACED 6.1-193
6.1-192

It can be shown with plastic frame analyses that, in sorne cases, an inactive link These provisions are prirnarily intended to cover
will yield under the cornbined effect of dead, live and earthquake loads, thereby link is a horizontal framing rnernber located the column and abrace or
reducing the frame strength below that expected (Kasai and Popov, 1984). Fur- between two braces. For the inverted Y-braced configuration shown in Fig-
thermore, because inactive links are required to be detailed and constructed as ure C-I-15.1(d), the link is attached underneath beam. If this configur~tion is
if they were active, and because a predictably inactive link could otherwise be to be used, lateral bracing should be provided at intersection of the diagonal
designed as a pin, the cost of construction is needlessly increased. Thus, an EBF braces and the vertical link, unless calculations provided to justify the design
configuration that ensures that alllink:s will be active, such as those illustrated in without such bracing.
Figure C-I-15.1, are recornmended. Further recornmendations for the design of Columns in EBF should be designed following design principIes so that
EBF are available (Popov and others, 1989). the full strength and deformation capacity of the can be developed without
failure of any individual coltImn and without the to~m~ltlOln of a soft story. Plastic
b a
hinge formation in columns should be avoided when cornbined with
hinge formation in the links, it can resul,t in the of a soft story. The
d e d requirernents of Sections 8.3 and 15.8 address designo
a
C15.2. Links
Inelastic action in EBF is intended to occur nri·m<t,rlil" within the links. The gen-
d eral provisions in this section are intended to that stable inelasticity can
a occur in the link.

d Width-thickness limits for links are specified in

of these provisions requiredthe link cross-section
ness criteria as is specified for beams in SMF. on recent research on local
buckling in links (Okazaki, Arce, Ryu and bnlgelll$rclt, 2004a; Richards, Dang,
(a) (b) Okazaki and Engelhardt, 2004), the flange limits for links of
length 1.6Mp N p or less has been relaxed frorn 0.3 y to 0.38 ~ El F; . This

new limit corresponds to Ap in Table B4.1 of the Sp~~cZ1'lCQ~tlOn.

a a
The reinforcernent of links with web doubler is not permitted as such
d reinforcernent rnay not fully participate as . in inelastic deformanons.
d
Additionally, beam web penetrations within the
a a
they rnay adversely affect the inelastic behavior of

d d
a a
a
d d

b
(e) (d)

a =Link·
b = beam segment outside of Link
e =diagonal brace
d =column <\>v.. -link a (active link) < <\>Yn -link b

Fig. C-I-15.2. EBF - active and inactive

Fig. C-I-15.1. Examples of eccentrically bracedframes.

Seismic ProvisionsforStructural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN lNsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCl10N, lNe. AMERICAN lNSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCl10N,
6.1-194 PARTI-ECCENTIUCALLYBRACEDFRAMES [Cornm. C15. Comm. C15.]
PART I - ECCENTRICALLY BRACED
6.1-195
The nominal shear strength of the link, V,¡, is the lesser of that determined from
the plastic shear strength of the link section or twice the plastic moment divided (e ~ 2.6Mp /Vp ). For links in the combined
( 1.6Mp/Vp < e < 2. 6M /v'p) , the limit· on II·nk and flexural yielding range
by the link length, as dictated by statics assuming equalization of end moments. p
. angle is deteimined
Accordingly, the nominal shear strength of the link can be computed as according to link length by linear interpolation 0.08 and 0.02 radian.

¡
follows: It has been demonstrated experimentally.
F Uang and Bertero, 1987;
outch, 1989) as well as analytically (Popov and 1989) that links in the
2Mp first floor usually undergo the largest inelasu·c aerc)fIIJtauon.
for e~--
p In extreme cases this
Vp may resuIt in a tendency to develop a soft story. plastic link rotations tend
V - V (CI5-1)
n - 2~p 2Mp to attenuate at higher floors, and decrease WI·th
Th
.
mcreasing frame periods.
for e>-- erefore for severe seismic applications, a C'oIGse:I!v.:tti,re
Vp the first two or three floors is recommended. -This design for the links in
.
the nunimum be achieved by increasing
available shear strengths of these
The effects ofaxialload on the link can be ignored if the required axial strength on the order of 10 percent
over that specified in Section 15.2.
on the link does not exceed 15 percent of the nominal yield strength of the link,
P y • In general, such an axial load is negligible because the horizontal component
of the brace load is transmitted to the beam segment outside of the link. However,
when the framing aiTangement is such that larger axial forces can develop in the
link, such as from drag struts or a modified EBF configuration, the additional
requirements in Section 15.2b apply and the available shear strength and link
lengths are required to be reduced to ensure stable inelastic behavior.

To ensure satisfactory behavior of an EBF, the inelastic deformation expected

to occur in the links in asevere earthquake shoUld not exceed the inelastic de-
formation capacity of the links. In the Provisíons, the link rotation angle is the
primary variable used to describe inelastic link deformation. The link rotation
angle is the plastic rotation angle between the link and the portion of the beam
outside of the link.

The link rotation angle can be estimated by assuming that the EBF bay will de-
form in a rigid-plastic mechanism as illustrated for various EBF configurations
in Figure C-1-15.3. In this figure, the link rotation angle is denoted by the symbol
e
"(p. The link rotation angle can be related to the plastic story drift angle, p, using
the relationships shown in the Figure C-I-15.3. The plastic story drift angle, in
turn, can be computed as the plastic story drift, !:!.p, divided by the story height,
h. The plastic story drift can conservatively be taken equal to the design story
drift· Altematively, the link rotation angle can be determined more accurately by
inelastic dynamic analyses.
L L
.1
The inelastic response of a link is strongly influenced by the length of the link
as related to the ratio Mp/Vp of the link cross-section. When the link length is L
selected not greater than 1.6Mp /Vp , shear yielding will dominate the inelastic Yp =-8
e P L
Y =-8
response. If the link length is selected greater than 2.6Mp/Vp,. flexural yielding P 2e p
will dominate the inelastic response. For link lengths intermediate between these L = bay width
values, the inelastic response will occur through sorne combination of shear h = story height
and flexural yielding. The inelastic deformation capacity of links is generally I1p : plas~e story ~ft (eonservatively, take I1p equal to design drift)
greatest for shear yielding links, and smallest for flexural yielding links. Based e p - ~IastIe st~ry drift angle, radians (= f1.. / h)
"(p = link rotatIan angle
on experimental evidence, the link rotation angle is limited to 0.08 radian for
shear yielding links (e ~ 1.6Mp /Vp ) and 0.02 radian for flexural yielding línks Fig. C-I-15.3. Link rotatíon ángle.

Seisniic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN lNsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, INC. Seismic Provisions jor Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, .
AMERICAN lNsTITUTE OF STEEL CONsTRucnON, INC.
6.1-196 PART 1 - ECCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAMES [Cornm. C15. Cornm. C15.] PART 1 - ECCENTRICALLY BRACED
6.1-197

C15.3. Link Stiffeners simulates the forces and inelastic deformations ¡ex]Jected in an EBE Design-
A properly detailed and restrained link web can provide stable, ductile, and ers are cautioned that beam-to-column which qua1ify for use in an
predictable behavior under severe cydic loading. The design of the link requires SMF may not necessarily,perform adequately used as a link-to-column
dose attention to the detailing of the link web thickness and stiffeners. connection in an EBE Link-to-column must therefore be tested in
a manner that properly simulates the forces and deformations expected
Full-depth stiffeners are required at the ends of alllinks and serve to transfer the
in an EBE For example, the RBS connection has shown to perform well in
link shear forces to the reacting elements as well as restrain the link web against
buckling. SME However, the RBS is generally not suitable link-to-column connections
due to the high moment gradient in links. recent research (Okazaki,
The maximum spacing.of link intermediate web stiffeners in shear yielding links 2004; Okazaki, Engelhardt, Nakashima and 2004b) has demonstrated
(e ~ 1.6Mp lVp ) is dependent upon the size of the link rotation angle (Kasai and that other details that have shown good in moment frame beam-to-
Popov, 1986b) with a doser spacing required as the rotation angle increases. column connections (such as the WUF-W and free flange details) can show
Intermediate web stiffeners in shear yielding links are provided to delay the on- poor performance in EBF link-to-column cOlme:ctIlons
set of inelastic shear buckling of the web. Flexural yielding links having lengths
At the time of publication of these Provisions, de1i1pl~opInel!lt of satisfactory link-
greater than 2.6Mp lVp but less than 5MpIVp are required to have an intermediate
to-column connection details is the subject of research. Designers are
stiffener at a distance from the link end equal to 1.5 times the beam flange width
therefore advised to consult the research for the latest developments.
to limit strength degradation due to flange local buckling and lateral-torsional
Unal further research on link-to-column , it may be advantageous to
buckling. Links of a length that are between the shear and flexural limits are
avoid EBF configurations with links attached to ~Vf""'U.IU".
required to meet the stiffener r~quirements for both shear and flexural yielding
links. When the link length exceeds5Mp /Vp , link intermediate web stiffeners are The Provisions permit the use of link-to-column ctOlme:cti1ons without the need
not required. Link intermediate web stiffeners are required to extend full depth for qualification testing for shear yielding links the connection is rein-
in order to effectively resist shear buckling of the web and to effectively limit forced with haunches or other suitable designed to predude in-
strength degradation due to flange local buckling and lateral-torsional buckling. elastic action in the reinforced zone adjacent to the An example of such
Link intermediate web stiffeners are required on both sides of the web for links a connection is shown in Figure C-I-15.4. This region should remain
25 in. (635 mm) in depth or greater. For links that are less than 25 in. (635 mm) essentially elastic for the fully yielded and strain link strength as de-
deep, the stiffener need be on one side only. fined in Section 15.6 for the design of the diagonal That is, the reinforced
connection should be designed to resist the link and moment developed by
Alllink stiffeners are required to be fillet welded to the link web and flanges.
the expected shear strength of the link, Ry Vm . by 125 percent to account
Link stiffeners should be detailed to avoid welding in the k-area of the link.
for strain hardening. Alternatively, the EBF can configured to avoid link-to-
Recent research has indicated that stiffener-to-link web welds that extend into
column connections entirely.
the k-area ofthe link can generate link web fractures that may reduce the plastic
rotation capacity of the link (Okazaki and others, 2004a; Richards and others,
2004).
e
C15.4. Link-to-Column Connections -1
Prior to the 1994 Northridge Earthquake, link-to-column connections were typi-
cally constructed in a manner substantialIy similar to beam-to-column connec-
tions in SMF. Link-to-column connections in EBF are therefore likely to share
many of the same problems observed in moment frame connections. Conse-
quently, in a manner similar to beam-to-column connections in SMF, the Pro-
visions require that the performance of link-to-column connections be verified
by testing in accordance with Appendix S, or by the use of prequalified link-to-
column connections in accordance with Appendix P.
The load and deformation demands at a link-to-column connection in an EBF are
substantially different from those at a beam-to-column connection in an SMF.
Link-to-column connections must therefore be tested in a manner that properly
Fig. C-I-15.4. Example of a reinforced link-íQ-(:OtlAtrrt,n connection.

Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005,
AMERICAN !NSTIl'UTE OF STEEL CONSTRucnON, !Ne. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONsTRucnON,
6.1-198 PART 1 - ECCENfRICALLY BRACED FRAMES [Comm. C15. Comm. C15.] PART 1 - ECCENTRICALLY BRACED
6.1-199

The Provisions do not explicitly address the colurnn panel zone design require- The diagonal brace and beam segment outside the link must be designed
ments at link-to-colurnn connections. Based on limited research (Okazaki, 2004) for sorne reasonable estimate of the maximum that can be developed by
it is recornmended that the panel zone oflink-to-colurnn connections be designed the fully yielded and strain hardened link. For purpose, the nominal shear
in a manner similar to that for SMF beam-to-colurnn connections (Section 9.3) strength of the link, v,., as defined by Equation C 1 -1 is increased by two factors.
with the required shear strength of the panel zone determined from the link end First, the nominal shear strength is increased by to account for the possibility
moments given by the equations in Cornmentary Section C15.6. that the link material may have actual yield in excess of the specified
minimum value. Secondly, the resulting expected strength of the link, Ry v,.
C15.5. Lateral Bracing of Link is further increased to account for strain hrurdenirt.a in the link.
Lateral restraint against out-of-plane displacement and twist is required at the
ends of the link to ensure stable ine1astic behavior. This section specifies the Experiments have shown that links can exhibit a degree of strain harden-
required strength and stiffness oflink end lateral bracing. In typical applications, ing. Recent tests on roUed wide-flange links corl~truct(~d of ASTM A992 steel
a composite deck can likely be counted upon to provide adequate lateral bracing (Arce, 2002) showed strength increases due to hardening ranging from
at the top flange of the link. However, a composite deck alone cannot be counted 1.2 to 1.45, with an average value of about 1.30. tests on rolled wide-flange
on to provide adequate lateral bracing at the bottom flange of the link and direct links constructed of ASTM A36 steel have shown strength increases
bracing through transverse beams or a suitable alternative is recornmended. due to strain hardening in excess of 1.5 Popov, 1983; Engelhardt
and Popov, 1989a). Further, recent tests on very welded built-up wide-
C15.6. Diagonal Brace and Beam Outside of Links flange links for use in major bridge Structures strain hardening fac-
This section addresses design requirements for the diagonal brace and the beam
tors close to 2.0 (McDaniel, Uang and Seible, Dusicka and Itani, 2002).
segment outside of the link in EBE The intent of these provisions is to ensure These sections, however, typically have significantly different from
that yielding and energy dissipation in an EBF occur primarily in the links. Con- roUed shapes.
sequentIy, the diagonal brace and beam segment outside of the link must be
designed to resist the loads developed by the fully yielded and strain-hardened Past researchers have generally recornmended a of 1.5 (Popov and En-
link. That is, the brace and beam should be designed following capacity design gelhardt, 1988) to account for expected link and its strain hardening in
principIes to develop the full inelastic capacity ofthe links. Limited yielding out- the design of the diagonal brace and beam the link. However, for pur-
side of the links, particularly in the beams, is sometimes unavoidable in an EBE poses of designing the diagonal brace, these prC)Vü¡iOI1S have adopted a strength
Such yielding is likely not detrimental to the performance of the EBF, as long increase due to strain hardening oruy equal to 1.25. factor Was chosen to be
as the beam and brace have sufficient strength to develop the link's full inelastic les s than 1.5 for a number of reasons, including the of the Ry factor to account
strength and deformation capacity. for expected material strength in the link but not in brace, and the use of resis-
tance factors or safety factors when computing the of the braceo Further,
In most EBF configurations, the diagonal brace and the beam are subject to large this value is close to but somewhat below the strain hardening
axialloads combined with significant bending moments. ConsequentIy, both the factor for recent tests on rolled wide-flange links A992/A992M steel.
diagonal brace and the beám should be designed as beam-columns. Designers should recognize that strain hardening in may sometimes exceed
A diagonal brace in a concentrically braced frame is subject to cyclic buckling this value, and so a conservative design of the brace is appropriate. Fur-
and is the primary source of energy dissipation in such a frame. Many of the de- ther, if large built-up link sections are used with flanges and very short
sign provisions for OCBF and SCBF systems are intended to permit stable cyclic lengths (e < MplVp), designers should consider the of strain hardening
buckling behavior of the diagonal braces. A properly designed diagonal brace in factors substantially in excess of 1.25 (Richards,
an EBF, on the other hand, should not buckle, regardless of the intensity of the Based on the aboye, the required strength of the brace can be taken
earthquake ground motion. As long as the brace is designed to be stronger than as the forces developed by the following values link shear and link end
the link, as is the intent of these provisions, then the link will serve as a fuse to moment:
limit the maximum load transferred to the brace, thereby precluding the possi-
bility of brace buckling. ConsequentIy, many of the design provisions for braces For e $ 2Mp /Vp :
in OCBF and SCBF systems Íntended to permit stable cyclic buckling of braces Link shear = 1.25 Ry Vp
are not needed in EBE Similarly, the link also limits the loads transferred to the =
Link end moment e (1.25 Ry Vp )12
beam beyond the link, thereby precluding failure of this portion of the beam if it For e > 2Mp /Vp :
is stronger than the link. Link shear = 2(1.25 RyMp)/e
Link end moment = 1.25 RyMp

Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005,
AMERICAN lNsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcrrON, lNc. AMERICAN INsTlTUfE üF STEEL CONSTRUcrrON,
6.1-200 PART 1 - ECCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAMES [Comm. C15.
The aboye equations as sume link end moments will equalize as the link yields
and deforms plasticalIy. For link lengths les s than 1.6Mp N p attached to columns,
link end moments do not fulIy equalize (Kasai and Popov, 1986a). For this situ-
ation, the link ultimate forces can be estimated as follows:
For links attached to columns with e S; 1.6 Mp/Vp:
Link shear = 1.25 RyVp
Link end moment at column =RyMp
Link end moment at brace = [e(1.25 RyVp) - RyMp] ~ 0.75 RyMp
The link shear force will generate axial force in the diagonal brace and, for most
EBF configurations, will also generate substantial axial force in the beam seg-
ment outside of the link. The ratio of beam or brace axial force to link shear
force is controlled primarily by the geometry of the EBF and is therefore not
affected by inelastic activity within the EBF (Engelhardt and Popov, 1989a).
Consequently, this ratio can be determined from an elastic frame analysis and
can be used to amplify the beam and brace axial forces to a level that corre-
sponds to the link shear force specified in the aboye equations. Further, as long
as the beam and brace are designed to remain essentially elastic, the distribution
of link end moment to the beam and brace can be estimated from an elastic frame
analysis. For example, if an elastic analysis of the EBF under lateral load shows
that 80 percent of the link end moment is resisted by the beam and the remaining
20 percent is resisted by the brace, the ultimate link end moments given by the
aboye equations can be distributed to the beam and brace in the same propor-
tions. Altematively, an inelastic frame analysis can be conducted for a more ac-
curate estimate of how link end moment is distributed to the beam and brace in
the inelastic range.
As described aboye, these Provisions assume that as a link deforms to large
plastic rotations, the link expected shear strength will increase by a factor of 1.25
due to strain hardening. However, for the design of the beam segment outside of
the link, the Provisions permit calculation of the beam required strength based
on link ultimate forces equal to only 1.1 times the link expected shear strength.
This relaxation on link ultimate forces for purposes of designing the beam seg-
ment reflects the view that beam strength will be substantially enhanced by the
presence of a composite floor slab, and also that limited yielding in the beam
will not likely be detrimental to EBF performance, as long as stability of the
beam is assured. Consequently, designers should recognize that the actual forces
that will develop in the beam will be substantia1ly greater than computed using
this 1.1 factor, but this low value of required beam strength will be mitigated by
contributions of the floor slab in resisting axial load and bending moment in the
beam and by limited yielding in the beam. Based on this approach, the required
axial and flexural strength of the beam can be first computed as described aboye
for the diagonal brace, assuming a strain hardening factor of 1.25. The resulting
axial force and bending moment in the beam can then be reduced by a factor of
1.111.25 = 0.88. In cases where no composite slab is present, designers should
consider computing required beam strength based on a link strain hardening
factor of 1.25.
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc.
Comm. C15.]
PART 1 - ECCENTRlCALLY BRACED F s 6.1-201
F~r most EBF configurati?~s, the beam and th link are a single continuous
wI~e flange member. If thIS IS the case, the avail ble strength of the beam Can
~e I~creased by Rr If the ~ilk an~ the be~ are e same member, any increase
m yIeld strength present m the lInk will also be resent in the beam
outside of the link. segment
Design of the beam segment outside of the link c sometimes be problematic in
EBE In .some cases, the beam segment outside of e link is inadequate to resist
the r~qUIred strength based on the.link ultimate for es. For such cases, increasing
t?e SIze of ~e beam may not provIde a solution. Th s is because the beam and the
lmk are tYPIcally the same member. Increasing the
the link size, which in tum increases the. link ulti ate forces and therefore in-
creases the beam required strength. The relaxati in beam required strength
based on the 1.1 factor on link strength was adop ed by the Provisions largely
as a result of such problems reported by designer , and by the view that EBF
performance would not likely be degraded by such relaxation due to beneficial
effects of th~ floor slab and limited beam yielding as discussed aboye. Design
problems WIth the beam can also be minimized b using shear yielding links
(: S; 1.6. Mp/Vp) as opposed to longer links. The en moments for shear yielding
lmks wIlI be smaller than for longer links, and co sequently less moment will
be ~ansferr~d to the beam. Beam moments can be further reduced by locating
the mtersectIOn of the brace and beam centerlines in ide of the link as d 'b d
bel P'd' d' , escn e
o.w. rOVI m.g a Iagonal brac~ with a large flex al stiffness so that a l,arger
portIon of the lInk end moment IS transferred to e brace and away from the
beam ~an also substantially reduce beam momento 1 such cases, the brace !must
be desIgned to .resist these larger moments. Further, the connection between the
brac~ and the lInk must be designed as a fully restr 'ned moment resisting con-
nectI?n. Test results on several brace connection de 'ls subject to axial load and
bendmg moment are reported in (Engelhardt and Po ov, 1989a).
A:~iding very shallow angles between the diagonal race and the beam can also
mItIgate problems with beam designo As the angle
and the beam decreases, the axial load developed i the beam increases. Using
angles between ~e ~iagonal brace and the beam of a least about 40 degrees will
o.ften be beneficIal m reducing beam required axial trength. Problems with de-
sIgn of the be~ segment ?~tsi.de of ~he link can als be addressed by choasing
EBF confi~ur~tI~ns that mIrnmIze axIalloads in the eam. An example of such a
configuratIOn IS IIlustrated in (Engelhardt and Popov 1989b).
The req~ired strength of the diagonal brace connect ons in EBF is the same as
the r~qUIred strength of the diagonal braceo The brace onnections in EBF are not
reqUIred to develop the expected yield strength of th brace in tension, as :iti the
cas~ of SCBF brace connections. This is because the .agonal braces in EBF are
~esIgned ~o remain elastic. Nonetheless, to provide so e degree of conservatism
m the des~gn of brace c~nnec?ons in EBF, these con ections must be designed
for a reqUI~ed c.ompresslVe aXIal strength based on t buckling capacity of the
brace, as gIven m Section 13.3c.
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, March 9,2005, in 1. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN lNSTlTIJTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INc
6.1-202 PART 1 - ECCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAMES [Comm. C15. Comm. C15.]
PART 1 - ECCENTRICALLY BRACED
6.1-203

Typically in EBF design, the intersecti?n of the. brac~ and ~eam centerlines is C15.8. Required Strengthof Columns
located at the end of the link. However, as permltted m SectlOn 15.6, the brace
Similar to the diagonal brace and beam se~~mt~ntloutsi<ie of the link, the columns
connection may be designed with an eccentricity so that the brace ~d beam
of an EBF should also be designed using design principIes. That is, the
centerlines intersect inside of the link: This eccentricity in the connectIOn gener-
columns should be designed to resist the forces developed by the fully
ates a moment that is opposite in sign to the link end momento Consequently,
yielded and strain hardened links. As discussed Section C15.6, the maximum
the value given aboye for the link end moment can be reduced by ~e moment
shear force developed by a fully yielded and hardened link can be esti-
deve10ped by this brace connection eccentricity. This may substantlally reduce
mated as 1.25Ry times the link nominal shear V", where the 1.25 factor
the moment that will be required to be resisted by the beam and brace, and may
accounts for strain hardening. For capacity of the columns, this sectíon
be advantageous in designo The intersection of the brace and be~ centerlines
permits reduction of the strain hardening factor 1.1. This relaxatíon reflects
should not be located outside of the link, as this increases the bendmg moment
the view that all links aboye the level of the under consideration will
developed in the beam and braceo See Figures C-I-15.5 and C-I-15.6.
not likely reach their maximum shear strength . Consequently,
C15.7. Beam-to-Column Connections applying the 1.25 strain hardening factor to all aboye the level of the col-
The applicable building code may specify different R values for EBF ~esign, umn under consideratíon ls likely too for a multistory EBE For a
depending on whether the beam-to-column connections away from the ~znk are low rise EBF with only a few stories, designers
designed as pinned connections or moment resisting connections. A hlgher R strain hardening factor on links to 1.25 for
value may be permitted when moment resisting connections are used away ~rom there is a greater likelihood that alllinks may slIll1uJlarleouslly reach their maxi-
the link, reflecting the addítional redundancy provided by these con~ectlOn~. mum shear strength. In addition to the of this section, columns in
However, in cases where moment resisting connections are used, prevlOus edl- EBF must also be checked in accordance with requirements of Sectíon 8.3,
tions of these provisions provided no requirements for the design of these con- which are applicable to all systems.
nections. Consequently, thís section of theProvisions has been updated to pro-
vide minimum requirements for beam-to-column connections away from links,
when designed as moment-resisting connections. Such connectíons must meet
l
the requirements of beam-to-column connections in OMF, as specified in Sec-
tions 11.2 and 11.5.

Lateral bracing ~
I.requ. ired at top and
r Lateral bracing
required at top and
botiom link f1anges
,_ Link Length =e _, FuI! depth web intermediate
stiffeners - both sides tor link
depth ~ 25 in ches (635 mm)
+ bottom Link f1anges
Full depth web intermediate
Full depth stiffeners 1" Link Length =e "1 stiffeners - both sides for Link
on both sides depth ~25 inches (635 mm)

~------

<t. of brace intersects

<t. of beam at end of Link
or inside Link
Fig. C-I-15.6. EBF with HSS

Fig. C-I-15.5. EBFwith W-shape bracing.

Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005,
AMERICAN lNsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSlR1JCTION, lNc.
AMEIuCAN lNs1ITUTE OF STEEL CONSlRUcnON,
6.1-204 PART 1 - BUCKLING-RESTRAINED BRACED FRAMES [Comm. C16. Comm. C16.] PART 1 - BUCKLING-RESTRAlNED '6.1-205

C16. BUCKLING-RESTRAINEO BRACEO FRAMES (BRBF) Buckling-restrained braced frames are c01nplDsedl of columns, beams, and brac-
ing elements, all of which are subjected to axial forces. Braces of
C16.1. Scope
Buckling-restrained braced frames (BRBF) are a special c1ass of concentrically BRBF are composed of a steel core and a bU<;.k!:IIlg-restr:aíníng system encasing
braced frames. Just as in special concentrically bracedframes (SCBF), the cen- the steel coreo In addition to the schematic in Figure C-1-16.1, examples
terlines of BRBF members that meet at a joint intersect at a point to form a of BRBF bracing elements are found in Hitomi, Saeki, Wada and
complete vertical truss system that resists lateral forces. BRBF have more duc- Fujimoto (1988); Wada, Connor, Kawai, Iwata Watanabe (1994); and Clark
tility and energy absorption than SCBF because overall brace buckling, and its and others (1999). The steel core within the
associated strength degradation, is prec1uded at forces and deformations corre- primary source of energy dissipation. Diuing a JiloldeI'ate to severe earthquake
sponding to the design story drift. See Section 13 for the effects of buckling in the steel core is expected to undergo significant deformations.
SCBF. Figure C-I-13.l shows possible BRBF bracing configurations~ note that
BRBF can provide elastic stiffness that is cOlmpar~ble
neither X-bracing nor K-bracing is an option for BRBF. Figure C-I-16.1 shows
laboratory tests indicate that properly designed detailed bracing elements of
a schematic of a BRBF bracing element [adapted from Tremblay, Degrange and
BRBF exhibit symmetrical and stable hysteretic hPlI''''''inr under tensile and com-
Blouin (1999)].
pressive forces through significant inelastic (Watanabe and oth-
BRBF arecharacterized by the ability of bracing elements to yield inelastically ers, 1988; Wada, Saeki, Takeuchi and Watanabe, 998; Clark and others, 1999;
in compression as well as in tension. In BRBF the bracing elements dissipate Tremblay and others, 1999). The ductility and dissipation capability of
energy through stable tension-compression yield cyc1es (Clark, Aiken, Kasai, Ko BRBF is expected to be comparable to that of a moment frame (SMF)
and Kimura, 1999). Figure C-I-16.2 shows the characteristic hysteretic behavior and greater than that of a SCBF. This high is attained by limiting buck-
for this type of brace as compared to that of a buckling braceo This behavior ling of the steel coreo
is achieved through limiting buckling of the steel core within the bracing
The Provisions are based on the use of brace qualified by testing. They
elements. Axial stress is decoupled from flexural buckling resistance~ axial load
are intended to ensure that braces are used only . their proven range of
is confined to the steel core while the buckling restraining mechanism, typically
deformation capacity, and that yield and failure other than stable brace
a casing, resists overall brace buckling and restrains high-mode steel core
yielding are prec1uded at the maximum inelastic corresponding to the de-
buckling (rippling).
sign earthquake. For analyses performed using methods, the maximum
inelastic drifts for this system are defined as corresponding to 200 per-
cent of the design story drift. For nonlinear nrrle-Iu$torv analyses, the maximum
BOtto~"
...
.. . (B" (e" fB" ~'TOP in elastic drifts can be taken directly from the results. A mínimum of

nA" IIB" "C" "B" "A"

tyP.~
••••••• ~L...-.I
~-
_ _ _ _ _ _ _- - '

::::1
Plan
Plate typical .. _ ...

~~~a~_
Mortar buckling
HSS brace
Plate
Plate-*" Bond- unbonded
brace-------'~::--r-
Preventing Preventing
Layer Layer compression
Section "A-A" Section "8-8" Section "e-e" Axial force-displacement h",,¡n::l\/i'nr
eore Projection Transition Segment Yielding Segment
Fig. C-I-16.2 Typical buckling-restrained (unbonded)
Fig. C-I-16.1 Details ofa type ofbuckling-restrained brace (Courtesy of R. Tremblay). (Courtesy of Seismic Isolation Enr!in,~erl!n{>' J

Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL CONS1RUCTION, INc. AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION,
6.1-206 PART 1 - BUCKLING-RESTRAINED BRACED FRAMES [Comm. C16. Comm. C16.] PART 1 - BUCKLING-RESTRAINED 6.1-207

2 percent story drift is required for detennining expected brace deformations (2) Brace manufacturer's participation in a re(t02:ni;¡~ed quality certification
for testing (see Appendix T) and is recommended for detailing. This approach is programo
consistent with the linear analysis equations for design story drift in SEIIASCE
7 (ASCE, 2002) and the 2003 NEHRP Recommended Provisions (FEMA, 2003). (3) Certification should inelude documentation the manufacturer's Quality
It is also noted that the consequences of loss of connection stability due to the Assurance Plan is in compliance with ihe reC;liIÍl·errlents of the BRBF provi-
actual seismic displacements exceeding the calculated values may be severe; sions, the Seismic Provisions for Structural Buildings, and the Code
braces are therefore required to have a larger deformation capacity than directly of Standard Practice.The manufacturing quality control procedures
indicated by linear static analysis. should be equivalent to, or better, than those to manufacture brace test
specilIlens.
The value of 200 percent of the design story drift for expected brace deforma-
tions represents the mean of the maximum story response for ground motions C16.2. Bracing Members
having a 10 percent chance of exceedance in 50 years (Fahnestock, Sause and
Rieles, 2003; Sabelli and others, 2003). Near-fault ground motions, as well as C16.2a. Steel Core
stronger ground motions, can impose deformation demands on braces larger than The steel core is composed of a yielding and steel core projections;
those required by these provisions. Detailing and testing braces for larger defor- it may also contain transition segments projections and yielding
mations will provide higher reliability and better performance. segment. The cross-sectional area of the segment of the steel core is
expected to be sized so that its yield strength is elose to the demand calcu-
Although this system has not been ineluded in SEIIASCE 7 (ASCE, 2002), the lated from the applicable building codeo Ue:Sl~mnl2 braces elose to the required
Provisions have been written assuming that future editions of SEIIAS CE 7 and strengths will help ensure distribution of over multiple stories in the
of national codes will define system coefficients and limits for BRBE The building. Conversely, overdesigning sorne braces than others (for example,
assumed values for the response modification coefficient, system over strength by using the same size brace on all floors) may in an undesirable concen-
factor, and deflection amplification factor are given in Appendix R, as are height tration of inelastic deformations in only a few The length and area of the
limits and period-calculation coefficients. yielding segment, in conjunction with the lengths areas of the nonyielding
The design engineer utilizing these provisions is strongly encouraged to consider segments, determine the stiffness of the braceo segment length and
the effects of configuration and proportioning of braces on the potential forma- brace inclination also determines the strain corresponding to the design
tion of building yield mechanisms. The axial yield strength of the core, Pysc> can story drift.
be set precisely with final core cross-sectional area detennined by dividing the In typical brace designs, a projection of the steel beyond its casing is nec-
specified brace capacity by actual material yield strength established by coupon essary in order to accomplish a connection to the Buckling of this unre-
testing, multiplied by the resistance factor. In sorne cases, cross-sectional area strained zone is an undesirable failure mode and therefore'be preeluded.
will be governed by brace stiffness requirements to limit drift. In either case,
careful proportioning of braces can make yielding distributed over the building In typical practice, the designer specifies fue core dimensions as well as the
height much more likely than in conventional braced frames. steel material and grade. The steel stress-strain may vary signifi-
cantly within the range perrnjtted by the steel potentially resulting
It is also recornmended that engineers refer to the following documents to gain in significant brace overstrength. This must be addressed in the
further understanding of this system: Uang and Nakashima (2003); Watanabe design of connections as well as of frame beams columns. The designer
and others (1988); Reina and Normile (1997); Clark and others (1999); Trem- may specify a limited range of acceptable yield in order to more strictly
blay and others (1999); and Kalyanaraman, Sridhara and Thairani (1998) to gain define the pennissible range of brace capacity. , the designer may
further understanding of this system. specify a limited range qf acceptable yield stress if approach is followed in
The design provisions for BRBF are predicated on reliable brace performance. order to more strictly define the pennissible of core plate area (and the
In order to assure this performance, a quality assurance plan is required. These resulting brace stiffness). The brace supplier may select the [mal core plate
measures are in addition to those covered in the AISC Code ofStandard Practice dimensions to meet the capaeity requirement using results of a coupon test.
(AISC, 2005b) and Section 16 of the 2002 Seismic Provisions for Structural The designer should b~ aware that this approach result in a deviation from
Steel Buildings. Examples of measures that may provide quality assurance are: the calculated brace axial stiffness. The maximum of the deviatipn is
dependent on the range of acceptable material . . Designers following
(1) Special inspection of brace fabrication. Inspection may inelude confirma- this approach should consider the possible range of in the building anal-
tion of fabrication and alignment tolerances, as well as NDT methods for ysis in order to adequately address both the period and expected drift.
evaluation of the final product.

Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN msTIruTE OF SlEEL CONSTRUcnON, mc. AMERICAN rnsTIruTE OF SlEEL CONSTRucnON,
6.1-208 PART I - BUCKLING-RESTRAINED BRACED FRAMES [Cornrn.C16. Cornm. C16.] PART 1 - BUCKLING-RESTRAlNED BRAC D FRAMES
6.1-209

The strength of the steel core has been defined in tenns of a new symbol, F ysc ,
which is defined as either the specified minimum yield stress of the steel eore,
or actual yield stress of the steel core as determined trom a coupon test. The use
of coupon tests in establishing F ysc eliminates the necessity of using the factor
Ry in calculating the adjusted brace strength (see Cornmentary Section CI6.2d).
This is in recognition of the fact that coupon testing of the steel core material is
in effect required by the simílítude provisions in Appendíx T, and such coupon
tests can pro vide a more reliable estimation of expected strength.
C16.2b. Buckling-Restraining System
This tenn describes those elements providing brace stability against overall
buckling. This ineludes the casing as well as elements connecting the coreo The
adequacy of the buckling-restraining system must be demonstrated by testing.
C16.2c. Testing
Testing of braces is considered necessary for this system. The applicability of tests
to the designed brace is defined in Appendix T. Cornmentary Section C9.2a, which
describes in general tenns the applicability of tests to designs, applies to BRBE
BRBF designs require reference to successful tests of a similarly sized test speci-
men and of abrace subassemblage that ineludes rotational demands. The fonner
is a uniaxial test intended to demonstrate adequate brace hysteretic behavior. The
latter is intended to verify the general brace design concept and demonstrate that
the rotations associated with trame defonnations do not cause failure of the steel
core projection, binding of the steel core to the casing, or otherwise compromise
the brace hysteretic behavior. A single test may qualify as both a subassemblage
and a brace test subject to the requirements of Appendix T; for certain frame-
type subassemblage tests, obtaining brace axial forces may prove difficult and
separate brace tests may be necessary. A sample subassemblage test is shown in
Figure C-I-T.l (Tremblay and others, 1999).
During the planning stages of either a subassemblage or uniaxial brace test, cer-
tain condítions may exist that cause the test specimen to deviate from the param-
eters established in the testing appendix. These condítions may inelude
(1) Lack of availability of beam, column, and brace sizes that reasonably match
those to be used in the actual buildíng frame
(2) Test set-up limitations in the laboratory
(3) Transportatíon and field-erection constraints
(4) Actuator to subassemblage connection condítions that require reinforce-
ment of test specimen elements not reinforced in the actual building frame
In certain cases, both the authority having jurisdietion and the peer reviewer may
(1) Reasonable relationship of scale
(2) Similar design methodology
(3) Adequate system strength
(4 ) Stable buckling-restraint of the steel core in the prototype
(5) Adequate rotation capacity in the prototype
(6) Adequate cumulative' strain capacity in the rototype
C16.2d. Adjusted Brace Strength
Tests cited serve another function in the design f BRBF: the maximum forces
that the brace can develop in the system are det rmined from test results. (Cal-
culatio~ of these maximum forces is necessary for connection design and for
the deslgn of columns and beams.) The compres ·on-strength adjustment factor,
/3, acc~unts fo~ the compression overstrength (w th respect to tension strength)
noted m ~ucklmg-restrained braces in recent te ting (SIE, 1999a and 1999b).
~e tenslOn strength adjustment factor, ro, a counts for strain hardening.
~lgur~ C-I-16.3 shows a diagrarnmatic bilinear ti rce-displacement relationship
:v
m h1Ch the compression strength adjustment fac or, /3, and the tension-strength
adJustment factor, ro, are related to brace forc and nominal material yield
strength. These quantities are defined as
where
Pmax = maximum compression force, kips (N)
Tmax = maximum tension force within deti rmations correspondíng to
200 percent of the design story drift ( ese defonnations are defined
as 2.0..1bm in Appendix T), kips (N)
Fysc measured yield strength of the' steel cor , ksi (MPa)
5
.¡¡;
(JI

~
deem such deviations acceptable. The cases in which such deviations are accept- o.
able are project-specific by nature and, therefore, do not lend themselves to fur- §
Ü
ther description in this Cornmentary. For these specific cases, it is recommended
that the engineer of record demonstrate that the following objectives are met:
Fig. C-I-16.3.Diagram of braee fopee displa ement.

Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplernent No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural SteelBuildings, March 9, 2005, inel. Supplernent No. 1
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSfRUcnON, INC. AMERICAN INsTITV'iE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnoN, c.
6.1-210 PART 1 - BUCKLING-RESTRAINED BRACED FRAMES [Comm. C16. Comm. CI6.] PART 1 - BUCKLING-RESTRAINED 6.1-211

Note that the specified minimum yield stress of the steel core, Fy , is not typically C16.4. Special Requirements Related
used for establishing these factors; instead, Fysc is used which is determined by Bracing Configuration
the coupon tests required to demonstrate compliance with Appendix T. Braces
In SCBF, V-bracing has been characterized by a in deformation mode after
with values of 13 and ro less than unity are not true buckling-restrained braces and
one of the braces buckles (see Section C13.4a). is primarily due to the nega-
their use is precluded by the provisions.
tive post-buckling stiffness, as well as fue ditter~n(~e between tension and com-
The expected brace strengths, used in the design of connections and of beams pression capacity, of traditional braces .. Since braces do not
and columns, are adjusted upwards for various sources of overstrength, includ- lose strength due to buckling, and have~ only a
ing amplification due to expected material strength (using the ratio Ry) and the and compression capacity, the practical n'~qu:lrem4nts of the design provisions for
strain hardening, ro, and compression adjusJment, 13, factors discussed abo ve. this configuration are relatively minoro Figure 16.4 shows the effect of beam
The amplification due to expected material strength can be eliminated if the vertical displacement under the unbalance load by the brace compression
brace yield stress is determined by a coupon test and is used to size the steel core overstrength. The vertical beam deflection adds the deformation demand on
area to provide the desired available strength precisely. Other sources of over- the braces, causing them to elongate more than compress. Therefore, where
strength, such as imprecision in the provision of the steel core area, may need to V-braced frames are used, it is required that a be provided that has sufficient
be considered; fabrication tolerance for the steel core is typically negligible. strength to permit the yielding of both braces a reasonable story drift consid-
ering the difference in tension and compression determined by testing.
C16.3. Bracing Connections The required brace deformation capacity must . the additional deformation
Bracing connections must not yield at force levels corresponding to the yielding due to beam deflection under this load. Since requirements such as the brace
of the steel eore; they are therefore designed for the maximum force that can be testing protocol (Appendix T, Section T6.3) and stability of connections (Sec-
expected from the brace (see Section C16.2b). In addition, a factor of 1.1 is used. tion 16.3) depend on this deformation, engineers find significant incentive to
This factor is applied in consideration of the possibility of braces being subjected avoid flexible beams in this configuration. Where special configurations shown
to deformations exceeding those at which the factors ro and 13 are required to be in Figure C-I-13.3 are used, the requirements of section are not relevant.
deterrnined (in other words, 200 percent ofthe .ó.bm ; see Section C16.2b.).
C16.5. Beams and Columns
The engineer shoúld recognize that the bolts are likely to slip at forces 30 percent
Columns in BRBF are required to have selsrnilc~llly compact sections because
lower than their design strength. This slippage is not considered to be detrimen-
sorne inelastic rotation demands are possible. and columns are also re-
tal to behavior of the BRBF systeIll and is consistent with the design approach
quired to be designed considering the maximum that the adjoining braces
found in Section 7.2. See also commentary in Section C7.2. Bolt holes may be
are expected to develop.
drilled or punched subject to the requirements of Section M2.5 of the Speeifiea-
tion for Struetural Steel Buildings (AISC, 2005).

Recent testing in stability and fracture (Tsai, Weng, Lin, Chen, Lai and Hsiao,
2003) has demonstrat~d that gusset-plate connections may be a critical aspect of
the design of BRBF (Tsai and others, 2003; Lopez, Gwie, Lauck and Saunders,
2004). The tendency to instability may vary depending on the flexural stiffness
of the connection portions of the buckling restrained brace and the degree of
their flexural continuity with the casing. This aspect of BRBF design is the sub-
ject of continuing investigation and designers are encouraged to consult research
publications as they become available. The stability of gussets may be demon-
strated by testing, if the test specimen adequately resembles the conditions in the
building. It is worth noting that during an earthquake the frame may be subjected
to sorne out-of-plane displacement concurrent with the in-plane deformations, so
a degree of conservatism in the design of gussets may be warranted.

Hg. C-I-16.4. Post-yield ehange in deformation mode for and inverted-V BRBF.

Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, March 9,
AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSlRUCTION, INc. AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL COINSl'RUCTIOINj
6.1-212 PART I - BUCKl.JNG-RESTRArNED BRACED FRAMES [Comm.C16. Comm. Cl7.]
PART 1 - SPECIAL PLATE SHEAR
6.1-213

Like columns, beams in BRBF are required to have seismically compact sec-
1983; Tirnler and Kulak, 1983; Tromposch 1987; Roberts and
tions because sorne inelastic rotation demands are possible when beam-column
connections are fully restrained, as is expected to be the norm. Likewise, they are Sabouri-Ghomi, 1992; Caccese, EIgaaIy and Ch ,1993; Driver, Kulak, Kennedy
and Elwi, 1997; EIgaaly, 1998; Rezai, 1999; L bell, Prion, Ventura and Rezai,
also required to be designed considering the maximum force that the adjoining
braces are expected to develop. 2000; Berman and Bruneau, 2003a). This ha been confirmed by analytical
studies using finite element analysis and other an sis techniques (Sabouri -Ghomi
C17. SPECIAL PLATE SHEAR WALLS (SPSW) and Roberts, 1992; EIgaaly, Caccese and Du, 1993; EIgaaly and Liu, 1997;
Driver and others, 1997). '
C17.1. Scope
Yielding of the webs occurs by development of nsion field action at an angle
In SPSW the slender unstiffened steel plates (webs) connected to surround-
ing horiz~ntal and vertical boundary elements (lIBE and VBE) are design~d to close to 45° from the vertical, and buckling of plate in the orthogonal direc-
tion. Past research shows that the sizing of VBE and HBE in a SPSW makes it
yield and behave in a ductile hysteretic manner during earthquakes. See ~l~re
possible to develop this tension field action acr ss the entire webs. Except for
C-I-17-1. A1l HBE are also rigidly connected to the VBE with moment reslstmg
connections able to develop the expected plastic moment of the HBE. Each web cases with very stiff HBE and VBE, yielding in e webs develops in a progre s-
must be surrounded by boundary elements. sive manner across each panel. Because the web do not yield in comptession,
continued yielding upon repeated cycles of loadin is contingent upon the SPSW
Experimental research on SPSW subjected to cyclic i~elastic ~uasi-static being subjected to progressively larger drifts, exc pt for the contribution of pIas-
dynarnic loading has demonstrated their ability to behave m a ductIle manner tic hinging developing in the HBE to the total sy tem hysteretic energy. In past
and dissipate significant amounts of energy (Thorburn, Kulak and Montgomery, research (Driver and others, 1997), the yielding f boundary eIements contrib-
uted approximately 25 to 30 percent of the total 1 ad strength of the system.

Level4 With the exception of plastic hinging at the ends of E, the surrounding horizon-
tal and vertical boundary elements are designed to main essentially elastic when
the webs are fully yielded. Plastic hinging at the en s of HBE is needed to develop
Horizontal Boundary I
1
1 1
the plastic collapse mechanism of this system. PI tic hinging in the middle of
Element (HBE)..., I Panel 4 I HBE, which could partly prevent yielding of the ebs, is deemed undesirabIe.
\ L__________--.JI
I
Cases of both desirable and undesirable yielding i VBE have been observed in
Vertical Boundary \. Level3
past testing. In absence of a theoretical formulation t quantify the conditions lead-
Element (VBE~I-..~.;...-
__.....~~_~_~_~_~~
_ __,=r-1 ing to acceptable yielding (and supporting 'experime tal validation ofthis fotmula-
\ I I tion), the conservative requirement of elastic VBE r sponse is justified.
.\
I1 Panel 3 I1
l' 1 1
I I Research literature often compares the behavior o steel plate walls to that of a
I
L-______________ I __J
vertical plate girder, indicating that the webs of a S SW resist shears by tension
Level2
field action and that the VBE of a SPSW resist verturning moments. While
r--- - -- - -1 this analogy is useful in providing a conceptual u derstanding of the behavior
Web Element- i'... I I of SPSW, many significant differences exist in the ehavior and strength of the
I 'rk
11" Panel 2
1
l II two systems. Past research shows that the use of st ctural shapes for the VBE
I
I
~ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __J1
and HBE in SPSW (as well fls other dimensions an detaiIs germane to SPSW)
favorably impacts orientation of the angle of deve opment of the tension field
Level1
action, and makes possible the use of very slender ebs (having negligibIe di-
¡-- - -- - ----,
1 1
1 agonal compressive strength). Sizeable top and bott m HBE are also required in
1
I1 I1 SPSW to anchor the significant tension fields that evelop at these ends of the
Panel 1
I 1 structural system. Limits imposed on the maximu web slenderness of plate
I I
1 girders to prevent flarige buckling, or due to transpo tion requirements, are also
~--
---------~ not applicable to SPSW which are constructed differ ntly. For these reasons, the
use of beam design provisions in the Specification ( se, 2005) for the design
Fig. C-I-17.1. Schematic of special plate shear wall. of SPSW is not appropriate (Berman and Bruneau, 2 04).

Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, MaTch 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, i el. Supplement No. 1
AMERIcAN lNSTITUTE OFSTEEL CONSTRUcrrON, INC.
AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF 8mEL CONSTRUcrrON, IN .
6.1-214 PART 1 - SPECIAL PLATE SHEAR WALLS [Comm. C17. Cornm. C17.] PART 1 - SPECIAL PLATE SHEAR
6.1-215

C17.2. Webs C17.2b. Panel Aspect Ratio

The specified minimum yield stress of steel used for SPSW is per Section 6.1.
Past research shows that modeling SPsw with trips is reasonably accurate for
However, the webs of SPSW could also be of special highly ductile low-yield
panel aspect ratios of L/h that exceed 0.8 1999). Additional horizontal
steel having specified minimum yield in the range of 12 to 33 ksi (80 to
intermediate boundary elements could be mtl:od.llIce:d in SPSW to modify the L/h
230MPa). of panels having an "aspect ratio less than 0.8.
C17.2a. Shear Strength No theoretical upper bound exists on L/h (DI·OVHle:d sufficiently stiff HBE can be
The lateral shears are carried by tension fields that develop in the webs stressing provided), but a maximum value of 2.5 is on the basis that past tesearch
in the direction a, defined in Section 17.2. When the HBE and VBE boundary has not investigated the s~ismic behavior of having L/h greater than 2.0.
elements of a web are not identical, the average of HBE areas may be taken Excessive flexibility of HBE is of concern for ratios beyond the specified
in the calculation of A b , and the average of VBE areas and inertias may be limit. For conditions beyond the specified other finite element methods
respectively used in the calculation of Ae and le to determine a. (FEM) shalI be used which correlate with test data.
Plastic shear strength of panels is given by 0.5R/'iwLe¡sin2a. The nominal strength Past research has focused on walIs with L/tw ranging from 300 to 800. AI-
is obtained by dividing this value by a system overstrength, as defined by FEMA though no theoreticaI upper bound exists on this drift limits will indirectly
369 (FEMA, 2003), and taken as 1.2 for SPSW (Berman and Bruneau, 2003b). constrain this ratio. The requirement that webs slender provides a lower bound
The aboye plastic shear strength is obtained from the assumption that, for pur- on this ratio. For these reasons, no limits are Spf~lj:ltled on that ratio.
poses of analysis, each web may be modeled by a series of inclined pin-ended C17.2c. Openings in Webs
strips (Figure C-I-17.2), oriented at angle a. Past research has shown this model Large openings in webs create significant
provides realistic results, as shown in Figure C-1-17.3 for example, provided at
HBE and VBE in a similar fashion as the reInrunpl~r of the system. When open-
least 10 equally spaced strips are used to model each panel.
ings are required, SPSW can be subdivided in SPSW segments by using
HBE and VBE bordering the openings. SPSW holes in the web not sur-
rounded by HBENBE have not been tested. provisions will allow other
openings that can be justified by analysis or

4000

3000

2000

Z 1000
e...
ro
al
o
.c:
f/)
Q¡ -1000
e
ro
Q.
-2000

-3000
~~-
-4000
-60 -40 -20 O 20 60 80

.F-----L---~
Hg. C-I-I7.3. Comparison of experimental resultsfor lower of multi-story SPSW frame
Fig. C-I-I7.2. Strip model of a SPSw. and strength predicted by strip model (after Driver others, 1997).

Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. l
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Bui14ings, MaTch 9, 2005 incl. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN lNsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, lNe.
AMEruCAN lNs'I'ITthE OF STEEL CONsTRUcnON,
6.1-216 PART 1 - SPECIAL PLATE SHEAR WALLS [Comm. C17.
Cornm.C17.] PART 1 - SPECIAL PLATE SHEAR WA LS 6.1-217

C17.3. Connections of Webs to Boundary Elements
The required strength of web connections to the surrounding HBE an~ VBE are
required to develop the expected tensile strength of the webs. Net sectlOns must
also provide this strength for the case of bolted connections.
The strip model can be used to model the behavior of SPSW and the tensile
yielding of the webs at angle, a. A single angle of inc1ination taken as the av~r­
age for all the panel s may be used to analyze the en tire wall. The expected tensIle
strength of the web strips shall be defined as RyFyAs, where
As area of a strip =(L cos a + H sina)/n
L width of panel
H height of panel
n number of strips per panel and n shaIl be taken greater than or equal
to 10
This analysis method has been shown, through correlation with physical test
data, to adequately predict SPSW performance. It is recognized, however, that
other advanced analytical techniques [such'as the finite element method (FEM)]
may also be used for design of SPSW. If such nonlinear (geometric and material)
FEM models are used, they should be calibrated against published test results to
ascertain reliability for application. Designs of connections of webs to boundary
elements should also anticipate buckling of the web plateo Sorne minimum out-
of-plane rotational restraint of the plate should be provided (Caccese, EIgaaly
and Chen, 1993).
Horizontal and Vertical Boundary Elements
C17.4a. Required Strength
Per capacity design principIes, all edge boundary elements (HBE and VBE) shaIl
be designed to resist the maximum force s developed by the tension field action
of the webs fully yielding. Axial forces, shears, and moments develop in the
boundary elements of the SPSW as a result of the response of the system to the
overall overturning and shear, and this tension field action in the webs. Actual
web thickness must be considered for this calculation, because webs thicker than
required may have to be used due to availability, or minimum thickness required
for welding.
At the top panel of the wall, the vertical components of the tension field shall be
anchored to the HBE. The HBE shall have sufficient strength to aIlow develop-
ment of fuIl tensile yielding across the panel width.
At the bottom panel of the wall, the vertical components of the tension field shall
be anchored to the HBE. The HBE shall have sufficient strength to aIlow devel-
opment of fuIl tensile yielding across the panel width. This may be accomplished
by continuously anchoring the HBE to the foundation.
For intermediate HBE of the wall, the anticipated variation between the top and
bottom web normal stresses acting on the HBE is usuaIly smaIl, or nuIl when
webs in the panel aboye and below the HBE have identical thickness. While
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN msTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, mc.
top and bottom HBE are typically of sabstanti size, intermediate HBE are
relatively smalIer. .
Beyond the exception mentioned in Section 17.1, i sorne instances, the engineer
may be able to justify yielding of the boundary el ments by demonstrating that
the yielding of this edge boundary element will no cause reduction on the SPSW
shear capacity to support the demand and will not ause a failure in vertical grav-
ity carrying capacity.
Forces and moments in the members (and connec ions), inc1uding those result-
ing from tension field action, may be determined from aplane frame analysis.
The web is represented by a series of inc1ined pin ended strips, as described in
Section CI7.3. A minimum often equally spaced in-ended strips per panel will
be used in such an analysis.
A number of analytical approaches are possible t achieve capacity design and
determine the same forces acting on the vertical oundary elements. Sorne ex-
ample methods applicable to SPSW follow. In al cases, actual web thickness
must be considered, for reasons described earlier.
Nonlinear push-over analysis. A model of the PSW can be constructed in
which bilinear elasto-plastic web elements of str ngth RyFyAs are introduced
in the direction a. Bilinear plastic hinges can also be introduced at the ends of
the horizontal boundary elements. Standard push- ver analysis conducted with
this model will provide axial forces, shears, and m ments in the boundary frame
when the webs develop yielding. Separate check are required to verify that
plastic hinges do not develop in the horizontal b undary elements, exCl!:pt at
their ends.
Combined linear elastic computer programs and pacity design concepto The
following four-step procedure provides reasonabl estimates of forces in the
boundary elements of SPSW systems.
(1) Lateral forces: Use combined model, bound elements and web elements,
to come up with the demands in the web and e boundary elements based
on the code required base shear. The web ele ents shall not be considered
as vertical-load carrying elements.
(2) Gravity load (dead load and live load): Apply ravity loads to a modeI'with
only gravity frames. The web elements shall n t be considered as vertical-
load carrying elements.
(3) Without any overstrength factors, design the undary elements using the
demands based on combination forces of the a ove steps 1 and 2.
(4) Boundary element capacity design ch~ck: Ch k the boundary element for
the maximum capacity of the web elements in ombination with the maxi-
mum possible axial load due to over-turning omento Use the axial force
obtained from step 1 aboye and multiply by o erstrength factor no. Apply
load from web elements (RyFyAs) in ~e directi of a. For this capacity de-
sign check use a material strength reduction fac or of 1.0. For determination
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, March 9,2005, nel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN mSTITUTE OF STEEL CONsTRUcnON, C.
6.1-218 PART 1 - SPECIAL PLATE SHEAR WALLS [Comm.C17. COffiffi. C18.] PART 1 - QUALITY ASSURANCE 6.1-219

of the required strength of boundary elements and their connection to the Qs = the system overstrength factor, as by FEMA 369, and taken
web, neither the resistance factor (LRFD), nor the safety factor (ASD), are as 1.2 for SPSW (Berman and Bruneau 2003)
applied to the strength of the web. A is initially estimated from an equivalent brace to meet the structure 's drift
Indirect capacity design approach. CSA-S16-02 (CSA, 2002) proposes that requirements.
loads in the vertical boundary members cah be determined from the gravity loads C17.4c. Width-Thickness Limitation~
combined with the seismic loads increased by the amplification factor, Sorne amount of local yielding is expected in
B=v"/Y,, development of the plastic mechanism of SPSW
and VBE shall comply withthe requirements in
where
Ve expected shear strength, at the base of the wall, determined for the C17.4d. Lateral Bracing
web thickness supplied Providing stability of SPSW systems boundary ele::tne~nts is necessary for proper
0.5 RyFy t w L sin2a performance of the system. The lateral btacing for HBE are pro-
Vu factored lateral seismic force at the base of the wall vided to be consistent with beams in SMF for strength and stiffuess. In
addition, all intersections of HBE and VBE must braced to ensure stability of
In determining the loads in VBEs, the amplification factor, B, need not be taken
the entire panel.
as greater !hari R.
The VBE design axial forces shall be determined from overtuming moments Ct7.4f. Panel Zones
defined as follows: Panel zone requirements are not imposed for 1·[lte:r¡meldJ.alte HBE. These are ex-
pected to be small HBE connecting to sizeable
(1) the moment at the base is BMu, where Mu is the factored seismic overtuming judgment to identify special situations in which the
moment at the base of the wall corresponding to the force Vu ; next to intermediate HBE should be verified.
(2) the moment BMu extends for a height H but not less than two stories from
C17.4g. Stiffness· of Vertical Boundary Elements
the base; and
This requirement is intended to prevent excessive flexibility and buck-
(3) the moment decreases linearly aboye a height H to B times the overtuming ling of VBE. Opportunity exists for future
moment at one story below the tbp of the wall, but need not exceed R times applicability of this requirement.
the factored seismic overtuming moment at the story under consideration
corresponding to the force Vu ' C18. QUALITV ASSURANCE PLAN
To assure ductile seismic response, steel framing required to meet the quality
The local bending moments in the VBE due to tension field action in the web
requirements as appropriate for the various COlmpID*~nts of the structure. The ap-
shall be multiplied by the amplification factor B.
plicable building code may have specific·quality plan requirements.
Preliminary designo For preliminary proportioning of HBE, VBE, and webs, a SEIIASCE 7 (AS CE, 2005) provides special for inspection and
SPSW wall may be approximated by a vertical truss with tension diagonals. testing based upon the seismic design category. the Provisions, the
Each web is represented by a single diagonal tension brace within the story. For Specification, the AISC Code of Standard (AISC, 2005b), the AWS
an assumed angle of inc1ination of the tension field, the web thickness, tw , may DI.l Structural Welding Code-Steel (AWS,
be taken as for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490
2AQs sinO acceptance criteria for steel building structures.
tw = L sin2a quality assurance plan be implemented as
where code or the engineer of record.
A area of the equivalent tension brace
O
In sorne cases, the fabricator implements al quality system as part oí their
angle between the vertical and the longitudinal axis of the equivalent
diagonal brace normal operations, particularly fabricators that pru1jic:ipa:te in AISC Quality Cer-
L the distance between VBE centerlines tification or similar programs. The engineer of should evaluate what is al-
a ready a part ofthe contractor's quality control in determining the quality
dssumed angle of inclination of the tension field measured from the
assurance needs for each project. Where the s quality control system is
vertical per Section 17.2a
considered adequate for the project, inc1uding with the special needs

Seismic Provisions ¡or Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions ¡or Structural Steel Buildings, March 9,
AMERICAN INsTITUtE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, INc. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OP STEEL CONSTRUcnON,
6.1-220 PART 1 - QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN [Comm. C18.
for seismic applications, the quality assurance plan may be modified to reflect
this. Similarly, where additional needs are identifi'ed, such as for innovative con-
nection details or unfamiliar construction methods, supplementary requirements
should be specified, as appropriate. The quality assurance plan as contained in
Appendix Q is recornmended for adoption without revision because consistent
application of the same requirements is expected to improve reliability in the
industry.
The quality assurance plan should be provided to the con tractor as part of the bid
documents, as any special quality control or quality assurance requirements may
have substantial impact on the cost and scheduling of the work.
Structural observation at the site by the engineer of record is an additional com-
ponent of a quality assurance plan that is not addressed as part of Appendix Q,
and should be developed based upon the specific needs of the project.
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRucrrON, !Nc.
--------------_.-----
6.1-221
APPENDIX P
PREQUALIFICATION OF BEAM- O-COLUMN
ANO LINK-TO-COLUMN ,CON ECTIONS
CP1. SCOPE
Appendix P describes requirements for prequalific tion of beam-to-column con-
nections in special and intermediate moment fram (SMF and IMF) and of link-
to-column connections in eccentrically braced fr, mes (EBF). The concept of
prequalified beam-to-column connections for mo ent frame systems, as used in
the Provisions, has been adopted from FEMA 350 MA, 2000a), and has been
extended to include prequalified link-to-column c ections for EBE
Following observations of moment connection d ge in the 1994 Northridge
Earthquake, these Provisions adopted the philoso hy that the performance of
beam-to-column and link-to-column connections s ould be verified by realistic-
scale cyclic testing. This philosophy is based on e view that the behavior of
connections under severe cyclic loading, iparticul Iy in regard to the initiation
and propagation of fracture, cannot be reliably p edicted by analytical mean s
alone. Consequently, the satisfactory performance f connections must be con-
firmed by laboratory testing'conducted in "accordan e with Appendix S. In order
to meet this requirement, designers fundamentall have two options. The first
option is to provide substantiating test data, either om project specific tests or
from tests reported in the lit~rature, on connections matching project conditions
within the limits specified in Appendix S ~ The sec nd option open to designers
is to use a prequalified connection.
The option to use prequalified connections in the rovisions does not alter the
fundamental view that the performance of beam-to column and link:-to-column
connections should be conflrmed by testing. Howev ,it is recognized that requir-
ing designers to provide substantiating test data for ach new project is unneces-
sarily burdensome, particularly when the same conn ctions are used on a repeated
basis that have already recei,:,ed extensive testing, e uation, and review.
It is the intent of the Provisi,ons that designers be rmitted to use prequalified
connections without the nee<;i to present laboratory est data, as long as the con-
nection design, detailing and quality assurance me sures conform to the limits
and requirements of the prequalification. The use o prequalified connectións is
intended to simplify the design and design approval rocess by removing the bur-
den on designers to present test data, and tlY removi g the burden on the author-
ity having jurisdiction to review and interPret test d tao The use of prequalified
connections is not intended as a guarantee. against d age to, or failure of,' con-
nections in major earthquakes. The engim~er of rec rd in responsible charge of
the building, based upon an understanding of and f; ·liarity with the'connection
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005,· el. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONsTRUcrrON, c.
.. ~._-_.--_._._---_._ .. _-
6.1-222 PART 1 - PREQUALIFICATlON OF CONNECTlONS [Cornm.CP. Cornm.CP.] PART 1 - PREQUALIFICATlON OF ' ..AJ.nnJUL. J. nJJ~'" 6.1-223

perfonnance, behavior, and lirnitations is responsible for selecting appropriate engineering judgment. Co,nsequently, a fUlld~mt~~ntal prernise of these: provi-
connection types suited to the application and implementing designs, either dio. sions is that prequalification can only be based on an evaluation of
rectly or by delegated responsibility. the connection by a panel of knowledgeable Thus, the Provisions
call for theestablishment of a connection review panel (CPRP).
The use of prequalified connections is permitted, but not required, by the
Such a panel should consist of individuals a high degree of experience,
Provisions. knowledge, and expertise in connection design, and construction. It
is the respohsibility of the CPRP to review all data on a connection,
CP2. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS and then determine if the connection warrants and determine
CP2.1. Basis for Prequalification the associated lirnits of prequalification\ in with Appendix P. It is
In general tenns, a prequalified connection is one that has undergone sufficient the intent of the Provisions that only a single, recognized CPRP be
testing, analysis, evaluation and review so that a high level of confidence exists established. To that end, AISC established the connection prequalification
that the connection can fulfill the perfonnance requirements specified in Section review panel (CPRP) and developed Connections for Special and
9.2 for special momentframes, in Section 10.2 for intermediate momentframes, Intermediate Steel Moment Frames for Seismic ANSIIAISC 358-
or in SectÍon 15.4 for eccentrically braced frames. Prequalification should be 05 (AISC, 2005a).
based primarily on laboratory test data, but supported by analytical studies of
Use of connections reviewed by connection panels other than the AISC
connection perfonnance and by the development of detailed design criteria and
CPRP, as permitted in Section P2.2, and de1:eflnirl~d suitable for prequalification
design procedures. The behavior and expected perfonnance of a prequalified
status in accordance with the Provisions, are to approval of the authority
connection should be well understood and predictable. Further, a sufficient body
having jurisdiction.
of test data should be available to ensure that a prequalified connection will perO.
fonn as intended on a consistent and reliable basis.
CP3. TESTING REQUIREMENTS
Further guidance on prequalification of connections is provided by the cornrnen- It is the intent of the Provisions that laboratory data fonn the primary basis of
tary for FEMA 350, which indicates that the following four criteria should be prequalification, and that the connection testing c~rlfOIIDs to the requirem~nts of
satisfied for a prequalified connection: Appendix S. FEMA 350 specifies the rninimum of tests on nonidentical
specimens needed to establish prequalification of connectibn, or subsequently
(1) There is sufficient experimental and analytical data on the connection perO.
to chaiJ.ge the lirnits of prequalification. HClwe~velr.lin the Provisions, the number
fonnance to establish the likely yield mechanisms and failure modes for the
of tests needed to support prequalification or to changes in prequalifica-
connection. tion lirnits is not specified. The number !of tests range of testing variables
(2) Rational models for predicting the resistance associated with each mecha- needed to support prequalification decisions be highly dependent bn the
nism and failure mode have been developed. particular featui"es of the cbnnection and·on the of other supporting
data. Consequently, this section requires that the determine whether the
(3) Given the material properties and geometry of the connection, a rational
number and type of tests conducted on a co:nn(~dtion are sufficient to warrant
procedure can be used to estimate which mode and mechanism control s the
prequalification or to wartant a change in lirnits. Both FEMA
behavior and defonnation capacity (that is, interstory drift angle) that can
350 and the Provisions refer to "nonidentical"
be.attained for the controlling conditions. broad range of variables potentially affecting performance should be
(4) Given the models and procedures, the existing database is adequate to investigated in a prequalificaÚon test programo It may also be desirable to test
permit assessment of the statistical reliability of the connection. replicates of norninally identical specimens in to investigate repeatability
of performance prior to and afier failure and to consistency of fail-
CP2.2. Authority for Prequalification ure mechanism. Individuals planning á test to support prequalification
While the general basis for prequalification is outlined in Section P2.1, it is not of a connection are encouraged to consult with CPRP, in advance, for a pre-
possible to provide highly detailed and specific criteria for prequalification, conO. lirninary assessment of the planned testing j.JH.'¡;;l'l1~l.
sidering the wide variety of possible connection configurations, and considero.
ing the continually changing state-of-the-art in the understanding of connection Tests used to support prequruification are to comply with Appendix S.
perfonnance. It is also recognized that decisions on whether or not a particular That appendix requires test specimens be loaded least to an interstory drift
connection should be prequalified, and decisions on establishing limits on angle as specified in Section 9.2 for special or in Section 10.2
prequalification, will ultimately entail a considerable degree of professional for intermediate moment frames, or a link

Seismic Provisions ¡or Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions ¡or Structural Steel Buildings; Mareh 9,
AMERICAN INSTlTUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, INc. AMmuCAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL C01NSTRUCTIOlN,I

..----------------------------~---=~~~~, . . . _-_. .------ -

6.1-224 PART 1 - PREQUALIFICATION OF CONNECTIONS [Cornm.CP. Cornm.CP.] PART 1 - PREQUALIFICATION OF \..-v.! ~"-'-"\..-L H ..'!'ÜJ 6.1-225

Section 15.4 for eccentrically braced frames. These provisions do not inelude prequalification record, as required in Section Examples of the format and
the additional requirement for connection rotation capacity at failure, as rec- typical content of such design procedures can found in FEMA 350 (FEMA,
ornmended in FEMA 350 (FEMA, 2000a). For purposes of prequalification, 200Da).
however, it is desirable to load specimens to larger deformation levels in order
to reveal the ultimate controlling failure modes. Prequalification of a connection CP6. PREQUALIFICATION RECORD
requires a elear understanding of the controlling failure modes for a connec- A written prequalification record is required
tion, in other words, the failure modes that control the strength and deformation a minimum, the prequalification record must
capacity of the connection. Consequently, test data must be available to support Section P6. The prequalification record should a comprehensive listing
connection behavior models over the full range of loading, from the initial elastic of all information needed by a designer to the applicability and limita-
response to the inelastic range of behavior, and finally through to the ultimate tions of the connection, and information needed to design the connection. The
failure of the connection. prequalification record need not inelude records of laboratory tests or
When a connection is being considered for prequalification by the CPRP, all analytical studies. However, a list of references be ineluded for all test re-
test data for that connection must be available for review by the CPRP. This in- ports, research reports, and other publications as a basis of prequalification.
eludes data on unsuccessful tests of connections that represent or are otherwise These references should, to the extent possible, available in the public domain
relevant to the final connection. Testing performed on a preliminary connec- to permit independent review of the data and to .-'I'.......'LLI·... the integrity an,d cred-
tion configuration that is not relevant to the final design need not be submitted. ibility of the prequalification process. FEMA (FEMA, 2000a) provides an
However, parametric studies on weak and strong panel zones of a connection example of the type and formatting oí' needed for a prequalified
connection.
that otherwise match the final connection are examples of developmental tests
that should be submitted. Individuals seeking prequalification of a connection For connections prequalified by the AISC CPRP, the Prequalified Connections
are obliged to present the entire known database of tests for the connection. ¡or Special and Intermediate Steel Moment ¡or Seismic Applications,
Such data is essential for an assessment of the reliability of a connection. Note ANSIIAISC 358-05 (AISC, 2005a) serves as the record.
that unsuccessful tests do not necessarily preelude prequalification, particularly
if the reasons for unsuccessful performance have been identified and addressed
in the connection design procedures. For example, if ten tests are conducted on
varying sized members and one test is unsuccessful, the cause for the "failure"
should be determined. If possible, the connection design procedure should be
adjusted in sucha way to preelude the failure and not invalidate the other nine
tests. Subsequent tests should then be performed to validate the final proposed
design procedure.

CP4. PREQUALIFICATION VARIABLES

This section provides a list of variables that can affect connection performance,
and that should be considered in the prequalification of connections. The CPRP
should con~ider the possible effects of each variable on connection performance,
and establish limits of application for each variable. Laboratory tests or analyti-
cal studies investigating the full range of all variables listed in this section are not
required and would not be practical. Connection testing and/or analytical studies
investigating the effects of these variables are only required where deemed nec-
essary by the CPRP. However, regardless of which variables are explicitIy con-
sidered in testing or analytical studies, the CPRP should still consider the pos-
sible effects of all variables listed in this section, and assign appropriate limits.

CP5. DESIGN PROCEDURE

To prequalify a connection, a detailed and comprehensive design procedure con-
sistent with the test results and addressing all pertinent limit states must be avail-
able for the connection. This design procedure must be ineluded as part of the
I
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Marph 9, 2005, . Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN lNsTITUlE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INC. AMERICAN lNsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION,
6.1-226 Cornm. CQ.] PART 1 - QUALITY ASS Uft."'''''l.r.' ....
6.1-227

Appendix b CQ2. INSPECTION ANO NONOESTR ETESTING

PERSONNEL
QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN Personnel performing welding inspection and nondestructive testing should be
qualified to perform their designated tasks, functioning in a role as QC
or QA. Standards are available that provide for determining suitable
levels of training, experience, knowledge, skill for such personnel. These
standards are typically ineluded in a w'ritten used by QA agencies. They
CQ1. SCOPE may be used as a part of a contractor's QC P>\,'¡¡:,>.:uu.
A quality assurance plan (QAP) may be required by the applicable building
codes or the engineer of record. The QAP is typically prepared by the engineer, For personnel performing bolting inspection, standard currently exists that
and is a part of the contálct documents. This Appendix provides the minimum provides guidance as to suitable levels of experience, knowledge, or
acceptable requirements for a QAP that applies to the construction of welded skill in performing such tasks. Therefore, QA agency's written practice
joints, bolted joints, and other details in the seismic load resisting system (SLRS). should contain the agency criteria for del:errnintn~ their personnel qualifications
These requirements are recornmended for implementation without unnecessary to perform bolting inspection. Similarly, a QC program should con-
revision. Consistency of application from project to project of this QAP, as stated tain their criteria for bolting inspector qUé:tlíficat!olrl.
in this Appendix, is expected to improve reliability.
CQ3. CONTRACTOR OOCUMENTS
Quality control (QC) ineludes those inspection tasks performed by the contrac- Because the selection and proper use of filler metals is critical to achiev-
tor to ensure that the material and workmanship performed by that Contractor ing the necessary levels of strength, notch touLgJ:Ine~.s, and quality, the submittal
meet the quality requirements for the project. Routine QC welding inspection to the engineer of welding filler metal and welding procedure
tasks inelude items such as personnel control, material control, preheat measure- specifications is required. Submittal allows a review on the pan: of the
ment, monitoring of welding procedutes and visual inspection. QC is termed engineer, and allows the engineer to have consultants review th~se docu-
"contractor's inspection" inAWS Dl.l. Routine bolting inspection ineludes ma- ments, if needed. !

terial control, preinstallation verification testing, and observation of installation

techniques. Certain items in the list of contractor sutHni~tta:ls are not currently addiessed by
AWS D 1.1, and therefore they have been called out in this section.
Quality assurance (QA) ineludes those inspection tasks performed by an agency
or firm other than the contractor. QA may inelude duplicating specific inspec- Certain items are of a nature that submittal of su~)sta.nti;al volumes of documenta-
tion tasks that may be similarly ineluded in the contractor's QC programo QA tion is not necessary, and it is acceptable to these documents reviewed at
also ineludes monitoring of the performance of the conttactor in implementing the contractor's facility by the engineer or such as the QAAgency. The
their QC program, eIisuring that those designated QC tasks are performed prop- engineer may require submíttal of these do(;unrlelnts
erly by the contractor on a routihe basis. QA also ineludes the performance of
nondestructive testing, where required. Quality assurance is termed "verification
CQ4. QUALITV ASSURANCE AGE
inspection" in AWS D 1.1. QA Agencies should have internal procedures practices) that document
how the Agency performs and documents ir·lsp,e~tion and testing. ASTM E329,
In sorne cases, the fabricator implements a QC system as part of their normal Standard Specificationfor Agencies Engaged in Testing andlor Inspection of
operations, particularly fabricators that participate in AISC Quality Certification Materials Used in Construction, is cornmonly as a guide in preparing and
or similar programs. The engineer of record should evaluate what is already a reviewing written practices. ASTM E329 the mínimum requirements for
part of the contractor' s QC system in determining the quality assurance needs for inspection agency personnel or testing agency personnel, or both, and
each project. Where the fabricator's QC system is considered adequate for the the minimum technical requirements for and procedures utilized in
project, ineluding compliance with the special needs for seismic applications, the testing and inspection of materials used in Criteria are provided
the QAP may be modified to reflect this. Similarly, where additional needs are for evaluating the capability of an agency to perform designated tests
identified such as for innovative connection details or unfamiliar construction on construction materials, and establish essential pertaining to the
methods, ~upplementary requirements should be specified as appropriate. organization, personnel, facilities, and quality of the agency. It can be
used as a basis to evaluate an agency and is for use in qualifying and/or
accrediting agencies, public OI private, engaged the testing and inspection of
construction materials, including steel OOlrlstJructipn.

Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, March 9,
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL COINSTRUCTIoIN,
6.1-228 PART 1 - QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN [Cornrn.CQ. Cornrn.CQ.] PART 1 - QUALITY ASSURANCE

CQ4.1. Visual Welding Inspection (b) CJP Groove Weld NDT

Visual inspection by a qualified inspector prior to, during, and after welding is
Ultrasonic testing (UT) is used to serious embedded flaws
emphasized as the primary method used to evaluate the conformance of welded
in groove welds, but is not suitable the detection of sufface or
joints to the applicable quality requirements. Joints are exarnined prior to the
near-surface flaws. Magnetic testing (MT) is used to detect
commencement of welding to check fit-up, preparation bevels, gaps, alignment
serious flaws on or near the surface these welds. Because visual
and other variables. During welding, adherence to the welding procedure speci-
inspection is also implemented for CJP groove welds, detecting
fication (WPS) is maintained. Mter the joint is welded, it is then visually in-
the most serious surfaee defeets, is performed at arate of
spected to the requirements of AWS D 1.1.
25 percent.
CQ4.2. Nondestructive Testing (NDT) 01 Welds (e) Base Metal NDT for Larnellar
The use of nondestructive testing methods as required by this Appendix is rec-
ommended to verify the soundness of welds that are subject to tensile loads as a of base metal along
part ofthe seismic load resisting systems (SLRS), or to verify that certain critical a member. The tearing is the
elements do not contain significant notches that could cause failure. Ultrasonic usually associated with elon-
testing (UT) is capable of detecting serious embedded flaws in groove welds in gated "stringer" type inclusions, the shrinkage of large weld
all standard welded joint configurations. UT is not suitable for inspecting most metal deposits under conditions of restraint, applying stress in
fillet welds, nor should it be relied upon for the detection of surface or near- the through-thiekness direction of the metal.
surface flaws. Magnetic particle testing (MT) is capable of detecting serious
Larnellar tears rarely occur when the size is les s than about % to
flaws on or near the surface of all types of welds, and should be used for the in- 1 in. (20 to 25 mm). Typically, located deeper from the
spection of critical fillet welded joints and for the surface examination of critical
surface than t/4 do not contribute to tearing suseeptibility.
groove welds. The use of penetrant testing (PT) is not recommended for general
weld inspection, but may be used for crack detection in specific locations such as An appropriate criterion for
weld access holes and in the k-area of welded shapes, or for the location of crack not exist in current standards.
tips for cracks detected visually. has been written and is applicable to metal, not base metal, the
use of Table 6.2 criteria has been selected as conserva-
(2) Required NDT
tive acceptance criteria for in these applications, !irnrne-
(a) k-Area NDT diately adjacent to and behind the

The k-area of rotary straightened wide-flange sections may have (d)

reduced notch toughness.Preliminary recommendations (AISC,
The stress flow near and around weld holes is very complex,
1997a) discouraged the placement of welds in this area because of
and the stress levels are very high. serve as stress concentra-
post-weld cracking that occurred on past projects. Where such welds
tions, 10ca1ly ainplifying this stress which can lead to 'crack-
are to be placed in the k-area, inspection of these areas is needed to
ing. The surface of the weld access must be smooth, free from
verify that such cracking has not occurred.
significant surface defects. Both peIletrant testing (PT) and MT are
For doublerplates, where welding in the k -area is performed, MT in the capable of detecting unacceptable
k-area should be performed on the side of the member web opposite (e)
the weld location, and at the end of the weld. If both sides of the
member web reeeive doubler plates in the k-area, MT of the member Because plastic straining and hinging, potentially buckling, takes
web should be performed after welding of one side, prior to welding place in the thermally cut area of the bearn section, the area
of the opposite side. must be free of significant notches
stress concentrations and crack sites. Inadvertent notches
Cracking in the k-area is known to oecur in a delayed manner,
from thermal cutting, if sharp, may not completely removed if re-
typieally within 24 to 48 hours after welding. The eraeks generally,
lying solely upon visual inspection. If welded repair is made, NDT
but not always, penetrate the thickness of the base metal.
is performed to verify that no surface subsurface cracks have been
caused by the repair.

Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplernent No. 1 Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9,
AMERICAN mSTmrrE OF STEEL CONsTRUcnON, mc. AMERICAN msTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRucnON,
6.1-230 PART 1 - QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN [Comm.CQ.
6.1-231

(f) Weld Tab Removal Sites

A.pPENDIX R
Because weld tabs serve as locations for the starting and stopping of
welds, and as such are likely to contain a number of weld disconti-
nuities, they are removed. To ensure that no significant discontinui-
SEISMIC OESIGN COEF ICIENTS
ties present in the tab extend into the finished weld itself, MT is per- ANO
formed. Any weld end discontinuities would be present at the surface APPROXIMATE PERIOD
of the joint, and therefore would be more detrimental to performance
than an embedded discontinuity.

CRl. Appendix R is a new appendix that was' . to introduce system factors (R,
ed , no and height limits) for braced systems (BRBF) and
special plate shéar wall (SPSW) systems the applicable building code
does not yet contain reference to those systems Where the applicable building
code does contain these factors, Appendix R is be disregarded in favor of the
factors in the applicable building codeo The and the SPSW were first
introduced hito the NEHRP Provisions (FEMA, ), but since there were no
design requitements to reference, these systems not included in SEI/ASCE
7 (AS CE, 2005) but are expected to be included a supplement to SEI/ASCE 7
to be published in late summer 2005. This is expected to be adopted
by both the 2006 mc and NFPA 5000. When is accomplished, this appendix
will be removed.

1
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, ¡nel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN msTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, mc. AMERICAN msTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION,
 Cornm. CS.]
PART 1 - QUALIPYING CYCLIC
6.1-233

APPENDIX S failures oflink-to-column connections in the N ridge earthquake, it cannot be

conc1uded that these similar connections are s .sfactory for severe earthquake
loading as it appears that few EBF with a li -to-column configuration were
QUALIFYING CYCLIC TESTS OF
subjected to strong ground motion in that e quake. Many of the conditions
BEAM-TO-COLUMN that contributed to poor performance of mome connections in the Northridge
AND LINK-TO-COLUMN CONNECTIONS earthquake can also Occur in link-to-column co ections in EBF. Further, recent
research on link-to-column connections (Okaz . and others, 2004b; Okazaki,
2004) has demonstrated that such connections, esigned and constructed using
pre-Northridge practices, show poor performan e in laboratory testing. Conse-
quently, in these provisions, the same testing re uirements are applied to both
moment connections and to link-to-column conn ctions.
seOPE
The .
develo ment of testing requrrements for beam-to-co1u~ moment connec-.
tions was m~tivatedby the widespread occurrence of fractures In such conn~ctIO~s When developing a test program, the designer sh uld be aware that the authority
. th 1994 Northridge earthquake. To improve performance of co~nectIOns In having jurisdiction may impose additiónal testi g and reporting requirements
Ifn e arthquakes laboratory testing is required to identify potentlal problems not covered in this Appendix. Examples of testi g guidelines. or requirements
uture e , . th d to be used for the developed by other organizations or agencies in lude those published by SAC
in the design, detailing, materials oro constructIO~me. o ~at the behavior of
connection The requirement for testIng reflects e vlew. . (FEMA, 2000a; SAC, 1997), by the ICC Evalua 'on Service (ICC, 2004), and
connection~ under severe cyelic loading cannot be reliably predlcted by analytI- by the County of Los Angeles (County of Los geles Department of Public
cal means only. Works, 1996). Prior to developing a test program, the appropriate authority hav-
ing jurisdiction should be consuIted to ensure th test program meets all appli-
recogntIlzedth~aAt
. . testin of connections can be costly and time consumi.ng. cable requirements. Even when not required, the signer may find the informa-
It IS n ! has been written with the simplest testing reqUlre-
Consequen y, IS ppe f tested tion contained in the foregoing references to be seful resources in developing
ments possible, while still providing reasonable assur.ance th~t c?nnec : uake. a test programo
. cordance with these Provisions will perform satIsfactonly In an e q
~:re conditions in the actual building differ significantly from the con-~est eS3. DEFINITIONS
ditions specified in this Appendix, additional testin~ beyond the requ:men~~ Inelastic rotation. One of the key parameters me sured in a connection test is
herein may be needed to ensure satisfactory connectIon performa~:~ :Ynot the inelastic rotation that can be developed in th specimen. Previously in the
the factors affecting connection performance under earth~~ake lo g Seismic Provisions, inelastic rotation was the pri ary acceptance criterion for
letel understood. ConsequentIy, testing under condltIons that are as elose
~~;~SSibl~ to those found in the actual building will pro vide for the best repre-
beam-to-column moment connections in moment ames. The acceptance crite-
rion in the Provisions is now based on interstory dr angle, which ineludes both
sentation of expected connection performance. elastic and inelastic rotations. However, i~elastic r tation provides an important
It is not the intent of these Provisions that project-specifi~ connection ~e~ts be indication of connection performance in earthqu es and should stil1 be mea-
conducted on a routine basis for building construction proJects. Rathber, It IS a~­ sured and reported in connection tests. Researchers ave used a variety of differ-
ticipated that most projects would use connecti on details that . have been. prevI-
s d ent definitions for inelastic rotation of moment co ection test specimens in the
ously prequalified In. accordance WI·th Ap endix
p. P If connectIOns are b eIng u'fi ed past, making comparison among teSts difficult. In der to promote consistency
that have not been prequalified, then connecfIon performance . must e ventests
h cases e in how test results are report¿d, these Provisions req ire that inelastic rotation for
moment connection test spebimens be computed b sed on the assumption that
testIn~
. . accordance with Appendix S. However, even In suc. '.
by In. b d to demonstrate that a connectIon satlsfies all inelastic deformation of a test specimen is con ntrated at a single point at
reported In the hterature can e use . . s the re orted
the strength and rotation requirements of the Provlswns, so lo~g. a Pd th t the intersection of the centerline of the beam with e centerline of the col4mn.
tests satisfy the requirements of this Appendix. ConsequentIy, It IS expec~~ nu;- With this definition, inelastic rotation is equal to th inelastic portion of the in-
project-specific connection tests would be conducted for only a very sma terstory drift angle. Previously the Seismic Provisio s defined inelastic rotation
ber of construction projects. of moment connection specimens with respect to e face of the column. The
definition has been changed to the centerline of the c lumn to be consistent with
Although the provisions in thlS . Append'IX pred ' antly address the testing
omIn rf . of recommendations of SAC (SAC, 1997; FEMA, 200 a).
beam-to-column connections in moment frames, they. also apply to qua 1:::~
cyelic tests of link-to-coluinn connections in EBE WhIle there are no repo

Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, i el. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCl10N, !Nc.
AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCl10N, IN .
6.1-234 PART 1 - QUALIFYING CYCLIC TESTS [Comm.CS.
For tests of link-to-column connections, the key acceptance parameter is the link
inelastic rotation, also referred to in these Provisions as the link rotation angle.
The link rotation angle is computed based upon an analysis of test specimen
deformations, and can normally be computed as the inelastic portion of the rela-
tive end displacement between the ends of the link, divided by the link length.
Examples of such calculations can be found in Kasai and Popov (1986c); Rieles
and Popov (1987a); Engelhardt and Popov (1989a); and Arce (2002).
Interstory drift angle. The interstory drift angle developed by a moment con-
nection test specimen is the primary acceptance criterion for a beam-to-column
moment connection in a moment frame. In an actual building, the interstory drift
angle is computed as the interstory displacement divided by the story height,
and ineludes both elastic and inelastic components of deformation. For a test
specimen, interstory drift angle can usually be computed in a straightforward
manner from displacement measurements on the test specimen. Guidelines for
computing the interstory drift angle of a connection test specimen are provided
by SAC (1997).
Total link rotation angle. The total link rotation angle is the basis for control-
ling tests on link-to-column connections, as described in Section S6.3. In a test
specimen, the total link rotation angle is computed by simply taking the relative
displacement of one end of the link with respect to the other end, and dividing
by the link length. The total link rotation angle reflects both elastic and inelastic
deformations of the link, as well as the influence of link end rotations. While the
total link rotation angle is used for test control, acceptance criteria for link-to-
column connections are based on the link inelastic rotation angle (referred to in
the Provisions as the link rotation angle).
CS4. TEST SUBASSEMBLAGE REQUIREMENTS
A variety of different types of subassemblages and test specimens have been
used for testing moment connections. A typical subassemblage is planar and
consists of a single column with a beam attached on one or both sid~s of the
column. The specimen can be loaded by displacing either the end of the beam(s)
or the end of the column. Examples of typical subassemblages for morp.ent con-
nections can be found in the literature, for example in SAC (1996) and Popov
and others (1996).
In the Provisions, test specimens generally need not include a composite slab
or the application ofaxialload to the column. However, such effects may have
an influence on connection performance, and their inclusion in a test program
should be considered as a means to obtain more realistic test conditions. An
example of test subassemblages that inelude composite floor slabs andlor the ap-
plication of column axialloads can be found in Popov and others (1996); Leon,
Hajjar and Shield (1997); and Tremblay, Tchebotarev and Filiatrault (1997). A
variety of other types of subassemblages may be appropriate to simulate spe-
cific project conditions, such as a specimen with beams attached in orthogonal
directions to a column. Aplanar bare steel specimen with a single column and
a single beam represents the mínimum acceptable subassemblage for a moment
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9,2005, ¡nel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN rnsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, INC.
Cornm.CS.] PART 1 - QUALIFYING CYCLIC 6.1-235
connection test. However, more extensive and re istic subassemblages that bet-
ter match actual project conditions should be co sidered where appropriate and
practical, in order to obtain more reliable test re ults.
Examples of subassemblages used to test link o-column connections can be
found in Hjelmstad and Popov (1983); Kasai nd Popov (1986c); Rieles and
Popov (1987b); Engelhardt and Popov (1989 ); Dusicka and Itani >(2002);
McDaniel and others (2002); Arce (2002); and kazaki and others (2004b).
CS5. ESSENTIAL TEST VARIABLES
CS5.1. Sources of Inelastic Rotation
This section is intended to ensure that the inelas e rotation in the test specimen
is developed in the same members and connec on elements as anticipated in
the prototype. For example, if the prototype mo ent connection is designed so
that essentially all of the inelastic rotation is dev oped by yielding of the beam,
then the test specimen should be designed and p rform in the same way. A test
specimen that develops nearly all of its inelastic tation through yielding of the
column panel zone would not be acceptable to ualify a prototype connection
wherein flexural yielding of the beam is expected o be the predominant inelastic
action.
Because of normal variations in material prope ies, the actual location of in-
elastic action may vary somewhat from that inten ed in either the test specimen
or in the prototype. An allowance is made for s ch variations by permitting a
25 percent variation in the percentage of the tota inelastic rotation supplied by
a member or connecting element in a test specime as compared with the design
intent of the prototype. Thus, for the example abo e where 100 percent of the in-
elastic rotation in the prototype is expected to be eveloped by flexural yielding
ofthe beam, at least 75percent ofthe total inelas' rotation ofthe test specimen
is required to be developed by flexural yielding o the beam in order to qualify
this connection.
For link-to-column connections in eccentrically aced frames (EBF), the type
of yielding (shear yielding, flexural yielding, or a ombination of shear and flex-
ural yielding) expected in the test specimen link sh uld be substantially the same
as for the prototype link. For example, a link-to-c umn connection detailwhich
performs satisfactorily for a shear-yielding link ( $; 1.6Mp /Vp ) may not neces-
sarily perform well for a flexural-yielding link ( 2 2.6Mp /Vp ). The loá.d and
deformation demands at the link-to-column conn ction will differ significantly
for these cases.
Satisfying the requirements of this section will r quire the designer to have a
elear understanding of the manner in which inelast c rotation is developed in the
prototype and in the test specimen.
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005 inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN rnsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, C.
6.1-236 PART I - QUALIFYlNG CYCLIC 1ESTS [Cornm. CS. Comm. CS.] PART I - QUALIFYING CYCLIC 6.1-237

CS5.2. Size of Members These provisions also require that the depth of the test column be at least
The intent of this section is that the member sizes used in a test specimen should 90 percent of the depth of the prototype Tests conducted as part of the
be, as nearly as practical, a full-scale representation of the member sizes used SAC program indicated that performance of with deep columns may
in the prototype. The purpose of this requirement is to ensure that any poten- differ from the performance with W12 'and Wl columns (Chi and Uang, 2002).
tially adverse scale effects are adequately represented in the test specimen. As Additional recent research on moment with deep columns is re-
beams become deeper and heavier, their ability to develop inelastic rotation may ported by Ric1es, Zhang, Lu and Fisher (2004).
be somewhat diminished (Roeder and Foutch, 1996; Blodgett, 2001). Although
such scale effects are not yet completely understood, at least two possible det- In addition to adhering separately to the size for beams and to the
rimental scale effects have been identified. First, as a beam gets deeper, larger size restrictions for columns, the combination beam and column sizes used in
inelastic strains are generally required in order to develop the same level of in- a test specimen should reasonably reflect the of beam and column sizes
elastic rotation. Second, the inherent restraint associated with joining thicker used in the prototype. For example, say a design calls for the use of a
materials can affect joint and connection performance. Because of such poten- W36 beam attached to a W36 column. Say that for the connection type
tially adverse se ale effects, the beam sizes used in test specimens are required to proposed for this building, successful tests been ron on specimens using
a W36 beam attached to a W14 column, and other specimens using a W24
adhere to the limits given in this section.
beam attached to a W36 column. Thus, test data is available for this connection
This section only specifies restrictions on the degree to which test results can be on specimens meeting the beam size limitations Section S5.2, and separately
scaled up to deeper or heavier members. There are no restrictions on the degree on specimens meeting the column size of Section S5.2. Nonetheless,
to whic~ test results can be scaled down to shallower or lighter members. No these tests would not be suitable for qualifying connection for the case of a
such restrictions have been imposed in order to avoid excessive testing require- W36 beam attached to a W36 column, since combination of beam and col-
ments and because currently available evidence suggests that adverse scale ef- umn sizes used in the test specimens does not
fects are more likely to occur when scaling up test results rather than when scal- and column sizes in the prototype, within the
ing down. Nonetheless, caution is advised when using test results on very deep
or heavy members to qualify connections for much smaller or lighter members.
CS5.5. Material Strength
It is preferable to obtain test results using member sizes that are a realistic repre- The actual yield stress of structural steel can considerably greater than its
sentation of the prototype member sizes. specified minimum value. Higher levels of yield stress in members that
supply inelastic rotation by yielding can be d~lrin[lerltal to connection per-
As an example of applying the requirements of this section, consider a moment formance by developing larger forces at the prior to yielding. For
connection test specimen constructed with a W36x150 beam. This specimen example, consider a moment connection in which inelastic rotation is
could be used to qualify any beam with a depth up to 40 in. (= 36/0.9) and a developed by yielding of the beam, and the has been specified to be of
weight up to 200 lb/ft (=15010.75). The limits specified in this section have been ASTM A36/A36M steel. If the beam has an yield stress of 55 ksi (380
chosen somewhat arbitrarily based on judgment, as no quantitative research re- MPa) , the connection is required to resist a that is 50 percent higher
sults are available on scale effects. than if the beam had an actual yield stress of 36 (250 MPa). Consequently,
When choosing a beam size for a test specimen, several other factors should be this section requires that the material s used for test specimen represent this
considered in addition to the depth and weight of the section. One of these fac- possible overstrength condition, as this will for the most severe test of
the connection.
tors is the width-thickness (bit) ratio of the beam flange and web. The bit ratio s
of the beam may have an important influence on the performance of specimens As an example of applying these provisions, again a test specimen in
that develop plastic rotation by flexural yielding of the beam. Beams with high which inelastic rotation is ¡ntended to be de'{elc:)Od~d by yielding of the beam. In
bit ratio s develop local buckling at lower inelastic rotation levels than beams order to qualify this connection for ASTM beams, the test beam is
with low bit ratios. This local buckling causes strength degradation in the beam, required to have a yield stress of at least 47 ksi MPa) (= 0.85Ry F y for ASTM
and may therefore reduce the load demands on the connection. A beam with very A992/A992M). This minimum yield stress is . to be exhibited by both
low bit ratios may experience little if any local buckling, and will therefore sub- the web and flanges of the test beam.
ject the connection to higher moments. On the other hand, the beam with high bit
ratios will experience highly localized deformations at locations of flange and The requirements of this section are applicable y to members or connect-
web buckling, which may in turn initiate a fracture. Consequently, it is desirable ing elements of the test specimen that are 111l'''l1l1''lI- to contribute to the inelastic
to test beams over a range of bit ratios in order to evaluate these effects. rotation of the specimen through yielding. The of this section are
not applicable to members, or connecting that are intended to remain
essentially elastic.

Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Máreh 9,
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INC. AMERICAN lNsTITÍlTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION,
 PART 1 - QUALIFYING CYCLIC TESTS [Cornm.CS. Comm. CS.] PART 1 - QUALIFYING CYCLIC 6.1-239
6.1-238

loading protocol was therefore chosen ~n a conservative and arbitrary

CS5.6. Welds basis. Concerns that the loading protocol may excessively conservative were
The intent of the Provisions is to ensure that the welds on the test specimen
replicate the welds on the prototype as closely as practicable. Accordingly, it raised when a nurnber of shear links tested this protocol failed somewhat
is required that the welding parameters, such as current and voltage, be within prernaturely due to low cycle fatigue fractures of the link web (Okazaki and
the range established by the weld metal manufacturero Other essential variables, others, 2004a; Arce, 2002). As a result; of regarding the rationality of
th~ current link loading protocol, research was to establish a rational
such as steel grade, type of joint, root opening, included angle, and preheat level,
are required to be in accordance with AWS D 1.1. It is not the intent of this sec- loading protocol for link-to-column in EBF. This study (Richards
tion that the electrodes used to make welds in a test specimen must necessarily and Uang, 2003; Richards, 2004) developed a loading protocol
be fue same AWS classification, diameter, or brand as the electrodes to be used for links, using a rnethodology similar to that for rnornent frame connection
testing, as developed under the FEMAlSAC The loading protocol for
on the prototype.
link-to-column connections developed in this is the basis of the new load-
ing sequence in Section S6.3.
eS6. LOADING HISTORV
The loading sequence prescribed in Section S6.2 for beam-to-column moment The loading sequence specified in ATC-24, (jul~'linleslor Cyclíc Seísmic Test-
connections is taken from SACIBD-97/02, Protocolfor Fabricatíon, Inspection, ing of Components 01 SteeL Structures (ATC, 1 is considered as an 'accept-
Testing, and Documentatíon of Beam-to-Column Connectíon Tests and Other able alternative to those prescrtbed in Sections 2 and S6.3. Further, any other
Experimental Specimens (SAC, 1997). This document should be consulted for loading sequ~nce rnay be used 'for mornent connections or link-
further details of the loading sequence, as well as for further useful information to-colurnn connections, as long as the loading is equivalent or more
on testing procedures. The prescribed loading sequence is not intended to repre- severe than those prescribed in Sections S6.2 S6.3. To be considered as
sent the demands presented by a particular earthquake ground motion. This load- equivalent or more severe, alternative loading should meet the follow-
ing sequence was developed based on a series of nonlinear time history analyses ing requirements: (1) the number'of inelastic cycles should be at least
of steel moment frame structures subjected to a range of seismic inputs. The as large as the number of inelastic loadihg cycles from the prescribed
maximum deformation, as well as the cumulative deformation and dissipated loading sequence; and (2) the cumulative plastic should be at least
energy sustained by beam-to-column connections in these analyses, were con- as large as the cumulative plastic deformation from the prescribed load-
sidered when establishing the prescribed loading sequence and the connection ing sequence.
acceptance criteria. If a designer conducts a nonlinear time history analysis of
a moment frame structure in order to evaluate demands on the beam-to-column Dynamically applied loads are not required in Provisíons. Slowly applied
cyc1ic loads, as typically reported in the lIte:ratlure{ for connection tests, are ac-
connections, considerable judgment will be needed when comparing the de-
ceptable for the purposes of,the Provisions. It is that dynamic loading
mands on the connection predicted by the analysis with the demands placed on
can considerably increase the cost of testing, and few laboratory facilities
a connection test specimen using the prescribed loading sequence. In general,
have the capability to dynamically load very large- test specimens. Further-
however, a connection can be expected to provide satisfactory performance if
more, the available research on dynamic l'Oading on steel connections has
the cumulative plastic deformation, and the total dissipated energy sustained by
not demonstrated a compelling need for dynamic Nonetheless, applying
the test specimen prior to failure are equal to or greater than the same quantities
the required loading sequence dynamically, using rates typical ofiactual
predicted by a nonlinear time-history analysis. When evaluating the cumulative
earthquake loading, willlikely provide a better . of the expected perfor-
plastic deformation, both total rotation (elastic plus inelastic) as well as inelastic
mance of the connection, and should be where possible.
rotation at the connection should be considered. SACIBD-OOIl O (SAC, 2000)
can be consulted for further information on this topic.
eS8. MATERIALS TESTING REQUIREM NTS
Section S6.3 specifies the loading sequence for qualifying tests on link-to-col- Tension testing is required ,for members and co;n*~ction elements of the test
umn connections. This loading sequence has been changed from the previous specirnen that contribute to· the inelastic totation the specimen by yie1ding.
edition of these Provisions. Recent research on EBF (Richards and Uang, 2003; These tests are required to demonstrate with the requirements of
Richards, 2004) has demonstrated that the loading protocol specified for testing Section S5.5, and to pennit 'proper analysis of test response. Tension
of links in Section S6.3 of Appendix S in the 2002 Provisions is excessively test results reported on certified mill test reports are permitted to be used for
conservative. A loading protocol for link testing was first added to Appendix S this purpose. Yield stress vaiues reported on a mill tyst report may not
in Supplement No. 2 to the 1997 Provísíons, and remained unchanged in the adequately represent the actual yield strength of test specimen members.
2002 Provísíons. When the link loading protocol was added to Appendix S, Variations are possible due to material sampling and tension test meth-
no research was available that provided a rational basis for link testing. The ods used for certified mill test reports.

Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, Supplement No. 1
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INS1TI1JTE OF STEBL CONSTRUCfION,
AMERICAN lNsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INc.

~-~-~-.--...-.-----_.-..---- ---
 6.1-240 PART I - QUALIFYING CYCLIC TESTS [Comm.CS. Comm. CS.]
PART I - QUALIFYING CYCLIC ESTS
6.1-241
ASTM standards for tension testing permit the reporting of the upper yield point.
Yield strength may be reported using either the 0.2 percent offset or 0.5 percent qualified under the Provisions, since rwo succ ssful tests are required Clearl
elongation under load. For steel members subject to large cyclic inelastic strains, ho~ever, the number of failed tests indicates otential problems with' the reIr'
the upper yield point can provide a misleading representation of the actual mate- ablhty of the connection. On the other hand th f.·l f .. .-
the 1 b .. ' al ure o a tested cOnnectlOn In
rial behavior. Thus, while an upper yield point is permitted by ASTM, it is not . a ~ratory should not, by Itself, eljminate t at connection from further con
permitted for the purposes of this Section. Determination of yield stress using sIderatlOn. ~s l~ng as the causes of the failure e understood and corrected an~
the 0.2 percent strain offset method based on independent testing using common the conn~ctlOn IS successfully retested, the con ection may be quite acce t~ble
specimen size for all members is required in this Appendix. This follows the ~husI' whIle the .acceptance criteria in the Provis ons have intentionally be! kep~
protocol used during the SAC investigation. sImp e, the ChoIce of a safe l' bl I •
' . ' re la e, and eco mlcal connection stilI .
consIderable Judgment. reqUIres
Since this tension testing utilizes potentially different specimen geometry, test-
ing protocol, and specimen location, differences from the material test report
are to be expected. Appendix X2 of ASTM A6 discusses the variation of tensile
properties within a heat of steel for a variety of reasons. Based on previous work,
this appendix reports the value of one standard deviation of this variance to be
8 percent of the yield strength using ASTM standards.
This special testing is not required for project materials as the strength ratios in
Table 1-6-1 were developed using standard producer material test report data.
Therefore, supplemental testing of project material should only be required if the
identity of the material is in question prior to fabrication.
Only tension tests are required in this section. Additional material s testing, how-
ever, can sometimes be a valuable aid for interpreting and extrapolating test re-
sults. Examples of additional tests, which may be useful in certain cases, include
Charpy V-Notch tests, hardness tests, chemical analysis, and others. Consider-
ation should be given to additional materials testing, where appropriate.

CS10. ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA

A minimum of two tests is required for each condition in the prototype in which
the variables listed in Section S5 remain unchanged. The designer is cautioned,
however, that two tests, in general, cannot provide a thorough assessment of the
capabilities, limitations, and reliability of a connection. Thus, where possible,
it is highly desirable to obtain additional test data to permit a better evaluation
of the expected response of a connection to earthquake loading. Further, when
evaluating the suitability of a proposed connection, it is advisable to consider a
broader range of issues other than just inelastic rotation capacity.
One factor to consider is the controlling failure mode after the required inelastic
rotation has been achieved. For example, a connection that slowly deteriorates
in strength due to local buckling may be preferable to a connection that exhibits
a more brittle failure mode such as fracture of a weld, fracture of a beam flange,
etc., even though both connections achieved the required inelastic rotation.
In addition, the designer should also carefully consider the implications of un-
successful tests. For example, consider a situation where five tests were run on
a particular type of connection, two tests successfully met the acceptance crite-
ria, but the other three fai~ed prematurely. This connection could presumably be

Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INSTITIlTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INe. Seismic Provisians lar Structural Steel Buildings Mareh 9 2005 l' el Su 1 N 1
. '.'" pp ement o.
AMERICAN INslTIUTE OF SlEEL CONSTRUCTION, IN .

c_ _- - - -_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ._. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _•_ _. _ •••• _____ ••••• _ •••• _ •••• _ _ _ •• ___ _

6.1-242
APPENDIXT
QUALIFYING CYCLIC TESTS OF
BUCKLING-RESTRAINED BRACES
CT1. SCOPE
The development of the testing requirements in the Provisions was motivated
by the relatively small amount of test data on buckling-restrained braced frame
(BRBF) systems available to structural engineers. In addition, no data on the
response of BRBFs to severe ground motion is available. Therefore, the seismic
performance of these systems is relatively unknown compared to more conven-
tional steel-framed structures.
The behavior of a buckling-restrained bracedframe differs markedly from con-
ventional braced frames and other structural steel seismic-Ioad-resisting systems.
Various factors affecting brace performance under earthquake loading are not
well understood and the requirement for testing is intended to pro vide assurance
that the braces will perform as required, and also to enhance the overall state of
knowledge of these systems.
It is recognized that testing of brace specimens and subassemblages can be
costly and time-consurning. Consequently, this Appendix has been written with
the simplest testing requirements possible, while still providing reasonab1e as-
surance that prototype BRBFs based on brace specimens and subassemblages
tested in accordance with these provisions will perform satisfactorily in an actual
earthquake. CT3.
It is not intended that the Provisions drive project-specific tests on a routine basis
for building construction projects. In most cases, tests reported in the literature
or supplied by the brace manufacturer can be used to demonstrate that a, brace
and subassemblage configuration satisfies the strength and inelastic rotation re-
quirements of these provisions. Such tests, however, should satisfy the require-
ments of this Appendix.
The provisions of this Appendix have been written allowing subrnission of data CT4.
on previous testing, based on sirnilarity conditions. As the body of test data for
each brace type grows, the need for additional testing ís expected to diminish.
The provisions allow for manufacturer-designed braces, through the use of a
docurnented design methodology.
Most testing programs developed for prirnarily axial-load-carrying components
focus largely on uniaxial testing. However, these provisions are intended to direct
the primary focus of the program toward testing of a subassemblage that imposes
combined axial and rotational deformations on the brace specimen. This reflects
the view that the ability of the brace to accornrnodate the necessary rotational
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, ¡nel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN msTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, mc.
Cornm. CT.]
PART I - QUALIFYING CYCLIC TES
6.1-243
deformations cannot be reliably predicted by alytical means alone. Subassem-
blage test requirements are discussed more co pletely in Section CT4.
~~ere cond.ition~ in ~e actual building diffe significantly from the: test con-
~ltlO~S speclfi~d m thlS Appendix, additional testing beyond the requirements
escnbed ?erem may be needed to ensure sati factory brace performance. Prior
to developmg a test program, the appropriate r ulatory agencies should be con-
sulted to assure the test program meets all appl cable requirements.
CT2. SVMBOLS
The provisions of this Appendix require the i troduction of several new vari-
ables. The quantity Llbm represents both an axl'
displacement and a rotational
quantity. Both quantities are determined by ex .ning the profile of the building
~t the design story drift, Lln" and extracting joi lateral and rotational deforma-
tlOn demands.
Deterrnining the maximu t' .
. '. m ro auon lmposed o the braces used in the building
may r~qUlre slgruficant effort. The engineer m y prefer to select a reasonable
value (m ?ther words, interstory drift), which c be simply demonstrated to be
conservatIve for each brace type and is expect d to be w·th· th -i'
1 ' 1 m e peuormance
enve ope of the braces selected for use on the p ~ect.
The brace def~rma~on at first significant yiel is used in developing the test
sequen ce descnbed m Appendix T Section T6 3 The quanu't' . d
t . h . .' . YIS reqUlre to de-
erm~ne t ~ actual cumulatIve melastic deformat on demands on the brace If the
noml~al .Yleld stress of the steel core were used to determine the test seq~ence
~d slgmfic~t material overstrength were to e .st, the total inelastic deforma~
tlOn demand lmposed during the test sequen ce uld be overestimated.
DEFINITIONS
Two types of. testing ar:e re~erred to in' this Ap endix. The flfSt type is subas-
s~mblage tesung, descnbed m Section T4, an ex pIe of which is ilIustrated .
FIgure C-I-T.I. m
The second type of testing described in SectI'on 5
as brace specimen testing is
permitted to be uniaxial testing.
SUBASSEMBLAGE TEST SPECI
!he ob!ective .of subassemblage testing is to veri the ability of the brace and
m partIcular, 1tS steel core extension and buckl ng restr";ru'
• tu ng mech"arusm, to'
ac.comrnodate the combmed axial and rotational eformation demands without
frolure.
It ~s r~cogni~ed that subassemblage testing is mo e difficult and expensive than
um~xlal testIng of brace specimens. However, th complexity of the brace be-
havlOr due to the combined rotational and axial emands, and the relative lack
of t~st data on the performance of these systems, indicates that subassemblage
testmg should be perforrned.
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings Mareh 9 200 . 1 S 1
. ' " me. upp ement No. 1
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION INC.
6.1-244 PART I - QUALIFYING CYCLIC TESTS OF BRB [Cornm. CT. Cornrn.CT.]
PART 1 - QUALIFYING CYCLIC TEST OF BRB
6.1-245

Subassemblage testing is not intended to be required for each project. Rather,

it is expected that brace manufacturers will perform the tests for a reasonable
range ofaxialloads, steel core configurations, and other parameters as required
by the provisions. It is expected that this data will subsequently be available to
engineers on other projects. Manufacturers are therefore encouraged to conduct
tests that establish the device performance limits to minimize the need for sub-
assemblage testing on projects.
Similarity requirements are given in terms of rneasured axial yield strength of
-- Eccentric Loadi ng of
Brace
both the prototype and the test specimen braces. This is better suited to rnanu-
facturer's product testing than to projeGt-specific testing. Comparison of coupon
test results is a way to establish a similarity between the subassernblage test
specimen brace and the prototype braces. Once similarity is established, it is
acceptable to fabricate test specimens and prototype braces from different heats
of steel.
A variety of subassemblage configurations are possible for imposing combined
axial and rotational deformation dernands on a test specirnen. Sorne potential
subassemblages are shown in Figure ,C-I-T.2. The subassernblage need not in- Loading of Brace with
Constant Imposed
elude connecting beams and columns provided that the test apparaJ:Us duplicates,
Rotation
to a reasonable degree, the cornbined axial and rotational deformations expected
at each end of the braceo

900 kN Actuator
(typ.)
Loading of Brace and
Column

Loading of Braced
Frame
16 ft

Fig. C-/-T.l Example oftest subassemblage. Fig. C-I-T.2. Schematic ofpossible test suba semblages.

Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplernent No. 1
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 200 ,incl. Supplernent No. 1 I
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, INC.
AMERICAN INsTiTUTE OF STEEL CONsTRucnON INc.
6.1-246 PART 1 - QUALIFYING CYCLIC TESTS OF BRB [Cornm. CT.
Rotational demands may be concentrated in the steel core extension in the region
just outside the buckling restraining mechanism. Depending on the mag~itude of
the rotational demands, limited flexural yielding of the steel core extenslOn may
occur. Rotational demands can also be accommodated by other means, such as
tolerance in the buckling restraint layer or mechanism, elastic flexibility of the
brace and steel core extension, or through the use of pins or spherical bearing
assemblies. It is in the engineer's best interest to inelude in a subassemblage
testing all components that contribute significantly to accommodating rotational
demands.
It is intended that the subassemblage test specimen be larger in axial-force ca-
pacity than the prototype. However, the possibility exists for braces to be de-
signed with very large axial forces. Should the brace yield force be so large as
to make subassemblage testing impractical, the engineer is expected to make
use of the provisions that allow for alternate testing programs, based on building
official approval and qualified peer review. Such programs may inelude, but are
not limited to, nonlinear finite element analysis, partial specimen testing, and
reduced-scale testing, in combination with full-scale uniaxial testing where ap-
plicable or required.
The steel core material was not ineluded in the list of requirements. The more
critical parameter, calculated margin of safety for the steel core projection stabil-
ity, is required to meet or exceed the value used in the prototype ..The me~od
of calculating the steel core projection stability should be ineluded m the deslgn
methodology.
CT5. BRACE TEST SPECIMEN
The objective of brace test specimen testing is to establish basic design param-
eters for the BRBF system.
It is recognized that the fabrication tolerances used by brace manufacturers to
achieve the required brace performance may be tighter than those used for other
fabricated structural steel members. The engineer is cautioned against ineluding
excessively prescriptive brace specifications, as the intent of these provisions is
that the fabrication and supply of the braces is achieved through a performance-
based specification process. It is considered sufficient that the manufacture of
the test specimen and the prototype braces be conducted using the same quality
control and assurance procedures, and the braces be designed using the same
design methodology.
The engineer should also recognize that manufacturer process improvements
over time may result in sorne manufacturing and quality control and assurance
procedures changing between the time of manufacture of the brace test specimen
and of the prototype. In such cases reasonable judgment is required.
The allowance of previous test data (similarity) to satisfy these provisions is less
restrictive for uniaxial testing than for subassemblage testing. Subassemblage
test specimen requirements are described in Section CT4.
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INSTITIlTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INC.
Cornm. CT.]
PART I - QUALIFYING CYCLIC TES S OF BRB
6.1-247
A considerable number of uniaxial tests hay been performed on sorne brace
systems and the engineer is encouraged, wher ver possible, to submit previous
test data to meet these provisions. Relatively D subassemblage tests have been
performed. This type of testing is considered a ore demanding test of the over-
all brace performance.
CT5.4. Connection Details
In many cases it will not be practical or reaso able to test the exact brace con-
nections .present in the prototype. These provi ions are not intended to require
such tes.tmg. In general, the demands on the ste 1 core extension to gusset-plate
connectlOn are welI defined due to the known ial capacity of the brace and the
limited flexural capacity of the steel core extensi n. While the subseql.Jent design
of the bolted or welded gusset-plate connection .s itself a complicated issue and
the sl.Jbject of continuing investigation, it is not .ntended that these connections
become the focus of the testing programo
For the purposes of utilizing previous test data meet the requirements of this
Appendix, the requirements for similarity betwe n the brace and subassemblage
brace test specimen can be considered to exelu e the steel core extension con-
nection to frame.
CT5.5. Materials
The intent of the provisions is to allow test data om previous test programs to
be presented where possible. See Section CT4 fo additional commentary.
CT5.6. Connections
The intent of this provision is to ensure that the e d connections of the brace test
specimen reasonably represent those of the prot type. It is possible that due to
fabrication or assembly constraints variations in t-up, faying-surface prepara-
tion, or bolt or pin hole fabrication and size ma Occur. In certain cases, such
variations may not be detrimental to the qualifica ion of a successful cyelic test.
The final acceptability of variations in brace-end onnections rests on the opin-
ion of the building oflicial.
CT6. LOADING HISTORV
CT6.3. Loading Sequence
The subassemblage test specimen is required to ndergo combined axial and
rotational deformations similar to thosetn the pr totype. It is recognized that
identicaI braces, in different Iocations in the bui ding, will undergo different
maximum axial and rotationaI deformation deman s. In addition, the max,imum
rotational and axial defornlation demands may b different at each end ·~f the
braceo The engineer is expected to make simplifyi g assumptions to determine
the most appropriate combination of rotational an axial deformatiOR demands
for the testing programo .
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural StÚl Buildings, March 9, 2005, incI. Supplement No. 1
AMEruCAN INsTITt!TE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, c.
6.1-248 PART 1 - QUALIFYING CYCLIC TESTS OF BRB [Comm. CT.
Cornm. CT.]
PART 1 - QUALIFYING CYCLIC TESTS F BRB

Sorne subassemblage configurations will require that one deformation quantity

be fixed while the other is varied as described in the test sequence aboye. I~ such
a case, the rotational quantity may be applied and maintained at the maXlmum Table C-T6-1 Example BraceTe ting Protocol
value, and the axial deformation applied according to the test sequence. The e~­ Cycle Deformation Inelastic Deformation Cumulative
gineer may wish to perform subsequent tests on the same subassemblage specl- Inelastic Deformation
2 @ ~by
men to bound the brace performance. == 2*4*(~bY- ~by)= O~by O~by= O~by
2 @ O.5~bm = 4 @ 2.0~bY
The loading sequence requires each tested brace to ac~iev~ duct~litie~ corre- = 2*4*(2.0~bY- ~by) = 8~by O~by + 8~by = 8~by
2 @ ~bm =4 @ 4.0~by
sponding to 2.0 times the design story drift and a cumulatIve melastlc .axlal .duc- = 2*4*(4.0~bY- ~by) = 24~by 8~by + 24~by = 3Uby
tility capacity of 200. Both of these requirements are based on a s~u~y m :,hlCh a 2 @ 1.5~bm =2 @ 6.0~by = 2*4*(6.0~bY - ~by) =40~by
32~by + 40~by = 72~bY
series of nonlinear dynamic analyses was conducted on model bmldmgs ~n order 2 @ 2.0~bm =2 @ 8.0~bY = 2*4*(8.0~bY - ~by) = 56~by
to investigate the performance of this system. The ductility capacity reqU1rem~nt 4 @ 1.5~bm
72~by + 56~ = 128~by
=2 @ 6.0~by = 4*4*(6.0~by - ~by) = ~O~by
represents a mean of response values (Sabelli and others, 2003). The cu.mulatI~e 128~bY + 80~by = 208~bY
Cumulative inelastic deformation at end of Protocol = 208.1
ductility requirement is significantly higher than expected for ~e desl~n baSlS by

earthquake, but testing of braces has shown this value to be easIly achlev.ed. It
is expected that as more test data and building analysis results become avaIlable
these requirements may be revisited.
The ratio of brace yield deformation, /).by, to the brace deformation correspo~d­
ing to the design story drift, /).bm, must be calculate~ in order t? define the testm.g
protocol. This ratio is typically the same as the ratio of the dlsplacement amph-
fication factor (as defined in the applicable building code) to the actual over-
strength of the brace; the minimum overstrength is determined by the resistance
factor (LRFD) or the safety factor (ASD) in Section 16.2a.
Engineers should note that there is a minimum brace d~f~rmation demand, /).bm,
corresponding to 1 percent story drift (Section T2); provlslOn of overstreng~ be-
yond that required to so limit the design story drift may not be .used ~s a ~~SIS to
reduce the testing protocol requirements. Testing to at least tWlce thlS mmlmum
(in other words, to 2 percent drift) is required.
Table C-T6-1 shows an example brace test protocol. For this example, it is as-
sumed that the brace deformation corresponding to the design story drift is four
times the yield deformation; it is also assumed that the design story drift is larger
than the 1 percent minimum. The test protocol is then con.s~cted f~om steps 1
through 4 of Section T6.3. In order to calculate the cumulatlVe l~elast1c defo~a­
tion, the cycles are converted from multiples of brac~ deformat.lOn at the deslgn
story drift, /).bm, to multiples of brace yield deformatlOn, /).by' Smce t~e .cumula-
tive inelastic drift at the end of the 2.0/).bm cycles is less than the mlmmum of
200/).by required for brace tests, additional cy~les. to 1.5~bm are req~ired. At the
end of tbree such cycles, the required cumulatIve melastlc deformatlOn has been
reached.
Dynamical1y applied loads are not required by the rovisions. The use of slowly
~pplied cyclic loads, widely described in the liter re for brace specimen tests,
IS acceptable for the purposes of these provisions. It is recognized that dynamic
loading can considerably increase the cost of testi g, and that few laboratory fa-
cilities have the capability to apply dynamic loads o very large-scale test speci-
mens. Furthermore, the available research on dyn .c loading effects on steel
test specimens has not demonstrated a compelIing eed for such testing.
If rate-of-Ioading effects are thought to be poten aUy significant for the steel
core material used in the prototype, it may be poss 'ble to estimate the expected
change in behavior by performing coupon tests a low (test cyclic loads) and
high (dynamic earthquake) load rates. The results om brace tests would then
be factored accordingly.
CTa. MATERIALS TESTING REQUIREM
Tension testing of the steel core material used in the manufacture of the test
specimens is required. In general, there has been g od agreement between cou-
pon test results and observed tensile yield strength in full-scale uniaxial tests.
Material testing required by this appendix is cons' stent with that required for
testing of beam-to-column moment connections. Fo further information on this
topic refer to Cornmentary Appendix S, Section CS of the Provisions.
CT10. ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
The acceptance criteria are written so that the mini um testing data that must
be submitted is at least one subassemblage test an at least one uniaxial test.
In many cases the subassemplage test specimen al o qualifies as a brace test
specimen provided the requirements of Appbndix T, S ction T5 are met. If project
specific subassemblage testing is to be performed it ay be simplest to perform
two subassemblage tests to meet the requirerp.ents of is section. For the purposes
of tbese requirements a single subassemblage test in orporating two braces in a
chevron or other configuration is also considered acc ptable.

Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, March 9,2005, incl. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN !NsTITU1E OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, i el. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, IN .
6.1-250 PART 1- QUALIFYING CYCLIC TESTS OF BRB [Cornrn. CT.
6.1-251

Depending on the means used to connect the test specimen to ~e subassembla~e

or test apparatus, and the instrumentation system used, bolt slIp may appear. m
APPENDIXW
the load versus displacement history for sorne tests. This may appear as a senes
of downward spikes in tM load versus displacement plot and is not generally a WELDING PROVISI NS
cause for concem, provided the behavior does not adversely affect the perfor-
mance of the brace or brace connection.
These acceptance criteria are intended to be minimum requirements. The 1.3
limit in Section TlO, requirement (4), i~ essentia1ly a limitation on p. These pro- CW1. SCOPE
visions were developed assuming that p< 1.3 so this provision has been inc1uded Provisions for welded details, welding m~ltel1.<lJ.s,
in the test requirements. Currently available braces should be able to satisfy this ing personnel, and related items have ¡been u ...'t ....~"'u
requirement. time as they have been adopted by the, AWS or accredited organization in
a suitable standard for seismic welding . At the time of publication of
the Provisions, these items have been planned inc1usion in such a standard,
but final ratification and publication of these had not yet been com-
pleted. Although the planned standard'· numerous other provisions and
also additional details, conditions and regarding those cited here,
the Provisions inc1ude the foUowing items they are considered essential
to maintain the material properties and details necessary for adequate
seismic performance. Upon adoption and pu of such a standard by AWS
or other accredited organization, it is anticipated this Appendix will be with-
drawn from the Provisions, with reference to the new standard.

CW2. STRUCTURAL DESIGN DRAWIN

SPECIFICATIONS, SHOP DRAWI
ERECTION DRAWINGS
The presence of backing, weld tabs and welds these attachments and the
ID:embers they are attached to may affect the of stresses around the connec-
tions and contribute to stress concentrations. backing and tabs are in posi-
tions that make them difficult to remove without qtrumagulg the adjacent material,
and test data demonstrates that acceptable can be achieved without
their removal. Backing removal may be . and unnecessary in locations
such as column splices. Backing removal is at the inside corners of
small box sections, and at column splices of box pV',U~'J1".
Analysis and testing has demonstrated that the n<lltllr~,II" occurring unfu$ed edge
of steel backing that contacts the column face
constitutes a severe stress raiser. By placing a
ing and the column face, this concentration can
Weld tab removal may be impractical, or even in sorne locations, such
as at the radius of a roUed column. In general, tabs should not be used in
the k-area, but if used, are best left in place than risking the drumage that
might occur during tab removal.

Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Stúi Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, incl. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN !NSTITÜTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcrrON, !Nc.
AMERlCAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~STR.ucrlO~ !Nc.

._---_._------_.__._---_._-------_._--- .._------------- ------ -

6.1-252 PART 1 - WELDING PROVISIONS [Cornm.Cw.
Reinforcing fillet welds are typically used in tee and comer joints where the
load is perpendicular to the weld axis. A reinforcing fillet weld applied to a joint
reduces the stress concentration of a nearly 90° intersection between the weld
face or root, and the adjacent steel member. Such reinforcement is not required
for most groove welds in tee or comer joints.
Anal ysis and research have shown that the shape of the weld access hole can
have a significant effect on the behavior of moment connections. The use of
weld access holes, other than those prescribed by the Specification, has not been
found necessary for locations such as column splices. Care should be exercised
to avoid specifying special weld access hole geometries when not justified.
In sorne situations, no weld access holes are desirable, such as in end plate
connections.
In common frame configurations, specific assembly order, welding sequence,
welding technique and other special precautions should not be necessary. It is
anticipated that such additional requirements will only be required for special
cases, such as those of unusually high restraint.
CW3. PERSONNEL
CW3.1. QC Welding Inspectors
The inspector should be familiar with the Provisions and the AWS Dl.1 Struc-
tural Welding Code-Steel. Because the Contractor's welding inspector typically
has a more limited range of inspection tasks, repeated consistently on the same
type of work and the same types of materials, it is not required that the QC weld-
ing inspector have the same broad range of knowledge, nor as many years of
experience, as QA welding inspectors, who may encounter a broader range of
materials, details, and situations. Also, see Commentary CW3.2.
CW3.2. QA Welding Inspectors
AWS B5.l contains the same requirements for experience, education, training,
and body of knowledge as the AWS QCl-Standard for AWS Certification of
Welding Inspectors. The primary difference is in the examination provisions.
Under AWS B5.1, the employer of other appropriate entity may test the candi-
date, whereas under AWS QC1, the testing must be conducted by AWS.
CW3.3. Nondestructive Testing Technicians
Ultrasonic technicians are typically certified by the employer in accordance with
ASNT guidelines (SNT-TC-la). ASNT CP-189 contains similar provisions, but
is written as a standard rather than a guideline.
Requirements for Level II certification may vary significantIy between inspec-
tion and testing agencies. ASNT Level ID technicians are not required to perform
a hands-on practical test as a part of their ASNT examination, but typically have
the skills to perform testing on a project. Those technicians classified as Level
III, without ASNT examination, typically serve more training and supervisory
roles and may not maintain the skills to perform project testing.
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN !NS'l'lTUíE OF STEEL CONSTRucnON, !Ne.
Comm.Cw.] PART 1 - WELDING PROVIS 6.1-253
Research and SAC studies have shown a .de variation of ultrasonic testing
(UT) personnel skills for flaw detection using current AWS D 1.1, Section 6, Part
F procedures. Although not required by the rovisions, a practical examination
to determine UT technician abilities; using m ckups of joints similar to project
conditions is suggested. It is also suggested that third party organizations be
used to conduct these examinations of UT te hnicians because they would pro-
vide objective, comparable, and consistent te ting with the potential to use the
mockup samples for many examinees. Joint ockups with representative flaws
used for such examinations are expensive and difficult to fabricate.
CW4. NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING ROCEDURES
In order to improve the reliability of ultrasoni testing (UT), written procedures
specific to the type or types of joints to be teste must be developed and tested on
weld samples using standard reflectors. These procedures contain more specific
information than the more generic provisions fAWS D 1.1 Section 6, Part F.
ASTM E709 provides specific provisions reg ·ng the techniques of performing
magnetic particle testing (MT) and the evaluati n techniques of welds using MT.
CW5. ADDITIONAL WELDING PROVI
CW5.1. Intermixed Filler Metals
When intermixing weld deposits made usin self-shield flux-cored welding
(FCAW-S) electrodes with weld deposits mad using other welding processes,
the weld where the intermix has occurred y exhibit degradation of notch
toughness in the interrhixed deposit. Testing s done to ensure the minimum
notch toughness requirements of these provi ·ons are met in this i'ntermixed
region. Testing of interinixed weld metal is o y required when the FCAW-S
process is used in compination with. another elding process, which includes
FCAW-G. It is not required when welding one FCAW-S electrode over another
FCAW-S electrode. It is not required when wel .ng processes other than FCAW-
S are used, regardless of combination.
A variety of intermix tests were performed befo e the issuance of the Provisions,
including tests performed in accordance with MA 353, research performed in
conjunction with various SAC invesiigations, d other independent research.
Even though sorne of the details of these other t sts are somewhat different than
those of FEMA 353, results from altemative te s may be accepted by the engi-
neer. The engineer should evaluate the relative imilarity of the altemative tests
to those described in FEMA 353. The contracto should provide sufficient back-
ground documentation to the engineeJ:" for this valuation. It is anticipated that
AWS or another organization will adopt specifi standards for perfonlling tests
on intermixed filler metals similar to those tests f FEMA 353, and these will be
suitable for the purposes of the Provisions.
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2 5, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEa CONSTRUcn N, !Nc.
6.1-254 PART 1 - WELDING PROVISIONS [Cornm.Cw. Comm. CW.] PART I - WELDING nn',\TJ'''Tt"",,,,,,
6.1-255

CW5.2. Filler Metal Diffusible Hydrogen . . . The 550 °P (300 oC) mhx.imum temperature is conservative value selected based
All welding electrodes are expected to meet the dlffus~ble hydrogen reqmre- upon the type of steels used in the SLRS. interpass temperattires may be
ments for H16 (AWS A4.3). This requirement also applIes to each ~AW elec- acceptable, and are permitted if the higher is established by testing.
trodelflux combination to be used on the project. The Provisions reqmre that. the
filler metals used not exceed a hydrogen content of 16 ml/IOO g of deposlted CW5.5. Weld Tabs
weld metal.The manufacturer's standard test for conforman ce with the H16Ii:n- Welds are sometimes specified for fue full of a connection. Weld tabs are
it is adequate, provided the manufacturer's certificate of conformance contams used to permit the starts and stops of the passes to be placed ~utside the
the test results. weld region itself, allowing for removal of the and stop conditions and their
associated discontinuities. Because the end the weld, afier tab removal, is an
The applicable filler metal specifications for P~AW, ~d ?MAW when p~r­
outside surface that needs to be notch-free, removal methods and sub se-
formed with composite electrodes, do not reqmre testmg m accordance Wlth querit finishing is necessary.
AWS A4.3 to determine diffusible hydrogen content. This testing is beyond that
required by the filler metal specifications for these filler metals. At continuity plates, the end of the continuity to column flange weld near
the column flange tip perririts the use of a full tab, and removal is generally
Rather than test for diffusible hydrogen, SMAW electrodes with 10w hydrogen
efficient if properly detailed. At the bpposite of the continuity plate to col-
coatings are required by the applicable filler metal s~ecifi~ations .to have the umn flange weld, near the colümn radius,
coating moisture content measured as part of the classlfi~atlOn testmg. ~he re- tabs are not generally desirahle
and may not be practicable beeause of clip and k-area conceros. Weld tabs
sults are expressed as a percent moisture content, on a weIght (mas~) basIs: Sat- at this location, if used, ,should not be rernmredl
isfactory conformance with these moisture content requirements IS a smtable the potential of causing more harro than good.
substitute for diffusible hydrogen testing, and such electrodes should be deemed
to comply with the H16 requirement. CW5.6. Bottom Flange Welding Seque
Staggering the weld starts and stops on sides of the beam web, and
Solid electrodes for GMAW routinely deposit weld metal well within the limits
completion of each weld layer prior to starting next layer, avoids the problem
of H16, and therefore testing is waived. GMAW with composite (metal-cored)
electrodes require testing. of incomplete fusion iand trapped slag the beam web against the
column face, provided proper weld cleaning performed after each weld pass
CW5.3. Gas-Shielded Welding Processes is deposited.
When gas-shielded processes are used, weld metal ductility and CVN to~gh~ess
may degrade from moderate air movement and the subsequent loss of shleldmg. CW6. ADDITIONAL WELDING PROVI
Even before porosity is noted in visual inspection, notch toughness has been DEMAND CRITICAL WELDS ON
shown to decrease in gas-shielded welds. Self-shielded processes (SMAW, SAW,
PCAW-S) are considerably more tolerant of air movement.
CW6.1. Welding Processes
The SMAW and PCAW processes have been sjl(:ce:~stiIlly used for connection
AWS Dl.l has a maximum wind speed limit of 5 mph (8 kph). The more con- qualification testing in the SAC project and other connection qualifi-
servative value of 3 mph (5 kph) has been imposed to ensure adequate CVN cation tests. In Japan, GMAW has also been The SAW process; although
toughness in welds that are part of the SLRS. not specifically used in seismic mom.ent testing, has been included
Wind speed is to be estimated in the irnmediate vicinity of the ~eld, ,:here the as an acceptable process for demand critical because the heat input levels
shielding gas may be affected. Precise monitoring of wind speed IS not mtended. may be similar to those of the other' three and because appropriate
Three mile per hour winds (5 kph) will cause modest drifting of smoke or weld- mechanical properties can be achieved. These welding processes are also
ing fume. Higher wind speeds can be felt on the face and as well as cause modest considered prequalified by AWS D 1.1.
rippling of water surfaces. Por processes such as ESW and EGW, the heat level is considerably high-
CW5.4. Maximum Interpass Temperatures er than that of the other four processes, and has not been general testing
Very high interpass temperatures cause very slow weld c~oling rates .that ad- proving the acceptability of these processes for critical welds. However,
versely affect weld and heat-affected zone (HAZ) mecharucal propertIes, par- these processes may have had limited COImeCtI(~ qualification tests performed
ticularly notch toughness and strength, and therefore may need to b~ limited for certain applications; and their use !in such may be approved by
the engineer.
to ensure adequate performance. In contrast, minimum preheat and mterpass
temperatures are based on avoidance of cracking.

Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1
Seismic Provision.s for StrUctural Steel Buildings, March 9, mc!. Supplement No. i
AMERICAN mSTITlITE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, INC.
AMERICAN msTITUTE OF STEEL CO'lisnlUCI1o/li, INC.
6.1-256 PART 1 - WELDING PROVISIONS [Comm.Cw.
6.1-257

CW6.2. Filler Metal Packaging APPENDIX

FCAW electrodes may contain a seam along the electrode length as a part of the
manufacturing proeess. The seam may allow the flux eore to absorb moisture
when exposed to humid conditions during storage. FCAW electrode packaging WELD METAUWELD!ING
ranges from simple cardboard boxes and plastic bags, which provide little SPECIFICATION NOTCH UGHNESS
protection from moisture, to hermetically sealed foil bags that are moisture
VERIFICATION T ST
resistant.
Cornmonly, SMAW low-hydrogen electrodes packaging is hermetically sealed
metal boxes that prevent moisture penetration. If the container has been damaged
or tom, the electro des must be baked dry prior to use. CX1. SCOPE
Sorne electrode lubricants may increase the level of diffusible hydrogen during Appendix X applies only for filler metals to used for demand crÚical welds.
welding, increasing the risk of hydrogen-assisted cracking. Lubricants not asso- Piller metals used to make other welds by this code are not required to
ciated with the original electrode manufacturer's product are not permitted. be tested in accordance with this Appendix.

CW6.3. Exposure Limitations on FCAW Electrodes All component tests conducted in the SAC .ect were conducted at room
FCAW electrodes may contain a seam along the electrode length as a part of the temperature, approximately 70 °P (21°C), which it was determined that an
manufacturing process. The seam may allow the flux core to absorb moisture adequate Charpy V-Notch (CVN) toughness 40 ft-lbs (54 J). Thelowest an-
when exposed to humid conditions during use. The rate of moisture absorption ticipated service temperature (LAST) of buildings is 50 0p (10 oC). Con-
is dependent on many factors, including the manufacturing process of the PCAW sidering the difference in loading rates seismic motions and CVN test-
wire and the nature of the flux contained within the wire, and therefore these ing, and the temperature increase of weldnlents under seismic loads, the CVN
provisions are specific to the filler metal manufacturer's brand and type of testing temperature of 70 0p (21°C) is adequate for use at 50 0p (lO
oC) LAST. '
electrode.
In the absence of specific manufacturer's recornmendations, 72 hours is a con- During the SAC study [see PEMA 355B, 2.3.3.5 (FEMA, 2000d)], it was
servative upper limit for electrode exposure. This limit is based upon tests on a deemed important to verify the filler metal welding procedure specification
variety ofPCAW wires from various manufacturers. (WPS) to ensure that this notch toughness provided. Appendix X testing
requirements for 40 ft-lb (54 J) at 70 0p (21 are intended to verify that at
When welding is suspended, one may store the electrode in protective packag- most cornmon service temperatures, ¡the milmpum notch toughness is provided
ing, where no additional accumulation of moisture is expected to occur. The type to ensure satisfactory performance in seismic
of protective packaging needed depends upon the conditions that the electrodes
will be exposed too The exposure time resumes when the filler metal is removed FEMA (FEMA, 2000b) first published this prpcedure for qualifying filler met-
from the protective packaging and put back onto the welding machine. als to meet the recornmended CVN toughness of 40 ft-lb (54 J) at
70 0p (21°C). The test procedure and test vary from existing AWS
CW6.4. Tack Welds requirements used in existing AWS filler classification test' standards.
By placing the tack welds within the joint, the potential for surface notches and In the time since publication of the FEMA filler metal manufactur-
hard heat-affected zones is minimized. The HAZ of the tack weld will be tem- ers have been conducting these tests and been certifying those materials
pered by subsequent passes when placed within the joint. that meet this requirement. It is anijcipated AWS or another accredited
Tack welds for beam flange to column welds are to be made in the weld groove. organization will adopt this AppencÜx or a test program within their
Steel backing may be tack welded to the column under the beam flange, where standards, and therefore this Appendix is on an interim basis pending
such adoption.
a reinforcing fillet weld will be placed; Tack welds between steel backing and
the underside of beam flanges are prohibited, as they create a notch effect in the Piller metal classificatio~ testing is governed by AWS A5 specifications that re-
beam flange. Any tack welds holding weld tabs, if made on the outside of the quire specific tests on weld metal that has been de(>osi·lted using prescribed electrode
joint, are required to be removed. diameters with prescribed welding cohditions. production welding may be
performed with electrodes of different and using considerably different
welding variables (amperage, voltage, travel electrode extension, position,
pIate thickness, joint geometry, preheat and . temperatures, shielding gas

Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, ine!. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9,
AMERICAN lNSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcrrON, lNc. AMERICAN lNsTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~STR:ucrkoN.

,-------------------------------------------------
6.1-258 PART 1 - WELD METALfWELDING PROCEDURE Cornm.CX.] Cornm.CX.] PART 1 - WELD METAL/WELDING
6.1-259
, I
type and fiow rate, for example). Such variablesmay considerably affect the ac~al
Production WPS for demand critical welds e required to be based on the heat
tensile and CVN properties achieved in production welds. Although the reqUlre-
inputs used for testing the filler metal to be ed in production. Production WPS
ment of Section 7.3a, that all filler metals be classified under AWS A5 tests for a
may utilize any combination of welding vari bIes that result in a computed heat
minimum of 20 ft-Ibf at O °P (27 J at minus 17 oC), ensures that sorne minimum
input that is not greater than the high heat i put test limit, or less than the low
level of notch toughness will be provided, there is no guarantee that 40 ft-lbf (54 J)
heat input test limit. It is not necessary for th Contractor to use the exact param-
at 70 0p (21°C) CvN toughness will be achieved under either the A5 prescribed
eters listed in this test (volts, amps, lfavel spe d), but the parameters chosen must
conditions or the wide variety of possible welding procedures and cooling rates.
result in a calculated heat input bet~een the .gh and low heat inputs tested. The
Por demand critical welds, additional testing is used to verify that the production
use ofheat input liinits outside the l~mits of able I-X-l are acceptable provided
we1d will achieve the required higher level of notch toughness under conditions
the higher limits have heen successfully teste. It is expected that heat input lev-
similar to those to be encountered in production.
els between these limits will result ih accept le mechanical properties.

CX2. TEST CONDITIONS CX3. TEST SPECIMENS

Heat input affects wdd metal and heat-affected zone (HAZ) cooling rates. High-
er levels of heat input reduce cooling rates. Heat input also affects weld bead
size, with hlgher levels of heat input creating larger we1d beads. Both cooling
rates and bead size may affect mechanical properties, and CVN toughness may
be significantly changed with variations in heat input.
Testing of welds is required using high heat input levels and low heat input levels.
By testing using brackéted heat inputs, requiring that production welding proce-
dures fall within these tested heat inputs, and by testing the actual electrode diam-
eter and production lot to be used in production, there is greater confidence that
the as-deposited weld metal will provide the required level of CVN toughness.
Heat input is calculated by the foHowing equation:
HI = 0.60 El /S (CX2-l)
where
HI heat input
E arc vbltage
1 current
S travelspeed
When travel speed is measured in inches per minute (mm per minute), heat input
is calculated in units of kilojoules per inch (kilojoules per mm). Sorne variation
in heat input during 'the welding of the test plate is to be expected because of
minor deviations from the three variables that determine heat input.
The heat input limits listed in Table I-X-l are suggestions and deviation from
these values is permitted. These heat input values have been suggested to en-
courage sorne commonality betweeri the limits selected by various filler metal
manufacturers, and others that might do such testing. Sorne filler metal s may not
be capable of providing me required mechanical properties at the suggested heat
input levels, therefore it is acceptable to use a tighter range of heat input values,
provided the proctuction WPS computed heat input values used are within this
tighter ranger. If a broader range is desirable or achievable, the use of the larger
range for testing is permitted, provided acceptable results are obtained in testing
in accordance with this Appendix.
The test assembly may be restrained, or the p ates preset in advance of welding,
in order to precIude rejection of the test asse bly due to excessive warpage.
In addition to heat input, preheat and interpa s temperatures may affect the me-
chanical properties of deposited weld metal. esting according to this Appendix
requires that preheat and interpass tempera es be within the prescribed ranges
shown in Table I-X-l.
During testing, the test plate is heated to the m nimum preheat temperature listed,
and then welding begins. Welding is to conti ue without substantial, deliberate
interruption until the minimum interpass tem erature has been obtained. Por the
high heat input test, it may take several weld p sses before the interpass tempera-
ture is achieved. Once this point has been re ched, aH subsequent weId passes
are to be made within the permitted interpass emperature range. Should the test
plate temperature fall below the minimum int rpass temperature for imy reason,
the test plate is heated to the minimum inte ass temperature before welding
is resumed. If the required interpass tempera re is not achieved pri'or to inter-
ruption of the welding operations, welding is ot to resume until the: prescribed
interpass temperature is provided. Should th test plate exceed the, prescribed
maximum interpass temperature, welding sh 1 be discontinued until the test
plate cools below the stated maximum interpa s temperature. This is likely to be
required for the low heat input test.
Production preheat and interpass temperature control s are to be in accordance
with the production WPS, typically written t the requirements of AWS Dl.l,
and willlikely not be the same as the tempera e range limits ofTable I-X-l.
The Appendix does not specify the position i which welding of the test plates
is to be performed. Typically, test pIate weldin will be done in the fiat position.
Por filler metals designed for verticaJ.-up weld ng, fiat position welding may be
difficult. This Appendix does not reqllire quali cation testing of filler metals for
the position in which pioduction wel~ing will e performed.

Seismic Provisions Jor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplernent No. 1
Seismic Provisions Jor Structural Steel Building~, Mareh 9, 005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN msTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, mc.
AMERICAN msTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRU ON, INC.
 PART 1 - WELD METAL/WELDING PROCEDURE [Cornm.CX.
6.1-261

ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
Tensile and e10ngation resu1ts obtained from welds made with heat input va!ues PART 11. COMPOSITE STRUC URAL STEEL AND
between the high and low limits wi111ikely be bracketed by the valu.es obtal~ed REINFORCED CONCRET BUILDINGS
in the high and low heat input tests. The tensile strength an~ ~longatlOn reqUl~e­
ments for we1d metal tensile test specimens stated are al1 mmlmum values, Wlth
no maximum values specified. AH tensile testing is done at room temperature,
regardless of LAST.
C1. SCOPE
Notch toughness tends to deteriorate at both very highand very low heat in~ut
These Provisions forthe seismic design of omposite Structural steel and rein-
levels Values obtained from welds made with heat input values between the hlgh
forced concrete building s are based upon th 1994 NEHRP Provisions (FEMA,
and l~w limits willlikely be greater than the values obtained at the e~tremes. The
1994) and subsequen\ modifications made i the 1997, 2000, and 2003 NEHRP
. .
CVN toughness values stated are al1 IDlrumum values,.with no maXImum values
Provisions (FEMA, 2003) and in ASCE 7 ( SCE, 2002). Since coinposite sys-
s ecified. If adequate CVN values are achieved by testmg at temp~r~tures below
~e actual test temperatures required for the demand critical weld, lt IS not neces-
tems are assemblies of steel and concrete co ponents, Part 1 of these Provisions,
the 2005 AISC Specification for Structural eel Buildings (AISC, 2005), here-
sary to perfonn the test at the higher test temperature warranted for that weld.
after referred to as the Specification and ACI 318 (ACI, 2002b), form an impor-
This Appendix is not applicable to filler metal s with a classificati?~ strength tant basis for Part n. Notable chang~s in the c mposite column design provisions
greater than E80 (E550), as the use of such filler metal s in demand cntlcal welds in Chapter 1 of the Specification will signifi antIy reduce sorne of the conflicts
is not addressed by the Provisions. between the Specification and ACI 318, and us encourage the use of composite
columns in all lateral load resistingsystems.

The most important changes in this version f Part n are the inelusion of the
new allowable strength design (ASD) format om the Specification and the ad-
dition and moving of several sections to m e Parts 1 and n more consistent.
The intent to render the Part 1 and n provisi s more uniform also led to sorne
significant technical changes, ineluding the i troduction of the concept of pro-
tected zones for the hlnging regions in sorne structural systems. In addition, a
number of important changes for the system behavior factors (R, C and no)
d
have been introduced in ASCE 7 for composit systems. The latter was an effort
to render the behavior factors more consiste t between the different structural
materials. Finally, because Sections12 and 13 have been interchanged to follow
Part 1, numerous editorial changes have been made where the previous version
referred to these sections. However, 'the techni al changes in Sections 12 and 13
are minimal.

The available research demonstrates that prop rly detailed composite members
and connections can perform reliably when ubjected to seismic ground mo-
tions. The most recent research in this area is e product of a U.S.-'1apan joint
project, whose results arrived too late for inel sion in the provisions (El-Tawil
and Bracci, 2004; Goel, 2004); however, so of that research is cited in this
Cornmentary. In particular, significant advanc s have taken place in the ability
to analyze such structures (Spacone and El-Ta il, 2004); such advances are ex-
pected to be incorporated into cornmercial so are soon.

There is at present limited experience in the A with composite building sys-

tems subjected to extreme seismic 'loads an many of the recornmendations
herein are necessarily of a conservat;ive andlor qualitative nature. Extensive de-
sign and performance experience with this ty e of buildings in Japan elearly
indicates that composite systems, due to their inherent rigidity and toughness,

Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN lNSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSlRUCI'ION, lNc. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSlRU
6.1-262 PART Il- SCOPE [Cornrn. Cl.
can equal or exceed the performance of reinforced concrete ~nly. oro structural
steel on1y buildings (Deierlein and Noguchi, 2004; Yam~ouchl, Nl~hlyama ~nd
Kobayashi, 1998). Composite systems have been extens.lveIy. used m tall bmld-
ings throughout the world, and independent design speclficatlOns have been de-
veloped for nonseismic loading cases [Eurocode 4 (ECS, 1994)].
Careful attention to all aspects of the design is necessary in the design of com-
posite systems, particularly with respect to ~e general.buiIdin~ layo~t and de-
tailing of members and connections. Composlte connectron detall s are lllustrated
throughout this Commentary to convey the basic character of the ~orce transfer
in composite systems. However, these details sho~ld not neces~anI~ be trea~ed
as design standards and the cited references provide m?re sp~clfic mfo~atlOn
on the design of composite connections. For a general dlscusSlOn of ~ese Issues
and sorne specific design examples, refer to Viest, Colaco,- Furlong, Gnffis, Leon
and Wyllie (1997).
The design and construction of composite elements and syst~~s continues. to
evolve in practice. Except where explicitly stated, thes~ Provl~lOns are not 1~­
.tended to limit the application of new systems for WhlCh testmg and analYS1S
demonstrates that the structure has adequate strength, ductility, and toughness.
It is generally anticipated that the overall behavior of the composite .systems
herein will be similar to that for counterpart structural steel systems o~ remforced
concrete systems and that inelastic deformations will occur in conventlOnal ways,
such as flexural yieIding of beams in fully restrained (FR) moment ~rames .or
axial yielding andlor buck1ing of braces in braced fram~s. ~owev~r, dlfferentIal
stiffness between steel and concrete elements is more slgmficant m the calcula-
tion of internal forces and deformations of composite systems than for s~ctur~l
steel only or reinforced concrete only systems. For exampIe, defo~atlOns m
composite elements can vary considerably due to the effects of cracking.
cs.
When systems have both ductile and nonductile elements, the relative ~tiffne~s
of each should be properly modeled; the ductile elements ~an deform .melastl-
cally whiIe the nonductile elements remain nominalIy elastlc. When usmg e1as-
tic analysis, member stiffness should be reduced to account for ~e degre~ ~f
cracking at the onset of significant yielding in the structure. Addlt~onalIy, lt IS
necessary to account for material overstrength that may alter relatlve strength
and stiffness.
C2. REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS, CODES,
ANO STANDARDS
The majority of the specifications needed for Part 11 have already bee.n refe~-
· Part 1 and are thus inc1uded by reference. Those listed here Wlth
enced m . . thelr
h'
appropriate revision date are appIicable to Part 11 onIy. A notable Shlft m t IS
section is that the reference to ACI 318 has now been moved to Part I.
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, ¡nel. Supplernent No. 1
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, INc.
Cornrn.CS.]
PART TI - MATERlALS
6.1-263
C3.
GENERAL SEISMIC DESIGN EQUIREMENTS
This section is consistent with Part 1 Se tion 3. See Part 1 Cornmentary
Section C3.
C4. LOADS, LOAD COMBINATION ,ANO
NOMINAL STRENGTHS:
~he. requirements for loads and load combin tions for composite structures are
slffillar to those described in Part 1 ~ection 4, nd this section has been rewritten
to ~arallel that sec~on. Specific seismic desig ,loading criteria, and usage limi-
tatlOns for composlte structures are specified i the 2002 SEIIASCE 7 provisions
(AS CE, 2002).
The calculation of seismic loads for comp site systems per the 2002 SEII
AS CE 7 provisions is the same as is desc . ed for steel Structures in Part 1
Cornmentary Section C4. The seismic respons modification factors R and C for
sorne structural systems have been changed i SEIIASCE 7 to make' them more
d
consistent with similar systems in structural eel on1y and reinforced concrete
only systems. This is based on the fact that, hen carefully designed and de-
tailed according to these Provisions, the over inelastic response for composite
systerns should be similar to comparable steel and reinforced concrete systems.
Therefore, where specific loading requireme ts are not specified in the appli-
cable building code for composite systems, a propriate values for the seismic
response factors can be' inferred from specified values for steel andlo! reinforced
concrete systems. These are predicated upon eeting the design and detailing
requirements for the composite systems speci ed in these Provisions. As stated
in the User Note, for systems not included in e applicable building code, the
values should be taken from SEIIASCE 7.
MATERIALS
ThelimitationsinSection5.1 onstruct~ralsteelgr des used withPartIlrequirements
are the sarne as those given in Part 1, Sections 6 and 7. The limitations"in Section
5.2 on specified concr¿te compressive strengt in composite members are the
same as those given in the Specification Chapter and ACI 318 Chapter 21. While
these limitations are p3fticularly appropriate f¡ construction in seismic design
categories D and higher, they apply in any seis c design category when systems
are designed with the assumption that inelastic eformation will be required.
At this time, there is in~ufficient data to genera specification requirements for
the shear strength of stU?S subjected to inelastic cyclic loads, although it is cIear
that sorne strength and stiffness reduction occ s with cycling (McMullin and
Astaneh, 1994; Civjan and Singh, 2003). The egradation in behavior is par-
ticularly serious if the studs are subjeéted to co bined tension and shear (Saari,
Hajjar, Schultz and Shield, 2004), and a speci c reduction for combined load
cases is given in Section 16. For other composi e members that are part of the
SLRS, a reduction to 75 percent of the stud str ngth given in the Spécification
is suggested to allow for the effect of cyc1ic lo ds if the studs are expected to
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 20 5, ¡nel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL tONsTRucn , INc.
 PART TI - MATERIALS
6.1-264 [Cornm.C5.
yield. At this time, the ductility demands on shear studs in floor beams and dia-
phragms are not wel1 characterized, and thus only a suggestion is given in this
Cornmentary.
C6. COMPOSITE MEMBERS
C6.1. Scope
These Provisions address the seismic design requirements that should be applied
in addition to the basic design requirements for gravity and wind loading.
C6.2. Composite Floor and Roof Slabs
In composite construction, floor and roof slabs typically consist of either com-
posite or noncomposite metal deck slabs that are connected to the structural
frarning to provide an in-plane composite diaphragm that collects and distributes
seismic loads. Generally, composite action is distinguished from noncomposite
action on the basis of the out-of-plane shear and flexural behavior and design
assumptions.
Composite metal deck slabs are those for which the concrete fill and metal deck
work together to resist out-of-plane bending and out-of-plane shear. Flexural
strength design procedures and codes of practice for such slabs are well estab-
lished (ASCE, 1991a and 1991b; AISI, 2001; SDI, 2001a, 2001b).
Noncomposite metal deck slabs are one-way or two-way reinforced con-
crete slabs for which the metal deck acts as formwork during construction,
but is not relied upon for composite action. Noncomposite metal deck slabs,
particularly those used as roofs, can be formed with metal deck and overlaid
with insulating concrete fill that is not relied upon for out-of-plane strength
and stiffness. Whether or not the slab is designed for composite out-of-
plane action, the concrete fill inhibits buck1ing of the metal deck, increasing
the in-plane strength and stiffness of the diaphragm over that of the bare steel
deck.
The diaphragm should be designed to collect and distribute seismic loads to the
seismic load resisting system. In sorne cases, loads from other floors should also
be inc1uded, such as at a level where a change in the structural stiffness results in
redistribution. Recornmended diaphragm (in-plane) shear strength and stiffness
values for metal deck and composite diaphragms are available for design from
industry sources that are based upon tests and recornmended by the applicable
building code (SDI, 2004; SDI, 2001a, 2001b). In addition, research on compos-
ite diaphragms has been reported in the literature (Easterling and Porter, 1994).
As the thickness of concrete over the steel deck is increased, the shear strength
can approach that for a concrete slab ofthe same thickness. For example, in com-
posite floor deck diaphragms having cover depths between 2 in. (51 mm) and
6 in. (152 mm), measured shear stresses on the order of 3.5..Ji:
(where
and f: are in units of psi) have been reported. In such cases, the diaphiagm
strength of concrete metal deck slabs can be conservatively based on the
Seismic Provisions Jor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, 1Nc.
-----------------------------------~_._._._._ .. _----~--------------
Cornm. C6.]
6.1-265
p~nciples of reinforced concrete design (ACI 2002b) using the conCrete and
remforcement aboye the metal deck ribs and ig oring the beneficial effect of the
concrete in the flutes.
Shear forces are transferred through welds an or shear devices in the collector
and boundary elements. Fasteners between the iaphragm and the steel frarning
should be capable of transferring forces usin either welds or shear devices.
Where concrete fill is present, it is generally dvisable to use mechanical de-
vices such as headed shear stud connectors to tr sfer diaphragm forces' between
the slab an~ col~ector0>0~~dary elements, parti ularly in complex shaped dia-
p~rag~s ':l.th ~lscontmUltIes. However, in lo -rise buildings without abrupt
dlscontmUltIes m the shape of the diaphragms r in the seismic loadresisting
system, the standard metal deck attachment proc dures may be acceptable.
C6.3. Composite Beams
These provisions apply only to composite beams that are part of the seismic load
resisting system.
When the design of a composite beam satisfies Equation 6-1, the strain in the
steel at the ext~eme fiber .will be at least five time the tensile yield strain prior to
c~ncrete crushing at stram equal to 0.003. It is e pected that this ductility limit
wIll control the beam geometry only in,extreme eam/slab proportions.
While th.ese Provi~ions permit the design of com osite beams based solely upon
the reqUIrements l~ the Specijication, the effect of reversed cyc1ic loading on
the s~ength and stIffness .of shear studs should e considered. This is 'particu-
larly lmport~t. for C-SMI; where the design load are calculated assuming large
me~ber ductI.hty and toughness. In the absence f test data to support specific
reqUIrements m these Provisions, the folIowing s ecial measures should be con-
sidered .in C-SMF: (1) implementation' of an ins ectionand quality assurance
~lan to msure proper welding of shearstud con ectors to the beams (see Sec-
tIon~ 18 ~nd 19); and (2) use of additional shear stud connectors beyond those
reqUlred m the Specification immediately adjacen to regions of the beams where
plastic hinging is expected.
C6.4. Encased Composite Columns
T~e basic requirements and limitations for dete ·ning the design strength of
reznforced-concrete encaslfd composite i columns e the same as those in the
Specijication. Additional ~quirements for reinfor ing bar details of composite
columns that are not covered in the Specijication are inc1uded based on provi-
sions in ACI 318.
Comp?s~te columns can be an ideal solrttion for u e in seismic regions because
of thelr mherent structural redundancy (Viest an others, 1997; El-Tawil and
Deierlein, 1999).For example, if a composite col mn is designed such that the
..Ji: structural steel can carry most or all of the dead lo d acting alone, then an extra
degree of protection and safety is afforded, even i asevere earthquake where
excursions into the inelastic range can be expected to deteriorate concrete cover
Seismic ProvisionsJor Structural Steel Buildings, M~eh 9, 2005 inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, NC.
 6.1-266 PART TI - COMPOSITE MEMBERS [Cornm. C6. Comm.C6.]
PARTII-COMPOSITEME~MI~ER~S
6.1-267

and buckle reinforcing steel. However, as with any column of concrete and (5) The requirements for the steel 'core are les:setltiallv the same as those for
reinforcement, the designer should be aware of the constructability concerns with composite columns as specified'in the and ACI 318. In addi-
the placement of reinforcement and potential for congestiono This is particularly tion, earthquake da.mage to encased columns in Japan (Azizin-
true at beam-to-co!umn connections where potential interference between a steel ami ni and Ghosh, i 996) highIights the to consider the effects of abrupt
spandrel beam, a perpendicular floor beam, vertical bars, joint ties, and shear changes in stiffness and strengtli where composite colUIhns transi-
stud connectors can cause difficulty in reinforcing bar placement and a potential tion into reinforced concrete col~mns
for honeycombing of the concrete.
C6.4b. Intermediate Seismic System
Seismic detailing requirements for composite columns are specified in the fol-
The more stringent tie spacing requirements intermediate seismic systems
lowing three categories: ordinary, intermediate, and special. The required level folIow those for reinforced concrete tolumns .
of detailing is specified in these Provisions for seismic systems in Sections 8 reglOns of moderate seismicity
as specified in ACI 318 Chapter 21 (Section 1.8). These requirements are ap-
through 17. The ordinary detailing requirements of Section 6.4a are intended plied to aH composite columns for s"~tems peqrutl[ea . .
as basic requirements for all cases. Intermediate requirements are intended for J m selsmic design category
C to make the composite column details at equivalent to the minimum level
seismic systems permitted in seismic design category C, and special require-
of detailing for columns in intermediate frames of reinforced concrete
ments are intended for seismic systems permitted in seismic design categories (FEMA, 2000e; ICC, 2003).
D and aboye.
C6.4c. Special Seismic System Requir~rnAIr'tt~
C6.4a. Ordinary Seismic System Requirements The additional requirements for encased "OInpll)Sil:e
". columns used in special seis-
These requirements are intended to supplement the basic requirements of the míc systems are based upon comparable rec[UII~eItlents for structural steel and rein-
Specification for encased composite columns in all seismic design categories.
forced concrete columns in systems permitted seismic design categories D and
(1) Specific instructions are given for the determination of the nominal shear aboye (FEMA, 2003; ICC, 2003). For additional . of these requirements,
strength in concrete encased steel composite members including assignment see the Cornmentary for Part 1 in these and ACI 318 Chapter!21.
of sorne shear to the reinforced concrete encasement. Examples for deter-
The minimum tie area requirement in Equation 1 is based upon a similar provi-
mining the effective shear width, b w' of the reinforced concrete encasement
sion in ACI 318 Section 21.4.4, except that the uired tie area is reduced to take
are illustrated in Figure C-II-6.1. These provisions exc1ude any strength, Ve'
into account the steel coreo The tie area in Equation 6-1 and related
assigned to concrete alone (Furlong, 1997). tíe detailing provisions are waived if the steel f th
o· e composite m~mber can
(2) The provisions in this subsection require that shear connectors be provided alone resist the expected (arbitrary point in gravity load on the column
to transfer all caIculated axial forces between the structural steel and the because additional confinem.ent of the concrete i
not necessary if the steel core
concrete, neglecting the contribution of bond and friction. Friction between can inhibit colIapse afier an extreme. seismic The load combination of
the structural steel and concrete is assumed to transfer the longitudinal shear 1.0D + 0.5L is based upon a similar cOllllbirlatiion/
proposed as loading criteria for
stresses required to develop the plastic bending strength of the cross sec- structural safety under fue conditions (bl.1m!;!w()hcl and Corotis, 1991).
tion. However, ~imum shear studs snould be provided according to the
maximum spacing limit of 16 in. (406 mm). Further information regarding
the design of shear connectors for encased members is available (Furlong,
1997; Griffis, 1992a, 1992b).
(3) The tie requirements in this section are essentially the same as those for
composite columns in ACI 318 Chapter 10.
(4) The requirements for longitudinal bars are essentially the same as those
that apply to composite columns for low- and nonseismic design as speci-
fied in ACI 318. The distinction between load-carrying and restraining bars
is made to allow for longitudinal bars (restraining bars) that are provided
solely for erection purposes and to improve confinement of the concrete.
Due to interference with steel beams frarning into the encased members, the
restraining bars are often discontinuous at floor levels and, therefore, are not Fig. C-II-6.1. Effective widths lor sh~ar strength cdlculation
encased composite columns.
inc1uded in determining the column strength.

Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9,
AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc.
AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~sTR.ucrIO*,

_ _-----------------------------_.
........ __ .....__.._.~--------
6.1-268 PART TI - COMPOSlTE MEMBERS [Cornm.C6. Cornm. C7.] PART II - COMPOSITE ~n''''''''rT">''''''''¡''r''T~
I 6.1-269

The requirements for composite columns in C-SMF are based upon similar re- up to 30 in. (762 mm). AIternatively, the shear for filled tubes ban be de-
quirements for steel and reinforced concrete columns in SMF (FEMA, 2003; termined in a manner that is similar to that for concrete columns with
ICC, 2003). For additional commentaries, see Part I in these Provisions and SEII the steel tube consider~d as shear and its shear yielding strength
ASCE7. neglected. However, glven the upper limit on shear strength as a functio f
h. . no
The strong-column/weak.-beam (SC/WB) concept foHows that used for steel and concrete crus mg m ACI 318, this approach only be advantageous for
reinforced concrete columns in SMF. Where the formation of a plastic hinge at columns with low ratios of structural steel to areas (Furlong, 1997).
the column base is likely or unavoidable, such as with a fixed base, the detail- The more stringent slenderness critena for the thickness in square or rect-
ing should provide for adequate plastic rotational ductility. For seismic design angular HSS is based upo, n comparable "~cluiI·eI!rlents f rom P
, H artI ·m th'ese Provi-
category E, special details, such as steel jacketing of the column base, should be sions for unfilled HSS used in SMF. the provisions in the Specifica-
considered to avoid spalling and crushing of the concrete. tion and Part I in these Provisions, the ratio for unfilled HSS in
Closed hoops are required to ensure that the concrete confinement and nominal SMF is about 80 percent of those for ÓMF same ratio of 0.8 was applied
shear strength are maintained under large inelastic deformations. The hoop de- to the standard (nonseisl~lÍc) bit ratio for fill~d S in the Specification. The re-
tailing requirements are equivalent to those for reinforced concrete columns in duced slenderness criterion was imposed as a measure until further
SMF. The transverse reinforcement provisions are considered to be conservative research data becomes available on the cyc1ic of filled square and rect-
since composite columns generally will perform better than comparable rein- angular tubes. More stringent Dlt ratio limits circular pipes are not applied as
forced concrete columns with similar confinement. However, further research is data are available to show the standard Dlt is sufficient for seismic design
(Boyd, Cofer and McLean, 1995; Schneider, 1 ).
required to determine to what degree the transverse reinforcement requirements
can be reduced for composite columns. It should be recognized that the c10sed
hoop and cross-tie requirements for C-SMF may require special details such as
C7. COMPOSITE CONNECTIONS
those suggested in Figure C-ll-6.2 to facilitate the erection of the reinforcement C7.1 Scope
around the steel coreo Ties are required to be anchored into the confined core of The use of composite connections often slrnpJljifiles sorne of the special chal-
the column to provide effective confinement. lenges associated with traditional steel and construction. For example,
Filled Composite Columns cornpared to structural steel, cornposite often avoid or minimize
C6.5.
The basic requirements and limitations for detailing and determining the de- the use of field welding, and cornpared to relntp1rce:d
instances where anchorage and development of
sign strength of fiHed composite columns are the same as those in Specification
a problem.
Chapter 1.
The shear strength of the filled member is conservatively limited to the nominal Given the rnany alternative configurations of co~nplosílte structures and connec-
shear yield strength of the hoHow structural section (HSS) because the actual tions, there are few standard details for in composite construction
shear strength contribution of the concrete fill has not yet been determined in (Griffis, 1992b; Goel, 1992; Goel, 1993). tests are available for several
testing. This approach is recommended until tests are conducted (Furlong, 1997; connection details that are suitable fOl- seismic References are given in
ECS, 1994). Even with this conservative approach, shear strength rarely governs this Section of the Commentary and Sections C8 to C17~ In rnost
the design of typical filled composite columns with cross-sectional dimensions cornposite structures built to date, engineers designed connectidns using
basic rnechanics, equilibriurn, existing standards steel and concrete Construc-
tion, test data, and good judgrnent. The in this Section are intended
r:;:==::;¡¡:::==::;;:I- Load Carrying Bar to help standardize and irnprove design practice establishing basic b~havioral
assurnptions for developing design rnodels that equilibrium of internal
forces in the connection for seisrnic designo
ShearStuds
C7.2 General Requirements
Restralning Bar The requirernents for deformation capacity to both connections designed
for gravity load only and connections that are of the seismic load 'resisting
system. The ductility req~irernent for gravity only connections is intended
to avoid failure in gravity connections that rnay rotational restrain~ but lirn-
Fig. C-Il-6.2. Example of a closed hoop detailfor an encased composite column. ited rotation capacity. For example, shown in C-I1-7.1 is a co~ection

Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, March 9,
AMERICAN INSlTTIlTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnoN, INc. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTIO*.
6.1-270 PART TI - COMPOSlTE CONNECTlONS [Cornm. C7. Comm. C7.] PART TI -'COMPOSlTE \",V!'Il'IJ.J\...11\",'1'l0 6.1-271

between a reinforced concrete wall and steel beam that is designed to resist C7.3. Nominal Strength of Connectio
gravity loads and is not considered to be part of the seismic load resisting system.
In general, forces between structural steel and will be transf~rred by a
However, this connection is required to be designed to maintain its vertical shear
combination of bond, adhesion, friction and bearing. Transfers by bond
strength under rotations andlor moments that are imposed by inelastic seismic
and adhesion are not permitted for nominal calculation purposes be-
deformations of the structure.
cause: (1) these mechanisms are not effective inltransfeming load undet inelastic
In calculating the required strength of connections based on the nominal strength load reversals; and (2) the effectiveness of the is highly variabl~ depend-
of the connected members, allowance should be made for aH components of the ing on the surface cop.ditions of the steel and and consolidadon of the
members that may increase the nominal strength aboye that usually calculated concrete.
in designo For example, this may occur in beams where the negative moment
Transfer by friction shall be calculated using shear friction provisiolls in ACI
strength provided by slab reinforcement is often neglected in design but will
318 where the friction is provided by' the clamlbing action of steel tieS or studs
increase the moments applied through the beam-to-column connection. Another
or from compressive stresses under applied Since the provisions for shear
example is in filled tubular braces where the increased tensile and compressive
friction in ACI 318 are based largely on tests, the values are reduced
strength of the brace due to concrete should be considered in determining the
by 25 percent where large inelastic stress are expected. This reduction
required connection strength. Because the evaluation of such conditions is case
is considered to be a conservative requirement does not appear in ACI 318
specific, these provisions do not specify any allowances to account for over-
but is applied herein due to the relativelack of with certain configura-
strength. However, as specified in Part 1, Section 6.2, calculations for the re- tions of composite structures.
quired strength of connections should, as a minimum, be made using the expect-
ed yield strength of the connected steel member. Where connections resist forces In many composite connections, steel co:mr;loneÍ11ts are encased by concrete that
imposed by yielding of steel in reinforced concrete members, ACI 318, Section will inhibit or fully prevent local buckling. seismic deign where inelastic
21.5 implies an expected yield strength equal to 1.25Fy for reinforcing bars. load reversals are likely, concrete encasement 1 be effective only if it is prop-
erly confined. One method of confinement is reinforcing bars that are fully
anchored into the confined core of the (using requirements for hoops
in ACI 318, Chapter 21 ).' Adequate also may occur without special
reinforcement where the concrete cover is thick. The effectiveness of the
latter type of confinement should be by tests.
For fully encased connections between steel composite) beams and rein-
forced concrete (or composite) columhs such shown in Figure C-Il-7.2, the
panel zone nominal shear strength can' be as the sum of contributions
from the reinforced conGrete and steel shear (see Figure C-Il-7.3). This
superpo~ition ~f strengths for ca1culating the zone nominal shear strength
is used in detailed design guidelines (Deierlein, and Yura, 1989; ASCE,
1994; Parra-Montesinos 'and Wight, 2001) for connections that are
supported by test dat~ (Sheikh, DeierMin, Yura 1989; Kannoand Dei-
erlein, 1997; Nishiyama, Hasegawa ahd ., 1990; Parra-Montesinos
and Wight, 2001). Further information on the
is included in Commentary Part Il, Section C9.
Reinforcing bars in and around the joint region the dual functions ofresist-
ing ca1culated internal tension forces and nr{~,,;,rl;In,CT confinement to the concrete.
Internal tension forces can be ca1culated using engineering models
8teel Roor Beam that satisfy equilibrium (for example, classical theory, the truss
analogy, strut and tie models). Tie for confinement usually are
based on empirical models based on test data past performance of structures
(ACI, 2002a; Kitayama, Otani and Aoyama, 1
Fig. C-JI-J.]. Steel beam-to-RC wall gravity load shear connection.

Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, March 9,
AMERICAN lNSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, lNc. AMERICAN rnsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTIQN,
6.1-272 PART II - COMPOSlTE CONNECTIONS [Comm. C7.
Comm. C7.]
PART II - COMPOSlTE CONNE TIONS
6.1-273
(1) In connections such as those in C-PRMF, the force transfer between the con-
crete slab and the steel column requires careful detailing. For C-PRMF con-
nections (see Figure C-II-7.4), the strength of the concrete bearing against
the column flange should be checked (Green, Leon and Rassati, 2004). Only
the solid portion of the slab (area aboye the ribs) should be counted, and
the nominal bearing strength should be limited to 1.2f'c (Ammerman and
Leon, 1990). In addition, because the force transfer implies the formation
of a large compressive strut between the slab bars and the column flange,

1 •
adequate transverse steel reinforcement should be provided in the slab to
form the tension tie. From equilibrium calculations, this amount should be
the same as that provided as longitudinal reinforcement and should extend
at least 12 in. (305 mm) beyond either side ofthe effective slab width.
(2) Due to the limited size of joints and the congestion of reinforcement, it often
is difficult to provide the reinforcing bar development lengths specified in
ACI 318 for transverse column reinforcement in joints. Therefore, it is im-
portant to take into account the special requirements and recommendations
for tie requirements as specified for reinforced concrete connections in ACI
318, Section 21.5 and in ACI (2002a), Kitayama and others (1987), Sheikh

I
and Uzumeri (1980), Park, Priestley and Gill (1982), and Saatcioglu (1991).
Test data (Sheikh and others, 1989; Kanno and Deierlein, 1997; Nishiyama
and others, 1990) on composite beam-to-column connections similar to the
one shown in Figure C-II-7.2indicate that the face bearing (stiffener) plates
attached to the steel beam provide effective concrete confinement.
(3) As in reinforced concrete connections, large bond stress transfer of loads
to column bars passing through beam-to-column connections can result in
slippage of the bars under extreme loadings. Current practice for reinforced
concrete connections is to control this slippage by limiting the maximum
longitudinal bar sizes as described in ACI (2002a).

Steel ..;;>---1..., .........

-1..

Column

Steel Beam (Through Joint)

Fig. C-I/-7.3. Panel shear mechanism$¡ in steel beamrto-reinforc d concrete column connections
(Deierlein and others, 1989).
Reinforced Concrete CoIumn

Fig. C-II-7.2. Reinforced concrete column-to-steel beam moment connection.

Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN !NSTITU1E OF STEEL CONSTRUCITON, !Nc. Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings M' arch 9 200 . 1 S I '
, " m e . upp ement No. 1!
AMERICAN lNsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION !Nc. '
 Cornrn.C8.]
PART n - COMPOSITE PR MOMENT FRAMES [Cornm.C8. PART TI - ~OMPOSITE PR.
6.1-275

COMPOSITE PARTIALLV RESTRAINED (PR) In the design of PR composite cOIDiections, is assumed that bendi~g and shear

MOM~NT ~RAME~ ~C;~~~!s

loads can be considered separately lwith the assigned to the steel in the
consist of structural steel columns slab and a bottom-flange steel angle or shear assigned to a web
ComposIte partlally restrame ( ). cted with PR composite connec-
angle or plateo Design methodologies and guidelines for C-PRMF
apd composite ste~l beams ~;~:r:~~e~~::~ai, Plumier and Doneaux, 2004; frames and connections have been p~blished and Leon,'1990; Leon
tions (Leon and Kim, 2004, '. nnectl'ons utilize traditional steel and Forcier, 1992; Steager and Lean, 1993). The performance of the base con-
., d L 1992) PR composlte co ,
Zandomm an e o n , . . d the additional strength and nection also depends, of course, on the performance of the anchors and
d b t flange connectlons an
frame shear an ot om b.een . co orated by adding shear studs the surrounding concrete.
stiffness provided by th~ floor slab h~s th mgati~ moment regions adjacent to
th beams and slab remforcement m e ne . . . Subassemblage te$.ts show that when detailed, the PR composite con-
to e . C-II-74) This results in a more favorable distnbutlOn
the columns (see FIgure ., . d positive moment regions of the nections such as those shown in Figure C- can undergo large deformations
f stren th and stiffness between negatlve an .' without fracturing. The connections geIlenllly are designed with a yield stress
obeams and
g provl'd.{:.
es lor re d'stribution
1 of loads under inelastlc actlOn.
that is les s than that of the connected to prevent locallimit states, such
as local buckling of the flange in web crippling of the beam, panel
zone yielding in the column, and bolt or failures, from controlling. When
these limit states are avoided, large ductilities should ensure excel-
lent frame performance under large inelastic

C-PRMF were originally proposed for areas low to moderate s~ismicity in

the eastern United States (seismic design CalreR"(,)rz(~s C and below)~ However,
with appropriate detailing and analysis, C can be used in areas of higher
seismicity (Leon, 1990). Tests and analyses these systems have demonstrat-
ed that the seismically induced loads on PR frames can be lower than
those for FR moment frames due to: (1) in the natural pe'riod due to
yielding in the connections and (2) stable behavior of the connections
(Nader andAstaneh-AsI, 1992; DiCorso, Dickerson, Radziminski and
Harper, 1989). Thus, in sorne cases, C-PRMF be designed for lower seismic
loads than ordinary moment frames (OMF). the force transfer relies on
bearing of the concrete slab against fue flange, bearing capacity of the
ELEVATION concrete should be carefulIy check~d. The nominal s1ab depth should be
Transverse Slab L gitudinal Slab available for a distance of at least 6 ip. (152 from the column flange.
~on
Reinforcement
Reinforcement ~
For frames up to four stories, the design should made using an analysis that, as
~ .~ a minimum, accounts for the semi-ri~id of the connections by utilizing
linear springs with reduced stiffness 1984). The effecti~e connec-
tion stiffuess should be considered for member load d~stributions
-- r-,' .- ¡-' .- and deflections, calculating the building's of vibration, and checking
o o o o ~
frame stability. Frame stability can be using conventional effective
-<2'
r- .- -- ¡ - - - f--;- buckling length procedures. However, the flexibility should be con-
sidered in determining. the rotationai restraint the ends of the columns. For
structures taller than f01¡lr stories, dri~t and need to be carefulIy checked
using analysis techniques that inc~rporate geometric and connection
-'1
nonlinearities (Rassati, Leon and Noe, 2004; and Leon, 1990; Chen
and Lui, 1991). PR composite conneptions can be used as part of the grav-
PLAN
ity load system for braced frames provided minimum design criteria such
as those proposed by Leon and Arnmerman (1 are folIowed. In this case no
Fig. C-Il-7.4. Composite partially restrained connection.
height limitation applies, and the frame should designed as a brace'd system.

Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steell)uildings, March 9, 2005~ncl. Supplernent No. 1 Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Building~, March 9,
AMERICAN INS1TIUTE OF STEEL CONSTRucnON, C. AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEt Cm~srn~uc1~N
6.1-276 PART TI - COMPOSITE PR MOMENT FRAMES [Comm.C8. Comm. C9.]
PART TI - COMPOSlTE SPECIAL MO ENT FRAMES
6.1-277

Because the moments of inertia for composite beams in the negative and positive C9.4. Moment Connections I
regions are different, the use of either value alone for the beam members in the A schematic connection drawing f(j)r com o ite . .
analysis can lead to significant errors. Therefore, the use of a weighted average concrete columns is shown in Figure C-II-~ hmoment frames Wlth remforced
is recommended (Arnmerman and Leon, 1990; Leon and Ammerman, 1990; ously through the column and is s' liced a' w ere the steel beam nms continu-
Zaremba, 1988). nection. Often, a sma,ll steel cOlum~ that is =~::::m the beam-to-<¡:o!umn con-
erection and is later encased in th . t pted by the beam lS used for
C9. .COMPOSITE SPECIAL MOMENT FRAMES (C-SMF) Since the late e rem orce concrete column (Griffis, 1992b).
1980s, more than 60 large-sc le tests of thi .
have been conducted in the United'St t J s type o~ connection
C9.1. Scope cyelic loading (Sheikh and others V98~~~an apan u~der ?oth monotonic and
Composite moment frames inelude a variety of configurations where steel or and others 1990' Parra M t ." ,an o and Delerlem, 1997; Nishiyama
composite beams are combined with reinforced concrete or composite columns. L' ' , : - on esmos and Wi ht, 2000; Chou and Uan 20 .
lang and Parra-Montesinos 2004) Th . g, 02,
fully detailed connections c~ perf~~ a: ~ l:t:sof ~e~e tests sh.ow that care-
In particular, composite frames with steel floor framing and composite or rein-
forced concrete columns have been used in recent years as a cost-effective alter-
reinforced concrete connections. In¡ articul s.elsffilcally deslgned steel or
native to frames with reinforced concrete floors (Furlong, 1997; Griffis, 1992b).
For seismic design, composite moment frames are elassified as special, interme- Figure C-11-7.2 avoid the need for fi~~d weldi ~~;:l: ~~: ~ the one sho,:~ in
diate, or ordinary depending upon the detailing requirements for the members beam-to-column junction. Therefore the .. ange at the cntIcal
to the fracture behavior that . .' se ~ mts are generally nOLsusceptible
and connections of the frame. Based on SEIIASCE 7 (AS CE, 2002), C-SMF are lS n0'V recogm ed as a critical as t f Id
primarily intended for use in seismiC design categqries D and aboye. Design and steel moment connections Tests h' h pec o we ed
. ave s own at of the man 'bl
strengthening the joint face b . 1 ' YpOSSl e ways of
plates (Figure C-II-9.1) attach::;:~~ ::es (s e Figure C-I~-7.2) and steel band
detailing provisions for C-SMF are comparable to those required for steel and
reinforced concrete SMF and are intended to confine inelastic deformation to the am
ing the joint shear strength of ..¡: d e very effectIve for both mobiliz-
beams. Since the inelastic behavior of C-SMF is comparable to that for steel or reml0rce co crete and prov'di fi
to the concrete. Further informatl' d' 1 ng con nement
reinforced concrete SMF, the R and Cd values are the same as for those systems. on on eSlg methods and t' t
composite connections is available in .d l' equa lOns or these
C9.2. Columns and others 1990) and Parra M t . gUl e m s prepared by ASCE (Nishiyama
, - on esmos and . h (200
In the past, little specific research had been conducted on the cyclic performance scope of the current ASCE G 'd l' 19 t i ) . Note that while the
Ul e mes (AS 1994) r 't th . .
of encased and filled columns, except as part of work on connection behavior to regions of low to moderate . " '. lml s err apphcation
Gu' d l' . selsffilclty, rece test data indicate that the ASCE
and design (Kanno and Deierlein, 1997). Recently that has begun to change, 1 e mes are adequate for regions of hi h s· "
particularly with respect to filled tubes at both the experimental and theoretical Deierlein 1997' N' h' , g elsffilclty as well (Kanno and
, ,1S lyama and others 199 P M .
levels. (Varma, Rieles, Sause and Lu, 2002, 2004; Hajjar, Gourley and Olson, Wight, 2003). , a r r a - ontesmos, Liang and
1997; Tort and Hajjar, 2004).

C9.3. Beams
The use of composite trusses as flexural members in C-SMF is not permitted un-
less substantiating evidence is provided to demonstrate adequate seismic resis- Stiffeners
tance of the system. This limitation applies only to members that are part of the
seismic load resisting system and does not apply to joists and trusses that carry
gravity loads oniy. Trusses and open web joists generally are regarded as ineffec-
tive as flexural members in lateral load systems unless either (1) the web mem-
bers have been carefully detailed through a limit-state design approach to delay,
•
control, or avoid overall buckling of compression members, local buckling, or
failures at the connections (Itani and Goel, 1991) or (2) a strong-beam/weak-
~=.==:!I. /
Longitudinal Steel Beam (Through iJoint)
column mechanism is adopted and the truss and its connections proportioned Reinforcement .........-cLL--+~_--L-

accordingly (Camacho and Galambos, 1993). Both approaches can be used for Reinforced Concrete Column

one-story industrial-type structures where the gravity loads are small and ductil-
ity demands on the critical members can be sustained. Under these conditions
F:19. C-1I-9.1. Steel band piates usedi lor streng hening the joint.
and when properly proportioned, these systems have been shown to provide
adequate ductility and energy dissipation capability.

Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings .Mareh 9 20 5' 1S
AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL CONsTRucnON, INc. AMEru IN '," me. upplement No. 1
CAN STITUTE OF STEEL CONsTRUcn , INC.

----------_._._--~-_._ .._..• __ .... _---_.-

6.1-278 PART TI - COMPOSITE SPECIAL MOMENT FRAMES [Cornm. C9. Comm. C12.] PART TI - COMPOSITE SPECIAL ~r.Ur.""~T.~,·--I
6.1-279

Connections between steel beams and encased composite columns (see Figure C10.
C-I1-9.2) have been used and tested extensively in Japan where design provisions ENTFRAMES
are ineluded in Architectural Institute of Japan standards (AIJ, 1991). Altema-
tively, the connection strength can be conservatively calculated as the strength The basic construction and con~ections C-IMF are similar to C-SMF
of the connection of the steel beam to the steel column. Or, depending upon the except that many of the seismic U .... l.<l.UJlU~ requirements have been relaxed.
joint proportions and detail, where appropriate, the strength can be calculated C-IMF are limited for use in seismic category C and below, and provi-
using an adaptation of design models for connections between steel beams and sions for C-IMF are comparable to those . for reinforced concrete IMF
reinforced concrete columns (AS CE, 1994). One disadvantage of this connec- and between those for steel IMF and The R and Cd values for C-IMF
tion detail compared to the one shown in Figure C-I1-7.2 is that, like standard are equal to those for reinforced concrete and between those for steel IMF
andOME
steel construction, the detail in Figure C-I1-9.2 requires welding of the beam
flange to the steel column. C11. COMPOSITE OROINARV MORIIC ..,...... FRAMES (C-OMF)
Connections to filled composite columns (see Figure C-I1-9.3) have been used C-OMF represent a type of composite frame that is designed and de-
less frequently but there has been substantial recent research that will lead to tailed following the Specification and ACI 3 (ACI, 2002b), excluding Chapter
practical design recornmendations in the near future (Azizinamini and Sch- 21. C-OMF are limited to seismic!design A and B, and the design
neider, 2004; Rieles, Peng and Lu, 2004). Where the steel beams run continu- provisions are comparable to those for' concrete and steel frames that
ously through the composite column, the intemalload transfer mechanisms and are designed without any special seismic The R and Cd values for C-
behavior of these connections are similar to those for connections to reinforced OMF are chosen accordingly.
concrete columns (Figure C-I1-7.2). Otherwise, where the beam is interrupted at
the column face, special details are needed to transfer the column flange loads C12. COMPOSITE,SPECIAL CONC, NTRICALLV BRACEO
through the connection. FRAMES (C-CBF)
These Provisions require that connections in C-SMF meet the same story drift C-CBF is one of the two types ofcompo' braced frames that is specially
capacity of 0.04 radian as required for steel SMF in Part 1. In connection details detailed for seismic design categories C and ; the other is C-EBE While
where the beam runs continuously through the joint (Figure C-I1-7.2) and the experience using C-CBF is limited in high regions, the design provisions
connection is not susceptible to fracture, then the connection design can be sub- for C-CBF are intended to result in behavior cplmparable to steel SCBF, wherein
stantiated from available test data that is not subjected to requirements such as the braces often are the elements most to inelastic deforrhations (see
those described in Part 1, Appendix S. However, where the connection is inter- Part 1 Commentary Section C13). The R and d values and usage lirrtitations for
rupted and fracture is of concem, then connection performance should be sub- C-CBF are similar to those for steel SCBE
stantiated following requirements similar to those in Part 1, Appendix S.

Concrete Alled
Tube or Pipe
11
Face Bearlng Plates 11
longitudinal 11
Retn
. forcementl ~
~.
~ ..
~ • ~cp

~
:~
~:

11
la • .• 1==;:::=1 !t:=======-:~~==I

Steel Beam (Through Joinl)

Composlte (Encased) CoIumn

Fig. C-II-9.3. Concrete-filled tube column-to-steel moment connection.

Fig. C-Il-9.2. Composite (encased) column-to-steel beam moment connection.

Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, ¡nel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, INc.
AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~STR:ucrt>N, INe.
 PART TI - COMPOSITE SPECIAL CONCEN1RICALLY BRACED FRAMES [Comm. C12. Comm. C12.] PART TI - COMPOSITE SPECIAL CONCENTRIC LY BRACED FRAMES
6.1-280 6.1-281

In cases where composite braces are used (either filled or encased), the concrete
has the potential to stiffen the steel section and prevent or deter brace buckling
while at the sarne time increasing the capability to dissipate energy. The filling
of hollow structural sections (HSS) with concrete has been shown to effectively ShearStuds
stiffen the HSS waHs and inhibit local buckling (Goel and Lee, 1992). For en-
cased steel braces, the concrete should be sufficiently reinforced and confined to
prevent the steel shape from buckling. It is recornrnended that composite braces
be designed to meet aH requirements of composite columns as specified in Part
Il, Sections 6.4a through 6.4c. Composite braces in tension should be designed
based on the steel section alone unless test data justify higher strengths. Braces
that are all steel should be designed to meet aH requirements for steel braces in
Part 1 of these Provisions. Reinforced concrete and composite columns in C-
CBF are detailed with similar requirements to colurnns in C-SMF, and special
attention should be paid to the detailing of the connection elements (MacRae,
Roeder, Gunderson and Kimura, 2004). Encasad Steel CoIumn

Examples of connections used in C-CBF are shown in Figures C-II -12.1 through
C-Il-12.3. Careful design and detailing ofthe connections in a C-CBF is required
to prevent failure before developing the strength of the braces in either tension or
compression. AH connection strengths should be capable of developing the full Fig. C-Il-12.2. Reinforced concrete (or composite) colu n-to-steel concentric braceo
strength of the braces in tension and compression. Where the brace is composite,
the added brace strength afforded by the concrete should be considered. In such
cases, it would be unconservative to base the connection strength on the steel
section alone. Connection design and detailing should recognize that buckling
of the brace could cause excessive rotation at the brace ends and lead to local
connection failure.

ShearStuds

i
i
Concrete Filled Tube
!
or Pipe CoIUrM
---1
I
Encased Steel Column

Fig. C-Il-12.3. Filled tube or pipe column-to-ste l concentric base.

Fig. C-Il-12.1. Reinforced concrete (or composite) column-to-steel concentric braceo

Seismic Provisions far Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Pravisians far Structural Steel Buildings; Mareh 9, 2 05, inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN lNSTITIlTE OF STEEL CONsTRUcnON, INC. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcn N, me.
6.1-282 PART TI - COMPOSITE ORDINARY BRACED FRAMES [Comm. Cl3. Comm. C15.] PART 11 - ORDINARY REINFORCED rV"'>.T"",.,h~~ SHEAR WALLS 6.1-283

C13. COMPOSITE OROINARV BRACEO FRAMES (C-OBF) to composite beam-to-column moment cOImel~ti()ns in C-SMF (see Part U, Sec-
Composite braced frames consisting of steel, composite and/or reinforced con- tion 9) and to steel coupling beam-to-wall (see Part 11, Section 15).
crete elements have been used in low- and high-rise buildings in regions of low
and moderate seismicity. The C-OBF category is provided for systems without C15. OROINARV REINFORCEO CRETE SHEAR
special seismic detailing that are used in seismic design categories A and B. WALLS COMPOSITE WITH CTURAL STEEL
Because significant inelastic load redistribution is not relied upon in the design, ELEMENTS (C-ORCW)
there is no distinction between frames where braces frame concentrically or ec-
The provisions in this Section apply to variations of structural systems
centrically into the beams and columns.
using reinforced concrete walls. One type where reinforced concrete walls
serve as infill panels in what are otherwise or composite frames. Examples
C14. COMPOSITE ECCENTRICALLV BRACEO FRAMES of typical sections at the wall-to-column ,',,t",lrt-.",,," for such cases are shown in
(C-EBF) Figures C-U-15.1 and C-I1-15.2. The details Figure C-U-15.2 also can occur
Structural steel EBF have been extensively tested and utilized in seismic regions in the second type of system where encased sections are used as vertical
and are recognized as providing excellent resistance and energy absorption for reinforcement in what are otherwise concrete shear walls. Finally,
seismic loads (see Part 1, Cornmentary Section CI5). While there has been little the third variation is where steel or beams are used to couple two or
use of C-EBF, the inelastic behavior of the critical steellink should be essentially more reinforced concrete walls. Examples of beam-to-wall connections
the same as for steel EBF and inelastic deformations in the composite or rein- are shown in Figures C-II-15.3 and C-U-15.4. When properly designed, each of
forced concrete columns should be minimal. Therefore, the R and Cd values and these systems should have shear strength stiffness comparable to those of
lisage limitatipns for C-EBF are the same as those for steel EBE As described pure reinforced concrete shear wall ~ystems. structural steel sections in the
below, careful design and detailing of the brace-to-column and link-to-column boundary members will, however, increase in-plane flexural strength of the
connectionS is essential to the performance of the system. columns and delay flexural hinging in tall . R and Cd values for reinforced
concrete shear walls with composite :elements the same as those fór tradition-
The basic requirements for C-EBF are the same as those for steel EBF with ad-
al reinforced concrete shear wall systems. in this sec~on are for
ditional provisions for the design of composite or reinforced concrete columns
ordinary reinforced concrete shear walls that limited to use in seismic d~sign
and the composite connections. While the inelastic deformations of the columns
categories e and below; requirements for reinforced concrete shear walls
should be small, as a conservative measure, detailing for the reinforced concrete
permitted in seismic design categories D and are given in Section 16.
and encased composite columns is based upon ACI 318, Chapter 21. In addition,
where links are adjacent to the column, elosely spaced hoop reinforcement is
required similar to that used at hinge regions in reinforced concrete SME This
requi~ement is in recognition of the large moments and load reversals imposed
in the columns near tlie links. Link

Satisfactory behavior of C-EBF is dependent on making the braces and columns

strong enough to remain essentially elastic under loads generated by inelastic Face BearIng Plates
deformations of the links. Since this requires an accurate calculation of the shear
link rzominal strength, it is important that the shear region of the link not be
encased in concrete. Portions of the beam outside of the link are permitted to be
encased since overstrength outside the link would not reduce the effectiveness of
the system. Shear links are permitted to be composite with the floor or roof slab
since the slab has a minimal effect on the nominal shear strength of the link. The
additional strength provided by composite action with the slab is important to Relnforced Concrete or
Compoalte CoIumn -
consider, however, for long links whose nominal strength is govemed by flexural
yielding at the ends of the links (Rieles and Popov, 1989).
In C-EBF where the link is not adjacent to the column, the concentric brace-to-
column connections are similar to those shown for C-CBF (Figures C-II-12.l Fig. C-Il-14.1. Reinforced concrete (or composite) cOlulnn-ti(l-.~ltP.p.1
through C-II-12.3). An example where the link is adjacent to the column is (Note: Stiffeners designed according to
shown in Figure C-II-14.1. In this case, the link-to-column connection is similar

Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildingf' March 9,
AMERICAN rnsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INc.
AMERICAN rnsTITUTE OF STEEL Cm~STRlJcrtoN.
6.1-284 PART ll- ORDINARY REINFORCED CONCRETE SHEAR WALLS [Comm. C15. Cornm. C16.] PART ll- SPECIAL REINFORCED CONClRE11E SHEAR WALLS 6.1-285

For cases where the reinforced concrete walls frame into nonencased steel shapes
(Figure C-U-15.1), mechanical connectors arefequired to transfer vertical shear
between the wall and column, and to anchor the wall reinforcement. Addition-
ally, if the wall elements are interrupted by steel beams at floor levels, shear con-
nectors are needed at the wall-to-beam interface. Tests on concrete infill walls
have shown that if shear connectors are not present, story shear loads are carried
primarily through diagonal compression struts in the wall panel (Chrysostomou,
1991). This behavior often ineludes high loads in localized areas of the walls,
beams, columns and connections. The shear stud requirements will improve per-
formance by providing a more uniform transfer of loads between the infill pan-
els and the boundary members (Hajjar, Tong, Schultz, Shield and Saari, 2002).
Two examples of connections between steel coupling beams to concrete walls are
shown in Figures C-U-15.3 and C-U-15.4. The requirements for coupling beams
and their connections are based largely on tests of unencased steel coupling ShearStuds
beams (Harries, Mitchell, Cook and Redwood; 1993; Shahrooz, Remmetter and
Qin, 1993). These test data and analyses show that properly detailed coupling
beams can be designed to yield at the face of the concrete wall and pro vide stable
hysteretic behavior under reversed cyelic loads. Dnder high seismic loads, the
coupling beams are likely to undergo large inelastic deformations through either
flexural andlor shear yielding. However, for the ordinary elass of shear wall, there
are no special requirements to limit the slendemess of coupling beams beyond Fig. C-l/-I5.2. FuUy encased composite hnl./Yulnnl elemento
those in the Specification. More stringent provisions are required for the special
c1ass of shear wall (see Part n, Section 16). Recently, outrigger beams (Shahrooz,
Deason and Tune, 2004a; Shahrooz, Tune and Deason, 2004b) and post-tensioned
schemes have been proposed as coupling elements to simplify construction.

C16. SPECIAL REINFORCED CONCRETE SHEAR WALLS

COMPOSITE WITH STRUCTURAL STEEL ELEMENTS
(C-SRCW)
Additional requirements are given in this section for composite features of re-
inforced concrete walls elassified as special that are permitted in seismic de-
sign categories D and aboye. These provisions are applied in addition to those
explained in the cornmentary to Part U, Section 15. As given in SEIIASCE 7

h
\_ h _\_
-1 Reinforcement not
shown for clarity

- /
/ Fig. C-l/-I5.3. Steel coupling beam to reil'1torce'd concrete wall.

é .L
CrossTles
Defonned Wire Anchor
(Welded 10 Cotumn)

Fig. C-l/-I5.I. Partially encased steel boundary elemento

Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, ind. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcnON, INc. AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL C01~sn~uCTioN, INC.
6.1-286 PART II - SPEClAL REINFORCED CONCRETE SHEAR WALLS [Cornrn.C16. Cornrn.C17.] PART II - COMPOSITE STEEL PLATE HEAR WALLS 6.1-287

(AS CE, 2002), the R-value for special reinforced concrete walls is larger than
for unencased steel ~embers. For encased c upling beams, it may be possible
for ordinary walls.
to reduce the web stiffener requirements of art TI, Section 16.3, which are the
Limited research suggests that hybrid coupled walls, where steel beams couple same as those in Part 1, Section 15l3, but c ently, there are no data available
reinforced concrete members are particularly well suited for application in zones that provides design g,uidance on ~s.
of high seismic risk (Gong and Shahrooz, 2001a, 2001b; Rarries, 2001). The
inelastic seismic behavior of coupled wall systems is strongly dependent on the C17. COMPOSITE STEEL PLATE S EAR WALLS (C-SPW)
coupling nítio, which is the ratio of the overtuming moments resisted by the Steel plate reinforced composite shear walIs an be used most effectively where
coupling beams to the overall overtuming moments. Limited research has shown story shear Ioads are large and the required thickness of conventionally rein-
that systems with large coupling ratios (60 percent or greater) can be detrimental forced shear walls is excessive (Z4ao and A taneh-AsI, 2004). The provisions
to the behavior of the RC shear walls. Coupled walls with low levels of coupling Iimit the shear strength of the wall to the yie d stress of the plate because there
(below 30 percent) are structurally inefficient and perform more like systems is insufficient basis from which to develop d sign rules for combining the yield
with individual cantilever walls (Rassan and El-Tawil, 2004). stress of the steeI plate and the reinforced c ncrete paneL Moreover, since the
Concems have been raised that walls with encased steel boundary members may shear strength of the steeI plate usually is uch greater than that of the rein-
have a tendency to split along vertical planes inside the wall near the column. forced concrete encasement, neglecting the ontribution of the concrete does
Therefore, the provisions require that transverse steel be continued into the wall not have a significant practical impacto The NERRP Provisions assign struc-
for the distance 2h as shown in Figures C-TI-15.1 and C-TI-15.2. tures with composite walls a sIightly higher R value than special reinforced con-
crete walIs because the shear yielding mech .sm of the steeI plate will result in
As a conservative measure until further research data are available, strengths more stable hysteretic Ioops than for reinforc d concrete walls (see Table C-TI-
for shear studs to transfer load into the structural steel boundary members are 4.1). The R. value for C-SPW is also the sam as that for light frame walIs with
reduced by 25 percent from their static yield strength. This is done because shearpanek
provisions in the Specification and most other sources for calculating the nominal
strength of shear studs are based on static monotonic tests. The 25 percent Two examples of connections between co posite walls to either steeI or
reduction in stud strengths need not apply to cases where the steel member is fully composite boundary elements are shown in igures C-TI-17,1, C-TI-17.2, and
encased since the provisions conservatively neglect the contribution of bond and C-TI-17.3. The provisions require that the con ections between the plate and the
friction between the steel and concrete. boundary members (columns and beams) be esigned to develop fue full yield
stress of the plate. Minimum reinfotcement i the concrete cover is required to
Several of the requirements for links in steel EBF are applied to coupling beams maintain the integrity of the walI under revers d cyc1ic Ioading and out-of-plane
to insure more stable yielding behavior under extreme earthquake loading. It Ioads. Until further research data are availabI , the minimum required walI re-
should be noted, however, that the link requirements for steel EBF are intended inforcement is based upon the specified mini um value for reinforced concrete
walls in ACI 318.

The thickness of the concrete encasement and e spacing of shear stud connec-
Reinforced Concrete Wall
tors should be calculated to ensure that the pla e can reach yield prior to overall
or local buckling. It is recornmended that over 1buckling of the composite panel
cp be checked using elastic buckling th~ory using a transformed section stiffness of
the walL For plates with concrete on only on side, stud spacing requirements
that will meet local plate buckling criteria can be calculated based upon
hit provisions for the sheár design of webs i steel girders. For example, in
Specification Section G2, the Iimitin hit value specified for compact webs sub-
jected to shear is h/tw= 1.10 kv E/ lf,w. Assu .ng a conservative value of the
plate buckling coefficient kv = 5 andO Fyw =50 k i (345 MPa), this equation gives
the limiting value of hltw :::;; 59. For a Ys-in. ( O rnm)-thick plate, this gives a
maximum value of h =¡ 22 in. (560 mm) that i representative of the maxiinum
center-to-center stud spacing that should suffi e for the plate to reach its full
shear yielding strength.

Fig. C-II-15.4. Steel coupling beam to reinforced concretewall with composite boundary member.

Seismic Provisions far Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005, incl. Supplernent No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel BuildingS, March 9,
AMERICAN mSTI11ITE OF STEEL CONSTRUCfION, INC.
05, incl. Supplernent No. 1
AMERICAN mSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRU ON, mc.
6.1-288 PART II - COMPOSITE STEEL PLATE SHEAR WALLS [Comm. Cl7. Comm. C19.] PARTU-QUALITY AS..,v.~·,~+, 6.1-289

Concrete Stiffening on One Careful consideration should be given to the

or 80th Sides of Plate and flexural strength of wall
piers and of spandrels adjacent to openings. particular, composite walls with
large door openings may require structural boundary members attached to
the steel plate around the openings.

C18. STRUCTURAL DESIGN ORAW SANO

SPECIFICATIONS, SHOP ORA GS,ANO
ERECTION ORAWINGS
Structural design drawings and Sp~~cltlcaltio,ps, shop drawings, and erection
drawings for composite steel-concrete are basically similar to those
Fig. C-II-17.1. Concrete stiffened steei shear wall with steei boundary member. given in Part I for all-steel structures. For reinforced concrete portion of
the work, in addition to the requirements in 318 Section 1.2, attention is
called to the ACI Detailing Manual (ACI, 1 ), with emphasis on Section
2.10, which contains requirements for design of frames, joints, walls,
diaphragms, and two-way slabs.

C19.

- 1 - . - c¡a
- A quality assurance plan, siInilar tothat for all-steel structures shall be
developed for a composite structure. For the ~lntclrc~~d concrete portion of the
~ work, in addition to the requirements in ACI 3 Section 1.3 attention is called to
-- the ACI Detailing Manual (ACI, 1999a), with on the provisions of ACI

... ~ ..... 121R (Quality Management Systems for Construction) .

... 111
- d. • 11
....

Fig. C-II-17.2. Concrete stiffened steel shear wall with composite (encased) boundary member.

Fig. C-II-17.3. Concrete filled composite shear wall with two steei piates.

\
Seismic Provisionsfor Structural Steel Buildings, Mareh 9, 2005, inel. Supplement No. 1 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Building~, Mareh 9, , inel. Supplement No. 1
AMERICAN rnsTITUTE OF STEEL CONsTRucnON, !Nc. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL , INC.
 6.2-ii 6.2-iií

CONNECTION PREQUALIFICATI N REVIEW PANEL

Copyright © 2006 Committee Members

Ronald O. Hamburger, Chairman RobertLyo s
by Kevin Moore, Vice-Chairman Brett Manni g
Christopher M. Hewitt, Secretary Michael Ma es
Fred Breismeister Duane Mille
American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc. Nathan Charlton
urray
Theodore Droessler Lawrence N yak
Michael Engelhardt Thomas Sab 1
Al! rights reserved. This book or any part thereof must not be reproduced in any form Linda Hanagan Robert Sha
without the written permission of the publisher. Patrick Hassett
Keith Landwehr

The AISC logo is a registered trademark ofAISC and is used under license.
Corresponding Members
The information presented in this publication has been prepared in accordance with Cynthia Duncan
recognized engineering principIes and is for general information only. While it is be- Lanny Flynn
y
lieved to be accurate, tbis iDformation should not be used or relied upon for any spe- Roberto Leon
cific application without competent professional examination and verification of its James Malley
accuracy, suitability, and applicability by a licensed professional engineer, designer, or Hank Martin
architect. The publication of the material contained herein is not intended as a repre-
sentation or warranty, on the part of the American Institute of Steel Construction or
of any other person named herein, tbat this information is suitable for any general or par-
ticular use or of freedom from infringement of any patent or patents. Anyone making use
of this information assumes allliability arising from such use.

Caution must be exercised when relying upon other specifications and codes developed
by other bodies and incorporated by reference herein since such material may be mod-
ified or amended from time to time subsequent to the printing of this edition. The
Institute bears no responsibility for such material other than to refer to it and incorpo-
rate it by reference at the time of the initial publication of this edition.

Printed in the United States of America

Second Printing October 2006

Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Moment Frames for Seismic Applications Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Momen Frames for Seismic Applications
AMERICAN lNSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INc.
AMERICAN lNsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTI N, lNc.
 6.2-v

TABLE OF CONTE TS

SYMBOLS " . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .................... 6.2-1

GLOSSARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .................... 6.2-3
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL ...................... " ..................... 6.2-4
1.1 Scope ............................ . .................... 6.2-4
1.2 ReferenCes .............................................. 6.2-4
1.3 General ................................................. 6.2-4
CHAPTER 2 DESIGN REQUlREMENTS ............................... 6.2-5
2.1
Special and Intennediate MomentFrame C nnection Types ....... 6.2-5
2.2
Connection Stiffness ...................................... 6.2-5
2.3
Members .................... "............................ 6.2-5
2.3.1 Rolled Wide-FIange Members .... '" ....................... 6.2-5
2.3.2
Built-up Members ................... . ................... 6.2-5
2.3.2a
Beams ....... ; ................' . . . .. . ................... 6.2-6
2.3.2b Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ................... 6.2-6
1. I-Shaped Welded CoIumns .............................. 6.2-6
2. Boxed Wide-Flange CoIumns ............................. 6.2-6
3. Built-up Box Columns .................................. 6.2-6
4. Flanged Crucifonn CoIumns ............. '" ........... " .6.2-7
2.4
Connection Design Parameters .............................. 6.2-7
2.4.1 Load Combinations and Resistance Factors ..................... 6.2-7
2.4.2 Plastic Hinge Location "..................................... 6.2-7
2.4.3
Probable Maximum Moment at Plastic Hing ................... 6.2-8
2.4.4 Beam Flange Continuity Plates .. , ........................... 6.2-8
2.4.4a Continuity Plate Thickness ............ " ................... 6.2-9
2.4.4b Continuity PIate to CoIumn Attachment '" .............. "..... 6.2-9
2.5 Panel Zones ......................... . ................. 6.2-10
2.6 Protected Zone ..................... " .................. 6.2-10
CHAPTER 3 WELDING REQUIREMENTS .. . . . . ... .. ................ 6.2-11
3.1 Filler Metals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ................. 6.2-11
3.2 Welding Procedures ...................................... 6.2-11

Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermed{ate Steel Moment Frames for Seismic Applications
AMERICAN !NsTITU1E OF STEEL CONSlRUCTION, !Nc. Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Moment rames for Seismic Applications
AMERICAN !NsTITU1E OF STEEL CONSTRUCTIO ,!Nc.
 b.2-vi
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
6.2-vii
3.3 Backing at Beam to CoIumn and Continuity PIate
6.7
to Column Joints ........................................ 6.2-11 Continuity PIates ........................................ 6.2-26
3.3.1 6.8
SteeI Backing at Continuity PIates ........................... 6.2-11 Bolts ...................... ' ............................ 6.2-26
3.3.2 6.9
Steel Backing at Beam Bottom FIange ....................... 6.2-11 Connection DetaiIing ......... ' ..... " .................... 6.2-27
3.3.3 6.9.1
Steel Backing at Beam Top Flange .......................... 6.2-11 Gage .... " ..................... " .................... 6.2-30
3.3.4 6.9.2
Prohibited Welds at Steel Backing ........................... 6.2-12 Pitch and Row Spacing .............. . ................... 6.2-30
6.9.3
3.3.5 Non-Fusible Backing at Beam Flange-to-Column Joints ......... 6.2-12 End-PIate Width .................. " .................... 6.2-30
3.4 Details and Treatment ofWeld Tabs ......................... 6.2-12 6.9.4 End-PIate Stiffener ....................................... 6.2-30
3.5 Tack Welds ............................................. 6.2-13 6.9.5 Finger Shims ........................................... 6.2-32
3.6 Continuity Plates ........................................ 6.2-13 6.9.6 Composite SIab DetruIing for IMF ........................... 6.2-32
3.7 Quality Control and Quality Assurance ....................... 6.2-13 6.9.7 Welding DetaiIs ......................................... 6.2-33
CHAPTER 4 BOLTING REQUlREMENTS ............................ 6.2-14 6.10 Design Procedure ........................................ 6.2-33
4.1 Fastener Assemblies ...................................... 6.2-14 COMMENTARY .....•.•..•.•...•..••...•....•.. . ..............•..• 6.2-47
4.2 InstalIation Requirements .................................. 6.2-14 C1. GENERAL ......•.••...••..••............•. . .................. 6.2-48
4.3 Quality Control and Quality Assurance ....................... 6.2-14 C1.1 Scope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .................. 6.2-48
CHAPTER 5 REDUCED BEAM SECTION (RBS)
C1.2 References ............................................. 6.2-49
MOMENT CONNECTION ............................... 6.2-15
Cl.3 General ................................................ 6.2-49
5.1 General ................................................ 6.2-15
C2. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS ....••••....•...................••.... 6.2-50
5.2 Systems ............................................... 6.2-15 C2.1 Special and Intermediate Moment Frame Co ection Types ...... 6.2-50
5.3 Prequalification Limits .................................... 6.2-15 C2.3 Members ................................................ 6.2-50
5.3.1 Beam Limitations ........................................ 6.2-16 C2.3.2 Built-up Members ....................................... 6.2-50
C2.3.2b Columns ............................................... 6.2-50
5.3.2 CoIumn Limitations ...................................... 6.2-17 (2) Boxed Wide-Flange CoIumns ....... " .................. 6.2-52
5.4 Beam-Column ReIationship Limitations ...................... 6.2-17 (4) Flanged Cruciform Columns ......... . ................. 6.2-52
5.5 Beam FIange to CoIumn Flange WeId Limitations .............. 6.2-18 C2.4 Connection Design Parameters .......... . ................. 6.2-52
C2.4.1 Load Combinations and Resistance Factors. . ................. 6.2-52
5.6 Beam Web to Column Connection Limitations ................. 6.2-18 C2.4.2 PIastic Hinge Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ................. 6.2-52
5.7 Fabrication ofFlange Cuts ................................. 6.2-19 C2.4.3 Probable Maximum Moment at PIastic Hinge .................. 6.2-53
5.8 Design Procedure ........................................ 6.2-19 C2.4.4 Beam Flange Continuity PIates ............................. 6.2-53
C2.4.4b Continuity PIate to CoIumn Attachment ...................... 6.2-54
CHAPTER 6 BOLTED UNSTIFFENED AND STIFFENED EXTENDED
END·PLATE MOMENT CONNECTIONS .................. 6.2-23 C3. WELDING REQUIREMENTS ..................................•. 6.2-55
6.1 General ................................................ 6.2-23 C3.3 Backing at Beam-to-Column and Continuity-p te-to-Column Joints . 6.2-55
6.2 C3.3.! Steel Backing at Continuity Plates ........................... 6.2-55
Systems ............................................... 6.2-23
6.3 C3.3.2 Steel Backing at Beam Bottom Flange ..... . ................ 6.2-55
Prequalification Limits .................................... 6.2-24
6.4 C3.3.3 Steel Backing at Beam Top Flange ........ . ................ 6.2-55
Beam Limitations ........................................ 6.2-24
6.5 C3.3.4 Prohibited Welds at Steel Backing ....... " ................. 6.2-56
CoIumn Limitations ...................................... 6.2-25
6.6 C3.3.5 Non-fusible Backing at Beam Flange-to-Colu Joints .......... 6.2-56
Beam-Column ReIationship Limitations ...................... 6.2-26
C3.4 Details and Treatment ofWeld Tabs ......................... 6.2-56

Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Moment Frames for Seismic Applications
AMERICAN !NsTITOTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Moment F. ames for Seismic Applications
AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION !Nc.
6.2-viii TABLE OF CONTENTS
C3.5 Tack We1ds ............................................. 6.2-57
C3.6 Continuity Plates ........................................ 6.2-57
C3.7 Quality Control and Quality Assurance ....................... 6.2-58
C4. BOLTING REQUIREMENTS ..................................... 6.2-60
C4.1 Fastener Assernblies ...................................... 6.2-60
C4.2 Installation Requirernents .................................. 6.2-60
C4.3 Quality Control and Quality Assurance ....................... 6.2-60
CS. REDUCED BEAM SECTION (RBS) MOMENT CONNECTION ....... 6.2-61
C5.1 General ................................................ 6.2-61
C5.2 Systerns ............................................... 6.2-62
C5.3 Prequalification Limits .................................... 6.2-62
C5.3.1 Bearn Lirnitations ........................................ 6.2-62
C5.3.2 Colurnn Limitations ...................................... 6.2-63
C5.4 Bearn-Colurnn Relationship Limitations ...................... 6.2-65
C5.5 Bearn Flange-to-Colurnn Flange Weld Lirnitations .............. 6.2-65
C5.6 Bearn Web-to-Colurnn Connection Lirnitations ................. 6.2-65
C5.7 Fabrication of Flange Cuts ................................. 6.2-66
C5.8 Design Procedure ........................................ 6.2-66
C6. BOLTED UNSTIFFENED AND STIFFENDED EXTENDED
END-PLATE MOMENT CONNECTIONS .......................... 6.2-69
C6.1 General ................................................ 6.2-69
C6.2 Systerns ............................................... 6.2-69
C6.3 Prequalification Lirnits .................................... 6.2-70
C6.4 Bearn Limitations ........................................ 6.2-70
C6.5 Colurnn Limitations ...................................... 6.2-70
C6.6 Bearn-Colurnn Relationship Limitations ...................... 6.2-70
C6.7 Continuity Plates ........................................ 6.2-70
C6.8 Bolts .................................................. 6.2-71
C6.9 Connection Detailing ..................................... 6.2-71
C6.1O Design Procedure ........................................ 6.2-72
REFERENCES ..................................................... 6.2-73
ALL CONNECTIONS ............................................... 6.2-73
REDUCED BEAM SECTION (RBS) MOMENT CONNECTION ........... 6.2-74
BOLTED UNSTIFFENED AND STIFFENED EXTENDED
END-PLATE MOMENT CONNECTIONS .............................. 6.2-76
Prequalijied Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Moment Frames for Seismic Applications
AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc.
6.2-1
SYMBOLS
The Standard uses the following syrnbols in addition to the terrns defined in the 2005 AISC
Specification for Structural Steel Buildings and the 2005 AIS Seismic Provisions for Structural
Steel Buildings.
Contact areas between the continuity plate and the
bearn flanges, in. 2 (mrn2)
Factor to accomit for peak· connection strength, i cluding strain hardening, local
restraint, additional reinforcernent, and :other co ection conditions, as given in
Equation 2.4.3-2
Factor used in Equation 6.9-23
Ultirnate flange force, kips (N)
Ultirnate stiffener force, kips (N)
Specified minimum tensile strength of end-plate,
Nominal shear strength of bolts, ksi (MPa)
Distance between plastic hinges, in. (mm)
Length of end plate stiffener, in. (mm)
Colurnn flahge flexural strength, kip-in. (N-mm)
Maximlim moment expected at face of colurnn, ki
Moment without prying action in the bolts, kip-in. N-mm)
Plastic moment of bearn based on expected yield s ess, kip-in. (N-mm)
Probable maximum moment at plastic hinge, kip-i . (N-mm)
Thickness of bearn flange plus 2 times the reinforc ng fillet weld size, in. (mm)
Minimum specified tensile strength of the bolt, kip (N)
Required force for stiffenet design, kips (N)
Ratio of expected yield stress to specified minimu yield stress ~, as specified in
the AISC Seismic Provisions.
Ratio of expected yield stress to specified minimu yield stress ~, for a bearn
Ratio of expected yield stress to specified rninimu yield stress ~, for a colurnn
Distance from the face of a column to a plastic hin e, in. (mm)
Bearn shear force resulting from 1.2D + f1L + O.2S, kips (N)
Larger of the two values of shear force at the center of the reduced bearn section at
each end of a bearn, kips (N)
V~BS Smaller of the two values of shear force at the cente of the reduced bearn section at
each end of a bearn, kips (N)
Column flange yield line mechanism pararneter, in. (mm)
End-plate yield liile mechanisrn parameter, in. (mm
Plastic section modulus of a member, in. 3 (mm3)
Effective plastic rnodulus of a section (or connecti n) at the location of a plastic
hinge, in. 3 (mm3) ZRBS '
Plastic section modulus at the center of the reduced earn section, in. 3 (mm3)
a Horizontal distance between a colurnn flange and th start of an RBS cut, in. (mm)
b Width of cornpression element as defined in the AIS Specification, in. (mm)
Prequalijied Connections for Special aoo intermediate St~el Moment rames for Seismic Applications
AMERICAN !NS11TtJTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTI , lNe.
 6.2-2 SYMBOLS
6.2-3

b Length of an RBS cut, in. (mm)

bbf Width of beam flange, in. (mm) GLOSSARY
bp Width of plate, in. (mm)
C Depth of cut at the center of the reduced beam section, in. (mm) The Standard uses the following terms in addition to
dbReq'd Required bolt diameter, in. (mm) Specification for Structural Steel Buildings and the 2005
fI Load factor detennined by the applicable building code for live loads but not less than Steel Buildings. Glossary terms are italicized where they
0.5 Air carbon arc cutting. Process of cutting stee1 by the
Horizontal gage between bolts, in. (mm) t from an electric arc applied
simuItaneously with an air jet.
Distance from the centerline of a compression flange to the tension side inner bolt
rows in 4E and 4ES end-plate moment connections, in. (mm) Backing. Piece of metal or other material, placed at the
the root pass. root to facilitate placement of
Distance from centerline of a compression flange to the centerline of the i th ten-
sion bolt row, in. (mm) Backgouge. Process of removing by grinding or Mr
Distance from the centerline of a compression flange to the tension side outer arc cutting all or a portion of the
root pass of a complete joint penetration groove
bolt row in 4E and 4ES connections, in. (mm) from the reverse si de of a joint
from which a root was originally placed.
Height of stiffener, in. (mm)
Distance from outer face of a column flange to web toe of fillet (design value) or Complete joint penetration (CJP) groove weld.
in which weld metal extends
fillet weld, in. (mm) through the joint thickness.
Number of bolts at a compression flange
Concrete structural slab. Reinforced concrete slab or fill on steel deck with a total
Number of inner bolts
Number of outer bolts
thickness of 3 in. (75 mm) or greaterand a concrete cQlmplre~;snre strength in excess of
2000 psi (14 MPa).
Pitch between the inner and outer row of bolts in an 8ES end-plate moment con-
nection, in. (mm) Non-fusible backing. Backing material that will not fuse
welding process. the base metals during the
Pf Vertical distance between beam flange and the nearest row of bolts, in. (mm)
Pfi Distance from the inside of a beam tension flange to the nearest inside bolt row, Plastic hinge location. Location in a beam column asseml:lly
in. (mm)
pation is assumed to occur through the development of
Pfo Distance from the outside of a beam tension flange to the nearest outside bolt row,
in. (mm) Probable maximum moment at plastic hinge. Exp~cted
Psi Distance from the inside face of a column stiffener to the nearest inside bolt row, location along a member, considering the probable
in. (mm) for the specified steel and effects of strain hardening.
Distance from the outside face of column stiffener to the nearest outside bolt row, Reinforcing fillet. Fillet weld applied to a groove welded
in. (mm) , to obtain a contour to
reduce stress concentrations associated with joint rTAr\Tn ••It .... ,

s Distance from the centerline of the most inside or most outside tension bolt row to
the edge of a yield line pattem, in. (mm) Root. Portion of a multi-pass weld deposited in the first
Thickness of beam web, in. (mm) Thermal cutting. Group of cutting processes that severs
Thickness of column web, in. (mm) removes metal by localized
melting, burning, or vaporizing of the workpiece.
Thickness of plate or panel zone inc1uding doubler plates, in. (mm)
w Uniform beam gravity load, kips per linear ft (N per linear mm) Weld tab. Piece of metal affixed to the end of a welded· .
to facilitate the initiation and
Resistance factor for ductile limit states termination of weld passes outside the structural joint.
Resistance factor for non-ductile limit states

Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Moment Frames for Seismic Applications
AMERICAN !NSTITITrE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. Prequalified Connections lor Special and Intermediate Steel Moment for Seismic Applications
AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL !Nc.
6.2-4

6.2-5
CHAPTER 1
CHAPTER2
GENERAL
DESIGN REQUIRErv ENTS
1.1 Scope
2.1
This Standard speeifies design, detailing, fabrieation and quality eriteria for Special ~nd Intermediate Mon~ent Frame
eonneetioris that are prequalified in aeeordanee with the AISC Seismic Provisions Connectlon Types
for Structural Steel Buildings (herein referred to as the AISC Seismic Provisions) ~he connection types listed in Table 2.1 are 1 requalified for use in connectin
for use with speeial moment fraines (SMF) and intermediate moment frames eams to column flanges in special moment frames (SMF) and int d' g
(IMF). The eonneetions eontained in this Standard are prequalified to meet the moment frames (IMF) .th· th . erme late
Wl ID e luID.tations specified in this Standard.
requirements in the AISC Seismic Provisions only when designed and eon-
strueted in accordance with the requirenients of this Standard. Nothing in this
Standard shall preclude the use of connection types contained herein outside TABLE2.1.
the indicated limitations, or the use of other connection types, when satisfactory Prequalified Moment Co tlnections
evidenee of qualifieation in aeeordance with Appendix S of the AISC Seismic
Provisions is presented to the authority having jurisdietion. Connection Type ~eference
Section Systems
Reduced beam section (RSS) I
1.2 References ~hapter 5 SMF, IMF
The following standards form a part of this Standard to the extent that they Solted unstiffened extended end plate (SUEEP)
phapter 6 SMF*, IMF
are referenced and applicable: Solted stiffened extended end plate (SSEEP)
(~hapter 6 SMF*, IMF
2005 AISC Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings *Not prequalified for special moment fram (SMF .
with the steel es s) wlth concrete ~ tructural slabs in direct contact
2004 AWS DI.I Structural Welding Code - Steel (herein referred to as AWS
Dl.l)
2004 RCSC Specijicationfor Structural Joints using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts 2.2
(herein referred to as the RCSC Specification)
Connection Stiffness
AH connections eontained in this Standard shal
2005 AISC Specijication for Structural Steel Buildings (herein referred to as (Type FR) for the purpose of seismic analysis. be considered fully restrained
the AISC Specijication)
2.3 Members
1.3 General
All design, materials, and workmanship shall conform to the requirements of The eonnections contained in this Standard are p equalified' d .
the· f ID accor anee Wlth
the AISC Seismic Provisions, and this Standard. The connections eontained in this reqU1T~mentS? ~e.AISC Seismic Provision~ when used to eonnect mem-
Standard shall be designed aeeording to the Load and Resistanee Factor Design bers meeting the lIIDltatlOns of Sections 2.3.1 or ~.3.2, as applieable.
(LRFD) provisions. Conneetions designed according to this Standard are per-
mitted to be used in struetures designed aceording to the LRFD or Allowable
2.3.1 Rolled Wide-Flange Members
Strength Design (ASD) provisions of the AISC Seismie Provisions. RoHed wide-flange me b -+' •
. . m ers eOUJ.OTIDIng to the c oss-section profile limitations
apphcable to the speclfic connection in this Stanc ard shall be permitted.

2.3.2 Built-up Members

Built-up members having a d bl .
. d when:
perIDltte ou y symmetric, 1- haped cross-section shall be

1
( ) F~a;g~S and we~s have width, depth, and thid~ess profiles similar to roUed (
WI ~- ange sections ~eeting the profile limita~ons for wide-flange sections
applIcable to the speelfie eonnection in this St¡mdard, and

Prequalified Connections jor Special and Intermediate Steel Moment Frames jor Seismic Applications
AMERICAN !NSTITUI'E OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION. !Nc. Prequalified Connections jor Special and Intermediate Steel Moment F1'pmes far S· . A r .
AMERICAN !NsTITU1E OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. elsmlC pp lcatzons
6.2-6 CHAPTER 2. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
CHAPTER 2. DESIGN REQUlREMENTS
6.2-7
(2) Webs are continuously connected to flanges in accordance with the re-
The width-to-thickness ratio (h;t ) of
quirements of Sections 2.3.2a or 2.3.2b, as applicable. used only as webs shall con-
form to the requirements of the AISC
Provisions.
2.3.2a Beams Within a zone extending from 12 in. (300
aboye the upper beam flange
Within a zone extending from the beam end to a distance not less than one beam to 12 in. (300 mm) below the lower
flange, flange and web plates
depth beyond the plastic hinge location, Sh' unless specifically indicated in this of box columns shall be joined by CJP
welds. Outside this zone, box
Standard the web and flanges shall be connected using complete joint penetratíon column web and flange plates s:hall be
welds or groove welds. . sly connected by fillet
(ClPJ groove welds with a pair of reinforcing fillet welds. The minimum size of these
fillet welds shall be the lesser of 5116 in. (8 mm) or the thickness of the beam web. 4. Flanged Cruciform Columns
Exception: This provision shall not apply where individual connection pre- The elements of flanged cruciform "'V>UUJUll1.
-. whether fabricated from rolled
qualifications specify other requirements. shapes or built up frOPl plates, shall meet the
Provisions. . of the AISC Seismic

2.3.2b Columns
BuiIt-up columns shalI conform to the provisions of subsections (1) through
(4), as applicable:Built-up columns shall satisfy the requirements of AISC
Specification Section E6 except as modified in this Section. Transfer of all
internal forces and stresses between elements of the built-up column shall be Within a zone extending from 12 in (300
through weIds. to 12 in. (300 mm) below the lower' beam aboye the upper beam flange
1. I-Shaped Welded Columns sections shall be welded to the web of the the ;eb of the te~-shap.ed
CJP groove welds with . f' -shaped sectlOn Wlth
The eIements ofbuilt-up I-shaped coIumns shall conform to the requirements a prur o welds. The minimum size
of the AISC Seismic Provisions. of fillet welds shall be the lesser of 5116 in (300 ) th .
th 1 . mm or e thICkness of
e co umn web. Continuity plates shall to th .
Within a zone extending from 12 in. (300 mm) aboye the upper beam flange to wide-flange coIumns.' e reqUlrements for
12 in. (300 mm) beIow the lower beam flange, unless specificalIy indicated in
this Standard, the coIumn webs and flanges shall be connected using OP groove 2.4
welds with a pair of reínforcing fillet we1ds. The minimum size of fillet welds Connection Design Parameters
shalI be the lesser of 5/16 in. (8 mm) or the thickness of the column web.. 2.4.1 Load Combinations and Re:sis'tan
2. Boxed Wide-Flange Columns Where available strengths are calculated in accord1anc:e
The wide-flange shape of a boxed wide-flange coIumn shall conform to the the resistance factors specified therein shall with the AIsc Specification,
al 1 When available strengths are
requirements of the AISC Seismic Provisíons. c cu ated in accordance with this Standard, the
be used as specified in the applicable s¿ction of factors ct>d and ct>n shall
The width-to-thickness ratio (bit) of pIates used as flanges shall not exceed and ct>n shali be taken as: Standard. The values of ct>d
0.6JE/~, where b shall be taken as not les s than the c1ear distance between
plates. (a) Por ductile limit states:

The width-to-thickness ratio (hltwJ of pIates used only as webs shall conform ct>d = 1.00
to the provisions of Table 1-8-1 of the AISC Seismic Provisions.
(b) Por non-ductile limit states:
Within a zone extending from 12 in. (300 mm) aboye the upper beam flange to ct>n = 0.90
12 in. (300 mm) below the lower beam flange, flange and web plates of boxed
wide-flange columns shall be joined by CJP groove weIds. Outside this zone, 2.4.2
plate elements shall be continuously connected by fillet or groove welds. Plastic Hinge Location
The d~stance of the plastic hinge from the face
3. Built-up Box Columns
The width-to-thickness ratio (bit) of pIates used as flanges shall not exceed
0.6JE/~, where b shalI be taken as not less than the clear distance between
take~ m accordance with the requirements for
specIfied herein.
the column, Sh' shall be
individual connection as (
web pIates.

Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Moment Frames for Seismic Applications
AMERICAN lNSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INC.
Prequalified Connections ¡or Special and Intermediate Steel Moment
¡or Seismic Applications
AMERICAN lNSTITUlE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION,
6.2-8 CHAPTER 2. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS CHAPTER 2. DESIGN REQUlREMENTS
6.2-9

. Moment at Plastic Hinge

2.4.3
Probable
The Ma~{Imum
probable maxlmum moment at the location of the plastic hinge shall be
bbf= beam flange width, in. (mm)
tbf =beam flange tluckness, in. (mm)

taken as: M =e R FZ (2.4.3-1) ~b = specified minimum yield stress of th beam flartge, ksi (MPa)
pr pr y y e ~c =specified minÚnum yield stress of th column flange, ksi (MPa)
~b =ratio of the expected yield stress of
Wh:; = robable maximum moment at pÚlstic hinge, kip-in. (N-mm) minimum yield stress, per the AISC
e beam material to the specified
ismic Provisions
~r = ~atio of the expected yield stress ~~ the specified IDlnImUm yleld ~c = ratio of the expected yield stress of th
column material to the specified
y stress F' see AISC Seismic PrOVlSlons . minimum yield stress, per the AISC S ismic Provisions
Z = effecti:e' plastic modulusofthe section (or connection) at the location
e . hin . 3 (mm3) (3) When the beam flange connects to the ange of the I-shape in a boxed
of the plastic ge, m. . . . wide-flange column having a thickness at satisfies Equations 2.4.4-3
e =factor to account for the peak: connec~on strength, lncdl~:~; stram and 2.4.4-4, continuity plates need not b provided.
dditional reinforcement , an
hardeni~g,
connection 10Caldi~ti~straI~~~ess
pr .

bbfJ~1.8b ~bRyb
con ons. otherwise specifically indicated in this
Standard, the value of Cpr shall be: ef
t -
>04 [1-
o
bbf[b _
b 2 ef 4
t
f bf F R (2.4.4-3)
ef ye ye
F +F
C =~:::;}.2 (2.4.3-2)
pr 2F
y
(2.4.4-4)
where .
F = speclfied . .
IDlmmum . Id stress of the type of steel to be used in the
yle
y yielding elemen!, ksi (MPa) . th
2.4.4a Continuity Plate Thickness
. .
F = specified IDlnImUm tensi1e strength of the type of steel to be used m e Where contimiity plates are required, the thickness f the plates shall be determined
as follows:
u yielding element, ksi (MPa)

(a) For one-sided (exterior) connections, contin ity plate thickness shall be at
2.4.4 Beam Flange Continuity Plates Ieast one-half of the thickness of the beam ge.
Continuity plates shall be provided.
(b) For two-sided (interior) connections, the con °nuity plate thickness shall be
Exceptions: at Ieast equal to the thicker of the two be flanges on either side of the
column.
(1) For bolted end-plate connections, the provisions of Section 6 shall a~PlY. I
Continuity plates shall also conform to the' requirem nts of Section 11 Oof the AISC
fl:~~ng
connects to the flange of a wide-flange or bUllt-up Specification.
I-shapethdeco
(2) When belam
umn a thickness that satisfies
. . Equations 2.4.4-1 and
2.4.4-2, continuity plates need not be provlded.
2.4.4b Continuity Plate to Column Attac
Cpntinuity plates, if provided, shalI be welded t column flanges using CJP
groove welds.
(2.4.4-1)
Continuity plates shall be welded to column webs using groove welds or fillet
welds. The required strength of the sum of the we ded joints of the continuity
plates to the colUnin web shall be the smallest of following:
(2.4.4-2)
(a) The sum of the design stI;engths in tension of the ontact areas of the continuity
plates to the column flanges that have attached eam flanges.
t =IDlnImUm
where .. . d th·ICkness of column flange when no continuity
requrre (b) .The design strength in shear of the coiltact area
cf plates are provided, in. (mm) web.

. fi Speelal
Prequalified Conneettons or
. and lntermed'la te Steel Moment Frames for Seismie Applieations
IN OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INc. Prequalified Conneetions for Speeial and Intermediate Steel N/oment Fra s for Seismie Applieations

-------------------------------
AMERICAN STITU1E
AMERICAN INslTrUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, c.

-
6.2-10 CHAPTER 2. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

6.2-11
(c) The design strength in shear of the column panel zone. . .
(d) The sum of the expected yield strengths of the beam flanges transrruttmg CHAPTER3
force to the continuity plates.
WELDING REQUIRE ENTS
2.5 PanelZones
3.1 Filler Metals
to the minimum requirements for SMF or IMP, as
Panel zones shall c?nform . 10 3 f the AISC Seismic Provisions.
a licable in SectlOn 9.3 or SectlOn . o Filler metal s shall conform to the requiremen of Section 7.3 andAppendix W
'¿~erences'to matching of tested connections shall not apply. of the AISC Seismic Provisions.

3.2 Welding Procedures

2.6
Protected Zone for each requalified connection. The
The protected zone shall be as de~ned f S Pti' 7 4 of the AISC Seismic Welding procedures shall be in accordance w th Section 7.3 and Appendix W
of the AISC Seismic Provisions.
~ee
hall t th requrrements o ec on .
protected zone s . e in this Standard. Unless otherwise specifically
Provisions, except as mdicated d f the beam shall be defined as 3.3
. thi Stand d the protecte zone o
indicated ID s ar , half of the beam depth beyond Backing at Beam to Column a d Continuity Plate to
f: f th olumn flange to one- Column Joints
the area from the ace o. e c . b webs when detailed in accordance
the theoretical hinge pOIDt. ~olt hole~ ~ e7th' S~dard shall be permitted. 3.3.1
with the individual connection provISlons o IS ,

Steel bacldng used at continuity plate to colu welds need not be removed. At
column flanges, steel backing left in place s aH be attached to the column
flange using a continuous 51I6-in. (8:-mm) fiH t weld on the edge below the
CJP gro ove weld.

When backing is removed, following the remov of backing, the root pass shall
be backgouged to sound weld metal and back elded with a reinforcing fillet.
The reinforcingfillet shall be continuous with a 'nimum size of 51I6 in. (8 mm).

3.3.2 Steel Backing at Beam Bottom

Where steel backing is used with CJP groove w lds between the bottom beam
flange and the column, the backing shall be rem ed.

Following the removal of backing, the root pass
weld metal and backwelded with a reinforcing fil
fillet leg adjacent to the coluIDlI shall be a minim
reinforcing fillet leg adjacent to the beam flange
is located on the beam flange base metal.
hall be backgouged to sound
et. The size of the reinforcing
m of 5116 in. (8 mm), and the
all be such that the fillet toe

Exception: If the base metal and weld root are gr und smooth after removal of
backing, the reinforcing fillet adjacent to the be flange need not extend to
base metal.

3.3.3 Steel Backing at Beam Top Flang

Where steel backing is used with CJP groove welds etween the top beam flange
and the column, and the backing is not refuoved, th backing shall be attached to
the column by a continuous 51I6-in. (8-mm) fillet eId on the edge beIow the
CJP groove weld.

. and Interme diate

Prequalified Connections for Speclal STEELSteel Moment Frames
CONSTRUCTION !Ne. for Seismic Applications

~~~~~_~~_ru_e_~~!N_S_~~~O_F~~~~~~_'~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~_~ ~ ~
Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Moment h
s for Seismic Applications
AMErueAN INsTlTUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, e.
______ ____
6.2-12 CHAPTER 3, WELDING REQUIREMENTS CHAPTER 3, WELDING REQUIREMENTS
6.2-13

3.3.4 Prohibited Welds at Steel Backing 3.5 Tack Welds

Backing at beam flange-to-column flange joints shall not be welded to the In the protected zone, tack welds attachin b k'
underside of the beam flange, nor shall tack welds be permitted at this location, where they will b ' , g a mg and weld tabs shall be placed
e mcorporated mto a final eld.
If fillet welds or tack welds are placed between the baeking and the beam flange
in error, they shall be repaired as follows: 3.6 Continuity Platas
(1) The weld shall be removed such that the fillet weld or tack weld no longer Along the web, the comer clip shall be detai ed s .
attaches the baeking to the beam flange. tance of at least 1112 in (38 )b . o that the clIp extends a dis-
. mm eyond the blished "k" d tail di
the roUed shape. Along the flan th 1 .. e mension for
(2) The surface of the beam flange shall be ground flush and shall be free of ence with the radius of the roIl dgeh' e p ate hall be clIpped to avoid interfer-
defects. e s ape and sh 1be detailed th t th .
not exceed a distance of 112 in (12 )b so a e clip does
. .. mm ey nd the published "k " d '1 .
(3) Any gouges or notches shall be repaired. Repair welding shall be done with menSlOn. The clip shall be detailed to f ¡ ' l i ' 1 etru dl-
E7018 SMAW electro des or other filler metals meeting the requirements both the flange weld and the web weld :e~a e sUltable ,w~ld te~nations for
c
of Section 3.1 for demand critical welds. A special welding procedure spec- a minimum radius of 112 in. (12 mm).: . urved clIp IS used, It shall have
ification (WPS) is required for this repair. Following welding, the repair
weld shall be ground smooth. At the end of the weld adjacent to the colum .
for continuity plates shall not b d: weblflange ]uncture, weld tabs
e use " except en permitted b th .
record. Unless specified to be removed b t h . Y e engmeer of
3.3.5 Non-Fusible Backing at Beam Flange-to-Column not be removed when used I'n th' 1 ' Y e e gmeer of record, weld tabs shall
IS ocatlOn.
Joints
Where continuity plate welds are made witho
ut ~~ld tabs near the column fillet
Where non-fusible baeking is used with CJP groove welds between the beam
radius, weld layers shall 'be permitted t b
flanges and the column, the baeking shall be removed, the root baekgouged to measured from the vertical plane Th ~ ~ tran luoned at an angle of 0° to 45°
sound weld metal and backwelded with a reinforcing fillet. The size of the rein- as that portion of the weld havi~ e ,ecuve 1 gth of ~e weld shall be defined
forcingfillet leg adjacent to the coluinn shall be a minimum of 5/16 in. (8 mm) and not be required th g fu~l.slze. Non destructlVe testing (NDT) shall
the reinforcing fillet leg adjacent to the beam flange shall be such that the fillet on e tapered or transluon portio of the weld not having full '
SlZe.
toe is located on the beam flange base metal.
3.7 QU~lity Control and Quality Ass
Exception: If the base 'metal and weld root is ground smooth after removal of
Quallty control and quality assurance shall be in
baeking, the reinforeing fillet adjacent to the beam flange need not extend to the AISC S' . Provisions. ccordance with Appendix Q of
elsmle
base metal.

3.4 D~tails and Treatment 01 Weld Tabs

Where used, weld tabs shall be removed to within l/S in. (3 mm) of the base
metal surface and the end of the weld finished, except at continuity plates where
removal to within 1/4 in. (6 mm) ofthe plate edge shall be permitted. Removal shall
be by air earbon are eutting (CAC-A), grinding, chipping, or thermal eutting. The
process shall be controlled to minimize errant gouging. The edges where weld tabs
have been removed shall be finished to a surface roughness of 500 microinches
(13 micron) or better. The contour of the weld end shall provide a smooth tran-
sition to adjacent surfaces, free of notches, gouges and sharp corners. Weld
defects greater than 1116-in. (1.6-rnm) deep shall be excavated and repaired by
welding in accordance with an applicable WPS. Other weld defects shall be
removed by grinding, faired to a slope not greater than 1:5.

(
Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Moment Frames for Seismic Applications PrequaUfied Connections lor Special and Intermediate Steel Mo ' ,
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NsTlTUTE OF STEEL C ' mentp,., meslor SelsmlC Applications
O~STRUCTION, c,

~~~--------------~~------------~
6.2-14 6.2-15

CHAPTER4 CHAPTER5
BOlTING REQUIREMENTS REDUCED ,BEAM SECTI(PN (RBS)
MOMENT CONNEC·r-ION
4.1 Fastener Assemblies
Bolts shall be pretensioned high-strength bolts conforming to ASTM A32~ or 5.1 General
A490. Twist-off type tension control bolt assemblies of equivalent mechamcal In a reduced beam section (RBS) moment ccnnection (Figure 5.1), portions
properties and chemical composition may be substituted for A325 and A490 of the beam flanges are :selectively trtmmed in ~e region adjacent to the beam-
fastener assemblies. to-column connection. Yielding and hinge fl rmation are in tended to occur
primarily within the reduced section of the be amo
4.2 Installation Requirements
Installation requirements shall be in accordance with AISC Sei.sm~c Prov.isio~s 5.2 Systems
and the RCSC Specification, except as otherwise specifically Indlcated In thIS RBS connections are prequalified for use in spec al moment frame (SMF) and in-
Standard. termediate moment frame (IMF) systems withi the limits of these provisions.

4.3 Quality Control and Quality As~urance. . 5.3 Prequalification Limits

Quality control and quality assurance shall be In accordance wlth Appendix Q of
the AISC Seismic Provisions.

I
2 2
R =Radiu of Cut = 4e + b
Be
/
v j ~ +_
~~~~~~I ,,~ -=- o~o:. oo~"
~1. e
a b

-- --y1--.-.- Reduced Beam

Section

p
o

o
~

-'-~'-'-
. ~ __ Protactad Zona (
Fig. 5.1.: Reduced bearn section c.pnnection.

Prequalified Connectionsfor Special and Intermediate Steel Moment Framesfor Seismic Applications Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Mament F; ames far Seismic Applications
AMERICAN lNSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, lNc. AMERICAN lNsTlTUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION lNc.

--------_.- .... _-_ •. _-_.-_ .. _- --" •.. _.•.. _.•-...

6.2-16 CHAPTER 5. REDUCED BEAM SECTION (RBS) MOMENT CONNECTION
5.3.1 Beam Limitations
Beams shaU satisfy the foUowing limitations:
(1) Beams shall be roUed wide-flange or built-up I-shaped members conform-
ing to the requirements of Section 2.3.
(2) Beam depth is limited to W36 (W920) for roUed shapes. Depth of built-up
sections shall not exceed the depth permitted for roUed wide-flange shapes.
(3) Beam weight is limited to 300 lbs/ft (447 kg/m).
(4) Beam flange thickness is limited to 13/4 in. (44.5 mm).
(5) The c1ear span-to-depth ratio of the beam shaU be limited as follows:
(a) For SMF systems, 7 or greater.
(b) For IMP systems, 5 or greater.
(6) Width-thickness ratios for the flanges and web ofthe beam shall conform to
the limits of the AlSC Seismic Provisions.
When determining the width-thickness ratio of the flange, the value of b¡
shall not be taken as less than the flange width at the ends of the center
two-thirds of the reduced section provided that gravity loads do not shift the
location of the plastic hinge a significant distance from the center of the
reduced beam section.
(7) Lateral bracing of beams shall be provided as foUows:
(a) For SMF systems, in conformance with Section 9.8 oftheAlSC Seismic
Provisions. Supplemental lateral bracing shall be provided at the
reduced section in conformance with Section 9.8 of the AISC Seismic
Provisions for lateral bracing provided adjacent to the plastic hinges.
References to the tested assembly in Section 9.8 of the AISC Seismic
Provisions do not apply.
When supplementallateral bracing is provided, attachment of supple-
mental lateral bracing to the beam shaU be located no greater than d/2
beyond the end of the reduced beam section farthest from the face of the
column, where d is the depth of the beam. No attachment of lateral
bracing shall be made to the beam in the region extending from the
face of the colurnn to end of the reduced section farthest from the face
of the column.
(b) For IMF systems, in conformance with Section 10.8 of the AlSC Seismic
Provisions.
Exception: For both systems, where the beam supports a concrete struc-
tural slab that is connected between the protected zones with welded shear
connectors spaced a maximum of 12 in. (300 mm) on center, supplemental
top and bottom flange bracing at the reduced section is not required.
Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Moment Frames for Seismic Applications
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRucnON. !Nc.
CHAPTER 5. REDUCED BEAM SECTION (RBS) MOMENT CO CTION 6.2-17
(8) The protected zone consists of the portion f beam between the face of fue
colurnn and the end of the reducf!d beam s ction cut farthest from the face
of the colurnn.
5.3.2 Column Limitations
Colurnns shall satisfy the foIlowing limitations:
(1) Colurnns shall be any of the roIled shapes r built-up sections permitted in
Section 2.3.
(2) The beam shall be connected to the flange
(3) RoIled shape column depth shall be limite to W36 (W920). The depth of
built-up wide-flange colurnns shaU not exce that for roUed shapes. Ranged
cruciform colurnns shall not have a width r depth greater than the depth
aIlowed for roUed shapes. Built-up box c lumns shaU not have a width
or depth exceeding '24 in. (610 rhm). Bo d wide-flange columns shaU
not have a width or depth exceeding 24 i . (610 mm) if participating in
orthogonal moment frames.
(4) There is no limit on the weight per foot of
(5) There are no additional requirements for fl
(6) Width-thickness ratios for the flanges and eb of columns shall conform
to the limits in Table 1-8-1 of the AISC Sei mic Proyisions.
(7) Lateral bracing of colurnns shall conform to ection 9.7 or 10.7 for SMF or
IMP, as applicable, in the AlSC Seismic Pro isions.
5.4 Beam-Column Relationship Limi ations
Beam-column connections shall satisfy the follo ing limitations:
( 1) Panel zones shall conform to the requireme ts for Sections 9.3 or 10.3 for
SMF or IMP, as applicable, in the AlSC Sei ic Provisions.
(2) Column-beam ratio s shaIl be limited as foIl s:
(a) For SMF systems, the column-beam oment ratio shaIl confprm to
the requirements of the AlSC Seismic P 'Ovisions. The value of L M* b
' , p
shall be taken equal to L (Mpr + M), w ere Mpr is computed accord-
ing to Equation ?8-5, and where Mv is e additional moment due to
shear amplification from the center of th reduced beam section to the
centerline of the colurnn. Mv can be com uted as VRBS (a + b/2 + dJ2),
where VRBS is the shear at the center f the reduced beam section
computed per Step 4 of Section 5.8, a an b are the dimensions shown
in Figure 5.1, and de is the depth of the column. " ,
I
(b) For IMP systems, the colurnn-beam mo ent ratio shall conform to the
requirements of Section 10.6 of the AIS Seismic Provisions.
Prequalified Connections lor Special and l1'J.termediate Ste~l Moment
AMERICAN !NsTlTUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCfIO
 CHAPTER 5. REDUCED BEAM SECTION (RBS) MOMENT CONNECTION
6.2-18
Beam Flange to Column Flange Weld Limitations
5.5
Beam flange to colurrm flange connections shall satisfy the following limitations:
(1) Beam flanges shall be connected to colurrm flanges using complete joint
penetration (CJP) groove welds. Beam flange welds shall conform to the
requirements for demand critical welds in Section 7.3 and Appendix W of the
AISC Seismic Provisions.
(2) Weld access hole geometry shall conform to the requirements of the AISC
Specification Section J1.6.
5.6 Beam Web to Column Connection Limitations
Beam web to colurrm web connections shall satisfy the following limitations:
(1) The required shear strength of the beam web connection shall be determined
according to Equation 5.8-9.
(2) Web connection detailsshall be limited as follows:
(a) For SMF systems, the beam web shall be connected to the column
flange using a CJP groove weld extending.between weld access holes.
The single plate shear connection shall be permitted to be used as back-
ing for the CJP groove weld. The thickness of the plate shall be at least
3/ 8 in. (10 mm). Weld tabs are not required at the ends of the CJP groove
weld at the beam web. Bolt holes in the beam web for the purpose of
erection are permitted.
(b) For IMF systems, the beam web shall be connected to the column flange
per as required for SMF systems.
Exception: For IMF, it is permitted to connect the beam web to the
colurrm flange using a bolted single plate shear connection. The bolted
single plate shear connection shall be designed as a slip-critical con-
nection, with the design slip resistance per bolt determined according
to Section J3.8 of the AISC Specification. The nominal bearing strength
at bolt holes shall not be taken greater than the value given by Equation
J3-6a of the AISC Specification. The design shear strength of the sin-
gle plate shear connection shall be determined based on shear yield-
ing of the gross section and on shear fracture of the net section. The
plate shall be welded to the colurrm flange with a CJP groove weld, or
with fillet welds on both sides of the plateo The minimum size of the
fillet weld on each side of the plate shall be 75 percent of the thickness
of the plateo Standard-size holes shall be provided in the beam web and
in the plate, except that short-slotted holes (with the slot parallel to the
beam flanges) may be used in either the beam web or in the plate,
but not in both. Bolts are permitted to be pretensioned either before or
after welding.
Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Moment Frames for Seismic Applications
AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRucnON, INc.
CHAPTER 5. REDUCED BEAM SECTION (RBS) MOMENT C
6.2-19
5.7 Fabrication of Flange Cuts
i
The reduced beam section shall be made u ing thermal cutting to produce a
smooth curve .. Th~ maximum surface roug ness of the thermally cut surface
shalldbe 500
. IDlcromches (13 microns) in acc rdance with ANSI B46. 1,as mea-
s.ure usmg AWS C4.1-77 Sample 4 or si lar visual comparator. All transi-
nons be~een the. reduced beam section and e unmodified beam flange shall be
rounded m ~e drrection of the flange leng to minimize notch effects due to
abrupt translUons. Comers between the redu ed section surface and the top and
bottom of the ~an~es shall be grotind to re ove sharp edges, but a minimum
chamfer or radius IS not required.
Thermal cutting tolerances shall be plus or ·nus 1/4 in. (6 mm) from the theo-
retical cut lineo The beam effective flange idth at any section shall have a
tolerance of plus or minus 3/8 in. (10 mm).
Gouges and notches that occur in th~ thermall cut RBS surface may be rep"'~"ed
b . din if : 1 u..u.
y ~n g ~ot ~ore than /4 in. (6 mm) dee . The gouged or notched area shall
be farred by gnnding so that a smooth transitio exists, and the totallength of the
area ground for the transition shall be no less an five times the depth of the re-
~oved gouge on each side of the gouge. If a s arp notch exists, the area shall be
mspected by MT after grinding to ensure that e entire depth of notch has been
removed Grin~g that increases the depth of th RBS cut more than 1/4 in. (6 mm)
beyond the specified d~pth of cut is not permi ted.
Gouges and notches that exceed 1/4 in. (6 mm) in depth, but not to exceed 112 in
~12 mm) in depth, and those notches and goug s where repair by grinding would
mcre~se the effective depth of the RBS cut bey nd tolerance, may be repaired by
we~dmg. The notch or gouge shall be remove and ground to provide a smooth
radius of not less than 1/4 in. in preparation for welding. The repair area shall be
. pre~eated t~ a temperature of 1500 F Qr the valu specified in AWS D 1.1 Table 3.2,
whichever IS greater, measured at the location f the weld repair.
Notches and gouges exceeding 112 in. (12 mm)· depth shall be repaired only with
a method approved by the engineer Oí record.
5.8 Design Procedure
STEP 1 - Choose trial values for the beam se tions, column sections and RBS
dimensions ti, b, and e (Figure 5.l) ubject to the limits:
0.5bbf~ a ~ 0.75b (5.8-1)
bJ
0.65d ~ b ~ 0.85d (5.8-2)
(5.8-3)
Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Mome t Frames for Seismic Applications
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRU ON, INc.
6.2-20 CHAPTER 5. REDUCED BEAM SECTION (RBS) MOMENT CONNECTION
CHAPTER 5. REDUCED BEAM SECTION (RBS) MQMENT C 6.2-21

where where
bbf =width of beam flange, in. (mm) JI =load factor det~rrnined by ~e applic le building code for live loads,
d = depth of beam, in. (mm) but not less than 0.5 .
a = distance from face of colurnn to start of RBS cut, in. (mm)
b= length of RBS cut, in. (mm) STEP 5 - Compute fue probable maximum oment at the face of the colurnn.
c = depth of cut at center of the reduced beam section, in. (mm)
The moment at the face of the colullID shall e computed from a free-bodydia~
gram of the segrnent of the beam between th center of the reduced bearn section
Confirrn that the beams and colurnns are adequate for aH load combinations and the face of the colurnn, as illustrated in igure 5.2.
specified by the applicable building code, ineluding the re~uced .section .of the
beam and that the design story drift for the frame comphes Wlth apphcable Based on this free-body diagram, the mome t at the face of the colurnn is com-
limit: specified by the applicable building codeo Calculation of elastic drift puted as foHows:
shall consider the effect of the reduced beam section. In lieu of specific cal- (5.8-6)
culations, effective elastic drifts may be calculated by multiplying elastic drifts
based on gross beam sections by 1.1 for flange reductions up to 50 percent of where
the beam flange width. Linear interpolation may be used for lesser values of Mf =probable maximum moment at fac of column, kip-in. (N-mm)
beam width reduction. VRBS =larger of the two values of shear ~
ce at the center of the reduced
beam section at each end of the be , kips (N)
STEP 2 - Compute the plastic section modulus at the center of the reduced beam Sh = a + bl2, in. (mm)
section:
Equation 5.8-6 neglects the gravity load on the portion of the beam between
(5.8-4)
the center of the reduced beam section and e face of the column. If desired,
the gravity load on this small portion of the beam is perrnitted to be ineluded
where . . 3 3
in the free-body diagram shown in Figure .2 and in Equation 5.8-6,
Z =plastic section modulus at center of the reduced beam se~non, m. (mm)
e . . . 3( 3)
Zx =plastic section modulus for fuH beam cross-secnon, m. mm
STEP 6 - Compute the plastic mom:ent of th beam based on the expected yield
tbf = thickness of beam flange, in. (mm) stress:

STEP 3 - Compute the probable maxirnum moment at the center of the reduced (5.8-7)
beam section:
(5.8-5)

where
Mpr =probable maximum moment at center of the reduced beam section, 1. RBS
kip-in. (N-mm)

j)et
1-
)
STEP 4 - Compute the shear force at the center of the reduced bearn sections at
each end of the beam.
) j)
The shear force at the center of the reduced bearn sections shall be deterrnined by
=== )
Vu M, M, tj::::::n:rnnif VRBS Mpr
a free body diagram of the portion of the beam between the centers of the re-
duced beam sections. This calculation shall assume the moment at the center of
each reduced beam section is Mpr and shall inelude gravity loads acting on the
beam based on the load combination 1.2D + J1L + 0.2S

Fig. 5.2. Free-b04y diagram beiween cent r of RBS and face of column~

Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Moment Frames for Seismic Applications
AMERICAN lNS1TTIITE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc.
Prequalified Connections for Special dnd IntermediatJ Steel Mo
AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEBL CONSTRU
6.2-22 CHAPTER 5. REDUCED BEAM SECTION (RBS) MOMENT CONNECTION
6.2-23

where . ki .
M pe =p lastie moment of beam based on expeeted yleld stress, p-m. CHAPTER
(N-mm)
SOlTED UNSTIFFENED AND S IFFENED EXTENDED
STEP 7 - Check thatM¡does not exeeed <l>dMpe' as follows: END-PLATE MOMgNT C NNECTIONS
M¡~<I>dMpe (5.8-8)
6.1 General
If Equation 5.8-8 is not satisfied, inerease the value of c ami/or deerease the Bolted end-plate eonneetions arernade by eldingthe bearn to an end-plate and
values of a and b, and repeat Steps 2 through 7. bolting the end-plate to a eolunin flange. The three end-plate eonfigurations
shown in Figure 6.1 are eovered: in this s tion and are prequalified under the
STEP 8 - Determine the required shear strength ~ of beam and beam web-to- AISC Seismic Provisions within the limita .ons of this Standard.
~-- eolumn eonneetion from:
The behavior of thistype of eonneetion can eontrolled by a number of different
2M limit states including flexural yielding of e bearn seetion, flexural yielding of
V =-----.l!!....+V . (5.8-9)
u L' gravzty the end-plates, yielding of the eQlumn p el zone, tension failure of the end-
plate bolts, shear failure of the end-plate bo ts, or failure of various welded eon-
where neetions. The intent of the design eriteria p ovided here is to provide suffieient
V =required shear strength of beam and beam web-to-eolumn strength in the elem~nts of the eonneetions o ensure that the inelastie deforma-
u eonneetion, kips (N) tion of the eonneetion is aehieved by beam ielding.
L' = distanee between the eenters of the redueed beam seetions,
in. (mm) 6.2 Systems
V . = beam shear force resulting from 1.2D + f1L + 0.2S, kips (N). Extended end-plate eonneetions are prequali ed for use in special moment frarne
gravx = load factor determined by the applieable building eode for hve (SMF) and intermediate moment (rarne ( ) systems.
loads, but not less than 0.5
Exception: SMF systems in direet eontact ith concrete structural slabs are not
prequalified.
Check design shear strength of beam aeeording to Chapter G of the AISC
Specification.

STEP 9 - Design the beam web-to-eolumn eonneetion aeeording to Seetion 5.6.

STEP 10 - Check eo~tinuity plate requirements aeeording to Chapter 2.

STEP 11 - Check eolumn panel zone aeeording to Seetion 5.4.

STEP 12 - Check eolumn-beam moment ratio aeeording to Seetion 5.4.

(a) Four-Bolt (b) Four-Bolt (e) Eight-Bolt

Unstiffened,4E Stiffened, 4ES Stiffened, 8ES

Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Moment Fra;;:/ for Seismic Applications
Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate,Steel Mo
AMERICAN lNsTITUTE OF STEEL CONsTRUcnON, •
AMERICAN lNS1ITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRU
6.2-24 CHAPTER 6. BOLTED UNSTlFFENED AND STIFFENED EXTENDED ... CONNECTIONS CHAPTER 6. BOLTED UNSTlFFENED AND
STlFFENEDE
ED ... CONNECTIONS 6.2-25

6.3 Prequalification Limits web and flanges shall be connected sin .th
Table 6.1 is a summary of the range of parameters that have been satisfactorily pair of filIet welds each having . 3/ g ~l er a CJP groove weld or a
tested. AH connection elements shall be within the ranges shown. but not less than 1/4 in. (6 mm) Fo:~: 4 ~lmes the beam web thiclcness
shall not be less than that requked t emru~der of the beam, the weld size
to the flanges. o ac omplish shear transfer from the web
TABLE 6.1.
Parametric Limitations on Prequalification (2) Beam depth, d, is limited ro values sh
in Table 6.1.
Four-Bolt Unstiffened Four-Bolt Stiffened Eight-Bolt Stiffened (3) There is no limit on the weight per foo of beams.
(4E) (4ES) (8ES) 4
( ) Beam flange thickness is limited to the values shown in Table 6 1
Parameter MáXimum Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum Minimum (5) The clear span-to-d th . . .
in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) ep ratio of the be shall be limited as follows:
tp 21/4 (57) (13) 11/2 (38) (13) 21/2 (64) 3f4 (19)
I (a) For SMF systems, 7 or greater.
1/2 1/2
i
10 3/4 (273) 103/4 (273) 103/4 (273) (b) For IMF systems, 5 or greater.
.bp 7 (178) 15 (381) 9 (229)
i
j
6 (152) 4 (102) 6 (152) 31/4 (83) 6 (152) 5 (127) I (6) Width-thiclcness ratios for the flan es d
9
the limits of the :AISC Seismz.c P g .. web of the beam shall conform to
41/2 (114) 11/2 (38) 51/2 (140) 13/4 (44) 2 (51) 13/4 (44) rovzslO s.
Pfi; Pfo

I
(7) Lateral bracing of beams shall be provi ed as follows:
Pb - - - - 3 3/4 (95) 3112 (89)
(a) For SMF systems, in conf6nnance
d 55 (1400) 25 (635) 24 (610) 13 3/4 (349) 36 (914) 181/2 (470) Provisions. , ·th Section 9.8 of the AISC Seismic
tbf 3/4 (19) 3fs (10) 3/4 (19) 3fs (10) 1 (25) 19132 (16)
(b) For IMF systems, in conformance
bbf 91/4 (235) 6 (152) 9 (229) 6 (152) 121/4(311) 7 3/4 (197) Provisions. th Section 10.8 of the AISC Seismic

(8) The protected zone shall be d~termined s follows:

where
tp = thickIless of the end-plate, in. (mm)
bp = width of the end-plate, in. (mm)
(al !,:,;;.::ti!:~;!:~;~~:~d-Piate connections: lbe portion af beam
the beam or 3 tiIIies the Wid~rn;:fafl a d~stance equal to the depth of
g =horizontal distance between bolts, in. (mm) whichever is less. ge rom the face of the column,
Pfi =vertical distance between beam flange and the nearest inner row of
bolts, in. (mm) (b) ~or Stiffihened extended en~-plate co nections: the portion of beam b
Pfo = vertical distance between beam flange and the nearest outer row of ween t e face of the column and d. e-
the end of the stiffi 1; lstance equal to the location of
bolts, in. (mm) th. ener p us one-hal the depth of the beam or 3 ti .
Pb = distance between the inner and outer row of bolts in an eight-bolt e wldth of:the beam fl~ge, whic ever is less. mes
connection, in. (mm) 6.5
d =depth of the connecting beam, in. (mm)
Column Limitations
Columns shall satisfy the following limitatio s:
tbf =thickness ofbeam flange, in. (mm)
(1)
bbf =width of beam flange, in. (mm) The end-plate shall be connected to the ange of the column.
(2)
The column depth shall be limited to the beam depth or shallower.
6.4 Beam Limitations
(3) There is no limit on the weight per foot f columns.
Beams shall satisfy the foHowing limitations:
4
(1) Beams shall be roUed or welded built-up wide-flange shapes. ( ) There are no additional requirements for flange thickn
ess.
At moment-connected ends of welded built-up sections, within at least the (5) Width-thickness ratios for the flanges an
to the limits in Table 1-8-1 of the AISC web of the column shall conform
depth of beam or 3 times the width of flange, whichever is less, the beam ismic Provisions.

Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Moment Frames for Seismic Applications Prequalified Connectionsfor Special and Intermediate Steel Mo . .
AMERICAN !NsTlTUTE OF STEEL CoNSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTlTUTE OF STEa C nt Frames lor SelsmlC Applications
ONSTRU ON, !Nc.
6.2-26 CHAPTER 6. BOLTED UNSTIFFENED AND STIFFENED EXTENDED ... CONNECTIONS CHAPTER 6. BOLTED UNSTIFFENED AND S~NED EXjrnNDED ... CONNECTIONS 6.2-27

6.6 Beam-Column Relationship Limitations 6.9 Connection Detailing

Bearn-to-column connections shall satisfy the following limitations:
(1) Panel zones shall conforrn to the requirements of Sections 9.3 or 10.3 for
-r---
SMF or IMF, as applicable, in the AISC Seismic Provisions.
I

.....~ t
c,J•
(2) The colurrm-bearn moment ratio shall conforrn to the requirements for SMF
7 ..o.Q..J
.Q

..o."u ~:t t .J::l~'

or IMF, as applicable, in the AISC Seismic Provisions. """"1

~
~
,I 1
6.7 Continuity Plates
Continuity pIates shall satisfy the following Iimitations:
~"-t
(1) The need for continuity plates shall be determined in accordance with
Section 6.10.
de
.1 I

(2) When provided, continuity pIates shall conform to the requirements of

Section 6.10. -~
(3) Continuity pIates shall be attached to columns by welds in accordance with
Section 2.4.4b and Section 3.6.
Exception: Continuity plates less than or equal to 3/ 8 in. (10 mm) shall be
permitted to be welded to column flanges using double-sided fillet welds. The t

required strength of the fillet weld shall not be less than ~Ac' where Ac is defined 1 p
as the contact areas between the continuity pIate and the column flanges that ~I c:t l
have attached bearn flanges and ~ is defined as the specified minimum yieId
stress of the continuity plateo

6.8 Bolts
Bolts shall conforrn to the requirements of Section 4. ,
I

Fig.6.2. Four-bolt unstiffened extended (4E end-plate geometry.

Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Moment Frames for Seismic Applications Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermedia~e Steel Mo Inent Frames for Seismic Applications
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTR~CTION, INc.
 6.2-28 CHAPTER 6. BOLTED UNSTIFFENED AND STIFFENED EXTENDED ... CONNECTIONS C.l:1At' lhK ó. HOLTED UNSTlFFENED AND STÍFFENED I:;XTEND
f"- ED ... CONNECTIONS 6.2-29

~bI -~~
t tllt •
_fI)
-j .0':0
.00..

l. de :1
- ~
o
o ~ -ofl> -S;! ~
_fI)
Q.._ ....
\... ., -.)..J ,
cr
I

'ii)
Q.

ttc tp _:. -O

L .s;:ti
st

-r-.-- -
I
f

Fig.6.3. Four-bolt stiffened extended (4ES) enq-plate geometry.

,.-----~
--

Fig.6.4. Eight-bolt stiffened extended (8ES end-plate geometry.

Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Moment Frames for Seismic Applications Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel M01~ent Frames lor Seismic Applications
AMERICAN !NSTITUI'E OF STEEL CONsTRuenoN, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF Sl'EEL CONSTR enON, !Nc.
6.2-30 CHAPTER 6. BOLTED UNSTlFFENED AND STIFFENED EXTENDED ... CONNECTIUNS CHAPTER 6. BOLTED UNSTlFFENED ANO STlFFENED
XTENDED ... CONNECTIONS 6.2-31

6.9.1 Gage
The gage, g, is as defined in Figures 6.2 through 6.4. The maximum gage dimen-
sion is limited to the width of the connected beam flange.

·6.9.2 Pitch and Row Spacing 1"

The minimum pitch distance is the bolt diameter plus 1/2 in. (12 mm) for bolts up
to l-in. (25-mm) diameter, and the bolt diameter plus 3/4 in. (19 mm) for larger -//-
diameter bolts. The pitch distance, Pfi and p¡o' is the distance from the face of
• ••
the beam flange to the centerline of the nearer bolt row, as shown in Figures 6.2
through 6.4. • •
The spacing, Pb' is as defined in Figure 6.4. The spacing of the bolt rows shall be
• •
at least 22/3 times the bolt diameter.
• •

6.9.3 End-Plate Width • •

The width of the end-plate shall be greater than or equal to the connected beam
flange width. The effective end-plate width shall not be taken as greater than the
• •
connected beam flange plus 1 in. (25 mm). • •
6.9.4 End-Plate Stiffener
• •
The two extended stiffened end-plate connections, Figures 6.1 (b) and (e), require
a gusset plate welded between the connected beam flange and the end-plate. The
minimum stiffener length shall be:
Fig.6.5. End-plate stiffenerlayouta geometry (8ES)
h , (4ES geometry similar.
L =_st_
st tan 300 (6.9-1)

where hst is the height of the end-plate from the outside face of the beam flange
to the end of the end-plate (see Figure 6.5).
The stiffener plates shall be terminated at the beam flange and at the end of the
end-plate with landings approximately 1 in. (25 mm) long. The stiffener shall
be clipped where it meets the beam flange and end-plate to provide clearance
between the stiffener and the beam flange weld.
When the beam and end-plate stiffeners have the same material strengths, the
thickness of the stiffeners shall be greater than or equal to the beam web thick-
ness. If the beam and end-plate stiffener have different material strengths, the
thickness of the stiffener shall be greater than the ratio of the beam-to-stiffener
plate material yield stress times the beam web thickness.

Prequalified Connectionsfor Special andlntermediate Steel Moment Framesfor Seismic Applications Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediale Steel Mo ent F: fi S' .
AMERICAN lNSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, lNc. AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL C rames or ezsmzc Applications
ONSTR CITON,INC.
6.2-32 CHAPTER 6. BOLTED UNSTIFFENED AND STIFFENED EXTnNUnU ... LUNNbCIIVr'l;)
CHAPTER 6. BOLTED UNSTIFFENED AND STlFFENED XTENDED ... CONNECTIONS 6.2-33

6.9.5 Finger Shims . 6.9.7 Welding Details

The use of finger shims at the top andlor bottom of the connection and ?n el~er
Welding of the beam to the end-plate sh conform to the following limitations:
or both sides is permitted, subject to the limitations of RCSC SpeclficatlOn
Section 5.1, as illustrated in Figure 6.6. (1) Weld access holes shall not be used.

(2) The beam web to end-plate joint sh 1 be made using either fillet welds or
completejoint penetration (CJP) gro ve welds. When used, the fillet welds
shall be sized to develop the full str gth of the beam web in tension from
• ___ 1: ___ _ the inside face of the flange to 6 in. (l50 mm) beyond the bolt row farthest
'W. ___ ,. ___ _ from the beam flange. "
•
..... -1'- (3) The beam flange to end-plale joint s all be made using a CJP gro ove weld
without backing. The CJP groove w Id shall be made such fu.at the roO! of
--~~~ ~~~- the weld is on"the beam web side of e flange. The inside face ofthe flange
shall have a 5f¡6-in. (8-mm) fillet wel These welds shall be demand critical.
~------- -------
(4) Backgouging of the root is not requ red in the flange directly aboye and
below the beam web for a length eq al to l.5k I . A full-depth PJP groove
weld shall be permitted at this locatÍ n.

(5) When used, all end-plate stiffener j 'nts shall be made using CJP groove
welds.

Exception: When the stiffener is 3/8 in. (lO-mm) thick or less, it shall be
permitted to use fillet welds that de lop the strength of the stiffener.

6.10 Design Procedure

• • Connection geometry is shown in Figures .2, 6.3, and 6.4 for the 4E, 4ES, and
8ES connections, respectively.
End-Plate and Bolt Design

• • (1) Determine the sizes of the connecte members (beams and column) and
compute the moment at the face of th column, M .
f

h (6.9-2)
Fig.6.6. Typical use offinger shims. where
Mpe = CprRy~Zx (6.9-3)
~ =2Mp/L ' + Vgravity
6.9.6 Composite Slab Detailing for IMF Sh = distance from the face of e column to the plastic hinge,
In addition to the protected zone limitations, welded shear stud connect~rs ~hall in. (mm)
not be placed along the top flange of the beam for a distance equal to 1 h times =the les ser of dl2 or 3bbf Í< unstiffened connection
the depth of the beam, measured from the face of the column. (4E) (6.9-4)
Compressible expansion joint material, at least Ih-in. (12-mm) thick, shall be =Lst+ tp (6.9-5)
installed between the slab and the column face, in the protected zone. Ry =the ratio of the expected y eld stress to fue specified
minimum yield stress, frothe AISC Seismic Provisions

Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Moment Frames for Seismic Applications
Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Ste~l ment Frames for Seismic Applications
AMERICAN !NsTIfUTE OF STEBL CONSTRUCfION, !Nc.
AMERICAN !NSTl'I'UTE OF STEEL CONS ucrroN,INc.
6.2-34 CHAPTER 6. BOLTED UNSTIFFENED ANO STIFFENED EXTENDED ... CONNECTIONS CHAPTER 6. BOLTED UNSTIFfENED ANO STIFfENED E~ TENDED ... CONNECTIONS 6.2-35

d = depth of the connecting beam, in. (mm) (5) Determine the required end-~late thic Imess, tp req'd'
bbf= width of the beam flange, in. (mm)
Lst = length of the end-plate stiffener, as shown in Figure 6.2,
in. (mm) (6.9-8)
tp = thickness of the end-plate, in. (mm)
M pe = probable maximum moment at plastic hinge, kip-in. (N-mm)
where
L' =distance between plastic hinges, in. (mm)
~p = specifiyd mínimum yield stre1 s of the end-plate material, ksi
. = beam shear force resulting from 1.2D +JIL + O.2S, kips (N)
Vgravlty (N/mm2)
e = Factor to account for peak connection strength, inc1uding ~ =the end:..plate yield line mech~~sm parameter from Table 6.2, 6.3,
pr strain hardening, local restraint, additional reinforcement, and or 6.4, in. (mm)
other connection conditions, as given in Equation 2.4.3-2
Vu = shear force at the end of the beam, kips (N) (6) Select an end-plate thickness, tp ' not l€ ss than the required value.

JI = load factor determined by the applicable building code for (7) Calculate the factored beam flange fOI~e.
live loads, but not less than 0.5
(2) Select one of the three end-plate moment connection configurations and (6.9-9)
establish preliminary values for the connection geometry (g, Pfi' Pfo' Pb'
hst ' L st ' etc.) and bolt grade. where
(3) Determine the required bolt diameter, db req'd' using one of the following d =depth of the beam, in. (mm)
expressions: tbf = thickness of beam flange, in. (lhm)

(8) Check shear yielding resistance of thl> extended portion of the four-bolt
2M for four-bolt extended unstiffened end-plate (4E):
d - f connections (4E, 4ES) (6.9-6)
b req'd - ~11t<\> F (h + h )
~ n nt O 1
(6.9-10)

for eight-bolt where

d = connections (8ES) (6.9-7) bp =width o~ the end-plate, in. (mm
b req'd t~ 1t<\>nnt
F (h + h + h + h )
1234
If Equation 6.10 is not satisfied, increa~e the end-plate thickness until it is
where satisfied.
Fnt = nominal tensile stress of bolt, 90 ksi (620 MPa) for A325 bolts
(9) Check shear rupture resistance of the ex lended portion of the end-plate in the
and 113 ksi (780 MPa) for A490 bolts
four-bolt extended unstiffened end-pla ~ (4E):
h. =distance from the centerline of the beam compression flange to
I the centerline of the i th tension bolt row. Ffu
-<<\>
2 n Rn =<\>n 0.1 FupAn (6.9-11)
(4) Select a trial bolt diameter, db , greater than that required in Step 3.
where
~p =specified mínimum tensile strength of the end-plate, ksi (MPa)
An =net area of the end-plate = [bp 2(db + 1/ 8)] tp when
standard holes are used, in. 2 (nIm2) (6.9-12)
d b = bolt diameter, in. (mm)

If Equation 6.11 is not satisfied, increa e the end-plate thickness until it is

satisfied.

Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Moment Frames for Seismic Applications Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Moment Frames for Seismic Applications
AMERICAN !NSTITUfE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc.
AMERICAN !NsTITUfE OF S1EEL CONSTI<~CTION, !Nc.
 ,..... ,a
~
N
." I
~ Table 6.2. Summary of Four-Bolt Extended Unstiffened End-Plate Vl
0\
~ Yield Line Mechanism Parameter
Si (J
~

~
~ End-Plate Geometry and Yield Une Pattern 80lt Force Model
~
C")

tI
?'
lJj
o
¡g~
(j '"
- - - . ----- 2Pt ~
I;j

r
~ 5'
~~ .----- 2Pt ~
en

~~
~I
~~
Pl~
(J~
o",
( M np ho
h¡ i >
8en
z-
~~
B§
o'"
.:z:~

.~~~
• •
r i ~
'o...>
~
~
~. ~
1)'

~ Y p= bp[hl(~+~)+ho(_l )-~l+~[hl(P.f¡+s)] n
o

~
~ End-Plate 2 Pf; s p/ 2 g o
~
15·
~
s = ~~bp g Note: IfPfi > s, usepfi = s
o
j
Z
en

~-
~

~
."
~ Table 6.3. Surnrnary of Four-Bolt Extended Stiffened End-Plate
¡ ~
Yield Line Mechanisrn Pararneter
?'
~ End-Plate Geometry and Yield Line Pattern Bolt Force Model lJj

~
O
Case 1 (d. ~ s) Case 2 (d. > s)
~
~I
I;j

~~
~
(j
~
'"
5-
Z' .....
- 2 Ft
--~­
~~ ~
~ ~
~ ~
~~
Pl~
(J~
~
oz .....
CIl!;¡.o
• •
tp

• •
tp ( c::: ~
~
~
.....
r ~~

I
¡
§~
.z
.~~..,
'o...>
~
Case 1
de~s Yp = b
p
2
[h¡(~+.!.)+ho(~+~)1+2[
Pfi 8p¡o g
h¡(Pfi +s)+ho(de +
28
p¡o) ]
i
n

I
! ~
~. End;.
t
!t
1)'

~
Plate Case 2
de>s y
p
= b
p
2
[h¡(~+.!.)+ho(.!.+~)l+
Pfi s p¡o8
2[h¡ (pfi +8)+110(8+ P¡o)]
g
~
~
¡ 2'
~'
I
!
s= ~.Jb;i Note: IfPfi > 8, use Pfi = 8
f;
~ I
Vl
....¡
6.2-38 CHAPTER 6. BOLTED UNSTIFFENED AND STIFFENED EXTENDED ... CONNECTIONS
CHAPTER 6. BOLTED UNSTlFFENED AND STIFFENED E ENDED ... CONNECTIONS 6.2-39

(10) If using either the four-bolt extende stiffened end-plate (4ES) or eight-
bolt extended stiffened end-plate (8 S) connection, select the end-plate
stiffener thickness and design the st ffener-to-beam flange and stiffener-
to-end-plate welds.

t
s,min
=t
bw
(Yb J
ys
(6.9-13)

tt t t where
\ 1 ~:¿_I tbw = thickness of the beam web, i
1\ ~~'-
lo-++---~ t-'
Sb =specified minimum yield stre s of beam material, ksi (MPa)
I---tt--- ... Ss = specifi,ed minimum yield stre s of stiffener material, ksi (MPa)
The stiffener geometry shaU conform to the requirements of Section 6.9.4.
In addition, to prevent local bucklin of the stiffener plate, the following
width-to-thickness criterion shalI be s tisfied.

h
...E... <0.56 (6.9-14)
t -
s

where
hst =the height of the stiffener, in.
The stiffener-to-beam flange and sti ner-to-end-plate welds shalI be de-
C
\1)
signed to develop the stiffener plate i shear at the beam flange and in ten-
:::¡
"a
sion at the end-plate. Either fillet or co 'P1ete joint penetration (CJP) groove
"i welds are suitable for the weld of the s ffener plate to the beam flange. If the
>=
'tl stiffener plate thickness is greater th 3/ 8 in., CJP groove welds shall be
·C

:¡~ ~-4--------------------------~
used for the stiffener-to-end-plate weld Otherwise, double-sided fillet welds
are permitted to be used.
E ~~ sf:~cS:.st. ~
o
t!
\1)
11111111 l (11) The bolt shear rupture strength of the c nnection is provided by the bolts at
one (compression) flange; thus
'ti
ii:
-aC (6.9-15)
w
where
nb =number of bolts at the compre sion flange, four for 4ES, and
eight for 8ES connections
F;; = nominal shear stress of bolts fr m Table 13.2 of the AISC
Specification, ksi (N/mm2)
Ab =nominal gross area of bolt, in. 2 (mm2)
2M
V =--E.+V . (6.9-16)
u L' ravlly

. Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Moment Frames for Seismic Applications Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel M. ment Frames for Seismic Applications
AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NsTlTUTE OF STEEL CONS UCTlON, !Nc.

... -_...... _--~-~==="""""""'............_---------------------~--------

r CHAPTER 6. BOLTED UNSTIFFENED AND STIFFENED ..hXTENDED
i¡:-. .,. CONNEC TIONS 6.2-41
CHAPTER 6. BOLTED UNSTIFFENED ANDSTIFFENED EXTENDED ... CONNECTIONS
6.2-40

(12) Check bolt-bearing/tear-out failure of the end-plate and column flange:

(6.9-17)

where
ni = number of inner bolts (two for 4E and 4ES, and four for 8ES
connections)
no =number of outer bolts (two for 4E and 4ES, and four for 8ES
connections)
for each inner bolt (6.9-18)
r = 1.2 LetFu < 2.4 dbtFu for each outer bolt (6.9-19)
no
Le = clear distance, in the direction of force, between the edge of the
hole and the edge of the adjacent hole or edge of the material,
"1IIII! /'
in. (mm)
t = end-plate or column flange thickness, in. (mm)
Fu = specified minimum tensile strength of end-plate or column flange ~

material, ksi (N/mm2 ) 001 N

+
~
~
+
~
d = diameter of the bolt, in. (mm)
b
"'.:,,¡N ~
+
(13) Design the flange to end-plate and web to ~nd-plate welds using the require- ~
"-ll~
..±..
+ ~
ments of Section 6.9.7. "-" '" +
~
~ ~
Column Side Design + ~ .,
~ Nltl()
~¡~ +
I
(14) Check the column flange for flexural yielding
"-"
+.. ~
,.-----....
-I~
~
~
~
'-----1
+
"'
",'

Nltl() -1., /1.

(6.9-20) +
,...--....... ~
~
~ ~ l!::
-1'" +
..-...
11 11
Jo. \ "-"
~ -I~ z~
+
..--., +
where -1'" -1"
Fye = specified mínimum yield stress of column flange material,
~
"-" '----"
t ~
~ ~
ksi (N/mm2 )
bQ-L-.. '------J ~

\ ~'t;.IN ~'t>IN
Y = unstiffened column flange yieId line mechanism parameter from 1 11
-IN 11
-IN
e ;:...." ..,11
;:...." .,11
TabIe 6.5 or Table 6.6, in. (mm)
te! = column flange thickness, in. (mm)
'C
GI i:: . ¡Ce.,
If Equation 6.20 is not satisfied, increase the column size or add web ile& cEa»
=:sC!: ,:sc
-ca
stiffeners (continuity pIates). =o!!
¡gu lL ;;s8¡¡:
::)
If stiffeners are added, Equation 6.20 must be checked using Ye for the
stiffened column flange from TabIes 6.5 and 6.6.
(15) If stiffeners are required for column flange flexural yieIding, determine the
required stiffener force.
The column flange flexural design strength is
(6.9-21)
<l> dMe! =<l> d~eY/~!
Prequalified Connections for Special arid Intermediate Steelik oment Frames for Seismic Applications
Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Moment Frames for Seismic Applications AMERICAN ÍNS1TTIJTE OF STEEL CONS ('RuCTION,INC.
AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION,INC.
6.2-42 CHAPI'ER 6. BOLTED UNSTIFFENED AND STIFFENED EXTENDED ... CONNECTIONS
CHAPTER 6. BOLTED UNSTIFFENED AND STIFFENED EX NDED ... CONNECTIONS 6.2-43

where
Yc =unstiffened column yield line m chanism parameter from Table 6.5
or 6.6, in. (mm).

Therefore, the equivalent column flang design force is

(6.9-22)
Q)
el
e
ca ~ Using <1>d Rn' the required force for stiffe er design is determined in Step 19.
¡¡: 1ii
e ~ ¿: s!..:ri. -t ~
(16) Check the local column web yielding s ength of the unstiffened column
e 2
C)¡
c
.$ web at the beam flanges.
E G)1; ~I~
:J ~a.. +
'O laG)
¡¡,5 ~ (6.9-23)
O c...J ~ C>()

"O EB ~
+ ~
CD ... ::::1 G) ul~ N~
eQ) 'O):
U"O
+ + (6.9-24)
CD- ~I~
=Q) "Oc ~

~I""" where
G)1a
;:E c '--"
-sr
ti) ca
"Oca
... :!
~
~
+
ul"""
+
'--"'" et = 0.5 if the distance from the colu top to the top face of the beam
Q)Q. +
.3::....
flange is less than the depth of e column
+
"gE ~I~

-
,.---....
,--,o = 1.0 otherwise
fA Q';I"""
.-
Q)
><e
..,f'
+ +
kc =distance from outer face of the c lumn flange to web toe of fillet
Wca
_,c
~
(design value) or fillet weld, in. mm)
+
-u
o Q) ul~
+ tp = end-plate thickness, in. (mm)
'9:5
-Q) ~ ~ ~c = specified yield stress of the colu web material, ksi (MPa)
~
áe 1ii
eo ~ tcw = column web thickness, in. (mm)
¡¡¡::i ~
'5:2 :!e ~ ,.---....
-1'" lbf= thickness of beam flange, in. (
el)
~.-
&~ '---"

ca> ia.. 03::""

+ If the strength requirement (<1>dRn ~ Ff) s not satisfied, then column web
¡¡~ ,.---....
E
E
c·-
E-'
::::1"0
.¡. ~
-1'" continuity plates are required.

~@
:J OCD (17) Check the unsti~ened column web buc ing strength at the beam com-
u s;:
ti) "0"0 " -III~ pression flange. ¡
u:)
G)c
~C\I
;:...... '"
u:) Strength requirement:
CD ie
j5 ::::>
ca (6.9-25)
t-
where <1> =0.75

(a) When Ffu is applied a distance greater an or equal to d/2 from the end
of the column o

24 t 3
R = cw
n h (6.9-26)

Prequalified Connections jor Special and Intermediate Steel Moment Frames jor Seismic Applications
Prequalified Connections jor Special and Intermediate Steel Mo nt Frames Jor Seismic Applications
AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INc.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRU ON, INc.
6.2-44 CHAPTER 6. BOLTED UNSTIFFENED AND STIFFENED EXTENDED ... CONNECTIONS
CHAPTER 6. BOLTED UNSTIFFENED AND STIFFENED] XTENDED ... CONNECTIONS
6.2-45

(b) When Ffu is applied a distance less than d/2 from the end of the column
de = overall depth of the column, in. (mm)
3
12 tcw fEF If the strength requirement (~~n ~ F¡u) is not satisfied, then column
vLj~ye
R =-----'--- (6.9-27) web continuity plates are r ~quired.
n h
(19) If stiffener plates are required for ru y of the column side limit states, the
where . required strength is
h = ciear distance between flánges less the fillet or comer radms
for roUed shapes; clear distance between flanges when welds (6.9-32)
are used for built-up shapes, in. (mm) where
If the strength requirement (<I>nRn ~ Ffu) is not satisfied, then column web min <l>Rn =the minimum design st ength value from Steps 15 (column
continuity platés are required. ~ange bending), 16 (co umn web yielding), 17 (column web
buck1ing), and 18 (colufnn web crippling)
(18) Check the unstiffened column web crippling strength at the beam compres-
sion flange. The design of the continuity plates spall also conform to section 110.8 of
the AISC Specification, and the weld~ shall be designed in accordance with
Strength requirement: Section 6.7.3.
(6.9-28)
(20) Check the panel zone in accordance "lith Section 6.6.1.
where <1> = 0.75
(a) When Ffu is applied a distance greater than or equal to d/2 from the end
of the column

(6.9-29)

(b) When Ffu is applied a distance less than d/2 from the eI1d of the column

(i) for N/de < 0.2,

Rn = 0.40 t~ [1+3 (~) kr1~ ~tif E (6.9-30)

(ii) for N/de> 0.2,

Rn = 0.40 t~ [1+ (:~ -0.2) (:; r1~ ~:tif E (6.9-31)

where
N = thickness of beam flánge plus 2 times the groove weld
reinforcement leg size, in. (mm)

Prequalified Conneetions for Special and IntermediateSteel Moment FrCl;mes for Seismie Applieations
AMERICAN lNSTITIITE OF STEEL CONSTRUCfION, lNc. Prequalified Conneetions for Speeial and Intermediate Steel MG'(nent Frames for Seismie Applieations
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONsnpCfIoN, INc.
-J
6.2-46 6.2-47

COMMENTARY on tbe
Prequalified Connec ions for
Special and Internteiate
Steel Montent Frant S for
Seisntic Applications
Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate S eel Moment Frames
for Seismic Applications
December 13, 2005

Prequalified Connections for Special and Interrnedsiate SCteOeNIMS;~:;;:o~a;;:2 for Seismic Applications Prequalified Connections for Special alid Intermediate Steel Mome t Frames for Seismic Applications
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF TEEL , AMERlCAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRU ON, INc.
 COMMENTARY
6.2-48 6.2-49

C1. GENERAL the us~ of conIÍectioIi geometries that h d been demonstrated by testin and
~althYSISfrtO be capablé of resisting appro riate levels of inelastie defon!tion
C1.1 Scope WI out acture. Most of these d .
th AISC S · · .. . recornme atlOns have been ineorporated into
Special moment frames (SMF) and intermediate moment frames (IMF) designed e elsmlC ProvlSlons as well as á pnding AWS . .
AWS D 1.1 Structtiral Welding Codeo seIsnnc supplement to the
in accordance with the AISC Seismic Provisions are designed with the expecta-
tion that they will experience substantial inelastic deformations when subjected
Foll~~ing the ~ecommendations of the S C Joint Venture, the AISC Seismic
to design-level earthquake ground shaking, generally concentrated at the
ProvlslOns reqUlre that moment connectio s used in special or intermediate steel
moment-resisting beam-to-column connections. In the 1994 Northridge earth-
moment frames be demonstrated by testi to be capable of provI·dm·g th
quake, a number of steel moment frame buildings were found to have experienced essar d tir Tw e nec-
.. y ue. Ity: .. 0 means of demonstra ion are aceeptable. One means eon-
brittle fractures that initiated at the welded beam flange to column flange joints SIStS of proJect-specIfic testing in which a li .ted number of full· - al .
of moment connections. These brittle fractures were unexpected and were quite rep "ti th ' . se e speclIDens
.resen ng e ~onnectlOns to be used in structure, are construeted and tested
different from the anticipated behavior of ductile yielding of the beams in so-
m ,ae~~rdance WIth.a .protocol prescribed in Appendix S of the AISC Seismfc
called zones of plastic hinging. Where they occurred, these brittle fractures ProvlslOns. Recogmzmg that it is costly d f . to perform sueh
prevented the formation of ductile plastic hinge zones and resulted in frame . . . Ime consunnng
te~ts,. ~e AISC S~lsmlc Provisi0ns. also prov de for prequalifieation of connections
behavior substantially different from that upon which the design requirements
Co~sIstmg of a ngorous program'oftesting analytical evaluation and review by
for these systems were based. an mdependent body
. . ' the connec ' t·IOn pre. . . . review panel (CPRP)
uahficatlOn
Following this discovery, the Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA) ~onnectlOns c?ntamed i~ this Standard h ve met the criteria for prequalifica~
provided funding to a coalition of universities and professional associations, tion when ap~lied t<:> frannn~ that complies ith the limitations contained herein
known as the SAC Joint Venture. Over a period of six years, the SAC Joint , and when desIgnedand detailed in accord ce with this Standard.
Venture, with participatibn from AISC, AISI, AWS and other industry groups,
conducted extensive researeh into the causes of the damage that had oceurred C1.2 References
in the Northridge earthquake and effective means of redueing the possibility of References for this Standard are listed in the Bibli h ~ d
Cornmentary. ograp y, J.oun at the end of the
such damage in future earthquakes.
Numerous issues were identified in the SACstudies as contributing causes of
these brittle fractures. This Standard specifically addresses the following four C1.3 General
causes that were identified in the SAC study: ~onne~tions that are prequalified under thi Standard are intended to withstand
(1) Connection geometries that resulted in large stress eoncentrations in regions ~elaStic defo~ation thr?ugh controiled yi lding in specific behavioral modes.
of high triaxiality and limited ability to yield; t order
. to
. obtam
f connectlOns that will beha in the indicated manner, proper de-
ernnnatio~ o the strength of the eonnectio in various 1imit states is necess
(2) Use of weld filler metals with low inherent notch toughness and limited The capacIty formulations contained in th LRFD method ar . ~.
this approach. e consIstent WIth
ductility;
(3) High variability in the yield strengths of beams and columns resulting in
unanticipated zones of weakness in connection assemblies; and
(4) Welding practice and workmanship that fell outside the acceptable para-
meters under the AWS D 1.1 Structural Welding Codeo
A more complete listing of the causes of damage sustained in the Northridge
earthquake may be found in a series of publications (FEMA 350, 2000; FEMA
351,2000; FEMA 352,2000; FEMA 353, 2000b; FEMA 355C, 2000; FEMA
355D, 2000) published by the SAC Joint Venture that presented recornmendations
for design and construction of moment resisting frames designed to experience
substantial inelastic deformation during design ground shaking. These recom-
mendations inc1uded changes to material specifications for base metals and weld-
ing filler metals, improved quality assurance procedures during construction and

Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Moment Frames for Seismic Applications Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Mo ent Frames for seismic A l· .
AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF SlEEL CONSTRUcnON, !Nc. AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTR enON, !Nc. pp lcatlOns
 COMMENTARY
6.2-50 6.2-51

C2. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

C2.1 Special and Intermediate Moment Frame

Connection Types
Limitations ineluded in this Standard for various prequalified connections
inelude specification of permissible material s specifications for base metals,
mechanical properties for weld filler metals, member shape and pro file, and
connection geometry, detailing and workmanship. These limitations are based
on conditions, demonstrated by testing and analytical evaluation, for which reliable
connection behavior can be attained. It is possible that these connections can a. 1-shaped section b. FIanged cruciform section
provide reliable behavior outside these limitations; however, this has not been
demonstrated. When any condition of base metal, mechanical properties, weld filler
metals, member shape and profile, connection geometry, detailing or workman-
ship falls outside the limitations specified herein, project-specific qualification
testing should be performed to demonstrate the acceptability of connection
behavior under these conditions.

C2.3 Members
C2.3.2 Built-up Members c. Box section . Boxed W-shape section
The behavior of built-up I-shaped members has been extensively tested in bolted
end-plate connections and has been demonstrated to be capable of developing
Fig. e-2.].
the necessary inelastic deformations. These members have not generally been
tested in other prequalified connections; however, the conditions of inelastic de-
formation imposed on the built-up shapes in these other connection types are to the flanges of roUed wide-flange colu ns. A limited number of tests of
similar to those tested for the bolted end-plate connections. co~nections of wide-flange beams to buíl up box section columns were also
revlewed. All of these tests were uniaxial i nature. That is, the beam or beams
connecting ~o the column were i~ a single plane and moments applied to the
C2.3.2b Columns column dunng the test induced flexure ab ut a single axis.
Four built-up column cross-section shapes are covered by this Standard. These are
illustrated in Figure C-2.1 and inelude !he flanged cruciform column and boxed w de-flange columns have not specif-
Ically been teste~. However, it was the jud ment of the CPRP that as long as
(1) I-shaped welded columns that resemble standard roUed wide-flange shapes
suc~ column sec~lOns met the limitations fo I-shaped sections and box-shaped
in cross-section shape and profile.
sectlOns, respectIveIy, and connection asse blies are designed to ensure that
(2) Cruciform W-shape columns, fabricated by splitting a wide-flange section most i.nelastic behavior occurred within the eam as opposed to the column, the
in half and welding the webs on either side of the web of an unsplit wide- behavlO~ of a~semblies employing these secti ns would be acceptable. Therefore,
flange section at its mid-depth to form a cruciform shape, each outstanding prequahficatlon h~s bee.n extended to these ross sections for connections types
leg of which terminates in a rectangular flange. where the predommant melastic behavior is n the beam rather than the column.
(3) Box coIumns, fabricated by welding four pIates together to form a closed box- Similarly, although there has been virtually o testing of connections in assem-
shaped cross section. blies subjected to biaxial bending of the col , the judgment of the CPRP was
that as long as columns are designed to remai essentially elastic and inelastic be-
(4) Boxed W-shape columns constructed by adding side plates to the sides of an
havior is concentrated within the beams, it w Id be possible to obtain acceptable
1-shaped cross section. behavior of beam-column connection as se blies subjected to biaxial loading.
The preponderance of connection tests reviewed as the basis for prequalifica- Therefore, flanged cruciform section colu s, built-up box columns and boxed
tions contained in this Standard consisted of rolled wide-flange beams connected wide-flange columns are permitted to be use in assemblies subjected to bi-axial

Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Moment Frames for Seismic Applications Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Mo ent Frames for Seismic Applications
AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONsTRuenoN, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTlTUTE OF STEEL CONSTR enON, !Nc.
6.2-52 COMMENTARY
loading for those connections types where inelastic behavior is concentrated in
the beam, rather than in the colurnn.
Limited testing of connections of wide-flange beams to the webs of I-shaped
columns had been conducted prior to the Northridge earthquake by Popov,
Engelhardt and others. This testing demonstrated that these "minor-axis" con-
nections were incapable of developing reliable inelastic behavior even at a time
when major axis connections were thought capable of developing acceptable be-
havior. No significant testing of such minor axis connections following the
Northridge earthquake has been conducted. Consequently, such connections are
not prequalified under this Standard.
(2) Boxed Wide-Flange Columns
Testing of cOQnection assemblies comprising boxed wide-flange columns has not
specifically been conducted. However, the behavior of columns of this cross-
section type is believed to be bounded by the behavior of standard wide-flange
section colurnns and that of box section colurnns, both of which have been tested.
(4) Flanged Cruciform Columns
Testing of connection assemblies comprised of cruciform wide-flange columns
has not specifically been conducted. However, the behavior of columns of this
cross-section type is believed to be similar to the behavior of standard wide-
flange section columns that have been extensively tested.
C2.4 Connection Design Parameters
C2.4.1 Load Combinations and Resistance Factors
A significant factor considered in the formulation of resistance factors is the
desirability or undesirability of various limit states. Limit states that are con-
sidered brittle and subject to sudden catastrophic failure are typically assigned
lower resistance factors than those that exhibit relatively benign yielding failure.
Since, for the prequalified connections, design demand is determined based on
conservative estimates of the material strength of weak elements of the con-
nection assembly, and materials, workmanship and quality assurance are more
rigorously controlled than for other structural elements, resistance factors have
been set somewhat higher than those traditionally used. It is believed that
these resistance factors, when used in combination with the design, fabrication,
erection and quality-assurance requirements contained in the Standard, will
provide reliable service in the prequalified connections.
C2.4.2 Plastic Hinge Location
This Standard specifies the location of the plastic hinge for each prequalified con-
nection type. In reality, inelastic deformation of connection assemblies is gener-
Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Moment Frames for Seismic Applications
AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc.
6.2-53
~ly distrib~ted to sorne extent throughout the connection assembly. The plastic
hinge locations specified herein are based o observed behavior during conn ti
~ssembly t~sts and indicate the locations of ost anticipated inelastic defoa:ti~~
m connection assemblies conforming to th particular prequalified type.
C2.4.3 Probable M~Ximum Momen at Plastic Hinge
Th~ probable plastic moment at the plastic .nge is intended to be a conservative
esti~a~e of ~e maximum moment likely to e developed by the connection under
cyclIc melastic response. It ineludes consid ration of likely material overstrength
and strain hardening.
C2.4.4 Beam Flange, Continuity Pla es
Beam flange contin'uity plates serve sever purposes in moment connections
They help to distribute beam flange forces t the column web, they stiffen the col~
umn w~b.to .prevent local crippling under th concentrated beam-flange forces and
they mmImIze stress concentrations that e n occur in the joint between beam
flange and column due to non-uniform sti ess of the attached elements.
When ~e beam flange connects to the flan e of a wide-flange, built-up I-shape
or crucifonn W-shaped column in which the olumn extends aboye and below the
~~ and the column flange thickness satisfi Equations 2.4.4-1 and 2.4.4-2, con-
tmUlty plates are not requir~d as beam-fl ge forces can be adequately trans-
ferre~ to the column webs WIthout the stiffe .ng effects and secondary load paths
provIde~ by ~ese plates. However, these e uations have been developed based
on consIderation of the behavior of colurnns in lower stories of buildings, where
the column e~tends a considerable distance a ove the top flange of the connected
beam. EquatlOns 2.4.4-.1 and 2.4.4-2 do not pply in the top story of a building,
where the column tennmates at approximat ly the level of the top flange of the
be~. In such cases beam-flange continuity lates or column cap plates, having
a .thickness not less than that of the connecte beam flange, should be provided.
FIgure C~2.2 presents a detail for such a co nection, where the beam flange is
weld~d directly to the cap plate and the cap late is welded to the column so as
to delIver the beam-flange forces to the colu web.
Alte~atively, if the column projects suffic ently aboye the beam top flange,
~quations 2.4.4-1 an~ 2.4.4.-2 can be consi ered valido A1though comprehen-
SIve research to establIsh the necessary dis ce the column must extend aboye
the b~am for this purpose has not been perfo ed, it may be sufficient if the col-
umn IS extended a distance not less than dJ2 r b¡l2, whichever is less, aboye the
top beam flange.
For boxed wide-flange section columns in w ·ch the beams are connected to the
flange ~ftheI-.sh~ped section, Equations 2.4.4 3 and 2.4.4-4 have been developed
to provIde a SImIlar stiffness of column fl e as that provided by Equations
2.4.4- ~ and 2.4.4-2 for unboxed sections. As ith Equations 2.4.4-1 and 2.4.4-2,
EquatlOns 2.4.4-3 and 2.4.4-4 are not strictl valid for the case of a moment
Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Mo ent Frames for Seismic Applications
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRU ON, !Nc.
 CUMNlliN'lAKX
6.2-55

Cap plate welded to column to develop

beam flange force to column web C3. WELDING REQU REMENTS
C3.3 Backing at Beam-to-Colum and Continuity-Plate-
to-Column Joints
At the root of groove welds between beam flanges or continuity plates to column
flanges, the inherent lack of fusion plane etween the left-in-place steel backing
• and the column flange creates a stress con entration and notch effect, even when

• the weld has uniform and sound fusíon a the root. When ultrasonic testing is

• performed, this left-in-place backing may mask significant flaws that may exist
at the weld root. These flaws may create a ore severe notch condition than that
caused by the backing itself (Chi and othe s, 1997).

C3.3.1 Steel Backing at Continuity

The stress and strain level at the groove w
umn flange is considerably different th
Welds, bolts and other
flange connection; therefore it is n\Jt necess
details as required by
connection prequalification of the fillet weld beneath the backing make
internal notch, rather than an external not
backing is removed, the reinforcing fillet
at the right-angle intersection of fue contin
Fig. C-2.2. Cap plate detail at column topo
Id between continuity plate and col-
that at the beam flange-to-column
to remove the backing. The addition
the inherent notchat the interface an
h, reducing the notch effect. When
eld reduces the stress concentration
ity plate and the column flange.

C3.3.2 Steel Backing at Bearh Bott m Flange

connection at the roof level of a building, in which the column does n~t ~xt~~d
significantIy aboye the beam top flange. In these cases, a cap plate detall Slml ar
to that illustrated in Figure C-2.2 should be used.
When beams are moment connected to the side plates of boxed wi~e-flange c~l­
umn sections, continuity plates or cap plates should always be provlded Opposlte
the beam flanges, as is required for box section columns.
C2.4.4b Continuity Plate to Column Attachment
The attachment of continuity plates to column webs is designed to b~ ca?able of
transmitting the maximum shear forces that can be delivered to the contmUlty .pl~te.
This may be limited by the beam-flange force, the shear strength of the contmUlty
plate itself, or the welded joint between continuity plate and column flange.
The prequalification requires that continuity plates be attached to column flanges
with CJP groove welds in order that the strength of the beam flan~e c~ be ~rop­
erly developed into the continuity plateo For single-sided connectlOns 1~ :vh1Ch a
moment-connected beam attaches to only one ofthe column ~an~es, lt IS prob-
bly not necessary to use CJP groove welds to attach the contmUlty plate to the
a 1 flange that does not have a beam attached. In such cases, acceptable per-
~~=ce can probably be obtained by attaching the continuity plate to the col-
umn with a pair of minimum-size fillet welds. C3.3.3
The removal of backing, whether'fusible o non-fusible, followed by backgoug-
ing to sound weld metal, is performed so at potential root defects within the
welded joint are detected and eliminated, an the stress concentration at the weld
root ís eliminated.
The ínfluence of left-in-place steel backing s more severe on the bottom flange,
as compared to the top flange, because at e bottom flange, the stress concen-
tration from the backing occurs at the point f maximum applied and secondary
tensile stresses in the groove weld, at the w Id root, and at the outer fiber of the
beam flange.
A reinforcing fillet weld with a 5116-in. (8- ) leg on the column flange helps to
reduce the stress coricentration at fue right- gle intersection of the beam flange
and column flange, and is placed at the loe tion of maximum stress. The fillet
weld's horizontalleg may need to be larger than 5116 in. (8 mm) to completely
cover the weld root atea, eliminating the pote tial for multiple weld toes at the root
that serve as small stress concentrations an potential fracture initiation points.
When grinding the weld root and base metal area, previously deposited weld toe
regions and their associated fracture initiation ites are removed, and the horizontal
leg of the fillet weld need not be extended t base metal when this is done.
Steel Backing at Beam Top F nge
Because of differences in the stress and str· conditions at the top and bottom
flange connections, the stress/strain concen ation and notch effect created by

Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Moment FralNmes for Seismic Applications Prequalified Connectionsfor Special and Intermediate Steel Mo ent Framesfor Seismic Applications
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, c.
AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF S'IÉEL CONSTR enON, INc.
6.2-56
the backinglcolumn interface at the top flange is at a lower le':el, compare~ ~o that
at the bottom flange. Therefore, backing removal is not requ~ed. The ad~ltlOn of
the reinforcing fillet weld makes the inherent notch at the mterface an mter~al
notch rather th an an ex ternal notch, further reducing the effect. Because backing
, . and backwelding would be perforrned through an access
~:7e°;:~~:~eo~~¿:~ge,
these operations should be avoided whenever possible.
C3.3.4 Prohibited Welds at Steel Backing
Tack welds for bearn flange-to-colurnn connections should be made within ~he
::Ul:
Id oove Tack welds or fillet welds to the underside of beam at the backmg
diree; stress into lhe backing itseIf, increasing lhe notch effeet a:dlhe
báckin /colurnn flange interface. In addition, the weld toe o.f the tack we .or
fillet w!ld on the bearn flange would act as a stress concentratlOn and a potentlal
fracture initiation site.
Pro er removal of these welds is necessary to remove the stress concentra~on ~d
ot~ntialfracture initiation site. Any repair of gouges and ~otches
by fillmg wlth
~eld metal must be made using filler metals with the reqUlred notch toughness.
C3.3.5 Non-fusible Backing at Beam Flange-to-Column
Joints - .1 t
Mter backing is removed, backgouging t? sound metal re~ove~ p~~entla_ re:
flaws within the welded joint. A reinforcmg fillet weld w~th a 116 l~. (8 m )
leg on the colurnn flange helps reduce the stress concentratlOn at the nght-angle
intersection of the bearn flange and colurnn flange.
The fillet weld's horizontalleg may need to be larger than 5/~6 in. (8 m~? ~o
completely cover the weld root are a, eliminating the potentlaI for mu tl~ ~
weld toes at the root that serve as small stress concentrations and po~entla
fracture initiation points. When grinding the weld root and bas.e .~e~a ru:ea,
reviously deposited weld toe regions and their associated fracture lrutlatlon sltes
~e
removed, therefore the horizontal leg of the fillet weld need not be ex-
tended to base metal.
C3.4 Details and Treatment of Weld Tabs
Weld tabs are used to provide a location for initiation and termination of welds
outside the final weld location, improving the quality ?f the. fin~ weld ~;e~~~
moval of weld tabs is perforrned to remove the weld dlscontmUltleS an e d as the use of cornrnon weld taps is difficult. If sed, their removal in this region
that ma be resent at these start and stop locations. Because weld tabs are located
th y ds :f welds any remaining weld defects at the weld-end removal areas
:ay ea:~as external notches and fracture initiation sites and are there~o~e ~e­
moved. A smooth transition is needed between base metal and weld to mmlmlze
stress concentrations.
Prequalified Connections lor Special and Intermediate Steel Moment Fra¡mes lor Seismic Applications
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, NC.
COMMENTARY
6.2-57
C3.S Tack Welds
Tack welds outside ~eld joints may create nintended load paths and may create
stress concentration~ that become¡ crack ini .ation sites when highly strained. By
placing tack welds within the joint, the p tentiaI for surface notches and hard
heat affected zones (HAZs) is rninírnized. en placed within the joint, the HAZ
oí a tack weld is tempered by the¡subseque t pass es for the final weld.
Tack welds for bearn flange-to-cdlurnn co nections are preferabIy made in the
weld grpove. Tack welds of bachng to lhe nderside of bearn flanges would be
unaccepta):>1e, aud ariy tack welds between eld backing and bearn flanges are to
be removed in accorclance with Seétion 3.3.4 Steel backing may be welded tothe
column under the bearn flange, where a rei forcing fillet is typicalIy placed.
When tack weIds for the attachment of w Id tabs are placed with.i.n the weld
joint, they become pan of the final weld.
C3.6 Continuity Plates
Tha rotary straightening process used by steeI rolling rnills to straighten roUed sec-
i
tions cold works the webs of these shapes n and near the "k-area." This cold
working can result in an increase in hardn ss, yield strength, ultimate tensile
strength, and yield-tÓ-tensile ratio; and a de rease in notch toughness. In sorne
instances, CVN toughness has been record d to be less than 2 ft-Ibs at 70 0 F
0
[3 J at 20 C] (Barsom and Korvink, 1998). hese changes do not negativeIy
influence the in-servlce behavior of uncrac ed shapes. However, the potential
for post-fabrication k.,.area base metal cracki g exists in highly restrained joints
at the weld temrinations for colurnn continui plates, web doubIers and thermal
cut coped bearns.
When the mínimum clip dimensions &re use along the member web, the avail-
able continuity plate length must be conside ed in the design and detailing of
the welds to the web. For fillet welds, the fill t weld should be held back one to
two weld sizes from each clip. For groove wel s, weld tabs should not be used in
the k-area that could cause base metal frac e from the combination of weld
shrinkage, the stress concentration/notch e ect at the weld enq, and the low
notc.t1-toughness web material.
When the maximum clip dimensions are us d along the me:rp.ber flange, the
width, hence the capacity, of the continuity late is not reduced substantially.
Care must be used in making quality weld te .nations near th~ member radius,
may darnage the base metal, n~cessitating di cult repairs. The use of cascaded
ends 'within the weld groove may be used Wi in the dirnensionallimits stated.
Bec~use of the incomplete filling of fue groove the unusual cQnfigw-ation of the
we~d, and the relatively low level of demand paced upon the weld at this loca-
tion, NDT of cascaded weld ends in·groove w lds at this location need not and
should not be performed.
Prequalified Connections lor Special and Interme4iate Steel Mame t Frames lor Seismic Applications
AMERICAN INsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRU ON, INc.
6.2-58 COMMENTARY COMMENTARY 6.2-59

k+ 1% in. QA inc1udes those tasks to be perlonned b an agency or fnni other than the
(min.) CONTINUITY contractor. QA inc1udes monitoriÍlg of the performance of the contractor in
PLATE implementing the contractor's QC progr ,ensuring that designated QC
functions are perfonned properly by the con actor on a routine basis. QA may
.S -:- also inc1ude specificinspection tasks that e inc1uded in the contractor's QC
,<\1x plan, and may inc1ude nondestructive testin of completed joints.
-" as
+ E
.:;¿--
R= % in.
(min.)

ACCESS HOlE

CONTINUITY CONT. Pl TO
PLATE COL. WEB AND FLANGE-
CASCADE CJP DR PJP WElD

CONTPl
1(MAX) PJP ROOT FACE
(IFUSED)
SECT-A

Fig. C-3.1. Continuity plate welding.

C3.7 Quality Control and Quality Assurance

Appendix Q of the Seismic Provisions specifies the minimum requirements for
a quality assurance plan for the seismic load resisting system. It may be appro-
priate to adjust the Appendix Q provisions for a particular project based on the
qualifications of the contractor(s) involved. Contract documents are to define
the quality control (QC) and quality assurance (QA) requirements for the project.
QC includes those tasks to be performed by the contractor to ensure that their
material s and workmanship meet the project's quality requirements. Routine
welding QC items include personnel control, material control, preheat measure-
ment, monitoring of welding procedures and visual inspection.

Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Moment Frames for Seismic Applications Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Mom nt Frames for Seismic Applications
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRU ON, !Nc.
6.2-60
6.2-61

C4. BOlTING REQUIREMENTS C5. RI;DUCED BEAM

C4.1 Fastener Assemblies MOMENTCON
ASTM F1852 twist-offtype tension-control fastener assemblies are appropriate
C5.1 General
bstitutes for ASTM A325 bolts. At the time of publication of AISC 358, an
su , 'h In a reduced beam section (RBS) m ent connection, portions of the beam
ASTM standard for twist-off type tension-control fastener assembhes WIt a
strength equivalent to that of ASTM A490 bolts had not yet been adopted, but flanges are selectively trimmed in the region adjacent to the beam-to-column
was in development. Such assemblies are commonly produced and used, and are connection. In an RBS connection, yi lding and hinge formation are intended
addressed by the RCSC Specification. to occur primarily within theireduced s ction ofthe beam, and thereby limit the
moment and inelastic deformation dem ds developed at the face of the column.

C4.2 Installation Requirements , Review of the research literature indicat s that a large number of RBS connections
Section 7.2 of the Seismic Provisions designates all bolted joints to be pretensIOned have been tested under a variety of con 'tions by different investigators at insti-
joints, with the additional requirement that the jOint's, faying surf~ces meet tutions throughout the world. A listing of relevant research is presented in the
Class A conditions for slip-critical joints. Sorne connectlOn types desIgnate the bibliography section at the end of this d cument. A significant amount of testing
bolted joint to be designed as slip-critical, and others waive the faying surface on RBS connections was also conducte under the FEMAlSAC program (FEMA
requirements of the Seismic Provisions. 355D, 2000d). Consequently, a large ody of test data was available for pur-
poses of connection prequalification. R view of available test data indicates that
Quality Control and Quality Assurance RBS specimens, when designed and onstructed according to the limits and
C4.3
procedures presented herein, have dev loped interstory drift angles of at least
See Section C3.7.
0.04 radian under cyclic loading on a onsistent basis.

Tests on RBS c0!llections sho?l that yiel
reduced section of the beam and may ext
column. Peak strength of specimens is
angle of approximately 0.02 to 0.03 ra
reduces due to local and lateral torsion
typically occurs at interstory drift angles
low cycle fatigue fracture at local flang
. g is generally concentrated within the
nd, to a limited extent, to the face of the
usually achieved at an interstory drift
ian. Specimen strength then gradually
buckling of the beam. Ultimate faiIure
f approximateIy 0.05 to 0.07 radian, by
buckles within the RBS.

RBS connections have been U~sted usin single-cantilever type specimens (one
beam attached to column), and double-s ded specimens (specimen consisting of
a single column, with beams attached o both flanges). Tests have been con-
ducted primarily on bare-steel specimen , although sorne testing is also reported
on specimens with composite slabs. Test with composite slabs have shown that
the presence of the slab provides a benefi ¡al effect by helping to maintain the sta-
bility of the beam at larger interstory dri angles.

Most RBS test specimens have been te ted pseudo-statically, using a loading
protocol in which applied displacements e progressively increased, such as the
loading protocol specified in ATC-24 (A: C, 1992) and the loading protocol de-
veloped in the FEMAlSAC program an adopted in Appendix S of the AISC
Seismic Provisions. Two specimens were ested using a loading protocol intended
to represent near-source ground motio s that contain a large pulse. Several
specimens were :also tested dynamicall . The radius-cut RBS .specimens have
performed well under all of these loadi g conditions.

Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Moment Frames for Seismic Applications
Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Moment Frames for Seismic Applications
AMERICAN lNSTITU1E OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc.
AMERICAN !NsTITU1E dF STEEL Co STRUCTION, !Nc.
6.2-62 COMMENTARY
C5.2 Systems
Review of the research literature presented in the reference section at the end of
this document and surnrnarized in Section C5.l indicates that the RBS connec-
tion meets the prequalification requirements for special and intermediate mo-
ment frames in Appendix P of the AISC Seismic Provisions.
C5.3 Prequalification Limits
C5.3.1 Beam Limitations
A wide range of beam sizes has been tested with the radius-cut RBS. The small-
est beam size reported in the literature was a W530x82 (Canadian designation),
which is roughly equivalent to a W21x50. The heaviest beam reported is a
W36x300 (FEMA 355D, 2000d). Although the AISC Seismic Provisions per-
mit limited increases in beam depth and weight compared to the maximum sec-
tions tested, the prequalification limits for maximum beam depth and weight
were established based on the test data for W36x300. It was the judgment of
the CPRP that for the purposes of establishing initial prequalification limits,
adherence to the maximum tested specimen would be appropriately conserv-
ative. There is no evidence that modest deviations from the maximum tested
specimen would result in significantly different performance, and the limit
on maximum flange thickness is approximately 4 percent thicker than the
flange in a W36x300.
Both beam depth and beam span-to-depth ratio are significant in the inelastic
behavior of beam-to-column connections. For the same induced curvature, deep
beams will experience greater strains than shallower beams. Similarly, beams
with shorter span-to-depth ratio will have a sharper moment gradient across the
beam span, resulting in reduced length of the beam participating in plastic
hinging and increased strains under inelastic rotation demands. Most of the
beam-to-column assemblies that have been tested used configurations approxi-
mating beam spans of about 25 feet and beam depths varying from W30 to W36
so that beam span-to-depth ratios were typically in the range of eight to ten
(FEMA 355D, 2000d). Given the degree to which most specimens significantly
exceeded the minimum interstory drift demands, it was judged reasonable to set
the minimum span-to-depth ratio at seven for SMF and five for !MF.
Local buckling requirements for members subjected to significant inelastic rotation
are discussed in the AISC Seismic Provisions. For the purposes of calculating
the width-to-thickness ratio, it is permitted to take the flange width at the two-thirds
point of the RBS cut. This provision recognizes that the plastic hinge of the beam
forms within the length of the RBS cut where the width of the flange is less than
at the uncut section. This provision will result in a lower width-to-thickness ratio
when taken at the RBS cut compared to that at the uncut section. Many of the RBS
tests conducted as a part of the FEMNSAC program used a W30x99 beam,
which does not quite satisfy the flange width-to-thickness ratio at the uncut sec-
tion. Nevertheless, the tests were successful. For these reasons, it was judged
Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Moment Frames for Seismic Applications
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INC.
COMMENTARY
6.2-6:
reasonable to perrnit the calculation o the width-to-thickness ratio a reasonabl(
distance into the RBS cut.
In developing this prequalification, th CPRP also reviewed lateral bracing re.
quirernents for beams with RBS conn ctions. Sorne concerns were raised in th{
past that the presence of the RBS flan e cuts rnight rnake the beam more prom
to lateral torsional buckling and that s pplementallateral bracing should be pro.
vided at the RBS. The issue of lateral racing requirernents for beams with RBS
connections was subsequentIy investi ated in both experimental and analyticaJ
studies (FEMA 355C, 2000c; Yu and thers, 2000). These studies indicated tha1
for bare steel specimens (no cornposite lab), interstory drift angles of 0.04 radian
can be achieved without a supplernent lateral brace at the RBS, as long as the
normal lateral bracing requir~ for be s in SMF systems is provided, per Section
9.8 of the AISC Seismic ProVisions.
Studies also indicated that although supp ernental bracing is not required at the RBS
to achieve 0.04 radian interstory drift gles, the addition of a supplernental brace
can provide for improved performance. Tests on RBS specimens with cornposite
slabs indicated that the presence of the lab provided a sufficient stabilizing effect
that a supplemental brace al" the RBS s not likely to provide significantly irn-
proved performance (FEMA'355C, 20 Oc; Engelhardt, 1999; Trernblay, 1997).
Based on the available data, beams wi RBS connections that support a concrete
structural slab are not requirect to hay a supplernental braceat the RBS. If no
floor slab is present, then a supplernent brace is required at the RBS.
In cases where a supplernental.brace is p ovided, the brace should not be connected
within the reduced section (protected z ne). Welded or bolted brace attachrnents
in this highly strained region of the be rnay serve as fracture initiation sites.
Consequently, if a supplemental brace i provided, it should be located at or just
beyond the end of the RBS th,at is farth st frorn the face of the colurnn.
The protected zone is defined as show in Figure 5.1 and extends frorn the face
of the colurnn to the end of the RBS f est frorn the column. This definition is
based on test observations that indicate ielding typically does not extend past the
far end of the RBS cut.
C5.3.2 Column Limitations
Nearly all tests of RBS connections ha e been performed with the beam flange
welded to the column flange (Le., strong 's connections). The limited amount of
weak-axis testing has shown aéceptable rformance. In the absence of more tests,
the CPRP recornmended lirniting prequ . cation to strong-axis connections only.
The majority ofRBS specirnens were c nstructed withW14 columns. However,
a nurnber of tests have also been cond cted using deeper columns, including
W18, W27 and W36 colurnns. Testing f deep-column RBS specirnens under
the FEMNSAC program indicated that tability problerns rnay occur when RBS
connections are used with deep column (FEMA 355C, 2000c). In FEMA 350,
2000a, RBS connections were; only pre ualified for W12 and W14 columns.
Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Ste 1Moment Frames for Seismic Applications
AMERICAN INSTlTUTE OF STEEL C NSTRUCTION, !Nc.
6.2-64 COMMENTARY
The specimens in the FEMA/SAC tests conducted showed a considerable amount
of column twisting (Oilton and others, 2000). However, two of the three spec-
imens tested achieved 0.04-radian rotation, albeit with considerable strength
degradation. The third specimen just feU short of 0.04-radian rotation and failed
by fracture of the column web near the k-area. Subsequent study attributed this
fracture to column twisting.
Subsequent to the FEMAlSAC tests, an analytical study (Shen, 2002) coneluded
that boundary conditions used in these tests may not be representative of what
would be found in an actual building. Consequently, the large-column twisting
(and presumably resultant k-area column fracture) seen in the FEMAlSAC tests
would not be expected in real buildings. The study also coneluded that deep
columns should not behave substantially different from W14 columns and that
no special bracing is needed when a slab is present. This was foUowed by a more
extensive analytical and large-scale experimental investigation on RBS connections
with columns up to W36 in depth (Rieles and others, 2004). This investigation
showed that good performance can be achieved with deep columns when a com-
posite slab is present or when adequate lateral bracing is provided for the beam
and/or column in the absence of a slab. Based on a review of this recent research,
the prequalification of RBS connections is extended herein to include W36 columns.
The behavior of RBS connections with cruciform columns is expected to be sim-
ilar to that of a roUed wide-flange column because the beam flange frames into
the column flange, the principal panel zone is oriented parallel to that of the
beam and the web of the cut wide-flange column is to be welded with a CJP
gro ove weld to the continuous web one foot aboye and below the depth of the
frame girder. Given these similarities and the lack of evidence suggesting be-
havioral limit states different from those associated with rolled wide-flange
shape, the Committee determined to limit cruciform column depths to those im-
posed on wide-flange shapes.
Successful tests have also been conducted on RBS connections with built-up
box columns. The largest box column for which test data was available was 24 in.
by 24 in. Consequently, RBS connections have been prequalified for use with
built-up box columns up to 24 in. Limits on the width-thickness ratio s for the
walls of built-up box columns are specified in Section 2.3.2b(3) and were chosen
to reasonably match the box columns that have been tested.
The use of box columns participating in orthogonal moment frames, that is, with
RBS connections provided on orthogonal beams, is also prequalified. Although
no data were available for test specimens with orthogonal beams, it was the judg-
ment of the committee that this condition should provide ostensibly the same
performance as single-plane connections, since the RBS does not rely on panel
zone yielding for good performance, and the column is expected to remain es-
sentially elastic for the case of orthogonal connections.
Based on successful tests on wide-flange columns and on built-up box columns,
it was the judgment of the Cornmittee that boxed wide-flange columns would
Prequalified Connectionsfor Special and Intermediate Steel Moment Frames for Seismic Applications
.AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc.
COMMENTARY
6.2-6':
also.be expected to provideacceptab e performance. Consequently, RBS con.
nectlOns are prequalified for use wit boxed wide-flange columns. When mo.
ment co~nections are made only to th flanges of the wide-flange portion of the
b~xed wlde-flange, the column may e up to W36 in depth. When the boxed
wlde-flange column participates in o ogonal moment frames, then neither the
~epth nor the width of the column is lowed to exceed 24 in. (600 mm), apply-
mg the same limits as for built-up box s.
C5.4 Beam-Column Relations. ip Limitations
Column panel zone strength 'provided n RBS t~st specimens has varied over a
~ide range. This ineludes specimens ith very strong panel zones (no yielding
m panel zone), specimens with very w ak panel zones (essentially all yielding in
panel zone and no yielding in beam), and specimens where yielding has been
shared between the panel zone and the b . Good performance has been achieved
for alllevels of panel zone strength, in luding panel zones that are substantially
weaker than permitted in Section 9.3a of the AISC Seismic Provisions (FEMA
355C, 2000c). However, there are conc ms that very weak panel zones may pro-
mote fracture in the vicinity bf the bea -flange groove welds due to "kinking"
of. t~e column flanges at the' boundari s of the panel zone. Consequently, the
IDlmmum panel zone strength specifi d in Section 9.3a of the AISC Seismic
Provisions is rdluired for prequalified BS connections.
C5.5 Beam Flange-to-Column lange Weld Limitations
Complete joint penetration groove we ds joining the beam flange; to the col-
umn flang~s provided on the majority o RBS test specimens have been made by
the self-shlelded flux cored arc welding . rocess (FCAW-S) using electrodes with
a mínimum specified CVN tbughness Three ~ifferent electrode designations
have commonly be en used in these t sts: E71T~8, E70TG-K2, and E70T-6.
Further, for most specimens, the bptto flange backing was removed and a re-
inforcing filIet added, top flange backing as fillet welded to the column, and weld
tabs were removed at both tM top and ottom flanges.
Test specimens¡ have employed a rang of weld access-hole geometries, and
results suggest that connection perfo ance is not highly sensitive to the weld
access-hole geometry. Consequently, prequalified RBS connections do not
require specific access-hole geometry. Bowever, as a ininirpum, access holes
must conform to the requirements of F gure C-J1.2 of the AISC Specification.
Although not required, the access-hole geometry shown in Figure 11-1 of the
AISC Seismic Provisions may result in mproved reliability of the connection.
CS.6 Beam Web-tp-Column Co nection Limitations
Two types of web connection details 've been u~ed for radius-cut RBS test
specimens: a welded and a bdlted détai . In the, welded detail, the beam web is
welded directly to the column flange us ng a cpmplete joint penetration groove
weld. For the bolted detail, pretensioned .gh-strength bolts are used. Specimens
Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Ste l Moment Frames for Seismic Applications
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL C STRUCTION, !Nc•
 COMMENTARY
6.2-66 COMMENTARY 6.2-67

with both types of web connections have achieved at least ~.04-radi.an interstory flange width removed at the minimum s tion of the RBS has varied from about
drift angles, and consequentIy both types of web cOnnectlOn detall s were per- 38 to 55 percent. Flange removal for p equalified RBS connections is limited,
mitted for RBS connections in (FEMA 350, 2000a). based on judgment, to a maximum of 50 percent, to avoid excessive loss of
Previous test data (Engelhardt and others, 2000) indicate that beyond an interstory strength or stiffness. .
drift angle of 0.04 radian, specimens with bolted web connections show a higher The design procedure presented herei for prequalified RBS connections is
incidence of fracture occurring near the beam-flange groove welds, as compared similar to that presented in FEMA 350 2000a. The overall basis for sizing the
to specimens with welded web connections. Thus, while satisfac~o~ perfor- RBS cut in this design procedure is to imit the maximum beam moment that
mance is possible with a bolted web connection, previous test data mdlc~te that can develop at the face of tqe colum to the beam's actual plastic moment
a welded web is beneficial in reducing the vulnerability of RBS connectlOns to (based on expected yield stress) when e minimum section ofthe RBS is fully
fracture at the beam-flange groove welds. yielded and strain hardened. Test data i dicate that connecting the beam at the
Subsequent to the SACIFEMA testing on RBS connections, a test program face of the column in accordance with he requirements herein aHows the con-
(Lee and others, 2004) was conducted which directly compare~ RBS c~nnec­ nection to resist this level of moment w ile minimizing the chance of fracture at
tions that were nominally identical, except for the web connectlOn detall. The the beam-flange gro ove welds.
RBS specimens with welded web connections achieved 0.04-rad~an int~rstory Step 4 of the design procedute require computation of the shear force at the
drift angle, whereas as RBS specimens with bolted web connectlOns falled to center of the RBS cut. This shear force is function of the gravity load on the beam
achieve 0.04 radian. and the plastic moment capacity of the S. An example calculation is shown in
Thus, while past successful tests have been conducted on ~S conn~ctions with Figure C-5.1 for the case of a beamwi a uniformIy distributed gravity load.
bolted web connections, recent data has provided contradlctory eVldence, sug- For gravity load conditions other than uniform load, the appropriate adjust-
gesting bolted web connections may not be s~itabl~ for R~S conne~tions when ment should be made to the free-body di gram in Figure C-5.1 and to Equations
used for SMF applications. Until further data IS aVallable, lt was t~e Judgment ~f C-5.8-1 and C-5.8-2.
the CPRP to require a welded web connection for RBS connectlOns prequah-
fied for use in SMF. For IMF applications, bolted web connections are acceptable. Equations C-5.8-1 and C-5.8-2 assume at plastic hinges will form at the RBS
at each end of the beam. If the :gravity lo d on the beam is very large, the plastic
hinge at one end ,of the beam may move toward the interior portion of the beam
C5.7 Fabrication of Flange Cuts span. Ifthis is the case, the free-body d' gram in Figure C-5.1 should be mod-
Various shapes of flange cutouts are possible for RBS connections, in~luding a
ified to extend between the actual plasti hinge locations. To determine whether
constant cut, a tapered cut, and a radius cut. Experimental work has mc1uded
Equations C-5.8-l and C-5.8-2 are v id, draw the moment diagram for the
successful tests on aH of these types of RBS cuts. The radius cut avoids ab~pt
segment of the beaIll shown in Figure -5.1(b), that is, for the segment of the
changes of cross section, reducing the chances of a premature fra~ture o~cumng
beaIll between the centers of the RBS uts. If the maximum moment occurs
within the reduced section. Further, the majority of tests reported m the hteratu~e
at the ends of the span, then Equations C-5.8-1 and C-5.8-2 are valido Jf the
used radius-cut RBS sections. Consequently, only the radius-cut RBS shape IS
maximum moment occurs within the s an and exceeds Mpe of the beam (see
prequalified. Equation 5-8), then the modification d scribed aboye will be needed.
An issue in the fabrication of RBS connections is the required surface fin~sh and
smoothness of the RBS flange cuts. No research data was found that specIf'ically 2M wL'
addressed this issue. Consequently, finish requirements for RBS cuts were cho- V =---.l?!.... (C-5.8-1)
RES L' 2
sen based on judgment and are consistent with those specified in (FEMA 350,
2000a). 2M wL'
V' =---.l?!.... (C-5.8-2)
RBS L' 2
C5.S Design Procedure . .
Dimensions of the RBS cuts for the test specimens reported m the hterature vary
over a fairly small range. The distance from the face of the column to the start of
the RBS cut (designated as "a" in Figure 5.1) ranged from 50 to 75 percent ofthe
beam-flange width. The length of the cuts (designated as "b" in Figure 5.1) has
varied from approximately 75 to 85 percent of the beam depth. Tbe amount of

Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Moment Frames for Seismic Applications Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Stee Moment Frames for Seismic Applications
AMERICAN lNSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INC. AMERICAN lNSTITUTE OF SlEEL Co STRUCTION, INC.

L.: = distance between centers of RBS cuts
f---------.---------------------.-------
L = distance between column centerlines
(a) Beam with RBS cuts and uniform gravity load
~ RBS w = uniform beam gravity load
+ + ~ + ¡ + + + ¡ + + + ~ t + + + + t
1+ + + +
~I·~--------------------------~
L.: = distance between centers of RBS cuts
(b) Free-body diagram of beam between RBS cuts and calculation of shear at RBS
Fig. C-5.l. Example calculation of shear at center of RBS cuts.
Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Moment Frames for Seismic Applications
AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF SlEEL CONsTRuenoN, !Nc.
COMMENTARY 6.2-69
C6. BOlTED UNSTIFFENED AND STIFFENED EXTENDED
END-PLATE MOME T CONNECTIONS
C6.1 General
The three extended end-plate moment c nfigurations currently addressed in this
chapter are the most commonly used end plate connection configurations in steel
moment frames. AISC Design Guide IV, . 4, 2nd Edition (Murray and Sumner,
2003) provides background, design proc ures, and complete design examples for
the three configurations. The Guide w s developed before this Standard was
written, and there are small differences between the design procedures in the
Guide and in Section C6.1O. The prim difference is the resistance factor, $-
factor, values. The Standard supersedes e Design Guide in all instances.
Prequalification test results for the thre extended end-plate moment connec-
tions are found i~ FEMA, 19Q7; Meng, 1996; Meng and Murray, 1997; Ryan
and Murray, 1999'; Sumner and bthers, 2 Oa; Sumner and others, 20oob; Sumner
and Murray, 2001; Sumner and Murray, 002. Results of similar testing but not
used for prequalification are found in A ey and others, 1997; Adey and others,
~ RBS 1998; Adey and others, 2000; Castellani d others, 1998; Coons, 1999; Ghobarah
T-r-J
+ +
and others, 1990; Ghobarah andothers, 1992; Johnstone and Walpole, 1981;
Korol and others, 1990; Popovand Tsai, 1989; Tsai and Popov, 1990.
I ~\
1 ) The intent of the design procedure in Sec .on 6.10 is to provide an end-plate mo-
+~ ment connection with sufficient strength t develop the strength of the connected
V,q'BSMpr flexural member. The connection does n t provide any contribution to inelastic
rotation. AlI inelastic deformation for end-plate connection is achieved by
beam yielding andJor column panel zone deformation.
The design procedure in Section 6.10 is b sed on Borgsmiller and Murray, 1995,
and is similar to the "thick plate'! proced in AlSC Design Guide No. 16 (Murray
and Shoemaker, 2002). The procedure is b icaliy the same as that in FEMA 350,
2000a, but with much c1arification. Appli able provisions in FEMA 353, 2000b
are incorporated into the procedure as w ll.
C6.2 Systems
The three extended end-plate moment c nnections in Figure 6.1 are prequali-
fied for use in IMF and SMF systems, exc pt in SMF systems where the beam is
in direct contact with concrete structural s abs. The exception applies only when
shear studs are used to attach the concrete slab to the connected beam and is be-
cause of the lack of test data to date. A1l the prequalification testing has been
performed with bare steel specimens, exc t for one test reported in Sumner and
Murray, 2000. In this test, headed studs ere installed from near the end-plate
moment connection to the end of the be , and the concrete'was in contact
with the column flanges and web. The lo er bolts failed prematurely by tension
rupture because of the increase in the dis ance from the neutral axis due to the
presence of the composite slab.
Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel oment Frames for Seismic Applications
AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF SlEEL CON TRUenON, !NC.
6.2-70 COMMENTARY COMMENTARY
6.2-71

C6.3 Prequalification Limits C6.8 Bolts

Theparametric limitations in Table 6.1 were determined from reported test data
in the prequalification references. OnIy connections that are within these limits
are prequalified.
Beams may be either hot-rolled or built-up. If built-up sections are used, the
web-to-flange weld may be a one-sided fillet weld, except within the beam,
depth, or three times the flange width of the face of the end-plate. Within this
length, fillet welds on both sides are required of a size at least 1/4 in. (6 mm)
C6.9
for constructability or 0.75 times the beam-flange web thickness to develop the
web material, whichever is greater. Complete joint penetration (CJP) groove
welds may be used inlieu of fillet welds.
For tapered members, the depth of the beam at the connection is used to determine
the limiting span-to-depth ratio.
C6.4 Beam Limitations
The beam size limitations in Table 6.1 are directly related to connection testing.
Since many of the tested beam sections were built-up members, the limitations
are in cross-section dimensions instead of rolled-beam designations as used
in Section 5 for RBS. There is no evidence that modest deviations from these
dimensions will result in significantly difference performance.
Prequalification tests have been conduct d with both pretensioned ASTM A325
and A490 bolts. Bolt length should be uch that at least two complete threads
are between the unthreaded portion of th shank and the face of the nut after the
bolt is pretension~d. Slip-critical connec ·on provisions are not required for end-
plate moment connections.
Connection Detailing
Maximum gage, that is, the horizontal dis ce between outer bolt columns, is lim-
ited to the width of the beam flange to e sure a stiff load path. Monotonic tests
have shown that the stiffness and strength of an end-plate moment connection are
decreased when the bolt gage is wider the beam flange.
Inner bolt pitch, the distance between the ace of the beam flange and the first row
of inside or outside bolts, must be suffic· nt to allow bolt tightening. The mini-
mum pitch values specified have been D und to be satisfactory. An increase in
pitch distance can significantly increase e required end-plate thickness.
The end-plate can be wider thanthe beam ange, but the width used in design cal-
culations is limited to the beam flange w· th plus 1 in. (25 mm). This limitation
is based on unpublished results of monot nie tests of end-plate connections.

Similar to RBS testing, most of the tested beam-column assemblies had config-
urations approximating beam span-to-depth ratios in the range of eight to ten.
However, it was judged reasonable to set the minimum span-to-depth ratio at
seven for SMF and five for IMF.
The protected zone, the distance from the face of the end-plate for unstiffened, or
from the end of the stiffener for stiffened, which is specified as the smaller of the
beam depth and three times the flange width, is based on test observations.
The requirements for the lengfu of be -flange-to-end-plate stiffeners are es-
tablished to ensure a smooth 16ad path. he 30° angle is the same as used for
determining the Whitmore sec~on width in other types of connections. The re-
quired l-in. (25-mm) land is needed to en ure the quality of the vertical and hor-
izontal weld terminations. \
Tests have shown Ithat the use of finger sh ms between the end-plate and the col-
umn flange do not affect the performance of the connection (Sumner and others,
2000a).

C6.5 Column Limitations Design procedures are not available for co ections of beams witb composite ac-
Extended moment end-plate connections may be used only with roUed or built- tion at an end-plate moment connection. herefore, careful composite slab de-
up I-shaped sections and must be flange connected. There are no other specific tailing is necessaIJ:' to prevent composite ac ·on, which may increase tension forces
column requirements for extended end-plate moment connections. in the lower bolt~. Welded stud shear co nectors are not permitted within 1112
times the beam depth, and compressible aterial is required between the con-
crete slab and the column face (Sumner an Murray, 2002; Yang arid others, 2003).
C6.6 Beam-Column Relationship Limitations
There are no specific beam-to-column relationship limitations for extended end- Cyclic testing hasshown that use of weld ccess holes can cause premature frac-
plate moment connections. ture of the beam flange at end~plate mo ent connections (Meng and Murray,
1997). Short to l~ng weld access holes ere investigated with similar results.
C6.7 Continuity Plates Therefore, weld access holes are not permi ed for end-plate moment connections.
Continuity plate design must conform to the requirements of Section 2.4.4. The Strain gage measurements have shown th the web plate material in the vicinity
design procedure in Section 6.10 contains provisions specific to end-plate moment of the inside tension bolts genera1ly reache the yield strain (Murray and Kukreti,
connections, and the procedure is discussed generally in AISC Design Guide 1988). ConsequenUy, it is required that the web-to-end-plate weld(s) in the viein-
No. 13 (Carter, 1999). ity of the inside bolts be sufficient to dev op the strength of the beam web.

Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Moment Frames for Seismic Applications Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel oment Frames for Seismic Applications
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCI10N, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CON TRUenON, INC.
6.2-72 COMMENTARY
6.2-73

The beam-flange-to-end-plate and stiffener weld requirements equal or exceed the

welding that was used to prequalify the three extended end-plate moment con- REFERENCES
nections. Since weld access holes are not permitted, the beam-flange-to-end-
plate weld at the beam web is necessarily a partial-joint-penetration (pJP) groove The following references have been review~d as a b sis for the prequalification of the con-
weld. The prequalification testing has shown that theseconditions are not detri- nections described in this StaiJ.dard. Although sorne eferences are not specifically cited in
mental to the performance of the connection. this Standard, they have bee~ reviewed by.: the AIS Connection Prequalification Review
Panel and are listed here to provide an arclÍival reco d of the basis for this Standard in ac-
C6.10 Design Procedure cordance with the requiremenis of Appendix P of the ISC Seismic Provisions.

The design procedure in this section, with sorne modification, was used to design
the prequalification test specimens. The procedure is very similar to that in the
AISC Design Guide No. 4, 2nd Edition (Murray and Sumner, 2003) except that dif-
ferent resistance factors are used. Example calculations are found in the Design
AISC (2005a), AISC/ANSI 360-05, Specificationfo Structural Steel Buildings, American
Guide. Column stiffening example calculations are also found in the AISC Design Institute of Steel Construction, lnc., Chicago, ll.,.
Guide No. 13 (Carter, 1999).
AISC (2005b), AISC/ANSI 341-05, Seismic Provisions or Structural Steel Buildings, American
Institute of Steel Construction, Inc., Chicago, ll.,.

ATC (1992), Guidelines for Cyclic Seismic Tésting of e mponents of Steel Structures, ATC-24,
Applied Technology Council, Redwood G:ity, CA

AWS (2004), AWS/ANSI 01.1, Structural Welding Co e - Steel, American Welding Society,
Miami, FL.

Barsom, J. and Korvink, S. (1998), "Effects of Stra n Hardenening and Strain Aging on
the K-Region of Structural Shapes," Report No. ACIBD-98/02, SAC Joint Venture,
Sacramento, CA

Carter, c.J. (1999), "Stiffening ofWide-Flange Colu s at Moment Connecti.ons: Wind and
Seismic Applications," AISC Design,Guide No. 13, erican Institute of Steel Construction,
Chicago, ll.,.

Castellani, A, Castiglioni, C.A., Chesi, C., and Plu . r, A (1998), "A European Research
Program on the Cyclic Behaviour ofWelded Beam Column Connections," Proceedings
of the NEHRP Conferenceand Workshqp on Res arch on the Northridge, California
Earthquake of January 17,1994, Vol. nI·B, pp. 51 517, National Earthquake Hazards
Reduction Program, Washirigton, DC.

Chi, W.M., Deierlein, G. and Tngraffea, A' (1997),' inite Element Fracture Mechanics
Investigation ofWelded Beam-Column COlinections," eport No. SAClBD-97/05, SAC Joint
Venture, Sacramento, CA

FEMA 302 (1997), NEHRP Recommended Provisio sfor Seismic Regulationsfor New
Buildings and Other Structures, FEMA 302, Part - Provisions, Federal Emergency
Management Ageilcy, Washington, OC.

FEMA 350 (2000), Recommended Seismic Design C iteria for New Steel Moment-Frame
Buildings, Federal Emergency ManagementAgenc ,Washington, OC.

Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Moment Frames for Seismic Applications
AMERICAN !NS1TfUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUcrrON, INC. Prequalified Connections for Special and Interme(iiate Steel oment Frames for Seismic Applications
AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CONS uenON, !Nc.
6.2-82

INDEX
Base shear ......................... '..... " ......................... 1-6
Beam design
Braced frame (R = 3) ............. '. . . . . .. . ....................... 2-27
EccentricalIy braced frame .................................. 3-120, 6.1-53
Intennediate rnornent frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ....................... 4-38
Ordinary concentrically braced frarne .................................. 3-8
Ordinary rnornent frarne ........................................... 4-13
SpeciaI concentricalIy braced frame .. l ............................... 3-46
SpeciaI rnornent frame ............ l ............................... 4-53
BoItedjoints ............. ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ..................... 6.1-21
Brace design
Braced frame (R = 3) .............................................. 2-3
EccentricalIy braced frame ......... , .............................. 3-125
Ordinary concentricalIy braced frame .................................. 3-3
Special concentricalIy braced frarne
Pipe . ..................................................... 3-38
W-Shape ......... '...........: ............................... 3-42
Braced frame systerns
R = 3 systerns ......... ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ....................... 2-2
R > 3 systerns ....................: . . . . . .. . ....................... 3-1
Buckling-restrained braced frame .'. . . . . .. . ................ 5-23, 6.1-55
EccentricalIy braced frame ............. . ..................... 3-107
Ordinary concentrically braced frame . . . .. . ....................... 3-2
Special concentricalIy braced frame ...... . ...................... 3-35
Bracing connection ,
Braced frame (R = 3) ... ~ ..... " . . .. . . . . .. . ....................... 2-6
EccentricalIy braced frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ......... 3-134,3-138,6.1-54
Ordinary concentrically braced frame . . . . . . . .. . ........... 3-12,3-25,6.1-49
Special concentricalIy braced frame ...... . . .. . ...... 3-52, 3-65, 3-79, 6.1-46
Buckling-restrained braced frarne ................................. 5-23, 6.1-55
Adjusted brace strength .......................................... 6.1-56
Beams and coIurnns ....................................... '..... 6.1 ~58
Bracing connections ......... ; .................................. 6.1-57
Bracing rnernbers .............................................. 6.1-55
Buckling-restráining systern ................ . .................... 6.1-55
Gusset pIates .......... " . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .................... 6.1-57
Protected zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .................... 6.1-58
Qualifying cyclic testing ............ . . . . . .. . .................... 6.1-84
Required strength ........................ . .................... 6.1-57
SpeciaI requirernents reIated to bracing ~onfigurati n ................... 6.1-57
Splices .............. '. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .................... 6.1-58
Steel core .............................. . .................... 6.1-55
Testing ................................ . .................... 6.1-56
Width-thickness lirnitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .................... 6.1-58
Prequalijied Connections for Special and lntermediate Steel Moment Frames for Seismic Applications
AMERICAN !NSTITUI'E OF STEEL CONSTRUCTlON, !NC. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONST UCTION, !Nc.
 2
Chord (diaphragm) design .............................................. 5-2
C1assification of sections for local buckling ......................... 1-13,6.1-24
Collector (diaphragm) design ........................................... 5-2
Column design .................................................... 6.1-25
Braced frame (R = 3) .............................................. 2-5
Eccentrically braced frame ........................................ 3-129
Intermediate moment frame ........................................ 4-31
Ordinary concentrically braced frame .................................. 3-6
OrdiIlary moment frame ............................................ 4-7
Moment Frame (R = 3) ........................................... 2-20
Special concentrical1y braced frame .................................. 3-43
$pecia1 moment frame ............................................ 4-45
Co1umn splice design ··· ......................... 6.1-27,6.1-36, 6.1-38, 6.1-42
Column sp1ice in SCBE lateral force resisting system .............. 3-161,6.1-47
Column splice in SMF lateral force resisting system ............... 4-73,6.1-28
Gravity column splice in moment frame building .................. 4-68, 6.1-27
Compact ......................................................... 6.1-24
Seismically compact .................................. 1-13, 1-19,6.1-24
Composite structural steel and reinforced concrete bui1dings ................. 6.1-99
Composite connections ......................................... 6.1-108
Composite eccentrically braced frames (C-EBF) ...................... 6.1-114
Composite intermediate moment frames (C-IMF) ..................... 6.1-112
Composite members ........................................... 6.1-103
Composite beams .......................................... 6.1-103
Composite floor and roof slabs ................................ 6.1-103
Encased composite columns .................................. 6.1-103
Composite ordinary braced frames (C-OBF) ......................... 6.1-114
Composite ordinary moment frames (C-OMF) ....................... 6.1-113
Composite partially restrained (PR) moment frames (C-PRMF) .......... 6.1-110
Composite special concentrically braced frames (C-CBF) ............... 6.1-113
Composite special moment frames (C-SMF) ......................... 6.1-110
Composite steel pIate shear walIs (C-SPW) .......................... 6.1-118
Connection design ............................................. 6.1-108
Ordinary reinforced concrete shear walls composite with
steel elements (C-ORCW) ...................................... 6.1-115
Special reinforced concrete shear walls composite with
steeI elements (C-SRCW) ...................................... 6.1-117
Connection design
Bolted joints; see Bolted joints
Braced frame (R = 3) .............................................. 2-6
Column splice ..................... 3-161,4-68,4-73,6.1-27,6.1-28,6.1-47
Collector (diaphragm) connection ................................... 5-10
Eccentrically braced frame .................................. 3-134,3-138
Moment frame (R = 3) ............................................ 2-30
Ordinary concentrically braced frame ............................ 3-12, 3-25
Ordinary moment frame ........................................... 4-16
Special concentrically braced frame ........................ 3-52, 3-65, 3-79
AMERICAN !NSTlTUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc.
~.--------------------------~-------------------------
3
Special moment frame ............................................ 4-59
Welded joints; see Welded joints
Continuity plates and stiffeners ........................................ 6.1-24
Damping systems; see Engineered damping systems
Deflection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Design earthquake ....... " . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Diaphragm design .................................................... 5-2
Drift limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ......... 1-12; see also Story drift
Earthquake ground motion ........... ~ ................................. 1-2
Eccentrically braced frame (EBF) .......: ......................... 3-107,6.1-50
Beam outside link .... ~ . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . .. . ................ 3-120,6.1-53
Beam-to-column connections ............. . ...................... 6.1-54
Brace sections .................................................. 1-19
Brace design .................................................. 3-125
Bracing connections ................................. 3-134,3-138,6.1-54
Column design ....................... " ....................... 3-129
Demand critical weIds ........................................... 6.1-55
Diagonal brace ................. T . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ~ 3-125, 6.1-53
Diagonal brace and beam outside of lirik ............................. 6.1-53
Lateral bracing of link ........................................... 6.1-53
Link rotation angle ............................................. 6.1-51
Link stiffeners ................................................. 6.1-51
Link design ........................... . .......... 3-112,3-166,6.1-50
Link-to-brace connections ................ . ...................... 3-134
Link-to-column connections ...................................... 6.1-52
Protected zone ................................................. 6.1-54
Required strength of columns ..................................... 6.1-54
Shear strength .................. ~ ..... " ...................... 6.1-50
Story drift .................................................... 3-111
End-plate moment connection ................. . ..................... 6.2-23
Engineered damping systems ........................................... 5-26
Equivalent lateral force method . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Erection drawings . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ..................... 6.1-18
Gusset plate design . . . . . . . . •. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 1-16; see also Bracing connection
H-piles ................................. " ...................... 6.1-29
Battered H-piles ........................ . ..................... 6.1-29
Tension in H-Piles .............................................. 6.1-29
Heavy section CVN requirements ...................................... 6.1-20
High-seismic design (R> 3) ............................ 1-8, Part 3, Part 4, Part 5
Inspection
Inspection of bolting ............................................ 6.1-72
Nondestructive testing (NDT) of welds .............................. 6.1-70
Other inspections .............................................. 6.1-73
Visual welding inspection ......................................... 6.1-68
Intermediate moment frame (IMF) ................................ 4-28,6.1-36
Beam and column limitations ...................................... 6.1-37
Beam design ................................................... 4-38
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONS UCTION, !Nc.
 4
5

Beam flanges ................................................. 6.1-37

Ordinary moment frame (OMF) .............. . ................... 4-2,6.1-38
Beam-to-column connections ..................................... 6.1-36
Beam design .................................................... 4-13
Column splices ................................................ 6.1-38
Beam-to-column connections . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .................. 4-16,6.1-39
Column design .................................................. 4-31
Beam and coIumn limitations ..................................... 6.1-41
Column-beam moment ratio ...................................... 6.1-38
Continuity pIates ............................................... 6.1-41
Continuity plates ............................................... 6.1-38
CoIumn design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ......................... 4-7
Lateral bracing at beam-to-column connections ........................ 6.1-38
CoIumn splices ........ ~ ....................................... 6.1-42
Lateral bracing of beams ......................................... 6.1-38
CoIumn-beam moment ratio ...................................... 6.1-42
Panel zone ofbeam-to-column connections ........................... 6.1-37
Lateral bracing at beam-to-coIumn connections ........................ 6.1-42
Protectedzone ....... ; ......................................... 6.1-37
Lateral bracing ofbeams .................................. ~ ...... 6.1-42
Story drift and stability check ....................................... 4-28
Panel zone of beam-to-coIumn connections ........................... 6.1-41
Welds ....................................................... 6.1-37
Requirements for FR mo'ment connections ........................... 6.1-39
Width-thickness limitations ....................................... 6.1-37
Requirements for PR moment connections ........................... 6.1-41
Link design (EBF) ............................................ 3-112, 3-166
Story drift and stability check ....................................... 4-4
Load combinations ............................................ 1-10,6.1-16
WeIds ....................................................... 6.1-41
Local buck1ing ............................................... 1-13,6.1-24
Overstrength factor ..................; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10, 6.1-16
Pipe ..................................................... 1-15, 1-34
Period ................. i• • • • • • • • • • ~ • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 1-2
Rectangular HSS ........................................... 1-14, 1-27
Prequalified connection standard .............. . ....................... 6.2-1
Round HSS ............................................... 1-15, 1-32
Prequalification ........................... . ...................... 6.1-62
Single angles .............................................. 1-14, 1-26
Beam-to-column connections ................................ 6.1-62, 6.2-1
Square HSS ............................................... 1-14, 1-31
Link-to-coIumn connections .............. . ...................... 6.1-62
W-Shapes ................................................. 1-13, 1-19 Protected zone ............................ ....................... 6.1-23
Low-seismic design (R = 3) ....................................... 1-7, Part 2 Qualification
Material specifications .............................................. 6.1-18
Buck1ing restrained braced frames . . . . . . . . .. . ...................... 6.1-84
Maximum considered earthquake ........................................ 1-4
Beam-to-column connections .............. . ...................... 6.1-76
, Maximum force delivered by system ..................................... 5-21
Link-to-column connections .............. . ...................... 6.1-76
Moment connections
Quality assurance ................... ~ ........................ 6.1-60, 6.1-66
Intermediate moment frame ............................. 4-24, 4-28, 6.1-36
Reduced beam section (RBS) moment connection ......................... 6.2-15
Moment frame (R = 3) ............................................ 2-18
Redundancy factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ........................ 1-10
Ordinary moment frame ..................................... 4-2,6.1-39
Response modification coefficient . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .................. 1-6,6.1-15
Prequalified ............................................. 6.1-62, 6.2-1
Response spectra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ........................ 1-2
Qualification of ............................................... 6.1-76 R-factor; see Response modification coefficient
Special moment frame ...................................... 4-42, 6.1-29
Seismic design category ..................... . ........................ 1-5
Moment frame systems
Seismic design coefficients ........................................... 6.1-74
R = 3 systems ................................................... 2-18
Seismic Provisions for StructuraI SteeI Buildings ........................... 6.1-1
R> 3 systems .................................................... 4-1
Seismic use group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ......................... 1-4
Intermediate moment frame .............................. 4-24,6.1-36
Seismically compact ...................................... 1-13, 1-19,6.1-24
Ordinary moment frame .................................. 4-2,6.1-38
Shop drawings .................................................... 6.1-17
Special moment frame .................................. 4-24, 6.1-29
Special concentrical1y braced frame (SCBF) ......................... 3-35,6.1-44
Ordinary concentrical1y braced frame (OCBF) ........................ 3-2, 6.1-48
Beam design ................................................... 3-46
Bracing members ........................................... 3-3, 6.1-48 Brace design
Special bracing configuration requirements ........................... 6.1-48
Pipe ....................................................... 3-38
Bracing connections ................................... 3-12,3-25,6.1-49
W-Shape ................................................... 3-42
Beam design .................................................... 3-8
Built-up members ....................... . ... ; ................. 6.1-46
Column design ................................................... 3-6
Column design .................................................. 3-43
K-type bracing ................................................ 6.1-49
Column splices .......................................... 3-161, 6.1-27
V-type and inverted V-type bracing ................................. 6.1-50
Connection design ..................................... 3-52,3-65,3-79
AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCflON, !Nc.
AMERICAN !NsTITUTE OF STEEL CON RUCTION, !Nc.
6 7

K-Type bracing ................................................ 6.1-47 Steel plate shear walls; see Special plate shear wall
Lateral force distribution ......................................... 6.1-45 Stiffeners; see Continuity plates and stiffeners
Members ................................. '.................... 6.1-45 Story drift ..............' ................... 1-11,2-19,3-111,4-4,4-28,4-42
Required compressive strength .................................... 6.1-47 Terminology ......................................................... 1-2
Required flexural strength ........................................ 6.1-46 Weld access holes ........................ . .................... 1-13, 1-18
Required strength .............................................. 6.1-45 Welded Joints ..................................................... 6.1-22
Required strength of bracing connections ............................ 6.1-46 Demand critical welds .......... '.' ............................... 6.1-22
Required tensile strength ........... , ............................. 6.1-46 General requirements ........... ' ................................ 6.1-90
Slendemess ...................... ' ............................. 6.1-45 Welding provisions ....................... . ................. 6.1-90, 6.2-11
Seismically compact sections ................................... 1-13, 1-19 Demand critical welds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ....................... 6.1-22
Special bracing configuration requirements ........................... 6.1-47 Nondestructive testing procedures . . . . . . . .. . ....................... 6.1-92
V-type and inverted V-type bracing .....' ............................ 6.1-47 Notch toughness verification test. . . . . . . . .. . ....................... 6.1-20
Width-thickness limitations ....................................... 6.1-45 Personnel ........................... . ....................... 6.1-91
Special moment frame (SMF) ............................... 4-24, 4-42, 6.1-29 Shop drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ....................... 6.1-90
Beam and column limitations ..................................... 6.1-32 Structural design drawings and specifications ........................ 6.1-90
Beam design ................................................... 4-53
Beam flanges ................................................. 6.1-32
Beam-to-column connections ..................................... 6.1-29
Brace connections .............................................. 6.1-34
Column design .................................................. 4-45
Column splices ..................................... 4-73, 6.1-27, 6.1-36
Column-beam moment ratio ...................................... 6.1-33
Conformance demonstration ...................................... 6.1-30
Continuity plates ............................................... 6.1-32
Lateral bracing at beam-to-column connections ........................ 6.1-34
Lateral bracing ofbeams ......................................... 6.1-34
Panel zone doubler plates ........................................ 6.1-32
Panel zone of beam-to-column connections ........................... 6.1-31
Panel zone thickness ............................................ 6.1-32
Protected zones ................................................ 6.1-31
Seismically compact sections .................................. 1-13, 1-19
Shear strength ................................................. 6.1-31
Unbraced connections ........................................... 6.1-35
Welds ....................................................... 6.1-31
Width-thickness limitations ....................................... 6.1-32
Special plate shear walls ........................................ 5-24, 6.1-58
Connections of webs to boundary elements ........................... 6.1-59
Horizontal and vertical boundary elements ........................... 6.1-59
HBE-to-VBE connections ........................................ 6.1-60
Openings in webs .............................................. 6.1-59
Special truss moment frame .......................................... 6.1-42
Lateral bracing ................................................ 6.1-44
Special segment ............................................... 6.1-42
Strength of non-special segment members ............................ 6.1-43
Strength of special segment members ............................... 6.1-43
Width-thickness limitations ....................................... 6.1-44
Stability coefficient ..............................'. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

AMERICAN !NSTITUTE ÓF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, !Nc. AMERICAN !NSTITUTE OF STEEL C NSTRUCTION, !Nc.